Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Contract 35724
CITY SECRETARYr rI CONTRACT NO. FoRT WoRTH City of Fort Worth, Texas Water Department McCart Avenue PUMP STATION and STORAGE TANK l� �* RANDY L. BUSH : A�: ...908.'.�. !C fit Prepared by, v l�]'�AIL ROD OF MWH MONTGOMERYWAtSON HARZA * f° May 2007 � � YEN. # DAFF L j(,OM DORIGINALc s i TABLE OF CONTENTS Nftokle 1. Part A - Detailed Notice to Bidders - Special Instructions to Bidders 2. Part B - Proposal City of Fort Worth Minority/Women Business Enterprise Policy Subcontractors/Suppliers Utilization Form — Attachment 1 A - Prime Contractor Waiver Form —Attachment 1 B - Good Faith Effort Form — Attachment 1 C Joint Venture Eligibility Form 3. Part C - General Conditions & Supplementary Conditions 4. Part D - Special Conditions 5. Part DA - Additional Special Conditions (Not Used) 6. Part E - Material and Construction Specifications 7. Contractor Compliance with Workers Compensation Law 8. Part F: Bonds and Insurance **mole - Certificate of Insurance — Attach Standard ACORD Form - Performance Bond - Payment Bond - Maintenance Bond 9. Part G - Contract 10. Appendix A - Geotechnical Investigation Report by TERRA-MAR, Inc. (Reference Only) 11. Appendix B — HSQ TECHNOLOGY McCart Pump Station RTU Price Quotation Letter PART A NOTICE TO BIDDERS SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (WATER DEPARTMENT) a.. City of Fort Worth McCart Avenue Pump Station&Storage Tank DETAILED NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed Proposals for the Following: McCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK Addressed to Mr.Charles R.Boswell,City Manager of the City of Fort Worth,Texas,will be received at office of the Purchasing Manager,Lower Level,Municipal Office Building, 1000 Throckmorton Street, Fort Worth,Texas 76102,until 1:30 P.M.,Thursday,June 21,2007. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at 2:00 P.M the same day,in the Fort Worth Council Chambers. Plans,Specifications and Contract Documents have been prepared by MWH Americas,Inc., 7557 Rambler Road, Suite 1050,Dallas,Texas 75231 (214) 360-9929. Plans,Specifications and Contract Documents for this project may be obtained at the Water Department,2nd Floor,Fort Worth City Hall, 1000 Throckmorton Street,Fort Worth,Texas 76102. One set of documents will be provided at no cost to prospective bidders. General Contract Documents and General Specifications for Water Department projects, dated January 1, 1978, with the latest revisions, also compromise a part of the Contract Documents for this project and may be obtained by paying a non-refundable fee of $50.00 for each set, at the office of Water Department, Municipal Office Building, 1000 Throckmorton Street,Fort Worth,Texas. AIt bidders must comply with Provisions 5159a of"Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes"of the State of Texas with respect to the payment and prevailing wage rates and City Ordinance No. 7278,as amended by City Ordinance No.7400,prohibiting discrimination in employment practices. Bid security is required in accordance with Paragraph 2 of the Special Instructions to Bidders. The project includes: Site preparation and installation of the McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank. Associated facilities will include a 33 million gallon/day(MGD)potable water pump station,fully enclosed in an above ground concrete building, and 5-million gallon (MG) welded steel ground storage tank. Installation will include appurtenances such as associated piping,electrical,controls and instrumentation, valves and valve boxes, paving, security measures, and other equipment and improvements as noted in the contract documents. The work shall included the over-excavation of the existing soils and replacement with selected backfill for the construction of the pump station and ground storage tank to the elevation and depth indicated in the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and waive any and/or all formalities. AWARD OF CONTRACT:No bid may be withdrawn until the expiration of ninety(90)days after the opening of bids, but in no case will the award be made until all necessary investigations are made as to the responsibility of the bidder to whom it is proposed to award the Contract. Bidders are responsible for obtaining all addenda to the contract documents and acknowledging receipt of the addenda by initialing the appropriate spaces on the proposal form.Bids that do not acknowledge receipt of all addenda may be rejected as being non-responsive. Information regarding the status of addenda may be obtained by contacting Peter Fu,P.E.at 817-392-8438 or Chris Harder,P.E.at 817-871-8293 with the City of Fort Worth,Water Department. A.1-1 City of Fort Worth McCart Avenue Pump Station&Storage Tank Bidders shall not separate,detach or remove any portion,segment or sheets from the contract document at any time. Bidders must complete the proposal section(s)and submit the complete specifications book or face rejection of the bid as non-responsive. M/WBE: In accordance with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No. 15530,the City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts. A copy of the Ordinance can be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. In order for the bidder to be considered responsive,the AFFIDAVIT STATEMENT included with these bid documents must be completed and submitted with the bid. Failure to submit the MBE/WBE UTILIZATION FORM SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER UTILIZATION FORM,PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM, GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM and JOINT VENTURE FORM,as appropriate. The Documentation must be received by the managing department no later than 5:00 p.m.,five(5)City business days after the bid opening date. The bidder shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was made. Failure to comply shall render the bid non-responsive. The Managing Department for this project is the Fort Worth Water Department. For additional information,contact Peter Fu,P.E.at 817-392-8438 or Chris Harder,P.E.at 817-871-8293. For information regarding contract document availability,contact Carmen Olivio at 817-392-8240. CHARLES R.BOSWELL Marty Hendrix CITY MANAGER CITY SECRETARY Advertising Dates: `~ May 24,2007 May 31,2007 A.1-2 e) The City will attempt to notify prospective bidders whose qualifications (financial or experience) are not deemed to be appropriate to the nature and/or magnitude of the project on which bids are to be received.Failure to notify shall not be a wavier of any necessary pre-qualification. For additional information contact Peter Fu,P.E.,Fort Worth Water Department at(817)392-8438. Pre-qualification submittal should be sent to: Peter Fu,P.E. Fort Worth Water Department 1000 Throckmorton Fort Worth,TX 76102 2. PREBID CONFERENCE: A prebid conference will be held by the OWNER and ENGINEER to answer questions from contractors who are considering to submit a bid. The date and time of this conference will be announced during advertising. 3. BID SECURITY: A cashier's check, or an acceptable bidder's bond, payable to the City of Fort Worth,in the amount of not less than five(5%)percent of the largest possible total of the bid submitted must accompany the bid, and is subject to forfeiture in the event the successful bidder fails to execute the Contract Documents within ten(10)days after the contract has been awarded.To be an acceptable surety on the bid bond,the surety must be licensed to do business in the State of Texas. In addition,the surety must (1) hold a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of$100,000 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the State of Texas and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the Untied States Secretary of the Treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law. Satisfactory proof of any such reinsurance shall be provided to the City upon request. The City, in its sole discretion,will determine the adequacy of the proof required herein. 4. BONDS: A performance bond, a payment bond, and a maintenance bond each for one hundred (100%)percent of the contract price will be required.Reference C3-3.7. 5. WAGE RATES: Not less that the prevailing wage rates established by the City of Fort Worth,Texas, and as set forth in the Contract Documents. must be paid on this project. 6. AMBIGUITY: In the case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating prices in the Proposal,the City reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous construction thereof to the City or to reject the Proposal. 7. BIDDER LICENSE: Prior to the award of contract to an out-of-state bidder, the bidder shall be licensed to do business in the State of Texas.For licensing procedures, contact the Texas Secretary of State Offices(Telephone Number 1-512-463-5555 or 1-900-263-0060) 8. NONRESIDENT BIDDERS: Pursuant to Article 601g,Texas Revised Civil Statues,the City of Fort Worth will not award this contract to a nonresident bidder unless the nonresident's bid is lower that the lowest bid submitted by a Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a Texas resident would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder to obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident`s principal place of business is located. "Nonresident bidder"means a bidder whose principal place of business is not in this state,but excludes a contractor whose ultimate parent company or majority owner has a place of business in the State of Texas. This provision does not apply if this contract involves federal funds. The appropriate blanks of the Proposal must be filled out by all nonresident bidders in order for the bid to meet specifications.The failure of a nonresident contractor to do so will automatically disqualify that bidder. A.2-2 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (August 4,2003) 1. PREQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. All contractors submitting bids,are required to be pre- qualified by the Fort Worth Water Department prior to submitting bids. This pre-qualification process will establish a bid limit based on technical evaluation and financial analysis of the contractor. It is the bidder's responsibility to submit the following documentation: a current financial statement, an acceptable equipment schedule, names and addresses of each individual or business entity owning 10% or more of the bidding entity, and any other documents the Department may deem necessary, to the Director of the Water Department or his designated representative, at least seven (7) calendar days prior to the date of the opening of bids. a) COVER LETTER. The cover letter provided by the prospective bidder with the pre- qualification information must include the following information: • Contact person (for additional information) if other than individual who signed the cover letter • If the bidder intends to submit a bid within thirty(30)days from the date that the pre- qualification request is submitted to the City, a statement as to the project to be bid and the date that the bids are scheduled to be opened. b) FINANCIAL STATEMENT. The financial statement required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate State licensing agency and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the financial status of the submitting company. This statement must be current and not more than one (1) year old. In the case that a bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared,the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. c) EXPERIENCE RECORD. For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in the work of both the same nature and technical level as that of the project for which bids are to be received. Experience must be on projects that were completed no more than 5 years prior to the date on which bids will be received. A minimum of three references must be included. References must include a contact person name, telephone number, project name and total cost,and type of work done(Utility contractor shall list pipe size and pipe linear footage). d) EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE. The prospective bidder shall list the equipment that the Contractor has available for the project and list the equipment that Contractor will rent as may be required to complete the project on which the Contractor submits a bid. The Water Department will review each pre-qualification submittal. From the financial statement, the maximum bid limit will be based on amount of liquid assets times 10. The expiration date for pre- qualification will be established as 15 months after the date of the financial statement. The experience record will be reviewed and verified at the same time.The following conditions will apply: a) The Director of the Water Department shall be the sole judge as to the acceptability for financial and experience qualification to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. b) Bids received in excess of the bid limit shall be considered non-responsive and will be rejected as such. c) The City, in its sole discretion, may reject a bid for failure to demonstrate experience and/or expertise. d) Any proposals submitted by a non pre-qualified bidder shall be returned unopened, and if inadvertently opened,shall not be considered. A.2-1 Services,at least 96 hours prior to bid opening.Answers to all such requests will be bound and made a part of the Contract Documents. No other explanation or interpretation will be considered official or binding. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from, the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any addenda issued will be mailed or be delivered to each prospective bidder. The bid proposal as submitted by the bidder must be so constructed as to include any addenda issued by the Fort Worth Water Department,prior to 24 hours of the opening of bids with appropriate recognition of addenda so noted in the bid proposal. 13. PRE-BID COaERENCE: A pre-bid conference will be held on Wednesday, June 6, 2007 at 10:00 a.m.,at the Rolling Hills Water Treatment Plant, Conference Room, 2500 SE Loop 820,Forth Worth, Texas 76140 (MAPSCO 92-S). Attendance at the Pre-Bid Conference is not mandatory for bid compliance. For information regarding this conference,bidders may contact Peter Fu,P.E.at 817-392- 8438 or Chris Harder,P.E.at 817-871-8293. A.2-4 8. PAYMENT: If the contract amount is$25,000 or less,the contract amount shall be paid within forty- five(45)days after the completion and acceptance by the City. 9. AGE: In accordance with the policy ("Policy") of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment,discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification,retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors,program participants,or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification,retirement plan or statutory requirements. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of the contract. 10. DISABILITY: In accordance with provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on; the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with,or employees of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contract warrants it will fully comply with ADA's provision and any other applicable Federal,State,and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against the City arising out of the Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this contract. 11. MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES: In a accord with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No. 15530, the City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts. A copy of the Ordinance can be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. The bidder shall submit the MBE/WBE SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER UTILIZATION FORM,PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM, and/or the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("with Documentation") and/or the JOINT VENTURE FORM as appropriate. The Documentation must be received by the managing department no later than 5:00 p.m.,five(5)City business days after the bid opening date. The bidder shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was made. Such receipt shall be evidence that the documentation was received by the City. Failure to comply shall render the bid non-responsive. Upon request, Contractor agrees to provide the Owner complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a minority business enterprise (MBE) and/or women business enterprise (WBE) on the contract and payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit any audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts (other than a negligent misrepresentation)and/or commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate Federal, State or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements. Further, any such misrepresentation facts (other than a negligent misrepresentations and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less that three(3)years. 12. ADDENDA: Bidders wanting further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents must make their request in writing to the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering A.2-3 PART B PROPOSAL M/WBE SPECIFICATIONS SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS UTILIZATION FORM Attachment 1 A PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM Attachment 1 B GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM Attachment 1 C JOINT VENTURE ELIGIBILITY FORM ..� PART B - PROPOSAL PROPOSAL FOR: furnishing of all materials and equipment and labor and all necessary appurtenances and incidental work to provide a complete and operable project designated as: McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank Pump Station Project No.: P1 60-0601 601 6001 0 Storage Tank Project No.: P160-061600180010 Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders, THE UNDERSIGNED Bidder, having thoroughly examined the Contract Documents, including plans, special contract documents and the General Specifications for Water Department Projects, the site of the project and understanding the amount of work to be done, and the prevailing conditions hereby proposes to do all the work, furnish all the labor, equipment and material, except as specified to be furnished by the.City, which is necessary to fully complete the work as provided in the plans and contract Documents and subject to the inspection and approval of the Director of the City Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, Texas; and binds himself upon acceptance of this proposal to execute a contract and furnish an approved Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and such other bonds, if any as may be required by the Contract Documents for the performing and completing of the said work. Contractor proposes to do the work within the time stated and for the following sums: Item Approximate Description of Items with Bid Unit Prices Total Amount No. Quantity Prices Written in Words (Figures) Bid in Figures A. 1 Installation of the Pump Station, (Lump Sum) including building, associated piping, equipment, electrical, controls and instrumentation, r✓T� security measures, all improvements and (1 appurtenances (up to 5-feet outside the foundation for the n1�'t U st age tank). i Dollars and do cents Per Lump Sum $ $ B. 1 Installation of the Ground (Lump Sum) Storage Tank including foundation, piping, access and `A security measures, and y� appurtenances. C a4E1- 4W-1J, Six �y.z�l'C`� /"�x X" 1V1tic Dollars l l 1' and lVo cents Per Lump Sum $ $ B-1 lftmwl C. 1500 L.F. Trenching Safety System: Sloping/Benching method; Trench Box Method; or Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing Method �d _ Dollars 40 3 � and cents Per Linear Foot $ $ D. 1 HSO Technology—RTU (Lump Sum Components and Programming Allowance) per Letter date March 21, 2007 in Appendix C Forty-Nine Thousand Nine Hundred Fifty one Dollars and zero cents Per Lump Sum Allowance $ 49,951.00 $ 49,951.00 TOTAL BID PRICE (Items A, B, C & D Inclusive). / :� j�/L-L/..?"-j (in words) (in figures) Within ten days after acceptance of this Proposal, the undersigned will execute the formal contract for the faithful performance of the Contract. No bid security is required and bonds will be required. The undersigned bidder certifies that he has been furnished at least one set of the General Contract Documents and General Specifications for Water Department Projects dated January 2004 and all addendum thereto, and that he has read and thoroughly understands all the requirements and conditions of those General Documents and the Specific Contract Documents and appurtenant plans. The undersigned assures that its employees and applicant for employment and those of any labor organization, subcontractors, and employment agency in either furnishing of referring employee applicants to the undersigned are not discriminated against as prohibited by the terms of City Ordinance No 7278 as amended by City Ordinance No 7400. The Bidder agrees to begin construction within 10 calendar days after the issue of the work order, and to complete the contract within 300 calendar days.after beginning construction as set forth in the written work order to be furnished by the Owner. B-2 /2007 15:30 2122625 DALE FISSELER PAGE 20/20 State of Residency: (Complete A or B below, as applicable:) A. The principal place of business of our company is in the State of Georcria Non resident bidders in the State of , our principal place of business, are required to be percent lower than resident bidders by state law. A copy of the statute is attached Non resident bidders in the State of Georgia ,our principal place of business, are not required to underbid resident bidders. B. The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority holder is in the State of Texas_ I (We), acknowledge receipt of the following addenda to the plans and specifications,all of the provisions and requirements of which have been taken into consideration in preparation of the foregoing bid: Addendum No. 1 (initials) Addendum No. 2(initials) Adden m No. 3 (initial ) Matthew Walsh Signature of Principal President Title or Position Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. Contractor 2121 Avenue J. Suite 103 Street Arlington, TX 76006 Seal City, State Zip If Bidder is Corporation 817. 640. 3898 Date: 3/1 8/8 3 Telephone Number Corporate Address: Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. 3715 Northside Parkway, NW Building 100, Suite 550 Atlanta, Georgia 30327 B-3 FORT WO R H City of Fort Worth Minority and Women Business Enterprise Specifications SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDERS APPLICATION OF POLICY If the total dollar value of the contract is$25,000 or more,the MIWBE goal is applicable. If the total dollar value of the contract is less than$25,000,the M/WBE goal is not applicable. POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Fort Worth to ensure the full and equitable participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises (M/WBE) in the procurement of all goods and services to the City on a contractual basis. All requirements and regulations stated in the City's current Minority and Women Business Enterprise Ordinance apply to this bid. M/WBE PROJECT GOALS The City's M/WBE goal on this project is 13%of the total bid. COMPLIANCE TO BID SPECIFICATIONS On City contracts of$25,000 or more, bidders are required to comply with the intent of the City's M/WBE Ordinance by either of the following: 1. Meet or exceed the above stated M/WBE goal,or 2. Good Faith Effort documentation,or; 3. Waiver documentation,or; 4. Joint Venture. SUBMITTAL OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION The applicable documents must be received by the Managing Department, within the following times allocated, in order for the entire bid to be considered responsive to the specifications. The Offeror shall deliver the.MWBE documentation in porson to;the appropriate employee of the managing department and obtain a date/time receipt. Such receipt shaft be#,44 9-6de'thatthe City received the documentation in the turtle allocated.`A faxed cagy will not be accepted. 1. Subcontractor Utilization Form, if goal is received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid met or exceeded: opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. 2. Good Faith Effort and Subcontractor received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid Utilization Form, if participation is less than opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. statedgoal: 3. Good Faith Effort and Subcontractor received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid Utilization Form, if no M/WBEparticipation: opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. 4. Prime Contractor Waiver Form,if you will received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid perform all subcontracting/supplier work: opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. 5. Joint Venture Form, if utilize a joint venture received by 5:00 p.m., five (5) City business days after the bid to met or exceed goal. opening date,exclusive of the bid opening date. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE CITY'S M/WBE ORDINANCE,WILL RESULT IN THE BID BEING CONSIDERED NON-RESPONSIVE TO SPECIFICATIONS ' Any questions, please contact the M/WBE Office at(817)392-6104. Rev. 11/1/05 1 ATTACHMENT 1A Page 1 of 5 FORT NORTH City of Fort Worth Subcontractors/Suppliers Utilization Form PRiME COMPANY NAME: Check applicable block to describe prime Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. i PROJECT NAME: EtMWID-B- E NON-MM/DBE gecart Pump Station and 5 MG Ground storage Tank BID DATE June 21 2007 ity's M/WBE Project Goal: Prime's M/WBE Project Utilization: PROJECT NUMBER 60501 13% 14.08 % Identify all subcontractors/suppliers you will use on this project Failure to complete this form, in its entirety with requested documentation, and received by the Managing Department on or before 5:00 p.m. five (5) City business days after bid opening, exclusive of bid opening date, will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid.specificabons. The undersigned Offeror agrees to enter into a formal 'agreement with the- MNVBE firm(s) listed in this utilization schedule, conditioned upon execution of a contract with the City of Fort Worth. The intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts is grounds for consideration of disqualification And.will result.in-the• bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications M/WBEs listed toward meeting the project goal must be located in the nine (9) county marketplace or currently doing business in the marketplace at the time of bid. Marketplace is the geographic area of Tarrant, Parker,Johnson, Collin, Dallas, Denton, Ellis, Kaufman and Rockwall counties. Identify each Tier level. Tier is the level of subcontracting below the: prime .contractor, i.e., a.direct payment from the prime contractor to,a subcontractor is.considered 1 tieri a payment by a subcontractor to` its supplier is considered 2nd tier ALL M/WBEs MUST BE CERTIFIED BEFORE CONTRACT AWARD.. Certification means those firms,.located or doing business at the time of bid opening within the Marketplace, that have' been determined to be bonafide minority or women businesses by the North Central Texas Regional Certification Agency (NCTRCA), or the Texas Department <jransportatioil (TX DOT), highway division. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise(DBE) is.synonymous with Minority/Wdinen Business Enterprise(M/WBE). If hauling services are utilized, the prime will be given credit as long as the M/WBE.fisted owns'.and -operates at.least one fully licensed and operational truck to.be,used on the-contract. The M/WBF may lease. LkW ks from another M/WBE firm, including :M/WBE owner.-operators, and..receive full MNVBE.credit; The BE-may lease trucks from non-M/WBEs, including.owner-operators;.but,will only receive credit for the and commissions earned by the M/WBE as outlined in the lease agreement. Rev.5130103 ATTACHfJIFS1T•1 A FORTWORTH Page 2 of 5 Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers.regardless of status;i.e., Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs. 'Please list M/WBE firms first,use additional sheets if necessary. Certification N (check one) SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T n Company Name • i N T Detail Detail Address I M W C X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dollar Amount Telephone/Fax r B B R o B E E C T E A Rebar'Service"'& Supply 1 X X X Rebar Material $70,000 139.0, Gilman Road Ft. Worth, TX 76140 (817) 430-3213 Aurora•Eo ns �ct-i tr on' 1 X X X Rebaz' . , :;:�$1.6,240: •244S Sharon-Avenue 'Installation Dallas; TX • 75211 (214) -33.7=87-28° . ,a le Aggregate- Trans. 1 X X X A gre Aggregates '$7a 045 gS g. � . • 4.401 Denton, T ,762a7•,.•" , '(940)" 393-0.096 Mckyan truckiiig' 1 X X X Trucking.... ... $26;9(i7 16121'.Highway 114 ; ,Iustiri;; TX ' 76247 4817) 430-3213; `G:ekis'cap ng :1 X X: Jrrigat air. 8917 Cardinal'Lane. 'NIk" chland Hills, -TX 76.180 : . ; ... Mechia ica1;' .• $476;901' . 4785' Pieston• Road' a t +: .EqupmEnt t site. 500 - -. Dallas; TX 75240 (214) 215.-2184 i ATTACHMENT 1A FORTW4RTH Page 3 of 5 Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractorstsuppliers, regardless of status;i.e., Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs. Please list M/WBE firms first,use additional sheets if necessary. Certification N (check one) ° SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T n Company Name i N T Detail Detail Address e M yy c X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dollar Amount T D VV Telephone/Fax r B B R 0 B E E C T E A Masonry & Stucco 1 X X Masonry $41,900 :'Services, Inc. .1150`9 .Seagoville Road Balch Spx ings,. TX ' •75780 (972) 557-4186 BRJ Paving 1 X Asphalt $23,625 12448 Rendon Road Burleson,' TX •f 7.6028 •(81.7)•:4'78-092-1 " Tank Bu lders ] ..X —Steel Tank $1,039,800 •- -,3400 Trinity Blvd. , Euless, 'a 76039 ,. 516-0160 TPC. Electric Co. , Inc. 1 X Electrical . $628,491 6309 Indus-trial 'Dr.. Sachse,; TX'' 75048: ;.. (972) 414-7028 Gaffey,. Inc.. 1 X Bridgp'Crane $.26,8,1'2:- 4922 Northeast Pkwy. Ft-.. Worth, TX 76106 017)- 74077911 Midwest Coatings, Inc. 1 X Painting. $349.,9.00 3701.-S.E. 29th Street klahoma City, OK 11%-013135 (405) 424-6550 Rev.5130103 i ATTACHMENTIA FOPTWORTH Page 4 of 5 Primes are required to identify ALL subcontractors/suppliers, regardless of status;i.e., Minority,Women and non-M/WBEs. Please list MIINBE firms first,use additional sheets it necessary. Certification N (check one) o SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER T " . Company Name i N T Detail Detail Address a t>A W C X M Subcontracting Work Supplies Purchased Dollar Amount r hone/Fax Tele T D W P E E R O B C T E A Progressive-•Roofing 1 X Roofing $45,282 29.1.1-S.. Peachtree Rd. Balch Springs, TX 75180 (214) 348-7663 - Segu n 'Fatiritators, LtdX Misc: 'Iron-' :•$113;742 P.O. Box 1230 Seguin, TX- 78156 :'(:830)'��379-4-129• ..� .- - . . - . ..': �.. . :; Elmendorf Precast, Ltd. 1 X Precast $216,608 1.210 Wes•t--,Laurel, .:_•' -Concrete San Antonjo-a,.TK ,-•T8201 • (210). 732-7103 .Southern Star X r --Concrete =8500 Freeport Plaay. Irving,"TX' '75063 r. ;'.a, .:; •� _:: .(972) 621-0999 Archer :Western Contr. X` en2ral , $2,128,571 2121* Avenue 'J' - . 0ont-rac tor' Suite 103 Arlington;-TX 76006' y Rev_Mm/nGt 1 ATTACH_MENT 1A FORTWORTH Page 5 of 5 otal Dollar Amount of M/WBE Subcontractors/Suppliers $ 759,022.00 Total Dollar Amount of Non-M/WBE Subcontractors/Suppliers $ 4,631,978.00 TOTAL DOLLAR AMOUNT OF ALL SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS $ 5,391,000.00 The Contractor will not make additions, deletions, or substitutions to this certified list without the prior approval` of the Minority and Women Business Enterprise Office Manager or designee through the submittal of a Request for Approval of Change/Addition. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of - contract and may result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in the ordinance. The contractor shall submit a detailed explanation of how the requested change/addition or deletion will affect the committed M/WBE goal. If the detail explanation is not submitted, it will affect the final compliance determination. By affixing a signature to this form, the Offeror further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, Il.complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors, including: M/W/DBE(s) arrangements submitted with the bid. The Offeror also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination: of any books, records and files held by their company. The bidder agrees Jo allow the transmission of : interviews with owners, principals, officers, employees- and applicable. ubcontractors/su'ppliers/contractors participating on the contract that will substantiate-the' actual' wo( erformed by the M1W/DBE(s) on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment: from City-work for a period of not less,than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local-.laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this: ordinance and create a material , breach of contract.may result in a determination of an irresponsible.Offeror and.barred from participat $intgg City work for a period of time not less than one.(1) year. ; r Joe' Lindeman 4ursihess ed Signature Painted Signature Group Manager f Title: r' Contact lhlaino itle(it dlft9WQ ' `(8t7)- 640-3898 (817) 640-8734 Archer? Vestezn.Cont:ractdrs Carnparty lime r ;Telephone and/or Fax' : 2121 Avenue '.J',r; Suite' .03' --j.lindemart@azcherwestern.com •� .. .. ... .E-mall Addr�se t .... - . _ Af.itngton;:TX '16GO6 -.'June 22, :2007 St�ttalZlp".... •- - t :,Date; '.. , • ; ;• : . : •. •. . . • "- ter•... . • `?• ;: •. : ' . . •. ' . • ' • � " • • --- . .�� _ ATTACHMENT 113 FORT NORTH Page 1 of 1 City of Fort Worth Prime Contractor Waiver Form PRIME COMPANY NAME: Check applicable block to describe prime PROJECT NAME: El M/W/DBE NON-M/W/DBE McCart Pump Station and 5 MG Ground Storage Tank BID DATE City's M/WBE Project Goal: PROJECT NUMBER 00501 13% If both answers to this form are YES, do not complete ATTACHMENT 1C(Good Faith Effort Form). All questions on this form must be completed and a detailed explanation provided, if applicable. If the answer to either question is NO, then you must complete ATTACHMENT 1 C. This form is only applicable if both answers are yes. Failure to complete this form in its entirety and be received by the Managing Department on or before 5:00 p.m., five(5)City business days after bid opening,exclusive of the bid opening date,will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications. Will you perform this entire contract without subcontractors? YES If yes, please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this NO project,this is your normal business practice and provide an operational profile of your business. Will you perform this entire contract without suppliers? YES v If yes, please provide a detailed explanation that proves based on the size and scope of this project,this is your normal business practice and provide an inventory profile of your business. NO The bidder further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by all subcontractors, including M/WBE(s) on this contract, the payment therefore and any proposed changes to the original M/WBE(s) arrangements submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed by the M/WBEs on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one(1) year. Authorized Signature Printed Signature Title T Contact Name(if different) Company Name Phone Number Fax Number Address Email Address City/State/Zip Date Rev.5130103 ATTACHMENT 1B Page 2 of 1 F Rev.5/30/03 ATTACHMENT 1 C Page 1 of 3 FORT WORTH City of Fort Worth Good Faith Effort Form PRIME COMPANY NAME: Check applicable block to describe prime PROJECT NAME: M/W/DBE NON-M/W/DBE McCart Pump Station and 5 MG Ground Storage Tank BID DATE City's M/WBE Project Goal: PROJECT NUMBER 13% 00501 If you have failed to secure M/WBE participation and you have subcontracting and/or supplier opportunities or if your OBE participation is less than the City's project goal,you must complete this form. If the bidder's method of compliance with the M/WBE goal is based upon demonstration of a "good faith effort", the bidder will have the burden of correctly and accurately preparing and submitting the documentation required by the City. Compliance with each item, 1 thru 6 below, shall satisfy the Good Faith Effort requirement absent proof of fraud, intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation the facts or intentional discrimination by the bidder. Failure to complete this form, in its entirety with supporting documentation, and received by the Managing Department on or before 5:00 p.m. five (5) City business days after bid opening, exclusive of bid opening date, will result in the bid being considered non-responsive to bid specifications. 1.) Please list each and every subcontracting and/or supplier opportunityl for the completion of this project, regardless of whether it is to be provided by a M/WBE or non-M/WBE. (DO NOT LIST NAMES OF FIRM§1 On Combined Projects, list each subcontracting and or supplier opportunity through the 2nd tier. (Use additional sheets, if necessary) List of Subcontracting Opportunities List of Supplier Opportunities ATTACHMENT 1 C Page 2 of 3 2.) Obtain a current(not more than three(3)months old from the bid open date) list of M/WBE subcontractors and/or suppliers from the City's M/WBE Office. Yes Date of Listing No 3.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms, within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed, at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by mail, exclusive of the day the bids are opened? Yes (if yes,attach M/WBE mail listing to include name of firm and address and a dated copy of letter mailed.) No 4.) Did you solicit bids from M/WBE firms, within the subcontracting and/or supplier areas previously listed, at least ten calendar days prior to bid opening by telephone, exclusive of the day the bids are opened? Yes (if yes,attach list to include name of M/WBE firm, person contacted,phone number and date and time of contact.) No NOTE: A facsimile may be used to comply with either 3 or 4, but may not be used for both. If a facsimile Is used, attach the fax confirmation, which is to provide M/WBE name, date, time, fax number and documentation faxed. NOTE: If the list of M/WBEs for a particular subcontracting/supplier opportunity is ten (10) or less, the bidder must contact the entire list to be in compliance with questions 3 and 4. If the list of M/WBEs for a particular subcontracting/supplier opportunity is ten (10) or more, the bidder must contact at least two. thirds (2/3) of the list within such area of opportunity, but not less than ten to be in compliance with questions 3 and 4. 5.) Did you provide plans and specifications to potential M/WBEs or information regarding the location of plans and specifications in order to assist the M/WBEs? Yes No 6.) Submit documentation if M/WBE quotes were rejected. The documentation submitted should be in the forms of an affidavit, include a detailed explanation of why the M/WBE was rejected and any supporting documentation the bidder wishes to be considered by the City. In the event of a bona fide dispute concerning quotes, the bidder will provide for confidential in-camera access to and inspection of any relevant documentation by City personnel. Please use additional sheets,if necessary,and attach. Company Name Telephone Contact Person Scope of Work Reason for Rejection Rev.MAMA ATTACHMENT 1 C Page 3 of 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Please provide additional information you feel will further explain your good and honest efforts to obtain M/WBE participation on this project. The bidder further agrees to provide, directly to the City upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed on this contract, the payment thereof and any proposed changes to the original arrangements submitted with this bid. The bidder also agrees to allow an audit and/or examination of any books, records and files held by their company that will substantiate the actual work performed on this contract, by an authorized officer or employee of the City. Any intentional and/or knowing misrepresentation of facts will be grounds for terminating the contract or debarment from City work for a period of not less than three (3) years and for initiating action under Federal, State or Local laws concerning false statements. Any failure to comply with this ordinance and creates a material breach of contract may result in a determination of an irresponsible offeror and barred from participating in City work for a period of time not less than one (1) year. The undersigned certifies that the information provided and the M/WBE(s) listed was/were contacted in good faith. It is understood that any M/WBE(s) listed in Attachment 1 C will be contacted and the reasons for not using them will be verified by the City's M/WBE Office. Authorized Signature Printed Signature Title Contact Name and Title(if different) Company Name Phone Number Fax Number Address Email Address City/State/Zip Date tiole Rev_05/30/03 Joint Venture Page 1 of 3 FORT WO Tx CITY OF FORT WORTH Joint Venture Eligibility Form All questions must be answered;use"NA"if applicable. Name of City project: Mcl!art Pump Station and 5 MG Ground Storaae Tank A joint venture form must be completed on each project RFPBid/Purchasing Number: 00501 1.Joint venture information: Joint Venture Name: Joint Venture Address: (If applicable) Telephone: Facsimile: E-mail address: Cellular: Identify the firms that comprise the joint venture: Please attach extra sheets if additiohal space is required to provide detailed explanations of work to be performed by each firm comprising the joint venture M/WBE firm Non-M/WBE name: firm name: Business Address: Business Address: City,State,Zip: City,State,Zip: Telephone Facsimile E-mail Telephone Facsimile Cellular Cellular Certification Status: E-mail address Name of Certifying Agency: 2.Scope of work performed by the Joint Venture: Describe the scope of work of the NMBE: Describe the scope of work of the non-NMBE: Rev.5/30/03 mr Joint Venture Page 2 of 3 3. What is the percentage of M/WBE participation on this joint venture that you wish to be counted toward meeting the project goal? 4. Attach a copy of the joint venture agreement. 5. List components of ownership of joint venture: (Do not complete if this information is described in joint venture agreement) Profit and loss sharing: Capital contributions,including equipment: Other applicable ownership interests: 6. Identify by name,race,sex and firm those individuals(with titles) who are responsible for the day-to-day management and decision making of the joint venture: Financial decisions (to include Account Payable and Receivable): Management decisions: a. Estimating b. Marketing ----------------and--Sales-------------------- ---------------------------------------------- c. Hiring and Firing of management personnel ---------------------------------------------- d. Purchasing of major equipment and/or supplies Supervision of field operations The City's Minority and Women Business Enterprise Office will review your joint venture submission and will have final approval of the M/WBE percentage applied toward the goal for the project listed on this form. NOTE: From and after the date of project award, if any of the participants,the individually defined scopes of work or the dollar amounts/percentages change from the originally approved information, then the participants must inform the City's M/WBE Office immediately for approval. Any unjustified change or deletion shall be a material breach of contract and may result in debarment in accord with the procedures outlined in the City's M/WBE Ordinance. Rev.5/30/03 Joint Venture Pa e3of3 AFFIDAVIT The undersigned affirms that the foregoing statements are true and correct and include all material information necessary to identify and exp�ain the terms and operation of the joint venture. Furthermore, the undersigned shall agree to provide to the joint venture the stated scope of work, decision-making responsibilities and payments herein. The City also reserves the Oght to request any additional information deemed necessary to determine if the joint venture is eligible. Failure to cpoperate and/or provide requested information within the time specified is grounds for termination of the eligibility process. The undersigned agree to Oermit audits, interviews with owners and examination of the books, records and files of the joint venture by any authorized representatives of the City of Fort Worth. Failure to comply with this provision shall result in the termination of any contract, which may be awarded under the provisions of this joint venture's eligibility and may initiate action under Federal, State and/or Local laws/ordinances concerning false statements or willful misrepresentation of facts. --- -- ----------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name of M/WBE firm Name of non-M/WBE firm Printed Name of Owner Printed Name of Owner Signature of Owner Signature of Owner Printed Name of Owner Printed Name of Owner Signature of Owner Signature of Owner Title Title Date Date Notarization State of County of On this day of , 20 , before me appeared and to me personally known and who, being duly sworn, did execute the foregoing affidavit and did state that they were properly authorized to execute this affidavit and did so as their free act and deed. Notary Public Print Name Notary Public Signature Commission Expires (seat) APv �/.qnm.q PART C & CS GENERAL CONDITIONS - AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS r,/ PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS NOVEMBER 1, 1987 TABLE OF CONTENTS C1-1 DEFINITIONS C1-1 (1) C1-1.1 Definition of Terms C1-1 (1) C1-1.2 Contract Documents C1-1 (2) C1-1.3 Notice to Bidders C1-1 (2) C1-1.4 Proposal C1-1 (2) C1-1.5 Bidder C1-1 (2) C1-1.6 General Conditions C1-1 (2) C1-1.7 Special Conditions C1-1 (2) C1-1.8 Specifications C1-1 (2) C1-1.9 Bonds C1-1 (2) C1-1.10 Contract C1-1 (3) C1-1.11 Plans C1-1 (3) C1-1.12 City C1-1 (3) C1-1.13 City Council C1-1 (3) C1-1.14 Mayor C1-1 (3) CL-1.15 City Manager C1-1 (3) C1-1.16 City Attorney C1-1 (3) C1-1.17 Director of Public Works C1-1 (4) C1-1.18 Director, City Water Department C1-1 (4) C1-1.19 Engineer C1-1 (4) C 1-1.20 Contractor CI-1 (4) C1-1.21 Sureties C1-1 (4) C1-1.22 The Work or Project C1-1 (4) C1-1.23 Working Day C1-1 (4) C1-1.24 Calendar Days C1-1 (4) C1-1.25 Legal Holidays C1-1 (4) C1-1.26 Abbreviations C1-1 (5) C1-1.27 Change Order C1-1 (6) C1-1.28 Paved Streets and Alleys C1-1 (6) C1-1.29 Unpaved Streets or Alleys C1-1 (6) C1-1.30 City Street C1-1 (6) C1-1.31 Roadway C1-1 (6) C1-1.32 Gravel Street C1-1 (6) C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL C2-2.1 Proposal Form C2-2 (1) C2-2.2 Interpretation of Quantities C2-2 (1) C2-2.3 Examination of Contract Documents and Site of Project C2-2 (2) C2-2.4 Submitting of Proposal C2-2 (3) (1) C2-2.5 Rejection of Proposals C2-2 (3) C2-2.6 Bid Security C2-2 (3) C2-2.7 Delivery of Proposal C2-2 (4) C2-2.8 Withdrawing Proposals C2-2 (4) C2-2.9 Telegraphic Modifications of Proposals C2-2 (4) C2-2.10 Public Opening of Proposal C2-2 (4) C2-2.11 Irregular Proposals C2-2 (4) C2-2.12 Disqualification of Bidders C2-2 (5) C3-3 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: C3-3.1 Consideration of Proposals C3-3 (1) C3-3.2 Minority Business Enterprise/Women Business C3-3 (1) Enterprise Compliance C3-3.3 Equal Employment Provisions C3-3 (1) C3-3.4 Withdrawal of Proposals C3-3 (2) C3-3.5 Award of Contract C3-3 (2) C3-3.6 Return of Proposal Securities C3-3 (2) C3-3.7 Bonds C3-3 (2) C3-3.8 Execution of Contract C3-3 (4) C3-3.9 Failure to Execute Contract C3-3 (4) C-3-3.10 Beginning Work C3-3 (4) C3-3.11 Insurance C3-3 (4) C3-3.12 Contractor's Obligations C3-3 (7) C3-3.13 Weekly Payrolls C3-3 (7) C3-3.14 Contractor's Contract Administration C3-3 (7) C3-3.15 Venue C3-3 (8) C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK C4-4.1 Intent of Contract Documents C4-4 (1) C4-4.2 Special Provisions C4-4 (1) C44.3 Increased or Decreased Quantities C4-4 (1) C4-4.4 Alteration of Contract Documents C4-4 (2) C4-4.5 Extra Work C4-4 (2) C4-4.6 Schedule of Operation C4-4 (3) C4-4.7 Progress Schedules for Water and Sewer Plant Facilities C4-4(4) C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS C5-5.1 Authority of Engineer C5-5 (1) C5-5.2 Conformity with Plans C5-5 (1) C5-5.3 Coordination of Contract Documents C5-5 (2) C5-5.4 Cooperation of Contractor C5-5 (2) C5-5.5 Emergency and/or Rectification Work C5-5 (3) C5-5.6 Field Office C5-5 (3) C5-5.7 Construction Stakes C5-5 (3) (2) C5-5.8 Authority and Duties of City Inspector C5-5 (4) C5-5.9 Inspection C5-5 (5) C5-5.10 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work C5-5 (5) -- C5-5.11 Substitute Materials or Equipment C5-5 (5) C5-5.12 Samples and Tests of Materials C5-5 (6) C5-5.13 Storage of Materials C5-5 (6) C5-5.14 Existing Structures and Utilities C5-5 (7) C5-5.15 Interruption of Service C5-5 (7) C5-5.16 Mutual Responsibility of Contractors C5-5 (8) C5-5.17 Clean,Up C5-5 (8) C5-5.18 Final Inspection C5-5 (9) C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY C6-6.1 Laws to be Observed C6-6 (1) C6-6.2 Permits and Licenses C6-6 (1) C6-6.3 Patented Devices, Materials, and Processes C6-6 (1) C6-6.4 Sanitary Provisions C6-6 (2) C6-6.5 Public Safety and Convenience C6-6 (2) C6-6.6 Privileges f Contractor in Streets, Alleys, C6-6 (3) and Right-of-Way C6-6.7 Railway Crossings C6-6 (4) 06-6.8 Barricades, Warnings and Flagmen C6-6 (4) C6-6.9 Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. C6-6 (4) C6-6.10 Work Within Easements C6-6 (5) `R C6.6.11 Independent Contractor C6-6 (6) C6-6.12 Contractor's Responsibility for Damage Claims C6-6 (8) C6-6.13 Contractor's Claim for Damages C6-6 (10) C6-6.14 Adjustment or Relocation of Public Utilities, Etc. C6-6 (10) C6-6.15 Temporary Sewer and Drain Connections C6-6 (10) C6-6.16 Arrangement and Charges for Water Furnished by the City C6-6 (11) C6-6.17 Use of a Section or Portion of the Work C6-6 (11) C6-6.18 Contractor's Responsibility for the Work C6-6 (11) C6-6.19 No Waiver of Legal Rights C6-6 (12) C6-6.20 Personal Liability of Public Officials C6-6 (12) C6-6.21 State Sales Tax C6-6 (12) C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS C7-7.1 Subletting C7-7 (1) C7-7.2 Assignment of Contract C7-7 (1) C7-7.3 Prosecution of The Work C7-7 (1) C7-7.4 Limitation of Operations C7-7 (2) C7-7.5 Character of Workmen and Equipment C7-7 (2) C7-7.6 Work Schedule C7-7 (3) C7-7.7 Time of Commencement and Completion. C7-7 (4) C7-7.8 Extension of Time Completion C7-7 (4) (3) C7-7.9 Delays C7-7 (4) C7-7.10 Time of Completion C7-7 (5) C7-7.11 Suspension by Court Order C7-7 (6) C7-7.12 Temporary Suspension C7-7 (6) - C7-7.13 Termination of Contract due to National Emergency C7-7 (7) C7-7.14 Suspension or Abandonment of the Work C7-7 (7) and Annulment of the Contract: C7-7.15 Fulfillment of Contract C7-7 (9) C7-7.16 Termination for Convenience of the Owner C7-7 (10) C7-7.17 Safety Methods and Practices C7-7 (13) C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT C8-8.1 Measurement of Quantities C8-8 (1) C8-8.2 Unit Prices C8-8 (1) C8-8.3 Lump Sum C8-8 (1) C8-8.4 Scope of Payment C8-8 (1) C8-8.5 Partial Estimates and Retainage C8-8 (1) C8-8.6 Withholding Payment C8-8 (2) C8-8.7 Final Acceptance C8-8 (2) C8-8.8 Final Payment C8-8 (2) C8-8.9 Adequacy of Design C8-8 (3) C8-8.10 General Guaranty C8-8 (3) C8-8.11 Subsidiary Work C8-8 (3) C8-8.12 Miscellaneous Placement of Material C8-8 (3) C8-8.13 Record Documents C8-8 (3) (4) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINITIONS SECTION C1-1 DEFINITIONS C1-1.1 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS: Whenever in these Contract Documents the following terms or pronouns in place of them are used, the intent and meaning shall be understood and interpreted as follows: C1-1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are in all of the written and drawn documents, such as specifications, bonds, addenda, plans, etc., which govern the terms and performance of the contract. These are contained on the General Contract Documents and the Special Contract Documents. a. GENERAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The General Contract Documents govern all Water Department Projects and Include the following Items PART A - NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Sample) White PART B - PROPOSAL (Sample) White PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS (CITY) Canary Yellow (Developer) Brown PART D - SPECIAL CONDITIONS Green PART E -SPECIFICATIONS El-White E2-Golden Rod E2A-White PERMITS/EASEMENTS Blue PART F- BONDS (Sample) White PART G -CONTRACT (Sample) White b. SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Special Contract Documents are prepared for each specific project as a supplement to the General Contract Documents and include the following items: PART A - NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Advertisement) same as above PART B- PROPOSAL (Bid) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS PART D - SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART E -SPECIFICATIONS PERMITS/EASEMENTS PART F- BONDS PART G -CONTRACT PART H - PLANS (Usually bound separately) MWH -05/18/07 GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C1-1 (1) C1-1.3 NOTICE TO BIDDERS: All of the legal publications either actually published in public advertising mediums or furnished direct to interested parties pertaining to the work contemplated under the Contract Documents constitutes the notice to bidders. C1-1.4 PROPOSAL: The completed written and signed offer or tender of a bidder to perform the work which the Owner desires to have done, together with the bid security, constitutes the Proposal, which becomes binding upon the Bidder when it is officially received by the Owner, has been publicly opened and read and not rejected by the Owner. C1-1.5 BIDDER: Any person, persons, firm,partnership, company, association, corporation, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative, submitting a proposal for performing the work contemplated under the Contract Documents, constitutes a bidder. C1-1.6 GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions are the usual construction and contract requirements which govern the performance of the work so that it will be carried on in accordance with the customary procedure, the local statutes, and requirements of the City of Fort Worth's charter and promulgated ordinances. Whenever there may be a conflict between the General Conditions and the Special Conditions, the latter shall take precedence. . C1-1.7 SPECIAL CONDITIONS: Special conditions are the specific requirements which are necessary for the particular project covered by the Contract Documents and not specifically covered in the General Conditions. When considered with the General Conditions and other elements of the Contract Documents they provide the information which the Contractor and Owner should have in order to gain a thorough knowledge of the project. C1-1.8 SPECIFICATIONS: The Specifications is that section or part of the Contract Documents which set forth in detail the requirements which must be met by all materials, construction, workmanship, equipment and services in order to render a completed an useful project. Whenever reference is made to standard specifications, regulations, requirements, statutes, etc., such referred to documents shall become a part of the Contract Documents just as though they were embodied therein. C1-1.9 BONDS: The bond or bonds are the written guarantee or security furnished by the Contractor for prompt and faithful performance of the contract and include the following: a. Performance Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) b. Payment Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) C. Maintenance Bond (see paragraph C3-3.7) d. Proposal or Bid Security (see Special Instructions to Bidders, Part A and C2-2.6) MWH -05/18/07 GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C1-1 (2) C1-1.10 CONTRACT: The Contract is a formal signed agreement between the owner and the Contractor covering the mutual understanding of the two contracting parties about the project to be completed under the Contract Documents. C1-1.11 PLANS: The plans are the drawings or reproductions therefrom made by the Owner's 1ftP.1 representative showing in detail the location, dimension and position of the various elements of the project, including such profiles, typical cross-sections, layout diagrams, working drawings, preliminary drawings and such supplemental drawings as the Owner may issue to clarify other drawings or for the purpose of showing changes in the work hereinafter authorized by the Owner. The plans are usually bound separately from the other parts of the Contract Documents, but they are part of the Contract Documents just as though they were bound therein. C1-1.12 CITY: The City of Fort Worth, Texas, a municipal corporation, authorized and chartered under the Texas State Statutes, acting by and through its governing body or its City Manager, each of which is required by charter to perform specific duties. Responsibility for final enforcement of the Contracts involving the City of Fort Worth is by Charter vested in the City Manager. The terms City and Owner are synonymous. C1-1.13 CITY COUNCIL: The duly elected and qualified governing body of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. C1-1.14 MAYOR: The officially elected Mayor, or in his absence, the Mayor Pro tem of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. C1-1.15 CITY MANAGER: The officially appointed and authorized City Manager of the City of Fort Worth, Texas,or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.16 CITY ATTORNEY: The officially appointed City Attorney of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.17 DIRECTOR OF (PUBLIC WORKS: The officially appointed official of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, referred to in the charter as the City Engineer, or his duly authorized representative. C1-1.18 DIRECTOR, CITY WATER DEPARTMENT: The officially appointed Director of the City Water Department of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or his duly authorized representative, assistant, or agents. C1-1.19 ENGINEER: The Director of Public Works, the Director of the Fort Worth City Water Department, or their duly authorized assistants, agents, engineers, inspectors, or superintendents, acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. C1-1.20 CONTRACTOR: The person, person's, partnership, company, firm, association, or corporation, entering into a contract with the Owner for the execution of work, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative. A sub-contractor is a person, firm, corporation, supplying labor and materials or only labor, for the work at the site of the project. C1-1.21 SURETIES: The Corporate bodies which are bound by such bonds as are required with and for the Contractor. The sureties engaged are to be fully responsible for the entire and satisfactory fulfillment of the Contract and for any and all requirements as set forth in the Contract Documents and approved changes therein. C1-1.22 THE WORK OR PROJECT: The completed work contemplated in and covered by the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to produce a completed and serviceable project. MWH -05/18/07 GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C1-1 (3) C1-1.23 WORKING DAY: A working day is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of the principal unit of work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., with exceptions as permitted in paragraph C7-7.6 C1-1.24 CALENDAR DAYS: A calendar day is any day of the week or month, no days being excepted. C1-1.25: LEGAL HOLIDAYS: Legal holidays shall be observed as prescribed by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth for observance by City employees as follows: 1. New Year's day January 1 2. M.L. King,Jr. Birthday Third Monday in January 3. Memorial Day Last Monday in May 4. Independence Day July 4 5. Labor Day First Monday in September 6. Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November 7. Thanksgiving Friday Forth Friday in November 8. Christmas Day December 25 9. Such other days in lieu of holidays as the City Council may determine When one of the above named holidays or a special holiday is declared by the City Council, falls on a Saturday, the holiday shall be observed on the preceding Friday, or if it falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday, by those employees working on working day operations. Employees working calendar day operations will consider the calendar as the holiday. C1-1.26 ABBREVIATIONS: Whenever the abbreviations defined herein appear in the Contract Documents, the intent and meaning shall be as follows: AASHTO - American Association of State MGD - Million Gallons Highway Transportation Officials per Day ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers CFS - Cubic Foot per Second LAW - In Accordance With Min. - Minimum ASTM - American Society of Testing Mono. - Monolithic Materials % - Percentum AWWA - American Water Works Association R - Radius I.D. - Inside Diameter ASA - American Standards Association O.D. - Outside Diameter HI - Hydraulic Institute Elev. - Elevation Asph. - Asphalt F - Fahrenheit Ave. - Avenue C - Centigrade Blvd. - Boulevard In. - Inch Cl - Cast Iron Ft. - Foot CL - Center Line St. - Street GI - Galvanized Iron CY - Cubic Yard Lin. - Linear or Lineal Yd. - Yard lb. - Pound SY - Square yard MH - Manhole L.F. - Linear Foot Max. - Maximum D.I. - Ductile Iron C1-1.27 CHANGE ORDER: A "Change Order" is a written supplemental agreement between the Owner and the Contractor covering some added or deducted item or feature which may be found MWH -05/18/07 GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C1-1 (4) necessary and which was not specifically included in the scope of the project on which bids were submitted. Increase in unit quantities stated in the proposal are not the subject matter of a Change Order unless the increase or decrease is more than 25% of the amount of the particular item or items in the original proposal. All "Change Orders" shall be prepared by the City from information as necessary furnished by the Contractor. C1-1.28 PAVED STREETS AND ALLEYS: A paved street or alley shall be defined as a street or alley having one of the following types of wearing surfaces applied over the natural unimproved surface: 1. Any type of asphaltic concrete with or without separate base material. 2. Any type of asphalt surface treatment, not including an oiled surface, with or without separate base material. 3. Brick, with or without separate base material. 4. Concrete, with or without separate base material. 5. Any combination of the above. C1-1.29 UNPAVED STREETS OR ALLEYS: An unpaved street, alley, roadway or other surface is any area except those defined for"Paved Streets and Alleys." C1-1.30 CITY STREET: A city street is defined as that area between the right-of-way lines as the street is dedicated. C1-1.31 ROADWAY: The roadway is defined as the area between parallel lines two (2') back of the curb lines or four(`4) feet back of the average edge of pavement where no curb exists. C1-1.32 GRAVEL STREET: A gravel street is an unimproved street to which has been added one or more applications of gravel or similar material other than the natural material found on the street surface before any improvement was made. MWH -05/18/07 GENERAL CONDITIONS C1-1 DEFINTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C1-1 (5) SECTION C- GENERAL CONDITIONS C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL SECTION C2-2 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL C2-2.1 PROPOSAL FORM: The Owner will furnish bidders with Proposal form, which will contain an itemized list of the items of work to be done or materials to be furnished and upon which bid prices are requested. The Proposal form will state the Bidder's general understanding of the project to be completed, provide a space for furnishing the amount of bid security, and state the basis for entering into a formal contract. The Owner will furnish forms for the Bidder's "Experience Record," "Equipment Schedule," and "Financial Statement," all of which must be properly executed and filed with the Director of the City Water Department one week prior to the hour for opening of bids. The financial statement required shall have been prepared by an independent certified public accountant or an independent public accountant holding a valid permit issued by an appropriate state licensing agency, and shall have been so prepared as to reflect the current financial status. This statement must be current and no more than one(1) year old. In the case that bidding date falls within the time a new statement is being prepared, the previous statement shall be updated by proper verification. Liquid assets in the amount of ten (10) percent of the estimated project cost will be required. For an experience record to be considered to be acceptable for a given project, it must reflect the experience of the firm seeking qualification in work of both the same nature and magnitude as that of the project for which bids are to be received, and such experience must have been completed not more than five (5) years prior to the date on which Bids are to be received. The Director of the Water Department shall be sole judge as to the acceptability of experience for qualification to bid on any Fort Worth Water Department project. The prospective bidder shall schedule the equipment he has available for the project and state that he will rent such additional equipment as may be required to complete the project on which he submits a bid. C2-2.2 INTERPRETATION OF QUANTITIES: The quantities of work and materials to be furnished as may be listed in the proposal forms or other parts of the Contract Documents will be considered as approximate only and will be used for the purpose of comparing bids on a uniform basis. Payment will be made to the Contractor for only the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and Plans. The quantities of work to be performed and materials to be furnished may be increased or decreased as hereinafter provided, without in any way invalidating the unit prices bid or any other requirements of the Contract Documents. C2-2.3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE OF PROJECT: Bidders are advised that the Contract Documents on file with the Owner shall constitute all of the information which the Owner will furnish. All additional information and data which the Owner will supply after promulgation of the formal contract documents shall be issued in the form of written addenda and shall become part of the Contract Documents just as though such addenda were actually written into the original Contract Documents. Bidders are required, prior to filing of proposal, to read and become familiar with the Contract Documents, to visit the site of the project and examine carefully all local conditions, to inform themselves by their own independent research and investigations, tests, boring, and by such other means as may be necessary to gain a complete knowledge of the conditions which will be encountered during construction of the project. They must judge for themselves the difficulties of the work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the work or the time required for its completion, and obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal. No information given MWH -05/18/07 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C2-2(1) by the Owner or any representative of the Owner other than that contained in the Contract Documents and officially promulgated addenda thereto, shall be binding upon the Owner. Bidders shall rely exclusively and solely upon their own estimates, investigation, research, tests, explorations, and other data which are necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is to be based. It is mutually agreed that the submission of a proposal is prima-facie evidence that the bidder has made the investigation, examinations and tests herein required. Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated in the Contract Documents will not be allowed. The logs of Soil Borings, if any, on the plans are for general information only and may not be correct. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer guarantee that the data shown is representative of conditions which actually exist. C2-2.4 SUBMITTING OF PROPOSAL: The Bidder shall submit his Proposal on the form furnished by the Owner. All blank spaces applicable to the project contained in the form shall be correctly filled in and the Bidder shall state the prices, written in ink in both words and numerals, for which he proposes to do work contemplated or furnish the materials required. All such prices shall be written legibly. In case of discrepancy between price written in words and the price written in numerals, the price most advantageous to the City shall govern. If a proposal is submitted by an individual, his or her name must be signed by him (her) or his (her) duly authorized agent. If a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member of the firm, association, or partnership, or by person duly authorized. If a proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporation name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. The corporate seal must be affixed. Power of Attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposal must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. C2-2.5 REJECTION OF PROPOSALS: Proposals may be rejected if they show any alteration of words or figures, additions not called for, conditional or uncalled for alternate bids, erasures, or irregularities of any kind, or contain unbalanced value of any items. Proposal tendered or delivered after the official time designated for receipt of proposal shall be returned to the Bidder unopened. C2-2.6 BID SECURITY: No proposal will be considered unless it is accompanied by a"Proposal Security" of the character and the amount indicated in the "Notice to Bidders" and the "Proposal." The Bid Security is required by the Owner as evidence of good faith on the part of the Bidder, and by way of a guaranty that if awarded the contract, the Bidder will within the required time execute a formal contract and furnish the required performance and other bonds. The bid security of the three lowest bidders will be retained until the contract is awarded or other disposition is made thereof. The bid security of all other bidders may be returned promptly after the canvass of bids. C2-2.7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless it is delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security, to the City Manager or his representative in the official place of business as set forth in the "Notice to Bidders." It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to deliver the proposal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be considered. The Bidder must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marker with the word "PROPOSAL," and the name or description of the project as designated in the "Notice to Bidders." The envelope shall be addressed to the City Manager, City Hall, Fort Worth,Texas. C2-2.8 WITHDRAWING PROPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with the City Manager cannot be withdrawn prior to the time set for opening proposals.A request for non-consideration must be made in writing, addressed to the City Manager, and filed with him prior to the time set for opening of proposals. After all proposals not requested for non-consideration are opened and publicly read aloud, the proposals for which non-consideration requests have been properly filed Day, at the option of the Owner, be returned unopened. MWH - 05/18/07 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C2-2(2) C2-2.9 TELEGRAHIC MODIFICATIONS OF PROPOSALS: Any Bidder may modify his proposal by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the City Manager prior to the said proposal opening time, and provided further, that the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly authenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not received within forty-eight (48) hours after the proposal opening time, no further consideration will be given to the proposal. C2-2.10 PUBLIC OPENING OF PROPOSAL: Proposals which have been properly filed and for which no"Non-consideration Request' has been received will be publicly opened and read aloud by the City Manager or his authorized representative at the time and place indicated in the "Notice to Bidders." All proposals which have been opened and read will remain on file with the Owner until the contract has been awarded. Bidders or their authorized representatives are invited to be present for the opening of bids. C2-2.11 IRREGULAR PROPOSALS: Proposals shall be considered as "Irregular" if they show any omissions, alterations of form, additions, or conditions not called for, unauthorized alternate bids, or irregularities of any kind. However, the Owner reserves the right to waive any all irregularities and to make the award of the contract to the best interest of the City. Tendering a proposal after the closing hour is an irregularity which can not be waived. C2-2.12 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: Bidders may be disqualified and their proposals not considered for any of, but not limited to, the following reasons: a) Reasons for believing that collusion exists among bidders. b) Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than one proposal for work contemplated. c) The bidder being interested in any litigation against the Owner or where the Owner may have a claim against or be engaged in litigation against the bidder. d) The bidder being in arrears on any existing contract or having defaulted on a previous contract. e) The bidder having performed a prior contract in an unsatisfactory manner. f) Lack of competency as revealed by financial statement, experience statement, equipment schedule, and such inquiries as the Owner may see fit to make. g) Uncompleted work which, in the judgment of the Owner, will prevent or hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. h) The bidder not filing with the Owner, one week in advance of the hour of the opening of proposals the following: 1. Financial Statement showing the financial condition of the bidder as specified in Part"A" - Special Instructions 2. A current experience record showing especially the projects of a nature similar to the one under consideration, which have been successfully completed by the Bidder. 3. An equipment schedule showing the equipment the bidder has available for use on the project. The Bid Proposal of the bidder who, in the judgment of the Engineer, is disqualified under the requirements stated herein, shall be set aside and not opened. MWH - 05/18/07 INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C2-2(3) PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C3-3 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS SECTION C3-3 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS: C3-3.1 CONSIDERATION OF PROPOSALS: After proposals have been opened and read aloud, the proposals will be tabulated on the basis of the quoted prices, the quantities shown in the proposal, and the application of such formulas or other methods of bringing items to a common basis as may be established in the Contract Documents. The total obtained by taking the sum of the products of the unit prices quoted and the estimated quantities plus any lump sum items and such other quoted amounts as may enter into the cost of the completed project will be considered as the amount of the bid. Until the ward of the contract is made by the Owner, the right will be reserved to reject any or all proposals and waive technicalities, to re-advertise for new proposals, or to proceed with the work in any manner as may be considered for the best interest of the Owner. C3-3.2 MINORITY BUSINESS ENTER PRISE/WOMEN-OWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Contractor agrees to provide to Owner, upon request, complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and/or a Woman-owned Business Enterprise (WBE) on the contract and the payment therefor. Contractor further agrees, upon request by the Owner, to allow and audit and/or an examination of any books, records, or files in the possession of the Contractor that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MWE or WBE. Any material misrepresentation of any nature will be grounds for termination of the contract and for initiating any action under appropriate federal, state or local laws and ordinances relating to false statements; further, any such misrepresentation may be grounds for disqualification of Contractor at Owner's discretion for bidding on future Contracts with the Owner for a period of time of not less than six (6) months. C3-3.3 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall comply with Current City Ordinances prohibiting discrimination in employment practices. The Contractor shall post the required notice to that effect on the project site, and at his request, will be provided assistance by the City of Fort Worth's Equal Employment Officer who will refer any qualified applicant he may have on file in his office to the Contractor. Appropriate notices may be acquired from the Equal Employment Officer. C3-3.4 WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS: After a proposal has been read by the Owner, it cannot be withdrawn by the Bidder within forty-five (45) days after the date on which the proposals were opened. C 3-3.5 AWARD OF CONTRACT: The Owner reserves the right to withhold final action on the proposals for a reasonable time, not to exceed forty-five (45) days after the date of opening proposals, and in no event will an award be made until after investigations have been made as to the responsibility of the proposed awardee. The award of the contract, if award is made, will be to the lowest and best responsive bidder. The award of the contract shall not become effective until the Owner has notified the Contractor in writing of such award. C3-3.6 RETURN OF PROPOSAL SECURITIES: As soon as proposed price totals have been determined for comparison of bids, the Owner may, at its discretion, return the proposal security which accompanied the proposals which, in its judgment, would not be considered for the award. All MWH -05/18/07 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C3-3 (1) other proposal securities, usually those of the three lowest bidders, will be retained by the Owner until the required contract has been executed and bond furnished or the Owner has otherwise disposed of the bids, after which they will be returned by the City Secretary. C3-3.7 BONDS: With the execution and delivery of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall ' furnish to, and file with the owner in the amounts herein required, the following bonds: a. PERFORMANCE BOND: A good and sufficient performance bond in the amount of not less than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the full and faithful execution of the work and performance of the contract, and for the protection of the Owner and all other persons against damage by reason of negligence of the Contractor, or improper execution of the work or use of inferior materials. This performance bond shall guarantee the payment for all labor, materials, equipment, supplies, and services used in the construction of the work, and shall remain in full force and effect until provisions as above stipulated are accomplished and final payment is made on the project by the City. b. MAINTENANCE BOND: A good and sufficient maintenance bond, in the amount of not less than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the prompt, full and faithful performance of the general guaranty which is set forth in paragraph C8-8.10. C. PAYMENT BOND: A good and sufficient payment bond, in the amount of not less than 100 percent of the amount of the contract, as evidenced by the proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing the prompt, full and faithful payment of all claimants as defined in Article 5160, Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, 1925, as amended by House Bill 344, Acts 56t' Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, effective April 27, 1959, and/or the latest version thereof, supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract being constructed under these specifications. Payment Bond shall remain in force until all payments as above stipulated are made. d. OTHER BONDS: Such other bonds as may be required by these Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Contractor. No sureties will be accepted by the Owner which are at the time in default or delinquent on any bonds or which are interested in any litigation against the Owner. All bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by the Owner and shall be executed by an approved surety company doing business in the City of Fort Worth, Texas, and which is acceptable to the Owner. In order to be acceptable, the name of the surety shall be included on the current U.S. Treasury list of acceptable sureties, and the amount of bond written by any one acceptable company shall not exceed the amount shown on the Treasury list for that company. Each bond shall be properly executed by both the Contractor and Surety Company. Should any surety on the contract be determined unsatisfactory at any time by the Owner, notice will be given the Contractor to that effect and the Contractor shall immediately provide a new surety satisfactory to the Owner. No payment will be made under the contract until the new surety or sureties, as required, have qualified and have been accepted by the Owner. The contract shall not be operative nor will any payments be due or paid until approval of the bonds by the Owner. C3-3.8 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: Within ten (10) days after the Owner has appropriate resolution, or otherwise, awarded the contract, the Contractor shall execute and file with the Owner, the Contract and such bonds as may be required in the Contract Documents. MWH-05/18/07 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C3-3 (2) No Contract shall be binding upon the Owner until it has been attested by the City Secretary, approved as to form and legality by the City Attorney, and executed for the Owner by either the Mayor or City Manager. C3-3.9 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT: The failure of the Awardee to execute the required bond or bonds or to sign the required contract within ten (10) days after the contract is awarded shall be considered by the owner as an abandonment of his proposal, and the owner may annual the Award. By reason of the uncertainty of the market prices of material and labor, and it being impracticable and difficult to accurately determine the amount of damages occurring to the owner by reason of said awardee's failure to execute said bonds and contract within ten (10) days, the proposal security accompanying the proposal shall be the agreed amount of damages which the Owner will suffer by reason of such failure on the part of the Awardee and shall thereupon immediately by forfeited to the Owner. The filing of a proposal will be considered as acceptance of this provision by the Bidder. C-3-3.10 BEGINNING WORK:The Contractor shall not commence work until authorized in writing to do so by the Owner. Should the Contractor fail to commence work at the site of the project within the time stipulated in the written authorization usually termed 'Work Order' or "Proceed Order', it is agreed that the Surety Company will, within ten (10) days after the commencement date set forth in such written authorization, commence the physical execution of the contract. C3-3.11 INSURANCE:The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance required under the Contract Documents, and such insurance has been approved by the Owner. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for delivering to the Owner the sub-contractor's certificate of insurance for approval. The prime Contractor shall indicate on the certificate of insurance included in the documents for execution whether or not his insurance covers sub-contractors. It is the intention of the Owner that the insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all sub-contractors. `-awl a. COMPENSATION INSURANCE: The Contractor shall maintain, during the life of this contract, Worker's Compensation Insurance on all of his employees to be engaged in work on the project under this contract, and for all sub-contractors. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the project under this contract is not protected under the Worker's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide adequate employer's general liability insurance for the protection of such of his employees not so protected. b. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor Shall procure and shall maintain during the life of this contract, Comprehensive General Liability Insurance (Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance) in the amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence on account of bodily injury, including death, and in an amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence on account of property damage with $2,000,000 umbrella policy coverage. C. ADDITIONAL LIABILITY: The Contractor shall furnish insurance as a separate policies or by additional endorsement to one of the above-mentioned policies, and in the amount as set forth for public liability and property damage, the following insurance: 1. Contingent Liability (covers General Contractor's Liability for acts of sub- contractors). 2. Blasting, prior to any blasting being done. MWH- 05/18/07 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C3-3 (3) 3. Collapse of buildings or structures adjacent to excavation (if excavation are performed adjacent to same). .4. Damage to underground utilities for$500,000. 5. Builder's risk(where above-ground structures are involved). 6. Contractual Liability(covers all indemnification requirements of Contract). d. AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE - BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract, Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $250,000 for injuries including accidental death to any one person and subject to the same limit for each person an amount not less than $500,000 on account of one accident, and automobile property damage insurance in an amount not less than $100,000. e. SCOPE OF INSURANCE AND SPECIAL HAZARD: The insurance required under the above paragraphs shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his sub-contractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him, and also against any of the following special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of the Contract. f. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the owner with satisfactory proof of coverage by insurance required in these Contract Documents in the amounts and by carriers satisfactory to the Owner. (Sample attached.) All insurance requirements made upon the Contractor shall apply to the sub-contractors, should the Prime Contractor's insurance not cover the sub- contractor's work operations. g. LOCAL AGENT FOR INSURANCE AND BONDING: The insurance and bonding companies with whom the Contractor's insurance and performance, payment, maintenance and all such other bonds are written, shall be represented by an agent or agents having an office located within the city limits of the City of Fort Worth. Tarrant County, Texas. Each such agent shall be a duly qualified, one upon whom authority and power to act on behalf of the insurance and/or bonding company to negotiate and settle with the City of Fort Worth, or any other claimant, and claims that the City of Fort Worth or other claimant or any property owner who has been damaged, may have against the Contractor, insurance, and/or bonding company. If the local insurance representative is not so empowered by the insurance or bonding companies, then such authority must be vested in a local agent or claims officer residing in the Metroplex, the Fort Worth-Dallas area. The name of the agent, or agents shall be set forth on all such bonds and certificates of insurance. MWH-05/18/07 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C3-3 (4) C3-3.12 CONTRACTOR'S OBLIGATIONS: Under the Contract, the Contractor shall pay for all materials, labor and services when due. C3-3.13 WEEKLY PAYROLLS: A certified copy of each payroll covering payment of wages to all persons engaged in work on the project at the site of the project shall be furnished to the Owner's representative within seven (7) days after the close of each payroll period. A copy or copies of the applicable minimum wage rates as set forth in the Contract Documents shall be kept posted in a conspicuous place at the site of the project at all times during the course of the Contract. Copies of the wage rates will be furnished the Contractor, by the Owner; however, posting and protection of the wage rates shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. C3-3.14 CONTRACTOR'S CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION:Any Contractor, whether a person, persons, partnership, company, firm, association, corporation or other who is approved to do business with and enters into a contract with the City for construction of water and/or sanitary sewer facilities, will have or shall establish a fully operational business office within the Fort Worth-Dallas metropolitan area. The Contractor shall charge, delegate, or assign this office (or he may delegate his Project Superintendent) with full authority to transact all business actions required in the performance of the Contract. This local authority shall be made responsible to act for the Contractor in all matters made responsible to act for the Contractor in all matters pertaining to the work governed by the Contract whether it be administrative or other wise and as such shall be empowered, thus delegated and directed, to settle all material, labor or other expenditure, all claims against work or any other mater associated such as maintaining adequate and appropriate insurance or security coverage for the project. Such local authority for the administration of the work under the Contract shall be maintained until all business transactions executed as part of the Contract are complete. Should the Contractor's principal base of operations be other than in the Fort Worth-Dallas metropolitan area, notification of the Contractor's assignment of local authority shall be made in writing to the Engineer in advance of any work on the project, all appropriately signed and sealed, as applicable, by the Contractor's responsible offices with the understanding that this written assignment of authority to the local representative shall become part of the project Contract as though bound directly into the project documents. The intent of these requirements is that all matters associated with the Contractor's administration, whether it be oriented in furthering the work, or other, be governed direct by local authority. This same requirement is imposed on insurance and surety coverage. Should the Contractor's local representative fail to perform to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Engineer, at his sole discretion, may demand that such local representative be replaced and the Engineer may, at his sole discretion, stop all work until a new local authority satisfactory to the Engineer is assigned. No credit of working time will be allowed for periods in which work stoppages are in effect for this reason. C3-3.15 VENUE: Venue of any action hereinunder shall be exclusively in Tarrant County, Texas. MWH -05/18/07 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF DOCUMENTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C3-3 (5) PART C- GENERAL CONDITIONS C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION C4-4 SCOPE OF WORK C44.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: it is the definite intention of these Contract Documents to provide for a complete, useful project which the Contractor undertakes to construct or furnish, all in full compliance with the requirements and intent of the Contract Documents. It is definitely understood that the Contractor shall do all work as provided for in the Contract Documents, shall do all extra or special work as may be considered by the Owner as necessary to complete the project in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specifically stated in these Contract Documents, furnish all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, special services, and incidentals necessary to the prosecution and completion of the project. C4-4.2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS: Should any work or conditions which are not thoroughly and satisfactorily stipulated or covered by General or Special Conditions of these Contract Documents be anticipated, or should there be any additional proposed work which is not covered by these Contract Documents, the "Special Provisions" covering all such work will be prepared by the Owner previous to the time of receiving bids or proposals for any such work and furnished to the Bidder in the form of Addenda. All such "Special Provisions" shall be considered to be part of the Contract Documents just as though they were originally written therein. C4-4.3 INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES: The Owner reserves the right to alter the quantities of the work to be performed or to extend or shorten the improvements at any time when and as found to be necessary, and the Contractor shall perform the work as altered, increased or decreased at the unit prices. Such increased or decreased quantity shall not be more than twenty-five (25) percent of the contemplated quantity of such item or items. When such changes increase or decrease the original quantity of any item or items of work to be done or materials to be furnished by the 25 percent or more, then either party to the contract shall upon written request to the other party be entitled to a revised consideration upon that portion of the work above or below the 25 percent of the original quantity stated in the proposal; such revised consideration to be determined by special agreement or as hereinafter provided for "Extra Work." No allowance will be made for any changes in anticipated profits not shall such changes be considered as waiving or invalidating any conditions or provisions of the Contract Documents. Variations in quantities of sanitary sewer pipes in depth categories, shall be interpreted herein as applying to overall quantities of sanitary sewer pipe in each pipe size, but not to the various depth categories. MWH-05/18/07 SCOPE OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C44 (1) C4-4.4 ALTERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: By Change order, the owner reserves the right to make such changes in the Contract Documents and in the character or quantities of the work as may be necessary or desirable to insure completion in the most satisfactory manner, provided such changes do not materially alter the original Contract Documents or change the general nature of the project as a whole. Such changes shall not be considered as waiving or invalidating any condition or provision of the Contract Documents. C4-4.5 EXTRA WORK: Additional work made necessary by changes and alterations of the Contract Documents or of quantities or for other reasons for which no prices are provided in the Contract Documents, shall be defined as "Extra Work" and shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with these Contract Documents or approved additions thereto; provided however, that before any extra work is begun a "Change order" shall be executed or written order issued by the Owner to do the work for payments or credits as shall be determined by one or more combination of the following methods: a. Unit bid price previously approved. b. An agreed lump sum. C. The actual reasonable cost of (1) labor, (2) rental of equipment used on the extra work for the time so used at Associated General Contractors of America current equipment rental rates, (3) materials entering permanently into the project, and (4) actual cost of insurance, bonds, and social security as determined by the Owner, plus a fixed fee to be agreed upon but not to exceed 10 percent of the actual cost of such extra work. The fixed fee is not to include any additional profit to the Contractor for rental of equipment owner by him and used for extra work. The fee shall be full and complete compensation to cover the cost of superintendence, overhead, other profit, general and all other expense not included in (1), (2), (3), and (4) above. The Contractor shall keep accurate cost records on the form and in the method suggested by the Owner and shall give the Owner access to all accounts, bills, vouchers, and records relating to the Extra Work. No "Change Order" shall become effective until it has been approved and signed by each of the Contracting Parties. No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Owner. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation, he shall make written request to the Engineer for written orders authorizing such Extra Work, prior to beginning such work. Should a difference arise as to what does or dose not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment thereof, and the Engineer insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written orders and shall keep accurate account of the actual reasonable cost thereof as provided under method (Item C). Claims for extra work will not be paid unless the Contractor shall file his claim with the Owner within five (5) days before the time for making the first estimate after such work is done and unless the claim is supported by satisfactory vouchers and certified payrolls covering all labor and materials expended upon said Extra Work. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner such installation records of all deviations from the original Contract Documents as may be necessary to enable the Owner to prepare for permanent record a corrected set of plans showing the actual installation. The compensation agreed upon for "Extra Work" whether or not initiated by a "Change Order" shall be a full, complete and final payment for all costs Contractor incurs as a result or relating to the change or extra work, whether said costs are known, unknown, foreseen or unforeseen at that time, MWH- 05/18/07 SCOPE OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C4-4 (2) including without limitation, any costs for delay, extended overhead, ripple or impact cost, or any other effect on changed or unchanged work as a result of the change or extra work. C4-4.6 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION: Before commencing any work under this contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and receive the Owner's approval thereof, a "Schedule of Operations," showing by a straight line method the date of commencing and finishing each of the major elements of the Contract. There shall be also shown the estimated monthly cost of work for which estimates are to be expected. There shall be presented also a composite graph showing the anticipated progress of construction with the time being plotted horizontally and percentage of completion plotted vertically. The progress charts shall be prepared on 8-1/2" x 11" sheets and at least five black or blue line prints shall be furnished to the Owner. C4-4.7 PROGRESS SCHEDULES FOR WATER AND SEWER PLANT FACILITIES: Within ten (10) days prior to submission of the first monthly progress payment, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the owner for approval six copies of the schedule in which the Contractor proposes to carry on activities (including procurement of materials, plans, and equipment) and the contemplated dates for completing the same. The schedule shall be in the form of a time schedule Critical Path Method (CPM) network diagram. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall enter on the diagram the actual progress at the end of each partial payment period or at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also revise the schedule to reflect any adjustments in contract time approved by the Engineer. Three copies of the updated schedule shall be delivered at such intervals as directed by the Engineer. As a minimum, the construction schedule shall incorporate all work elements and activities indicated in the proposal and in the technical specifications. Prior to the final drafting of the detailed construction schedule, the Contractor shall review the draft schedule with the Engineer to ensure the Contractor's understanding of the contract requirements. The following guidelines shall be adhered to in preparing the construction schedule: a. Milestone dates and final project completion dates shall be developed to conform to the time constraints, sequencing requirements and completion time. b. The construction progress shall be divided into activities with time durations of approximately fourteen days (14) days and construction values not to exceed $50,000. Fabrication, delivery and submittal activities are exceptions to this guideline. C. Durations $hall be in calendar days and normal holidays and weather conditions over the duration of the contract shall be accounted for within the duration of each activity. d. One critical path shall be shown on the construction schedule. e. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities of the CPM construction schedule. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or the Owner. f. Thirty days shall be used for submittal review unless otherwise specified. The construction schedule shall as a minimum be divided into general categories as indicated in the Proposal and Technical Specifications and each general category shall be broken down into activities in enough detail to achieve activities of approximately fourteen (14) days duration. MWH-05/18/07 SCOPE OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PCTMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C4-4(3) For each general category, the construction schedule shall identify all trades or subcontracts whose work is represented by activities that follow the guidelines of this Section. For each of the trades or subcontracts, the construction schedule shall indicate the following procurements, construction and preacceptance activities and events in their logical sequence for equipment and materials. 1. Preparation and transmittal of submittals 2. Submittal review periods. 3. Shop fabrication and delivery. 4. Erection or installation. 5. Transmittal of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. 6. Installed equipment and materials testing. 7. Owner's operator instruction (if applicable). 8. Final inspection. 9. Operational testing. If, in the opinion of the Owner, work accomplished falls behind that scheduled, the Contractor shall take such action as necessary to improve his progress. In addition, the Owner may require the Contractor to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his program and proposed plan to make up lag in scheduled progress and to insure completion of the work within the contract time. if the owner finds the proposed plan not acceptable, he may require the Contractor to increase the work force, the construction plant and equipment, the number of work shifts or overtime operations without additional cost to the Owner. Failure of the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall be considered grounds for determination by the Owner that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with diligence as will insure its completion within the time specified. MWH-05/18/07 SCOPE OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C4-4(4) PART C -GENERAL CONDITIONS C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS SECTION C5-5 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS C5-5.1 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER:The work shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. The Engineer shall decide all questions which arise as to the quality and acceptability of the materials furnished, work performed, rate of progress of the work, overall sequence of the construction, interpretation of the Contract Documents, acceptable fulfillment of the Contract, compensation, mutual rights between Contractor and Owner under these Contract Documents, supervision of the work, resumption of operations, and all other questions or disputes which may arise. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequence or procedures of construction, or the safety precaution and programs incident thereto, and he will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents. The Engineer shall determine the amount and quality of the work completed and materials furnished, and his decisions and estimates shall be final. His estimates in such event shall be a condition to the right of the Contractor to receive money due him under the Contract. The Owner shall have executive authority to enforce and make effective such necessary decisions and orders as the Contractor fails to carry out promptly. In the event of any dispute between the Engineer and Contractor over the decision of the Engineer on any such matters, the Engineer must, within a reasonable time, upon written request of the Contractor, render and deliver to both the owner and Contractor, a written decision on the matter in controversy. C5-5.2 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS:The finished project in all cases shall conform with lines, grades, cross-sections, finish, and dimensions shown on the plans or any other requirements other wise described in the Contract Documents. Any deviation from the approved Contract Documents required by the Engineer during construction will in all cases be determined by the Engineer and authorized by the Owner by Change Order. C5-5.3 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are made up of several sections, which, taken together, are intended to describe and provide for a complete and useful project, and any requirements appearing in one of the sections is as binding as though it occurred in all sections. In case of discrepancies, figured dimension shall govern over scaled dimensions, plans shall govern over specifications, special conditions shall govern over general conditions and standard specification, and quantities shown on the plans shall govern over those shown in the proposal. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission in the Contract Documents, and the owner shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents. In the event the Contractor discovers an apparent error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call this condition to the attention of the Engineer. In the event of a conflict in drawings, specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which were not reported prior to the award of Contract, the Contractor shall be deemed to have quoted the most expensive resolution of the conflict. C5-5.4 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR:The Contractor will be furnished with three sets of Contract Documents and shall have available on the site of the project at all times, one set of such Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give to the work the constant attention necessary to facilitate the progress thereof and shall cooperate with the Engineer, his inspector, and other Contractors in every possible way. MWH- 05/18/07 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STANTION AND STORAGE TANK C5-5 (1) The Contractor shall at all times have competent personnel available to the project site for proper performance of the work. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times at the site of the project a competent, English-speaking superintendent and an assistant who are fully authorized to act as the Contractor's agent on the work. Such superintendent and his assistant shall be capable of reading and understanding the Contract Documents and shall receive and fulfill instructions from the ' Owner, the Engineer, or his authorized representatives. Pursuant to this responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall designate in writing to the project superintendent, to act as the Contractor's agent on the work. Such assistant project superintendent shall be a resident of Tarrant County, Texas, and shall be subject to call, as is the project superintendent, at any time of the day or night on any day of the week on which the Engineer determines that circumstances require the presence on the project site of a representative of the Contractor to adequately provide for the safety or convenience of the traveling public or the owners of property across which the project extends or the safety of the property contiguous to the project routing. The Contractor shall provide all facilities to enable the Engineer and his inspector to examine and inspect the workmanship and materials entering into the work. C5-5.5 EMERGENCY AND/OR RECTIFICATION WORK: When, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, a condition of emergency exists related to any part of the work, the Contractor, or the Contractor through his designated representative, shall respond with dispatch to a verbal request made by the Owner or Engineer to alleviate the emergency condition. Such a response shall occur day or night,whether the project is scheduled on a calendar-day or an working-day basis. Should the Contractor fail to respond to a request from the Engineer to rectify any discrepancies, omissions, or correction necessary to conform with the requirements of the project specifications or plans, the Engineer shall give the Contractor written notice that such work or changes are to be performed. The written notice shall direct attention to the discrepant condition and request the Contractor to take remedial action to correct the condition. In the event the Contractor does not take positive steps to fulfill this written request, or does not shoe just cause for not taking the proper action, within 24 hours, the City may take such remedial action with City forces or by contract. The City shall deduct an amount equal to the entire costs for such remedial action, plus 25%, from any funds due the Contractor on the project. C5-5.6 FIELD OFFICE: The Contractor shall provide, at no extra compensation, an adequate field office for use of the Engineer, if specifically called for. The field office shall be not less than 10 x 14 feet in floor area, substantially constructed, well heated, air conditioned, lighted, and weather proof, so that documents will not be damaged by the elements. C5-5.7 CONTRUCTION STAKES: The City, through its Engineer, will furnish the Contractor with all lines, grades, and measurements necessary to the proper prosecution and control of the work contracted under these Contract Documents, and lines, grades and measurements will be established by means of stakes or other customary method of marking as may be found consistent with good practice. These stakes or markings shall be set sufficiently in advance of construction operations to avoid delay. Such stakes or markings as may be established for Contractor's use or guidance shall be preserved by the Contractor until he is authorized by the Engineer to remove them. Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any stakes or markings have been carelessly or willfully destroyed, disturbed, or removed by the Contractor or any of his employees, the full cost of replacing such stakes or marks plus 25% will be charged against the Contractor, and the full amount will be deducted from payment due the Contractor. C5-5.8 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF CITY INSPECTOR: City Inspectors will be authorized to inspect all work done and to be done and all materials furnished. Such inspection may extend to all MWH- 05/18/07 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STANTION AND STORAGE TANK C5-5 (2) or any part of the work, and the preparation or manufacturing of the materials to be used or equipment to be installed. A City.Inspector may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed, to report any evidence that the materials being furnished or the work being performed by the Contractor fails to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents, and to call the attention of the Contractor to any such failure or other infringements. Such inspection or lack of inspection will not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the City Inspector as to the materials or equipment furnished or the manner of performing the work, the City Inspector will have the authority to reject materials or equipment, and/or to suspend work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. The City Inspector will not, however, be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, or release any requirement of these Contract Documents, nor to approve or accept any portion or section of the work, nor to issue any instructions contrary tot he requirement s of the Contract Documents. The City Inspector will in no case act as superintendent or foreman or perform any other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management or operation of the work. He will not accept from the Contractor any compensation in any form for performing any duties. The Contractor shell regard and obey the directions and instructions of the City Inspector or Engineer when the same are consistent with the obligations of the Contract Documents of the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders or instructions or the City Inspector, the Contractor may within six days make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision on the matter in Controversy. C5-5.9 INSPECTION: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work as performed is in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the Engineer so requests, the Contractor shall, at any time before acceptance of the work, remove or uncover such portion of the finished work as may be directed. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the work to the standard required by the Contract Documents. Should the work exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering or removing and replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall be paid for as extra work, but should Work so exposed or examined prove to be unacceptable, the uncovering or removing and replacing of all adjacent defective or damaged parts shall be at the Contractor's expense. No work shall be done or materials used without suitable supervision or inspection. C5-5.10 REMOVAL OF EDEFCTIVE AND UNAUTHORIZED WORK: All work, materials, or equipment which has been rejected shall be remedied or removed and replaced in an acceptable manner by the Contractor at this expense. Work done beyond the lines and grades given or as shown on the plans, except as herein specially provided, or any Extra Work done without written authority, will be considered as unauthorized and done at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for by the Owner. Work so done may be ordered removed at the Contractor's expense. Upon the failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with any order of the Engineer made under the provisions of this paragraph, the Engineer will have the authority to cause defective work to be remedied or removed and replaced and unauthorized work to be removed, and the cost thereof may be deducted from any money due or to become due tot he Contractor. Failure to require the removal of any defective or unauthorized work shall not constitute acceptance of such work. C5-5.11 SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT: If the Specifications, law, ordinance, codes or regulations permit Contractor to furnish or use a substitute that is equal to any material or equipment specified, and if Contractor wishes to furnish or use a proposed substitute, he shall, prior to the preconstruction conference, make written application to ENGINEER for approval of such substitute certifying in writing that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the function called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and be suited to the same use and capable of performing the same function as that specified ; and identifying all variations of the proposed substitute from that specified and indicating available maintenance MWH-05/18/07 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STANTION AND STORAGE TANK C5-5 (3) service. No substitute shall be ordered or installed without written approval of Engineer who will be the judge of the equality and may require Contractor to furnish such other data about the proposed substitute as he considers pertinent. No substitute shall be ordered or installed without such performance guarantee and bonds as Owner may require which shall be furnished at Contractor's expense. Contractor shall indemnity and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and anyone directly or indirectly employees by either of them from and against the claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out of the use of substituted materials or equipment. C5-5.12 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIALS: Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, or as called for in the Contract Documents, tests of materials or equipment are necessary, such tests will be made at the expense of and paid for direct to the testing agency by the Owner unless other wise specifically provided. The failure of the Owner to make any tests of materials shall in no way relieve the contractor of his responsibility of furnishing materials and equipment fully conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests and sampling of materials, unless otherwise specified, will be made in accordance with the latest methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing Materials or specific requirements of the Owner. The Contractor shall provide such facilities as the Engineer may require for collecting and forwarding samples and shall not, without specific written permission of the Engineer, use materials represented by the samples until tests have been made and the materials approved for use. The Contractor will furnish adequate samples without charge to the Owner. In case of concrete, the aggregates, design minimum, and the mixing and transporting equipment shall be approved by the Engineer before any concrete is placed, and the Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any concrete which does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Tests shall be made at least 9 days prior to the placing of concrete, using samples from the same aggregate, cement, and mortar which are to be used later in the concrete. Should the source of supply change, new tests shall be made prior to the use of new materials. C5-5.13 STORAGE OF MATERIALS:All materials which are to be used in the construction contract shall be stored so as to insure the preservation of quality and fitness of the work. When directed by the Engineer, they shall be placed on wooden platforms or other hard, clean durable surfaces and not on the ground, and shall be placed under cover when directed. Stored materials shall be placed and located so as to facilitate prompt inspection. C5-5.14 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES: The location and dimensions shown on the plans relative to the existing utilities are based on the best information available. Omission from, the inclusion of utility locations on the Plans is not to be considered as nonexistence of, or a definite location of, existing underground utilities. The location of many gas mains, water mains, conduits, sewer lines and service lines for all utilities, etc., is unknown to the Owner, and the Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all such structures and utilities on the plans or to show them in their exact location. It is mutually agreed that such failure will not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for Extra Work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever, unless an obstruction encountered is such as to necessitate changes in the lines and grades of considerable magnitude or requires the building of special works, provision of which is not made in these Contract Documents, in which case the provision in these Contract Documents for Extra Work shall apply. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify locations of the adjacent and/or conflicting utilities sufficiently in advance of construction in order that he may negotiate such local adjustments as necessary in the construction process to provide adequate clearances. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions in order to protect all existing utilities, structures, and service lines. Verification of existing utilities, structures, and service lines shall include notification of all utility companies at least forty eight (48) hours in advance of construction including exploratory excavation if necessary.All verification of utilities and their adjustment shall be considered subsidiary work. C5-5.15 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE: MWH- 05/18/07 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STANTION AND STORAGE TANK C5-5 (4) "NOTICE" Due to Utility Improvement in your neighborhood, your (water) (sewer) service will be interrupted on between the hours of and This inconvenience will be as short as possible. Thank You, Contractor Address Phone a. Normal Prosecution: In the normal prosecution of work where the interruption of service is necessary, the Contractor, at least 24 hours in advance, shall be required to: 1. Notify the Water Department's Distribution Division as to location, time, and schedule of service interruption. 2. Notify each customer personally through responsible personnel as to the time and schedule of the interruption of their service, or 3. In the event that personal notification of a customer cannot be made, a prepared tag form shall be attached to the customer's door knob. The tag shall be durable in composition, and in large bold letters shall say: b. Emergency In the event that an unforeseen service interruption occurs, notice shall be as above, but immediate. C5-5.16 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS: If, through act or neglect on the part of the Contractor, or any other Contractor or any sub-contractor shall suffer loss or damage of the work, the Contractor agrees to settle with such other Contractor or sub-contractor by agreement or arbitration. If such other Contractor or sub-contractor shall assert any claim against the owner on account of damage alleged to have been sustained, the owner will notify the Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the owner against any such claim. C5-5.17 CLEAN-UP: Clean-up of surplus and/or waste materials accumulated on the job site during the prosecution of the work under these Contract Documents shall be accomplished in keeping with a daily routine established to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Twenty-four (24) hours after written notice is given the Contractor that the clean-up on the job site is proceeding in a manner unsatisfactory to the Engineer, if the Contractor fails to correct the unsatisfactory procedure, the City may take such direct action as the Engineer deems appropriate to correct the clean-up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the written notice, and the costs of such direct action, plus 25 %of such costs, shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. Upon the completion of the project as a whole as covered by these Contract Documents, and before final acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the project all surplus and discarded materials, temporary structures, and debris of every kind. He shall leave the site of all work in a neat and orderly condition equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and MWH- 05/18/07 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STANTION AND STORAGE TANK C5-5 (5) materials installed by him and shall deliver over such materials and equipment in a bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. No extra compensation will be made to the Contractor for any clean-up required on the project. C5-5.18 FINAL INSPECTION:Whenever the work provided for in and contemplated under the Contract Documents has been satisfactorily completed and final clean-up performed, the Engineer will notify the proper officials of the Owner and request that a Final Inspection be made. Such inspection will be made within 10 days after such notification. After such final inspection, if the work and materials and equipment are found satisfactory, the Contractor will be notified in writing of the acceptance of the same after the proper resolution has been passed by the City Council. No time charge will be made against the Contractor between said date of notification of the Engineer and the date of final inspection of the work. MWH-05/18/07 CONTROL OF WORK AND MATERIALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STANTION AND STORAGE TANK C5-5 (6) PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY SECTION C6-6 LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY C6-6.1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all Federal and State Laws and City ordinances and regulations which in any way affect the conduct of the work or his operations, and shall observe and comply with all orders, laws, ordinances and regulations which exist or which may be enacted later by bodies having jurisdiction or authority for such enactment. No plea or misunderstanding or ignorance thereof will be considered. The Contractor and his Sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the City and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any and all claims or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, or order, whether it be by himself or his employees. C6-6.2 PERMITS AND LICENSES: The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges, costs and fees, and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work. C6-6.3 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS,AND PROCESSES: If the Contractor is required or desires to use any design, device, material, or process covered by letter, patent, or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner of such patent, letter, or copyrighted design. It is mutually agreed and understood that without exception the contract price shall include all royalties or cost arising from patents, trade-marks, and copyrights in any way involved in the work. The Contractor and his sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such trade-mark or copyright in connection with the work agreed to be performed under these Contract Documents, and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost, expense, or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion of the work, provided, however, that the Owner will assume the responsibility to defend any and all suits brought for the infringement of any patent claimed to be infringed upon the design, type of construction or material or equipment specified in the Contract Documents furnished the Contractor by the Owner, and to hold the Contractor harmless on account of such suits. C6-6.4 SANITARY PROVISIONS: The Contractor shall establish and enforce among his employees such regulations in regard to cleanliness and disposal of garbage and waste as will tend to prevent the inception and spread of infectious or contagious diseases and to effectively prevent the creation of a nuisance about the work on any property either public or private, and such regulations as are required by Law shall be put into immediate force and effect by the Contractor. The necessary sanitary conveniences for use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor and their use shall be strictly enforced by the Contractor. All such facilities shall be kept in a clean and sanitary condition, free from objectionable odors so as not to cause a nuisance. All sanitary laws and regulations of the State of Texas and the City shall be strictly complied with. C6-6.5 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE: Materials or equipment stored about the work shall be placed and used, and the work shall at all times be so conducted, as to cause no greater obstruction or inconvenience to the public than is considered to be absolutely necessary by the Engineer. The Contractor is required to maintain at all times all phases of his work in such a manner as not to impair the safety or convenience of the public, including, but not limited to, safe and convenient ingress and egress to the property contiguous tot he work area. The Contractor shall make adequate provisions to render reasonable ingress and egress for normal vehicular traffic, except during actual trenching or pipe installation operations, at all driveway crossings. Such provisions may include bridging, placement or crushed stone or gravel or such other means of providing proper ingress and egress for the property served by the driveway as the Engineer may approve as appropriate. Such other means may include the diversion of driveway traffic, with MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C6-6(1) specific approval by the Engineer, If diversion of traffic is approved by the Engineer at any location, the Contractor may make arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer for the diversion of traffic, and shall, at his expense, provide all materials and perform all work necessary for the construction and maintenance of roadways and bridges for such diversion of traffic. Sidewalks must not be obstructed except by special permission of the Engineer, The materials excavated and the construction materials such as pipe used in construction of the work shall be placed so as not to endanger the work or prevent free access to all fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, police call boxes, water valves, gas valves, or manholes in the vicinity. The Owner reserves the right to remedy any neglect on the part of the Contractor as regards to public convenience and safety which may come to its attention, after twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor, save in cases of emergency when it shall have the right to remedy any neglect without notice, and in either case, the cost of such work or materials furnished by the Owner or by the City shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. The Contractor, after approval of the Engineer, shall notify the Fire Department Headquarters, Traffic Engineer, and Police Department, when any street or alley is requested to be closed or obstructed or any fire hydrant is to be made inaccessible, and when so directed by the Engineer, shall keep any street, streets, or highways in condition for unobstructed use by fire apparatus. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Fire Department Headquarters when all such obstructed streets, alleys, or hydrants are placed back in service. Where the Contractor is required to construct temporary bridges or make other arrangements for crossing over ditches or streams, his responsibility for accidents in connection with such crossings shall include the roadway approaches as well as the structures of such crossings. The Contractor shall at all times conduct his operation and use of construction machinery so as not to damage or destroy trees and scrubs located in close proximity to or on the site of the work. Wherever any such damage may be done, the Contractor shall immediately satisfy all claims of property owners, and no payment will be made by the Owner in settlement of such claims. The Contractor shall file with the Engineer a written statement showing all such claims adjusted. C6-6.6 PRIVILEGES OF CONTRACTOR IN STREETS ALLEYS AND RIGHT-OF-WAY: For the performance of the contract, the Contractor will be permitted to use and occupy such portions of the public streets and alleys, or other public places or other rights-of-way as provided for in the ordinances of the City, as shown in the Contract Documents, or as may be specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. A reasonable amount of tools, materials, and equipment for construction purposes may be stored in such space, but no more than is necessary to avoid delay in the construction operations. Excavated and waste materials shall be piled or staked in such a way as not to interfere with the use of spaces that may be designated to be left free and unobstructed and so as not to inconvenience occupants of adjacent property. If the street is occupied by railroad tracks, the work shall be carried on in such manner as not to interfere with the operation of trains, loading or unloading of cars, etc. Other contractors of the Owner may, for all purposes required by the contract, enter upon the work and premises used by the Contractor and shalt be provided all reasonable facilities and assistance for the completion of adjoining work. Any additional grounds desired by the Contractor for his use shall be provided by him at his own cost and expense. C6-6.7 RAILWAY CROSSINGS: When the work encroaches upon any right-of-way of any railroad, the City will secure the necessary easement for the work. Where the railroad tracks are to be crossed, the Contractor shall observe all the regulations and instructions of the railroad company as to the methods of performing the work and take all precautions for the safety of property and the public. Negotiations with the railway companies for the permits shall be done by and through the City. The Contractor shall give the City Notice not less than five days prior to the time of his intentions to begin work on that portion of the project which is related to the railway properties. The MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C6-6(2) Contractor will not be given extra compensation for such railway crossings unless specifically set forth in the Contract Documents. C6-6.8 BARRICADES, WARNINGS AND WATCHMEN: Where the work is carried on in or adjacent to any street, alley, or public place, the Contractor shall at his own expense furnish, erect, and maintain such barricades, fences, lights, and danger signals, shall provide such watchman, and shall take all such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the work as are necessary. Barricades and fences shall be painted in a color that will be visible at night. From sunset to sunrise the Contractor shall furnish and maintain at least one easily visible burning light at each barricade. A sufficient number of barricades shall be erected and maintained to keep pedestrians away from, and vehicles from being driven on or into, any work under construction or being maintained. The Contractor shall furnish watchmen and keep them at their respective assignments in sufficient numbers to protect the work and prevent accident or damage. All installations and procedures shall be consistent with provisions set forth in the "1980 Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" issued under the authority of the "State of Texas Uniform Act-Regulating Traffic on Highways", codified as Article 6701d Veron's Civil Statues, pertinent section being Section Nos. 27, 29, 30 and 31. The Contractor will not r@move any regulatory sign, instructional sign, street name sign, or other sign which has been erected by the City. If it is determined that a sign must be removed to permit required construction, the Contractor shall contact the Transportation and Public Works Department, Signs and Markings Division (phone number 871-8075), to remove the sign. In case of regulatory signs, the Contractor must replace the permanent sign with a temporary sign meeting the requirements of the above referred manual and such temporary sign must be installed prior to the removal of the permanent sign. If the temporary sign is not installed correctly or if it does not meet the required specifications, the permanent sign shall be left in place until the temporary sign requirements are met. When construction work is completed to the extent that the permanent sign can be re-installed, the Contractor shall again contact the Signs and Markings Division to re-install the permanent sign and shall leave his temporary sign in place until such re-installation is completed. The Contractor will be held responsible foe all damage to the work or the public due to failure of barricades, signs, fences, lights, or watchmen to protect them. Whenever evidence is found of such damage to the work the Engineer may order the damaged portion immediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, fences and lights, and for providing watchmen shall not cease until the project shall have been completed and accepted by the Owner. No compensaton, except as specifically provided in these Contract Documents, will be paid to the Contractor for the Work and materials involved in the constructing, providing, and maintaining of barricades, signs, fences, and lights or salaries of watchmen, for the subsequent removal and disposal of such barricades, signs, or for any other incidentals necessary for the proper protection, safety, and convenience of the public during the contract period, as this work is considered to be subsidiary to the several items for which unit or lump sum prices are requested in the Proposal. C6-6.9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES, DROP WEIGHT, ETC.: Should the Contractor elect to use explosives, drop weight, etc., in the prosecution of the work, the utmost care shall be exercised at all times so as not to endanger life or property. The Contractor shall notify the proper representative of any public service corporation, any company, individual, or utility, and the Owner, not less than twenty-four hours in advance of the use of any activity which might damage or endanger their or his property along or adjacent to the work. MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C6-6(3) Where the use of explosives is to be permitted on the project, as specified in the Special Conditions Documents, or the use of explosives is requested, the Contractor shall submit notice to the Engineer in writing twenty-four hours prior to commencing and shall furnish evidence that he has insurance coverage to protect against any damages and/or injuries arising out of such use of explosives. C6-6.10 WORK WITHIN EASEMENTS: Where the work passes over, through, or into private property, the Owner will provide such right-of-way or easement privileges as the City may deem necessary for the prosecution of the work. Any additional rights-of-way or work area considered necessary by the Contractor shall be provided by him at his expense. Such additional rights-of-way or work area shall be acquired for the benefit of the City. The City shall be notified in writing as to the rights so acquired before work begins in the affected area. The Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any purpose without having previously obtained permission from the owner of such property. The Contractor will not be allowed to store equipment or material on private property unless and until the specified approval of the property owner has been secured in writing by the Contractor and a copy furnished to the Engineer. Unless specifically provided otherwise, the Contractor shall clear all rights-of-way or easements of obstructions which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the work as a part of the project construction operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of and shall use every precaution to prevent damage to, all tress, shrubbery, plants, lawns, fences, culverts, curbing, and all other types of structures or improvements, to all water, sewer, and gas lines, to all conduits, overhead pole lines, or appurtenances thereof, including the construction of temporary fences and to all other public or private property adjacent to the work. The Contractor shall notify the proper representatives of the owners or occupants of the public or private lands of interest in lands which might be affected by the work. Such notice shall be made at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the work. Notices shall be applicable to both public and private utility companies or any corporation, company, individual, or other, either as owners or occupants, whose land or interest in land might be affected by the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method or execution of the work, or at any time due to defective work, material, or equipment. When and where any direct or indirect or injury is done to public or private property on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in consequence of non- execution thereof on the part of the Contractor, he shall restore or have restored as his cost and expense such property to a condition at least equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done, by repairing, rebuilding, or otherwise replacing and restoring as may be directed by the Owner, or he shall make good such damages or injury in a manner acceptable to the owner of the property and the Engineer. All fences encountered and removed during construction of this project shall be restored to the original or a better than original condition upon completion of this project. When wire fencing, either wire mesh or barbed wire is to be crossed, the Contractor shall set cross brace posts on either side of the permanent easement before the fence is cut. Should additional fence cuts be necessary, the Contractor shall provide cross braced posts at the point of the proposed cut in addition to the cross braced posts provided at the permanent easements limits, before the fence is cut. Temporary fencing shall be erected in place of the fencing removed whenever the work is not in progress and when the site is vacated overnight, and/or at all times to prevent livestock from entering the construction area. The cost for fence removal, temporary closures and replacement shall be subsidiary to the various items bid in the project proposal. Therefore, no separate payment shall be allowed for any service associated with this work. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property or to make good such damage or injury, the Owner may, upon 48 hour written notice under ordinary circumstances, and MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C6-6(4) without notice when a nuisance or hazardous condition results, proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be determined by the Owner to be necessary, and the cost thereby will be deducted from any monies due to or to become due to the Contractor under this contract. C6.6.11 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: It is understood and agreed by the parties hereto that the Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor, and not as an officer, agent, servant, or employee of the Owner. Contractor shall have exclusive control of and exclusive right to control the details of all work and services performed hereunder, and all persons performing the same, and shall be solely responsible for the acts and omissions of its officers, agents, servants, employees, contractor, subcontractors, licensees and invitees. The doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply as between Owner and Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors and subcontractors, and nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership Or joint enterprise between Owner and Contractor. C6-6.12 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Contractor covenants and agrees to, and does hereby indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner, its officers, agents, servants, and employees from and against any and all claims or suits for property damage or loss and/or personal injury, including death, to any and all persons, of whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out of or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart, by alleged negligence on the part of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees of the Owner; and said Contractor does hereby covenant and agree to assume all liability and responsibility of Owner, its officers, agents, servants, and employees for property damage or loss, and/or personal injuries, including death, to any and all person of whatsoever kind or character, whether real or asserted, arising out of or in connection with, directly or indirectly, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not caused, in whole or in apart, by alleged negligence of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees or invitees of the Owner. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to, and does hereby, indemnify and hold harmless Owner from and against any and all injuries, loss or damages to property of the Owner during the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether arising out of or in connection with or resulting from, in whole or in apart, any and all alleged acts of omission of officers, agents, employees, contractors, subcontractors, licensees, or invitees of the Owner. In the event a written claim for damages against the contractor or its subcontractors remains unsettled at the time all work on the project has been completed to the satisfaction of the Director of the Water Department, as evidenced by a final inspection, final payment to the Contractor shall not be recommended to the Director of the Water Department for a period of 30 days after the date of such final inspection, unless the Contractor shall submit written evidence satisfactory to the Director that the claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved. If the claims concerned remains unsettled as of the expiration of the above 30-day period, the Contractor may be deemed to be entitled to a semi-final payment for work completed, such semi- final payment to be in the amount equal to the total dollar amount then due less the dollar value of any written claims pending against the Contractor arising out of performance of such work, and such semi-final payment may then be recommended by the Director. The Director shall not recommend final payment to a Contractor against whom such a claim for damages is outstanding for a period of six months following the date of the acceptance of the work performed unless the Contractor submits evidence in writing satisfactory tot he Director that: 1. The claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the claimant involved, or MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C6-6(5) 2. Good faith efforts have been made to settle such outstanding claims, and such good faith efforts have failed. If condition (1) above is met at any time within the six month period, the Director shall recommend that the final payment to the Contractor be made. If condition (2) above is met at any time within the six month period, the Director may recommend that final payment to the Contractor be made. At the expiration of the six month period, the Director may recommend that final payment be made if all other work has been performed and all other obligations of the Contractor have been met to the satisfaction of the Director. The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other Water Department Contract work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract. C6-6.13 CONTRACTOR'S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES: Should the Contractor claim compensation foe any alleged damage by reason of the acts or omissions of the Owner, he shall within three days after the actual sustaining of such alleged damage, make a written statement to the Engineer, setting out in detail the nature of the alleged damage, and on or before the 251h day of the month succeeding that in which ant such damage is claimed to have been sustained, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer an itemized statement of the details and the amount of such alleged damage and, upon request, shall give the Engineer access to all books of account, receipts, vouchers, bills of lading, and other books or papers containing any evidence as to the amount of such alleged damage. Unless such statements shall be filed as herein above required, the Contractor's claim for compensation shall be waived, and he shall not be entitled to payment on account of such damages. C6-6 14 ADJUSTMENT OR RELOCATION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES ETC.: In case it is necessary to change, move, or alter in any manner the property of a public utility or others, the said property shall not be moved or interfered with until orders thereupon have been issued by the Engineer. The right is reserved to the owners of public utilities to enter the geographical limits of the Contract for the purpose of making such changes or repairs to the property that may be necessary by the performance of this Contract. C6-6.15 TEMPORARY SEWER AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS: When existing sewer lines have to be taken up or removed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense and cost, provide and maintain temporary outlets and connections for all private or public drains and sewers. The Contractor shall also take care of all sewage and drainage which will be received from these drains and sewers, and for this purpose he shall provide and maintain, at his own cost and expense, adequate pumping facilities and temporary outlets or divisions. The Contractor, at his own cost and expense, shall construct such troughs, pipes, or other structures necessary, and be prepared at all times to dispose of drainage and sewage received from these temporary connections until such times as the permanent connections are built and are in service. The existing sewers and connections shall be kept in service and maintained under the Contract, except when specified or ordered to be abandoned by the Engineer. All water, sewage, and other waste shall be disposed of in a satisfactory manner so that no nuisance is created and so that the work under construction will be adequately protected. C6-6.16 ARRANGEMENT AND CHARGES FOR WATER FURNISHED BY THE CITY: When the Contractor desires to use City water in connection with any construction work, he shall make complete and satisfactory arrangements with the Fort Worth City Water Department for so doing. MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK r_, City water furnished to the Contractor shall be delivered to the Contractor from a connection on an existing City main. All piping required beyond the point of delivery shall be installed by the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor's responsibility in the use of all existing fire hydrant and/or valves is detailed in Section E2-1.2 USE OF FIRE HYDRANTS AND VALVES in these General Contract Documents. When meters are used to measure the water, the charges, if any, for water will be made at the regular established rates. When meters are not used, the charges, if any, will be as prescribed by the City ordinance, or where no ordinances applies, payment shall be made on estimates and rates established by the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department. C 6-6.17 USE OF A SECTION OR PORTION OF THE WORK: Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any section or portion of the work or any structure is in suitable condition, it may be put into use upon the written notice of the Engineer, and such usage shall not be held to be in any way an acceptance of said work or structure or any part thereof or as a waiver of any of the provisions of these Contract Documents. All necessary repairs and removals of any section of the work so put into use, due to defective materials or workmanship, equipment, or deficient operations on the part of the Contractor, shall be performed by the Contractor at his expense. C6-6.18 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE WORK: Until written acceptance by the Owner as provided for in these Contract Documents, the work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution to prevent injury or damage to the work or any part thereof by action of the elements or from any cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution or nonexecution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good at his own expense all injuries or damage to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the herein above causes. C6-6.19 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS: Inspection by the Engineer or any order by the Owner by payment of money or any payment for or acceptance of any work, or any extension of time, or any possession taken by the City shall not operate as a waiver of any provision of the Contract Documents. Any waiver of any breach or Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. The Owner reserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any estimate that may have been paid and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. C6-6.20 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS: In carrying out the provisions of these Contract Documents or in exercising any power of authority granted thereunder, there shall be no liability upon the authorized representative of the Owner, either personally or other wise as they are agents and representatives of the City. C6-6.21 STATE SALES TAX: On a contract awarded by the City of Fort Worth, and organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant the provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor may purchase, rent or lease all materials, supplies and equipment used or consumed in the performance of this contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption certificate in lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate to comply with State Comptroller's Ruling .007. Any such exemption certificate issued to the Contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to and shall comply with the provision of State Comptroller's Ruling .011, and any other applicable State Comptroller's rulings pertaining to the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act. On a contract awarded by a developer for the construction of a publicly-owner improvement in a street right-of-way or other easement which has been dedicated to the public and the City of Fort Worth, an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant the provisions of Article 20.04 (H) of MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C6-6(7) the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act, the Contractor can probably be exempted in the same manner stated above. Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act permits and information can be obtained from: Comptroller of Public Accounts Sales Tax Division Capitol Station Austin, TX w MWH-05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH LEGAL RELATIONS AND PUBLIC RESPONSIBILITY MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C6-6(8) PART C-GENERAL CONDITIONS C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS SECTION C7-7 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS: C7-7.1 SUBLETTING:The Contractor shall perform with his own organization, and with the assistance of workmen under his immediate superintendence, work of a value of not less than fifty (50%) percent of the value embraced on the contract. If the Contractor sublets any part of the work to be done under these Contract Documents, he will not under any circumstances be relieved of the responsibility and obligation assumed under these Contract Documents. All transactions of the Engineer will be with the Contractor. Subcontractors will be considered only in the capacity of employees or workmen of the Contractor and shall be subject tot he same requirements as to character and competency. The Owner will not recognize any subcontractor on the work. The Contractor shall at all times, when the work is in operation, be represented either in person or by a superintendent or other designated representatives. C7-7.2 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT: The Contractor shall not assign, transfer, sublet, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his rights, title, or interest in or to the same or any part thereof without the previous consent of the Owner expressed by resolution of the City Council and concurred in by the Sureties. If the Contractor does, without such previous consent, assign, transfer, sublet, convey, or otherwise dispose of the contract or his right, title, or interest therein or any part thereof, to any person or persons, partnership, company, firm, or corporation, or does by bankruptcy, voluntary or involuntary, or by assignment under the insolvency laws of any states, attempt to dispose of the contract may, at the option of the Owner be revoked and annulled, unless the Sureties shall successfully complete said contract, and in the event of any such revocation or annulment, any monies due or to become due under or by virtue of said contract shall be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages for the reason that it would be impracticable and extremely difficult to fix the actual damages. C7-7.3 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK: Prior to beginning any construction operations, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in five or more copies, if requested by the Engineer, a progress schedule preferably in chart or diagram form, or a brief outlining in detail and step by step the manner of prosecuting the work and ordering materials and equipment which he expects to follow in order to complete the project in the scheduled time. There shall be submitted a table of estimated amounts to be earned by the Contractor during each monthly estimate period. The Contractor shall commence the work to be performed under this contract within the time limit stated in these Contract Documents and shall conduct the work in a continuous manner and with sufficient equipment, materials, and labor as is necessary to insure its completion within the time limit. The sequence requested of all construction operations shall be at all times as specified in the Special Contract Documents. Any Deviation from such sequencing shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. Contractor shall not proceed with any deviation until he has received written approval from the Engineer. Such specification or approval by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from full responsibility of the complete performance of the Contract. The contract time may be changed only as set forth in Section C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF TIME OF COMPLETION of this Agreement, and a progress schedule shall not constitute a change in the contract time. C7-7.4 LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS: The working operations shall at all times be conducted by the Contractor so as to create a minimum amount of inconvenience to the public. At any time when, in the judgment of the Engineer, the Contractor has obstructed or closed or is MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(1) carrying on operations in a portion of a street or public way greater than is necessary for proper execution of the work, the Engineer may require the Contractor to finish the section on which operations are in progress before the work is commenced on any additional section or street. C7-7.5 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT: Local labor shall be used by the Contractor when it is available. The Contractor may bring from outside the City of Fort Worth his key men and his superintendent. All other workmen, including equipment operators, may be imported only after the local supply is exhausted. The Contractor shall employ only such superintendents, foremen, and workmen who are careful, competent, and fully qualified to perform the duties and tasks assigned to them, and the Engineer may demand and secure the summary dismissal of any person or persons employed by the Contractor in or about or on the work who, in the opinion of the Owner, shall misconduct himself or to be found to be incompetent, disrespectful, intemperate, dishonest, or otherwise objectionable or neglectful in the proper performance of his or their duties, or who neglect or refuses to comply with or carry out the direction of the owner, and such person or persons shall not be employed again thereon without written consent of the Engineer. All workmen shall have sufficient skill, ability, and experience to properly perform the work assigned to them and operate any equipment necessary to properly carry out the performance of the assigned duties. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain on the work all such equipment as is considered to be necessary for the prosecution of the work in an acceptable manner and at a satisfactory rate of progress. All equipment, tools, and machinery used for handling materials and executing any part of the work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be maintained in a satisfactory, safe and efficient working condition. Equipment on any portion of the work shall be such that no injury to the work. Workmen or adjacent property will result from its use. C7-7.6 WORK SCHEDULE: Elapsed working days shall be computed starting with the first day of the work completed as defined in C1-1.23 "WORKING DAYS" or the date stipulated in the "WORK ORDER" for beginning work, whichever comes first. Nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the Contractor from working on Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holidays, providing that the following requirements are met: a. A request to work on a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday must be made to the Engineer no later that the preceding Thursday. b. Any work to be done on the project on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday must be, in the opinion of the Engineer, essential to the timely completion of the project. The Engineer's decision shall be final in response to such a request for approval to work on a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday, and no extra compensation shall be allowed to the Contractor for any work performed on such a specific Saturday, Sunday or Legal Holiday. Calendar Days shall be defined in C1-1.24 and the Contractor may work as he so desires. C7-7.7 TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION: The Contractor shall commence the working operations within the time specified in the Contract Documents and set forth in the Work Order. Failure to do so shall be considered by the owner as abandonment of the Contract by the Contractor and the Owner may proceed as he sees fit. The Contractor shall maintain a rate of progress such as will insure that the whole work will be performed and the premises cleaned up in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the time established in such documents and such extension of time as may be properly authorized. MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(2) C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF TIME COMPLETION: The Contractor's request for an extension of time of completion shall be considered only when the request for such extension is submitted in writing to the Engineer within seven days from and after the time alleged cause of delay shall occurred. Should an extension of the time of completion be requested such request will be forwarded to the City Council for approval. In adjusting the contract time for completion of work, consideration will be given to unforeseen causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, fire, flood, tornadoes, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, embargoes, or delays of sub-contractors due to such causes. When the date of completion is based on a calendar day bid, a request for extension of time because of inclement weather will not be considered. A request for extension of time due to inability to obtain supplies and materials will be considered only when a review of the Contractor's purchase order dates and other pertinent data as requested by the Engineer indicates that the Contractor has made a bonafide attempt to secure delivery on schedule. This shall include efforts to obtain the supplies and materials from alternate sources in case the first source cannot make delivery. If satisfactory execution and completion of the contract should require work and materials in greater amounts or quantities than those set forth in the approved Contract Documents, then the contract time mat be increased by Change Order. C7-7.9 DELAYS: The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the work, except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or material, if any, which is to be furnished by the City. When such extra compensation is claimed, a written statement thereof shall be presented by the Contractor to the Engineer and if by the Engineer found correct, shall be approved and referred by the Engineer to the City Council for final approval or disapproval; and the action thereon by the City Council shall be final and binding. If delay is caused by specific orders given by the Engineer to stop work, or by the performance of extra work, or by the failure of the City to provide material or necessary instructions for carrying on the work, then such delay will entitle the Contractor to an equivalent extension of time, his application for shall, however, be subject to the approval of the City Council: and no such extension of time shall release the Contractor or the surety on his performance bond from all his obligations hereunder which shall remain in full force until the discharge of the contract. C7-7.10 TIME OF COMPLETION: The time of completion is an essential element of the Contract. Each bidder shall indicate in the appropriate place on the last page of the proposal, the number of working days or calendar days that he will require to fully complete this contract or the time of completion will be specified by the City in the proposal section of the Contract Documents. The number of days indicated shall be a realistic estimate of the time required to complete the work covered by the specific contract being bid upon. The amount of time so stated by the successful bidder or the City will become the time of completion specified in the Contract Documents. For each calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time specified in the Contract Documents, or increased time granted by the Owner, or as automatically increased by additional work or materials ordered after the contract is signed, the sum per day given in the following schedule, unless otherwise specified in other parts of the Contract Documents, will be deducted from the monies due the Contractor, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages suffered by the Owner. AMOUNT OF CONTRACT AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(3) PER DAY Less than $ 5,000 inclusive $ 35.00 $ 5,001 to $ 15,000 inclusive $ 45.00 $ 15,001 to $ 25,000 inclusive $ 63.00 $ 25,001 to $ 50,000 inclusive $ 105.00 $ 50,001 to $ 100,000 inclusive $ 154.00 $ 100,001 to $ 500,000 inclusive $ 210.00 $ 500,001 to $ 1,000,000 inclusive $ 315.00 $ 1,000,001 to $ 2,000,000 inclusive $ 420.00 $ 2,000,000 and over $ 630.00 The parties hereto understand and agree that any harm to the City caused by the Contractor's delay in completing the work hereunder in the time specified by the Contract Documents would be incapable or very difficult to calculate due to lack of accurate information, and that the "Amount of Liquidated Damages Per Day", as set out above, is a reasonable forecast of just compensation due the City for harm caused by any delay. C7-7.11 SUSPENSION BY COURT ORDER: The Contractor shall suspend operations on such part or parts of the work ordered by any court, and will not be entitled to additional compensation by virtue of such court order. Neither will he be liable to the City in the vent the work is suspended by a Court Order. Neither will the Owner be liable to the Contractor by virtue of any Court Order or action for which the Owner is not solely responsible. C7-7.12 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION: The Owner shall have the right to suspend the work operation wholly or in part for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather conditions or any other unsuitable conditions which in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer cause further prosecution of the work to be unsatisfactory or detrimental to the interest of the project. During temporary suspension of the work covered by this contract, for any reason, the Owner will make no extra payment for stand-by time of construction equipment and/or construction crews. If it should become necessary to suspend work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public unnecessarily nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed; he shall provide suitable drainage about the work, and erect temporary structures where necessary. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the project due to causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor as set forth in Paragraph C7-7.8 EXTENSION OF THETIME OF COMPLETION, and should it be determined by mutual consent of the Contractor and the Engineer that a solution to allow construction to proceed is not available within a reasonable period of time, then the Contractor may be reimbursed for the cost of moving his equipment off the job and returning the necessary equipment to the job when it is determined by the Engineer that construction may be resumed. Such reimbursement shall be based on actual cost to the Contractor of moving the equipment and no profit will be allowed. No reimbursement shall be allowed if the equipment is moved to another construction project for the City of Fort Worth. The Contractor shall not suspend work without written notice from the Engineer and shall proceed with the work operations promptly when notified by the Engineer to so resume operations. C7-7.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT DUE TO NATIONAL EMERGENCY: Whenever, because of National Emergency, so declared by the president of the United States or other lawful authority, it becomes impossible for the Contractor to obtain all of the necessary labor, materials, and MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(4) equipment for the prosecution of the work with reasonable continuity for a period of two months, the Contractor shall within seven days notify the City in writing, giving a detailed statement of the efforts which have been made and listing all necessary items of labor, materials, and equipment not obtainable. If, after investigations, the owner finds that such conditions existing and that the inability of the Contractor to proceed is not attributable in whole or in part to the fault or neglect of the Contractor, than if the Owner cannot after reasonable effort assist the Contractor in procuring and making available the necessary labor, materials, and equipment within thirty days, the Contractor my request the owner to terminate the contract and the owner may comply with the request, and the termination shall be conditioned and based upon a final settlement mutually acceptable to both the Owner and the Contractor and final payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the agreed settlement, which shall include. But not be limited to the payment for all work executed but not anticipated profits on work which has not been performed. C7-7.14 SUSPENSION OR ABANDONMENT OF THE WORK AND ANNULMENT OF THE CONTRACT: The work operations on all or any portion or section of the work under Contract shall be suspended immediately on written order of the Engineer or the Contract may be declared canceled by the City Council for any good and sufficient cause. The following, by way of example, but not of limitation, may be considered grounds for suspension or cancellation: a. Failure of the Contractor to commence work operations within the time specified in the Work Order issued by the Owner. b. Substantial evidence that progress of the work operations by the Contractor is insufficient to complete the work within the specified time. C. Failure of the Contractor to provide and maintain sufficient labor and equipment to properly execute the working operations. d. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has abandoned the work. e. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has become insolvent or bankrupt, or otherwise financially unable to carry on the work satisfactorily. f. Failure on the part of the Contractor to observe any requirements of the Contract Documents or to comply with any orders given by the Engineer or Owner provided for in these Contract Documents. g. Failure of the Contractor promptly to make good any defect in materials or workmanship, or any defects of any nature the correction of which has been directed in writing by the Engineer or the Owner. h. Substantial evidence of collusion for the purpose of illegally procuring a contract or perpetrating fraud on the City in the construction of work under contract. i. A substantial indication that the Contractor has made an unauthorized assignment of the contract or any funds due therefrom for the benefit of any creditor or for any other purpose. j. If the Contractor shall for any cause whatsoever not carry on the working operation in an acceptable manner. k. If the Contractor commences legal action against the Owner. A Copy of the suspension order or action of the City Council shall be served on the Contractor's Sureties. When work is suspended for any cause or causes, or when the contract is canceled, the MWH - 05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(5) Contractor shall discontinue the work or such part thereof as the owner shall designate, whereupon the Sureties may, at their option, assume the contract or that portion thereof which the Owner has ordered the Contractor to discontinue, and may perform the same or may, with written consent of the owner, sublet the work or that portion of the work as taken over, provided however, that the Sureties shall exercise their option, if at all, within two weeks after the written notice to discontinue the work has been served upon the Contractor and upon the Sureties or their authorized agents. The Sureties, in such event shall assume the Contractor's place in all respects, and shall be paid by the Owner for all work performed by them in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. All monies remaining due the Contractor at the time of this default shall thereupon become due and payable to the Sureties as the work progresses, subject to all of the terms of the Contract Documents. MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(6) In case the Sureties do not, within the hereinabove specified time, exercise their right and option to assume the contract responsibilities, or that portion thereof which the Owner has ordered the Contractor to discontinue, then the Owner shall have the power to complete, by contract or otherwise, as it may determine, the work herein described or such work thereof as it may deem necessary, and the Contractor hereto agrees that the Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any materials, plants, tools, equipment, supplies, and property of any kind provided by the Contractor for the purpose of carrying on the work and to procure other tools, equipment, materials, labor and property for the completion of the work, and to charge to the account of the Contractor of said contract expense for labor, materials, tools, equipment, and all expenses incidental thereto. The expense so charged shall be deducted by the owner from such monies as may be due or may become due at any time thereafter to the Contractor under and by virtue of the Contract or any part thereof. The Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest bid for the work completing the contract, but the expense to be deducted shall be the actual cost of the owner of such work In case such expenses shall exceed the amount which would have been payable under the Contract if the same had been completed by the Contract, then the Contractor and his Sureties shall pay the amount of such excess to the City on notice from the Owner of the excess due. When any particular part of the work is being carried on by the Owner by contract or otherwise under the provisions of this section, the Contractor shall continue the remainder of the work in conformity with the terms of the Contract Documents and in such a manner as to not hinder or interfere with the performance of the work by the Owner. C7-7.15 FULFILLMENT OF CONTRACT: The Contract will be considered as having been fulfilled, save as provided in any bond or bonds or by law, when all the work and all sections or parts of the project covered by the Contract Documents have been finished and completed, the final inspection made by the Engineer, and the final acceptance and final payment made by the Owner. C7-7.16 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE OWNER: The performance of the work under this contract may be terminated by the Owner in whole, or from time to time in part, in accordance with this section, whenever the Owner shall determine that such termination is in the best interest of the Owner. A. NOTICE OF TERMINATION: Any Termination shall be effected by mailing a notice of the termination to the Contractor specifying the extent to which performance of work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. Receipt of the notice shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established when the letter is placed in the United States Postal Service Mail by the Owner. Further, it shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established that such termination is made with just cause as therein stated; and no proof in any claim, demand or suit shall be required of the Owner regarding such discretionary action B. CONTRACTOR ACTION: After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall: L Stop work under the contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination; 2. place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the work under the contract as is not terminated; 3. terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by notice of termination; MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(7) 4. transfer title to the Owner and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by the Engineer: a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in progress, completed work, supplies and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the work terminated by the notice of the termination; and b. The completed, or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property which, if the contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the Owner. 5. complete performance of such work as shall not have been terminated by the notice of termination; and 6. Take such action as may be necessary, or as the Engineer may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to its contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the owner has or may acquire the rest. At a time not later than 30 days after the termination date specified in the notice of termination, the Contractor may submit to the Engineer a list, certified as to quantity and quality, of any or all items of termination inventory not previously disposed of, exclusive of items the disposition of which has been directed or authorized by Engineer, Not later than 15 days thereafter, the owner shall accept title to such items provided, that the list submitted shall be subject to verification by the Engineer upon removal of the items or, if the items are stored, within 45 days from the date of submission of the list, and any necessary adjustments to correct the list as �- submitted, shall be made prior to final settlement. C. TERMINATION CLAIM: Within 60 days after the notice of termination, the Contractor shall submit his termination claim to the Engineer in the form and with the certification prescribed by the Engineer. Unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the Owner upon request of the Contractor, made in writing within such 60-day period or authorized extension thereof, any and all such claims shall be conclusively deemed waived. D. AMOUNTS: Subject to the provisions of Item C7-7.1(C), the Contractor and the Owner may agree upon the whole or any part of the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the total or partial termination of the work pursuant hereto; provided, that such agreed amount or amounts shall never exceed the total contract price reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further reduced by the contract price work not terminated. The contract shall be amended accordingly, and the Contractor shall be paid the agreed amount. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits> Nothing in C7-7.16(E) hereafter, prescribing the amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of work pursuant to this section, shall be deemed to limit, restrict or otherwise determine or affect the amount or amounts which may be agreed upon to be paid to the Contractor pursuant to this paragraph. E. FAILURE TO AGREE: In the event of the failure of the Contractor and the Owner to agree as provided in C7-7.16(D) upon the whole amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of the work pursuant to this section, the Owner shall MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(8) determine, on the basis of information available to it, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and shall pay to the Contractor the amounts determined. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits. F. DEDUCTIPNS: In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under this `--' section there shall be deducted; 1. all unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the Contractor, applicable to the terminated portion of this contract; 2. any claim which the Owner may have against the Contractor in connection with this contract; and 3. the agreed price for, or the proceeds of the sale of, any materials, supplies or other things kept by the Contractor or sold, pursuant to the provisions of this clause, and not otherwise recovered by or credited to the Owner. G. ADJUSTMENT: If the termination hereunder be partial, prior to the settlement of the terminated portion of this contract, the Contractor may file with the Engineer a request in writing for an equitable adjustment of the price or prices specified in the contract relating to the continued portion of the contract (the portion not terminated by notice of termination), such equitable adjustment as may be agreed upon shall be made in such price or prices; noting contained herein, however, shall limit the right of the owner and the Contractor to agree upon the amount or amounts to be paid tot he Contractor for the completion of the continued portion of the contract when said contract does not contain an established contract price for such continued portion. � H. NO LIMITATION OF RIGHTS: Noting contained in this section shall limit or alter the rights which the Owner may have for termination of this contract under C7-7.14 hereof entitled "SUSPENSION OR ABANDONMENT OF THE WORK AND ANNULMENT OF CONTRACT' or any other right which the Owner may have for default or breach of contract by Contractor. MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP,STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(9) C7-7.17 SAFETY METHODS AND PRACTICES: The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work at all times and shall assume all responsibilities for their enforcement. The Contractor shall comply with federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, and regulations so as to protect person and property from injury, including death, or damage in connection with the work. MWH -05/18/07 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C7-7(10) PART C- GENERAL CONDITIONS C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SECTION C8-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT C8-8.1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES: The determination of quantities of work performed by the Contractor and authorized by the Contract Documents acceptably completed under the terms of the Contract Documents shall be made by the Engineer, based on measurements made by the Engineer. These measurements will be made according to the United states Standard Measurements used in common practice, and will be the actual length, area, solid contents, numbers, and weights of the materials and item installed. C8-8.2 UNIT PRICES:When in the Proposal a "Unit Price" is set forth, the said "Unit Price" shall include the furnishing by the Contractor of all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, appliances and appurtenances necessary for the construction of and the completion in a manner acceptable to the Engineer of all work to be done under these Contract Documents. The "Unit Price" shall include all permanent and temporary protection of overhead, surface, and underground structures, cleanup, finishing costs, overhead expense, bond, insurance, patent fees, royalties, risk due to the elements and other clauses, delays, profits, injuries, damages claims, taxes, and all other items not specifically mentioned that may be required to fully construct each item of the work complete in place and in a satisfactory condition for operation. C8-8.3 LUMP SUM: When in the Proposal a "Lump Sum" is set forth, the said "Lump Sum" shall represent the total cost for the Contractor to furnish all labor, tools, materials, machinery, equipment, appurtenances, and all subsidiary work necessary for the construction-and completion of all the work to provide a complete and functional item as detailed in the Special Contract Documents and/or Plans. C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furnishing all labor, tools, materials, and incidentals for performing all work contemplated and embraced under these Contract Documents, for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work or from the action of the elements, for any unforeseen defects or obstructions which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work at any time before its final acceptance by the Owner, (except as provided in paragraph C5-5.14) for all risks of whatever description connected with the prosecution of the work, for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of such prosecution of the working operations as herein specified, or any and all infringements of patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other legal reservations, and for completing the work in an acceptable manner according to the terms of the Contract Documents. The payment of any current or partial estimate prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the work, materials, or equipment, nor in any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor to repair, correct, renew, or replace at his own and proper expense any defects or imperfections in the construction or in the strength or quality of the material used or equipment or machinery furnished in or about the construction of the work under contract and its appurtenances, or any damage due or attributed to such defects, which defects, imperfections, or damage shall have been discovered on or before the final inspection and acceptance of the work or during the one year guaranty period after the final acceptance. The Owner shall be the sole judge of such defects, imperfections, or damage, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for failure to correct the same as provided herein. C8-8.5 PARTIAL ESTIMATES AND RETAINAGE: Between the 1st and the 5th day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a statement showing an estimate of the value of MWIJ-05/18/07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C8-8(1) the work done during the previous month, or estimate period under the Contract Documents. Not later than the 10th day of the month, the Engineer shall verify such estimate, and if it is found to be acceptable and the value of the work performed since the last partial payment was made exceeds one hundred dollars ($100.00) inn amount, 90% of such estimated sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is less than $400,000.00, or 95% of such estimated sum will be paid to the Contractor if the total contract amount is $400,000.00 or greater, within twenty-five (25) days after the regular estimate period. The City will have the option of preparing estimates on forms furnished by the City. The partial estimates may include acceptable nonperishable materials delivered to the work which are to be incorporated into the work as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of the estimate have not been installed (such payment will be allowed on a basis of 85% of the net invoice value thereof). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer such information as he may request to aid him as a guide in the verification or the preparation of partial estimates. It is understood that partial estimates from month to month will be approximate only, all partial monthly estimates and payment will be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of an error in any previous estimate, and such estimate shall not, in any respect, be taken as an admission of the Owner of the amount of work done or of its quantity of sufficiency, or as an acceptance of the work done or the release of the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any monthly estimate if the Contractor fails to perform the work strictly in accordance with the specifications or provisions of this Contract. C8-8.6 WITHHOLDING PAYMENT: Payment on any estimate or estimates may be held in abeyance if the performance of the construction operations is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C8-8.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: Whenever the improvements provided for by the Contract Documents shall have been completed and all requirements of the Contract Documents shall have been fulfilled on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing that the improvements are ready for final inspection. The Engineer shall notify the appropriate officials of the Owner, will within a reasonable time make such final inspection,and if the work is satisfactory, in an acceptable condition, and has been completed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof, the Engineer will initiate the processing of the final estimate and recommend final acceptance of the project and final payment thereof as outlines in paragraph C8-8.8 below. C8-8.8 FINAL PAYMENT: Whenever all the improvements provided for by the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof shall have been completed and all requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled on the part of the Contractor, a final estimate showing the value of the work will be prepared by the Engineer as soon as the necessary measurements, computations, and checks can be made. All prior estimates upon which payment has been made are subject to necessary corrections or revisions in the final payment. The amount of the final estimate, less previous payments and any sums that have been deducted or retained under the provisions of the Contract Documents, will be paid to the Contractor within 60 days after the final acceptance by the Owner on a proper resolution of the City Council, provided the Contractor has furnished to the owner satisfactory evidence of compliance as follows: Prior to submission of the final estimate for payment, the Contractor shall execute an affidavit as furnished by the City, certifying that; A. all persons, firms, associations, corporations, or other organizations furnishing labor and/or materials have been paid in full, MWH-05/18/07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C8-8(2) B. that the wage scale established by the City Council in the City of Fort Worth has been paid, and C. that there gre no claims pending for personal injury and/or property damages. The acceptance by the Contractor of the last or final payment as aforesaid shall operate as and shall release the owner from all claims or liabilities under the Contract for anything done or furnished or relating to the work under the Contract Documents or any act or neglect of said City relating to or connected with the Contract. The making of the final payment by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of any guarantees or other requirements of the Contract Documents which specifically continue thereafter. C8-8.9 ADEQUACY OF DESIGN: It is understood that the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers to prepare the Contract Documents and all modifications of the approved Contract Documents. It is, therefore, agreed that the Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of its own design features, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure, and the practicability of the operations of the completed project, provided the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and additions and alterations thereof approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has complied with the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof, and all alterations thereof. C8-8.10 GENERAL GUARANTY: Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an acceptance of the work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the work and pay for any damage to the other work resulting therefrom which shall appear within a �.r period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the amount of the contract which shall assure the performance of the general guaranty as above outlined. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. C8-8.11 SUBSIDIARY WORK: Any and all work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project, such as conditions imposed by the Plans, the General Contract Documents or these Special Contract Documents, in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the Proposal, shall be considered as a subsidiary item of work, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal, for each bid item. Surface restoration, rock excavation and cleanup are general items of work which fall in the category of subsidiary work. C8-8.12 MISCELLANEOUS PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL: Material may be allocated under various bid items in the Proposal to establish unit prices for miscellaneous placement of material. These materials shall be used only when directed by the Engineer, depending on field conditions. Payment for miscellaneous placement of material will be made for only that amount of material used, measured tot he nearest one-tenth unit. Payment for miscellaneous placement of material shall be in accordance with the General Contract Documents regardless of the actual amount used for the Project. C8-8.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS: The Contractor shall keep on record a copy of all specifications, plans, addenda, modifications, shop drawings and samples at the site, in good order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the work. `w MWH-05/18/07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK C8-8(3) Supplementary Conditions — Section CS Table of Contents 1. Contract Documents 2. Director of Transportation and Public Works 3. Director of Engineering 4. Engineer 5. Proposal Form 6. Examination of Documents and Site Project 7. Interpretation and Preparation of Proposal 8. Minority Business Enterprise/Women Business Enterprise Compliance 9. Award of Contract 10. Bonds 11. Insurance 12. Limitation of Incidental Charges 13. Testing Costs 14. Laws to be Observed 15. Building Permits 16. Barricades, Warnings and Flagmen 17. Contractor's Responsibility for Damage Claims 18. State Safes Tax 19. Air Pollution Watch Days 20. Scope of Payment 21. Partial Payments 22. General Guaranty 23. Right to Audit 24. Schedule of Costs SECTION CS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FORT WORTH, WATER DEPARTMENT McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank (September 2,2003) 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: In Section C1-1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, delete Paragraph CI-1.2b SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and add the following: "b. SPECIAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Special Contract Documents are prepared for each specific project as a supplement to the General Contract Documents and include the following items: PART A - NOTICE TO BIDDERS (Advertisement) White SPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS White PART B - PROPOSAL(Bid) White MIWBE BID SPECIFICATIONS Pink PART C - GENERAL CONDITIONS Canary Yellow PART CS- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Green PART D - SPECIAL CONDITIONS Green PART E - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS White PERMITS/EASEMENTS (Some Permits are Multicolored) White PART F- BONDS AND INSURANCE White PART G- CONTRACT White PART H- PLANS/FIGURES (may be bound separately) White 2. DIRECTOR OF TRANSPORATION AND PUBLIC WORKS: Delete entire Paragraph C1-1.17, and replace with the following: C1-1.17 DIRECTOR OF TRANSPORATION AND PUBLIC WORKS: The officially appointed Director of the Transportation and Public Works Department of the City of Fort Worth, or his duly authorized representative, assistant, or agents. 3. DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING: Add the following paragraph after C I-1.17 and before C1-1.18: CI-1.17A DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING: The officially appointed Director of the Department of Engineering of the City of Fort Worth, referred to in the charter as the City Engineer, or his duly authorized representative assistant, or agents. 4. ENGINEER: Delete entire Paragraph C1-1.19, and replace with the following: The Director of the Fort Worth Department of Engineering, the Director of Fort Worth Transportation and Public Works Department, the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department, or their duly authorized assistants, agents, engineers, inspectors, or superintendents, acting within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. CS-1 S. PROPOSAL FORM: In Section C2-2.1, Paragraph 1, revise last sentence to read as follows: "The Bidder shall furnish a Financial Statement, Equipment Schedule, and Experience Record, all of which must be properly executed and filed with the Director of the Water Department one week prior to the hour for opening of bids. Information shall be on forms provided by the Bidder and acceptable to the City. 6. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE OF PROJECT: In Section C2-2.3, Paragraph 2,,add the following to the last sentence: "except for changes in the site conditions caused by factors outside of the control of the Contractor which occur after the Contractor's inspection and prior to installation." 7. INTERPRETATION AND PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL: Part C - General Conditions, Section C2-2, exchange paragraphs C2-2.7, C2-2.8, and C2-2.9 with the following: C2-2.7 DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL: No proposal will be considered unless it is delivered, accompanied by its proper Bid Security and other required material, to the Purchasing Manager or his representative at the official location and stated time set forth in the proposal at the proper time to the proper place. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be considered. The Bidders must have the proposal actually delivered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly marked with the word "PROPOSAL" and the name or description of the project designated in the "Notice To Bidders". The envelope shall be addressed to the Purchasing Manager, City of Fort Worth Purchasing Division, PO Box 17027, Fort Worth, Texas 76102." C2-2.8 WITHDRAWING PROPOSALS: Proposals actually filed with the Purchasing Manager cannot be withdrawn prior to the time set for the opening of proposals. A request for non consideration of a proposal must be made in writing, addressed to the City Manager, and filed with him prior to the time set for the opening of proposals. After all proposals not requested for non-consideration are opened and publicly read aloud, the proposals for which non-consideration requests have been properly filed may, at the option of the Owner, be returned unopened. C2-2.9 TELEGRAPHIC MODIFICATION OF PROPOSALS: Any bidder may modify his proposal by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the time set for opening proposals, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the said proposal opening time, and provided further, that the City Manager is satisfied that a written and duly authenticated confirmation of such telegraphic communication over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the proposal opening time. If such confirmation is not received within forty-eight (48) hours after the proposal opening time, no further consideration will be given to the proposal. CS-2 8. MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE/WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE COMPLIANCE: Delete entire Paragraph C3-3.2, and replace with the following: C3-3.2 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES: In a accord with City of Fort Worth Ordinance No. 15530, the City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts. A copy of the Ordinance can be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. The bidder shall submit the MBE/WBE SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER UTILIZATION FORM, PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM, and/or the GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("with Documentation") and/or the JOINT VENTURE FORM as appropriate. The Documentation must be received by the managing department no later than 5:00 p.m, five (5) City business days after the bid opening date. The bidder shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was made. Such receipt shall be evidence that the documentation was received by the City. Failure to comply shall render the bid non-responsive. Upon request, Contractor agrees to provide the Owner complete and accurate information regarding actual work performed by a minority business enterprise (MBE) and/or women business enterprise (WBE) on the contract and payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit any audit and/or examination of any books, records or files in its possession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an MBE and/or WBE. The misrepresentation of facts (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate Federal, State or local laws or ordinances relating to false statements. Further, any such misrepresentation facts (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result in the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less that three (3) years. 9. C3-3.5 AWARD OF CONTRACT is modified to read as follows: "The Owner reserves the right to withhold final action on the proposals for a reasonable time, riot to exceed the period stated for the duration of the Bid Security stated in the Notice to Bidders or 90 days, whichever is shorter." 10. C3-3.7 BONDS. For the Paragraph after Paragraph C3-3.7d OTHER BONDS, which begins with "No sureties", change the entire paragraph to read as follows: "In order for a surety to be acceptable to the City,the surety must(1)hold a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for any liability in excess of$100,000 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the state of Texas and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law. Satisfactory proof of any such reinsurance CS-3 shall be provided to the City upon request. The City, in its sole discretion, will determine the adequacy of the proof required herein. Each bond shall be properly executed by both the Contractor and the Bonding Company." 11.0 INSURANCE. Delete entire Paragraph C3-3.11 INSURANCE, and replace with the following:: C3-3.11INSURANCE: The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance required under the Contract Documents, and such insurance has been approved by the Owner and certificates of Insurance shall be delivered to the Owner (City of Fort Worth, Contract Administrator in the respective department as specified in the bid documents, 1000 Throckmorton Street, Fort Worth, Texas 76102) prior to commencement of work on the contract project. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for delivering to the Owner the sub- contractor's certificate of insurance for approval. The prime Contractor shall indicate on'the certificate of insurance included in the documents for execution whether or not his insurance covers sub-contractors. It is the intention of the Owner that the insurance coverage required herein shall include the coverage of all sub-contractors. The General Contractor may require all subcontractors to be insured and submit documentation ensuring that the requirements of C3-3.11 are met for all subcontractors. Failure of the Owner to request required documentation, shall not constitute a waiver of the insurance requirements specified herein. The Contractor's liability shall not be limited to the specified amounts of insurance required herein. a. COMPENSATION INSURANCE: The Contractor shall maintain, during the life of this contract, Worker's Compensation Insurance on all of his employees to be engaged in work on the project under this contract, and for all sub-contractors. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work on the project under this contract is not protected under the Worker's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide adequate employer's general liability insurance for the protection of such of his employees not so protected. Worker's compensation insurance covering employees in the project site shall be indorsed with a waiver of subrogation providing rights of recovery in favor of the OWNER. b. COMMERICAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The Contractor Shall procure and shall maintain during the life of this contract, General Liability Insurance (Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance) in the amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence/aggregate on account of bodily injury, including death, and in an amount not less than $500,000 covering each occurrence/aggregate on account of property damage with $2,000,000 umbrella policy coverage. Certificates of insurance shall state that Insurance is on an "occurrence" basis. Certificate shall also contain a statement that no exclusions by endorsement have been made to the*Commercial General Liability Policy. CS-4 C. ADDITIONAL LIABILITY: The Contractor shall furnish insurance as a separate policies or by additional endorsement to one of the above-mentioned policies, and in the amount as set forth for public liability and property damage, the following insurance: 1. Contingent Liability(covers General Contractor's Liability for acts of sub-contractors). 2. Blasting, prior to any blasting being done. 3. Collapse of buildings or structures adjacent to excavation fif excavation are performed adjacent to same). 4. Damage to underground utilities for$500,000. 5. Builder's risk(where above-ground structures are involved). 6. Contractual Liability (covers all indemnification requirements of Contract). The City, its offices, employees and servants shall be endorsed as additional insured on Contractor's insurance policies excepting employer's liability insurance coverage under Contractor's worker's compensation insurance policy. Contractor's insurance policies shall be indorsed to provide that such insurance is primary protection and any self-funded or commercial coverage maintained by the OWNER shall not be called upon to contribute to loss recovery. 7. When required by the Contract Documents, Environmental Impairment Liability Coverage must be provided in the limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 annual aggregate. The Environmental Impairment Liability (EIL) must contain coverage for sudden and accidental contamination or pollution, liability for gradual emissions, and clean-up costs. The EIL coverage shall include two year completed operations coverage on a per Project basis. A separate insurance policy may be needed to fulfill this requirement. EIL for damages incurred in the course of transporting sludge shall be covered under the contractor's insurance policy(s). d. AUTOMOBILE INSURANCE - BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this Contract, Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $250,000 for injuries including accidental death to any one person and subject to the same limit for each person an amount not less than $500,000 aggregate on account of one accident, and automobile property damage insurance in an amount not less than $100,000 aggregate. CS-5 e. SCOPE OF INSURANCE AND SPECIAL HAZARD: The insurance required under the above paragraphs shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his sub-contractors, respectively, against damage , claims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him, and also against any of the following special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of the Contract. f. PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE: The Contractor shall furnish the owner with satisfactory proof of coverage by insurance required in these Contract Documents in the amounts and by carriers satisfactory to the Owner. (Sample attached.) Other than Worker's Compensation Insurance, in lieu of specified insurance, the City may consider alternative coverage or risk treatment measures through insurance pools or risk retention groups. The City must approve in writing any alternative coverage. All insurance requirements made upon the Contractor shall apply to the sub-contractors, should the Prime Contractor's insurance not cover the sub-contractor's work operations. g. DEDUCTIBLE LIMITS. The deductible limits or self-funded retention limits, on each policy must not exceed $10,000 per occurrence unless otherwise approved by the City. h. INSURANCE COMPANY: The insurance company with whom the Contractor's insurance is written shall be authorized to do business in the State of Texas and shall have a current A.M. Best Rating of "A:VII" or equivalent measure of financial strength and solvency. i. NOTIFICATION. During the lifetime of this contract, the Contractor shall notify the ENGINEER in writing, of any known loss occurrence that could give rise to a liability claim or lawsuit or which could result in a property loss. j. CANCELLATION: Insurance shall be endorsed to provide the City with a minimum of thirty days notice of cancellation, non-renewal and/or material change in insurance policy terms or coverage. A minimuml0 day notice shall be acceptable in the event of non-payment of insurance premium to insurance company. CITY RESPONSIBILITIES. The City shall not be responsible for direct payment of insurance premium costs for Contractor's Insurance. 12. LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL CHARGES (Reference C4-4.5c): The Contractor agrees that should any change in the work of extra work be ordered, the following applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor Costs to cover overhead and profit: CS-6 1. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractor's own forces shall not exceed 15%. 2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a subcontractor and supervised by the Contractor shall not exceed 10%. Contractor shall be reimbursed for direct field overhead when the change requires an extension of the Contract period. Contractor shall not be reimbursed for indirect overhead or indirect costs related to changes to this contract. 13. TESTING COSTS: Section 5-5.12, revise the first sentence to read as follows: "Where, as called for in the Contract Documents, tests of materials or equipment are necessary, such tests will be made at the expense of and paid for by the Contractor unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Technical Specifications." 14. LAWS TO BE OBSERVED: Section C6-6.1, delete "or which may be enacted later". After the word "exist," add "at the time of the Contract or may be hereafter exist during the performance of the Contract." 15. BUILDING PERMITS: Paragraph C6-6.2 Insert the following at the end of the paragraph; "Contractors are responsible for obtaining all construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code inspections with the Code Inspection Department in accordance with the permit requirements and submit copy of updated schedule to the Engineer weekly. Building, plumbing, electrical and mechanical building permits are issued without charge. Water and sewer access fees will be paid by the Water Department. Any other permit fees are the responsibility of the Contractor." 16. BARRICADES, WARNINGS AND FLAGMEN: In Paragraph C6-6.8, replace the word "watchmen" wherever in appears with the word "flagmen". In the first paragraph, lines five (5) and six (6), replace "take all such other precautionary measures" with "take all reasonable necessafy measures". 17. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Delete entire Paragraph C6-6.12, and replace with the following: "C6-6.12 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS: Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify the City' Engineer and Architect, and their personnel at the project site for the Contractor's sole negligence. In addition, the Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend at its own expense, the Owner, its officers, agents, servants, and employees, from and against all claims or suits for property loss, property damage, personal injury, including death, arising out of, or alleged to arise of, the work and services to be performed hereunder by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees subcontractors, licensees or invitees, CS-7 whether or not any such iniury, damage or death is caused, in whole or in part, by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Owner, its officers, agents, servants, or employees. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Owner from and against any and all injuries to the Owner's officers, agents, servants, and employees., loss or destruction of property of the Owner arising form the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether or not any such iniury or damage is caused, in whole or in part, by the negligence or alleged n gli,gence of the Owner, its officers, agents, servants, or employees In the event the Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment, final payment shall not be made until the Contractor either (a) submits to the Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or a release from the claimant involved, or (b) provides the Owner with a letter from the Contractor's liability insurance carrier that the claim has been referred to the insurance carrier. The Director may, if he deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other City of Fort Worth public work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract." 18. STATE SALES TAX: A. Delete Paragraph C6-6.21 STATE SALES TAX in its entirety. B. This contract is issued by an organization, which qualifies for exemption pursuant to the provisions of Article 20.04 (F) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise, and Use Tax Act. All equipment and materials not consumed by or incorporated into the project construction are subject to State Sales Tax under House Bill 11, enacted August 15, 1991. all such taxes shall be included in the various amounts on the Proposal Form. The successful Bidder shall be required to submit a breakdown between costs of labor, consumable material and other construction costs and costs of material incorporated into the project construction prior to execution of this contract. B. At the time of execution of the Contract Documents by the Contractor, the Contractor shall complete the "Statement of Materials and Other Charges" which identifies the project costs anticipated in the Project into "Materials Incorporated into the Project" and "All Other Charges". The Contract shall be a "Separated Contract". C. The City of Fort Worth will issue appropriate Certificates of Resale to the Contractor. D. All Change Orders to the Contract will separate charges for materials and labor and will contain the following statement: "For purposes of complying with Texas Tax Code, the Contractor agrees that the charges for material incorporated into the project in excess of the estimated quantity provided for herein will be no less than the invoice price for such material to the Contractor." CS-8 19 AIR POLLUTION WATCH DAYS: Add the following to Section C7-7: C7-7.18 AIR POLLUTION WATCH DAYS: The Contractor shall be required to observe the following guidelines relating to working on City construction sites on days designated as "AIR POLLUTION WATCH DAYS". Typically, the OZONE SEASON, within the Metroplex area, runs from May 1, through OCTOBER 31, with 6:00 a.m. - 10:00 a.m. being critical BECAUSE EMISSIONS FROM THIS TIME PERIOD HAVE ENOUGH TIME TO BAKE IN THE HOT ATMOSPHERE THAT LEADS TO EARLY AFTERNOON OZONE FORMATION. . The Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), in coordination with the National Weather Service, will issue the Air Pollution Watch by 3:00 p.m. on the afternoon prior to the WATCH day. On designated Air Pollution Watch Days, the Contractor shall bear the responsibility of being aware that such days have been designated Air Pollution Watch Days and as such shall not begin work until 10:00 a.m. whenever construction phasing requires the use of motorized equipment for periods in excess of 1 hour. However, the Contractor may begin work prior to 10:00 a.m. if use of motorized equipment is less than 1 hour, or if equipment is new and certified by EPA, as "Low Emitting", or equipment burns Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD), diesel emulsions, or alternative fuels such as CNG. If the Contractor is unable to perform continuous work for a period of at least seven hours between the hours of 7:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m., on a designated Air Pollution Watch Day, that day will be considered as a weather day and added onto the allowable weather days of a given month. 20 C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: Delete C8-8.4 SCOPE OF PAYMENT in its entirety and replace With the following: "The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as herein provided, in full payment for furnishing all labor, tools, materials, and incidentals for performing all work contemplated and embraced under these Contract Documents, for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work or from the action of the elements, for any unforeseen defects or obstructions which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution which may arise or be encountered during the prosecution of the work at any time before its final acceptance by the Owner, (except as provided in paragraph C5-5.14) for all risks of whatever description connected with the prosecution of the work, for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of such prosecution of the working operations as herein specified, or any and all infringements of patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other legal reservations, and for completing the work in an acceptable manner according to the terms of the Contract Documents. The payment of any current or partial estimate prior to the final acceptance of the work by the Owner shall in no way constitute an acknowledgment of the acceptance of the work, materials, or equipment, nor in any way prejudice or affect the obligations of the Contractor to repair, correct, renew, or replace at his own and CS-9 proper expense any defects or imperfections in the construction or in the strength or quality of the material used or equipment or machinery furnished in or about the construction of the work under contract and its appurtenances, or any damage due or attributed to such defects, which defects, imperfections, or damage shall have been discovered on or before the final inspection and acceptance of the work or during the two (2) year guaranty period after the final acceptance. The Owner shall be the sole judge of such defects, imperfections, or damage, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for failure to correct the same as provided herein." 21. PARTIAL PAYMENTS: Change Paragraph C8-8.5 to read as follows: "Partial pay estimates shall be submitted by the Contractor 5th day and the 20th day of the month that work has been is in progress. The estimate shall be processed by the City on the loth day and 25th day respectively. Estimates will be paid within 25 days following the end of the estimate period, less the appropriate retainage as set out below. Partial pay estimates may include acceptable nonperishable materials delivered to the work place which are to be incorporated into the work as a permanent part thereof, but which at the time of pay estimate have not been so installed. If such materials are included within a pay estimate, payment shall be based upon 85% of the net invoice value thereof. The Contractor will furnish the engineer such information as may be reasonably requested to aid in the verification or the preparation of the pay estimate. For contracts of less than $400,000.00 at the execution, retainage shall be ten percent (10%). For contracts of$400,000.00 or more at the time of execution, retainage shall be five percent(5%). Contractor shall pay subcontractors in accord with subcontract agreement, within five (5) business days after receipt by the Contractor of the payment by the City. Contractor's failure to make the required payment to subcontractors will authorize the City to withhold future payments from the Contractor until compliance with this paragraph is accomplished. It is understood that the partial pay estimates will be approximate only, and all partial pay estimates and payment of the same will be subject to correction in the estimate rendered following the discovery of an error in any previous estimate. Payment of any partial pay estimate shall not, in any respect, be taken as an admission of the Owner of the amount of work done or of its quality of sufficiency, or as an acceptance of the work done or the release of the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to withhold the payment of any partial estimate if the Contractor fails to perform the work in strict accordance with the specifications or other provisions of this Contract." 22. GENERAL GUARANTY. Delete C8-8.10 GENERAL GUARANTY in its entirety and replace with the following: CS-10 Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents nor partial or entire occupancy or use of the premises by the Owner shall constitute an 1-WW acceptance of the work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the work and pay for any damage to the other work resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of two (2) years from the date of final acceptance of the work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the amount of the contract which shall assure the performance of the general guaranty as above outlined. The Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. Any reference to any shorter period of time of warranty contained elsewhere within the specifications shall be resolved in favor of this specification, it being the City's intent that the Contractor guarantee its work for a period of two (2) years following the date of acceptance of the project. 23. RIGHT TO AUDIT: Add the following to Section C8-8: C-8-8.14 RIGHT TO AUDIT: "(a) The Contractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three (3) years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor involving transactions relating to this Contract. Contractor agrees that the .. City shall have access during normal working hours to all necessary Contractor facilities and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits irl compliance with the provisions of this section. The City shall give Contractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. (b) Contractor further agrees to include in all its subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three (3) years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine and photocopy any directly pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of such subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract, and further, that City shall have access during normal working hours to all subcontractor facilities, and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with the provisions of this article together with subsection (c) hereof. The City shall give subcontractor reasonable advance notice of intended audits. (c) Contractor and subcontractor agree to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the City. The City agrees to reimburse contractor for the cost of the copies as follows: 1. 50 Copies and Under- 10 cents per page. 2. More than 50 copies - 85 cents for the first page plus fifteen cents for each page CS-11 thereafter." (5/25/93) 24. SCHEDULE OF COSTS: Add the following to Section C8-8: C8-8.15 SCHEDULE OF COSTS: Following the completion of all work on the Project and prior to submittal of a request for final payment, the Contractor shall provide a Schedule of Costs to City for approval which lists all equipment systems, structures, building electrical and HVAC systems, overhead and project related costs. The items will be grouped into categories using the Owner's list of category codes which will be provided by the Owner at the Preconstruction Conference. The Schedule of Costs will be used by the City as input to the Capital Assets System, and will not be considered in preparation of modifications to the Contract. Costs associated with the preparation and processing of this schedule of costs shall be subsidiary to the price bid. The Contractor will also provide a projected payment schedule tied to the project schedule and the schedule of values which projects the monthly payments through the end of the Project. The Payment schedule must be submitted along with the first request for payment. This information is necessary to arrange financing of the Project by the City. END OF SECTION CS-12 PART D SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special Conditions — Section D Table of Contents D-1 General D-2 Project Designation D-4 Project Signs D-5 City Furnished Materials D-6 Wage Rates D-8 Dewatering D-11 Exploratory Excavations D-12 Test Holes D-13 Substitutions D-26 Detectable Warning Tapes D-41 Site Preparation D-48 Temporary Pavement Repair D-57 Hydro Mulch Seeding and Sodding D-65 Traffic Control D-86 Workers Compensation Insurance D-91 Shop Drawings D-101 Testing D-102 Subsidiary Work D-103 Addenda D-104 OSHA Standards D-105 Project Superintendents D-106 Resident Engineer D-107 Progress Photographs D-108 Termination D-109 Hazardous and Toxic Material D-110 Spoil and Fill Material D-111 Age D-112 Disability D-113 Indemnification D-114 Construction Administration D-115 Texas Pollution Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) SECTION D SPECIAL CONDITIONS FORT WORTH, WATER DEPARTMENT McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank D-1 GENERAL: Subject to modifications as herein contained, the Fort Worth Water Department's General Contract Documents and General Specifications. effective July 1, 1978, are made part of the Contract Documents for this Project. The Plans, Special conditions and Provisions Documents, and the rules, regulations, requirements, instructions, drawings and details referred to by manufacturer's name, number or identification included therein as specifying, referring or implying product control, performance, quality, or other shall be binding upon the Contractor. The Specifications and drawings shall be considered cooperative; therefore, work or material called for by one and not shown or mentioned in the other shall be accomplished or furnished in a faithful manner as though required by all. The order or precedence in case of conflicts or discrepancies between various parts of the Contract Documents subject to the ruling of the Engineer shall generally, but not necessarily, follow the guidelines listed below: 1. Plans 2. Special Contract Documents 3. General Contract Documents and General Specifications The following Special Conditions shall be applicable to this project and shall govern any conflicts with the General Contract documents under the provisions stated above. D-2 PROJECT DESIGNATION: Construction under these Special Documents shall be performed under the Fort Worth Water Department Project Designations: Water Projects: Pump Station Project#P160-060160160010 Storage Tank Project#P160-060160180010 D-4 PROJECT SIGNS: Project Signs are required at all locations which will be under construction for more than thirty (30) calendar days as indicated in Part B Proposal. Project Signs shall be in accordance with Figure 30 (dated 8-28-89) of the General Contract Documents. The signs may be mounted on skids or on posts. The exact locations and methods of mounting shall be approved by engineer. Any and all costs for the required materials, labor, and equipment necessary for the furnishing of Project Signs shall be considered as i a subsidiary cost of the project and no additional compensation will be allowed. D-5 CITY FURNISHED MATERIALS: For water projects, the City will furnish "pipe cleaning pigs," chlorine gas or chlorinated lime (HTH) and all water for initial cleaning and sterilization of water lines. All other -%W/ materials for construction of the project, including water for compaction, shall be furnished by the Contractor. D-6 WAGE RATES: The labor classifications and minimum wage rates set forth herein have been predetermined by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, in accordance with statutory requirements, as being the prevailing classifications and rates that shall govern on all work performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor on the site of the project covered by these Contract Documents. In no event shall less that the following rates be paid. (see attached wage rates) When two or more Iwage rate scales are shown and wage rates shown in specific classifications are in conflict, the higher wage will be used. D-8 DEWATERING: The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the method of dewatering operation for the water or sewage flows from the existing mains and ground water. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage of any nature resulting from the dewatering operations. The DISCHARGE from any dewatering operation shall be conducted as approved by the Engineer. Ground water shall not be discharged into sanitary sewers. Dewatering shall be considered as incidental to a construction and all costs incurred will be considered to be included in the linear foot bid price of the pipe. D-11 EXPLORATORY EXCAVATIONS: In addition to those areas as may be designated on the Drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to excavate and locate existing utilities that may affect construction of the water and/or sewer facilities. All exploratory excavations shall occur far enough in advance to permit any necessary relocation to be made with minimum delay. All costs incurred by the Contractor in making exploratory excavations shall be considered to be included in the unit price bid for constructing of water/sewer line or the associated structures. D-12 TEST HOLES: The matter of subsurface exploration to ascertain the nature of the soils, including the amount of rock, if any, through which this pipeline installation is to be made is the responsibility of any and all prospective bidders, and any bidder on this project shall submit his bid under the condition. Whether prospective bidders perform this subsurface exploration jointly or independently, and whether they make such determinations by the use of test holes or other means, shall be left to the discretion of such prospective bidders. The cost of the rock removal and other associated appurtenances, if required, shall be included in the linear foot bid price of the pipe. D-2 D-13 SUBSTITUTIONS: The specifications for materials set out the minimum standard of quality that the City believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. No substitutions will be permitted until the Contractbr has received written permission of the Engineer to make a substitution for the finaterial which has been specified. Where the term "or equal," or " or approved equal" is 4sed, it is understood that if a material, product, or piece of equipment bearing the name so used is furnished it will be approvable, as the particular trade name was used for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality acceptable to the City. If a product of any other name is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval thereof must be obtained before the proposed substitute is procured by the Contractor. Where the term "or equal," or "or approved equal" is not used in the specifications, this does not necessarily exclude alternative items or material or equipment which may accomplish the intended purpose. However, the Contractor shall have the full responsibility of proving that the proposed substitution is, in fact, equal, and the Engineer, as the representative of the City, shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of substitutions. The provisions of this sub-section as related to "Substitutions" shall be applicable to all sections of these specifications. D-24 VALVE BLOCKING: Not Used D-25 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND GRAY-IRON FITTINGS: Not Used D-26 DETECTABLE WARNING TAPES: Detectable underground utility warning tapes which can be located from the surface by a pipe detector shall be installed directly above non-metallic water or sanitary sewer pipe. The detectable tape shall be "Detect Tape" manufactured by Allen Systems Inc. or approved equal, and shall consist of a minimum thickness 0.35 mils solid aluminum foil encased in a protective inert plastic jacket that is impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents and solvents found in the soil. The minimum overall thickness of the tape shall be 5.5 mils. and the width shall not be less than 2" inches with a minimum unit M weight of 2-1/2 pounds/1"/1000'. The tape shall be color coded and imprinted with the message as follows: Type of UtilityColor Code Legends Water Safety Blue Caution Buried Water Line Below Sewer Safety Green Caution Buried Sewer Line Below Installation of detectable tapes shall be per manufacturer's recommendations and shall be as close to the grade as is practical for optimum protection and detectability. Allow a minimum of 18" inches between the tape and the pipe. Payment for work such as backfill, bedding, blocking, detectable tapes and all other associated appurtenances required shall be included in the subsidiary to the cost of pipe installation. a� D-3 D-27 CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE AND FITTINGS: Not Used D-30 VALVE CUT-INS: Not Used D-37 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT: Not Used D-39 BID ALTERNATIVES: Not Used D-41 SITE PREPARATION: The Contractor shall clear rights-of-way or easements of obstruction that must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the work as a part of this project's construction operations. The contractor's attention is directed to Paragraph C6-6.10 Work Within Easements, Page 6-6(4), Part C - General Conditions of the Water Department General Contract Document and General Specifications. Clearing and restoration shall be considered incidental to bid item for site work. D-48 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT REPAIR: The Contractor shall provide a temporary pavement repair immediately after trench backfill and compaction using a minimum of 1-inch cold mix asphalt. This temporary repair shall be rolled to provide a smooth transition between the existing pavement and the temporary repair. The unit price bid under the appropriate bid item of the proposal shall cover all cost for providing temporary pavement repair for all streets cuts prior to street reconstruction. D-57 HYDRO MULCH SEEDING AND SODDING: Any sod installation or hydro mulching required shall be done in accordance with Fort Worth Public Works Department Standard Specifications item 118 and 120. If in the opinion of the Engineer, additional seeding and/or sod installation is required due to the Contractor's construction operations, this work shall be completed at the expense of the Contractor. Payment for work shall be considered incidental to bid item for site work. D-65 TRAFFIC CONTROL: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing traffic control during the construction of this project consistent with the provisions set forth in the "1980 Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" issued under the authority of D-4 the "State of Texas Uniform Act Regulating Traffic on Highways", codified as Article 6701d Vernon's Ciyil Statues, pertinent sections being Section Nos. 27, 29, 30 and 31. The Contractor shall execute this work in such a manner as to create a minimum of interruption to traffic and pedestrian facilities and to the flow of vehicular and pedestrian traffic within the project area. Barricades, warniq and detour signs shall conform to be the Standard Specifications for street and storm drain construction, "Barriers and Warning and/or Detour Signs", Item 524, and/or as directed by Engineer. The Contractor will not remove any regulatory sign, instructional sign, street name sign, or other sign which has been erected by the City. If it is determined that a sign must be removed to permit required construction, the Contractor shall contact the Transportation and Public Works Department, Signs and Markings Division (phone number 871-8075), to remove the sign. In the case of regulatory signs, the Contractor must replace the permanent sign with a temporary sign meeting the requirements of the above referenced manual and such temporary sign must be installed prior to the removal of the permanent sign. If the temporary sign is not installed correctly or if it does not meet the required specifications, the permanent sign shall be left in place until the temporary sign requirements or met. When construction work is completed to the extent that the permanent sign can be re-installed, the Contractor shall again contact the Signs and Markings Division to re-install the permanent sign and shall leave his temporary sign in place until such re-installation is completed. D-86 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE: A. Contractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to provide the Owner (City) a certificate showing that it has obtained a policy of worker's compensation insurance covering each of its employees employed on the project in compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the Contractor has complied with this section. B. Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to require each and every subcontractor who will perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy of worker's compensation insurance covering each employee on the project. Contractor will not permit any subcontractor to perform work on the project until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of all such certificates to the Owner(City). C. Worker's Compensation Insurance Coverage. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or a� D-5 TWCC-84), showing statutory worker's compensation insurance coverage for person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the Project - includes the time from he beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Texas Labor Code Section 406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaking to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This included, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the City prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the City showing the coverage has been extended. 5. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the City: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the City will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. IF D-6 6. The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of v the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by Texas Worker's Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the projects that they are required to be covered and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (a) provide Coverage, based on proper reporting on the classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor. prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of F the project; c) provide the contractor. prior to the end of the coverage period a new certificate of coverage showing the extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for duration of project and for one year thereafter. D-7 (f) notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the --rt project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the City that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on the proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the City to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the City. D. Posting of Required Worker's Compensation Coverage. The contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Act or other Texas Workers' Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 10 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text, without additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your D-8 employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage. v✓ D-91 SHOP DRAWINGS: 1. Submit seven (7) copies of shop drawings, layouts, manufacturer's data and material schedules as may be required by the Engineer for his review. Submittals may be checked by and stamped with the approval of the Contractor and identified as the Engineer may require. Such review by the Engineer shall include checking for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with information given in the General Contract Documents. Indicated actions by the Engineer, which may result from his review, shall not constitute concurrence with any deviation from the plans and specifications unless such deviations are specifically identified by the method described below, and further shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in the submitted data. Processed shop drawing submittals are not change orders. The purpose of submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept, and that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and materials he intends to furnish and install, and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between submittals and the design drawings and/or specifications are discovered, either prior to or after submittals are processed, the design drawings and specifications shall govern. The Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions that are to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of constriction, coordination of his work with that of other trades and satisfactory performance his work. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review submittals prior to being submitted, and sign or initial a statement included with the submittal, which signifies compliance with plans and specifications and dimensions suitable for the application. Any deviation from the specified criteria shall be expressly stated in writing in the submittal. Three (3) copies of the approved submittals shall be retained by the Contractor until completion of the project and presented to the City in bound form. Additional shop drawing requirements are described in some of the material specifications. 2. Address for Submittals - The submittals shall be addressed to the Chief Design Engineer: David R. Townsend,P.E. Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Division P.O. Box 970 Fort Worth, TX 76101 D-101 TESTING: a. The Contractor shall furnish, at his own expense, certifications by a private laboratory for all materials proposed to be used on the project, including a mix design for any asphaltic and/or Portland cement concrete to be used, and gradation analysis for sand and crushed stone to be used along with the name of the pit from which the material was taken. The Contractor shall provide manufacturer's certifications for all manufactured items to be used in the project and will bear any expense related thereto. b. Tests of the design concrete mix shall be made by the Contractor's laboratory at least nine days prior to the placing of concrete using the same aggregate, cement, and mortar which are to be used later in the concrete. The Contractor shall provide a certified copy of the test results to the City. c. Quality control testing of in-place material on this project will be performed by the City at its own expense. Any re-testing required as a result of failure of the material to meet project specifications will be at the expense of the Contractor and will be billed at commercial rates as determined by the City. The failure of the City to make any tests of materials shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and equipment conforming to the requirements of the contract. d. Not less than 24 hours notice shall be provided to the City by the Contractor for operations requiring testing. The Contractor shall provide access and trench safety system (if required) for the site to be tested, and any work effort involved is deemed to be included in the unit price for the item being tested. e. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the trip ticket for each load of fill material delivered to the job site. The ticket shall specify the name of the pit supplying the fill material. D-102 SUBSIDIARY WORK: Any and all work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project, such as conditions imposed by Plans, the General Contract Documents or these Special Contract Documents, in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the proposal, shall be considered as a subsidiary item of work, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal for each bid item. Surface restoration and cleanup are general items of work which fall in the category of subsidiary work. D-103 ADDENDA: Bidders wanting further information, interpretation or clarification of the contract documents must make their request in writing to the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, at least 96 hours prior to bid opening. Answers to all such requests will be bound and made a part of the Contract Documents. No other explanation or interpretation will be considered official or binding. Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from, the Contract Documents, or should the bidder be in doubt as to D-10 their meaning, the bidder should at once notify the Fort Worth Water Department Engineering Services, in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any addenda issued will be mailed or be delivered to each prospective bidder. The bid proposal as submitted by the bidder must be so constructed as to include anyaddenda issued by the Fort Worth Water Department, prior to 24 hours of the opening of bids with appropriate recognition of addenda so noted in the bid proposal. D-104 OSHA STANDARDS: All work performed under this contract shall meet the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA),It is the responsibility of the Contractor to become familiar with the provisions of the regulations published by the OSHA in the Federal Register and to perform all the responsibilities thereunder. It is the Contractor's responsibility to see that the project is constructed in accordance with OSHA regulations and to indemnify 'and save harmless the City from any penalties resulting from the Contractor's failure to so perform. D-105 PROJECT SUPERINTENDENTS: The Contractor shall keep a competent resident superintendent at the project site at all times during the progress of the work. A resume listing the qualifications and experience record of the proposed resident superintendent, as well as references from similar projects shall be submitted to the Owner prior to award of contract. This resident superintendent, if found to be acceptable, shall not be replaced without written notice to and consent from the Owner except under extraordinary circumstances, Qualifications of a proposed replacement shall be submitted when a request is made for replacement of the superintendent and shall be approved by the Owner prior to withdrawing the superintendent. During the construction of the project, the resident superintendent shall demonstrate an ability to properly execute the work outlined in the contract documents in a timely manner and shall consistently produce work of an acceptable quality and in accordance with the contract documents. If the Owner shall have a reasonable objection to the performance of the resident superintendent, the Contractor shall replace the resident superintendent upon written notice from the Owner. The resident superintendent is to be replaced with a superintendent acceptable to the Owner. No extension of time will be allowed for delays caused by the replacement of a resident representative. F D-106 RESIDENT ENGINEER: The General Conditions, Section C1-1.19 ENGINEER, defines various persons who may be designated as the Engineer. For the prosecution of this contract, the Term Engineer shall mean the Resident Engineer as designated by the Director of the Fort Worth Water Department together with members of the staff of the Engineer who are assigned to the Project. Any contacts the contractor may wish to make with any City personnel, including the Water Production Supervisor, members of the plant operating staff, members of the City Administration, or Consulting Engineers, shall be arranged through the Engineer. The Contractor shall not act upon requests or instructions he may receive from any City D-11 personnel or Consulting Engineers nor shall he give. instructions or directions to such persons without the approval or consent of the Engineer. D-107 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS: The Contractor shall take photographs of the project site prior to construction, monthly during construction of the project and after completion of the project. Photographs may be taken with a quality 35mm or better camera, equipped to photograph either interior or exterior exposures, with lenses ranging from wide angle to 135mm. Photographs shall be taken at locations as designated by the Engineer. Contractor shall video tape all roads and work areas to be affected prior to starting construction and furnish a copy of the video tape to the Engineer. Two glossy color 3" x 5" prints and the negative shall be provided for each photograph taken. Each print shall be marked on the reserve side to indicate project name, date and time, location, direction of exposure, and description of what is being photographed. Prints shall be clear and sharp with proper exposure. If prints of adequate quality are not produced from exposures, additional photographs shall be taken. D-108 TERMINATION: It is understood and agreed that this contract may be terminated by the City without obligation to the Contractor, in whole or from time to time in part, whenever such termination is determined by the City to be in the best interests of the City. Termination may be effected by delivering to the Contractor or his designated representative a notice of termination, specifying to what extent performance of the work under the contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination. After receipt of notice of termination Contractor shall: 1. Stop work specified in the notice on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination. 2. Place no further order or subcontract except as necessary to complete work already underway. 3. Terminate all orders and contracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the Notice of Termination. D-109. HAZARDOUS AND TOXIC MATERIALS: Insofar as permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor from and against any and all liabilities, losses, cost, damages and expenses, arising out of use of the materials at the Owners site which are not under the direct control of the �. Contractor, including, but not limited to, any and all liability resulting from personal injury, including death, property liability, at any time, however caused, due to the presence or release of, or exposure, whether to the person of property injured or otherwise, whether to the person of property injured or otherwise, to any hazardous or D-12 toxic substance, provided, however, that the City liability shall be limited to that established in Article 6252-19, Texas Revised Code and other applicable State statutes and Constitutional provisions. D-110. SPOIL.AND FILL MATERIAL: Prior to disposing on any spoil/fill material, the contractor shall advise the Director of Transportation and Public Works, acting as the City of Fort Worth's Flood Plain Administrator ("Administrator"), of the location of all sites where the contractor intends to dispose of such material. Contractor shall not dispose of such material until the proposed sites have been determined by the Administrator to meet the requirements of the Flood Plain Ordinance of the City of Fort Worth (Ordinance No 10056). All disposal sites must be approved by the Administrator to ensure that filling is not occurring within a flood plain without a permit. A flood plain permit can be issued upon approval of necessary engineering studies. No fill permit is required if disposal sites are not in a flood plain. Approval of the contractor's disposal sites shall be evidenced by a letter signed by the Administrator stating the site is not in a known flood plain of by a Flood Plain Fill Permit authorizing fill within the flood plain. Any expenses associated with obtaining the fill permit, including any necessary engineering studies, shall be at the contractor's expense. In the event the contractor disposes of spoil/fill material at a site without a fill permit or a letter from the Administrator approving the disposal site, upon notification by the Director of Transportation and Public Works, the contractor shall remove the spoil/fill ` material at its expense and dispose of such materials in accordance with the Ordinances of the City and this section. D-111 AGE: In accordance with the policy "(Policy") of the Executive Branch of the Federal Government, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this contract, shall, in connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or in connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plant or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification,retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractor against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged D-13 failure to comply with the above referenced Policy concerning age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-112 DISABILITY: In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that it any and all of its subcontractors will not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the availability, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or employees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with ADA's provisions and any other applicable federal, state and local laws concerning disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractor's alleged failure to comply with the above-referenced law concerning disability discrimination in the performance of this agreement. D-113 INDEMNIFICATION: To clarify Section C6-6.12 of the General Conditions of the Contract, it is the intent of the Owner that the Contractor indemnify, hold harmless and defend the Owner, and the Owner's officers, agents, servants, and employees from and against any and all claims as listed herein, even though causes by the Owner's sole negligence. With respect to the last sentence of the first paragraph of Section C6-6.12, it is the Owner's intent that the language be site specific to the general area where the work to be performed under the Contract is being performed. It is not the Owner's intent that the Contractor be required to indemnify the Owner for damages to property other than that caused to property located in close proximity to this project, unless such damage is caused wholly or in part by the Contractor's negligence. D-114 CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION A. CONTRACTOR MODIFICATION REQUEST(CMR)/PROPOSED CONTRACT MODIFICATION(PCM): Any Change in the Contract Documents will be initiated either by the Contractor issuing a Contractor's Modification request (CMR) or by the Owner issuing a Proposed Contract Modification (PCM) on forms provided by the Owner. Proposals will be reviewed by the Owner and if found acceptable, will be incorporated in a Change Order or a Field Order in accordance with Section C44 of the Contract Documents. The Contractor's Modification request (CMR) shall fully identify and describe the deviations and associated costs, time factors and impacts, and state the reason the change is requested. Any savings in costs related to the substitution/repalcement or change is to be stated in th erequest for consideration. D-14 Cost of the Engineer's evaluation of any substitution or deviation requested by the Contractor shall be charged to the Contractor by the Owner. B.PROJECT INFORMATION REQUEST When necessary, the Contractor shall request additional information, clarification or interpretation of the contract documents or when the Contractor believes there is a conflict between the contract drawings and specification, the Contractor shall identify the conflict and/or request clarification/additional information using the Project Information Request (PIR) form provided by the Owner. Sufficient information shall be attached to permit a written response without further information. The Owner will log each request and will review the request. If review of the Project information request (PIR) indicates that a change to the contract documents is required, the Owner will issue either a Field Order (FO) or.Proposed Contract Modification(PCM). C. RECORD DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep on record at the site a copy of all Contract Specifications, Plans, Addenda, modifications, record and shop drawings and samples, in good condition and annotated in erasable red pencil to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the work and before final payment is made. The Contractor shall retain for record purposes only, all designs and plans prepared for construction which are prepared and sealed by a State of Texas Registered Professional Engineer. Said design and plans shall include, but not be limited to. paving, buildings, mechanical and electrical systems, foundation, etc. D-115 TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM(TPDES) The Contractor shall be responsible for developing the Storm Water Pollution M Prevention Plan(SWPPP), performing all application procedures and obtaining approval from the State of Texas and City of Fort Worth. This would include,but not be limited to, application documentation preparation and submittal in accordance with the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES) Construction General Permit(TXR 150000) issued March 5, 2003. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementation, maintenance, and inspection of all storm water pollution prevention measures including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment controls, storm water management plans, maintaining and posting of appropriate permits on-site, waste collection and disposal, off-site vehicle tracking, and other appropriate practices shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere in the Contract. D-15 PART E MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS MASTER LIST OF DIVISIONS AND SECTIONS DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 1*4AW-le No. Title Pages 01010 Summary of Work 4 01014 Trench Safety System 2 01025 Measurement and Payment 2 01070 Abbreviations of Institutions 3 01090 Reference Standards 2 01300 Contractor Submittals 6 01301 Schedule of Values 2 01311 Scheduling and Reporting 4 01313 Construction and Schedule Constraints 2 01400 Quality Control 2 01505 Mobilization 2 01510 Temporary Utilities 4 01520 Security 1 01530 Protection of Existing Facilities 4 01550 Site Access and Storage 3 01590 Field Offices, Equipment, and Services 4 01600 Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions 4 01650 Testing and Disinfection of Concrete and Steel Hydraulic Structures 3 01655 Gravity Pipeline Testing 1 01656 Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection 4 01660 Equipment Testing and Equipment Startup 4 01700 Project Closeout 2 DIVISION 02—SITEWORK 02100 Site Preparation 2 02140 Dewatering 2 02200 Earthwork 14 02460 A.C. Pavement and Base 4 02470S Pavement Marking 1 02561 Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped, Steel Cylinder 13 Type (AWWA C300, Modified) 02565 Ductile Iron Pipe 6 02570 Steel Pipe, Specials, & Fittings 11 02595 Small PVC Nonpressure Pipe, Rubber Joints (ASTM D3034, Modified) 3 02810 Landscape Irrigation System 11 02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates 3 02900 Landscaping 15 DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 6 03200 Reinforcement Steel 7 03250 Concrete Accessories 7 03290 Joints in Concrete 11 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 28 03430 Architectural Precast Concrete 8 DIVISION 04- MASONRY 04270 Glass Unit Masonry 5 DIVISION 05- METALS 05120 Structural Steel 10 05210 Steel Joists 3 05300 Metal Decking 3 05400 Cold Form Metal Framing 5 05410 Interior Metal Stud Wall Systems 5 05500 Miscellaneous Metals 4 05501 Anchors, Bolts, Expansion Anchors and Concrete Inserts 3 DIVISION 06-WOOD AND PLASTICS Not Used DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07535 Built-up, Modified Bituminous Roofing 6 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 7 07720 Roof Accessories 3 07920 Sealants and Caulking 7 DIVISION 08-DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 6 08330 Overhead Coiling Doors 5 08710 Finish Hardware 10 DIVISION 09-FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 6 09800 Protective Coating 23 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10400 Identifying Devices 2 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 2 10800 Toilet&Bath Accessories 3 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT 11000 Equipment General Provisions 10 11100 Pumps, General 7 11106 Horizontal Split-Case Pumps 5 11149 Submersible Sump Pump 3 DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13656 Steel Water Reservoirs and Tanks 5 DIVISION 14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14600 Hoists and Cranes, General 3 14630 Bridge Cranes 4 a.i DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 Piping, General 6 15005 Piping Identification Systems 3 15006 Pipe Supports 5 15037 Copper Water Tube (ASTM B 88, Modified) 3 15060 PVC Pressure Pipe 2 15075 Meters, General 3 15089 Ultrasonic Flow Meters (field mounted) 2 15183 Pressure Gauges and Switches 2 15200 Valves, General 4 15201 Valve and Gate Actuators 7 15202 Butterfly Valves 3 15203 Check Values 2 15204 Ball Valves 2 15206 Gate Valves 2 15207 Plug Valves 2 15214 Pump Control Valves 3 15215 Pressure Reducing Valves 2 15230 Miscellaneous Valves 2 15235 Fire Hydrants 2 15250 Hydraulic Gates, General 2 15252 Flap Gates 1 15430 Plumbing Piping and Specialties 6 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 6 15500 HVAC-General Provisions 11 15831 Electric Wall Heater 2 15871 Fans 5 15936 Air Devices 4 15945 Louvers 2 DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL 16050 Electrical Work General 8 16110 Electrical Raceway Systems 6 16111 Underground Raceway Systems 3 16120 Wires and Cables 6 16140 Wiring Devices 3 16151 Electric Motors 13 16300 Medium Voltage Distribution 6 16431 Protective Device Studies 4 16450 Grounding 4 16460 Electric Motors 7 16470 Panel Boards and General Purpose Dry Type Transformers 4 16482 Medium Voltage Motor Control 7 16485 Local Control Stations and Miscellaneous Electrical Devices 4 16500 Lighting 8 16670 Lighting Protection System 4 16850 Electric Heat Tracing 2 16950 Electrical Tests 3 DIVISION 17-INSTRUMENTATION 17100 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 23 17102 In-Line Liquid Flow Measure Systems 3 17106 Level Measuring Systems 2 17108 Pressure Measuring Systems 2 17109 Pressure Detection Switches 2 17110 Temperature Measuring Systems 2 17200 Control Panels 11 17201 Control Panel Instrumentation 1 17510S PLC-Based Control Systems Hardware 6 SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The WORK to be performed under this Contract shall consist of furnishing plant, tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles, and furnishing all labor, transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and performing all work or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The WORK shall be complete, and all work, materials, and services not expressly indicated or called for in the Contract Documents which may be necessary for the complete and proper construction of the WORK in good faith shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as though originally so indicated, at no increase in cost to the OWNER. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The WORK of this contract includes the construction of a 33 MGD pump station with a 5.0 MG Ground Storage Tank. 15 MGD capacity shall be active upon completion of the project. Facilities to be constructed under this contract include installation of approximately 125 L.F. of 48-inch, 720 L.F. of 36-inch, and 160 L.F of 24-inch AWWA C-303 bar-wrapped concrete pressure pipe, a 5.0 million gallon storage tank with access stairway and railings, a 50' by 100' pump station containing one (1) one 5-MGD (nominal) and two (2) 10-MGD (nominal) pump with piping for a fourth and fifth pumps and all associated piping & appurtenances, a bridge crane capable of lifting 5 tons, an ultrasonic meter at a 36" pipe inside a meter vault, and associated landscaping and fencing. The WORK shall include the over-excavation of the existing soils and replacement with selected backfill for the construction of the pump station and ground storage tank to the elevation and depth indicated in the Contract ,%1 Documents. The WORK shall required the necessary site preparation to include clearing, grubbing and stripping; and regrading of certain areas to receive embankment fill. B. The WORK includes control system operation requirements relating to dates on or after January 1, 2004. C. The WORK is located at the OWNER's site located on McCart Avenue, approximately 500 linear feet south of the intersection with W. Risinger Road in Fort Worth, TX, as shown in the Contract Documents. 1.3 CONTRACT METHOD A. The WORK hereunder will be constructed under a lump-sum price for the "Construction and Installation of the Pump Station and Storage Tank" or Item A and a unit price for the implementation and installation of the `Trench Safety System" or Item B, if required, as described in in Section 01025 — Measurement and Payment. If there are multiple trench safety systems, multiple unit prices will be respectively assigned to these systems. 1.4 WORK BY OTHERS A. Where 2 or more contracts are being performed at one time on the same Site or adjacent land in such manner that work under one contract may interfere with work under another, the OWNER will determine the sequence and order of the Work in either or both contracts. When the Site of one contract is the necessary or convenient means of access for MWH -05/18/07 SUMMARY OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01010-1 performance of work under another, the OWNER may grant privilege of access or other reasonable privilege to the contractor so desiring, to the extent, amount , and in manner and at time that the OWNER may determine. No OWNER determination of method or time or sequence or order of the work or access privilege shall be the basis for a claim for delay or damage except under provisions of the General Conditions for temporary suspensions of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations so as to cause a minimum of interference with the work of such other contractors, and shall cooperate fully with such contractors to allow continued safe access to their respective portions of the Site, as required to perform work under their respective contracts. B. Interference With Work On Utilities: The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with all utility forces of the OWNER or forces of other public or private agencies engaged in the relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities which interfere with the progress of the WORK, and shall schedule the WORK so as to minimize interference with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities. 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. The CONTRACTOR's use of the Site shall be limited to its construction operations, including on-Site storage of materials,on-Site fabrication facilities, and field offices. 1.6 OUTAGE PLAN AND REQUESTS A. Unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise, the CONTRACTOR shall not remove from service, de-energize, or modify settings for any existing operating tank pipeline, valve, channel, equipment, structure, road, or any other facility without permission from the ENGINEER. 1. Outages and service connections shall be performed during the dry weather season (September 15 to June 1), unless specifically allowed by the ENGINEER to occur during the wet weather season. L� 2. The maximum duration of any outage shall be 4 hours. 3. The minimum time between outages shall be 48 hours. B. Where the WORK requires modifications to existing facilities or construction of new facilities and connection of new facilities to existing facilities, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed outage plan and schedule for the ENGINEER'S approval a minimum of 2 weeks in advance of the time that such outage is planned. C. A completed System Outage Request form (blank furnished by the ENGINEER) shall accompany each outage plan. The outage plans shall be coordinated with the construction schedule and shall meet the restrictions and conditions of the Contract Documents. All costs for preparing and implementing the outage plans shall be at no increase in cost to the OWNER. D. The ENGINEER shall be notified in writing at least one week in advance of the required outage if the schedule for performing the work has changed or if revisions to the outage plan are required. E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide written confirmation of the shutdown date and time two working days prior to the actual shutdown. MWH -05/18/07 SUMMARY OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01010-2 1.7 OWNER USE OF THE SITE A. The OWNER may utilize all or part of the existing Site during [the entire period of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate and coordinate with the OWNER to facilitate the OWNER's operations and to minimize interference with the CONTRACTOR's operations at the same time. In any event, the OWNER shall be allowed access to the Site during the period of construction. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Prior to the commencement of WORK at the Site, a preconstruction conference will be held at a mutually agreed time and place. The conference shall be attended by the CONTRACTOR'S Project Manager, its superintendent, and its Subcontractors as the CONTRACTOR deems appropriate. Other attendees will be: a. ENGINEER and the Resident Project Representative. b. Representatives of OWNER. c. Governmental representatives as appropriate. d. Others as requested by CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or ENGINEER. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall bring the preconstruction conference submittals in accordance with Section 01300-Contractor Submittals. 3. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures ... for handling such matters established. The complete agenda will be furnished to the CONTRACTOR prior to the meeting date. However, the CONTRACTOR should be prepared to discuss all of the items listed below. a. Status of CONTRACTOR's insurance and bonds. b. CONTRACTOR's tentative schedules. c. Transmittal, review, and distribution of CONTRACTOR's submittals. d. Processing applications for payment. e. Maintaining record documents. f. Critical work sequencing. g. Field decisions and Change Orders. h. Use of Site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and OWNER's needs. i. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. j. CONTRACTOR's assignments for safety and first aid. MWH -05/18/07 SUMMARY OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01010-3 k. Daily Report Form which the ENGINEER will furnish. 1. Submittal Transmittal Form which the ENGINEER will furnish. 4. The ENGINEER will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. 5. The CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors should plan on the conference taking no less than 2 full working days. The first day will cover the items listed in paragraphs 2 and 3, and the following day will be spent on reviewing the Drawings and Specifications, in extensive detail, with the ENGINEER and the OWNER. B. Progress Meetings: 1. The ENGINEER will schedule and hold regular on-Site progress meetings at least [weekly] and at other times as requested by CONTRACTOR or as required by progress of the WORK. The CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and all Subcontractors active on the Site shall attend each meeting. CONTRACTOR may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its Suppliers, manufacturers, and other Subcontractors. 2. The ENGINEER will preside at the progress meetings and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes. The purpose of the meetings is to review the progress of the WORK, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems which may develop. During each meeting, the CONTRACTOR shall present any issues which may impact its progress with a view to resolve these issues expeditiously. PART 2-- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-- EXECUTION (NOT USED) - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 SUMMARY OF WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01010-4 SECTION 01014-TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor and materials and perform operations to plan, design, construct, install, maintain, monitor, modify as necessary, and remove upon completion, a Trench Safety System as specified. B. The requirements of this Section apply to trenches that exceed five feet in depth, as measured from the ground surface at the highest side of the trench to the trench bottom. C. Applicable and non-conflicting portions of Section 02200 - Earthwork apply as appropriate to provide a proper and complete system. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 02200: Earthwork B. Texas Statute: HB 1569, 71st Regular Legislative Session C. United States Government: CFR Part 1926, Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), Subpart P—Excavations,Trenching and Shoring PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials and products incorporated into the Trench Safety System shall be suitable for their intended use, shall meet design criteria and parameters used by the Trench Safety System designer in designing the system, and shall meet applicable requirements of OSHA regulations. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES A. At least ten calendar days prior to execution of any excavation operations, and not more than 30 calendar days following the execution date of the construction Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall submit a site specific Trench Safety System Conformance Affidavit stating that operations will be conducted in full conformance with the OSHA Standards. 1. The Conformance Letter shall also describe the Trench Safety System techniques proposed to be used on the project. 2. Specific references to the applicable OSHA Standards sections shall be included for each technique to be used. B. The Trench Safety System Plan shall be in writing, site specific and sufficiently detailed and clear to be understandable and usable by all personnel who will be executing, supervising and witnessing the trenching operations. A copy of the Trench Safety Plan shall be available at the MWH—05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01014-1 site of trenching operations at all times. C. If borings and/or detailed geotechnical analyses are required to develop the Trench Safety System Plan, they shall be executed by the CONTRACTOR at his cost. D. For trenches having depths greater than the various limits given in the OSHA Standards (8, 12, or 20 feet, depending on the techniques used), a site specific protective system shall be designed by a Registered Professional Engineer, experienced in soil mechanics and structural design. The design shall be signed, sealed and dated by the Professional Engineer, and it shall identify those specific locations where the design is applicable. Design of the site specific protective system shall be executed by the CONTRACTOR at his cost. 3.2 METHODS A. Protective systems referenced in this Section shall be as defined and described in 29 CFR 1926.652, "Requirements for Protective Systems" B. It is the sole duty, responsibility and prerogative of the CONTRACTOR to determine the specific applicability of a proposed Trench Safety System for each field condition encountered on the project. CONTRACTOR specifically holds the Owner, Engineer, and any of their designed representatives harmless in any actions resulting from the failure or inadequacy of the Trench Safety System used to complete the project. C. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, Sloping/Benching, Trench Shielding with trench boxes, and/or Sheeting/Shoring/Bracing protective systems may be used on this project. 3.3 INSPECTION DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR A. Provide a competent person, as defined in the OSHA Standards, to make frequent inspections of the trenching operations and the Trench Safety System in full conformance with the OSHA Standards B. If evidence of a possible cave-in or landslide is apparent, all work in the trench shall immediately cease and not be resumed until all necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel entering the trench. C. In an emergency situation, which may threaten or affect the safety or welfare of any persons or properties, the CONTRACTOR shall act at his discretion to prevent possible damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or time extension claimed for such actions shall be considered in view of the cause of the emergency and in accordance with the General Conditions. 3.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for the Trench Safety System shall be on a unit-price basis, the unit price being as given in the Bid Proposal, without regard to whether specific trench safety precautions were required or used for the trench reach being measured. - END OF SECTION - MWH —05/18/07 CITY OF FORT WORTH TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01014-2 SECTION 01025-MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Payment for the various items of the Bid Schedule, as further specified herein, shall include all compensation to be received by the CONTRACTOR for furnishing all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and incidentals appurtenant to the items of work being described, as necessary to complete the various items of the WORK all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances thereto, and including all costs of permits and cost of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction, including Safety and Health Requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in the Bid Schedule, and all costs therefor shall be included in the prices named in the Bid Schedule for the various appurtenant items of work. 1.2 BID PROPOSAL A. Lump Sum Prices: Lump Sum Prices shall be provided in the Bid Documents Proposal by the CONTRACTOR for all WORK in the Contract. For Lump Sum items, only the total amount needs to be filled in. B. Retention: Payment for all bid items is subject to retention. 1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION OF THE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK ,%Moo, (Items A and B, respectively) 1. Measurement payment for the construction and installation of the PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK shall be based upon completion of the entire work as a two separate Lump Sum Bid Items (Item A and Item B, respectively) complete, in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 2. Payment for said construction and installation of the PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK system shall be made at the Lump Sum Prices for Items A and B, respectively, named in the Bid Schedule under Base Bid and shall constitute full compensation for the construction and installation of the PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK system. 3. Payment of the Lump Sum Prices of Items A and B shall be made in accordance with the schedule of values developed as indicated in Section 01301 — Schedule of Values. Payment of each breakdown item identified in the schedule of values shall be conducted based on the Percent Complete reported for that item by the CONTRACTOR and accepted by the ENGINEER. B. TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM (Item C) 1. Work under this item includes furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and performing all operations to plan, design, construct, install, maintain, monitor, modify as necessary, and remove upon completion, a Trench Safety System for trenches more than five feet deep, as shown on the drawings and as specified. This item also includes the cost of obtaining soil borings and the associated geotechnical analyses and the preparation of a trench safety plan by a registered professional engineer. This item does MWH—05/18/07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01025-1 not include the typical work ordinarily required for installing pipe without regard to the safety requirements contained in Section 01014—Trench Safety System (e.g. excavation, dewatering, pipe installation, embedment, backfill, etc.). 2. Measurement and Payment will be based upon the actual linear feet of trench length where a Trench Safety System has been provided. If there are multiple trench safety systems, Measurement and Payment will be based upon the actual linear feet of trench length for each system. 1.4 PARTIAL PAYMENT A. Partial payments will be made for materials and equipment stored on Site but not installed, in accordance with Section C8-8 of the General Conditions. The amount paid for stored materials shall be for amount actually paid by Contractor and include any discounts received for early payment. In order to receive approval for partial payment of any materials and equipment stored on Site, the Contractor must submit copies of the original invoices with the Application for Payment for all materials and equipment, to be approved for payment. Payment for all stored on-site items shall be subject to the retainage described in Section C8-8 of the General Conditions. 1.5. EXTRA WORK A. Extra work, if any, will be performed in accordance with Section C4-4 of the General conditions and will be paid for in accordance with the provisions of that Section C8-8. PART 2-- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3--EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH—05/18/07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01025-2 SECTION 01070- ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Wherever in these Specifications references are made to the standards, specifications, or other published data of the various international, national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. As a guide to the user of these Specifications, the following acronyms or abbreviations which may appear in these Specifications shall have the meanings indicated herein. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AA Aluminum Association AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association AAR Association of American Railroads AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ACI American Concrete Institute AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc. AGA American Gas Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHA American Hardboard Association AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers Al The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANS American Nuclear Society ANSI American National Standards institute, Inc. APA American Plywood Association or American Parquet Association, Inc. API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASLE American Society of Lubricating Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASNT American Society of Nondestructive Testing ASQC American Society for Quality Control ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCI American Wire Cloth Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society MWH - 05/18/07 ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01070-1 AWWA American Water Works Association BBC Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators International BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers CDA Copper Development Association %Moe CEMA Conveyors Equipment Manufacturer's Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CLPCA California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute CMA Concrete Masonry Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DCDMA Diamond Core Drill Manufacturer's Association DHI Door and Hardware Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association EIA Electronic Industries Association ETL Electrical Test Laboratories EPA Environmental Protection Agency FCI Fluid Controls Institute FM Factory Mutual System FPL Forest Products Laboratory HI Hydronics Institute HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association IAPMO international Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO International Conference of Building Officials IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IES Illuminating Engineering Society IME Institute of Makers of Explosives IP Institute of Petroleum (London) IPC Institute of Printed Circuits IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association ISDSI Insulated Steel Door Systems Institute ISA Instrument Society of America ISEA Industrial Safety Equipment Association ISO International Organization for Standardization ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association MIL Military Standards (DoD) MPTA Mechanical Power Transmission Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society MTI Marine Testing Institute NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NAGDM National Association of Garage Door Manufacturers NB National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (alternate NBBPVI) NBS National Bureau of Standards (Now NIST) NCCLS National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association or National Fluid Power Association or National Forest Products Association NISO National Information Standards Organization MWH - 05/18/07 ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01070-2 NLGI National Lubricating Grease Institute NMA National Microfilm Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association 1%ftwol OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PPI Plastics Pipe Institute RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RIS Redwood Inspection Service RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association RVIA Recreational Vehicle Industry Association RWMA Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association SDI Steel Door Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPI Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation SSA Swedish Standards Association SSBC Southern Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress SSPC Society for Protective Coating SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction TAPPI Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry TFI The Fertilizer Institute TIA Telecommunications Industries Association ,%„ao, TNRCC Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission UBC Uniform Building Code UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCRSI Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute WEF Water Environment Federation WIC Woodwork Institute of California WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. WWPA Western Wood Products Association PART 2-- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01070-3 SECTION 01090-REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 —GENERAL **Mope 1.1 GENERAL A. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs: Captions accompanying specification sections and paragraphs are for convenience of reference only, and do not form a part of the Specifications. B. Applicable Publications: Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the WORK is advertised for bids shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth herein or shown on the Drawings shall be waived because of any provision of, or omission from, said standards or requirements. C. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or implies) that specific work is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be engaged for the performance of that work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements over which the CONTRACTOR has no choice or option. These requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the WORK; also they are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of contract requirements remains with the CONTRACTOR. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of applicable codes and the applicable requirements of the following documents. B. References herein to "Building Code" or "Uniform Building Code" shall mean Uniform Building Code of the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO). Similarly, references to "Mechanical Code" or "Uniform Mechanical Code," "Plumbing Code" or "Uniform Plumbing Code," "Fire Code" or "Uniform Fire Code," shall mean Uniform Mechanical Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Fire Code of the International Conference of the Building Officials (ICBO). "Electric Code" or "National Electric Code (NEC)" shall mean the National Electric Code of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The latest edition of the codes as approved by the Municipal Code and used by the local agency as of the date that the WORK is advertised for bids, as adopted by the agency having jurisdiction, shall apply to the WORK herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings, and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any materials or furnishing labor. The CONTRACTOR shall bid for the most stringent requirements. D. The CONTRACTOR shall construct the WORK specified herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced MWH -05/18/07 REFERENCE STANDARDS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01090-1 codes, standards, and specifications listed herein. E. References herein to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. F. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910,Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. 1.3 REGULATIONS RELATED TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible that all work included in the Contract Documents, regardless if shown or not, shall comply with all EPA, OSHA, RCRA, NFPA, and any other Federal, State, and Local Regulations governing the storage and conveyance of hazardous materials, including petroleum products. B. Where no specific regulations exist, all chemical, hazardous, and petroleum product piping and storage in underground locations must be installed with double containment piping and tanks, or in separate concrete trenches and vaults, or with an approved lining which cannot be penetrated by the chemicals, unless waived in writing by the OWNER. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION- MWH-05/18/07 REFERENCE STANDARDS — CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01090-2 SECTION 01300-CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS PART 1 --GENERAL `✓ 1.1 GENERAL A. Wherever submittals are required hereunder, all such submittals by the CONTRACTOR shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. B. Within 7 days after the date of commencement as stated in the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items to the ENGINEER for review: 1. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitutes ("Or- Equal") submittals listed in the Bid. 2. A list of all permits and licenses the CONTRACTOR shall obtain indicating the agency required to grant the permit and the expected date of submittal for the permit and required date for receipt of the permit. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SUBMITTALS A. At the preconstruction conference referred to in Section 01010 - Summary of Work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the following items to the ENGINEER for review: 1. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitute ("Or- Equal") submittals listed in the Bid. 2. A list of all permits and licenses the CONTRACTOR shall obtain indicating the agency **move required to grant the permit, the expected date of submittal for the permit, and required date for receipt of the permit. 3. A preliminary schedule of values in accordance with Section 01301 -Schedule of Values. 4. A plan of operation in accordance with Section 01311 - Scheduling and Reporting. 5. A project overview bar chart in accordance with Section 01311 — Scheduling and Reporting. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever called for in the Contract Documents, or where required by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER for review, copies, plus one reproducible copy, of each shop drawing submittal. The term "Shop Drawings" as used herein shall be understood to include detail design calculations, shop-prepared drawings, fabrication, and installation drawings, erection drawings, list, graphs, catalog sheets, data sheets, and similar items. Whenever the CONTRACTOR is required to submit design calculations as part of a submittal, such calculations shall bear the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the appropriate branch and in the state wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated. B. All Shop Drawing submittals shall be accompanied by the ENGINEER's standard submittal transmittal form. The form may be obtained in quantity from the ENGINEER at reproduction cost. Any submittal not accompanied by such a form, or where all applicable items on the form are not completed,with be returned for resubmittal. MWH-05/18/07 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01300-1 C. Normally, a separate transmittal form shall be used for each specific item or class of material or equipment for which a submittal is required. Transmittal of a submittal of various items using a single transmittal form will be permitted only when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's "package" or are so functionally related that expediency indicates review of the group or package as a whole. A multiple-page submittal shall be collated into sets, and each set shall be stapled or bound, as appropriate, prior to transmittal to the ENGINEER. Pages shall be numbered and shall be in order. D. Except as may otherwise be indicated herein, the ENGINEER will return prints of each submittal to the CONTRACTOR with its comments noted thereon, within 30 calendar days following receipt by the ENGINEER. It is considered reasonable that the CONTRACTOR shall make a complete and acceptable submittal to the ENGINEER by the second submission of a submittal item. The OWNER reserves the right to withhold monies due to the CONTRACTOR to cover additional costs of the ENGINEER's review beyond the second submittal. The ENGINEER'S maximum review period for each submittal, including all resubmittals, will be 30 days per submittal. Thus, for a submittal that requires two resubmittals before it is complete, the maximum review period for that submittal could be 90 days. E. If copies of a submittal are returned to the CONTRACTOR marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN,"formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required. F. If copies of a submittal are returned to the CONTRACTOR marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED,"formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required. G. If a submittal is returned to the CONTRACTOR marked "AMEND-RESUBMIT," the CONTRACTOR shall revise said submittal and shall resubmit the required number of copies of said revised submittal to the ENGINEER. H. If a submittal is returned to the CONTRACTOR marked "REJECTED-RESUBMIT," the CONTRACTOR shall revise said submittal and shall resubmit the required number of copies of said revised submittal to the ENGINEER. 1. Fabrication of an item shall be commenced only after the ENGINEER has reviewed the pertinent submittals and returned copies to the CONTRACTOR marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." Corrections indicated on submittals shall be considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as changes to the contract requirements. J. All submittals shall be carefully reviewed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR, prior to submission to the ENGINEER. Each submittal shall be dated, signed, and certified by the CONTRACTOR, as being correct and in strict conformance with the Contract Documents. In the case of Shop Drawings, each sheet shall be so dated, signed, and certified. No consideration for review by the ENGINEER of any submittals will be made for any items, which have not been so certified by the CONTRACTOR. All non-certified submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR without action taken by the ENGINEER, and any delays caused thereby shall be the total responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. K. The ENGINEER's review of submittals shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the entire responsibility for the correctness of details and dimensions. The CONTRACTOR shall assume all responsibility and risk for any misfits due to any errors in submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the dimensions and the design of adequate connections and details. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S SCHEDULE MWH -05/18/07 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS -*moo, CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01300-2 A. The CONTRACTOR's construction schedules and reports shall be prepared and submitted to the ENGINEER in accordance with of Section 01311 —Scheduling and Reporting. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Whenever in the Specifications samples are required, the CONTRACTOR shall submit not less than 1 sample of each item or material to the ENGINEER for acceptance at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. Samples, as required herein, shall be submitted for acceptance a minimum of 21 days prior to ordering such material for delivery to the Site, and shall be submitted in an orderly sequence so that dependent materials or equipment can be assembled and reviewed without causing delays in the WORK. C. All samples shall be individually and indelibly labeled or tagged, indicating thereon all specified physical characteristics and Manufacturer's name for identification. Upon receiving acceptance of the ENGINEER, one set of the samples will be stamped and dated by the ENGINEER and returned to the CONTRACTOR, and one set of samples will be retained by the ENGINEER, and [one] set of samples shall remain at the Site until completion of the WORK. D. Unless indicated otherwise, all colors and textures of items presented in sample submittals shall be from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products, or equipment lines. If the samples represent non-standard colors, materials, products, or equipment lines and their selection will require an increase in Contract Times or Price, the CONTRACTOR will clearly indicate same on the transmittal page of the submittal. 1.6 OWNER'S MANUAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit technical operation and maintenance information for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in an organized manner in the Owner's Manual. It shall be written so that it can be used and understood by the OWNER'S operation and maintenance staff. B. The Owner's Manual shall be subdivided first by specification section number; second, by equipment item;and last, by"Part." "Parts"shall conform to the following (as applicable): 1. Part 1 - Equipment Summary: a. Summary: A summary table shall indicate the equipment name, equipment number, and process area in which the equipment is installed. b. Form: The ENGINEER will supply an Equipment Summary Form for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in the WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall fill in the relevant information on the form and include it in Part 1. 2. Part 2-Operational Procedures: a. Procedures: Manufacturer-recommended procedures on the following shall be included in Part 2: Installation Adjustment Startup MWH-05/18/07 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01300-3 Location of controls, special tools, equipment required, or related instrumentation needed for operation Operation procedures (including a description of how the equipment and system react to various external anomalies such as repetitive alarming, loss of communication links, frequent man/machine interface interaction, daylight savings/standard timeAeap year changeover, change from year 1999 to year L� 2000, synchronization of time stamps, and loss and restoration of power.) Load changes Calibration Shutdown Troubleshooting Disassembly Reassemble Realignment Testing to determine performance efficiency Tabulation of proper settings for all pressure relief valves, low and high pressure switches, and other protection devices List of all electrical relay settings including alarm and contact settings 3. Part 3- Preventive Maintenance Procedures: a. Procedures: Preventive maintenance procedures shall include all manufacturer- recommended procedures to be performed on a periodic basis, both by removing and replacing the equipment or component, and by leaving the equipment in place. b. Schedules: Recommended frequency of preventive maintenance procedures shall be included. Lubrication schedules, including lubricant SAE grade, type, and temperature ranges, shall be covered. 4. Part 4- Parts List: a. Parts List: A complete parts list shall be furnished, including a generic description and manufacturer's identification number for each part. Addresses and telephone numbers of the nearest supplier and parts warehouse shall be included. b. Drawings: Cross-sectional or exploded view drawings shall accompany the parts list. 5. Part 5-Wiring Diagrams: a. Diagrams: Part 5 shall include complete internal and connection wiring diagrams for electrical equipment items. 6. Part 6-Shop Drawings: a. Drawings: This part shall include approved shop or fabrication drawings, complete with dimensions. 7. Part 7-Safety: a. Procedures: This part describes the safety precautions to be taken when operating and maintaining the equipment or working near it. 8. Part 8- Documentation: MWH -05/18/07 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01300-4 a. All equipment warranties, affidavits, and certifications required by the Technical Specifications shall be placed in this part. C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER 7 identical Owner's Manuals. Each set shall consist of one or more volumes, each of which shall be bound in a standard size, 3-ring, '`ow, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. A table of contents indicating all equipment in the manuals shall be prepared. D. Owner's Manuals shall be submitted in final form to the ENGINEER not later than the 75 percent of construction completion date. All discrepancies found by the ENGINEER shall be corrected within 30 days from the date of written notification by the ENGINEER. E. Incomplete or unacceptable Owner's Manuals at the 75 percent construction completion point shall constitute sufficient justification to retain the amount in paragraph "Owner's Manual Submittals"of Section 01700- Project Closeout, from any monies due the CONTRACTOR. 1.7 SPARE PARTS LIST A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER 5 identical sets of spare parts information for all mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment. The spare parts list shall include the current list price of each spare part. The spare parts list shall include those spare parts which each manufacturer recommends be maintained by the OWNER in inventory at the plant site. Each manufacturer or supplier shall indicate the name, address, and telephone number of its nearest outlet of spare parts to facilitate the OWNER in ordering. The CONTRACTOR shall cross-reference all spare parts lists to the equipment numbers designated in the Contract Documents. The spare parts lists shall be bound in standard size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 2.5 inches. 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall keep and maintain, at the Site, one record set of Drawings. On these, it shall mark all project conditions, locations, configurations, and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the information represented on the original Contract Drawings, including buried or concealed construction and utility features which are revealed during the course of construction. Special attention shall be given to recording the horizontal and vertical location of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated, or which were not indicated on the Contract Drawings. Said record drawings shall be supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or directed to indicate, fully, the WORK as actually constructed. These master record drawings of the Contractor's representation of as-built conditions, including all revisions made necessary by addenda and change orders shall be maintained up-to-date during the progress of the WORK. B. Copies of the record drawings shall be submitted on the 20th working day of every third month after the month in which the Notice to Proceed is given as well as on completion of WORK. Failure to submit complete record drawings on or before the 20th working day will enact the liquidated damages clause for interim record drawings submittals described in Article 3 of the Agreement. C. In the case of those drawings which depict the detail requirement for equipment to be assembled and wired in the factory, such as motor control centers and the like, the record drawings shall be updated by indicating those portions which are superseded by change order drawings or final shop drawings, and by including appropriate reference information describing *"Moll the change orders by number and the shop drawings by manufacturer, drawing, and revision MWH -05/18/07 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01300-5 numbers. D. Record drawings shall be accessible to the ENGINEER at all times during the construction period. E. Final payment will not be acted upon until the record drawings have been prepared and delivered to the ENGINEER. Said up-to-date record drawings shall be in the form of a set of prints with carefully plotted information overlaid in red. F. Upon Substantial Completion of the WORK and prior to final acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall finalize and deliver a complete set of record drawings to the ENGINEER for transmittal to the OWNER, conforming to the construction records of the CONTRACTOR. This set of drawings shall consist of corrected drawings showing the reported location of the WORK. The information submitted by the CONTRACTOR and incorporated by the ENGINEER into the Record Drawings will be assumed to be correct, and the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy of such information, and for any errors or omissions which may appear on the record drawings as a result. PART 2—PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION(Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01300-6 SECTION 01301 -SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section defines the process whereby the Schedule of Values (lump sum price breakdown for Item A of S ction 01025 — Measurement and Payment) shall be developed. Monthly progress payme t amounts shall be determined from the monthly progress updates of the Construction Schedule activities, and the Schedule of Values. B. The Schedule of Values shall be developed independent but simultaneous with the development of the Construction Schedule activities and logic. 1.2 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a preliminary Schedule of Values for the major components of the WORK at the Preconstruction Conference in accordance with Section 01010 -Summary of Work. The listing shall include, at a minimum, the proposed value for the following major WORK components: 1. Tank complete with all appurtenances 2. Pump station, building and equipment with all appurtenances 3. Yard piping and appurtenances including external junction boxes 4. All site work, including paving, grading, landscaping and appurtenances, fencing, etc. 5. Electrical work and controls for site and facilities. B. The CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall meet at the Preconstruction Conference and jointly review the preliminary Schedule of Values and make any adjustments in value allocations if, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, these are necessary to establish fair and reasonable allocation of values for the major WORK components. Front end loading will not be permitted. The ENGINEER may require reallocation of major WORK components from items in the above listing if in the opinion of the ENGINEER such reallocation is necessary.. 1.3 DETAILED SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a detailed Schedule of Values to the ENGINEER within 14 days after the Preconstruction Conference. The detailed Schedule of Values shall be based on the Bid Items for major WORK components. Because the ultimate requirement is to develop a detailed Schedule of Values sufficient to determine appropriate monthly progress payment amounts, sufficient detailed breakdown shall be provided to meet this requirement. The ENGINEER shall be the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, a greater number of Schedule of Values items than proposed by the CONTRACTOR is necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall add the additional items so identified by the ENGINEER. B. The ENGINEER shall review the detailed Schedule of Values within 14 days from the date of receiving it. The value allocations and extent of detail shall be reviewed to determine any necessary adjustments to the values and to determine if sufficient detail has been proposed to provide for Monthly Pay Estimates. Any adjustments deemed necessary to the value allocation or level of detail shall be made by the CONTRACTOR and a revised detailed Schedule of Values shall be submitted within 7 days. MWH-12/19/01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 01301-1 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 1.4 CROSS REFERENCE LISTING A. To assist in the correlation of the Schedule of Values and the Construction Schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a Cross Reference Listing which shall be furnished in two parts. The first part shall list each Scheduled Activity with the breakdown of the respective valued **MOO, items making up the total cost of the activity. The second part shall list the valued item with the respective Scheduled Activity or Activities that make up the total cost indicated. In the case where a number of schedule items make up the total cost for a valued item (shown in the Schedule of Values) the total cost for each scheduled item should be indicated. B. These listings shall be updated and submitted in conjunction with the CPM monthly submittals as stated in Specification Section 01311 - Scheduling and Reporting. C. Approved change orders reflected in the Construction Schedule shall be incorporated into the Schedule of Values as a single unit identified by the change order number. 1.5 CHANGES TO SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. In the event that the CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER agree to make adjustments to the original Schedule of Values because of inequities discovered in the original accepted detailed Schedule of Values, increases and equal decreases to values for activities may be made. 1.6 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. The Schedule of Values information is an integral part of the scheduling and reporting under Section 01311 - Scheduling and Reporting and the progress payment information. As such, it is critical information to evaluating the project's progress and the proper planning of the OWNER'S and ENGINEER'S work effort as well as their financial obligations associated with this project. Accordingly, if any submittal required by this Section is found to be incomplete or is submitted later than required, the OWNER will suffer financial loss and, accordingly, 1%ftwol liquidated damages will be assessed against the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH-12/19/01 SCHEDULE OF VALUES `011 CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 01301-2 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK SECTION 01311 -SCHEDULING AND REPORTING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The scheduling of the WORK under the Contract shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The development of the schedule, monthly payment requisitions and project status reporting requirements of the Contract shall employ computerized scheduling. Where submittals are required hereunder, the CONTRACTOR shall submit four copies of each submittal item. B. Submission of the CONTRACTOR'S progress schedule to the OWNER or ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of total responsibility for scheduling, sequencing, and pursuing the WORK to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including adverse effects such as delays resulting from ill-timed work or inclement weather. C. The acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S schedule by the ENGINEER and OWNER will be based solely upon the schedule's compliance with the Contract requirements. By way of the CONTRACTOR assigning activity durations and proposing the sequence of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR agrees to utilize sufficient and necessary management and other resources to perform the work in accordance with the schedule. D. Neither the submission nor the updating of the CONTRACTOR'S original schedule submittal nor the submission, updating, change or revision of any other report, curve, schedule or narrative submitted to the ENGINEER by the CONTRACTOR under this Contract, nor the ENGINEER'S review or acceptance of any such report, curve, schedule or narrative shall have the effect of amending or modifying, in any way, the Contract completion date or milestone dates or of modifying or limiting, in any way, the CONTRACTOR'S obligations under this Contract. Only a signed, fully executed change order can modify these contractual obligations. 1.2 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a preliminary construction schedule'at least 2 days prior to the Preconstruction Conference which shall identify the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to complete all work within the Contract Time. B. The preliminary construction schedule shall indicate the major components of the WORK and the sequence relations between major components and subdivisions of major components. The schedule shall indicate the relationships and time frames in which the various components of the WORK will be made substantially complete and placed into service in order to meet the project milestones. Sufficient detail shall be included for the identification of subdivisions of major components into such activities as (1) mobilization activities, (2) shop drawing submittals, (3) submittal review by the ENGINEER, allowing durations described in Section 01300-Contractor Submittals, (4) material procurement, (5) construction activities, separated into the major components for each area of the work and taking into account the sequencing described in Section 01010 - Summary of Work and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, (5) cleanup, punch-list, and demobilization activities. Planned durations and start dates shall be indicated for each work item subdivision. Each major component and subdivision component shall be accurately plotted on a time scale sheet not to exceed 36-inch by 60-inch in size. C. The ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall meet to review the preliminary project schedule at the Preconstruction Conference. The ENGINEER'S review and comment on the MWH -05/18/07 SCHEDULING AND REPORTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01311-1 schedules shall be limited to Contract conformance (with the sequencing and milestone requirements as stated in Section 01010 - Summary of Work). The CONTRACTOR shall make corrections to the schedules necessary to comply with the Contract requirements and shall adjust the schedules to incorporate any missing information requested by the ENGINEER. 1.3 BASELINE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1%W01 A. Within 14 days after the Preconstruction Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall have revised the preliminary schedule submittal to address all review comments from the preliminary schedule review meeting and resubmit the schedule for the ENGINEER'S review. The ENGINEER, within 7 days from the date that the CONTRACTOR submitted his revised schedule will either (1) accept the schedule activities as submitted, or (2) advise the CONTRACTOR in writing to review any part or parts of the schedule which either do not meet the Contract requirements or are unsatisfactory for the ENGINEER to monitor the project's progress and status or evaluate monthly payment requests by the CONTRACTOR. The ENGINEER may accept the schedule with conditions that the first monthly schedule update be revised to correct deficiencies identified. When the schedule is accepted, it shall be considered as the "Baseline Construction Schedule". 1.4 MONTHLY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UPDATES A. Following the acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S Baseline Construction Schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall monitor the progress of the WORK and adjust the schedule each month to reflect actual progress and any changes in planned future activities. Each schedule update submitted must be complete including all information requested in the original schedule submittal. Each update shall continue to show all work activities including those already completed. These completed activities shall accurately reflect the "as built" information by indicating when the work was actually started and completed. B. The monthly schedule update submittal will be reviewed with the CONTRACTOR during a monthly construction progress meeting. The goal of these meetings is to enable the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER to initiate appropriate remedial action to minimize any known or foreseen delay in completion of the WORK and to determine the amount of WORK completed since the last month's schedule update. The status of the WORK will be determined by the percent complete of each activity. The ENGINEER will either accept or reject the monthly schedule update submittal at the monthly meeting. If accepted, the percent complete shown in the monthly update will be the basis for the Application for Payment to be submitted by the CONTRACTOR. If rejected, the update shall be corrected and resubmitted by the CONTRACTOR before the Application for Payment for the update period can be processed. C. The CONTRACTOR shall highlight or otherwise identify all changes to the schedule logic or activity durations made from the previous schedule. The CONTRACTOR shall MWH - 05/18/07 SCHEDULING AND REPORTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01311-2 modify any portions of the schedule which become infeasible because of activities behind schedule or for any other valid reason. D. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare monthly written narrative reports of the status of the project for submission to the ENGINEER. Written status reports shall include: 1. The status of major project components (Percent Complete, amount of time ahead or behind schedule) and an explanation of how the project will be brought back on schedule if delays have occurred. 2. The progress made on critical activities indicated on the schedule. 3. Explanations for any lack of work on critical path activities planned to be performed during the last month. 4. Explanations for any schedule changes, including changes to the logic or to activity durations. 5. A list of the critical activities scheduled to be performed in the next month. 6. The status of major material and equipment procurement. 7. The value of materials and equipment properly stored at the site, but not yet incorporated into the work-in-place. 8. Any delays encountered during the reporting period. 9. The CONTRACTOR may include any other information pertinent to the status of the project. The CONTRACTOR shall include additional status information requested by the ENGINEER. ,*MEW, E. The OWNER reserves the right to require that the CONTRACTOR adjust, add to, or clarify any portion of the schedule which may later be discovered to be insufficient for the monitoring of the WORK or approval of partial payment requests. No additional compensation will be provided for such adjustments, additions or clarifications. 1.5 CHANGE ORDERS A. Upon approval of a change order, or upon receipt by the CONTRACTOR of authorization to proceed with additional work, the change shall be reflected in the next submittal of the schedule by the CONTRACTOR. 1.6 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. If any submittal required by this Section is determined by the ENGINEER to be incomplete or is submitted later than required, the OWNER will suffer financial loss and, accordingly, liquidated damages will be assessed against the CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement. Nwool MWH - 05/18/07 SCHEDULING AND REPORTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01311-3 PART 2— PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3— EXECUTION(Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 SCHEDULING AND REPORTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01311-4 SECTION 01313- CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. WORK shall be scheduled, sequenced, and performed in a manner which minimizes disruption to the public and to the operation and maintenance of existing facilities that will be linked to the WORK. B. The CONTRACTOR shall incorporate the construction and schedule constraints of this Section in preparing the construction schedules required under Section 01311 - Scheduling and Reporting. 1.2 EXISTING FACILITIES A. The WORK shall be executed while the existing water distribution system is in operation. Operation of the existing system shall not be jeopardized as a result of the execution of the WORK. B. The construction constraints in this Section do not include all items affecting the completion of the WORK, but are intended to describe the sequence of critical events necessary to minimize disruption to the ongoing system. It shall be understood and agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the critical events described are not all inclusive and that additional items of work not included may be required to minimize disruption. Deviation from or modification of these suggested sequences is permitted if techniques and methods known to the CONTRACTOR will result in reducing disruption to system operation and maintaining efficiency, and if deviation is approved in advance by the ENGINEER. C. Operational functions or shutdown of the existing facilities required to facilitate CONTRACTOR's operation will be done by the OWNER's personnel only. D. The OWNER's operation and maintenance personnel will cooperate in every way that is practical in order to facilitate CONTRACTOR's operation. However, certain shutdown and connections may only be permissible at times other than normal working hours such as nights or weekends. No additional payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR for any night, weekend, or holiday premium or overtime payments. E. If it becomes necessary for the proper water system operation, the OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to reschedule an approved shutdown. The CONTRACTOR shall then reschedule its operations so there shall be no conflict with necessary operations or maintenance of the plant. The CONTRACTOR shall, within 2 working days, furnish the ENGINEER a revised outage request and a plan for rescheduling the shutdown in accordance with the requirements of the construction schedule. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING 1. All construction activities shall be scheduled and sequenced to ensure continuous operation of the existing system facilities. The CONTRACTOR's scheduling shall develop all construction sequencing so that the work will not adversely impact system operation. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for development of the construction sequencing. MWH -05/18/07 CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01313-1 1.4 PERMITS A. The CONTRACTOR shall abide by the conditions of all permits and shall obtain proof of satisfaction of conditions from issuers of permits prior to acceptance of the WORK by the OWNER. B. Conditions affecting the CONTRACTOR are found in the following permits. Copies of permit conditions are attached at the end of this Section. 1. Construction permit from City of Fort Worth Department of Development 1.5 SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS A. General: It is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to coordinate and plan the construction activities to integrate each schedule constraint into performance of the overall work. B. The listing of schedule constraints below does not mean that all constraints or special conditions have been identified. The list does not substitute for the CONTRACTORSs coordination and planning for completion of the WORK within the Contract Times. C. The following constraints affect the construction schedule. 1. Installation of the 36-inch supply and 36-inch discharge water pipelines (by others) as shown in the Contract Drawings. PART 2--PRODUCTS(NOT USED) PART 3--EXECUTION(NOT USED) - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01313-2 SECTION 01400-QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 —GENERAL '*%wi 1.1 DEFINITION A. Specific quality control requirements for the WORK are indicated throughout the Contract Documents. The requirements of this Section are primarily related to performance of the WORK beyond furnishing of manufactured products. The term "Quality Control" includes inspection, sampling and testing, and associated requirements. 1.2 INSPECTION AT PLACE OF MANUFACTURE A. Unless otherwise indicated, all products, materials, and equipment shall be subject to inspection by the ENGINEER at the place of manufacture. B. The presence of the ENGINEER at the place of manufacturer, however, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for furnishing products, materials, and equipment which comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance is a duty of the CONTRACTOR, and said duty shall not be avoided by any act or omission on the part of the ENGINEER. 1.3 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Unless otherwise indicated, all sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM, as applicable to the class and nature of the article or materials considered; however, the OWNER reserves the right to use any generally- accepted system of sampling and testing which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER will insure the OWNER that the quality of the workmanship is in full accord with the Contract Documents. B. Any waiver by the OWNER of any specific testing or other quality assurance measures, whether or not such waiver is accompanied by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief from the specified testing or other quality assurance requirements as originally specified, and whether or not such guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any necessary corrective or remedial WORK, shall not be construed as a waiver of any requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, the ENGINEER reserves the right to make independent investigations and tests, and failure of any portion of the WORK to meet any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be reasonable cause for the ENGINEER to require the removal or correction and reconstruction of any such work in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICE A. Inspection and testing laboratory service shall comply with the following: 1. OWNER will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing or will perform inspection and testing itself. 2. The OWNER or independent firm will perform inspections, testings, and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the ENGINEER. MWH-05/18/07 QUALITY CONTROL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01400-1 3. Reports will be submitted by the OWNER or independent firm to the ENGINEER in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non- compliance with Contract Documents. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the OWNER or independent firm and furnish samples of materials,design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER 24 hours prior to the expected time for operations requiring inspection and laboratory testing services. 6. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs from such retesting at no additional cost to the OWNER. 7. For samples and tests required for CONTRACTOR'S use, the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements with an independent firm for payment and scheduling of testing. The cost of sampling and testing for the CONTRACTOR'S use shall be included in the Contract Price. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Inspection: The CONTRACTOR shall inspect materials or equipment upon the arrival on the job site and immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and defective items. B. Measurements: The CONTRACTOR shall verify measurements and dimensions of the WORK, as an integral step of starting each installation. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, the CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in Contract Documents. - END OF SECTION - MWH-05/18/07 QUALITY CONTROL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01400-2 SECTION 01505-MOBILIZATION PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits; moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, temporary buildings, and other construction facilities; and implementing security requirements; all as required for the proper performance and completion of the WORK. Mobilization shall include the following principal items: 1. Moving on to the site of all CONTRACTOR's plant and equipment required for first month operations. 2. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 3. Establishing fire protection system. 4. Developing construction water supply. 5. Providing field office trailers for the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, complete with all specified furnishings and utility services including telephones, telephone appurtenances, and copying machine. 6. Providing all on-site communication facilities, including telephones, cordless phone antenna, and radio pagers. 7. Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. 8. Arranging for and erection of CONTRACTOR's work and storage yard. 9. Constructing and implementing security features and requirements complying with Section 01520- Security. 10. Obtaining all required permits. 11. Having all OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs. 12. Having the CONTRACTOR's superintendent at the job site full time. 13. Submitting initial submittals. 1.2 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that 5 percent of the total Contract Price will be deducted from any money due the CONTRACTOR as progress payments until all mobilization items listed above have been completed as specified. The aforementioned amount will be retained by the OWNER as the agreed, estimated value of completing all of the mobilization items listed. Any such retention of money for failure to complete all such mobilization items as a lump-sum item shall be in addition to the retention of any payments due to the CONTRACTOR. B. As soon as practicable after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a breakdown to the ENGINEER for approval, which shall show the estimated value of each MWH -05/18/07 MOBILIZATION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01505-1 major component of mobilization. When approved by the ENGINEER, the breakdown will be the basis for initial progress payments in which Mobilization is included. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH-05/18/07 MOBILIZATION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01505-2 SECTION 01510-TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Types: The types of utility services required for general temporary use at the project site may include the following: Water service (potable for certain uses) Storm sewer Sanitary sewer Electric power service Telephone service 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduled Uses: The CONTRACTOR shall, in conjunction with establishment of job progress schedule, establish a schedule for implementation and termination of service for each temporary utility or facility; at earliest feasible time, and when acceptable to OWNER change over from use of temporary utility service to permanent service. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide either new or used materials and equipment, which are in substantially undamaged condition and without significant deterioration and which are recognized in the construction industry, by compliance with appropriate standards, as being suitable for intended use in each case. Where a portion of temporary utility is provided for CONTRACTOR by utility company, the CONTRACTOR shall provide remainder with matching and compatible materials and equipment and comply with recommendations of utility company. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES A. General: Wherever feasible, the CONTRACTOR shall engage the utility company to install temporary service to project, or as a minimum, to make connection to existing utility service; locate services where they will not interfere with total project construction WORK, including installation of permanent utility services; and maintain temporary services as installed for required period of use; and relocate, modify or extend as necessary from time to time during that period as required to accommodate total project construction WORK. B. Approval of Electrical Connections: All temporary connections for electricity shall be subject to approval of the ENGINEER and the power company representative, and shall be removed in like manner at the CONTRACTOR's expense prior to final acceptance of the WORK. C. Separation of Circuits: Unless otherwise permitted by the ENGINEER, circuits separate from lighting circuits shall be used for all power purposes. MWH- 12/19/01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01510-1 D. Construction Wiring: All wiring for temporary electric light and power shall be properly installed and maintained and shall be securely fastened in place. All electrical facilities shall conform to the requirements of Subpart K of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Power: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary power required for its operations under the Contract, and shall provide and maintain all temporary power lines required to perform the WORK in a safe and satisfactory manner. B. Temporary Power Distribution: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a weatherproof, grounded, temporary power distribution system sufficient to accommodate performance of entire WORK of project, including, but not necessarily limited to, temporary electrical heating where indicated, operation of test equipment and test operation of building equipment and systems which cannot be delayed until permanent power connections are operable, temporary operation of other temporary facilities, including permanent equipment and systems which must be placed in operation prior to use of permanent power connections (pumps, HVAC equipment, elevators, and similar equipment), and power for temporary operation of existing facilities (if any) at the site during change-over to new permanent power system. Provide circuits of adequate size and proper power characteristics for each use; run circuit wiring generally overhead, and rise vertically in locations where it will be least exposed to possible damage from construction operations, and result in least interference with performance of the WORK; provide rigid steel conduit or equivalent raceways for wiring which must be exposed on grade,floors, decks, or other recognized exposures to damage or abuse. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING A. Construction Lighting: All WORK conducted at night or under conditions of deficient daylight shall be suitably lighted to insure proper WORK and to afford adequate facilities for inspection �. and safe working conditions. B. Temporary Lighting: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a general, weatherproof, grounded temporary lighting system in every area of construction work, as soon as overhead floor/roof deck structure has been installed; and provide sufficient illumination for safe work and traffic conditions; and run circuit wiring generally overhead, and rise vertically in locations where it will be least exposed to possible damage from construction operations on grade, floors, decks, or other recognized areas of possible damage or abuse. 3.4 WATER SUPPLY A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Fort Worth Water Department for obtaining water service connection and shall allow a three month notice to the Fort Worth Water Department. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all facilities necessary to convey the water from the source to the points of use in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The water capacity charge and the wet tap fees shall be paid by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall pay the fee for water meter and all other charges for water use as specified in Section C6-C.16 of the General Conditions. MWH- 12/19/01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01510-2 B. In addition to the requirements for furnishing bottled, drinking water for the ENGINEER's field office as specified in Section 01590 - Field Office, Equipment, and Services, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and operate all pumping facilities, pipelines, valves, hydrants, storage tanks, and all other equipment necessary for the adequate development and operation of the water supply system. Water used for domestic purposes shall be free of contamination and shall conform to the requirements of the State and local authorities for potable water. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the adequate functioning of its water supply system and shall be solely liable for any claims arising from the use of same, including discharge or waste of water therefrom. C. Water Connections: The CONTRACTOR shall not make connection to, or draw water from, any fire hydrant or pipeline without first obtaining permission of the authority having jurisdiction over the use of said fire hydrant or pipeline and from the agency owning the affected water system. For each such connection made, the CONTRACTOR shall first attach to the fire hydrant or pipeline a valve and a meter, if required by the said authority, of a size and type acceptable to said authority and agency. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all permit and water charges. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SANITARY FACILITIES A. Toilet Facilities: Fixed or portable chemical toilets shall be provided wherever needed for the use of CONTRACTOR's employees. Toilets at construction job sites shall conform to the requirements of Subpart D, Section 1926.51 of the OSHA Standards for Construction. Provide separate field office facilities in conformance with Section 01590 - Field Office, Equipment, and Services. Contractor employees shall not use the pump station facilities. B. Sanitary and Other Organic Wastes: The CONTRACTOR shall establish a regular daily collection of all sanitary and organic wastes. All wastes and refuse from sanitary facilities provided by the CONTRACTOR or organic material wastes from any other source related to the CONTRACTOR's operations shall be disposed of away from the site in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and in accordance with all laws and regulations pertaining thereto. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FIRE PROTECTION A. Fire Protection: The construction plant and all other parts of the WORK shall be connected with the CONTRACTOR's water supply system and shall be adequately protected against damage by fire. Hose connections and hose, water casks, chemical equipment, or other sufficient means shall be provided for fighting fires in the temporary structures and other portions of the WORK, and responsible persons shall be designated and instructed in the operation of such fire apparatus so as to prevent or minimize the hazard of fire. The CONTRACTOR's fire protection program shall conform to the requirements of Subpart F of the OSHA Standards for Construction. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF COMMUNICATIONS A. Telephone Services: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at all times during the progress of the WORK not less than one telephone in good working order, at its own field construction office, at or near the site of the WORK included in the Contract. Each such telephone shall be connected to an established exchange for toll service and with all other telephones utilized by the CONTRACTOR. MWH- 12/19/01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01510-3 B. OWNER'S Telephone: The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish and install in each office provided for the use of the OWNER's or ENGINEER's employees if required under Section 01590-Field Office, Equipment, and services, a separate telephone for each desk and facsimile machine (separate trunk line) similarly connected to an established exchange. C. Telephone Use: The CONTRACTOR shall permit the ENGINEER, the OWNER, or their authorized representatives or employees free and unlimited use of said telephone facilities for all calls that do not involve published toll charges. Calls originated by the ENGINEER, the OWNER, their authorized representatives or employees which involve toll or message unit charges shall be billed to the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR at the rates charged by the telephone company. 3.8 OPERATIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Inspections: Prior to placing temporary utility services into use, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and test each service and arrange for governing authorities' required inspection and tests,and obtain required certifications and permits for use thereof. B. Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain distinct markers for underground lines, and protect from damage during excavating operations. C. Termination and Removal: When need for a temporary utility service or a substantial portion thereof has ended, or when its service has been replaced by use of permanent services, or not later than time of substantial completion,the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove installation unless requested by ENGINEER to retain it for a longer period. The CONTRACTOR shall complete and restore WORK which may have been delayed or affected by installation and use of temporary utility, including repairs to construction and grades and restoration and cleaning of exposed surfaces. D. Removal of Water Connections: Before final acceptance of the WORK on the project, all temporary connections and piping installed by the CONTRACTOR shall be entirely removed, and all affected improvements shall be restored to their original condition, or better, to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and to the agency owning the affected utility. - END OF SECTION - MWH- 12/19/01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01510-4 SECTION 01520-SECURITY PART 1 —GENERAL **ftwow 1.1 SECURITY PROGRAM A. The CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Protect WORK existing premises and OWNER'S operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. 2. Initiate program in coordination with OWNER'S existing security system at job mobilization. 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until OWNER'S occupancy. 1.2 ENTRY CONTROL A. The CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Restrict entry of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. 2. Allow entry only to authorized persons with proper identification. 3. Maintain log of workmen and visitors and make log available to OWNER on request. 4. Make arrangements with Owner to enter the site after normal working hours and on weekends/holidays. �i 5. Coordinate access of OWNER'S personnel to site in coordination with OWNER'S security forces. B. OWNER will control entrance of persons and vehicles related to OWNER'S operations. PART 2— PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH-12/19/01 SECURITY CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01520-1 SECTION 01530-PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all existing utilities and improvements not designated for removal and shall restore damaged or temporarily relocated utilities and improvements to a condition equal to or better than they were prior to such damage or temporary relocation, all in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the exact locations and depths of all utilities shown and the CONTRACTOR shall make exploratory excavations of all utilities that may interfere with the WORK. All such exploratory excavations shall be performed as soon as practicable after award of the contract and, in any event, a sufficient time in advance of construction to avoid possible delays to the CONTRACTOR's work. When such exploratory excavations show the utility location as shown to be in error,the CONTRACTOR shall so notify the ENGINEER. C. The number of exploratory excavations required shall be that number which is sufficient to determine the alignment and grade of the utility. 1.2 RIGHTS-OF-WAY A. The CONTRACTOR shall not do any work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeline; any telephone, telegraph, or electric transmission line; any fence; or any other structure, nor shall the CONTRACTOR enter upon the rights-of-way involved until notified by the ENGINEER that the OWNER has secured authority therefor from the proper party. After authority has been obtained, the CONTRACTOR shall give said party due notice of its intention to begin work, if required by said party, and shall remove, shore, support or otherwise protect such pipeline, transmission line, ditch, fence, or structure or replace the same. When two or more contracts are being executed at one time on the same or adjacent land in such manner that work on one contract may interfere with that on another, the OWNER shall determine the sequence and order of the WORK. When the territory, of one contract is the necessary or convenient means of access for the execution of another contract, such privilege of access or any other reasonable privilege may be granted by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR so desiring, to the extent, amount, in the manner, and at the times permitted. No such decision as to the method or time of conducting the WORK or the use of territory shall be made the basis of any claim for delay or damage, except as provided for temporary suspension of the WORK in Article 15 of the General Conditions of the Contract. 1.3 PROTECTION OF STREET OR ROADWAY MARKERS A. The CONTRACTOR shall not destroy, remove, or otherwise disturb any existing survey markers or other existing street or roadway markers without proper authorization. No pavement breaking or excavation shall be started until all survey or other permanent marker points that will be disturbed by the construction operations have been properly referenced. All survey markers or points disturbed by the CONTRACTOR shall be accurately after all street or roadway resurfacing has been completed. MWH-12/19/01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01530-1 1.4 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT A. General: All paved areas including asphaltic concrete berms cut or damaged during construction shall be replaced with similar materials and of equal thickness to match the existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific resurfacing requirements have been called for in the Contract Documents or in the requirements of the agency issuing the permit. All temporary and permanent pavement shall conform to the requirements of the affected pavement owner. All pavements which are subject to partial removal shall be neatly saw cut in straight lines. B. Temporary Resurfacing: Wherever required by the public authorities having jurisdiction, the CONTRACTOR shall place temporary surfacing promptly after backfilling and shall maintain such surfacing for the period of time fixed by said authorities before proceeding with the final restoration of improvements. C. Permanent Resurfacing: In order to obtain a satisfactory junction with adjacent surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall saw cut back and trim the edge so as to provide a clean, sound, vertical joint before permanent replacement of an excavated or damaged portion of pavement. Damaged edges of pavement along excavations and elsewhere shall be trimmed back by saw cutting in straight lines. All pavement restoration and other facilities restoration shall be constructed to finish grades compatible with adjacent undisturbed pavement. D. Restoration of Sidewalks or Private Driveways: Wherever sidewalks or private roads have been removed for purposes of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall place suitable temporary sidewalks or roadways promptly after backfilling and shall maintain them in satisfactory condition for the period of time fixed by the authorities having jurisdiction over the affected portions before proceeding with the final restoration or, if no such period of times is so fixed, the CONTRACTOR shall maintain said temporary sidewalks or roadways until the final restoration thereof has been made. 1.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall protect all Underground Utilities and other improvements which may be impaired during construction operations. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ascertain the actual location of all existing utilities and other improvements that will be encountered in its construction operations, and to see that such utilities or other improvements are adequately protected from damage due to such operations. The CONTRACTOR shall take all possible precautions for the protection of unforeseen utility lines to provide for uninterrupted service and to provide such special protection as may be necessary. B. Utilities to be Moved: In case it shall be necessary to move the property of any public utility or franchise holder, such utility company or franchise holder will, upon request of the CONTRACTOR, be notified by the OWNER to move such property within a specified reasonable time. When utility lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER a sufficient time in advance for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of service. C. Where the proper completion of the WORK requires the temporary or permanent removal and/or relocation of an existing utility or other improvement which is indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall remove and, without unnecessary delay, temporarily replace or relocate such utility or improvement in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER and the owner of the facility. In all cases of such temporary removal or relocation, restoration to former location shall be accomplished by the CONTRACTOR in a manner that will restore or replace the utility or improvement as nearly as possible to its former locations and to as good or better condition MWH-12/19/01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES %Now CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01530-2 than found prior to removal. D. OWNER's Right of Access: The right is reserved to the OWNER and to the owners of public utilities and franchises to enter at any time upon any public street, alley, right-of-way, or easement for the purpose of making changes in their property made necessary by the WORK ,%NNW, of this Contract. E. Underground Utilities Indicated: Existing utility lines that are indicated or the locations of which are made known to the CONTRACTOR prior to excavation and that are to be retained, and all utility lines that are constructed during excavation operations shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling and, if damaged, shall be immediately repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR. F. Underground Utilities Not Indicated: Refer to Section C5-5.14 of General Conditions. G. All costs of locating, repairing damage not due to failure of the CONTRACTOR to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not shown in the Contract Documents with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the project which was actually working on that portion of the work which was interrupted or idled by removal or relocation of such utility facilities, and which was necessarily idled during such work will be paid for as extra work in accordance with the provisions of Section C4-4.5 of General Conditions. H. Approval of Repairs: All repairs to a damaged utility or improvement are subject to inspection and approval by an authorized representative of the utility or improvement owner before being concealed by backfill or other work. 1. Maintaining in Service: All oil and gasoline pipelines, power, and telephone or the communication cable ducts, gas and water mains, irrigation lines, sewer lines, storm drain lines, poles, and overhead power and communication wires and cables encountered along the line of the WORK shall remain continuously in service during all the operations under the Contract, unless other arrangements satisfactory to the ENGINEER are made with the owner of said pipelines, duct, main, irrigation line, sewer, storm drain, pole, or wire or cable. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and shall repair all damage due to its operations, and the provisions of this Section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after backfilling or is not discovered until after completion of the backfilling. 1.6 TREES WITHIN STREET RIGHTS-OF-WAY AND PROJECT LIMITS A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall exercise all necessary precautions so as not to damage or destroy any trees or shrubs, including those lying within street rights-of-way and project limits, and shall not trim or remove any trees unless such trees have been approved for trimming or removal by the jurisdictional agency or OWNER. All existing trees and shrubs which are damaged during construction shall be trimmed or replaced by the CONTRACTOR or a certified tree company under permit from the jurisdictional agency and/or the OWNER. Tree trimming and replacement shall be accomplished in accordance with the following paragraphs. B. Trimming: Symmetry of the tree shall be preserved; no stubs or splits or torn branches left; clean cuts shall be made close to the trunk or large branch. Spikes shall not be used for climbing live trees. All cuts over 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be coated with an asphaltic emulsion material. C. Replacement: The CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the jurisdictional agency and/or the OWNER if any tree is damaged by the CONTRACTOR's operations. If, in the opinion of said agency or the OWNER, the damage is such that replacement is necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall replace the tree at its own expense. The tree shall be of a like size and MWH-12/19/01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01530-3 variety as the tree damaged, or, if of a smaller size, the CONTRACTOR shall pay to the owner of said tree a compensatory payment acceptable to the tree owner, subject to the approval of the jurisdictional agency or OWNER. The size of the trees shall be not less than 1-inch diameter nor less than 6 feet in height. 1.7 NOTIFICATION BY THE CONTRACTOR A. Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities; and all roadway and state highway rights-of-way the CONTRACTOR shall notify the respective authorities representing the owners or agencies responsible for such facilities not less than 3 days nor more than 7 days prior to excavation so that a representative of said owners or agencies can be present during such work if they so desire. The CONTRACTOR shall also notify the regional notification center at 1-800-422-4133 at least 2 days, but no more than 14 days, prior to such excavation. PART 2— PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION- MWH-12/19/01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES .f CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01530-4 SECTION 01550-SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 HIGHWAY LIMITATIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall make its own investigation of the condition of available public and private roads and of clearances, restrictions, bridge load limits, and other limitations affecting transportation and ingress and egress to the site of the WORK. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to construct and maintain any haul roads required for its construction operations. 1.2 TEMPORARY CROSSINGS A. General: Continuous, unobstructed, safe, and adequate pedestrian and vehicular access shall be provided to fire hydrants, commercial and industrial establishments, churches, schools, parking lots, service stations, motels, fire and police stations, and hospitals. Safe and adequate public transportation stops and pedestrian crossings at intervals not exceeding 300 feet shall be provided. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with parties involved in the delivery of mail and removal of trash and garbage so as to maintain existing schedules for such services. Vehicular access to residential driveways shall be maintained to the property line except when necessary construction precludes such access for reasonable periods of time. B. Temporary Bridges: Wherever necessary, the CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable temporary bridges or steel plates over unfilled excavations, except in such cases as the CONTRACTOR shall secure the written consent of the individuals or authorities concerned to omit such temporary bridges or steel plates, which written consent shall be delivered to the v ENGINEER prior to excavation. All such bridges or steel plates shall be maintained in service until access is provided across the backfilled excavation. Temporary bridges or steel plates for street and highway crossing shall conform to the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction in each case, and the CONTRACTOR shall adopt designs furnished by said authority for such bridges or steel plates, or shall submit designs to said authority for approval, as may be required. C. Street Use: Nothing herein shall be construed to entitle the CONTRACTOR to the exclusive use of any public street, alleyway, or parking area during the performance of the WORK hereunder, and it shall so conduct its operations as not to interfere unnecessarily with the authorized work of utility companies or other agencies in such streets, alleyways, or parking areas. No street shall be closed to the public without first obtaining permission of the ENGINEER and proper governmental authority. Where excavation is being performed in primary streets or highways, one lane in each direction shall be kept open to traffic at all times unless otherwise indicated. Toe boards shall be provided to retain excavated material if required by the ENGINEER or the agency having jurisdiction over the street or highway. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the WORK shall be kept accessible to fire-fighting equipment at all times. Temporary provisions shall be made by the CONTRACTOR to assure the use of sidewalks and the proper functioning of all gutters, storm drain inlets, and other drainage facilities. D. Traffic Control: For the protection of traffic in public or private streets and ways, the CONTRACTOR shall provide, place, and maintain all necessary barricades, traffic cones, warning signs, lights, and other safety devices in accordance with the requirements of the v "Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Part VI - Traffic Controls for Street and Highway MWH- 12/19/01 SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01550-1 Construction and Maintenance Operations," published by U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (ANSI D6.1). The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the WORK and the safety of the public. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night, and all lights shall be kept burning from sunset until sunrise. The CONTRACTOR shall station such %ni guards or flaggers and shall conform to such special safety regulations relating to traffic control as may be required by the public authorities within their respective jurisdictions. All signs, signals, and barricades shall conform to the requirements of Subpart G, Part 1926, of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. The CONTRACTOR shall submit 3 copies of a traffic control plan to the City Engineer for approval a minimum of 2 weeks prior to construction. The City Engineer reserves the right to observe these traffic control plans in use and to make any changes as field conditions warrant. Any changes shall supersede these plans and be done solely at the CONTRACTOR's expense. The CONTRACTOR shall remove traffic control devices when no longer needed, repair all damage caused by installation of the devices, and shall remove post settings and backfill the resulting holes to match grade. E. Temporary Street Closure: If closure of any street is required during construction, the CONTRACTOR shall apply in writing to the City Engineer and any other jurisdictional agency at least 30 days in advance of the required closure. A Detour and Traffic Control Plan shall accompany the application. F. Temporary Driveway Closure: The CONTRACTOR shall notify the owner or occupant(if not owner-occupied) of the closure of the driveways to be closed more than one eight-hour work day at least 3 working days prior to the closure. The CONTRACTOR shall minimize the inconvenience and minimize the time period that the driveways will be closed. The CONTRACTOR shall fully explain to the owner/occupant how long the work will take and when closure is to start. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S WORK AND STORAGE AREA A. The OWNER will designate and arrange for the CONTRACTOR's use, a portion of the property adjacent to the WORK for its exclusive use during the term of the Contract as a storage and shop area for its construction operations relative to this Contract. B. The CONTRACTOR shall make its own arrangements for any necessary off-site storage or shop areas necessary for the proper execution of the WORK. C. Lands to be furnished by the OWNER for camp sites, construction operation, concrete aggregate pits, roads and other purposes are indicated. Should the CONTRACTOR find it necessary to use any additional land for its camp or for other purposes during the construction of the WORK, it shall provide for the use of such lands at its own expense. 1.4 PARKING A. The CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Provide temporary parking areas as follows: 2 spaces for the ENGINEER MWH- 12/19/01 SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01550-2 1 space designated for the handicapped 2. The CONTRACTOR shall direct its employees to park in areas indicated 3. Traffic and parking areas shall be maintained in a sound condition, free of excavated material, construction equipment, mud, and construction materials. The CONTRACTOR shall repair breaks, potholes, low areas which collect standing water, and other deficiencies. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH- 12/19/01 SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01550-3 SECTION 01590- FIELD OFFICE, EQUIPMENT,AND SERVICES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide field offices, equipment, and services specified herein at the project site during the entire time of construction beginning at the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed until the acceptance of the WORK by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall provide one office space within the field offices for the ENGINEER and the OWNER's representative and personnel use, and it shall include the equipment and services as specified herein. 1.2 GENERAL FIELD OFFICE REQUIREMENTS A. All required field offices, equipped as specified herein, shall be provided at the site(s) indicated, ready for use by the ENGINEER within 14 days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that no initial payments for mobilization will be approved for payment for any such work done under the Contract until all field office facilities specified herein, have been provided. The provisions for such payment are specified under Paragraph "Payment for Mobilization" of Section 01505- Mobilization. B. Unless released earlier by the ENGINEER in writing, said field office(s) shall be maintained in full operation at the site with all utilities connected and operable until the Notice of Completion has been executed or recorded. Upon execution or recordation of the Notice of Completion, or upon early release of the field office(s) by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the field office(s) within 14 days from said date, and shall restore the site occupied by said field ,%%Moo, office(s) to the condition indicated. 1.3 FIELD TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Within 14 days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall provide in the field offices provided as specified herein, for the use of the OWNER's or ENGINEER's employees in connection with performance of the WORK hereunder, one telephone, in good order, as required hereunder. Additional requirements pertaining to telephones are specified in Section 01510—Temporary Utilities. 1.4 OFFICE FACILITIES A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary electrical wiring, plumbing, toilet and lavatory fixtures, air conditioning and heating equipment, and shelving, and shall furnish all necessary light, heat, water, and daily janitorial services in connection with all field offices specified herein, for the duration of the WORK; and shall remove said offices and appurtenant facilities within 14 days after the execution or recordation of the Certificate of Substantial Completion or Notice of Completion. B. Field Office: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain at a point convenient to the construction operations, at least one, well lighted, air conditioned, electrically heated field office with a toilet room, containing a water closet and lavatory partitioned off from the working areas of the field office. The area of said field office shall not be less than 600 square feet, exclusive of toilet room area. Said office shall be of the portable trailer type unless otherwise specifically FIELD OFFICE, MWH- 12/19/01 EQUIPMENT,AND SERVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01590-1 authorized by the OWNER in writing. The water closet may be of the chemical type; provided, that it is a flush type with an approved holding tank. The toilet room door shall be provided with a latch set. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain for the use of the ENGINEER and the OWNER's representative and personnel within the said field office, one separate office space of a minimum 80 square feet,well lighted,air conditioned, electrically heated and partitioned off from the CONTRACTOR's portion of the field office. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all furnishings, services, and equipment specified herein. The office shall have an outside door lock. The office will have at least 1 desk, 1 filing cabinet, 1 plan table and 2 office chairs. 1.5 FIELD OFFICE SERVICES A. Each field office required hereunder shall be provided with sufficient lighting to provide not less than 50 foot-candles at desk top height at each desk location. Exterior lighting shall be provided over the entrance door. B. A minimum of four 110-v ac duplex electric convenience outlets shall be provided in each office and in the common area. At least one such outlet shall be located on each wall. The electric distribution panel shall service not less than 2 110-v,60-Hz circuits. C. Where inside toilet facilities are not connected to outside plumbing, a flush-type chemical toilet with a holding tank shall be provided. All such sanitary waste material shall be regularly pumped out and the chemicals recharged. A continuous supply of toilet paper and paper towels shall be furnished for each toilet facility. D. Regular daily janitorial services shall be furnished during working hours each day. Offices shall be swept, dusted, and waste receptacles emptied. Toilet facilities shall be sanitized and cleaned daily. 1.6 COPY MACHINE A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide one office copy machine in-the field office. B. Said copy machine shall be a dry, electrostatic process, capable of reproducing original 8-1/2 x 11, 8-1/2 x 14, and 11 x 17 originals on either 8- 1/2 x 11 or 8-1/2 x 14 plain paper. The copy machine shall be capable of both full-size and reduced size prints such that an 8-1/2 x 14 and 11 x 17 original can be copied on a sheet of 8-1/2 x 11 paper. The machine must have a stack-feed capability. C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary paper, powders, chemicals, or other materials required for proper operation of the copy machine. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3—EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - FIELD OFFICE, MWH- 12/19/01 EQUIPMENT, AND SERVICES -- CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01590-2 SECTION 01600-PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. The word "Products," as used herein, is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the WORK, regardless of whether specifically purchased for the project or taken from CONTRACTOR's stock of previously purchased products. The word "Materials," is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed, or applied to form units of work. The word "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, and other like items). Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," "furnishings," special construction,"and similar terms, which are self- explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry. B. Neither "Products" nor "Materials" nor "Equipment" includes machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the WORK. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide products, materials, and equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source. _ B. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for CONTRACTOR's selection of a product, material, or equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall select an option which is compatible with other products, materials, or equipment. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product, material and equipment selections. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver and store the WORK in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft. Delivery schedules shall be controlled to minimize long- term storage of products at site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times for flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive materials to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Products shall be transported by methods to avoid damage and shall be delivered in undamaged condi$on in manufacturer's unopened containers and packaging. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products, materials,and equipment including those provided by OWNER, by methods to prevent soiling and damage. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces. MWH-12/19/01 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH AND SUBSTITUTIONS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01600-PAGE 1 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Products shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with seals and labels intact and legible. Sensitive products shall be stored in weather-tight climate controlled enclosures and temperature and humidity ranges shall be maintained within tolerances required by manufacturer's recommendations. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, products shall be placed on sloped supports above ground. Products subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious sheet covering and ventilation shall be provided to avoid condensation. C. Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area and shall be prevented from mixing with foreign matter. D. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. E. Storage shall be arranged in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and for inspection. 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Stored products shall be periodically inspected on a scheduled basis. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a log of inspections and shall make the log available on request. B. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements and recommendations. C. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain manufacturer-required environmental conditions -� continually. D. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected and that weathering of finishes does not occur. E. For mechanical and electrical equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy of the manufacturer's service instructions with each item and the exterior of the package shall contain notice that instructions are included. F. Products shall be serviced on a regularly scheduled basis, and a log of services shall be maintained and submitted as a record document prior to acceptance by the OWNER in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.7 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS OR "OR-EQUAL" ITEM A. Whenever materials or equipment are indicated in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function, and quality required. If the name is followed by the words "or equal" indicating that a substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other suppliers may be accepted if sufficient information is submitted by the CONTRACTOR to allow the ENGINEER to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named, subject to the following requirements: MWH-12/19/01 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH AND SUBSTITUTIONS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01600-PAGE 2 1. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitution product, material or equipment shall be upon the CONTRACTOR. 2. The ENGINEER will be the sole judge as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitution and the ENGINEER'decision shall be final. 3. The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitution. 4. The OWNER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitution. 5. Acceptance by the ENGINEER of a substitution item proposed by the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents and for adequacy of the substitution. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for resultant changes including design and construction changes resulting from the changes which the accepted substitution requires in the CONTRACTOR'S WORK, the WORK of its subcontractors and of other contractors. B. The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will include the following: 1. If the CONTRACTOR wishes to provide a substitution item, the CONTRACTOR shall make written application to the ENGINEER on the"Substitution Request Form." 2. Unless otherwise provided by law or authorized in writing by the ENGINEER, the "Substitution Request Form(s)' shall be submitted before the pre-construction conference. 3. Wherever a proposed substitution item has not been submitted before the pre- construction conference or wherever the submission of a proposed substitution material or equipment has been judged to be unacceptable by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the material or equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall certify that the proposed substitution will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, and be similar and of equal substance to that indicated, and be suited to the same use as that specified. 5. The ENGINEER will evaluate each proposed substitution within a reasonable period of time. 6. As applicable, no shop drawing submittals shall be made for a substitution item nor shall any substitution item be ordered, installed, or utilized without the ENGINEER'S prior written acceptance of the CONTRACTOR'S "Substitution Request Form." 7. The ENGINEER will record the time required by the ENGINEER in evaluating substitutions proposed by the CONTRACTOR and in making changes by the CONTRACTOR in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. C. The CONTRACTOR' application using the "Substitution Request Forms" shall contain the following statements and information which shall be considered by the ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitution: a MWH-12119/01 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH AND SUBSTITUTIONS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01600-PAGE 3 1. The evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitution will not prejudice the CONTRACTOR's achievement of substantial completion on time. 2. Whether or not acceptance of the substitution for use in the WORK will require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adopt the design to the proposed substitution. 3. Whether or not incorporation or use of the substitution in connection with the WORK is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. 4. All variations of the proposed substitution from the items originally specified will be identified. 5. Available maintenance, repair, and replacement service will be indicated. The manufacturer shall have a local service agency (within 50 miles of the site) which maintains properly trained personnel and adequate spare parts and is able to respond and complete repairs within 24 hours. 6. Itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitution, including cost of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change. D. Without any increase in cost to the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and pay all costs in connection with proposed substitutions and of inspections and testing of equipment or materials submitted for review prior to the CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the WORK, whether or not the ENGINEER accepts the proposed substitution or proposed equipment or material. The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for the charges of the ENGINEER for evaluating each proposed substitution. PART 2—PRODUCTS (Not Used) _. PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH-12/19/01 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT CITY OF FORT WORTH AND SUBSTITUTIONS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01600-PAGE 4 SECTION 01650- TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF CONCRETE AND STEEL HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall test and disinfect steel hydraulic structures in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining permits for discharging excess testing and disinfection water and dechlorination of such water if required to satisfy permit limits. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300—Contractor Submittals. B. Submittals shall include: 1. A testing plan and schedule, including methods for water conveyance, control, disposal, and disinfection shall be submitted in writing for approval. 2. Name of certified bacteriological testing laboratory. 3. Resume of experienced technician, if liquid chlorine is proposed. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Temporary valves, bulkheads, and other water control equipment and choice of disinfectant shall be as determined by the CONTRACTOR. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the WORK or future storage of potable water. B. Chlorine for disinfection may be in the form of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution, or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets. 1. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA B301 - Liquid Chlorine, and shall be used only when the following 3 conditions are met: a. With appropriate gas flow chlorinators and ejectors, b. Under the direct supervision of an experienced technician c. When appropriate safety practices are observed 2. Sodium and calcium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA B300- Hypochlorites. C. Dechlorination agents may be sodium bisulfate, sodium sulfite, or sodium thiosulfate. MWH -05/18/07 TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH AND STEEL HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01650-1 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Water for testing and disinfecting will be furnished by the OWNER; however, the CONTRACTOR shall convey the water from the OWNER-designated source to the points of use. B. All hydraulic structures and appurtenant pressure piping shall be tested; those for potable water shall also be disinfected by chlorination. All chlorinating and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER. C. In the case of a reservoir, testing and disinfecting operations shall be combined. D. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled as late as possible during the Contract Time to maximize the degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the WORK is accepted by the OWNER. Bacteriological testing shall be performed by a certified testing laboratory acceptable to the OWNER. Results of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory to the State Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. E. Protective coating on the interior of steel reservoirs shall be applied before the combined testing and disinfecting operations. F. Release of water from structures after testing and disinfecting have been completed shall comply with federal, state, and local regulations. Chlorine in excessive amounts shall be treated in accordance with permit requirements before discharge. 3.2 PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Prior to both testing and disinfecting, hydraulic structures shall be cleaned by thoroughly hosing down all surfaces with a high pressure hose and nozzle of sufficient size to deliver a minimum flow of 50 gpm. Water, dirt, and foreign material accumulated in this cleaning operation shall be discharged from the structure or otherwise removed. 3.3 TESTING OF STEEL STRUCTURES A. General: The test shall consist of filling the structure with water to the maximum operating water surface elevation and observing for visible leakage over a period of time. B. Evaluation and Repairs: After the tank has been filled for 7 days, outside surfaces shall be inspected for visible leakage. Leakage, as evidenced by liquid droplets, flowing water, or rusty stains, shall be repaired. The tank will not be accepted if any leakage as defined above is visible. Repaired tanks shall be retested, and if acceptable results are obtained, disinfection may proceed. 3.4 TESTING OF APPURTENANT PIPING A. Piping appurtenant to hydraulic structures shall be tested in accordance with Section 01656 - Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection. 3.5 DISINFECTION OF STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANT PIPELINES A. Structures which store or convey potable water shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C652 - Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities, using a combination of chlorination Methods 2 and 3 as modified herein, except MWH -05/18/07 TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH AND STEEL HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01650-2 that filter basins shall be disinfected in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C653- Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants. B. Chlorination: A strong chlorine solution of approximately 200 mg/1 shall be sprayed on all interior surfaces of the structure. Following this, the structure shall be partially filled with ,%Mow, water to a depth of approximately one-foot. If the structure has a hopper bottom, fill it one- foot over the top of the hopper. During the partial filling operation, a chlorine-water mixture shall be injected by means of a solution-feed chlorinating device in such a way as to give a uniform chlorine concentration during the entire filling operation. The point of application shall be such that the chlorine solution will mix readily with the inflowing water. The dosage applied to the water shall be sufficient to provide a chlorine residual of at least 50 mg/l upon completion of the partial filling operation. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution from flowing back into the lines supplying the water. After the partial filling has been completed, sufficient water shall be drained from the lower ends of appurtenant piping to ensure filling the pipe with the heavily chlorinated water. C. Retention Period: Chlorinated water shall be retained in the partially filled structure and appurtenant piping for at least 24 hours. Each valve shall be operated at least once from closed to full open to closed while the lines are filled with the heavily chlorinated water. After the chlorine-treated water has been retained for the required time, the free chlorine residual in the structure and appurtenant piping shall be at least 25 mg/1. If testing does not demonstrate a residual of 25 mg/I or greater, the disinfection procedure above shall be repeated. D. Final Filling of Structure: After the free chlorine residual has been verified to satisfy the 25 mg/L requirement, the water level in the structure shall be raised to its final elevation by addition of potable water. Some heavily-chlorinated water shall be treated and released, if necessary, before final filling with potable water, such that the free chlorine residual after filling will be between 1 and 2 mg/L. After the structure has have been filled, the strength of the chlorinated water shall be determined. If the free chlorine residual is less than 1 mg/I, an r..� additional dosage of chlorine shall be applied to the water. If the free chlorine residual is greater than 2 mg/I, the structure shall be partially emptied and additional potable water added. In no case shall water be released prior to the expiration of the required retention period. 3.6 BACTERIOLOGICAL SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Disinfected water storage facilities shall be sampled and tested by a certified bacteriological laboratory. 3.7 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before installation. Thorough flushing shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until all discolored water is eliminated. - END OF SECTION - "".� MWH -05/18/07 TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH AND STEEL HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01650-3 SECTION 01655 -GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING PART 1 -- GENERAL *"mop, 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall test sanitary system pipelines in accordance with the Contract Documents. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PIPELINE TESTING A. Lines shall be tested for leakage by exfiltration tests. Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. When the water table is two feet or more above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline section to be tested, infiltration shall be measured using a suitable weir or other device acceptable to the ENGINEER. An exfiltration test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 2 feet is provided above both the water table and the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be reestablished. The amount of water required to maintain this water level during a 2-hour test period shall be measured. Leakage as measured by the exfiltration test shall not exceed 250 gallons per inch in diameter per mile of pipeline per day (0.2 gallons per inch in diameter per 100 feet of pipeline per hour). When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished. Testing, correcting, and retesting shall be made at no additional cost to the OWNER. - END OF SECTION - MWH-02182003 GRAVITY PIPELINE TESTING [JOB NO]-(PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 01655-1 SECTION 01656- PRESSURE PIPE TESTING AND DISINFECTION PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall test and disinfect potable water pipelines and appurtenant piping, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining permits for discharging excess testing and disinfection water and dechlorination of such water if required to satisfy permit limits. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300—Contractor Submittals. B. Furnish: 1. A testing plan and schedule, including method for water conveyance, control, disposal, and disinfection shall be submitted in writing for approval. 2. Name of certified bacteriological testing laboratory. 3. Resume of experienced technician, if liquid chlorine is proposed. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. All test equipment, chemicals for chlorination, temporary valves, bulkheads, and other water control equipment, and choice of disinfectant shall be as determined by the CONTRACTOR. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the WORK or future conveyance of potable water. B. Chlorine for disinfection may be in the form of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution, or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets. 1. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B301 - Liquid Chlorine, and shall be used only when each of the following conditions are satisfied: a. With appropriate gas flow chlorinators and ejectors. b. Under the direct supervision of an experienced technician. c. When appropriate safety practices are observed. 2. Sodium and calcium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA B300 - Hypochlorites. C. Dechlorination agents may be sodium bisulfate, sodium sulfite, or sodium thiosuifate. - MWH -05/18/07 PRESSURE PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TESTING AND DISINFECTION MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01656-1 PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Water for testing and disinfecting water pipelines will be furnished by the OWNER; however, the CONTRACTOR shall convey the water from the OWNER-designated source to the points of use. B. All pressure pipelines shall be tested; those for potable water shall be disinfected. All chlorinating and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER. C. Disposal of flushing water and water containing chlorine shall be by methods acceptable to the ENGINEER. D. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled as late as possible during the Contract Time to maximize the degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the WORK is accepted by the OWNER. Bacteriological testing shall be performed by a certified testing laboratory accepted by the OWNER. Results of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory with the State Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. 3.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES A. Pipeline 30-inches diameter and larger shall be visually inspected that all debris has been removed prior to flushing. B. Prior to hydrostatic testing, pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. The CONTRACTOR shall test pipelines either in sections or as a unit. No section of the pipeline shall be tested until all field-placed concrete or mortar has attained an age of 14 days. The test shall be made by closing valves when available or by placing temporary bulkheads in the pipe and filling the line slowly with water. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ascertaining that all test bulkheads are suitably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure without damage to or movement of the adjacent pipe. Unharnessed sleeve-type couplings, expansion joints, or other sliding joints shall be restrained or suitably anchored prior to the test to avoid movement and damage to piping and equipment. Remove or protect any pipeline-mounted devices that may be damaged by the test pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient temporary tappings in the pipelines to allow for all entrapped air to exit. After completion of the tests, such taps shall be permanently plugged. Care shall be taken that all air relief valves are open during filling. C. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate which will not cause any surges or exceed the rate at which the air can be released through the release valves at a reasonable velocity. All the air within the pipeline shall be allowed to escape. The differential pressure across the orifices in the air release valves shall not be allowed.to exceed 5 psi at any time during filling. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar lining, as applicable, to absorb water and to allow the escape of air from air pockets. During this period, bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to the ENGINEER shall be taken. D. The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding the test pressure on the pipeline for a period of 4 hours. The test pressure for pipelines shall be as indicated. The test pressure for yard piping shall be as indicated on the Piping Schedule measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being tested. No pressure test will be required for a reservoir overflow line. All visible leaks shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. Add water to MWH -05/18/07 PRESSURE PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TESTING AND DISINFECTION t MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01656-2 restore the test pressure if the pressure decreases 5 psi below test pressure during the test period. *-%Moe E. The maximum allowable leakage for yard piping shall be as indicated on the Piping Schedule. Pipe with welded joints shall have no leakage. Exposed piping shall show no visible leaks and no pressure loss during the test. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the leakage test, the CONTRACTOR shall determine the cause of the leakage, shall take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and shall again test the pipelines. 3.3 DISINFECTING PIPELINES A. General: All potable water pipelines except those appurtenant to hydraulic structures shall be disinfected in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains, using the Continuous-Feed Method as modified herein. B. Chlorination: A chlorine-water mixture shall be uniformly introduced into the pipeline by means of a solution-feed chlorinating device. The chlorine solution shall be introduced at one end of the pipeline through a tap in such a manner that as the pipeline is filled with water, the dosage applied to the water entering the pipe shall be approximately 50 mg/I. Care shall be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution in the line being disinfected from flowing back into the line supplying the water. C. Retention Period: Chlorinated water shall be retained in the pipeline for at least 24 hours. After the chlorine-treated water has been retained for the required time, the free chlorine residual at the pipeline extremities and at other representative points shall be at least 25 mg/I. If testing does not demonstrate a residual of 25 mg/I or greater, the disinfection procedure above shall be repeated. 114WAr D. Chlorinating Valves: During the process of chlorinating the pipelines, valves and other appurtenances shall be operated from closed to full open to closed while the pipeline is filled with the heavily-chlorinated water. E. Sampling Ports: The CONTRACTOR shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as defined on AWWA C651. Taps may be made at manways and air valves to help facilitate the spacing requirement. F. Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the pipeline until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the pipeline is no higher than that generally prevailing in the system or is acceptable for domestic use. Any release of chlorinated water shall comply with federal, state, and local regulation and the permits for the project. Chlorine in excessive amounts shall be treated before discharge. G. Bacteriological Testing: After final flushing and before the pipeline is placed in service, a sample, or samples shall be collected from the end of the line, and shall be tested for bacteriological quality in accordance with the requirements of the State Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. For this purpose the pipe shall be re-filled with fresh potable water and left for a period of 24 hours before any sample is collected. If testing does not demonstrate a free chlorine residual after the 24-hour period, the disinfection procedure above shall be repeated. If the initial disinfection treatment fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the disinfection procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained. MWH - 05/18/07 PRESSURE PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TESTING AND DISINFECTION MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01656-3 3.4 CONNECTIONS TO.EXISTING SYSTEM A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before installation. Thorough flushing shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until discolored water is eliminated. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 PRESSURE PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TESTING AND DISINFECTION MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 01656-4 SECTION 01660-TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Equipment testing! and startup are prerequisites to satisfactory completion of the contract requirements and shall be completed within the Contract Times. B. The startup is a highly complex operation requiring the combined expertise of the CONTRACTOR, manufacturers' representatives, subcontractors, the ENGINEER, and the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating all parties for a successful startup: the ENGINEER and OWNER will be available for technical and operational advice prior to and during startup. C. Testing and startup activities shall be scheduled according to Section 01311 —Scheduling and Reporting. The 7-day test and the 8-day test shall start prior to midday on a Monday,Tuesday, or Wednesday. Testing periods shall not include holidays, based on the OWNER's calendar. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule: The schedule for testing and startup shall be submitted under Section 01311. B. Testing and Startup Plan: Not less than 60-days prior to startup, submit for review a detailed Testing and Startup Plan. The Plan shall include schedules for manufacturers' equipment certifications, schedules for submitting final Owner's Manuals, schedule for training the OWNER's personnel, list of OWNER and CONTRACTOR-furnished supplies, electrical testing, and detailed schedule of operations to achieve successful system testing, startup, and .%wool performance and acceptance testing. The plan shall include test checklists and data forms for each item of equipment and shall address coordination with the OWNER's staff. The CONTRACTOR shall revise the Plan as necessary based on review comments. C. System Outage Requests: Request for shutdown of existing systems as necessary to test or start up new facilities. D. Records and Documentation 1. Equipment Installation Certification: Where required by the specifications, submit documentation from manufacturer's representative that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from undue stresses from connecting piping and anchoring, and has operated satisfactorily under full load conditions. 2. Records of testing and startup as indicated below. PART 2— PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Prerequisites: The following shall be completed before testing and startup begins. MWH -05/18/07 TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01660-PAGE 1 1. Furnish all Owner's Manual information required by the Contract Documents. 2. Provide all safety equipment, emergency shower and eyewash units, fire extinguishers, gas detectors, protective guards and shields, emergency repair kits, safety chains, handrails, gratings, safety signs, and valve and piping identification required by the Contract Documents. Devices and equipment shall be fully functional, adjusted, and tested. 3. Manufacturer's certifications of proper installation have been accepted. 4. Leakage tests, electrical tests, and adjustments have been completed. 5. The ENGINEER has approved the CONTRACTOR's Testing and Startup Plan. 6. Functional verification of the individual instrumentation loops (analog, status, alarm, and control). 7. Adjustment of the pressure switches, flow switches, timing relays, level switches, vibration switches, temperature switches, RTD monitors, pressure regulating valves, and all other control devices to the settings determined by the ENGINEER or the equipment manufacturer. 8. Functional verification of the individual interlocks between the field-mounted control devices and the motor control circuits, control circuits of variable-speed controllers, and packaged system controls. B. Supplies 1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish: a. Chemicals b. Fuel C. Oil and grease d. Other necessary materials not listed for the OWNER to furnish 2. The OWNER will furnish: a. Water b. Power C. Records of Testing and Startup: The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the following during testing and startup and submit originals to ENGINEER prior to acceptance: 1. Lubrication and service records for each mechanical and electrical equipment item 2. Hours of daily operation for each mechanical and electrical equipment item 3. Equipment alignment and vibration measurement records 4. Logs of electrical measurements and tests MWH - 05/18/07 TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP `ool CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01660-PAGE 2 5. Instrumentation calibration and testing logs 6. Testing and validation of SCADA inputs, outputs, logic functions, status indications, and alarms 7. Factory and field equipment settings 8. Log of problems encountered and adjustments made 9. Other records, logs, and checklists as required by the Contract Documents 3.2 SYSTEM TESTING A. After individual equipment items have been tested and certified as required by the Technical Specifications, tests of systems comprised of single or multiple equipment items with appurtenant equipment and instruments and controls shall be conducted. All items of equipment shall be tested as part of a system to the maximum extent possible. B. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate the manual and automatic modes of operation to verify proper control sequences, software interlocks, proper operation of software logic and controllers, etc. System testing shall include the use of water or other process media, as applicable, to simulate the actual conditions of operation. C. All systems testing activities shall follow the detailed test procedures and checklists in the Testing and Startup Plan. Completion of Systems testing shall be documented by a report. D. The CONTRACTOR shall system test the utility, chemical feed, safety equipment, and other support systems before testing the process system. E. Furnish the ENGINEER at least 10 days written notice confirming the start of system testing. The OWNER's staff will observe systems testing. F. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for manufacturer's representative to revisit the Site as often as necessary to correct malfunctions to the ENGINEER's satisfaction. , G. Each system shall be tested for a continuous, 7-day, 24-hour/day period. If any system malfunctions during the test, the item or equipment shall be repaired and the test restarted at time zero with no credit given for the elapsed time before the malfunction. 3.3 STARTUP AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. The CONTRACTOR shall start up the equipment and operate it at rates directed by the ENGINEER without malfunction for a continuous 8-day, 24 hour/day acceptance test period. If any equipment item, sub system, or system malfunctions during the test period, the item shall be repaired and the test restarted at time zero with no credit given for the elapsed time before the malfunction. B. Defects in material or workmanship which appear shall be promptly corrected. Time lost for wiring corrections, control point settings, or other reasons which interrupt the test may, at the judgement of the ENGINEER, be cause for extending the test period an equal amount of time. C. Acceptance testing shall not begin until all leakage tests, instrumentation tests and adjustments, electrical tests and adjustments, equipment field tests, [disinfection,] and system MWH -05/18/07 TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01660-PAGE 3 tests have been completed to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of manufacturer's representatives, if necessary,to correct equipment malfunctions. E. During acceptance testing,the CONTRACTOR shall: 1. Lubricate and maintain all equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. 2. Clean or replace strainers, screens,and filter elements. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 TESTING AND EQUIPMENT STARTUP -� CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01660-PAGE 4 SECTION 01700-PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 FINAL CLEANUP A. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed work, all rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment, and temporary structures and facilities used during construction. Final acceptance of the WORK by the OWNER will be withheld until the CONTRACTOR has satisfactorily complied with the foregoing requirements for final cleanup of the project site. 1.2 CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE A. The CONTRACTOR shall establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods, and on- site instructional periods (as required under the Contract). Such dates shall be established not less than one week prior to beginning any of the foregoing items, to allow the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and their authorized representatives sufficient time to schedule attendance at such activities. 1.3 OWNER'S MANUAL SUBMITTAL A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that one percent of the contract price will be deducted from any monies due the CONTRACTOR as progress payments, if at the 75 percent construction completion point, the approved OWNER'S MANUAL complying with Section 01300 has not been submitted. The aforementioned amount will be retained by the OWNER as the agreed, estimated value of the approved OWNER'S MANUALS. Any such retention of money for failure to submit the approved OWNER'S MANUALS on or before the 75 percent construction completion point shall be in addition to the retention of any payments due ,%..i to the CONTRACTOR under Section C-8 of the General Conditions. 1.4 FINAL SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR, prior to requesting final payment, shall obtain and submit the following items to the ENGINEER for transmittal to the OWNER: 1. Written guarantees,where required. 2. Operating manuals and instructions. 3. New permanent cylinders and key blanks for all locks. 4. Maintenance stock items; spare parts; special tools. 5. Completed record drawings. 6. Bonds for roofing, maintenance, etc., as required. 7. Certificates of inspection and acceptance by local governing agencies having jurisdiction. 8. Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project, property, or improvement pursuant to the provisions of law. MWH -05/18/07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01700-1 1.5 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements contained in Section C8-8.10 of the General Conditions. B. Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish elevations, shall be considered as a part of such required repair work, and any repair or resurfacing constructed by the CONTRACTOR which becomes necessary by reason of such settlement shall likewise be considered as a part of such required repair work unless the CONTRACTOR shall have obtained a statement in writing from the affected private owner or public agency releasing the OWNER from further responsibility in connection with such repair or resurfacing. C. The CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written order from the OWNER. If the CONTRACTOR fails to make such repairs or replacements promptly, the OWNER reserves the right to do the WORK and the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be liable to the OWNER for the cost thereof. 1.6 BOND A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a bond to guarantee performance of the provisions contained in Paragraph "Maintenance and Guarantee" above, and Section C3-3.7 of the General Conditions. PART 2— PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3— EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18)07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 01700-2 SECTION 02100-SITE PREPARATION PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The WORK of this Section includes measures required during the CONTRACTOR's initial move onto the Site to protect existing fences, houses and associated improvements, streets, and utilities downslope of construction areas from damage due to boulders, trees or other objects dislodged during the construction process; clearing, grubbing and stripping; and regrading of certain areas to receive embankment fill. 1.2 SITE INSPECTION A. Prior to moving onto the site, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect the site conditions and review maps of the pipeline routes and facilities delineating the OWNER's property and right-of-way lines. PART 2—PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 PRIMARY SITE ACCESS A. The CONTRACTOR shall develop any necessary access to the site, including access barriers to prohibit entry of unauthorized persons. B. Utility Interference: Where existing utilities interfere with the WORK, notify the utility owner �..i and the ENGINEER before proceeding in accordance with the General Conditions. 3.2 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING A. Construction areas shall be cleared of grass and weeds to at least a depth of six inches and cleared of structures, pavement, sidewalks, concrete or masonry debris, trees, logs, upturned stumps, loose boulders, and any other objectionable material of any kind which would interfere with the performance or completion of the WORK, create a hazard to safety, or impair the subsequent usefulness of the WORK, or obstruct its operation. Loose boulders within 10 feet of the top of cut lines shall be incorporated in landscaping or removed from the Site. Trees and other natural vegetation outside the actual lines of construction shall be protected from damage during construction, as directed by the ENGINEER. B. Within the limits of clearing, the areas below the natural ground surface shall be grubbed to a depth necessary to remove all stumps, roots, buried logs, and all other objectionable material. Septic tanks, drain fields, and connection lines and any other underground structures, debris or waste shall be removed if found on the Site. All objectionable material from the clearing and grubbing process shall be removed from the Site and wasted in approved safe locations. C. The entire area to be affected by construction shall be stripped to a depth of 0.5 feet below the existing ground contours. The stripped materials shall be stockpiled and incorporated into landscaped areas or other non-structural embankments. D. Unless otherwise indicated, native trees larger than three inches in diameter at the base shall not be removed without the ENGINEER's approval. The removal of any trees, shrubs, fences, v MWH—05/18/07 SITE PREPARATION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02100-1 or other improvements outside of rights-of-way, if necessary for the CONTRACTOR's choice of means and methods, shall be arranged with the owner of the property, and shall be removed and replaced, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.3 OVEREXCAVATION, REGRADING,AND BACKFILL UNDER FILL AREAS A. After the fill areas have been cleared, grubbed, and excavated, the areas to receive fill will require overexcavation, regrading, and backfill, consisting of the removal and/or stockpiling of undesirable soils. The ground surface shall be recontoured for keying the fill and removing severe or abrupt changes in the topography of the site. The overexcavated volumes to a level 2.5 feet below the existing ground contours shall be backfilled. - END OF SECTION - MWH—05/18/07 SITE PREPARATION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02100-2 SECTION 02140- DEWATERING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to dewater trench and structure excavations, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall secure all necessary permits to complete the requirements of this Section of the Specifications. B. At the time of conducting the geotechnical investigation required to design the facilities included in the WORK, groundwater seepage was not observed in the borings. However, it is not possible to accurately predict the magnitude of subsurface water fluctuation that might occur based upon these short-term observations. Dewatering of trenches and other excavations shall be considered as incidental to the construction of the WORK and all costs thereof shall be included in the various contract prices in the Bid Forms, unless a separate bid item has been established for dewatering. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Prior to commencement of excavation, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed plan and operation schedule for dewatering of excavations. The CONTRACTOR may be required to demonstrate the system proposed and to verify that adequate equipment, personnel, and materials are provided to dewater the excavations at all locations and times. The CONTRACTOR's dewatering plan is subject to review by the ENGINEER. 1.3 QUALITY CONTROL ,*Moe A. It shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to control the rate and effect of the dewatering in such a manner as to avoid all objectionable settlement and subsidence. B. All dewatering operations shall be adequate to assure the integrity of the finished project and shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. C. Where critical structures or facilities exist immediately adjacent to areas of proposed dewatering, reference points shall be established and observed at frequent intervals to detect any settlement which may develop. The responsibility for conducting the dewatering operation in a manner which will protect adjacent structures and facilities rests solely with the CONTRACTOR. The cost of repairing any damage to adjacent structures and restoration of facilities shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Dewatering, where required, may include the use of well points, sump pumps, temporary pipelines for water disposal, rock or gravel placement, and other means. Standby pumping equipment shall be maintained on the jobsite. PART 3— EXECUTION MWH—05/18/07 DEWATERING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02140-1 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all equipment necessary for dewatering. It shall have on hand, at all times, sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition and shall have available, at all times, competent workmen for the operation of the pumping equipment. Adequate standby equipment shall be kept available at all times to insure efficient dewatering and maintenance of dewatering operation during power failure. B. Dewatering for structures and pipelines shall commence when groundwater is first encountered, and shall be continuous until such times as water can be allowed to rise in accordance with the provisions of this Section or other requirements. C. At all times, site grading shall promote drainage. Surface runoff shall be diverted from excavations. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and be pumped or drained by gravity from the excavation to maintain a bottom free from standing water. D. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at proposed bottom of excavation. E. If foundation soils are disturbed or loosened by the upward seepage of water or an uncontrolled flow of water, the affected areas shall be excavated and replaced with drain rock at no additional cost to the OWNER. F. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the water level below the bottom of excavation in all work areas where groundwater occurs during excavation construction, backfilling, and up to acceptance. G. Flotation shall be prevented by the CONTRACTOR by maintaining a positive and continuous removal of water. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages which may result from failure to adequately keep excavations dewatered. N*fte", H. If well points or wells are used, they shall be adequately spaced to provide the necessary dewatering and shall be sandpacked and/or other means used to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. A continual check by the CONTRACTOR shall be maintained to ensure that the subsurface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operation. I. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of water from the WORK in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining any permits that may be necessary to dispose of water. No water shall be drained into work built or under construction without prior consent of the ENGINEER. Water shall be filtered using an approved method to remove sand and fine-sized soil particles before disposal into any drainage system. J. The release of groundwater to its static level shall be performed in such a manner as to maintain the undisturbed state of the natural foundation soils, prevent disturbance of compacted backfill and prevent flotation or movement of structures, pipelines, and sewers. - END OF SECTION - MWH—05/18/07 DEWATERING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02140-2 SECTION 02200- EARTHWORK PART 1 —GENERAL ,%wool 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all earthwork indicated and required for construction of the WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR, prior to beginning any trench or structure excavation 5 feet deep or over shall submit to the OWNER and shall be in receipt of the OWNER's written acceptance of the CONTRACTOR's detailed plan showing design of all shoring, bracing, sloping of the sides of excavation, or other provisions for worker protection against the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trenches or structure excavation. If such plan varies from the shoring system standards established in the Construction Safety Orders of the OSHA, such alternative systems plans shall be prepared by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the State of Texas. B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the excavation permit issued by the Texas Department of Industrial Safety. C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of all materials proposed to be used in the work in accordance with the requirements in Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. Sample sizes shall be as determined by the testing laboratory. PART 2— PRODUCTS �..i 2.1 SUITABLE FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable selected or processed clean, fine earth, rock, or sand, free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation. Select Backfili materials denoted within the Contract Drawings shall be ,Type G materials in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph E-7 of this Section. B. Fill and backfill materials to be placed within 6 inches of any structure or pipe shall be free of rocks or unbroken masses of earth materials having a maximum dimension larger than 3 inches. C. Suitable Materials: Materials not defined as unsuitable below are defined as suitable materials and may be used in fills, backfilling, and embankment construction subject to the indicated limitations. In addition, when acceptable to the ENGINEER, some of the material listed as unsuitable may be used when thoroughly mixed with suitable material to form a stable composite. D. Suitable materials may be obtained from on-site excavations, may be processed on-site materials, or may be imported. If imported materials are required by this Section or to meet the quantity requirements of the project the CONTRACTOR shall provide the imported materials at no additional expense to the OWNER, unless a unit price item is included for imported materials in the bidding schedule. MWH—05/18/07 r r �!'J4"�� SOT WORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK - AGE 02200-1 r E. The following types of suitable materials are defined: 1. Type A (three-quarters inch minus granular backfill): Crushed rock or gravel, and sand with the gradation requirements below. The material shall have a minimum sand equivalent value of 28 and a minimum R-value of 78. If the sand equivalent value exceeds 35 the R-value requirement is waived. N%Mw. Sieve Size Percentage Passing 3/4-inch 100 No.4 30- 50 No. 200 0- 12 2. Type B (Class I crushed stone): Manufactured angular, crushed stone, crushed rock, or crushed slag with the following gradation requirements. The material shall have a minimum sand equivalent value of 75. Sieve Size Percentage Passing 3/4-inch 100 No. 4 30-50 No. 200 0-5 3. Type C (sand backfill): Sand with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve, at least 90 percent passing a Number 4 sieve,and a sand equivalent value not less than 30. 4. Type D: Not used 5. Type E (pea gravel backfill): Crushed rock or gravel with 100 percent passing a 1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve. 6. Type F (coarse drainrock): Crushed rock or gravel meeting the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 2-inch 100 1-1/2-inch 90- 100 1-inch 20-55 3/4-inch 0- 15 No. 200 0-3 7. Type G (aggregate base): Crushed rock aggregate base material of such nature that it can be compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base for pavements. At the option of the CONTRACTOR, the grading for either the 1-1/2-inch maximum size or 3/4-inch maximum size gradation shall be used. The sand equivalent value shall be not less than 22, and the material shall meet the following gradation requirements: Percentage Passing 1-1/2-inch Max. 3/4-inch Max. Sieve Size Gradation Gradation MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-2 2-inch 100 - 1-1/2-inch 90 - 100 - 1-inch - 100 3/4-inch 50 -85 90- 100 �..i No. 4 25 -45 35-55 No. 30 10-25 10- 30 No. 200 2 -9 2- 9 8. Type H (graded drainrock): Drainrock shall be crushed rock or gravel, durable and free from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting or drying. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 1-inch 100 3/4-inch 90- 100 3/8-inch 40- 100 No. 4 25 -40 No. 8 18-33 No. 30 5 - 15 No. 50 0-7 No. 200 0-3 The drainrock shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 75. The finish graded surface of the drainrock immediately beneath hydraulic structures shall be stabilized to provide a firm, smooth surface upon which to construct reinforced concrete floor slabs. The CONTRACTOR shall use, at its option, one of the asphalt types listed below: Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Designation SC-800 SC-250 RS-1 Spray Temperature(OF) 175-255 165-200 70-120 Coverage (gal/sq yd) 0.50 0.50 0.50 If the surface remains tacky, sufficient sand shall be applied ,to absorb the excess asphalt. 9. Type I: Any other suitable material as defined herein. 10. Type J (cement-treated backfill): Material which consists of Type H material, or any mixture of Types B, C, G, and H materials which has been cement-treated so that the cement content of the material is not less than 5 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2901 - Standard Test Method for Cement Content of Freshly Mixed Soil Cement. The ultimate compressive strength at 28 days shall be not less than 400 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil -Cement Cylinders. 11. Type K (topsoil): Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by removing soil to a depth not exceeding 2 feet. Removal of the topsoil shall be done after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris. 12. Type M (aggregate subbase): Crushed rock aggregate subbase material that can be compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a firm stable base. The sand MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-3 equivalent value shall be not less than 18 and the material shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percentage Passing 3-inch 100 2-1/2 inch 87- 100 No. 4 35 -95 No. 200 0-29 13. Type N (trench plug): Low permeable fill material, a non-dispersible clay material having a minimum plasticity index of 10. 2.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. Unsuitable materials include the materials listed below. 1. Soils which, when classified under ASTM D 2487 - Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System), fall in the classifications of Pt, OH, CH, MH, or OL. 2. Soils which cannot be compacted sufficiently to achieve the density specified for the intended use. 3. Materials that contain hazardous or designated waste materials including petroleum hydrocarbons, pesticides, heavy metals, and any material which may be classified as hazardous or toxic according to applicable regulations. 4. Soils that contain greater concentrations of chloride or sulfate ions, or have a soil resistivity or pH less than the existing on-site soils. 5. Topsoil, except as allowed below. 2.3 USE OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL TYPES A. The CONTRACTOR shall use the types of materials as designated herein for all required fill, backfill, and embankment construction hereunder. B. Where these Specifications conflict with the requirements of any local agency having jurisdiction or with the requirements of a pipe material manufacturer, the ENGINEER shall be immediately notified. In case of conflict between types of pipe embedment backfills, the CONTRACTOR shall use the agency-specified backfill material if that material provides a greater degree of structural support to the pipe, as determined by the ENGINEER. In case of conflict between types of trench or final backfill types, the CONTRACTOR shall use the agency-specified backfill material if that material provides the greater in-place density after compaction. C. Fill and backfill types shall be used in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Embankment fills shall be constructed of Type I material, as defined herein, or any mixture of Type I and Type A through Type H materials. 2. Pipe zone backfill, as defined under"Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" below, shall consist MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-4 of the following materials for each pipe material listed below. a. Mortar coated pipe, concrete pipe, and un-coated ductile iron pipe shall be provided Type A or B pipe bedding and embedment backfill material. 1%000" b. Coal tar enamel coated pipe, polyethylene encased pipe, tape wrapped pipe, and other non-mortar coated pipe shall be backfilled with Type C bedding and embedment zone backfill material. c. Plastic pipe and vitrified clay pipe shall be backfilled with Type B bedding and embedment zone backfill material. Vitrified clay pipe shall be backfilled with Type B material to the top of the pipe zone. d. Where pipelines are installed on grades exceeding 4 percent, and where backfill materials are graded such that there is less than 10 percent passing a Number 4 sieve, trench plugs of Type J, L, or N material shall be provided at maximum intervals of 200 feet unless indicated otherwise. 3. Trench zone backfill for pipelines as defined under"Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type I backfill material or any of Types A through H backfill materials or any mixture thereof, except: a. Type K material may be used for trench zone backfill in agricultural areas unless otherwise shown or specified. 4. Final backfill material for pipelines under paved areas, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type G backfill material. Final backfill under areas not paved shall be the same material as that used for trench backfill, except that Type K material shall be used for final backfill in agricultural areas unless otherwise indicated. a� 5. Trench backfill and final backfill for pipelines under structures shall be the same material as used in the pipe zone, except where concrete encasement is required by the Contract Documents. 6. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be Type G material constructed to the thicknesses indicated. Aggregate subbase shall be Type M material. 7. Backfill around structures shall be Type I material, or Types A through Type H materials, or any mixture thereof, except as shown. 8. Backfill materials beneath structures shall be as follows: a. Drainrock materials under hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures with underdrain systems shall be Type H material. b. Under concrete hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures without underdrain systems,Types G or H materials shall be used. c. Under structures where groundwater must be removed to allow placement of concrete, Type F material shall be used. Before the Type F material is placed, filter fabric shall be placed over the exposed foundation. d. Under all other structures,Type G or H material shall be used. MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-5 9. Backfill used to replace pipeline trench over-excavation shall be a layer of Type F material with a 6-inch top filter layer of Type E material or filter fabric to prevent migration of fines for wet trench conditions or the same material as used for the pipe zone backfill if the trench conditions are not wet. 10. The top 6 inches of fill on reservoir roofs, embankment fills around hydraulic structures, and all other embankment fills shall consist of Type K material, topsoil. 11. Filter fabric shall be Mirafi 140 N,Mirafi 700X, or equal. 2.4 MATERIALS TESTING A. All soils testing of samples submitted by the CONTRACTOR will be done by a testing laboratory of the OWNER'S choice and at the OWNER'S expense. At its discretion, the ENGINEER may request that the CONTRACTOR supply samples for testing of any material used in the work. B. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D 422- Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. C. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D 2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. D. Unified Soil Classification System: References in this Section to soil classification types and standards shall have the meanings and definitions indicated in ASTM D 2487. The CONTRACTOR shall be bound by all applicable provisions of said ASTM D 2487 in the interpretation of soil classifications. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION -GENERAL A. General: Except when specifically provided to the contrary, excavation shall include the removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered, including all obstructions of any nature that would interfere with the proper execution and completion of the WORK. The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades indicated or ordered. Unless otherwise indicated, the entire construction site shall be stripped of all vegetation and debris, and such material shall be removed from the site prior to performing any excavation or placing any fill. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, place, and maintain all supports and shoring that may be required for the sides of the excavations. Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance with applicable State safety requirements and the requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction (29CFR1926). B. Removal and Exclusion of Water: The CONTRACTOR shall remove and exclude water, including stormwater, groundwater, irrigation water, and wastewater, from all excavations. Dewatering wells, wellpoints, sump pumps, or other means shall be used to remove water and continuously maintain groundwater at a level at least two feet below the bottom of excavations before the excavation work begins at each location. Water shall be removed and excluded until backfilling is complete and all field soils testing has been completed. 3.2 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY,AND EMBANKMENT EXCAVATION MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-6 A. Excavation Beneath Structures and Embankments: Except where otherwise indicated for a particular structure or ordered by the ENGINEER, excavation shall be carried to the grade of the bottom of the footing or slab. Where indicated or ordered, areas beneath structures or fills shall be over-excavated. The subgrade areas beneath embankments shall be excavated to remove not less than the top 6 inches of native material and where such subgrade is sloped, the native material shall be benched. When such over-excavation is indicated, both over- excavation and subsequent backfill to the required grade shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. When such over-excavation is not indicated but is ordered by the ENGINEER, such over-excavation and any resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid item has been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. After the required excavation or over-excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. B. Excavation Beneath Concrete Reservoirs: Excavation under reservoirs shall extend to the bottom of the drainrock layer. After such excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be rolled with heavy compaction equipment to 95 percent of maximum density and then graded to provide a reasonably smooth surface for placement of the drainrock. Areas under the reservoir upon which fill is to be placed shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and compacted to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. C. Excavation Beneath Paved Areas: Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the bottom of the aggregate base or subbase, if such base is called for; otherwise it shall extend to the paving thickness. After the required excavation has been completed, the top 12 inches of exposed surface shall be scarified, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. The finished subgrade shall be even, self-draining, and in conformance with the slope of the finished pavement. Areas that could accumulate standing water shall be regraded to provide a self-draining subgrade. D. Notification of ENGINEER: The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least 3 days in advance of completion of any structure excavation and shall allow the ENGINEER a review period of at least one day before the exposed foundation is scarified and compacted or is covered with backfill or with any construction materials. 3.3 PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Exploratory Excavation 1. The CONTRACTOR shall excavate and expose buried points of connection to existing utilities where indicated on the Drawings. Excavation shall be performed prior to preparation of Shop Drawings for connections and before fabrication of pipe, and the data obtained shall be used in preparing Shop Drawings. 2. Data, including dates, locations excavated, and sketches, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER within one week of excavation. 3. Damage to utilities from excavation activities shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. General: Unless otherwise indicated or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities shall be open-cut trenches with widths as indicated. MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-7 C. Trench Bottom: Except when pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. Excavations for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. D. Open Trench: The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall be 500 feet, or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day, whichever is greater. All trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each day or, in lieu thereof, shall be covered by heavy steel plates adequately braced and capable of supporting vehicular traffic in those locations where it is impractical to backfill at the end of each day. The above requirements for backfilling or use of steel plate will be waived in cases where the trench is located further than 100 feet from any travelled roadway or occupied structure. In such cases, however, barricades and warning lights meeting safety requirements shall be provided and maintained. E. Trench Over-Excavation: Where trenches are indicated to be over-excavated, excavation shall be to the depth indicated, and backfill shall be installed to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. F. Over-Excavation: When ordered by the ENGINEER, whether indicated on the Drawings or not, trenches shall be over-excavated beyond the depth and/or width shown. Such over- excavation shall be to the dimensions ordered. The trench shall then be backfilled to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. Over-excavation less than 6 inches below the limits on the Drawings shall be done at no increase in cost to the OWNER. When the over-excavation ordered by the ENGINEER is 6 inches or greater below the limits shown, or wider, additional payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR. Said additional payment will be made under separate unit price bid items for over-excavation if such bid items have been established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. G. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankments, fills, or structure backfills, the fill shall be constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. H. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation operations, the trench width shall be wider than the shield so that the shield is free to be lifted and then moved horizontally without binding against the trench sidewalls. If the trench walls cave in or slough, the trench shall be excavated as an open excavation with sloped sidewalls or with trench shoring, as indicated and,as required by the pipe structural design. 3.4 OVER-EXCAVATION NOT ORDERED OR INDICATED A. Any over-excavation carried below the grade ordered or indicated, shall be backfilled to the required grade with the indicated material and compaction. Such work shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.5 EXCAVATION IN LAWN AREAS A. Where excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed, dampened, and stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material may be placed on the lawn; provided, that a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than 72 hours. Immediately after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be replaced and lightly rolled in a manner so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to its original condition. CONTRACTOR shall provide new sod if stockpiled sod has not been replaced within 72 hours. MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-8 3.6 EXCAVATION IN VICINITY OF TREES A. Except where trees are indicated to be removed, trees shall be protected from injury during construction operations. No tree roots over 2 inches in diameter shall be cut without express permission of the ENGINEER. Trees shall be supported during excavation by any means previously reviewed by the ENGINEER. 3.7 ROCK EXCAVATION A. Rock excavation shall include removal and disposal of the following: (1) all boulders measuring 1/3 of a cubic yard or more in volume; (2) all rock material in ledges, bedding deposits, and un- stratified masses which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting; (3) concrete or masonry structures which have been abandoned; and (4) conglomerate deposits which are so firmly cemented that they possess the characteristics of solid rock and which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting. B. Rock excavation shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that should the quantity of rock excavation be affected by any change in the scope of the work, an appropriate adjustment of the contract price will be made under a separate bid item if such bid item has been established;otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove and dispose of all excess excavated material at a site selected by the CONTRACTOR and reviewed by the ENGINEER. 3.9 BACKFILL-GENERAL A. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand the loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining structures shall not be placed until the structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while backfill is being placed. B. Except for drainrock materials being placed in over-excavated areas or,trenches, backfill shall be placed after all water is removed from the excavation, and the trench sidewalls and bottom have been dried to a moisture content suitable for compaction. C. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation, pipe installation, and backfill operations, the shield shall be moved by lifting the shield free of the trench bottom or backfill and then moving the shield horizontally, The CONTRACTOR shall not drag trench shields along the trench causing damage or displacement to the trench sidewalls, the pipe, or the bedding and backfill. D. Immediately prior to placement of backfill materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches and structure excavations shall have all loose sloughing, or caving soil and rock materials removed. Trench sidewalls shall consist of excavated surfaces that are in a relatively undisturbed condition before placement of backfill materials. 3.10 PLACING AND SPREADING OF BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. When compaction is achieved using mechanical equipment, the layers shall be evenly spread so that when compacted each MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-9 layer shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness. B. When compaction is achieved using flooding and jetting methods, each layer shall not exceed 3 feet in thickness after compaction. C. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary to promote uniformity of material in each layer. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread around the pipe so that when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side support. D. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content, water shall be added before or during spreading until the proper moisture content is achieved. E. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the specified degree of compaction the material shall be dried until the moisture content is satisfactory. 3.11 COMPACTION OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS A. Each layer of Types A, B, C, G, H, I, and K backfill materials as defined herein, where the material is graded such that at least 10 percent passes a No. 4 sieve, shall be mechanically compacted to the indicated percentage of density. Equipment that is consistently capable of achieving the required degree of compaction shall be used and each layer shall be compacted over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content. B. Each layer of Type E, F, and J backfill materials shall be compacted by means of at least 2 passes from a flat plate vibratory compactor. When such materials are used for pipe zone backfill, vibratory compaction shall be used at the top of the pipe zone or at vertical intervals of 24 inches, whichever is the least distance from the subgrade. C. Fill on reservoir and structure roofs shall be deposited at least 30 days after the concrete roof slab has been placed. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds when loaded shall not be used on a roof. A roller weighing not more than 8,000 pounds shall be used to compact fill �1 on a roof. D. Flooding, ponding, or jetting shall not be used for fill on roofs, backfill around structures, backfill around reservoir walls, for final backfill materials, or aggregate base materials. E. Pipe zone backfill materials that are granular, may be compacted by a combination of flooding and vibration using concrete vibrators or by jetting,when acceptable to the ENGINEER. F. Pipeline trench zone backfill materials, containing 5 percent or less of material passing a No. 200 sieve, may be compacted using flooding and jetting or vibration if the CONTRACTOR uses effective procedures that yield the specified compaction test results. Flooding and jetting shall not be done in such a manner that the pipe or nearby utilities are damaged, in areas of poorly draining or expansive soils, or where the use of the procedure is prohibited by any agency having jurisdiction over the street or right-of-way. Approved jet pipes or immersible vibrators shall be used so that each backfill layer is saturated and consolidated to its full depth before the next layer is placed. Jet pipes shall be kept at least 6 inches away from the pipe where the backfill is being consolidated and 2 feet away from other pipes or utilities. G. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Hand operated power compaction equipment shall be used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-10 H. Backfill around and over pipelines that is mechanically compacted shall be compacted using light, hand operated, vibratory compactors and rollers. After completion of at least two feet of compacted backfill over the top of pipeline, compaction equipment weighing no more than 8,000 pounds may be used to complete the trench backfill. 1*40001, 1. Compaction Requirements: The following compaction test requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soils Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft - Ibf/ft) (2,700 kN-m/m3) for Type A, B, C, G, H, I, K, M, and N materials and in accordance with ASTM D 4253 - Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table, and D 4254 - Standard Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density, for Type B, E, F, and J materials. Where agency or utility company requirements govern, the highest compaction standards shall apply. Percentage of Percentage of Location or Use of Fill Maximum Density Relative Density Pipe embedment backfill for flexible pipe. 95 70 Pipe bedding and over-excavated zones under bedding for flexible pipe, including trench plugs. 95 70 Pipe embedment backfill for Steel Yard Piping --- 70 Pipe embedment backfill for rigid pipe 90 55 Pipe zone backfill portion above embedment for rigid pipe. 95 70 Pipe bedding and over-excavated zones under bedding for rigid pipe. 95 70 Final backfill, beneath paved areas or structures. 95 70 Final backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures. 90 55 Trench zone backfill, beneath paved 95 70 areas and structures, including trench plugs. Trench zone backfill, not beneath paved areas or structures, including trench plugs. 95 70 Embankments and fills. 90 55 Embankments and fills beneath paved areas or structures. 95 70 MWH —05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-11 Backfill beneath structures and hydraulic structures. 95 70 Backfill and fill around structures on reservoir or structure roof. 90 55 `oo, Topsoil (Type K material) 80 N.A. Aggregate base or subbase (Type G or M material) 95 N.A. 3.12 PIPE AND UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Pipe Zone Backfill 1. The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane below the bottom surface of the pipe and a plane at a point above the top surface of the pipe as indicated. The bedding is defined as that portion of pipe zone backfill material between the trench subgrade and the bottom of the pipe. The embedment is defined as that portion of the pipe zone backfill material between the bedding and a level line as indicated. 2. After compacting the bedding the CONTRACTOR shall perform a final trim using a stringline for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Excavation for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. 3. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the indicated backfill material. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to prevent damage to the pipeline coating, cathodic bonds, and the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations. 4. If a moveable trench shield is used during backfill operations the shield shall be lifted to a location above each layer of backfill material prior to compaction of the layer. The CONTRACTOR shall not displace the pipe or backfill while the shield is being moved. B. Trench Zone Backfill: After the pipe zone backfills have been placed, backfilling of the trench zone may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross- section lying as indicated between a plane above the top surface of the pipe and a plane at a point 18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches below the roadway subgrade. If flooding, ponding, or jetting is used the pipe shall be filled with water to prevent flotation. C. Final Backfill: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross-sectional area within 18 inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill within 18 inches of the roadway subgrade. MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-12 3.13 FILL AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION A. The area where a fill or embankment is to be constructed shall be cleared of all vegetation, roots and foreign material. Following this, the surface shall be moistened, scarified to a depth of 6 inches, and rolled or otherwise mechanically compacted. Embankment and fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in approximately horizontal layers. Each layer shall be moistened or aerated, as necessary. Unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER, each layer shall not exceed 6 inches of compacted thickness. The embankment, fill, and the scarified layer of underlying ground shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density under structures and paved areas, and 90 percent of maximum density elsewhere. B. When an embankment or fill is to be made and compacted against hillsides or fill slopes steeper than 4:1, the slopes of hillsides or fills shall be horizontally benched to key the embankment or fill to the underlying ground. A minimum of 12 inches normal to the slope of the hillside or fill shall be removed and re-compacted as the embankment or fill is brought up in layers. Material thus cut shall be re-compacted along with the new material at no additional cost to the OWNER. Hillside or fill slopes 4:1 or flatter shall be prepared in accordance with Paragraph A, above. C. Where embankment or structure fills are constructed over pipelines, the first 4 feet of fill over the pipe shall be constructed using light placement and compaction equipment that does not damage the pipe. Heavy construction equipment shall maintain a minimum distance from the edge of the trench equal to the depth of the trench until at least 4 feet of fill over the pipe has been completed. 3.14 FIELD TESTING A. General: All field soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the OWNER's choice at the OWNER's expense except as indicated below. v B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with Method C of ASTM D 1557. Where cohesionless, free draining soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of relative density, the calculation of relative density will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 4253 and D 4254. Field density in-place tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method, ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth), or by such other means acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. In case the test of the fill or backfill show non-compliance with the required density, the CONTRACTOR shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to insure compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the OWNER and shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide test trenches and excavations including excavation, trench support, and groundwater removal for the OWNER'S field soils testing operations. The trenches and excavations shall be provided at the locations and to the depths required by the OWNER. All WORK for test trenches and excavations shall be provided at no additional cost to the OWNER. - END OF SECTION - v MWH—05/18/07 EARTHWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02200-13 SECTION 02460-A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide A.C. pavement and base, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. ASTM C136—Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ANSI/ASTM D698—Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop. C. ASTM D2922 — Test Method for Density of Soil Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). D. ASTM D4318—Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. E. TEXAS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS — 1993 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges. F. Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation, 1982 Standard Sections for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges (TSHDPT). G. MS-2-Mix Design Methods for Ashphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types — The Asphalt Institute (AI). H. MS-3—Asphalt Plant Manual—The Asphalt Institue (AI). I. MS-8—Asphalt paving Manual—The Asphalt Institute (AI). 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Paving: Designed for medium-duty parking areas, which are subjected to a variety of light-duty vehicles to medium-duty vehicles and an occasional heavy-duty (HS20 Trucks) vehicle (1 to 2 per week). 1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. Include materials testing reports, job-mix formulas, and other pertinent information satisfactory to the ENGINEER. B. Suitability Tests of Proposed Materials: Tests for conformance with the Specifications shall be performed prior to start of the WORK. The samples shall be identified to show the name of the material, aggregate source, name of the supplier, contract number, and the segment of the WORK where the material represented by the sample is to be used. Results of all tests shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Materials to be tested shall include aggregate base, coarse and fine aggregate for paving mixtures, mineral filler, and asphalt cement. MWH—05/18/07 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02460-1 C. Trial Batch: Before placing any paving material, a testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER shall prepare a trial batch of asphalt concrete for each job-mix formula to be used by the CONTRACTOR for the work. The trial batch shall be prepared using the aggregates and asphalt cement proposed by the CONTRACTOR, and approved by the ENGINEER. The compacted trial batch shall provide a basis for computing the voids ratio, provide an indication of the optimum asphalt content, and establish a basis for controlling compaction during construction. The cost of not more than two laboratory trial batch tests will be paid by the OWNER but the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the materials at no cost. Any additional trial batch testing shall be performed at no additional cost to the OWNER. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE A. Coarse and fine aggregate shall conform to Texas Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 340 (Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement). 2.2 PRIME COAT A. The base course shall be primed with 0.30 gallons per sq.yd of cut back asphalt MC-30. 2.3 ASPHALT CEMENT A. Asphalt Cement shall be Grade AC-20 per Texas Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 300. 2.4 HYDRATED LIME A. Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements of Item 264 (Type A) of the with Texas Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges. 2.5 ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval to the ENGINEER a job-mix formula for each mixture. The job-mix formula shall be designed in accordance with TXDOT Construction Bulletin C-14 and Test Method Tex-204-F. B. Base Course Mixture: The aggregate gradation of the job-mix formula shall conform to Texas Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 340, Hot-Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, Type"A" Coarse Base or Type "B" Fine Base. C. Surface Course Mixture: The aggregate gradation of the job-mix formula shall conform to Texas Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, Item 340, Hot-Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, Type"D" Fine Surface. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. All subgrade areas that support asphaltic concrete pavement shall be treated with hydrated lime. A minimum of 7 percent hydrated lime shall be used to modify the subgrade soils. The hydrated lime shall be thoroughly mixed and blended with the upper 6 inches of the subgrade per TxDOT Item 260. This mixture shall be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95% of its MWH—05/18/07 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02460-2 maximum Standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D-698) near its optimum moisture content(-2% to +4%) as determined by the test. Lime treatment shall extend beyond exposed pavement edges by at least one foot. The surface of the subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth and true to grade and cross-section. Subgrade for pavement shall not vary more than 0.02-foot from the indicated grade and cross section. Subgrade for base material shall not vary more than 0.04-foot from the indicated grade and cross section. After fine grading each area in preparation for paving, the subgrade surface shall be lightly moistened and recompacted to obtain a tight, non-yielding subgrade. 3.2 PRIME COAT A. Prior to placing of pavement a prime coat of cutback asphalt shall be applied to the compacted subgrade at a rate between 0.10 and 0.25 gal/sq yd. 3.3 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE BASE COURSE AND SURFACE COURSE A. At the time of placing the A.C. mixture, the temperature of mixture shall not be lower than 260 degrees F or higher than 320 degrees F, the lower limit to be approached in warm weather and the higher in cold weather. B. Asphalt concrete shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F or during unsuitable weather. C. The asphalt concrete shall be evenly spread upon the subgrade or base to such a depth that, after rolling, it will be of the required cross section and grade of the course being constructed. D. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete shall be accomplished in a single, continuous operation by means of a self-propelled mechanical spreading and finishing machine designed specially for that purpose. The machine shall be equipped with a screed or strike-off assembly capable of being accurately regulated and adjusted to distribute a layer of the material to a definite pre-determined thickness. When paving is of a size or in a location that use of a self-propelled machine is impractical, the ENGINEER may waive the self- propelled requirement. E. Spreading, once commenced, shall be continued without interruption. F. The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling with a steel-wheeled tandem roller, steel three-wheeled roller, vibratory roller, or a pneumatic-tired roller shall follow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate rolling with a pneumatic-tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initial rolling. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from previous rolling. In areas too small for the roller, a vibrating plate compactor or a hand tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction. G. Upon completion the pavement shall be true to grade and cross-section. When a 10-ft straightedge is laid on the finished surface parallel to the center of the roadway, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/8-in except at intersections or changes of grade. In the transverse direction, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/4-in. H. The relative density after compaction shall be 95 percent of the density obtained by using ASTM D 1188 or D 2726. A properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device shall be used for determining the field density of compacted asphalt concrete, or slabs or cores may be laboratory tested in accordance with ASTM D 1188. MWH—05/18/07 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02460-3 3.4 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Pavement marking paint shall be applied where indicated only when the pavement surface is dry and clean, and when the air temperature is above 40 degrees F. All equipment used in the application of pavement marking shall produce stripes and markings of uniform quality with clean and well-defined edges that conform to the details and dimensions indicated. Drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint material tracked by traffic shall be immediately removed from the pavement surface by methods previously reviewed by the ENGINEER. - END OF SECTION - MWH—05/18/07 A.C. PAVEMENT AND BASE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02460-4 SECTION 02470S- PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pavement marking and striping, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of local agencies. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Furnish a ready-mixed paint for use on asphalt concrete pavements conforming to FSS TT-P-115F. 1. Paint shall be factory mixed, quick drying and non-bleeding type. 2. Color shall be as per TX D.O.T. requirements. 3. Striping, arrows, lane markers and stop bars shall be provided with paint containing reflective additive. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 TRAFFIC AND LANE MARKINGS A. Sweep dust and loose material from the sealed surface. B. Apply paint striping as indicated with suitable mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply not less than 2 coats at manufacturer's recommended rates of application. C. Protect pavement markings until completely dry in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. - END OF SECTION - 14000, MWH -05/18/07 PAVEMENT MARKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02470S-1 SECTION 02561 - CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED, STEEL CYLINDER TYPE (AWWA C303, MODIFIED) PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide concrete pressure bar-wrapped steel cylinder type pipe, complete in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings of pipe and fittings in accordance with the requirements in Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals, the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C303 - Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped, Steel Cylinder Type, and the following supplemental requirements as applicable: 1. Certified dimensional drawings of all pipe, fittings, and appurtenances. 2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details which indicate the type and thickness of cylinder; the position, type, size, and area of wire or reinforcement; manufacturing tolerances; and all other pertinent information required for the manufacture of the product. 3. Fittings and specials details such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets, connections, test bulkheads, and nozzles or other specials which indicate amount and position of all reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly reinforced to withstand-the internal pressure, both circumferential and longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Design calculations including a complete stress analysis of each critical section of pipe wall, girth joints, and specials, all sufficient to ascertain conformance of pipe and fittings with the Specifications. 5. Material lists and steel reinforcement schedules which include and describe all materials to be utilized. 6. Line layout and marking diagrams which indicate the specific number of each pipe and fitting and the location of each pipe and the direction of each fitting in the completed line. In addition, the line layouts shall include: the pipe station and invert elevation at all changes in grade or horizontal alignment; the station and invert elevation to which the bell end of each pipe will be laid; all elements of curves and bends, both in horizontal and vertical alignment; and the limits of each reach of restrained and/or welded joints, or of concrete encasement. 7. Full and complete information regarding location, type, size, and extent of all welds shall be shown on the Shop Drawings. The Shop Drawings shall distinguish between shop and field welds. Shop drawings shall indicate by welding symbols or sketches the details of the welded joints, and the preparation of parent metal required to make them. Joints or groups of joints in which welding sequence or technique are especially important shall be carefully controlled to minimize shrinkage stresses and distortion. 8. Rubber gasket joint design and details. MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-1 9. Drawings showing the location, design, and details of bulkheads for hydrostatic testing of the pipeline, and details for removal of test bulkheads and repair of the lining. 10. Details and locations of closures for length adjustment and for construction convenience. 11. Detail drawings indicating the type, number, and other pertinent details of the slings, strutting, and other methods proposed for pipe handling during manufacturing, transport, and installation. B. Certifications: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, as specified in ANSI/AWWA C303 and the following supplemental requirements: 1. Physical and chemical properties of all steel. 2. Hydrostatic test reports. 3. Results of production weld tests. 4. Sand, cement, and mortar tests. 5. Rubber gasket tests. C. Performance and paying costs of sampling and testing as necessary for certifications shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the provisions of ANSI/AWWA C303 as supplemented by the requirements herein. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than 14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. B. Tests: Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C303, as applicable. 1. Joint gaskets shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C303. 2. The steel cylinder shall be shop-tested and certified to a pressure of at least 80 percent of the yield strength of the pipe steel cylinder. 3. Tensile tests of production welds on steel cylinders and reinforcement bars shall be accomplished at the start of production and at intervals thereafter not to exceed each 5,000 feet of production welds. C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing and paying for said material tests. The ENGINEER shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that the CONTRACTOR'S schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the ENGINEER. D. In addition to those tests specifically required, the ENGINEER may request additional samples of any material including mixed concrete and lining and coating samples for testing by the OWNER. The additional samples shall be furnished as part of the WORK. MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-2 E. Field Testing: Field testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 02643 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection. F. Welding Requirements: All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9. Welding procedures shall be required for longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections. G. Welder Qualifications: All welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C303, subject to the following supplemental requirements. The pipe shall be of the diameter and class indicated, shall be provided complete with rubber gaskets or welded joints, as indicated in the Contract Documents, and all specials and bends shall be provided as required in Section 02572 - Steel Pipe Fabricated Specials. The inside diameter of the lining shall not be less than the nominal diameter indicated. B. Markings: The manufacturer shall legibly mark all pipes and specials in accordance with the laying schedule and marking diagram. Each pipe shall be numbered in sequence and said number shall appear on the laying schedule and marking diagram in its proper location for installation. All pipe sections and fittings shall be marked at each end with top field centerline. C. Handling and Storage: The pipe shall be handled as a minimum at the 1/3 points by use of wide slings, padded cradles, or other devices, designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe coating/exterior. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment which might injure the pipe coating/exterior will not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe shall be supported on padded skids, sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 3 inches in diameter, sand bags, or suitable means so that coating will not be damaged. The pipe shall not be rolled and shall be secured to prevent accidental rolling. D. The CONTRACTOR shall replace or repair damaged pipe. E. Strutting: Adequate strutting shall be provided on all specials, fittings, and straight pipe so as to avoid damage to the pipe and fittings during handling, storage, hauling, and installation. 1. The strutting shall be placed as soon as practicable after the mortar lining has been applied and shall remain in place while the pipe is loaded, transported, unloaded, installed, and backfilled at the Site. 2. The strutting materials, size, and spacing shall be adequate to support the earth backfill plus any greater loads which may be imposed by the backfilling and compaction equipment. MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-3 3. Any pipe damaged during handling, hauling, storage, or installation due to improper strutting shall be repaired or replaced. F. Laying Lengths: Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C303. G. Lining: The pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, and roughness. H. Closures and Correction Pieces: Closures and correction pieces shall be provided as required so that closures may be made due to different headings in the pipe laying operation and so that correction may be made to adjust the pipe laying to conform to pipe stationing indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Mortar: Materials for mortar shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C303; provided that cement for mortar coating shall be Type II, and mortar lining shall be Type II. Cement for mortar lining and coating shall not originate from kilns which burn metal-rich hazardous waste fuel, nor shall a fly ash or pozzolan be used as a cement replacement. Admixtures shall contain no calcium chloride. B. Steel for Cylinders, Rod, and Fittings 1. Minimum yield strength of steel shall be 36,000 psi. 2. Be manufactured by a continuous casting process 3. Be fully killed 4. Be fine grain practice 5. Have maximum carbon content of 0.25 percent 6. Have maximum sulfur content of 0.015 percent 7. Have minimum elongation of 22 percent in a 2-inch gauge length. 8. Be in accordance with one of the following: a. ASTM A 570 - Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality b. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel c. ASTM A 283 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength 'Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars d. ASTM A 572 - High Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality C. All pipe components in contact with water shall be NSF 61 certified. 2.3 PIPE DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Except as indicated in this Section, pipe shall be designed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C303 and Manual M-9 to withstand the simultaneous application of external loads and internal pressures. 1. Diameter: The internal diameter of pipe shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Maximum Pressure: The maximum pressure shall be as follows: MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED N%W/ CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-4 Pipe Working Pressure Transient Pressure Test Pressure (psi) (psi) (psi) Tank Feed Pipe 26 35 125 Pump Station Suction Header 26 35 125 Pump Suction Pipe 26 35 125 Pump Discharge Pipe 110 146 150 Pump Sta. Discharge Header 110 146 150 B. Cylinder Thickness and Rod Wrap for Internal Pressure: Design in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C303 except that the area of rod reinforcement shall not exceed 40 percent of the total steel area (cylinder plus rod reinforcement) but in no case shall the design stress (using a safety factor of 2.0 to yield strength) be greater than 18,000 psi, at design working pressure nor shall the design stress (using a safety factor of 1.5 to yield strength) be greater than 24,000 psi at design transient pressure. The cylinder thickness shall not be less than No. 12 gage (0.1046 in.). C. Cylinder Thickness and Rod Wrap for External Load: Upon determination of cylinder thickness and rod wrap as described above, the deflection of the pipe shall be checked by the following formula: DKWr3 Deflx= El +0.0614 E'r3 Where: Deflx = Vertical deflection of pipe in inches, not to exceed the square of the inside diameter divided by 4000. D = Deflection lag factor[1.00] K = Bedding constant[0.085] W = Vertical load on pipe, lb/in (See Note 1) r = Mean radius of pipe shell, inches El = Pipe stiffness lb in (See Note 2) E' = Modulus of soil reaction, Ib/in2. A specific, rational method must be used to develop this number for soils at the Site. The method must be reviewed. Note 1: For depths of cover of 10 feet or greater, the earth load shall be computed assuming the prism condition. For depths of cover of less than 10 feet, HS-20 live load shall be included. For depths of cover of 3 feet or less, HS-20 live load plus impact shall be included. Consult Manual M-9 for situations where E-80 loads are appropriate. The MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-5 determination of live load and impact factors shall be as recommended by AASHTO in "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges." Trench Condition: Wd = CdWBd2, Where: Wd = Earth Load in pounds per linear foot Cd = Calculation Coefficient Ku' _ [0.15] w = [120] Ib/ft3 Bd = Trench width at top of pipe, feet Positive Projecting Embankment Condition: W, = C,wB,2, Where: WC = Earth Load in pounds per linear foot Cc = Calculation Coefficient(based on rSdP of 0.25) Ku = [0.19] w = [120]Ib/ft3 Bc = Outside diameter of pipe, feet Note 2: Based on 25 percent of the composite pipe stiffness, El, for the mortar lining, mortar coating, steel cylinder, and rod wrap assuming that it acts as a composite section which considers bond between the steel cylinder and rod wrap and the applied lining and coating. The term "pipe stiffness" as used here is defined as El, where "E" is the modulus of elasticity (E=30,000,000 psi for steel and E=4,000,000 psi for mortar) and "I" is the transverse moment of inertia per unit length of pipe wall, the factors in the foregoing expression to be dimensionally compatible. D. If the calculated deflection, DeflX, exceeds the square of the inside diameter divided by 4000, the pipe stiffness shall be increased by thickening the steel cylinder. E. Welding of Joint Rings to Resist Thrust: Field welding of joint rings will be allowed for thrust restraint. 2.4 SPECIALS AND FITTINGS A. Unless otherwise required under the Contract Documents, all specials and fittings shall be in accordance with Section 02572 and shall conform to the dimensions of ANSI/AWWA C208 - Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. 2.5 JOINTS A. Joint Design: The standard field joint shall be steel joint rings with rubber gaskets. Welded joints shall be provided where indicated. Butt-strap joints shall be used only where required for closures or where indicated. B. Mechanically coupled, field welded, or flanged joints shall be provided where indicated. C. For bell-and-spigot ends with rubber gaskets, the clearance between the bells and spigots shall be such that, when combined with the gasket groove configuration and the gasket itself, MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-6 it will provide watertight joints under all operating conditions when properly installed. The CONTRACTOR shall require the pipe manufacturer to submit details complete with significant dimensions and tolerances and also to submit performance data indicating that the proposed joint has performed satisfactorily under similar conditions. In the absence of a history of field performance, the results of a test program shall be submitted. D. Shop-applied interior linings and exterior coatings shall be held back from the ends of the pipe as indicated or as otherwise acceptable to the ENGINEER. E. Restrained Joints 1. Located where indicated, restrained joints shall be field-welded joints, either single, or inside and outside lap-weld, or butt-weld, or butt-straps. Designs shall include stresses created by the greater of: a. Temperature differential of 40 degrees F plus poisson's effect in combination with hoop stress, or; b. Thrust due to bulkheads, bends, reducers, and line valves resulting from working pressure in combination with hoop stress. 2. For field welded joints, design hoop stresses shall not exceed 18,000 psi. At the CONTRACTOR's option, the steel cylinder area may be progressively reduced from the point of maximum thrust to the end of the restrained length. 3. At the CONTRACTOR's option, a pre-assembled restrained joint system, such as Snap Ring® or approved equal, may be used in lieu of field-welded joints to restrain pipe joints where indicated. 2.6 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING '"Woo A. Cement-Mortar Lining for Shop Application: Unless otherwise indicated, interior surfaces of all pipe shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with cement-mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with ANSI/AWWA C303. During the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe shall be maintained in a round condition by suitable bracing or strutting. The lining machines shall be of a type that has been used successfully for similar work and shall be approved by the ENGINEER. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found faulty at the Site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications. B. The minimum lining thickness and tolerances shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C303. C. The pipe shall be left bare where field joints occur. Ends of the linings shall be left square and uniform. Feathered or uneven edges will not be permitted. D. Defective linings, as determined by the ENGINEER, shall be removed from the pipe wall and shall be replaced to the full thickness required. Defective linings shall be cut back to a square shoulder. E. The progress of the application of mortar lining shall be regulated in order that all hand work, including the repair of defective areas, is cured in accordance with the provisions of ANSI/AWWA C303. Cement-mortar for patching shall be the same materials as the mortar for machine lining, except that a finer grading of sand and mortar richer in cement shall be used when field inspection indicates that such mix will improve the finished lining of the pipe. MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-7 F. Protection of Pipe Lining/Interior: For all pipe and fittings with plant-applied or cement mortar linings, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a 12 mil polyethylene sheet or other suitable bulkhead on the ends of the pipe and on all special openings to prevent drying out of the lining. All bulkheads shall remain intact during shipping and storage until the pipe is installed. 2.7 EXTERIOR COATING OF BURIED PIPE A. All pipe for buried service (underground or in concrete vaults), including bumped heads, shall be coated with a 1-inch thick cement-mortar coating over the rod wrap. The cement-mortar coating shall have a light blue dye. 2.8 PIPE APPURTENANCES A. Pipe appurtenances shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 15 of the Specifications. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE A. Handling and Storage: Pipe and fittings shall be carefully handled and protected against damage to lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free fall. Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner which will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the Site or elsewhere. Pipe shall be handled and stored at the Site in accordance with the requirements stated in Part 2 above. No pipe shall be installed where the lining or coating/interior or exterior surfaces show cracks that may be harmful as determined by the ENGINEER. Such damaged lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces shall be repaired, or a new undamaged pipe shall be provided. B. Pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR. C. The CONTRACTOR, shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no damaged portions of the pipe. The CONTRACTOR shall remove or smooth out any burrs, gouges, weld splatter, or other small defects prior to laying the pipe. D. Before placement of pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruption to the WORK. E. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. No blocking will be permitted, and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling devices after the pipe is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings and to facilitate placement of grout bands. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of coating on field joints. F. Installation Tolerances: Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying diagram and in accordance with the following: MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-8 1. Each section of pipe having a nominal diameter less than 48 inches shall be laid to line and grade, within plus or minus 2 inches horizontal deviation and plus or minus 1-inch vertical deviation. 2. Each section of pipe having nominal diameter 48 inches and larger shall be laid to line and grade, within plus or minus 5 percent of diameter horizontal deviation and plus or minus 2.5 percent of diameter vertical deviation. 3. In addition to the horizontal and vertical tolerances above, lay the pipe so that no high or low points other than those on the laying diagram are introduced. G. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the ENGINEER may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, by the use of bevel adapters, or by the use of additional fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed 75 percent of the maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No joint shall be misfit any amount which will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished joint. In all cases the joint opening, before finishing with the protective mortar inside the pipe, shall be the controlling factor. H. Except for short runs which may be permitted by the ENGINEER, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe which is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to prevent movement. Bends shall be properly installed as indicated. I. Pipe struts shall be left in place until backfilling operations have been completed for pipe 42 inches in diameter and larger. Struts in pipe smaller than 42 inches may be removed immediately after laying. After the backfill has been placed, the struts shall be removed and shall remain the property of the CONTRACTOR. J. Cold Weather Protection: No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be established that the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and frost occurs. K. Pipe and Specials Protection: The openings of all pipe and specials where the pipe and specials have been cement mortar lined in the shop shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to maintain a moist atmosphere and to prevent unauthorized access by persons, animals, water, or any undesirable substance. The bulkheads shall be so designed to prevent drying out of the interior of the pipe. The CONTRACTOR shall introduce water into the pipe to keep the mortar moist where moisture has been lost due to damaged bulkheads. At all times, means shall be provided to prevent the pipe from floating due to water in the trench from any source. Pipe which has floated shall be repaired, including restoration to original condition and grade. L. Pipe Cleanup: As pipe laying progresses, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The CONTRACTOR shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints, and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline. 3.2 RUBBER GASKETED JOINTS A. Immediately before jointing pipe, the spigot end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, and a clean rubber gasket lubricated with a non-toxic vegetable-based lubricant shall be placed MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-9 in the spigot groove. The lubricant shall be a compound listed as in compliance with NSF Standard 61. The volume of the gasket shall be "equalized" by moving a metal rod between the gasket and the spigot ring around the full circumference of the spigot ring. The bell of the pipe already in place shall be carefully cleaned and lubricated with the vegetable-based lubricant. The spigot of the pipe section shall then be inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. After the pipe units have been joined, a feeler gage shall be inserted into the recess and moved around the periphery of the joint to detect any irregularity in the position of the rubber gasket. If the gasket cannot be "felt" all around,the joint shall be disassembled. The joint shall be reassembled with a new gasket. 3.3 WELDED JOINTS A. General: Field welded joints shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C206 - Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. B. Where exterior welds are performed, adequate space shall be provided for welding and inspection of the joints. C. Butt straps shall be as indicated. D. After the pipe and pipe joint are properly positioned in the trench, the length of pipe between joints shall be backfilled to at least one foot above the top of the pipe. Care shall be exercised during the initial backfilling to prevent movement of the pipe and to prevent any backfill material from being deposited on the joint. E. To control temperature stresses, the unbackfilled joint areas of the pipe shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun by the use of properly supported awnings, umbrellas, tarpaulins, or other suitable materials for a minimum period of 2 hours prior to the beginning of the welding operation and until the weld has been completed. Shading materials at the joint area shall not rest directly on the pipe but shall be supported to allow air circulation around the pipe. Shading of the pipe joints need not be performed when the ambient air temperature is below 45 degrees F. F. Shrinkage Control Joints: At intervals not exceeding 250 feet along welded reaches of the pipeline and at the first regular lap-welded field joints outside concrete encasements and structures, the pipe shall be laid with an initial lap of not less than 1-inch greater than the minimum lap dimension. The welding of each such shrinkage control joint shall be performed when the temperature is approximately the lowest during the 24-hour day, after at least 250 feet of pipe have been laid and the joints have been welded ahead of and in back of the shrinkage control joint, and after backfill has been completed to at least 1 foot above the top of the pipe ahead of and in back of the shrinkage control joint. Where shrinkage control joints occur in a traveled roadway or other inconvenient location, the location of the shrinkage control joint may be adjusted, as acceptable to the ENGINEER. G. Prior to the beginning of the welding procedure, any tack welds used to position the pipe during laying shall be removed. Any annular space between the faying surfaces of the bell and spigot shall be equally distributed around the circumference of the joint by shimming, jacking, or other suitable means. The weld shall then be made in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C206. Where more than one pass is required, each pass except the first and final one shall be peened to relieve shrinkage stresses; and all dirt, slag, and flux shall be removed before the succeeding bead is applied. MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-10 H. Prior to butt welding, the pipe and joint shall be properly positioned in the trench using line up clamps so that, in the finished joint, the abutting pipe sections shall not be misaligned more than 1/16-inch. I. Joints: The pipe ends shall be cut straight on joints where butt straps are used for ..� realignment, adjustment, or deflection, and fillet welds shall be made as indicated. J. Unless double fillet welds are shown on the Drawings, field welded joints may, at the CONTRACTOR'S option, be made on either the inside or the outside of the pipe. K. Inspection of Field Welded Joints: An independent testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER but paid by the CONTRACTOR shall inspect the joints. Inspection shall be as soon as practicable after the welds are completed. 1. Fillet welds shall be tested by the Magnetic Particle Inspection Method in accordance with ASME Section Vill, Division 1, Appendix VI. 2. In addition, double fillet welds on butt strap joints shall be tested by the soap solution method using approximately 40 psi air pressure introduced between the plates through a threaded hole as indicated. Test holes shall be plugged by a threaded plug or welding following successful testing. 3. Butt welds shall be inspected by radiographic methods in accordance with API Standard 1104. L. Following testing of the joint, the exterior joint spaces shall be coated in accordance with these specifications after which backfilling may be completed. M. Repair of Welds: Welds that are defective shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR to meet the requirements of the applicable sections of these Specifications. Defects in welds or defective welds shall be removed, and that section of the joint shall then be rewelded. Only sufficient removal of defective material that is necessary to correct the defect is required. After the repair is made, the joint shall be checked by repeating the original test procedure. Welds deficient in size shall be repaired by adding weld metal. 3.4 JOINT COATING AND LINING A. General: The interior and exterior joint recesses shall be thoroughly wiped clean and all water, loose scale, dirt and other foreign material shall be removed from the inside surface of the pipe. The grout for joint coating and lining shall be cement grout in accordance with Section 03315 - Grout, except that composition shall be one part cement to two parts sand and sufficient water for dry-pack consistency for joint linings and thick cream consistency for joint coatings. Cement, sand, and water shall comply with Section 03315. B. Joint Coating: After the pipe has been laid and after sufficient backfill has been placed between the joints to hold the pipe securely in place, the outside annular space between pipe sections shall be completely filled with grout formed by the use of polyethylene foam-lined fabric bands. The grout space shall be flushed with water prior to filling so that the surface of the joint to be in contact with the grout will be thoroughly moistened when the grout is poured. The joint shall be filled with grout by pouring from one side only, and shall be rodded with a wire or other flexible rod or vibrated so that the grout completely fills the joint recess by moving down one side of the pipe, around the bottom of the pipe and up the opposite side. Care shall be taken to leave no unfilled space. Grouting of the outside joint spaces shall be kept as close behind the laying of the pipe as possible except that in no case shall grouting be closer than 3 joints of the pipe being laid. MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-11 C. Grout Bands (Diapers): The grout bands or heavy-duty diapers shall be polyethylene foam-lined fabric with steel strapping of sufficient strength to hold the fresh grout, resist rodding of the grout and allow excess water to escape. The foam plastic shall be 100 percent closed cell, chemically inert, insoluble in water, and resistant to acids, alkalies, and solvents, and shall be Dow Chemical Company, Ethafoam 222, or equal. D. The fabric backing shall be cut and sewn into 9-inch wide strips with slots for the steel strapping on the outer edges. The polyethylene foam shall be cut into strips 6 inches wide and slit to a thickness of 1/4-inch which will expose a hollow or open cell surface on one side. The foam liner shall be attached to the fabric backing with the open or hollow cells facing towards the pipe. The foam strip shall cover the full interior circumference of the grout band with sufficient length to permit an 8-inch overlap of the foam at or near the top of the pipe joint. Splices to provide continuity of the material will be permitted. The polyethylene foam material shall be protected from direct sunlight. E. The polyethylene foam-lined grout band shall be centered over the joint space with approximately equal widths extending over each pipe end and securely attached to the pipe with the steel straps. After filling the exterior joint space with grout, the flaps shall be closed and overlapped in a manner that fully encloses the grout with polyethylene foam. The grout band shall remain in position on the pipe joint. F. Joint Lining: After the backfill has been completed to final grade, the interior joint recess shall be filled with grout. Grout shall be tightly packed in the joint recess and troweled flush with the interior surface. All excess shall be removed. At no point shall there be an indentation or projection of the grout exceeding 1/16-inch. With pipe smaller than 24 inches in diameter, before the spigot is inserted into the bell, the bell shall be daubed with grout; the joint shall be completed, and excess grout on the inside of the joint shall be swabbed out. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPE APPURTENANCES A. Protection of Appurtenances: Where the joining pipe is concrete or coated with cement mortar, buried appurtenances shall be coated with a minimum thickness of one inch of u cement mortar having one part cement to not more than 2 parts plaster sand. B. Installation of Valves: Valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury or damage to any part of the valve. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to installation. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure proper operation. C. Valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the location indicated. D. Buried valves and flanges shall be coated and protected in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating. E. Installation of Flanged Joints: Before the joint is assembled, the flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material with a power wire brush. The gasket shall be centered and the connecting flanges drawn up watertight without unnecessarily stressing the flanges. Bolts shall be tightened in a progressive diametrically opposite sequence and torqued with a suitable, approved and calibrated torque wrench. Clamping torque shall be applied to the nuts only. Full face reinforced rubber gaskets shall be applied to the inside face of blind flanges with adhesive. F. Insulated Joints: Insulated joints and appurtenant features shall be provided as indicated. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise special care when installing these joints to prevent electrical conductivity across the joint. After the insulated joint is completed, an electrical MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-12 resistance test shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. Should the resistance test indicate a short circuit, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the insulating units to inspect for damages, replace all damaged portions, and reassemble the insulating joint. The insulated joint shall then be re-tested to assure proper insulation. 1-..i G. Flexible Coupled Joints: When installing flexible couplings, care shall be taken that the connecting pipe ends, couplings and gaskets are clean and free of all dirt and foreign matter with special attention being given to the contact surfaces of the pipe, gaskets and couplings. The couplings shall be assembled and installed in conformity with the recommendations and instruction of the coupling manufacturer. H. Wrenches used lin bolting couplings shall be of a type and size recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Coupling bolts shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform annular space between the follower rings and the body of the pipe with all bolts tightened approximately the same amount. Diametrically opposite bolts shall be tightened progressively and evenly. Final tightening shall be done with a suitable, approved and calibrated torque wrench set for the torque recommended by the coupling manufacturer. All clamping torque shall be applied to the nut only. 3.6 CORROSION CONTROL A. Joint Bonding: Except where otherwise indicated, joints shall be bonded in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The pipe shall be cleaned to bare bright metal at the point where the bond is installed. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE, BAR-WRAPPED CITY OF FORT WORTH STEEL CYLINDER TYPE MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02561-13 SECTION 02565 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE (AWWA C151, MODIFIED) PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide ductile iron pipe and appurtenant work, complete in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C110 Ductile-iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in through 48 in for Water AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C115 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges AWWA C116 Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service. AWWA C150 Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings. for Water Service AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints ASTM C 150 Portland Cement 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Shop Drawings of pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals, the requirements of the referenced standards and the following supplemental requirements as applicable: 1. Certified dimensional drawings of all valves, fittings, and appurtenances. 2. For pipe 24-inches diameter and larger, line layout and marking diagrams which indicate the specific number of each fitting and the location and the direction of each MWH - 05/18/07 DUCTILE IRON PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02565-1 fitting in the completed line. In addition, the line layouts shall include: the pipe station and invert elevation at changes in grade or horizontal alignment; elements of curves and bends, both in horizontal and vertical alignment; and the limits of each reach of restrained joints, or of concrete encasement. B. Certifications: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other products or materials furnished under this Section and as specified in the referenced standards and the following supplemental requirements: 1. Physical and chemical properties. 2. Hydrostatic test reports. C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing and paying for sampling and testing as necessary for the certifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the referenced standards as applicable. B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform said material tests at no additional cost to the OWNER. The ENGINEER shall have the right to witness all testing conducted by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that the CONTRACTOR's schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the ENGINEER. C. In addition to those tests specifically required, the ENGINEER may request additional samples of any material including lining and coating samples for testing by the OWNER. The additional samples shall be furnished as a part of the WORK. D. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the provisions of the referenced standards, as supplemented by the requirements herein. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than 14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. E. During the manufacture of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with the Specifications. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE GENERAL A. Mortar-lined ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 and C104, subject to the supplemental requirements in this Section. The pipe shall be of the diameter and class indicated, shall be provided complete with rubber gaskets, specials, and fittings as required under the Contract Documents. MWH - 05/18/07 DUCTILE IRON PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02565-2 B. Handling and Storage: The pipe shall be handled as a minimum at the 1/3 points by use of wide slings, padded cradles, or other devices designed and constructed to prevent dama0e to the pipe coating/exterior. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment that might injure the pipe coating/exterior will not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe shall be sy�pported on padded skids, sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 3 inches in diarr'leter, sand bags, or suitable means so that the coating will not be damaged. The pipe shall not be rolled and shall be secured to prevent accidental rolling C. Laying Lengths: Nominal pipe laying lengths shall be 20 ft. D. Finish: The pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, and roughness. 2.2 SPECIALS AND FITTINGS A. Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C153 or AWWA C110 and shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi. Ductile iron fittings larger than 48-inches shall conform to AWWA C153. 2.3 DESIGN OF PIPE A. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to AWWA C150 and C 151 except where modified by this Section. B. Pipe Dimensions: The pipe shall be Pressure Class 250 of the diameter indicated. C. Fitting Dimensions: The fittings shall be Pressure Class 250 of the diameter indicated. D. Joint Design: Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished with flanged joints or restrained joints as required. 1. Pipe joints shall conform to AWWA C111. 2. Restrained joints shall be "Flex-Ring", "Field Flex-Ring", "Lok-Ring", or "Fast- Grip" restrained joints by American Ductile Iron Pipe, "TR FLEX" restrained joint by U.S. Pipe, or equal. 3. Joint restraining devices that impart point loads and/or wedging action on the pipe wall as a means of joint restraint shall not be allowed unless there are no other options for joint restraint available. Under such circumstances, the CONTRACTOR may propose such devices provided the following conditions are met and the request is made as a substitution: a. A formal request for substitution is submitted stating the location(s) where the devices are intended to be used and a statement from the device manufacturer and the pipe manufacturer that the proposed device is appropriate for the intended installation and rated at least for the class of the pipe being supplied. Y MWH - 05/18/07 DUCTILE IRON PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02565-3 b. A statement from the pipe manufacturer is provided accepting the use of the retaining devices and indicating that the use of such devices will in no way affect the warranty of the pipe and/or the performance of the pipe. c. The manufacturer of the device and the pipe manufacturer jointly provide instruction on the proper installation of the device to the personnel installing the units and provide certification to the OWNER that the installers are adequately trained in the installation of the units and that all warranties are in full affect for the project. d. The devices shall be MegaLug Model 1100 as manufactured by EBAA Iron or equal. E. For bell-and-spigot ends with rubber gaskets, the clearance between the bells and spigots shall be such that when combined with the gasket groove configuration and the gasket itself, will provide watertight joints under all operating conditions when properly installed. The CONTRACTOR shall require the pipe manufacturer to submit details complete with significant dimensions and tolerances and also to submit performance data indicating that the proposed joint has performed satisfactorily under similar conditions. In the absence of a history of field performance, the results of a test program shall be submitted. 2.4 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING A. Cement-Mortar Lining for Shop Application: Except as otherwise provided herein, interior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with cement-mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with AWWA C104. During the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe shall be maintained in a round condition by suitable bracing or strutting. The lining machines shall be of a type that has been used successfully for similar work. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found faulty at the Site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications. 1. Cement: Cement for mortar lining shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C104; provided, that cement for mortar lining shall be Type 11 or V. Cement shall not originate from kilns that burn metal-rich hazardous waste fuel, nor shall a fly ash or pozzolan be used as a cement replacement. B. The minimum lining thickness shall be as follows: Nominal Pipe Diameter(in) Minimum Lining Thickness (in) 3-12 1/16 14-24 3/32 30-64 1/8 MWH - 05/18/07 DUCTILE IRON PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02565-4 2.5 EXTERIOR PROTECTION OF PIPE -- A. Exterior Coating of Buried Piping: The exterior coating shall be an asphaltic coating approximately 1 mil thick. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE A. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are no damaged portions of the pipe. Pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR. B. Before placement of pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruption to the WORK. C. Pipe Laying: The pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C600. D. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. No blocking will be permitted, and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling devices after the pipe is laid. -Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of coating on field joints. E. Each section of pipe 24-inches in diameter and larger shall be laid in the order and position shown On the laying schedule. Each section shall be laid to the set line and grade, within approximately one inch plus or minus. F. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the ENGINEER may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, by the use of bevel adapters, or by the use of additional fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed 75 percent of the maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No joint shall be misfit any amount that will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished joint. G. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the ENGINEER, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to prevent movement. Bends shall be properly installed as indicated. H. Cold Weather Protection: No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation before backfilling occurs. MWH - 05/18/07 DUCTILE IRON PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02565-5 I. Pipe and Specials Protection: The openings of all pipe and specials shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to prevent unauthorized access by persons, animals, water or any undesirable substance. At all times, means shall be provided to prevent the pipe from floating. J. Pipe Cleanup: As pipe laying progresses, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The CONTRACTOR shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and any other debris following completion of pipe laying and shall perform any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline. 3.2 RUBBER GASKETED JOINTS A. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, and a clean rubber gasket shall be placed in the bell groove. The spigot end of the pipe and the inside surface of the gasket shall be carefully cleaned and lubricated. The lubricant shall be suitable for lubricating the parts of the joint for assembly and be a compound listed as in compliance with NSF Standard 61. The lubricant shall be nontoxic, shall not support the growth.of bacteria, and shall have no deleterious effects on the gasket material. The lubricant shall not impart taste or odor to water in the pipe. The spigot end of the pipe section shall then be inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE APPURTENANCES A. Installation of Valves: Valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury or damage to any part of the valve. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to installation. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust all stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure proper operation. B. Valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the location indicated. - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 DUCTILE IRON PIPE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02565-6 SECTION 02570 - STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS (AWWA C200, MODIFIED) PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide steel pipe, specials, and fittings, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. A single pipe manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing steel pipe, specials, fittings, and appurtenances such as bolts and gaskets for the WORK. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals, and the following supplemental requirements: B. Shop Drawings 1. Certified dimensional drawings of fittings and appurtenances. 2. Joint and pipe/fitting wall construction details which indicate the type and thickness of cylinder; the position, type, size, and area of reinforcement; coating and lining holdbacks, manufacturing tolerances; and other pertinent information required for the manufacture of the product. 3. Details for elbows, wyes, tees, outlets, connections, test bulkheads, and nozzles or other specials that indicate amount and position of reinforcement. Fittings and specials shall be properly reinforced to withstand the internal pressure, both circumferential and longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Material lists and steel reinforcement schedules that describe materials to be utilized. Submit metallurgical, chemical, and physical test reports from each heat of steel to verify the steel conforms to the Specifications. 5. Line layout and marking diagrams which indicate the specific number of each pipe and fitting and the location of each pipe and the direction of each fitting in the completed line. 6. Full and complete information regarding location, type, size, and extent of welds shall be shown on the Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings shall indicate by welding symbols or sketches the details of the welded joints, and the preparation of parent metal required to make them. Joints or groups of joints in which welding sequence or technique are especially important shall be carefully controlled to minimize shrinkage stresses and distortion. 7. Drawings showing the location, design, and details of bulkheads for hydrostatic testing of the pipeline, and details for removal of test bulkheads and repair of the lining. 8. Detail drawings indicating the type, number, and other pertinent details of the slings, strutting, and other methods proposed for pipe handling during manufacturing, transport, and installation. MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570-1 C. Certifications: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for pipe and other products or materials as specified in AWWA C200 - Steel Water Pipe 6 in and Larger, AWWA C205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe - 4 in and Larger-Shop Applied, AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In Through 144 In, AWWA C208 - Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings, AWWA C218 - Coating the Exterior of Aboveground Steel Water Pipelines and Fittings, and AWWA C219 - Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe, and the following supplemental requirements: 1. Physical and chemical properties of steel. 2. Hydrostatic test reports. 3. Results of production weld tests. 4. Sand, cement, and mortar tests. 5. Rubber gasket tests. 6. Records of coating application D. Performing and paying for sampling and testing necessary for certification are the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility as part of the WORK. E. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Furnish a copy of manufacturer's certification to ISO 9000, SPFA, or LRQA, and documentation of manufacturer's experience in fabricating AWWA C200 pipe. F. Design Calculations of Fittings and Specials: Furnish a copy of design calculations for fittings and specials including miters, welds, and reinforcement, prior to manufacture of pipe, fittings, and specials 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Manufacturer Qualifications: The pipe manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9000, the Steel Plate Fabricator's Association (SPFA), or Lloyd's Register Quality Assurance (LRQA) and shall be experienced in fabrication of AWWA C200 pipe of similar diameters, lengths, and wall thickness to this WORK. Experience shall be in the production facilities and personnel, not the name of the company that owns the production facility or employs the personnel. B. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the provisions of AWWA C200, C205, and C214 as supplemented by the requirements herein. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the manufacturing start date not less than 14 Days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. C. Tests: Except as modified herein, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C200, C205, and C214 as applicable. 1. After the joint configuration is completed and prior to lining with cement mortar, each length of pipe of each diameter and pressure class shall be shop-tested and certified to a pressure of at least 75 percent of the yield strength of the steel. The MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570-2 2.4 JOINT MATERIALS A. Bearing Pad: Bearing pad shall be neoprene conforming to ASTM D 2000 - Standard Classification Ty stem for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, BC 420, 40 durometer hard)less unless otherwise indicated. B. Neoprene Sponge: Sponge shall be neoprene, closed-cell, expanded, conforming to ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber, type 2C5-El. C. Joint Filler 1. Joint filler for expansion joints in waterholding structures shall be neoprene conforming to ASTM D1056, Type 2C5-El. 2. Joint filler material in other locations shall be of the preformed non-extruding type joint filler constructed of cellular neoprene sponge rubber or polyurethane of firm texture. Bituminous fiber type will not be permitted. All non-extruding and resilient- type preformed expansion joint fillers shall conform to the requirements and tests set forth in ASTM D 1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction, for Type I, except as otherwise indicated. 2.5 BACKING ROD A. Backing rod shall be an extruded closed-cell, polyethylene foam rod. The material shall be compatible with the joint sealant material and shall have a tensile strength of not less than 40 psi and a compression deflection of approximately 25 percent at 8 psi. -The rod shall be 1/8-inch larger in diameter than the joint width except that a one-inch diameter rod shall be used for a 3/4-inch wide joint. 2.6 BOND BREAKER A. Bond breaker shall be Super Bond Breaker as manufactured by Burke Company; Select Cure CRB as manufactured by Select Products Co.; or equal. It shall contain a fugitive dye so that areas of application will be readily distinguishable. B. Bonding agent for hydrophilic waterstop shall be the manufacturer's recommended adhesive for wet, rough concrete. 2.7 SLIP DOWELS A. Slip dowels in joints shall be smooth epoxy-coated bars, conforming to ASTM A 775 - Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. 2.8 PVC TUBING A. PVC tubing in joints shall be Sch. SDR 13.5, conforming to ASTM D 2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series). MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-7 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Waterstops shall be embedded in the concrete across joints as indicated. Waterstops shall be fully continuous for the extent of the joint. Splices necessary to provide such continuity shall be accomplished in conformance to printed instructions of manufacturer of the waterstops. The CONTRACTOR shall take suitable precautions and means to support and protect the waterstops during the progress of the work and shall repair or replace at its own expense any waterstops damaged during the progress of the work. Waterstops shall be stored so as to permit free circulation of air around the waterstop material. B. When any waterstop is installed in the concrete on one side of a joint, while the other half or portion of the waterstop remains exposed to the atmosphere for more than 2 days, suitable precautions shall be taken to shade and protect the exposed waterstop from direct rays of the sun during the entire exposure and until the exposed portion of the waterstop is embedded in concrete. 3.2 SPLICES IN PVC WATERSTOPS A. Splices in PVC waterstops shall be performed by heat sealing the adjacent waterstop sections in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. It is essential that: 1. The material not be damaged by heat sealing. 2. The splices have a tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of the unspliced material tensile strength. 3. The continuity of the waterstop ribs and of its tubular center axis be maintained. No edge welding is allowed. B. Butt joints of the ends of 2 identical waterstop sections may be made while the material is in the forms. C. All joints with waterstops involving more than 2 ends to be jointed together, and all joints which involve an angle cut, alignment change, or the joining of 2 dissimilar waterstop sections shall be prefabricated (shop made fitting) prior to placement in the forms, allowing not less than 24-inch long strips of waterstop material beyond the joint. Upon being inspected and approved, such prefabricated (shop made fitting) waterstop joint assemblies shall be installed in the forms and the ends of the 24-inch strips shall be butt welded to the straight run portions of waterstop in place in the forms. D. Where a centerbulb waterstop intersects and is jointed with a non-centerbulb waterstop, care shall be taken to seal the end of the centerbulb, using additional PVC material if needed. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Setting Waterstops: In order to eliminate faulty installation that may result in joint leakage, particular care shall be taken of the correct positioning of the waterstops during installation. Adequate provisions must be made to support and anchor the waterstops during the progress of the WORK and to insure the proper embedment in the concrete. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-8 The symmetrical halves of the waterstops shall be equally divided between the concrete pours at the joints. The center axis of the waterstops shall be coincident with the joint openings. Maximum density and imperviousness of the concrete shall be insured by thoroughly working it in the vicinity of all joints. `1 B. In placing PVC waterstops in the forms, means shall be provided to prevent them from being folded over by the concrete as it is placed. Waterstops shall be held in place with light wire ties on 12-inch centers which shall be passed through hog rings at the edge of the waterstop and tied to the curtain of reinforcing steel. Horizontal waterstops, with their flat face in a vertical plane, shall be held in place with continuous supports to which the top edge of the waterstop shall be tacked. In placing concrete around horizontal waterstops, with their flat face in a horizontal plane, concrete shall be worked under the waterstops by hand so as to avoid the formation of air and rock pockets. C. In placing centerbulb waterstops in expansion joints, the centerbulb shall be centered on the joint filler material. D. Waterstop in vertical wall joints shall stop 6 inches from the top of the wall where such waterstop does not connect with any other waterstop and is not to be connected to a future concrete placement. E. Joint Location: Construction joints and other types of joints shall be provided where indicated. When not indicated, construction joints shall be provided at 25-foot maximum spacing for all concrete construction. Where joints are indicated spaced greater than 40 feet apart, additional joints shall be provided to maintain the 25-foot maximum spacing. The location of all joints, of any type, shall be submitted for acceptance by the ENGINEER. F. Joint Preparation: Special care shall be used in preparing concrete surfaces at joints ...W, where bonding between 2 sections of concrete is required. Unless otherwise indicated, such bonding will be required at all horizontal joints in walls. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Except on horizontal wall construction joints, wall to slab joints, or where otherwise indicated, at all joints where waterstops are required, the joint face of the first pour shall be coated with a bond breaker as indicated herein. G. Retrofit Joint Preparation: Existing surfaces to receive a retrofit waterstop shall be clean and free from any loose or foreign material. Surface shall be given a light sandblast or hydroblast finish to 1/8-inch amplitude prior to application of epoxy and waterstop. H. Construction Joint Sealant: Construction joints in water-bearing floor slabs, and elsewhere as indicated, shall be provided with tapered grooves which shall be filled with a construction joint sealant. The material used for forming the tapered grooves shall be left in the grooves until just before the grooves are.cleaned and filled with joint sealant. After removing the forms from the grooves, all laitance and fins shall be removed, and the grooves shall be sand-blasted. The grooves shall be allowed to become thoroughly dry, after which they shall be blown out; immediately thereafter, they shall be primed, bond breaker tape placed in the bottom of the groove, and filled with the construction joint sealant. The primer shall be furnished by the sealant manufacturer. No sealant will be permitted to be used without a primer. Care shall be used to completely fill the sealant grooves. Areas designated to receive a sealant fillet shall be thoroughly cleaned, as outlined for the tapered grooves, prior to application of the sealant. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-9 I. The primer and sealant shall be placed strictly in accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer, taking special care to properly mix the sealant prior to application. The sides of the sealant groove shall not be coated with bond breaker, curing compound, or any other substance which would interfere with proper bonding of the sealant. Sealant shall achieve final cure at least 7 days before the structure is filled with water. \� J. Sealant shall be installed by a competent waterproofing specialty contractor who has a successful record of performance in similar installations. K. Thorough, uniform mixing of 2-part, catalyst-cured materials is essential; special care shall be taken to properly mix the sealer before its application. Before any sealer is placed, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange to have the crew doing the WORK carefully instructed on the proper method of mixing and application by a representative of the sealant manufacturer. L. Any joint sealant which fails to fully and properly cure after the manufacturer's recommended curing time for the conditions of the WORK hereunder shall be completely removed; the groove shall be thoroughly sandblasted to remove all traces of the uncured or partially cured sealant and primer, and shall be re-sealed with the indicated joint sealant. Costs of such removal, joint treatment, re-sealing, and appurtenant work shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. M. Hydrophilic Waterstop 1. Where a hydrophilic waterstop is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall be installed with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except as modified herein. 2. When requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish technical assistance in the field. 3. Hydrophilic waterstop shall only be used where complete confinement by concrete is provided. Hydrophilic waterstop shall not be used in expansion or contraction joints nor in the first 6 inches of any non-intersecting joint. 4. The hydrophilic waterstop shall be located as near as possible to the center of the joint and it shall be continuous around the entire joint. The minimum distance from the edge of the waterstop to the face of the member shall be 5 inches. 5. Where the thickness of the concrete member to be placed on the hydrophilic waterstop is less than 12 inches, the waterstop shall be placed in grooves formed or ground into the concrete. The groove shall be at least 3/4 inch deep and 1-1/4 inches wide. When placed in the groove, the minimum distance from the edge of the waterstop to the face of the member shall be 2.5 inches. 6. Where a hydrophilic waterstop is used in combination with PVC waterstop, the hydrophilic waterstop shall overlap the PVC waterstop for a minimum of 6 inches and shall be adhered to PVC waterstop with single component water-swelling sealant as recommended by manufacturer. 7. The hydrophilic waterstop shall not be installed where the air temperature falls outside the manufacturer's recommended range. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-10 8. The concrete surface under the hydrophilic waterstop shall be smooth and uniform. The concrete shall be ground smooth if needed. Alternately, the hydrophilic waterstop shall be bonded to the surface using an epoxy grout which completely fills all voids and irregularities beneath the waterstop material. Prior to installation, the concrete surface shall be wire brushed to remove any iaitance or other materials that may interfere with the bonding of epoxy. 9. The hydrophilic waterstop shall be secured in place with concrete nails and washers at 12-inch maximum spacing. This shall be in addition to the adhesive recommended by the manufacturer. N. Retrofit Waterstop: Retrofit waterstops shall be set in a bed of epoxy over a sandblasted surface with stainless steel batten bars and 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel anchors at 6 inches on center, staggered, and in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-11 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cast-in-place concrete in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The following types of concrete are covered in this Section: 1. Structural Concrete: Concrete to be used in all cases except where indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. 2. Pea Gravel Concrete: Concrete in thin sections and areas with congested reinforcing, at the option of the CONTRACTOR and with written approval of the ENGINEER for the specific location. 3. Sitework Concrete: Concrete to be used for curbs, gutters, catch basins, sidewalks, pavements, fence and guard post embedment, underground pipe encasement, underground duct bank encasement and all other concrete appurtenant to electrical facilities unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lean Concrete: Concrete to be used for thrust blocks, pipe trench cut-off blocks and cradles that are indicated on the Drawings as unreinforced. Lean concrete shall be used as protective cover for dowels intended for future connection. C. The term "hydraulic structure" used in these specifications means environmental engineering concrete structures for the containment, treatment, or transmission of water, wastewater, other fluids, or gases. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300—Contractor Submittals. B. Mix Designs: Prior to beginning the WORK and within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary concrete mix designs which shall show the proportions and gradations of all materials proposed for each class and type of concrete. Mix designs shall be checked by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER. All costs related to such checking shall be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. Since laboratory trial batches require 35 calendar days to complete, the CONTRACTOR shall test a minimum of two mix designs for each class of concrete. C. Delivery Tickets: Where ready-mix concrete is used, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish delivery tickets at the time of delivery of each load of concrete. Each ticket shall show the state certified equipment used for measuring and the total quantities, by weight, of cement, sand, each class of aggregate, admixtures, and the amounts of water in the aggregate added at the batching plant, and the amount allowed to be added at the Site for the specific design mix. In addition, each ticket shall state the mix number, total yield in cubic yards, and the time of day, to the nearest minute, corresponding to the times MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-1 when the batch was dispatched, when it left the plant, when it arrived at the Site, when unloading began, and when unloading was finished. D. Test data relating to the cement, aggregate, and admixtures shall be less than six months old. Furnish the following submittals in accordance with ACI 301 — Structural Concrete for Buildings: 1. Mill tests for cement. 2. Admixture certification. Chloride ion content shall be included. 3. Aggregate gradation test results and certification. 4. Materials and methods for curing. 1.3 CONCRETE CONFERENCE A. A meeting to review the detailed requirements of the CONTRACTOR's proposed concrete design mixes and to determine the procedures for producing proper concrete construction shall be held no later than 14 days after the Notice to Proceed. B. All parties involved in the concrete work shall attend the conference, including the following at a minimum: 1. CONTRACTOR's representative 2. Testing laboratory representative 3. Concrete subcontractor 4. Reinforcing steel subcontractor and detailer 5. Concrete supplier 6. Admixture manufacturer's representative C. The conference shall be held at a mutually agreed upon time and place. The ENGINEER shall be notified no less than 5 days prior to the date of the conference. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General 1. Tests on component materials and for compressive strength and shrinkage of concrete shall be performed as indicated. Tests for determining slump shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 143 — Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 2. Testing for aggregate shall include sand equivalence, reactivity, organic impurities, abrasion resistance, and soundness, according to ASTM C 33 — Concrete Aggregates. 3. The cost of laboratory tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete, will be the OWNER'S responsibility. However, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the cost of any MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-2 additional tests and investigation on WORK that does not meet the specifications. The laboratory will meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C 1077— Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 4. Concrete for testing shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining samples, and disposal and cleanup of excess material. B. Inspections: Continuous inspection by a special inspector approved by the local building department having jurisdiction and by the ENGINEER will be required where necessary to conform with code requirements. Costs of the special inspector shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR. Inspection reports shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. The special inspector shall observe the following work for conformance with the design drawings and specifications: a. During the preparation and taking of all required test specimens. b. Placing of all concrete except Sitework concrete fully supported on earth. C. Field Compression Tests 1. Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first placement of each class of concrete and at intervals thereafter as selected by the ENGINEER to insure continued compliance with these specifications. Each set of test specimens shall be a minimum of 5 cylinders. 2. Compression test specimens for concrete shall be made in accordance with Section 9.2 of ASTM C 31 — Practices for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in -,MOO, the Field. Specimens shall be 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders. 3. Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39 — Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. One test cylinder will be tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. The remaining cylinders will be held to verify test results, if needed. D. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete 1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete will be according to the requirements of ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, Chapter 5 "Concrete Quality," and as indicated. 2. A statistical analysis of compression test results will be performed according to the requirements of ACI 214 — Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Methods. The standard deviation of the test results shall not exceed 640 psi, when ordered at equivalent water content as estimated by slump. 3. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall be taken to increase the compressive strength for all subsequent batches of the type of concrete affected. 4. When the standard deviation of the test results exceeds 640 psi, the average strength for which the mix is designed shall be increased by an amount necessary to satisfy the statistical requirement that the probability of any test being more than MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-3 500 psi below or the average of any 3 consecutive tests being below the required compressive strength is 1 in 100. The required average strength shall be calculated by Criterion No. 3 of ACI 214 using the actual standard of deviation. 5. Concrete that fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications is subject to removal and replacement. E. Shrinkage Tests 1. Drying shrinkage tests shall be performed for the trial batches indicated in the Article below entitled "Trial Batch and Laboratory Tests," the first placement of each class of structural concrete, and during construction to insure continued compliance with these Specifications. 2. Drying shrinkage specimens shall be 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gauge length of 10-inches; fabricated, cured, dried, and measured in accordance with ASTM C 157 — Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement Mortar and Concrete, modified as follows: specimens shall be removed from molds at an age of 23 plus or minus 1 hours after trial batching, shall be placed immediately in water at 70 degrees F plus or minus 3 degrees F for at least 30 minutes, and shall be measured within 30 minutes thereafter to determine original length and then submerged in saturated lime water at 73 degrees F plus or minus 3 degrees F. Measurement to determine expansion expressed as a percentage of original length shall be made at age 7 days. This length at age 7 days shall be the base length for drying shrinkage calculations ("0" days drying age). Specimens then shall be stored immediately in a humidity control room maintained at 73 degrees F plus or minus 3 degrees F and 50 percent plus or minus 4 percent relative humidity for the remainder of the test. Measurements to determine shrinkage expressed as percentage of base length shall be made and reported separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. 3. The drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen shall be computed as the difference between the base length (at "0" days drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. The average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens shall be computed to the nearest 0.0001 inch at.each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average of that test age by more than 0.0004-inch, the results obtained from that specimen shall be disregarded. Results of the shrinkage test shall be reported to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. Compression test specimens shall be taken in each case from the same concrete used for preparing drying shrinkage specimens. These tests shall be considered a part of the normal compression tests for the project. Allowable shrinkage limitations shall be as indicated in Part 2 below. F. Aggregate Testing: Aggregate testing shall be made for the trial batch in the Article below entitled 'Trial Batch and Laboratory Tests," prior to construction and every 12 months during construction to insure continued compliance with these Specifications. G. Construction Tolerances: The CONTRACTOR shall set and maintain concrete forms and perform finishing operations to ensure that the completed WORK is within tolerances. Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished from tolerances. Tolerance is the permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Where tolerances are not stated in the MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-4 specifications, permissible deviations will be in accordance with ACI 117 — Standard Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials. 1. The following non-cumulative construction tolerances apply to finished walls and slab unless otherwise indicated: 1*001.1 Item Tolerance Variation of the constructed linear outline In 10-feet: 1/4-inch; from the established position in plan. In 204eet or more: 1/2-inch Variation from the level or from the grades In 10-feet: 1/4-inch; indicated. In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch Variation from plumb In 10-feet: 1/4-inch; In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch Variation in the thickness of slabs and Minus 1/4-inch; walls. Plus 1/2-inch Variation in the locations and sizes of slabs Plus or minus 1/4-inch and wall openings PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General 1. All materials shall be classified as acceptable for potable water use according to NSF Standard 61. 2. Cement for concrete that will contact potable water shall not be obtained from kilns ..� that burn metal rich hazardous waste fuel. 3. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to prevent damage by water or breakage. Cement reclaimed from cleaning bags or leaking containers shall not be used. Cement shall be used in the sequence of receipt of shipments. B. Materials shall comply with the requirements of Sections 201, 203, and 204 of ACI 301, as applicable. C. Storage of materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 205 of ACI 301. D. Materials for concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cement shall be standard brand portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150 — Portland Cement, for Type 11 or Type V, including Table 2 optional requirements. A minimum of 85 percent of cement by weight shall pass a 325 screen. A single brand of cement shall be used throughout the WORK, and prior to its use, the brand shall be accepted by the ENGINEER. The cement shall be suitably protected from exposure to moisture until used. Cement that has become lumpy shall not be used. Sacked cement shall be stored in such a manner so as to permit access for inspection and sampling. Certified mill test reports, including fineness, for each shipment of cement to be used shall be submitted to the ENGINEER, if requested, regarding compliance with these Specifications. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-5 2. Water for mixing and curing shall be potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts, and other impurities. The water shall be considered potable, for the purposes of this Section only, if it meets the requirements of the local governmental agencies. Agricultural water with high total dissolved solids (over 1000 mg/I TDS) shall not be used. 3. Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to the ENGINEER, shall be non- reactive, and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33 — Concrete Aggregates. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as indicated. Lightweight sand for fine aggregate will not be permitted. a. Coarse aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, durable gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, or a combination thereof. The coarse aggregates shall be prepared and handled in 2 or more size groups for combined aggregates with a maximum size greater than 3/4-inch. When the aggregates are proportioned for each batch of concrete, the 2 size groups shall be combined. See the article below entitled "Trial Batch and Laboratory Tests" for the use of the size groups. b. Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or a combination of natural and manufactured sand that is hard and durable. When tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419 — Test Methods for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate, the sand equivalency shall not be less than 75 percent for an average of 3 samples, nor less than 70 percent for an individual test. Gradation of fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 for the fineness modulus of the sand used, including the optional grading in Section 6.2. The fineness modulus of sand used shall not be over 3.1. c. Combined aggregates shall be well graded from coarse to fine sizes and shall be uniformly graded between screen sizes to produce a concrete that has optimum workability and consolidation characteristics. Where a trial batch is %MOO, required for a mix design, the final combined aggregate gradations will be established during the trial batch process. d. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity shall not exceed 1.0. e. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the fine aggregate shall produce a color in the supernatant liquid no darker than the reference standard color solution. f. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the coarse aggregate shall show a loss not exceeding 42 percent after 500 revolutions, or 10.5 percent after 100 revolutions. g. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the loss resulting after 5 cycles of the soundness test, shall not exceed 10 percent for fine aggregate and 12 percent for coarse aggregate, when using sodium sulfate. 4. Ready-mix concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94 — Ready Mixed Concrete. 5. Admixtures: All admixtures shall be compatible and be furnished by a single manufacturer capable of providing qualified field service representation. Admixtures MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-6 shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If the use of an admixture is producing an inferior end result, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue use of the admixture. Admixtures shall not contain thiocyanates nor more than 0.05 percent chloride ion, and shall be non-toxic after 30 days. a. Air-entraining agent meeting the requirements of ASTM C 260 — Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete shall be used. Sufficient air-entraining agent shall be used to provide a total air content of 3 to 5 percent. Concrete floors to receive a dry-shake floor hardener shall have an air content not to exceed 3 percent. The OWNER reserves the right, at any time, to sample and test the air- entraining agent. The air-entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. The solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. Air content shall be tested at the point of placement. Air entraining agent shall be Micro-Air by Master Builders; Daravair by W.R. Grace; Sika AEA-15 by Sika Corporation; or equal. b. Set controlling and water reducing admixtures: Admixtures may be added at the CONTRACTOR's option, subject to the ENGINEER's approval, to control the set, effect water reduction, and increase workability. The cost of adding an admixture shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Concrete containing an admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by the ENGINEER. Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 494 — Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. The required quantity of cement shall be used in the mix regardless of whether or not an admixture is used. 1) Concrete shall not contain more than one water reducing admixture. 2) Set controlling admixture may be either with or without water-reducing properties. Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently greater than 80 degrees F, a set retarding admixture such as Plastocrete 161 MR by Sika Corporation; Pozzolith 300R by Master Builders; Daratard by W.R. Grace; or equal shall be used. Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently less than 40 degrees F, a non-corrosive set accelerating admixture such as Plastocrete 161 FL by Sika Corporation; Pozzutec 20 by Master Builders; Polarset by W.R. Grace; or equal shall be used. 3) Normal range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A. WRDA 64 or 79 by W.R. Grace; Pozzolith 322-N by Master Builders; Plastocrete 161 by Sika Corporation; or equal. The quantity of admixture used and the method of mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 4) High range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G. Daracem 100 or ADVA 100 by W.R. Grace; Sikament FF or Sikament 86 by Sika Corporation; Rheobuild 1000 by Master Builders; or equal. High range water reducer shall be added to the concrete after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial slump has been verified. No more than 14 ounces of water reducer per sack of cement shall be used. Water reducer shall be considered as part of the mixing water when calculating the water/cement ratio. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-7 5) If the high range water reducer is added to the concrete at the Site, it may be used in conjunction with the same water reducer added at the batch plant. Concrete shall have a slump of 3 inches plus or minus 1/2-inch prior to adding the high range water reducing admixture at the Site. The high range water reducing admixture shall be accurately measured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day's operation of the primary system. 6) Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 70 mixer revolutions or 5 minutes after the addition of the high range water reducer, unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. 7) Flyash: Flyash shall not be used. c. Silica Fume: Silica fume shall conform to ASTM C 1240. Use Force 10,000S Silica Fume by W.R. Grace; Sikacrete 950 by Sika Corporation; Rheomac SF 110 by Master Builders; or equal. Blended cements with interground silica fume will not be allowed. 1) Water content of liquid slurry silica fume admixtures shall be considered as part of the mixing water when calculating the water/cement ratio. 2) Silica fume shall be added at the batch plant as recommended by the manufacturer. For all types of mixing equipment, mix times shall be increased by 40 percent over the minimum mix time required to achieve mix uniformity as defined by ASTM C 94. For truck-mixed and central mixed concrete, maximum allowable batch size shall be 80 percent of the maximum as called out by ASTM C 94. d. Corrosion Inhibitor: Corrosion inhibitor shall be DCIS by W.R. Grace, or equal. Mixing water shall be adjusted for the admixture in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.2 CURING MATERIALS A. Materials for curing concrete shall conform to the following requirements and ASTM C 309—Liquid Membrane—Forming Components for Curing Concrete. 1. Curing compounds shall be white pigmented, resin based, and compliant with local VOC requirements. Sodium silicate compounds shall not be allowed. Concrete curing compound shall be Kurez VOX White Pigmented by Euclid Chemicals Company; L&M Cure R-2 by L&M Construction Chemicals; 1200-White by W.R. Meadow; or equal. When curing compound must be removed for finishes or grouting, compounds shall be Korez DR VOX by Euclid Chemical Company; Masterkure-100W by ChemRex MBT; L&M Cure R-2 by L & M Construction Chemicals;1100-Clear by W.R. Meadows; or equal. 2. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a nominal thickness of 6 mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 156 — Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-8 3. Polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting for use as concrete curing blanket shall consist of white polyethylene sheeting free of visible defects, uniform in appearance, have a nominal thickness of 2 mils, and be permanently bonded to waterproof paper conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification UU-B- 790A — Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellant and Fire Resistant). The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 156, shall not exceed 0.055 gram per square centimeter of surface. 4. Polyethylene-coated burlap for use as concrete curing blanket shall be 4-mil thick, white opaque polyethylene film impregnated or extruded into one side of the burlap. Burlap shall weigh not less than 9 ounces per square yard. The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 156, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface. 5. Curing mats for use in Curing Method 6 below, shall be heavy shag rugs or carpets or cotton mats quilted at 4-inches on center. Curing mats shall weigh a minimum of 12 ounces per square yard when dry. 6. Evaporation retardant shall be a material such as Confilm by ChemRex MBT; Eucobar by Euclid Chemical Company; E-CON by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; or equal. 2.3 NON-WATERSTOP JOINT MATERIALS A. Materials for non-waterstop joints in concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Preformed joint filler shall be a non-extruding, neoprene sponge or polyurethane type conforming to Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete. 2. Elastomeric joint sealer shall conform to the requirements of Section 07920 - Sealants and Caulking. 3. Mastic joint sealer shall be a material that does not contain evaporating solvents; that will tenaciously adhere to concrete surfaces; that will remain permanently resilient and pliable; that will not be affected by continuous presence of water and will not in any way contaminate potable water; and that will effectively seal the joints against moisture infiltration even when the joints are subject to movement due to expansion and contraction. The sealer shall be composed of special asphalts or similar materials blended with lubricating and plasticizing agents to form a tough, durable mastic substance containing no volatile oils or lubricants and shall be capable of meeting the test requirements set forth below, if testing is required by the ENGINEER. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Dampproofing agent shall be an asphalt emulsion such as Hydrocide 600 by ChemRex Sonneborn; Emulsified Asphalt by Euclid Chemical Company; Sealmastic by W. R. Meadows Inc., or equal. B. Bonding agents shall be epoxy adhesives conforming to the following: MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-9 1. For bonding freshly-mixed, plastic concrete to hardened concrete, Sikadur 32 Hi- Mod Epoxy Adhesive by Sika Corporation; Concresive Liquid (LPL), by ChemRex MBT; BurkEpoxy MV by Burke by Edoco; or equal. 2. For bonding hardened concrete or masonry to steel, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation; BurkEpoxy NS by Burke by Edoco; Concresive Paste (LPL) by ChemRex MBT; or equal. C. Vapor Retarder: Vapor retarder shall be 30-mil thick, Class A, 3 ply, nylon or polyester cord reinforced high density polyethylene sheet laminated to a non-woven geotextile fabric, in accordance with ASTM E 1745 - Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. Reef Industries, Inc., Griffolyn T-65 G or equal. D. Granular Material Above Vapor Retarder: Crushed stone, gravel, or sand with the following size distribution and meeting the deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. Sieve Size Percentage Passing 3/8-inch 100 4.75 mm 85-100 No. 100 10—30 E. Seams in vapor retarder sheet shall be sealed with tape, adhesive, or other material as recommended by sheet manufacturer for the areas to be sealed with sheet material. F. Colorant for duct bank concrete shall be an integral red oxide coloring pigment used in the proportion of 8 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. 2.5 CONCRETE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water of the qualities indicated. The exact proportions in which these materials are to be used for different parts of the WORK will be determined during the trial batch. In general, the mix shall be designed to produce a concrete capable of being deposited so as to obtain maximum density and minimum shrinkage, and, where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and maximum smoothness of surface. The aggregate gradations shall be formulated to provide fresh concrete that will not promote rock pockets around reinforcing steel or embedded items. The proportions shall be changed whenever necessary or desirable to meet the required results. All changes shall be subject to review by the ENGINEER. B. Fine Aggregate Composition: In mix designs for structural concrete, the percentage of fine aggregate in total aggregate by weight, shall be as indicated in the following table. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-10 FINE AGGREGATE Fineness Modulus Maximum Percent 2.7 or less 41 2.7 to 2.8 42 2.8 to 2.9 43 2.9 to 3.1 44 1. For other concrete, the maximum percentage of fine aggregate of total aggregate, by weight, shall not exceed 50. C. Duct bank concrete shall contain an integral red-oxide coloring pigment. Concrete shall be dyed red throughout; Surface treatment to color duct banks will not be acceptable. D. Water/Cement Ratio and Compressive Strength: Water/cement ratio is given for aggregates in saturated-surface dry condition and total moisture of all aggregates, calculated by ASTM C 566 -Test Method for Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying, less the absorption of the aggregate as calculated by ASTM C 127 — Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate and C 128 — Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate shall represent total free moisture in the aggregate determine the water/cement ratio, total free moisture of aggregates shall be added to batch water to estimate water content of concrete. Concrete shall have the following minimum properties: Type of Work Min 28-Day Maximum Size Cement Content Maximum Compressive Aggregate per cubic yd W/C Strength (in) (Ibs) Ratio (psi) (by weight) Structural Concrete Roof, floor slabs, columns, walls, and all other 4,000 1 564 to 600 0.45 concrete items not indicated elsewhere. 12-inch and thicker walls, 4,000 1-1/2 564 to 600 0.45 slabs on grade, and footings (optional) Structural silica 6000 1 564 to 600 0.38 fume concrete Structural chloride 5000 1 658 to 694 0.38 resistant concrete T MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-11 Pea Gravel Concrete Thin sections and areas with congested reinforcing, at the "*Mole CONTRACTOR'S option and with the written 4,000 3/8 752 to 788 0.40 approval of the ENGINEER for The specific location. Maximum fine aggregate 50 percent by weight of aggregate. Sitework 3,000 1 470 (min) 0.50 concrete Lean concrete 2,000 1 376(min) 0.60 NOTE: The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that the limiting parameters above are not a mix design. Admixtures may be required to achieve workability required by the CONTRACTOR'S construction methods and aggregates. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing concrete with the required workability. E. Adjustments to Mix Design: The CONTRACTOR may elect to decrease the water/cement ratio to achieve the strength and shrinkage requirements and/or add water `/ reducers, as required to achieve workability. The mixes shall be changed whenever such change is necessary or desirable to secure the required strength, density, workability, and surface finish, and the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no additional compensation because of such changes. Any changes to the accepted concrete mix design shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and shall be tested again in accordance with these Specifications. 2.6 CONSISTENCY A. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period, to produce a concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation and which can be compacted by vibratory methods to give the desired density, impermeability, and smoothness of surface. The quantity of water shall be changed as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. The consistency of the concrete in successive batches shall be determined by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143 —Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. The slumps shall be as follows: Part of Work Slump (in) MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1%•0001 CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-12 All concrete, unless indicated otherwise 3-inches plus or minus 1-inch With high range water reducer added 7-inches plus or minus 2-inches Pea gravel mix 7-inches plus or minus 2-inches Ductbank and pipe encasement 5-inches plus or minus 1-inch 2.7 TRIAL BATCH AND LABORATORY TESTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall only use a mix design for construction that has first met the trial batch testing requirements. B. Before placing any concrete, a testing laboratory selected by the ENGINEER shall prepare a trial batch of each class of structural concrete, based on the preliminary concrete mixes submitted by the CONTRACTOR. During the trial batch the aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using the two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces an acceptable mix, a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments will be considered refinements to the mix design and will not be the basis for extra compensation to the CONTRACTOR. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the CONTRACTOR's preliminary mix design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. The trial batch shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement, and admixture proposed for the project. The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that the testing laboratory can obtain 3 drying shrinkage, and 6 compression test specimens from each batch. C. The determination of compressive strength will be made by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders; made, cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 192 - Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory and ASTM C 39. Three compression test cylinders will be tested at 7 days and 3 at 28 days. The average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 days for any given trial batch shall not be less than 125 percent of the indicated compressive strength. D. A sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch shall be performed according to the requirements of ASTM C 136 — Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. Values shall be given for percent passing each sieve. 2.8 SHRINKAGE LIMITATION A. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch, as measured at 21 day drying age or at 28 day drying age shall be 0.036 percent or 0.042 percent, respectively. Standard deviation will not be considered. The CONTRACTOR shall only use a mix design for construction that has first met the trial batch shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage limitations apply only to structural concrete. B. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. C. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction, the CONTRACTOR shall take any or all of the following actions to reestablish compliance. These actions may include changing the source of aggregates, cement and/or admixtures; reducing ,-..i MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-13 water/cement ratio; washing of coarse and/or fine aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or the effects of shrinkage. 2.9 MEASUREMENT OF CEMENT AND AGGREGATE A. The amount of cement and of each separate size of aggregate entering into each batch of concrete shall be determined by direct weighing equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR and acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. Weighing tolerances Material Percent of Total Weight Cement 1 Aggregates 3 Admixtures 3 2.10 MEASUREMENT OF WATER A. The quantity of water entering the mixer shall be measured by a suitable water meter or other measuring device of a type acceptable to the ENGINEER and capable of measuring the water in variable amounts within a tolerance of one percent. The water feed control mechanism shall be capable of being locked in position so as to deliver constantly any required amount of water to each batch of concrete. A positive quick- acting valve shall be used for a cut-off in the water line to the mixer. The operating mechanism shall prevent leakage when the valves are closed. 2.11 READY-MIXED CONCRETE A. At the CONTRACTOR'S option, ready-mixed concrete may be used if it meets the requirements as to materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as indicated herein and is in accordance with ASTM C 94, including the following supplementary requirements. B. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the WORK, and discharge shall be completed within one hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates or before the drum has been revolved 250 revolutions, whichever is first. C. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds. D. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 70 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolution of mixing. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ~� CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-14 E. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the mixed batch as discharged is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix, and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one-inch when the required slump is 3-inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2-inches when the required slump is more than 3-inches, the mixer shall not be used on the WORK unless the causative condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. Mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit, and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted. F. Each batch of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket furnished to the ENGINEER in accordance with the Paragraph above entitled "Delivery Tickets." G. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the ENGINEER. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A. Proportioning: Proportioning of the mix shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3 "Proportioning" of ACI 301. B. Mixing: Mixing shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 7 of ACI 301. C. Slump: Slumps shall be as indicated herein. D. Retempering: Retempering of concrete or mortar that has partially hardened shall not be permitted. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. General: Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling prior to the placing of any concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing concrete thereon. The surface shall be free from standing water, mud, and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Vapor Retarder Sheet 1. Sheet shall be installed under on-grade building floor slabs of occupiable (non- hydraulic) structures and at other locations indicated. 2. Sand base shall be at least 2-inches thick within the foundation line after moistening and compaction by mechanical means. Sand surface shall be flat and level within a tolerance of plus 0-inches to minus 3/4-inch. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-15 3. Place, protect, and repair defects in sheet according to ASTM E 1643 — Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs, and the manufacturer's written instructions. Seams shall be lapped and sealed in accordance with ASTM E 1643. 4. Granular material above the sheet shall be moistened and compacted to 2-inches thickness within the same flatness criteria as the sand base. C. Joints in Concrete: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been stopped or interrupted so that, as determined by the ENGINEER, the new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed, are defined as construction joints. The surfaces of horizontal joints shall be given a compacted, roughened surface for good bonding. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, the joint surfaces shall be cleaned of all laitance, loose or defective concrete, foreign material, and be roughened to a minimum 1/4-inch amplitude. Such cleaning and roughening shall be accomplished by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate) followed by thorough washing. Pools of water shall be removed from the surface of construction joints before the new concrete is placed. D. After the surfaces have been prepared, all approximately horizontal construction joints shall be covered with a 6-inch lift of a pea gravel mix. The mix shall be placed and spread uniformly. Wall concrete shall follow immediately and shall be placed upon the fresh pea gravel mix. E. Placing Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set, the working face shall be given a shape by the use of forms or other means that will secure proper union with subsequent work; provided that construction joints shall be made only where acceptable to the ENGINEER. F. Embedded Items: No concrete shall be placed until all formwork, installation of parts to be embedded, reinforcement steel, and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been completed and accepted by the ENGINEER at least 4 hours before placement of concrete. Surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with dried grout from previous usage shall be cleaned before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed. G. Inserts or other embedded items shall conform to the requirements herein. H. Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and secured in the forms at locations indicated on the Drawings or shown by Shop Drawings and shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER before any concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. I. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age), the surface of the old concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by hydroblasting or sandblasting to expose aggregate. The joint surface shall be coated with an epoxy bonding agent unless indicated otherwise by the ENGINEER. J. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until all water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or has been diverted by pipes, or other means, and carried out of the forms, clear of the WORK. No concrete shall be deposited underwater nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow still water to rise on any concrete until the MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-16 concrete has attained its initial set. Water shall not be permitted to flow over the surface of any concrete in such manner and at such velocity as will injure the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping or other necessary dewatering operations for removing ground water, if required, shall be subject to the review of the ENGINEER. 14M.N." K. Corrosion Protection: Pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded in concrete construction shall be so positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete that there will be a minimum of 2-inches clearance between said items and any -art of the concrete reinforcement. Securing such items in position by wiring or weldin� them to the reinforcement will not be permitted. L. Openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and anchors shall, where practicable, be provided during the placing of concrete. M. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set and shall be maintained in position by templates while being embedded in concrete. N. Cleaning: The surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. 3.3 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING A. General: Placing of concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and the requirements of this Section. No aluminum materials shall be used in conveying any concrete. B. Non-Conforming Work or Materials: Concrete which during or before placing is found not to conform to the requirements indicated herein shall be rejected and immediately removed from the WORK. Concrete which is not placed in accordance with these Specifications, or which is of inferior quality, shall be removed and replaced. C. Unauthorized Placement: No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing at least 24 hours in advance of placement of any concrete. D. Placement in Wall and Column Forms: Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any deep form, nor shall concrete be placed in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of mortar on the form surfaces above the placed concrete. In such cases, means such as hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the forms in a manner that it may reach the place of final deposit without separation. In no case shall the free fall of concrete below the ends of ducts, chutes, or buggies exceed 4-feet in walls and 8-feet in columns. Concrete shall be uniformly distributed during the process of depositing and in no case after depositing shall any portion be displaced in the forms more than 6-feet in horizontal direction. Concrete in wall forms shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2-feet; and care shall be taken to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where such are required for sloping members. Each layer shall be placed while the previous layer is still soft. The rate of placing concrete in wall forms shall not exceed 5-feet of vertical rise per hour. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of all forms so that the concrete at the places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-17 E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Epoxy adhesive bonding agent shall be applied to the old surfaces according to the manufacturer's written recommendations. This provision shall not apply to joints where waterstop is provided. See Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete. F. Conveyor Belts and Chutes: Ends of chutes, hopper gates, and all other points of concrete discharge throughout the CONTRACTOR'S conveying, hoisting, and placing system shall be designed and arranged so that concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyor belts, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the ENGINEER. Chutes longer than 50 feet will not be permitted. Minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the indicated consistency will readily flow in them. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyor belts and chutes shall be covered. G. Placement in Slabs: Concrete placed in sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As the work progresses, the concrete shall be vibrated and carefully worked around the slab reinforcement, and the surface of the slab shall be screeded in an up-slope direction. H. Temperature of Concrete: The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than 90 degrees F nor less than 55 degrees F for sections less than 12- inches thick nor less than 50 degrees for all other sections. Concrete ingredients shall not be heated to a temperature higher than that necessary to keep the temperature of the mixed concrete, as placed, from falling below the minimum temperature. When the temperature of the concrete is 85 degrees F or above, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes. If concrete is placed when the weather is such that the temperature of the concrete would exceed 90 degrees F, the CONTRACTOR shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregates and mixing water using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete below 90 degrees F as it is placed. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no additional compensation on account of the foregoing requirements. I. Cold Weather Placement 1. Placement of concrete shall conform to ACI 306.1 Cold Weather Concreting, and the following. 2. Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which concrete is to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement, thaw the subgrade to a minimum depth of 6-inches. Reinforcement and embedded items shall be warmed to above 32 degrees F prior to concrete placement. 3. Maintain the concrete temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 72 hours after placement. 3.4 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. General: If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-18 B. Pumping Equipment: The pumping equipment shall have 2 cylinders and be designed to operate with one cylinder in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the CONTRACTOR may have a standby pump on the Site during pumping. C. The minimum diameter of the hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304.2R — _'A-o' Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. D. Pumping equipment and hose conduits that are not functioning properly shall be replaced. E. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete shall not be permitted. F. Field Control: Concrete samples for slump, air content, and test cylinders will be taken at the placement end of the hose. 3.5 ORDER OF PLACING CONCRETE A. The order of placing concrete in all parts of the WORK shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. In order to minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed in units as bounded by construction joints at the indicated locations. The placing of units shall be done by placing alternate units in a manner such that each unit placed shall have cured at least 5 days for hydraulic structures and 2 days for all other structures before the contiguous unit or units are placed, except that the corner sections of vertical walls shall not be placed until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 10 days for hydraulic structures and 4 days for all other structures. B. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To insure a level, straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least 3/4- inch thick shall be tacked to the forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be carried ..ONO, about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after the concrete is placed, the strip shall be removed and any irregularities in the edge formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel and laitance shall be removed. 3.6 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and compacted throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, and bringing only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete. Vibrators shall be Group 3 per ACI 309—Consolidation of Concrete, high speed power vibrators (8000 to 12,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficient number and with at least one standby unit as required. Group 2 vibrators may be used only at specific locations when accepted by the ENGINEER. B. Care shall be used in placing concrete around waterstops. The concrete shall be carefully worked by rodding and vibrating to make sure that all air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, the concrete shall be worked under the waterstops by hand, making sure that air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Concrete surrounding the waterstops shall be given additional vibration over and above that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of the waterstops in the concrete. C. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-19 fills the forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Subsequent layers of concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously placed have been worked thoroughly. Vibrators shall be provided in sufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the required results within 15 minutes after concrete of the prescribed consistency is placed in the forms. The vibrating head shall not contact the surfaces of the forms. Care shall be taken not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work . it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.7 FINISHING CONCRETE SURFACES A. General: Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness of any kind, and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface. Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profiles, and dimensions indicated are defined as tolerances and are indicated above. These tolerances are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as described herein. Aluminum finishing tools shall not be used. B. Formed Surfaces: No treatment is required after form removal except for curing, repair of defective concrete, and treatment of surface defects. Where architectural finish is required, it shall be as indicated. C. Unformed Surfaces: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, unformed top surfaces of slabs, floors, walls, and curbs shall be brought to a uniform surface with suitable tools. Immediately after the concrete has been screeded, it shall be treated with a liquid evaporation retardant. The retardant shall be used again after each work operation as necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks The classes of finish for unformed concrete surfaces are designated and defined as follows: 1. Finish U1 - Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce an even, uniform surface with surface irregularities not to exceed 3/8-inch. No further special finish is required. 2. Finish U2 -After sufficient stiffening of the screeded concrete, surfaces shall be float finished with wood or metal floats or with a finishing machine using float blades. Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of dry cement and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be permitted. Floating shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from screed marks and is uniform in texture. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 1/4-inch. Joints and edges shall be tooled where indicated or as determined by the ENGINEER. 3. Finish U3 - After the Finish U2 surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from being drawn to the surface, steel troweling shall be performed with firm pressure such as will flatten the sandy texture of the floated surface and produce, a dense, uniform surface free from blemishes, ripples, and trowel marks. The finish shall be smooth and free of all irregularities. 4. Finish U4 -Trowel the Finish U3 surface to remove local depressions or high points. In addition, the surface shall be given a light broom finish with brooming perpendicular to drainage unless otherwise indicated. The resulting surface shall be rough enough to provide a nonskid finish. 5. Unformed surfaces shall be finished according to the following schedule: MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-20 UNFORMED SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE Area Finish Grade slabs and foundations to be U1 covered with concrete or fill Material �I Floors to be covered with grouted tile U2 or topping grout Water bearing slabs with slopes 10 U3 percent and less Water bearing slabs with slopes U4 greater than 10 percent Slabs not water bearing U4 Slabs to be covered with built-up U2 roofing Interior slabs and floors to receive U3 architectural finish Top surface of walls U3 D. Floor Hardener (Surface Applied) 1. The following additional requirements apply to the substrate concrete in areas indicated to be under floor hardener: a. Slump shall be no greater than 4-inches when peak ambient temperatures are expected to exceed 65 degrees F and no greater than 3-inches when temperatures will not exceed 65 degrees F. b. Air content of the concrete shall not exceed 3 percent. c. No calcium chloride or set accelerating admixture containing calcium chloride shall be used. d. Do not use admixtures that increase bleeding. e. Do not use fly ash. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall finish areas indicated to receive hardener in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the following. After leveling the concrete surface and as soon as the concrete will support an operator and machine without disturbing the level or working up excessive fines, the CONTRACTOR shall float the surface of the slab with a mechanical float fitted with detachable float shoes. Then apply 1/2 to 2/3 of the total amount of dry shake surface hardener uniformly to the surface. A mechanical spreader is recommended. Float the surface once the shake has absorbed sufficient moisture, as indicated by darkening MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-21 of the shake. Immediately apply the remainder of the shake and allow it to absorb moisture. Do not apply shake when bleed water is present. 3. Perform a third floating if time and setting characteristics of the concrete will allow, but do not add water to the surface. 4. As the surface stiffens further and loses sheen, trowel with blades set relatively flat, using hand or mechanical methods. Remove all marks and pinholes in a final raised trowel operation. 5. Cure the finished surface using the fill-forming curing compound recommended by the manufacturer at a coverage rate which will provide moisture retention in excess of the requirements of ASTM C 309. Maintain ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F during the curing period. 6. Keep floors covered and prohibit traffic and loads for 10 days minimum after completion. 3.8 ARCHITECTURAL FINISH A. General: Architectural finishes shall be provided only where specifically indicated below. In all other locations, the paragraph entitled Finishing Concrete Surfaces, shall apply- B. immediately after the forms have been stripped, the concrete surface shall be inspected and any poor joints, voids, rock pockets, or other defective areas shall be repaired and form-tie holes filled as indicated herein. C. Architectural finishes shall not be applied until the concrete surface has been repaired as required and the concrete has cured at least 14 days. `Mole D. Architecturally treated concrete surfaces shall conform to the accepted sample in texture, color, and quality. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to maintain and protect the concrete finish. E. Smooth Concrete Finish 1. The concrete surface shall be wetted, and a grout shall be applied with a brush. The grout shall be made by mixing one part portland cement and one part of fine sand that will pass a No. 16 sieve with sufficient water to give it the consistency of thick paint. The cement used in said grout shall be 112 gray and 112 white portland cement, or other proportion as determined by the ENGINEER. White portland cement shall be Atlas white, or equal. Calcium chloride at 5 percent by volume of the cement shall be used in the brush coat. The freshly applied grout shall be vigorously rubbed into the concrete surface with a wood float filling all small air holes. After all the surface grout has been removed with a steel trowel, the surface shall be allowed to dry and, when dry, shall be vigorously rubbed with burlap to remove completely all surface grout so that there is no visible paint-like film of grout on the concrete. The entire cleaning operation for any area shall be completed the day it is started, and no grout shall be left on the surface overnight. 2. Cleaning operations for any given day shall be terminated at panel joints. It is required that the various operations be carefully timed to secure the desired effect MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-22 which is a light-colored concrete surface of uniform color and texture without any appearance of a paint or grout film. 3. In the event that improper manipulation results in an inferior finish, the CONTRACTOR shall rub such inferior areas with carborundum bricks. 4. Before beginning any of the final treatment on exposed surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall treat in a satisfactory manner a trial area of at least 200 square feet in some inconspicu9us place selected by the ENGINEER and shall preserve said trial area undisturbea until the completion of the job. F. Sandblasted Concrete Finish 1. Sandblasting shall be done in a safe manner acceptable to local authorities and per OSHA requirements. The sandblasting shall be a light sandblast to remove laitance and to produce a uniform fine aggregate surface texture with approximately 1/32- to 1/16-inch of surface sandblasted off. Corners, patches, form panel joints, and soft spots shall be sandblasted with care. 2. A 3-sq ft sample panel of the sandblasted finish shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for acceptance by the ENGINEER prior to starting the sandblasting work. The sample panel shall include a corner, plugs, and joints and shall be marked after approval. All other sandblasting shall be equal in finish to the sample panel. 3. Protection against sandblasting shall be provided on all adjacent surfaces and materials not requiring sandblasting. After sandblasting, the concrete surfaces shall be washed with clean water and excess sand removed.] 3.9 CURING AND DAMPPROOFING A. General: Concrete shall be cured for not less than 7 days after placing, in accordance with the methods indicated below for the different parts of the WORK. Surface to be Cured or Dampproofed Method Unstripped forms 1 Wall sections with forms removed 6 Construction joints between footings and walls, 2 and between floor slab and columns Encasement and ductbank concrete and thrust 3 blocks All concrete surfaces not specifically indicated 4 in this Paragraph Floor slabs on grade in hydraulic structures 5 Slabs not on grade 6 l MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-23 B. Method 1: Wooden forms shall be wetted immediately after concrete has been placed and shall be kept wet with water until removal. If steel forms are used the exposed concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet until the forms are removed. If forms are removed within 7 days of placing the concrete, curing shall be continued in accordance with Method 6 below. %Wo, C. Method 2: The surface shall be covered with burlap mats which shall be kept wet with water for the duration of the curing period, until the concrete in the walls has been placed. No curing compound shall be applied to surfaces cured under Method 2. D. Method 3: The surface shall be covered with moist earth not less than 4 hours nor more than 24 hours after the concrete is placed. Earthwork operations that may damage the concrete shall not begin until at least 7 days after placement of concrete. E. Method 4: The surface shall be sprayed with a liquid curing compound. 1. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions at a maximum coverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon and in such a manner as to cover the surface with a uniform film that will seal thoroughly. 2. Where the curing compound method is used, care shall be exercised to avoid damage to the seal during the 7-day curing period. If the seal is damaged or broken before the expiration of the curing period, the break shall be repaired immediately by the application of additional curing compound over the damaged portion. 3. Wherever curing compound has been applied by mistake to surfaces against which concrete subsequently is to be placed and to which it is to adhere, compound shall be entirely removed by wet sandblasting just prior to the placing of new concrete. 4. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces and within 2 hours after removal of forms. Repairs to formed surfaces shall be made within the 2 hour period; provided, however, that any such repairs which cannot be made within the said 2 hour period shall be delayed until after the curing compound has been applied. When repairs are to be made to an area on which curing compound has been applied, the area involved shall first be wet-sandblasted to remove the curing compound. 5. At locations where concrete is placed adjacent to a panel which has been coated with curing compound, the panel shall have curing compound reapplied to an area within 6-feet of the joint and to any other location where the curing membrane has been disturbed. 6. Prior to final acceptance of the WORK, all visible traces of curing compound shall be removed from all surfaces in such a manner that does not damage the surface finish. F. Method 5 1. Until the concrete surface is covered with curing compound, the entire surface shall be kept damp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred or washed. The concrete shall be given a coat of curing compound in accordance with Method 4 above. Not less than one hour nor more than 4 hours after the curing compound has been applied, the surface shall be MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-24 wetted with water delivered through a fog nozzle, and concrete-curing blankets shall be placed on the slabs. The curing blankets shall be polyethylene sheet, polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap. The blankets shall be laid with the edges butted together and with the joints between strips seal d with 2-inch wide strips of sealing tape or with edges lapped not less than 3-incMes and fastened together with a waterproof cement to form a continuous watertight joint. 2. The curing blankets shall be left in place during the 7-day curing period and shall not be removed until after concrete for adjacent work has been placed. If the curing blankets become torn or otherwise ineffective, the CONTRACTOR shall replace damaged sections. During the first 3 days of the curing period, no traffic of any nature and no depositing, temporary or otherwise, of any materials shall be permitted on the curing blankets. During the remainder of the curing period, foot traffic and temporary depositing of materials that impose light pressure will be permitted only on top of plywood sheets 5/8-inch minimum thickness, laid over the curing blanket. The CONTRACTOR shall add water under the curing blanket as often as necessary to maintain damp concrete surfaces at all times. G. Method 6: This method applies to both walls and slabs. 1. The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of at least 7 consecutive days beginning immediately after the concrete has reached final set or forms have been removed. 2. Until the concrete surface is covered with the curing medium, the entire surface shall be kept damp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred or washed. 3. Heavy curing mats shall be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture during the curing period. The curing medium shall be weighted or otherwise held substantially in contact with the concrete surface to prevent being dislodged by wind or any other causes. Edges shall be continuously held in place. 4. The curing blankets and concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the use of sprinklers or other means both during and after normal working hours. 5. Immediately after the application of water has terminated at the end of the curing period, the curing medium shall be removed, any dry spots shall be rewetted, and curing compound shall be immediately applied in accordance with Method 4 above. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of excess water from the curing operation to avoid damage to the WORK. H. Method 7: This method applies to concrete containing silica fume for walls and slabs and shall be used in addition to the curing methods 1 through 6, and shall be concluded within one-hour of concrete placing. 1. In addition to the requirements of Method 1 for unstripped forms, and Method 6 for walls after the forms are removed, and Method 4 for slabs, wall surfaces after the forms are removed and slab surfaces shall be coated with two coats of a white pigmented curing compound as indicated in Method 4 above. A second coat of white pigmented curing compound shall be applied to the concrete surface at 7 days after the application of the initial coats. In addition, a prewetted burlap shall be MWH-09/16103 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-25 placed over the flatwork surface and kept continuously wet for a minimum of 7 days or until the time necessary to attain 70 percent of the required compressive strength in accordance with ACI 308 Section 3.1.3. I. Dampproofing 1. The exterior surfaces of buried roof slabs shall be dampproofed as follows. 2. Immediately after completion of curing the surface shall be sprayed with a dampproofing agent consisting of an asphalt emulsion. Application shall be in 2 coats. The first coat shall be diluted to one-half strength by the addition of water and shall be sprayed on so as to provide a maximum coverage rate of 100 square feet per gallon of dilute solution. The second coat shall consist of an application of the undiluted material, and shall be sprayed on so as to provide a maximum coverage rate of 100 square feet per gallon. Dampproofing material shall be as indicated above. 3. As soon as the material has taken an initial set, the entire area thus coated shall be coated with whitewash. Any formula for mixing the whitewash may be used if it produces a uniformly coated white surface and remains until placing of the backfiil. If the whitewash fails to remain on the surface until the backfiil is placed, the CONTRACTOR shall apply additional whitewash. 3.10 PROTECTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect concrete against injury until final acceptance. B. Fresh concrete shall be protected from damage due to rain, hail, sleet, or snow. The CONTRACTOR shall provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever precipitation is imminent or occurring. 3.11 CURING IN COLD WEATHER A. Water curing of concrete may be reduced to 6 days during periods when the mean daily temperature in the vicinity of the Site is less than 40 degrees F; provided that, during the prescribed period of water curing, when temperatures are such that concrete surfaces may freeze, water curing shall be temporarily discontinued. B. Concrete cured by an application of curing compound will require no additional protection from freezing if the protection at 50 degrees F for 72 hours is obtained by means of approved insulation in contact with the forms or concrete surfaces; otherwise the concrete shall be protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately following 72 hours protection at 50 degrees F. Concrete cured by water shall be protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately following the 72 hours of protection at 50 degrees F. C. Discontinuance of protection against freezing temperatures shall be such that the drop in temperature of any portion of the concrete will be gradual and will not exceed 40 degrees F in 24 hours. In the spring, when the mean daily temperature rises above 40 degrees F for more than 3 successive days, the required 72-hour protection at a temperature not lower than 50 degrees F may be discontinued for as long as the mean daily temperature remains above 40 degrees F; provided, that the concrete shall be protected against freezing temperatures for not less than 48 hours after placement. MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-26 D. Where artificial heat is employed, special care shall be taken to prevent the concrete from drying. Use of unvented heaters will be permitted only when unformed surfaces of concrete adjacent to the heaters are protected for the first 24 hours from an excessive carbon dioxide atmosphere by application of curing compound; provided, that the use of curing compound for such surfaces is otherwise permitted by these Specifications. 3.12 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. As soon as forms are removed, exposed surfaces shall be carefully examined and any irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in order to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of surfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted. No repairs shall be made until after inspection by the ENGINEER. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed concrete be permitted. Concrete containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall be repaired as indicated below. Concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall be completely removed and replaced. Repairs and replacements shall be performed promptly. B. Defective surfaces to be repaired shall be cut back from trueline a minimum depth of 1/2-inch over the entire area. Feathered edges will not be permitted. Where chipping or cutting tools are not required in order to deepen the area properly, the surface shall be prepared for bonding by the removal of all laitance or soft material, plus not less than 1/32-inch depth of the surface film from all hard portions by means of an efficient sandblast. After cutting and sandblasting, the surface shall be wetted sufficiently in advance of shooting with shotcrete or with cement mortar so that while the repair material is being applied, the surfaces underneath will remain moist but not so wet as to overcome the suction upon which a good bond depends. The material used for repair shall consist of a mixture of one sack of cement to 3 cubic feet of sand. For exposed walls, the cement shall contain such a proportion of Atlas white portland cement as is required to make the color of the patch match the color of the surrounding concrete. C. Holes left by tie-rod cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surfaces of the holes clean and rough. Holes then shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout. Holes left by form-tying devices having a rectangular cross-section and other imperfections having a depth greater than their least surface dimension shall not be reamed but shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout. D. Repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed WORK will conform to the requirements of this Section, as applicable, using approved methods which will not disturb the bond, cause sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. Surfaces of repairs shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the concrete in the repaired section. E. Prior to filling any structure with water, cracks shall be "vee'd" as indicated and filled with sealant conforming to the requirements of Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete. This repair method shall be done on the water bearing face of members. Prior to backfilling, faces of members in contact with fill which are not covered with a waterproofing membrane shall also have cracks repaired as indicated herein. 3.13 PATCHING HOLES IN CONCRETE A. Patching Small Holes MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-27 1. Holes that are less than 12-inches in the least dimension and extend completely through concrete members shall be filled. 2. Small holes in members that are water-bearing or in contact with soil or other fill material shall be filled with non-shrink grout. Where a face of the member is exposed to view, the non-shrink grout shall be held back 2-inches from the finished Li surface. The remaining 2-inches shall then be patched according to the Article above entitled "Treatment of Surface Defects." 3. Small holes through all other concrete members shall be filled with non-shrink grout, with exposed faces treated as above. B. Patching Large Holes 1. Holes which are larger than 12-inches in the least dimension shall have a keyway chipped into the edge of the opening all around, unless a formed keyway exists. The holes shall then be filled with concrete as indicated herein. 2. Holes which are larger than 24-inches in the least dimension and which do not have reinforcing steel extending from the existing concrete, shall have reinforcing steel set in grout in drilled holes. The reinforcing added shall match the reinforcing in the existing wall unless indicated otherwise. 3. Large holes in members that are water bearing or in contact with soil or other fill shall have a hydrophilic type waterstop material placed around the perimeter of the hole in accordance with Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete, unless there is an existing waterstop in place. 3.14 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect concrete against injury or damage from excessive %wool heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, or which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed WORK, or which departs from the established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03300-28 SECTION 03430-ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL ...," 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included in this Section covers designing, fabricating, and installing architectural precast concrete wall panels, supports, anchors, expansion joints and attachments;sealing intermediate and perimeter joints;and required grouting of the panels. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement B. Section 03250 Concrete Accessories C. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.3 REFERENCES A. ACI: American Concrete Institute 1. 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete B. ICBO: International Building Code C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials `"-� 1. A36 Structural Steel 2. A185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement 3. A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength 4. A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 5. C33 Concrete Aggregates 6. C127 Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate 7. C128 Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate 8. C150 Portland Cement D. AWS: American Welding Society 1. B2.1 Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification 2. D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel 3. D1.4 Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-01 E. PCI: Prestressed Concrete Institute 1. Manual For Structural Design of Architectural Precast Concrete 2. MNL-117 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products 3. MNL-120 Design Handbook- Precast and Prestressed Concrete 4. MNL-123 Manual for Design of Connections for Precast Prestressed Concrete 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals and Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Miscellaneous Submittals. B. Design Calculations: 1. Before any unit fabrication, the structural design calculations of all precast concrete units shall be submitted to THE ENGINEER for review in accordance with PCI MNL-117. Any deviation in the design criteria or the dimensions required shall be indicated. Calculations shall bear the seal and signature of the registered Licensed Engineer in the State of Texas who directed and supervised the structural design. 2. Design calculations shall include material types, material strengths, and reinforcing sizes and placement. Calculations shall include anchorage and connection devices and locations of lifting inserts and supports. 3. Fabrication shall not proceed until design calculations have been accepted. C. A sample panel shall be constructed 12 inches long x 12 inches wide x 1 inch thick,with one surface representative of color,texture,and finish required. Color,texture,and finish of sample shall be kept on file in owner's represenative office. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Unit locations,identification marks,fabrication details, reinforcement,connection details, pertinent dimensions, and erection support points shall be indicated. Unit identification marks shall appear on manufactured units. 2. Fabrication shall not proceed until shop drawings have been accepted. 3. Shop drawings shall be prepared under seal of a registered Licensed Engineer in the State of Texas. E. Plant quality control procedures shall be required and submitted before start of fabrication. Approval of plant quality control procedures shall be required before execution of the work of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work shall be performed in accordance with PCI MNL-117,PCI MNL-120,PCI MNL-123, and PCI Manual for Structural Design of Architectural Precast Concrete. MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE _ CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-02 B. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1.6 MANUFACTURER AND ERECTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacture, transportation, and installation shall be performed by a company specializing in providing architectural precast products and services normally associated with precast concrete construction with high quality finishes. B. Precast manufacturer and erector shall be qualified in accordance with PCI MNL-117. C. Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS B2.1. 1.7 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design wind velocity shall be 90 Mph(3-second Gust)at 30 feet above grade,exposure C. Pressure shall be in accordance with International Building Code, latest edition. B. Architectural precast concrete units shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318 and PCI except where otherwise noted in this Section. C. Architectural concrete units shall be designed under direct supervision of a registered licensed Engineer in the State of Texas. The Engineer shall be fully experienced in design of architectural precast concrete units. D. Precast concrete units and connections shall be designed to support their self weight and the required superimposed live and dead loads. Loads shall include gravity loads and lateral loads due to wind. Where required by the Contract Documents and building codes governing the design of the project,seismic design shall be incorporated into the structural design of the units including connections. E. The design shall provide for foundation settlement and building movement. Adjustment connections shall be provided to accommodate misalignment of structure. F. Precast concrete units and connections shall be provided to accommodate movement in structure and between cladding elements and structure without permanent distortion, damage to components, wracking of joint connections, or breaking of seals. Expansion joints shall be provided where required and at locations indicated on the Contract Documents. G. Precast concrete units shall be designed to prevent bowing and cracking of surfaces due to differential thermal movement of interior and exterior surfaces. H. Precast concrete units shall be manufactured to ensure continuity of dimension and finish throughout. I. Deviations in design or dimensions required shall be submitted to THE ENGINEER for review. MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-03 1.8 JOB MOCK-UP A. A sample full size precast concrete unit shall be designed and erected in the manufacturer's plant representative of proposed finish,size,shape,and anchorage. Sample may be used as part of work if conforming to requirements stated in this Section and accepted by owner representative. B. Accepted sample unit shall establish minimum standard of quality and workmanship for architectural precast concrete work. Fabrication of panel shall not commence until sample unit has been accepted by owner representative. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Precast units shall be handled in positions consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support shall be provided only from support points indicated on shop drawings. B. Embedded lifting or handling devices shall be capable of supporting units in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage,transportation, and erection. C. Precast units shall be blocked and laterally braced during transport and while stored on site. Lateral bracing shall be provided sufficient to prevent bowing and warping. Blocking and bracing shall be used that is clean,non staining,and that shall permit uniform curing of exposed surfaces. D. Edges of units shall be provided with adequate protection to prevent staining,chipping, or spading of concrete. Damaged panels shall be replaced at no additional cost to owner representative. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field measurements shall be verified to be as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the manufacturer. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete with minimum compressive strength of 5000 psi at 28 days shall be provided. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 white and gray color, from single source and using the same fuel and process for manufacture for the entire job. C. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C33,manufactured limestone sand,from single source and of same color for entire job. D. Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33, limestone 3/4 inch and smaller, clean washed from same source and of same color as fine aggregate. MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-04 u E. Reinforcement: ASTM A615 for deformed steel bars,ASTM A185 for welded steel wire fabric. Galvanized or epoxy finish, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. F. Color shall match sample in owner representative office and shall be accomplished by the proper selection of aggregates and Portland Cements. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Connecting and Supporting Devices: ASTM A36. B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307 high strength steel type recommended for structural steel joints, galvanized. C. Sealer: Clear, penetrating, non surface discoloring solution with minimum 40 percent active alkylalkoxysilane by weight. D. Nonshrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in 2 days and a minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi in 28 days. Grout shall be fluid in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Plastic Bearing Strips: High density plastic as manufactured by Koro Corporation or an approved equal. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Plant records and quality control program shall be maintained during production of precast concrete units. Records shall be available to owner representative upon request. B. Molds shall be used that are rigid,watertight,and constructed of material that shall result in uniform finished products. C. Concrete mix design shall be established by tests on trial batches to achieve specified strengths. Water content shall be maintained as constant as possible during manufacture. Admixtures and pigments shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's and laboratory's recommendations. Consistent quantities of pigment shall be used. D. Concrete shall be deposited and vibrated to ensure proper consolidation, elimination of unintentional cold joints, and to minimize entrapped air on exposed surfaces. E. Required connecting devices, plates,angles,items fit to steel framing members,inserts, bolts, and accessories shall be fabricated to allow units to be held securely in place of final installation and adjusted before permanent locking in place. F. Hoisting devices shall be located so that they can be cut off and sealed weather tight after units are erected. G. Reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast in items shall be sufficiently embedded and properly located. MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-05 H. All surfaces of connecting and supporting devices shall be galvanized, except those embedded in concrete or requiring field welding. Shop prime shall be performed in one coat. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale grease, and foreign matter before galvanizing. I. Units shall be cured under near identical conditions to develop concrete quality, and minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 2.4 FINISHING A. Finished surfaces of precast concrete units shall be uniform and match accepted sample panel. Other surfaces shall be provided with steel troweled finish. B. Exterior face shall be abrasive blasted in plant. Edges exposed to light shall have sandblast finish as defined by ACI 318. Finish product shall match appearance of approved sample. C. Corners and sharp edges of concrete shall be protected from being broken or unduly rounded. D. Sealer shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to all surfaces exposed to view surfaces, exterior and interior. 2.5 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. The following dimensional tolerances for concrete unit fabrication shall be designed for and maintained: 1. Height: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet, not to exceed 1/4 inch for individual members. 2. Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 feet, not to exceed 1/4 inch. 3. Thickness: Plus 1/4 inch, minus 1/8 inch. 4. Angular Deviation of Plane of Side Mold: 1/16 inch per 6 inches depth, but not more than 1/16 inch. 5. Maximum Out of Square (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonals): 1/8 inch per 10 feet or 1/4 inch total, whichever is less. 6. Maximum Bowing and Warpage: Up to 1/360 panel dimension, but no greater than 1/2 inch. 7. Location and Size of Openings: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. B. Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with the approved shop drawings and within the tolerances set forth in ACI 318. MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-06 C. The precast units shall be located and erected as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Adjustment required to accommodate adjacent products, proper joint width, alignment with adjacent precast members, and end wall or corner transitions shall be coordinated and submitted for approval by owner representative. 2.6 PATCHING A. Minor patching in plant shall be acceptable providing structural adequacy and appearance of units shall not be impaired. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. All concrete and concrete accessories shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's quality control standard procedure. 2. Plant records and quality control program shall be maintained during the production of precast members. 3. Testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01400, Quality Control. 4. The independent testing laboratory shall take at least one set of eight cylinders for each shift of production. From each set of eight cylinders, two cylinders shall be tested to determine form strip strength, two cylinders shall be tested at 7 days, and two cylinders shall be tested at 28 days. Cylinders shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. The extra two cylinders shall be field cured with the segments in storage for the entire 28 day period. These cylinders shall be tested at 28 days and the results compared to the companion laboratory cured cylinders. Procedures for protecting and curing concrete segments shall be improved when the compressive strength of the field cured cylinders at 28 days is less than 85 percent of the compressive strength of the companion laboratory cured cylinders. B. Water absorption test of coarse aggregates shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C127 and of fine aggregates in accordance with ASTM C128. C. Upon request, tests results shall be submitted to owner representative for review. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Erection procedures,temporary bracing,and induced loads shall be provided for during erection. Temporary bracing shall be maintained in place until final support is provided and final connections completed. B. Units shall be erected without damage to shape, finish, and structural integrity. Damaged units shall be repaired or replaced as directed by owner represenative. Repair may be acceptable if structural adequacy or appearance is not impaired. MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-07 C. Units shall be erected level, plumb, square, and true. Uniform horizontal and vertical joints shall be aligned and maintained as erection progresses. Erection tolerances shall be non cumulative. D. Units shall be securely fastened in place. E. Dowels shall be inserted in drilled holes and packed solidly with non-shrink grout. F. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4 G. Units shall be set on plastic bearing strip shims for alignment and void shall be packed with grout. H. Field welds, and scratched and damaged prime painted and galvanized surfaces shall be touched up. I. All joints shall be sealed between panels and adjacent materials in accordance with Section 07920, Sealants and Caulking. 3.2 ALLOWABLE ERECTION TOLERANCES A. The following joint tolerances of erected precast concrete units shall be maintained: 1. Face Width of Joint: Plus or minus 3/16 inch. 2. Step in Face: Maximum 3/16 inch. 3. Jog in Alignment of Edges: Maximum 3/16 inch. 3.3 CLEANING A. Weld marks or other marks, debris, or dirt shall be cleaned from exposed surfaces of units. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection shall be performed in accordance with Section 01400. PART 4- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. This item of work shall not be measured separately for payment but shall be considered incidental to the Contract Lump Sum price. END OF SECTION MWH-09/16/03 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE .� CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE3430-08 SECTION 04270- GLASS UNIT MASONRY PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide glass block masonry, including expansion strips, packing, panel reinforcing, panel anchors, caulking, asphalt emulsion flashings, and other labor and materials necessary for a complete installation, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C 150 Portland Cement ASTM C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry ASTM C 641 Test Method for Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. The following submittals and specific information shall be provided. 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed. 2. Sufficient data to demonstrate that the proposed glass blocks comply with requirements. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to identify the quality of all proposed accessory and setting materials. 4. Shop drawings showing proposed arrangement and dimensions of all combination panels, methods of anchoring, proposed treatment of joints, locations and details of expansion joints, composition and colors of sealant, and such similar data as is necessary to judge the suitability of the proposed installation and to properly coordinate the preparation and construction of the support system. 5. Samples of glass blocks and accessories in accordance with Section 01300. 6. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which will become the basis for inspecting the installation. MWH-09/16/03 GLASS UNIT MASONRY CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 04270-1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality of accessories shall be as recommended by the manufacturer subject to acceptance by the ENGINEER. B. Qualifications of Installers: Throughout the progress of the work of this Section, at least one person from the CONTRACTOR shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements, completely trained and experienced in the necessary skills, and who shall be present at the site and shall direct all work performed under this Section. C. In installation of the work of this Section, adequate numbers of skilled workmen shall be used to ensure installation in strict accordance with the design and the recommendations of the materials suppliers. D. As-built dimensions of the supporting structure shall be checked at the site by accurate field measurements before final submittal of shop and layout drawings. Schedule with construction progress shall be coordinated to avoid delay of work. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Materials shall be protected before, during, and after installation as well as the work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, all repairs and replacements shall be made as necessary for the acceptance by the ENGINEER. C. Delivery and Storage: 1. Glass block and precast concrete units shall be stored in accordance with the recommendations of the Manufacturers. 2. Prepared mixes, cement, and adhesive sealants shall be delivered and stored in original, unopened packages and kept off the ground in a cool, dry location in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Glass Block Units: Partially evacuated, hollow masonry units made of clear, colorless glass. The units shall be the VISTABRIKO STIPPLED Solid Glass Block as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, or equal, 8-inch x 8-inch by 3-inch thickness. B. Mortar: Type S mortar as recommended by the "American Standard Building Code Requirements for Masonry," in accordance with ASTM C 270. 1. Portland Cement: If ASTM C 150, Type II, waterproof portland cement is used, it shall be of a type as specified by the ENGINEER. (Masonry cement shall not be used.) 2. Lime: A high-calcium lime or a pressure-hydrated dolomitic lime, not less than 92 percent hydrated, conforming to ASTM C 207, Type S. MWH-09/16/03 GLASS UNIT MASONRY CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 04270-2 3. Sand: ASTM C 144 for thin joints. A clean, white, quartzite type, essentially free of iron compounds, tested according to ASTM C 641, and shall have a Stain Index of 0. C. Integral Type aterproofer: Metallic-stearate type; Hydracide Powder by Sonneborn, ` PS-235 by Mauer Builders Company, or equal, or latex type, Laticrete 8510 Admix by Laticrete International, Inc., or equal. D. Expansion Strips: Glass fiber or polyethylene, as furnished by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, or equal. E. Panel Reinforcing: As furnished by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, or equal. Galvanized steel double-wire mesh formed of two parallel 9 gauge wires, 2 inches on center with electrically welded cross wires. F. Panel Anchors: As furnished by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, or equal, shall be No. 20 gauge perforated steel strips, 24 inches long by 1-3/4 inches wide, galvanized after perforating, embedded at both ends of each row of glass block. G. Asphalt Emulsion: Water-based asphalt emulsion "Karnak 100" by Karnak Chemical Corporation, or equal. H. Packing (Backer Rods): Polyethylene foam, neoprene, or equal, filler approved by the sealant Manufacturer. 1. Sealants: See Section 07920 - Sealants and Caulking. 2.2 MORTAR A. Mixture: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, and sand equal to between 2-1/4 and 3 times the amount of cementitious material (cement plus lime), all measured by volume, plus an integral type waterproofer. If a waterproof portland cement is used, the integral type waterproofer shall be omitted. Admixtures in the form of setting accelerators and antifreeze compounds shall not be used. B. All mortar components shall be mixed to a consistency as stiff as will permit good working. Mortar shall be drier than mortar for ordinary. masonry. Retempering the mortar after it has taken its initial set shall not be permitted. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. A heavy coat of asphalt emulsion shall be applied to sill area and be allowed to dry before placing. 2. Expansion strips shall be adhered to jambs and head with a continuous full thick bed of asphalt emulsion, making certain that expansion strips extend the full height of the opening from sill to head at the jambs, and from expansion joint to expansion joint at the head. MWH-09/16/03 GLASS UNIT MASONRY CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 04270-3 3. A full mortar bed joint to sill shall be applied. 4. Blocks shall be set with horizontal bands on the exterior of the block. Mortar joints must be full, not furrowed, using only wood tools to tap glass blocks into position. 5. Panel reinforcing shall be installed in horizontal joints. Reinforcing shall be installed on 16-inch centers in glass panels more than 16 inches high but at least one for each 2 row combination panel and in joints immediately above and below all openings within panels. Reinforcing shall run continuously from end to end of panels and shall be lapped not less than 6 inches whenever it is necessary to use more than one length. Expansion joints shall not be bridged with reinforcing. Reinforcing shall be installed as follows: a. Place lower half of mortar in bed joint. Do not furrow. b. Press panel reinforcing into place. c. Cover panel reinforcing with upper half of mortar bed and trowel smooth. Do not furrow. 6. Full mortar bed shall be placed for joints not requiring panel reinforcing, not furrowed. 7. Succeeding course of blocks shall be set with horizontal bands on block on the exterior. 8. Joints shall be smoothed while mortar is still plastic and before final set. At this time, all spaces requiring sealant shall be raked out to a depth equal to a width of the spaces. Surplus mortar shall be removed from faces of glass blocks and wiped dry, and joints tooled smooth and concave, before mortar takes final set. 9. After final mortar set, packing shall be installed tightly between glass block panel and jamb and head construction, leaving space for sealing. Backer rod and separator shall be inserted as specified in Section 07920 - Sealants and Caulking. 10. Sealant shall be applied evenly to the full depth of recesses as shown and in accordance with the Manufacturer's application manual and instructions. At expansion joints, sealant depth shall be one-half of joint thickness but not less than 1/4-inch. 11. Surplus mortar shall be removed. The faces of the blocks shall be wiped dry at the time joints are tooled, using an ordinary household scrub brush having stiff bristles to clean glass block. Final cleaning shall be done after mortar block has attained final set but before becoming dry on the block surfaces. Use a damp cloth, not abrasive cleaners (e.g., steel wool, wire brush) to remove mortar or dirt from the faces of glass block. - END OF SECTION- MWH-09/16/03 GLASS UNIT MASONRY CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 04270-4 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to perform the fabrication of structural steel as specified herein. Furnish structural steel shapes, columns, base plates, fabricated components and bolts, washers, nuts, rivets or other fasteners necessary to complete the work. B. Furnish the labor and equipment for the delivery and erection of structural steel components to the job site, including the temporary bracing, guying, supports, etc., that may be necessary during erection. Erection procedure shall be in compliance with governmental safety standards currently in effect. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SHOP FABRICATION INSPECTION 1. The Owner through its Engineer reserves the right to inspect all fabrication procedures, including welding; and at his own expense may appoint an Independent Testing laboratory to perform such tests as desirable. The Fabricator shall give access to the Engineer at all times during fabrication of work under this contract. 2. The Fabricator shall give notice when fabrication is underway. In addition, he shall furnish the inspector a set of approved shop drawings during inspection tours. B. PRODUCT ORIGIN: All nuts and bolts shall be manufactured in the United States. C. WELDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 1. Welds shall be made only by welding operators who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in the American Welding Society's "Structural Welding Code - Steel" to perform the type of work required. The Contractor shall provide the certification that welders have passed the qualification test within six (6) months prior to performance of work. 2. The welder shall place his identification mark with paint (or stamp) near the welds he constructed, so that all weldments can be properly identified and associated with the correct welder. D. REPORTS 1. Obtain from the steel vendor certified mill test reports of heat or melt number, and mill analysis and tests for structural steel. If these are not submitted, or if the material cannot be positively identified and related to them, the Contractor shall bear the expense of tests required to establish the quality of the steel. 2. Bolt manufacturer must submit certification that all bolts and nuts are of United States of America origin and manufacture. MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-1 E. DESIGN CRITERIA 1. Design all connections not specifically detailed on the drawings. Conform to the requirements of the current issue of the "Specification for Structural Steel -- Buildings" and "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" of the American Institute of Steel Construction. 2. When details or reactions are not shown, design the connections to support half the total uniform load capacity tabulated in the tables for "Allowable Loads on Beams" of the AISC "Manual of Steel Construction"for the given shape, span and steel specification of the beam in question. Rivet, bolt, or weld shop connections. 3. Combination of welding and rivets or bolts are not permitted in the same face of any connection. One-sided or other type of eccentric connections are not permitted unless shown in detail on the drawings. F. SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: 1. Shop drawings which include steel members, sites and fabrication details, along with complete dimensions, arrangement of members, and other fabrication details. 2. Certified Mill Test Reports of steel type, strength and mill analysis. 3. Material list and location within the project by an individual identification number. Shop drawings shall also indicate the drawing or detail number of Engineer's drawings to assist in identification of member. 4. Certified Test Reports for all bolts and nuts indicating origin and mill analysis. 5. Welder's Certified Tests for all persons doing field welding. 6. Fabrication Schedule for Record Data. 1.03 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: A. American institute of Steel Construction (AISC) publications: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings AISC Manual of Steel Construction B. American Welding Society (AWS) publications: AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS B1.10 Guide for Non-Destructive Inspection for Welds AWS A5.1 Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes AWS A5.5 Specification for Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes AWS A5.17 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) publications: MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-2 ASTM A6 Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A325 Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints ASTM A500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A572 Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality ASTM A992 Specification for Structural Steel Shapes ASTM F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers ASTM F9159 Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicator for Use with Structural Fasteners D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) E. Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) publications: "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts" 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver steel members to the site and raise into proper position and secure in place. In the event it is necessary to store steel on site, place on heavy timber runners to maintain a clearance between steel and ground. Runner shall raise the steel to a level not to be in contact with groundwater. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Drawings indicate the design, sections and weights of members. Substitutions shall NOT be permitted except upon written permission from the Engineer. Dimensions scaled from the drawings shall not be used for fabrication, and the Contractor shall determine actual dimensions of the structure. B. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified, the fabrication of structural steel shall be in accordance with the American Institute of Steel Construction "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," latest edition. C. Welder must be qualified in accordance with AWS Structural Welding Code, Section 5, "Qualifications". Workmanship shall be in compliance with Section 3, "Workmanship". D. Contractor shall coordinate primer used on structural steel scheduled to be fireproofed with spray-on fireproofing with manufacturer's requirements. In the event that fireproofing manufacturer does not permit painting, primer shall be omitted if approved by the Engineer. MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-3 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS `.i A. STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES, BARS, AND SHAPES OTHER THAN WIDE FLANGE SHAPES: Conforming to ASTM A6 and ASTM A36. B. STRUCTURAL STEEL WIDE FLANGE SHAPES: Conforming to ASTM A992. C. SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR TUBING, HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTIONS: Conforming to ASTM A500, Grade B, having a minimum yield strength of 46,000 psi. D. ROUND HOLLOW STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTIONS: Conforming to ASTM A500, Grade B, having a minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi. E. STRUCTURAL STEEL PIPE: Conforming to ASTM A53, Grade B, having a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi. F. UNFINISHED BOLTS AND NUTS: Unfinished bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A307 and shall be the regular hexagon-bolt type. G. TURNED BOLTS AND NUTS: Bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A307. H. HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS: Bolts shall conform to ASTM A325. I. NUTS: Hexagon nuts for high strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A563. J. WASHERS: Washers in contact with high-strength bolt heads and nuts shall be ti..i hardened in accordance with ASTM F436. Beveled washers shall be square, smooth, and sloped so that contact surfaces of bolt head and nut are parallel. The diameter of the hole of square-beveled washers shall be 1/16" greater than the bolt size for bolts not larger than 1", and 1/8" greater than the bolt size for bolts larger than 1". K. CALIBRATED WASHERS: All A325 bolts shall be installed using Bethlehem "Load Indicator Washers". Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and RCSC Specifications. Load Indicator Washers shall comply with ASTM F959. L. FILLER METAL FOR WELDING: Welding electrode for manual shielded metal arc- welding shall conform to AWS Specifications. Bare electrodes and granular flux used in submerged-arc process shall conform to Section A3.6 of AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings". Only E70 Series electrodes for manual arc welding and electrodes conforming to AWS A5.17 for submerged arc process shall be used for welding A36 steel. M. SHOP PAINT: Rust inhibitive primer; Hentzen "4080 Red"; Rust-Oleum "678 Primer"; TNEMEC "99 Series"; or equal. Primer shall be compatible with top coat specified in Section 09905, PROTECTIVE COATINGS. MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-4 N. SHEAR CONNECTORS: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type B. 2.02 FABRICATIONS A. GENERAL 1. Structural members shall consist primarily of a single rolled shape and shall be straight within AISC tolerances. Compression members shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1A000 of the axial length between points which are to be laterally supported. 2. A variation of 1/32" is permissible in the overall length of members with both ends milled. Members without milled ends which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation from the detailed length not greater than 1/16" for members 30'0" or less in length and not greater than 1/8" for members over 30'0" in length. 3. The use of thermal cutting, preferably by machine, is permissible provided the metal cut is not carrying stresses during the operation. Thermally cut edges which will be subjected to substantial stress or which have weld metal deposited on them shall be free from gouges or notches; any gouges that remain from cutting shall be removed by grinding. To determine the effective width of members so cut, 1/8" shall be deducted from each thermal cut edge. The radius of re-entrant thermally cut fillets shall be as large as practicable, but never less than 1". 4. Planning or finishing of sheared or thermally cut edges of plates or shapes will not be required unless specifically called for on the drawings, except that all edges to be fitted to other members by welding, such as columns at bearing plate shall be milled. Compression joints depending upon contact bearing, shall have the bearing faces truly machined to a common plane. The remaining joints shall be cut straight. Columns and stiffeners shall be milled to give full bearing over the cross section. 5. Provide the necessary steel bearing plates for reactions of beams and columns, and connection stiffeners and gussets whether specifically shown on plans or not. B. PREPARATION FOR ATTACHMENT Drill, punch, cut, and tap steel as required to prepare for anchoring and for accommodating the work of other trades when requirements precede or accompany approval of shop drawings. Reinforce any cuts, holes, etc., as shown on the drawings, and if not shown, as directed, after calling attention to the condition involved. C. BOLTED CONSTRUCTION 1. Holes for bolts shall be 1/16" larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt. If the thickness of the material is not greater than the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1/8", the holes may be punched. If the thickness of the material is greater than the nominal diameter and the bolt plus 1/8", the holes shall be either drilled from the solid or sub-punched and reamed. 2. Holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts shall be reamed. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for rejection. �..i MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-5 3. When assembled, joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers, shall be free of scale except tight mill scale. They shall be free of dirt, loose scale, burrs, and other defects that would prevent solid seating of the parts. Contact surfaces within friction-type joints shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or galvanizing. 4. The ASTM A325 bolts shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less than the proof load given in the applicable ASTM Specifications for the type of bolt used. Tightening shall be done by use of the approved calibrated washers such as Bethlehem "Load Indicator Washer." D. WELDED CONSTRUCTION 1. The technique of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting defective work shall conform to Section 4, "Technique" of the Current Edition of the "Structural Welding Code - Steel" by the American Welding Society. 2. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint, and any other foreign material except that mill scale withstanding vigorous wire brushing may remain. Joint surfaces shall be free from fins and tears. Preparation of edges by gas cutting shall, wherever practicable, be done by mechanically guided torch. 3. Visible joints shall be close fitting. Welds that are exposed or visible shall be continuous regardless of strength requirements. Fabricated joints shall be as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. 4. Beam flanges employing full penetration welds shall have 1-1/4" x 3/16" backup plate. Back gouge root pass and weld flush on backside of beam webs where full penetration is specified. 5. Clean tack welds and thoroughly fuse with final weld. Remove defective, cracked, or broken tack welds before final welding. Tack welds must be removed from joints where stress is primary, if welding is to be manual. 6. Weld metal shall be completely sound and free of cracks in any weld or weld pass. Fill all craters to the full cross-section of the welds. Remove weld scale or slag, spatter, burrs, and other sharp or rough projections to,leave the surface suitable for non-destructive testing, cleaning, and painting. 7. Corrective measures shall be taken when welding is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship. Chip and grind if the removal of part of the weld or a portion of the base metal is required. Where deposition of additional weld material is necessary, the sides of the area to be welded shall have no less than one (1) to one (1) slope to allow room for depositing new material. Correct defective or unsound welds by the removal and replacement of the entire weld using the following procedures: a. Excessive Convexity: Reduce to size by removal of excess weld metal by grinding. b. Shrinkage Cracks, Cracks in Base Metal, Craters and Excessive Porosity: Remove defective portions of base and weld material down to sound metal, and deposit additional sound material. c. Undercutting, Undersize, and Excessive Concavity: Clean and deposit additional weld metal. d. Overlapping and Incomplete Fusion: Remove and replace the defective portion of the weld. MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-6 e. Slag Inclusion: Remove those parts of the welds containing slag. Fill with sound weld metal. f. Removal of Adjacent Base Metal during Welding: Clean and form full size by depositing weld material. 8. Remove cracked welds throughout their length. 9. Where work performed subsequently to the making of the deficient weld has rendereV the weld inaccessible, or has caused new conditions which make connection of the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, restore the original conditions by removing welds or members, or both before making the necessary corrections. Another option is to compensate for the deficiency with additional work according to the revised design, approved by the Engineer. 10. Cut apart and reweld improperly fitted and misaligned parts. 11. Straighten members distorted by heat of welding using mechanical means or by carefully supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat. Heated areas shall not exceed 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit as measured by Tempilsticks. Parts to be heated for straightening shall be free from external stress forces, except when mechanical means are used in conjunction with heat application. 12. If faulty welding or its removal for rewelding damages the base metal so that, in the Engineer's judgement, it is not in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, remove and replace the damaged material and compensate for the deficiency in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 13. Maximum space between pieces or members to receive bevel welds shall be 3/16". Bevel pieces or members up to 3/8" thick to form a single or double "V" before welding. Bevel those over 3/8" thick to form a double "V" wherever possible. 14. Maximum space between pieces or members for fillet welds shall be 1/16". Only effective portion shall be considered in measuring fillet welds. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Shop painting shall be as specified in Section 09800, PROTECTIVE COATING. B. Except where steel is encased in concrete or edges are field welded, the steel shall be given one (1) shop coat of rust-inhibitive primer, as specified in Section 09800, PROTECTIVE COATING, after fabrication. C. Machine finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by an approved coating. D. Structural and miscellaneous steel indicated as galvanized shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. Touch up damaged and field welded areas of galvanizing with one coat of inorganic zinc-rich paint. 3.02 ERECTION OF STEEL A. Steel shall be erected in accordance with the Standard Specifications of the American Institute for Steel Construction. Erection shall be performed by workmen experienced in this form of work. -- MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-7 B. The framing shall be carried up true and plumb and temporary bracing shall be introduced wherever necessary to take care of the loads to which the structure may be subjected, including erection equipment and its operation. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety. It shall finally be removed by the Contractor as part of his equipment. As erection progresses, the work shall be securely connected to take care of all dead load, wind load, and erection stresses. 3.03 BOLTED FIELD CONNECTION A. High strength bolts shall be used for field connections and shall have a suitable identifying mark on top of the head. B. Tightening of nuts shall be judged using load indicator washers. The minimum bolt tension for the size of bolt used shall be in accordance with tables listed in the referenced standards. 3.04 WELDED FIELD CONNECTION Welds shall be made only by operators who have previously qualified by tests, as prescribed by the "Standard Qualifications Procedure" in the "Structural Welding Code - Steel" by the American Welding Society to perform the type of work required. Welding must be approved. 3.05 CUTTING HOLES The use of a gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted on structural framing members. 3.06 SETTING PLATES Column base plates and leveling plates shall be set level to correct elevations and temporarily supported on steel wedges or shims until the supported members have been plumbed and grouted. The entire bearing area under plates shall be grouted solid with non-shrink grout. 3.07 TEMPLATES Templates shall be furnished as indicated. The Contractor shall furnish instructions for the setting of anchors, connection details, and bearing plates and shall ascertain that the items are properly set during the progress of the work. 3.08 CLEAN AND ADJUST After inspection and approval, and before leaving the shop, the steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, rust, splatter, slag, flux, deposit, oil, dirt, and other foreign matter. END OF SECTION MWH-09/16/03 STRUCTURAL STEEL _ CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05120-8 SECTION 05210- STEEL JOISTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of steel joists is shown on drawings, including basic layout and type of joists required. B. Related work: Section 05120 Structural Steel Section 05300 Metal Decking 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide joists fabricated in compliance with the following, and as herein specified. 1. Steel Joist Institute (SJI) Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for: 2. K-Series Open Web Steel Joists. B. Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the American Welding Society(AWS)"Standard Qualification Procedure". Joists welded in place are subject to inspection and testing. Expense of removing and replacing any portion of steel joists for testing purposes will be borne by Owner if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove and replace work found to be defective and provide new acceptable work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of joist and accessories. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI "Specifications". B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections,jointing and accessories. Include mark, number,type,location and spacing of joists and bridging. Provide templates or location drawings for installation of anchor bolts. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver,store and handle steel joists as recommended in SJI "Specifications". Handle and store joists in a manner to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive stresses. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS MWH-09/16/03 STEEL JOISTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05210-1 A. Open Web Joist Members: Comply with AISC and AJI "Standard Specifications". B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307,Grade A,regular hexagon type,low carbon steel. C. Welding Materials: AWS D 1-1, Type required for materials being welded. D. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SJI "Specifications" and Section 09800. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate steel joists in accordance with AISC and SJI "Specification". 2. Verify dimensions prior to fabrication. B. Holes in Chord Members: Provide holes in chord members where shown for securing other work to steel joists;however,deduct area of holes from the area of chord when calculating strength of member. C. Extended Ends: Provide extended ends on joists where shown, complying with manufacturer's standards and requirements of applicable SJI "Specifications" and load tables. D. Ceiling Extensions: Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly to joist bottom chord. Provide either an extended bottom chord element or a separate unit,to suit manufacturer's standards,of sufficient strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to with '/z"of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated. E. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for"open web"joists,complying with SJI "Specification". Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams. F. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI "Specifications", unless otherwise indicated. G. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. Apply one shop coat of primer paint to steel joists and accessories,by spray,dipping,or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with AISC and SJI "Specifications",final shop drawings, and as herein specified. MWH-09/16/03 STEEL JOISTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05210-2 B. Placing Joists: Do not start placement of steel joists until supporting work is in place and 1%W111 secured. Place joists on supporting work, adjust and align in accurate locations and spacing before permanently fastening. 1. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure lateral stability during construction. 2. Where "open web"joist lengths are 40 feet and longer, install a center row of bo ted bridging to provide lateral stability before slackening of hoisting lines. C. Bridging: Installl bridging simultaneously with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams. D. Fastening Joists: 1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Specifications"for type of joists used. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing of joists. 2. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Specifications"for type of joists used. a. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated. b. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolted connections, except where high-strength bolts or welded connections are shown. 3. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, abraded areas, and rust spots of shop painting is included under Division 9, painting. END OF SECTION MWH-09/16/03 STEEL JOISTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05210-3 SECTION 05300 - METAL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of metal decking is indicated on drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated or specified: 1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. AWS "Structural Welding Code". 3. SDI "Design Manual for Floor Decks and Roof Decks". 4. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Wind Uplift Classifications. B. FM Listing: Provide metal roof deck units which have been evaluated by Factory Mutual System and are listed in "Factory Mutual Approval Guide" for "Class 1" fire rated construction. C. Qualification of Welding Work: Qualify welding processors and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. Include manufacturer's certification as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details,and conditions requiring closure panels,supplementary framing,sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing or other accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Roof Decks Units: a. Bowman/E.G. Smith, Div. Cyclops Corp. b. Epic Metals Corp. MWH-09/16/03 METAL DECKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05300-1 C. Inryco, Inc.; Deerfield, IL. d. Mac-Fab Products, Inc. e. Roll Form Products, Inc. f. United Steel Deck, Inc. g. Vulcraft/Div. Nucor Corp. h. Wheeling Corrugating Co. i. Wolverine Deck Co. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Deck: ASTM A 446, Grade A. B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality, galvanized. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized,closed-cell,synthetic rubber. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports,with flush,telescoped or nested 2" laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, unless otherwise indicated. B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations complying with SDI "Roof Deck Specifications", of metal thickness, depth and width as indicated. C. Intermediate - Rib Deck: Depth approximately 1-1/2 ribs spaced approximately 6"o.c., width of rib opening at roof surface not more than 1-3/4", width of bottom rib surface not less than 1". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and final shop drawings, and as specified herein. 1. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contact side lap interlocks. 2. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. 3. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. 4. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry. 5. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to MWH-09/16/03 METAL DECKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05300-2 prevent overloading of structural members. B. Fastening Desk Units: 1. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting member as indicated on general notes. 2. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8" diameter puddle welds or elongated welds of equal strength,spaced not more than 12"o.c.at every support, and at closer spacing where required for lateral force resistance. In addition, secure deck at each supporting member in ribs where side laps occur. 3. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Use welding washers where recommended by deck manufacturer. 4. Mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports,at intervals not exceeding 36" o.c., using self-tapping No. 10 or larger machine screws. 5. Uplifting Loading: Install and anchor roof deck units to resist gross uplift loading of 45 lbs. per sq. ft. at each overhang and 30 lbs. per sq. ft.for other roof areas. 6. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown. 7. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces ,as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work shown. 8. Hanger dots or Clips: Provide UL approved punched hanger slots between cells or flutes of lower element where floor deck units are to receive hangers for support of ceiling constructions, air ducts, diffusers, or lighting fixtures. a. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor deck units may be used instead of hanger slots. b. Locate slots or clips at not more than 14" o.c. in both directions, not over 9" from walls at ends, and not more than 12" from walls at sides, unless otherwise shown. C. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices. 9. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking, and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking installation. 10. Touch-Up Painting: Clean and touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair coating as required after erection. END OF SECTION MWH-09/16/03 METAL DECKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05300-3 SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute - Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual. B. ASTM A123- Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality. D. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. E. ASTM A570- Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip. Structural Quality. F. ASTM A611 - Steel, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Carbon, Structural. G. ASTM A645 Steel Sheet, Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated. H. ASTM C955 - j_oad-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Piaster Bases. I. AWCI (Association of Wall and Ceiling Industries)-Specifications Guide for Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. J. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. K. AWS D1.3- Light Steel Welding Code. L. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. M. MFMA (Metal Framing Manufacturers Association) - Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Size components to withstand design loads in Horizontal Assembly of 50 psf live loads. B. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/240 span. C. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. MWH-09/16/03 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05400-1 D. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading,welds,type and location of fasteners,and accessories or items required of related work. C. Indicate stud and roof joist layout. D. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted or welded framing connections. E. Provide calculations for loadings and stresses of specially fabricated framing, under the Professional Structural Engineer's seal, registered in the State of Texas. F. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members;describe materials and finish, product criteria, and limitations. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AWCI, MFMA and AWS D1.3. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. C. Design structural elements under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Texas. 1.10 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of exterior framed wall including insulation, sheathing, louvers, door frame, and interior and exterior finish specified in other sections, under provisions of Section 01300. MWH-09/16/03 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05400-2 B. Mockup Size: 8 x 8 feet, including corner condition. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of the Standard General Conditions. B. Coordinate with the placement of components within the stud framing system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Dale/Incor Product CEE STUD. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS Studs: ASTM C955,formed to channel shape,punched web, 16 gage thick,6 inch depth and 1 5/8 inch face. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC - Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A123, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft(380 gm/sq m). B. Anchorage Devices: drilled expansion bolts. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. MWH-09/16/03 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05400-3 2.06 FINISHES A. Studs: Galvanize to G90 coating class. Shop prime. B. Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to G90 coating class. Shop prime. C. Joists and Purlins: Galvanize to G90 coating class. Shop prime. D. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Same finish as framing members. ASTM A123, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft(380 gm/sq m). Shop prime. E. Plates,Gussets,Clips: Same finish as framing members.ASTM A123,hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft(380 gm/sq m). Shop prime. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01040. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 ERECTION OF STUDDING A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks;locate to wall partition layout. Secure in place with fasteners by welding at maximum 24 inches (600 mm) oc. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. C. Place studs at 24 inches(600 mm)oc;not more than 2 inches(50 mm)from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks welding method. D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door and window iambs. E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Erect load bearing studs,brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. MWH-09/16/03 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05400-4 1. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing. J. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. K. Install framN between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. L. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. M. Complete framing ready to receive substrate. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch. B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/16 inch. END OF SECTION MWH-09/16/03 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05400-5 test pressure shall be held for 2 minutes and the pipe visually inspected to confirm that welds are sound and leak-free. 2. In addition to the tests required in AWWA C200, weld tests shall be conducted on each 5,000-feet of production welds and at any other times there is a change in the grade of steel, welding procedure, or welding equipment. 3. Fittings fabricated from straight pipe with a previously passing hydrostatic test need not have an additional hydrostatic test provided welds are tested by nondestructive means and shown to be sound. D. Shop Testing of Steel Plate Specials 1. If any special has been fabricated from straight pipe not previously tested and is of the type listed below, the special shall be hydrostatically tested with a pressure equal to 1-1/2 times the design working pressure: bends, wyes, crosses, tees with side outlet diameter greater than 30 percent of the main pipe diameter, and manifolds. 2. Specials not required to be hydrostatically tested shall be tested by liquid dye penetrant inspection method in accordance with ASTM E 165 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Penetrant Examination, Method A or the magnetic particle method in ASME Section Vill, Division 1, Appendix VI. 3. Reinforcing plates shall be tested by the solution method using approximately 40 psi air pressure introduced between the plates through a threaded test hole. Test hole shall be properly plugged following successful testing. 4. Any weld defects, cracks, leaks, distortion, or signs of distress during testing shall require corrective measures. Weld defects shall be gouged out and rewelded. After corrections, the special shall be retested. 5. Where welded test heads or bulkheads are used, extra length shall be provided to each opening of the special. After removal of each test head, the special shall be trimmed back to the design points with finished plate edges ground smooth, straight, and prepared for the field joint. 6. Testing shall be performed before joints have been coated or lined. 7. Ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accordance with the following: a. Steel plate that will be in welded joints or welded stiffener elements shall be examined ultrasonically for laminar discontinuities where both of the following conditions exist: 1) Any plate in the welded joint has a thickness exceeding 1/2-inch. 2) Any plate in the welded joint is subject to transverse tensile stress through its thickness during the welding or service. b. Ultrasonic examination may be waived where joints are designated to minimize potential laminar tearing. MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570-3 c. The ultrasonic examination shall be in accordance with ASTM A 578 - Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for Special Applications with a Level I acceptance standard. 8. Plates that are not in conformance with the acceptance criteria in ASTM A 578 may be used in the WORK if the areas that contain the discontinuities are a distance at %MOO, least 4 times the greatest dimension of the discontinuity away from the weld joint. E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing and paying for said material tests. The ENGINEER has the right to witness testing conducted by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that the CONTRACTOR's schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the ENGINEER. F. In addition to those tests specifically required, the ENGINEER may request additional samples of any material including mortar lining and coating for testing by the OWNER. The additional samples shall be furnished as part of the WORK. G. Field Testing: Field testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 01656 - Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection. H. Welding Requirements: Welding procedures used to fabricate and install pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code-Steel or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9. Welding procedures shall be required for longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections. I. Welder Oualifications: Welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to-be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Lined steel pipe and specials shall conform to AWWA C200, C205, C206, C207, C208, C218, and C219, subject to the following supplemental requirements. The pipe, specials, and fittings shall be of the diameter and class indicated and shall be provided complete with shop-welded or flanged joints as indicated in the Contract Documents. Except where otherwise indicated, flanges shall be shop-welded. For pipe, specials, and fittings 14-inches diameter and larger, the nominal inside diameter after lining shall not be less than the diameter indicated on the Drawings, allowing for tolerances according to AWWA C200 and C205. Pipe, specials, and fittings smaller than 14-inches diameter may be furnished in standard outside diameters. When indicated as a minimum, wall thickness tolerance shall be as allowed by AWWA C200 or the ASTM nominal sheet or plate tolerance, whichever is less. B. Markings: The manufacturer shall legibly mark pipe, specials, and fittings in accordance with the laying schedule and marking diagram. Each pipe, special, and fitting shall be numbered in sequence and said number shall appear on the laying schedule and marking diagram in its proper location for installation. Each pipe, fitting, and special shall be marked at each end with top field centerline. MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570-4 C. Handling and Storage: The pipe, specials, and fittings shall be handled by use of wide slings, padded cradles, or other devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe coating/exterior. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment that might injure the pipe coating/exterior will not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe, specials, and fittings shall be supported on padded skids, sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 3- inches in diameter, sand bags, or suitable means so that the pipe including coating and lining coating will not be damaged. Pipe, specials, and fittings shall not be rolled and shall be secured to prevent accidental rolling. D. The CONTRACTOR shall replace or repair damaged pipe, specials, or fittings. E. Strutting: Adequate strutting shall be provided on specials, fittings, and straight pipe so as to avoid damage to the pipe, specials, and fittings during handling, storage, hauling, and installation. For mortar-lined steel pipe, specials, or fittings the following requirements shall apply: 1. The strutting shall be placed as soon as practicable after the mortar lining has been applied and shall remain in place while the pipe, special, or fitting is loaded, transported, unloaded, and installed at the Site. 2. Any pipe, special, or fitting damaged during handling, hauling, storage, or installation due to improper strutting shall be repaired or replaced. F. Lining: The pipe, specials, and fittings shall have smooth, dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, and roughness. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Mortar: Materials for mortar shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C205; provided, that cement for mortar coating shall be Type If and mortar lining shall be Type If. Cement in mortar lining shall not originate from kilns that burn metal-rich hazardous waste fuel, nor shall a fly ash or pozzolan be used as a cement replacement. Admixtures shall contain no calcium chloride. B. Steel for Cylinder and Fittings: Pipe, specials, and fittings. manufactured under AWWA C200 shall satisfy the following requirements: 1. Minimum yield strength of steel is 42,000 psi. 2. Be manufactured by a continuous casting process 3. Be fully killed 4. Be fine grain practice 5. Have maximum carbon content of 0.25 percent 6. Have maximum sulfur content of 0.015 percent 7. Have minimum elongation of 22 percent in a 2-inch gauge length. 8. Be in accordance with one of the following: a. ASTM A 1011 - Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability b. ASTM A 283 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates c. ASTM A 572 - High Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel d. ASTM A 1018 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium or Vanadium, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570 -5 C. Steel equal to or greater than 1/2-inch thick used in fabricating pipe shall be tested for notch toughness using the Charpy V-Notch test in accordance with ASTM A 370 - Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products. Frequency of testing shall be one impact test (set of 3 specimens, transverse, not longitudinal) for each coil used in manufacturing the pipe. The frequency for sheets and plates shall be one impact test (set of 3 specimens) and shall be made for each 200 tons of product. The steel shall withstand a minimum impact of 25 ft-lb at a temperature of 30 degrees F. 2.3 DESIGN OF PIPE A. General: The pipe shall be suitable to transmit potable water under the conditions indicated in the Contract Documents. The steel pipe shall have flanged or shop-welded joints as indicated. Except where otherwise indicated, flanges shall be shop welded The pipe shall consist of a steel cylinder, shop-lined with Portland cement mortar in accordance with AWWA C205. B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to applicable requirements previously stated and, except as hereinafter modified, shall conform to AWWA C200. C. Pipe Dimensions: Pipe shall be of the diameter and minimum wall thickness indicated. D. Fitting Dimensions: Fittings shall be of the diameter and class indicated. E. Joint Design: Unless indicated otherwise, the standard joint for steel pipe shall be as indicated in the following table. Pipe Diameter Application Joint Type N%=00K 60-inches and less Aboveground Restrained Flanged Areas Butt Welded Joint G. Shop-applied interior linings and exterior coatings shall be held back from the ends of the pipe as indicated or as otherwise acceptable to the ENGINEER. H. Restrained Joints 1. Located where indicated, restrained joints shall be flanged or welded joints. Welded joints shall be butt-weld type as indicated. Design of these latter joints shall include stresses created by the greater of: a. Temperature differential of 40 degrees F plus poisson's effect in combination with hoop stress, or; b. Thrust due to bulkheads, bends, reducers, and line valves resulting from working pressure in combination with hoop stress. 2.4 SPECIALS AND FITTINGS A. Design: Except as otherwise indicated, materials, fabrication and shop testing of specials and fittings shall conform to the requirements stated above for pipe and shall MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570-6 conform to the dimensions of AWWA C208. The minimum thickness of plate for pipe from which specials are to be fabricated shall be the greatest of those determined by the following 3 criteria: 1. Working and Transient Pressure Design T=88,D/2 T=P D/2 Y/SW Y/St Where: T = Steel cylinder thickness in inches D = Outside diameter of steel cylinder in inches P, = Design working pressure in psi Pt = Design transient pressure in psi Y = Specified minimum yield point of steel in psi S,N = Safety factor of 2.5 at design working pressure St = Safety factor at design transient pressure; for elbows 1.875 and 2.0 for other specials 2. Maximum Pressure: The maximum pressure experienced by the pipe shall be as follows: Pipe Working Pressure Transient Pressure Test Pressure (psi) (psi) (psi) Tank Feed Pipe 26 35 125 Pump Station Suction Header 26 35 125 Pump Suction Pipe 26 35 125 Pump Discharge Pipe 110 146 150 Pump Sta. Discharge Header 110 146 150 3. Mainline Pipe Thickness: Plate thickness for specials shall not be less than for the adjacent mainline pipe. 4. Thickness Based on Pipe Diameter Nominal Pipe Pipe Manifolds Diameter, in Piping Above Ground Piping Structures 24 and under 3/16-in 25 to 48 1/4-in over 48 5/16-in MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570-7 B. Specials installed on saddle supports shall be designed to limit the longitudinal bending stress to a maximum of 10,000 psi. Design shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 7 of AWWA Manual M11. C. Reinforcement for nozzles shall be designed in accordance with AWWA Manual M11. Reinforcement shall be designed for the design pressure indicated and shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Specials and fittings shall be equal in pressure design strength and shall have the same lining and coating as the adjoining pipe. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum radius of elbows shall be 2.5 times the pipe diameter and the maximum miter angle on each section of the elbow shall not exceed 11-1/4 degrees. D. Steel Welding Fittings: Steel welding fittings shall conform to ASTM A 234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. E. Ends for Mechanical-Type Couplings: Except as otherwise indicated, where mechanical-type couplings are indicated, the ends of pipe shall be banded with Type C collared ends using double fillet welds. Where pipe 12-inches and smaller is furnished in standard schedule thickness and where the wall thickness equals or exceeds the coupling manufacturer's minimum wall thickness, the pipe ends may be grooved. 2.5 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING A. Cement-Mortar Lining for Shop Application: Unless indicated otherwise, interior surfaces of pipe, specials, and fittings shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with cement mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with AWWA C205. During the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe, specials, and fittings shall be maintained in a round condition by suitable bracing or strutting. The lining machines shall be of a type that has been used successfully for similar WORK. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found defective at the Site, the damaged or `►i unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications. B. The minimum lining thickness and tolerance shall be in accordance with AWWA C205. C. Defective linings, as determined by the ENGINEER, shall be removed from the pipe wall and shall be replaced to the full thickness required. Defective linings shall be cut back to a square shoulder in order to avoid feather edged joints. D. The progress of the application of mortar lining shall be regulated in order that all handwork, including the repair of defective areas, is cured in accordance with the provisions of AWWA C205. Cement mortar for patching shall be the same materials as the mortar for machine lining, except that a finer grading of sand and mortar richer in cement shall be used when field inspection indicates that such mix will improve the finished lining of the pipe. E. Specials and fittings that cannot be mechanically lined and coated shall be lined and coated by hand-application using the same materials as used for the pipe and in accordance with the applicable AWWA or ASTM standards and this Section. Coating and lining applied in this manner shall provide protection equal to that for the pipe. Fittings may be fabricated from pipe that has been mechanically lined and/or coated. Areas of lining and coating that have been damaged by such fabrication shall be repaired by hand-applications. MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570 -8 F. Cement-Mortar Lining for Field Application; Unless otherwise indicated, steel pipe shall be mortar lined. The materials and design of in-place cement mortar lining shall be in accordance with AWWA C602 and the following supplementary requirements: 1. Pozzolanic material shall not be used in the mortar mix. 2. Admixtures shall contain no calcium chloride. 3. The minimUm lining thickness shall be as indicated for shop-applied cement mortar lining, and finished inside diameter after lining shall be as indicated. 4. Temperature and shrinkage cracks in the mortar less than 1/16-inch wide need not be repaired. Pipe, specials, or fittings with mortar cracks wider than 1/1 6-inch shall be rejected. G. Protection of Pipe LiningAnterior: For pipe, specials, and fittings with plant-applied cement-mortar linings, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a 12-mil polyethylene sheet or other suitable bulkhead on the ends of the pipe and on each opening to prevent drying out of the lining. Bulkheads shall be substantial enough to remain intact during shipping and storage until the pipe is installed. 2.6 EXTERIOR COATING OF PIPE A. Exterior Coating of Exposed Piping: The exterior surfaces of pipe, specials, and fittings that will be exposed to the atmosphere inside structures or above ground shall be thoroughly cleaned and then given a shop coat of primer compatible with the finish coating required by Section 09800 - Protective Coating. 2.7 PIPE APPURTENANCES A. Pipe appurtenances shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 15 of the Specifications. Threaded outlets shall be forged steel suitable for 3000 psi service, and shall be as manufactured by Vogt, or equal. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE A. Handling and Storage: Pipe, specials, and fittings shall be carefully handled and protected against damage to lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, and impact shocks and free fall. Pipe, specials, and fittings shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the Site or elsewhere. Pipe, specials, and fittings shall be handled and stored at the Site in accordance with the requirements stated in Part 2, above. No pipe shall be installed when the lining or coating/interior or exterior surfaces show cracks that may be harmful as determined by the ENGINEER. Such damaged lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces shall be repaired or a new undamaged pipe, special, or fitting shall be provided. B. Pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced. C. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect each pipe, special, and fitting for damage. The CONTRACTOR shall remove or smooth out any burrs, gouges, weld splatter, or other small defects prior to laying the pipe, special, or fitting. MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570 -9 D. Pipe struts in pipe smaller than 42-inches may be removed immediately after laying. After the struts are removed and they shall remain the property of the CONTRACTOR. E. Cold Weather Protection: No pipe, special, or fitting shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated. F. Pipe, Specials, and Fitting Protection: The openings of pipe, specials, and fittings with shop-applied mortar lining shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to maintain a moist atmosphere and to prevent unauthorized access by persons, animals, water, or any undesirable substance. The bulkheads shall be so designed to prevent drying out of the interior of the pipe, specials, and fittings. The CONTRACTOR shall introduce water into the pipe to keep the mortar moist if moisture has been lost due to damaged bulkheads. G. Pipe Cleanup: As pipe installation progresses, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the pipe interior free of debris. The CONTRACTOR shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints, and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline. 3.2 JOINT WELDING AND LINING A. General: Except where otherwise indicates, the pipe, specials, and fittings shall be shop-welded and lined so that field welding or lining of joints is not necessary. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE APPURTENANCES A: Installation of Valves: Valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury or damage to the valve or any part of it. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to installation. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure proper operation. B. Valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the location indicated. C. Valves and flanges shall be coated and protected in accordance,with Section 09800 - Protective Coatings. D. Installation of Flanged Joints: Before the joint is assembled, the flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign material with a power wire brush. The gasket shall be centered and the connecting flanges drawn up watertight without unnecessarily stressing the flanges. Bolts shall be tightened in a progressive diametrically opposite sequence and torqued with a suitable calibrated torque wrench. Clamping torque shall be applied to the nuts only. Full face reinforced rubber gaskets shall be applied to the inside face of blind flanges with adhesive. E. Flexible Coupled Joints: When installing flexible couplings, care shall be taken that the connecting pipe ends, couplings,and gaskets are clean and free of dirt and foreign matter with special attention given to the contact surfaces of the pipe, gaskets, and couplings. The couplings shall be assembled and installed in conformity with the recommendation and instruction of the coupling manufacturer. F. Wrenches used in bolting couplings shall be of a type and size recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Coupling bolts shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform annular space between the follower rings and the body of the pipe with all bolts tightened approximately the same amount. Diametrically opposite bolts shall be MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570 -10 tightened progressively and evenly. Final tightening shall be done with a suitable calibrated torque wrench set for the torque recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Clamping torque shall be applied to the nut only. - END OF SECTION - MWH-05122003 STEEL PIPE, SPECIALS, AND FITTINGS [JOB NO][PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02570-11 SECTION 02595 - SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE, RUBBER JOINTS (ASTM D 3034, MODIFIED) PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide PVC solid wall nonpressure pipe and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. This Section covers pipe from 4- to 15-inches diameter nominal size. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings and laying diagrams of pipe,joints, bends, special fittings, and piping appurtenances. C. Certificates: The CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer's certificate that pipe conforms to these specifications. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name, pipe size, and minimum pipe stiffness in psi. B. The CONTRACTOR shall also require the manufacturer to mark the date of extrusion on the pipe. This dating shall be done in conjunction with records to be held by the manufacturer for 2 years, covering quality control tests, raw material batch number, and other information deemed necessary by the manufacturer. 2.2 PIPE A. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings, SDR [26]. Material for PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1784 - Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds, for cell classification 12454- E or 12454-C as defined therein. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch according to ASTM D 2444 - Test Method for Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight). B. Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212 - Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. Elastomeric seals for compression type joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe or ASTM F 913 - Thermoplastic Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. MWH-03052002 SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02595-1 2.3 FITTINGS A. All fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 3034. The ring groove and gasket ring shall be compatible with PVC pipe ends. The flanged fittings shall be compatible with cast-iron or ductile iron pipe fittings. B. The stiffness of the fittings shall be not less than the stiffness of adjoining pipe. 2.4 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, material used for pipe bedding shall conform to Section 02200 - Earthwork. 2.5 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS A. Flexible couplings shall be neoprene, full-circle, clamp-on type conforming to ASTM C 425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings and provided with two stainless steel band screw-clamps to secure the coupling tightly to entering and exiting pipes. All screw-clamp hardware shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Neoprene material shall be suitable for sewage service. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02200 - Earthwork and the Drawings. 3.2 LAYING PIPE A. Pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications and as indicated. Pipe sections shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for jointings, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of slope. B. Handling 1. Handling of the PVC pipe shall be done with implements, tools, and facilities as recommended by the pipe manufacturer to' insure that the pipe is not damaged in any manner during storage, transit, loading, unloading, and installation. 2. Pipe shall be inspected both prior to and after installation in the ditch and all defective lengths shall be rejected and immediately removed from the working area. 3. Fittings shall be lowered into trench by means of rope, cable, chain, or other means without damage. Cable, rope, or other devices used for lowering fitting into trench, shall be attached around exterior of fitting for handling. Under no circumstances shall the cable, rope, or other device be attached through the fitting interior for handling or shall pipe or fittings be dropped or dumped into the trench. MWH-03052002 SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE [JOB NO]JPROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02595-2 C. Cutting and machining of the pipe shall be accomplished in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's standard procedures. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, or any other method that may fracture the pipe or will produce ragged, uneven edges. D. All foreign matt or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in tT e trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipeline shall be closed with watertight expandable type sewer plugs or PVC test plugs at the end of each day's operation or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted. E. Adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utility structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the WORK shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. F. Where the grads or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, branch connections to main sewers, or main drains, the. obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the CONTRACTOR in cooperation with owners of such utility structures. Unless otherwise indicated, protection of existing utility structures shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 3.3 FIELD JOINTING A. Each pipe compression type joint shall be joined with a lock-in rubber ring and a ring groove that is designed to resist displacement during pipe insertion. B. The ring and the ring seat inside the bell shall be wiped clean before the gasket is inserted. A thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the exposed surface of the ring and to the outside of the clean pipe end. Lubricant other than that furnished with the pipe shall not be used. The end of the pipe shall be then forced into the ring to complete the joint. C. The pipe shall not be deflected either vertically or horizontally in excess of the printed recommendations of the manufacturer of the coupling. D. Fittings shall be carefully connected to pipe, and joint shall be checked to insure a sound and proper joint. E. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent trench water from entering pipe. Adequate backfill shall be deposited on pipe to prevent floating of pipe. Any pipe that has floated shall be removed from the trench, cleaned, and relaid in an acceptable manner. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the trench conditions or weather are unsuitable. 3.4 TESTING A. Field testing of gravity sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 01655 - Gravity Pipeline Testing. - END OF SECTION - MWH-03052002 SMALL PVC NONPRESSURE PIPE [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02595-3 SECTION 02810- LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall design and provide an automatic irrigation system, complete and operable, i accordance with the Contract Documents. This system shall provide irrigation for the planting areas located next to the pump house on its north, west and south sides. B. Minor items necessary for proper construction and functional operation of the system, even if not spec4ically described in the Contract Documents, shall be included as a part of the WORK of this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings of the complete irrigation system and irrigation structures. CONTRACTOR is responsible for the detailed design of the irrigation system in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The detailed design shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing work. 2. Complete list of irrigation materials and equipment, including manufacturer's name/address, specific trade names, catalog numbers, complete with illustrations and/or necessary descriptive literature. The proposed items shall be clearly marked or underlined. 3. Controller literature, specifications, installation wiring diagram, and circuit breaker information shall be submitted for review prior to ordering. C. Record Drawings: Record drawings showing locations of all ,valves, pipe, heads, dimensions, controllers, control cables, and electrical wiring shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to final inspection. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall give at least 72 hours notice to the ENGINEER for scheduling the following special inspections: 1. Layout of the system 2. Inspection of trenches, backfilling, and equipment. 3. Pressure tests 4. Coverage adjustment 5. Automatic operation B. Pressure Testing: Tests shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-1 1. After assembly and installation, water pipes, fittings, automatic equipment, and appurtenances shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi at the lowest point of the system for not less than 60 minutes. 2. The first test shall be made in such a manner that all valves in the new water pipe sprinkler lines will be tested for watertight closure. Valves may be tested in groups or singly while subjected to 150 psi water pressure for a period of not less than 60 minutes. 3. The second test shall be made by forcing air from the pipes with water and capping or plugging pipe risers. After the pipe risers have been plugged or capped, line valves shall be fully opened and the pipe lines subjected to the full static water pressure for a period of not less than 120 minutes. (Pressure pipelines 150 psi). 4. The third test requires that lateral lines be tested at 100 psi for 120 minutes. 5. The fourth test requires that all pressure lines be tested at 120 psi for 24 hours. 6. Water lines and valves which show evidence of leakage or fail to be watertight shall be repaired or replaced. After all repairs or replacements have been made, the above-required tests shall be performed again. C. Coverage Adjustment: When the sprinkler system is completed, the CONTRACTOR, in the presence of the ENGINEER, shall demonstrate coverage of water onto the planting areas. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all material and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage disclosed. The CONTRACTOR shall inform the ENGINEER of any deviation from the Drawings required due to wind, planting, soil, or Site conditions that bear on proper coverage. 1. Upon completion of each phase of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall check and adjust each sprinkler head to meet the Site requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.4 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for making arrangements for the coordination of its construction operations with those of all others on the Site. The CONTRACTOR shall permit others engaged in work to accomplish their portion of the WORK without undue interference or delay. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the scheduling and coordination of the electrical and water connections and the installation of the piping and equipment in a manner that will effect the earliest completion of the WORK in conformance with the construction progress schedules. 1.5 SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall repair any settling of backfilled trenches occurring during a one year period after final acceptance without expense to the OWNER including complete restoration of all damaged planting, paving, or other improvements of any kind. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide winterization of the irrigation system during the one year period if necessary. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-2 C. When defective material or workmanship is discovered which will require repair or replacement, such repair or replacement work shall be completed by the CONTRACTOR within 3 working days after written notification of such required repair is given by the 0 NER. However, if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply after notification is given, the WNER will proceed to have the repairs made by others at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Equipment Compatibility: Controller and automatic control valves shall be products of the same manufacturer and have similar operational and adjustment features. 2.2 PLASTIC PIPE, ND FITTINGS A. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name, nominal pipe siXe, PVC type,- pressure rating, and extrusion date. Pipe shall be as recommended for the intended application. B. Lateral lines shall be PVC SDR 21, Class 200, [or SDR 26, Class 160,1 NSF approved. C. Piping upstream from remote control valves and quick coupling lines shall be PVC SDR 21, Schedule 40, NSF approved. Joints on PVC piping larger than 3 inches diameter shall be o-ring type flexible couplings and on size 3 inches and smaller shall be solvent welded. D. Fittings shall be T VC Schedule 40, Type II, NSF, or Schedule 80 as indicated. E. Swing joint ells shall be Schedule 80 PVC. Flexible riser shall be 1/2-inch in size as manufactured by Flex-nipple, Model No. UP-90 and UP-180 or equal. F. Teflon thread tape sealant shall be Rectorseal No. 5 or equal., 3/4-inch wide. G. Emitter lines shall be PEPCO Rainbird tubing or equal. 2.3 VALVES A. General: Hose bibb valves of size 3/4-inch, shall be provided in accordance with Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties, with permanent metal signs at noticeable locations. Signs shall be 5-inch x 3-inch in size and read as indicated. The signs shall be permanently ftstened to pipe, post, or wall at hose bibb. B. Main shut-off valves shall be bronze gate valves with union bonnet, renewable seats, and non-rising stem, Class 150, or better. Gate valves shall be provided with 2-inch square operating nuts. C. Isolation valves for main lines shall be bronze gate valves with wedge disc, Class 125, screwed ends, and operating nut, as manufactured by Rainbird, Buckner, Toro, or equal. D. Remote Control Valves: Remote control valves for the irrigation system shall conform to the following requirements: MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-3 1. Control valves shall be bronze valves, for 24-volt electrically controlled solenoids, ac or do operation. They shall be of heavy cast-bronze construction with cross or slotted type wheel for operation with key, and bleed fitting. Valves shall be operable electrically and manually. 2. Each remote control valve shall be housed in a valve box marked "RCV." The box shall be of adequate size and be set in clean gravel. 3. Control valves shall be by the same manufacturer as the controller. E. Quick-coupling valves shall be products of the same manufacturer as the sprinklers. F. Double Check Valve: Double check valve assembly shall be 2-inch with gate valves and Y-type strainer just upstream. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a 1-inch double- acting air relief valve. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all appropriate 2-inch nipples and unions, testing cocks and reducers. A double check valve shall be installed in a meter vault, as indicated. 2.4 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Controllers shall be electrically-timed devices for automatically opening and closing remote control valves. Controllers and remote control valves shall be of the same manufacturer and have similar operational and adjustment features. B. Controller(s) shall be single-phase, 115-volt AC operated and shall be provided with an On-Off switch and fuse assembly. Controller(s) shall be equipped with a transformer to reduce voltage to 24-volt control valves. C. Controllers shall be adjustable so that each control valve in the circuit will remain open for an adjustable period of 5 or less minutes to 60 minutes. Readily made field adjustments shall include a provision whereby any number of days in a week can be skipped and whereby one or more positions on the controller may be skipped. When any or all of the above adjustments have been made, the controller shall continue to operate automatically until further adjustments are made. Provision shall be made for conveniently resetting the start of the irrigation cycle at any time and also for advancing from one position to any other position at will. D. The controller shall be wall mounted, shall have a minimum of 4 zones and shall be located as indicated. E. Automatic controller shall be Toro, Rainbird or equal. 2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Sprinkler heads shall conform to the standards indicated. B. Spray heads shall be pop-up design, full or part circle, fixed spray sprinklers designed for inground installation. The sprinkler shall have a riser screen filter to prevent entry of foreign material to the nozzle. All parts shall be removeable through the top of the sprinkler case. Sprinkler shall have a stainless steel retraction spring. Provide Rainbird, Toro, Hunter, or equal. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-4 2.6 CONTROL WIRING A. Control wiring shall be Standard OF Direct Burial Copper Wire, Type OF Bearing, UL approved for direct underground burial in National Electrical Code Class II circuits, AWG sizes. B. Conductors shalt be grade copper meeting ASTM B 3 - Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. C. Splices shall be made with wire connectors, such as manufactured by Rainbird, Pen Tit, Scotch LOCK, or equal. 2.7 PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pressure vacuum breaker assemblies shall consist of body, check valve, vacuum relief, inlet and discharge shutoffs, and field test cocks. Vacuum relief shall have atmospheric opening of greater diameter than IPS of unit. Vacuum relief shall be separate and independent from check valve member. Nipples or other fittings shall be red brass. The unit shall have a protective screen or strainer before the unit to eliminate insects or debris from entering. The breaker shall have approval-of local plumbing authority. Flow loss at 100 gpm shall not exceed 4 psi. A 3/4-inch galvanized steel pipe in sleeve for irrigation blowout shall be provided as indicated. Pressure vacuum breakers shall be FEBCO Model '775 or equal. 2.8 PVC SOLVENT CEMENT AND PRIMERS A. Solvent cement shall be NSF approved and shall meet requirements of ASTM D 2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. B. Primer shall be NSF approved and shall be Weld-On, P-70 Industrial Polychemical Service, or equal. 2.9 WORM GEAR CLAMPS A. Worm-gear clamps shall be stainless steel. 2.10 VALVE AND CONTROLLER BOXES A. Boxes for valves and controllers shall be heavy-duty fiber glass or PVC and shall be complete with lid. Boxes shall be sized for equipment within box, depth of installation, and operation and maintenance space required. Lid shall identify equipment inside box, such as RCV for remote control valve, etc. 2.11 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the following: 1. Four control valve operating keys. 2. Four keys for locking automatic controller door. 3. Two gate valve keys. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-5 PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Prior to trenching, the CONTRACTOR shall locate all cables, conduits, sewers, septic tanks, and other such underground utilities, and shall take proper precautions not to damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists between such obstacles and the proposed WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify the ENGINEER. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating its work with the operation of existing utilities and new utilities on the Project. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER or its representative when utilities which are in operation require shut-off. C. The Contract Drawings do not indicate the layout of the irrigation system. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all its work, and plan its work accordingly, providing piping and fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. The WORK shall be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner, so that conflicts between sprinkler systems, planting, structures, and piping, will be avoided. D. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the water pressure available at the Site before installation of the system to make sure there is adequate pressure (design pressure 50 psi) to properly operate sprinkler heads and valves, and shall also provide pressure reducing valves if required. If the pressure at Site or any other job condition will create problems that will prevent proper operation of the irrigation system, the ENGINEER shall be notified before commencement of any work. Minor additions and adjustments of heads, piping, and circuits shall be made at no additional cost to OWNER where it is necessary to make the irrigation system operate properly. 3.2 EXECUTION - GENERAL A. Installation of the irrigation system shall be performed after the finish grading, but prior to landscaping. B. Valves, fittings, heads, and piping shall be installed as indicated and all connections made to permit the irrigation system to function properly through its entire length. C. Materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and all local and state codes, laws, ordinances, and regulations. D. Before proceeding with the installation of any section or unit of the irrigation system, the CONTRACTOR shall check and verify the correlation between ground measurements and Drawings and shall advise the ENGINEER of any discrepancies. 3.3 EXCAVATION A. Trenches shall be dug as wide and as deep as necessary to properly install the irrigation lines. Width shall allow for proper tamping of backfill around the pipe. B. Pipe trenches shall be straight or "snaked" slightly allowing for expansion and contraction of PVC pipe. C. Subsoil shall be kept separate from topsoil, where possible. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-6 D. Minimum cover depth shall be: 1. Supply pressure lines from water source to control valves: 24 inches unless otherwise indicated. -- 2. Lateral lines from control valves to sprinkler heads; 18 inches unless otherwise indicated. Lateral lines under paving, roadways, and driveways shall have 24 inches of cover and be located in Schedule 40 PVC sleeves. 3. Trenches f r control wire only shall be 18 inches deep unless otherwise indicated. Control wir s under concrete walks and slabs, paving, roadways, and driveways shall be ins filled in Schedule 40 PVC sleeves. 3.4 PIPING -GENERAL A. Piping shall be laid out and installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations and industry standards. Substantial support shall be provided at all points, and pipes shall be snaked slightly allowing for expansion and contraction. B. Minimum 1-inch vertical clearance shall be between lines crossing at angles greater than 45 degrees. C. Horizontal and vertical clearances between all lines shall be minimum 3 inches. D. Swing or swivel i6ints shall provide a leak-resistant joint with freedom of movement. E. Teflon thread sealant shall be used at threaded joints. F. Galvanized steeII pipes shall have clean standard threads of standard lengths. Joints shall be made uq with pipe compound applied to male threads only and not more than 2 threads shall show at the joints when connected. G. Pipe sleeves shall be provided under all paving and where necessary for passage under finish surface material, future replacement, and for protection of PVC piping and control wire. Pipe sleeves shall extend at least 12 inches beyond the edge of pavement. 3.5 PLASTIC PIPE A. The plastic pipe sections shall be placed accurately to line and grade in the prepared trenches. The inside of all pipe shall be clean and free from foreign matter and shall be end-reamed to remove burrs and provide full inside diameter of the pipe end. B. Pipe shall have a firm, uniform bearing for the entire length of each pipeline to prevent uneven settlement. Adjustments to grade shall be made by scraping away or filling in with clean earth backfill material, well compacted under the body of the pipe. Wedging of pipe will not be permitted. The inside of pipe shall be clean and free from foreign materials before joints are assembled. C. Open pipe ends where the WORK has been stopped shall be closed at the end of each day's construction work with a suitable temporary plug to prevent entrance of any foreign materials into the assembled pipeline. D. Pressure pipe shall be defined as all piping lying "upstream" from remote control valves and quick-coupling lines. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-7 E. O-Ring type flexible coupling pipe shall be used on pressure pipes larger than 3-inch diameter. F. Three-inch and smaller mainlines and fittings of pressure piping shall be solvent-weld type. G. Pressure piping 3-inch and larger shall be provided with portland cement concrete thrust blocks. Thrust blocks shall be constructed at the following places: 1. Where pipe changes direction at fittings. 2. Where pipe changes size. 3. Where line terminates. 4. Around gate valves (bottom half of valve in concrete; bolts exposed for change of top half). H. Thrust blocks shall be constructed of 2000 psi concrete, as follows: THRUST BLOCKS Minimum Square Feet of Bearing Area Dead Ends 90 degree 45 degree 22-1/2 degree Pipe Size Tees or Valves Bends Bends Bends or Less 3-inch 1.1 sq ft 1.5 sq ft 0.8 sq ft 0.4 sq ft 4-inch 2.0 sq ft 2.7 sq ft 1.5 sq ft 0.7 sq ft I. The areas given in the above table shall be measured in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe or to the longitudinal axis of the thrust developed. The thrust block bearing area shall be against undisturbed ground. 3.6 VALVES A. Valves shall be the full size of the line in which they are installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Remote control valves shall be enclosed in valve boxes: up to 3 valves may be installed in one box if dimensions permit. Valves shall be adjusted so the most remote sprinkler heads operate at the pressure recommended by the head manufacturer and so a uniform distribution of water is applied by the sprinkler heads to the planting areas. A metal union shall be provided on the discharge side of the control valve. They shall be wired to operate in the order indicated. C. Hose bibbs shall be installed as indicated. D. Gate valves shall be properly blocked to a cast-iron water works valve box. One 5-foot wrench for each 3 gate valves shall be furnished. E. Quick-coupling valves shall be provided, with one-inch swing joint in the same manner as the pop-up sprinklers. Quick-coupler lines shall be installed not less than 18 inches below grade. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-8 F. A main stop ani drain valve shall be installed near the point of connection to the main line. G. Drain valves shall be installed at low points along the main. It shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to see that the main drains properly. H. Gravel sumps 2-ft by 2-ft by 2-ft in size and filled with 3/4-inch to 1-inch size round gravel shall be provided at each manual drain valve and at low sprinkler head locations for drainage, (spray heads only). I. Double check valve shall be provided with a boiler drain for winter blowout. 3.7 PRESSURE-TYPE VACUUM BREAKER A. Installation of prossure-type vacuum breaker shall be at location indicated in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendation. 3.8 VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes shalll be set 1/2-inch above the designated finish grade in lawn areas and 2 inches above finish grade in ground cover areas. 3.9 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Nozzles on sprinklers shall be tightened after installation. Sprinklers having an adjustment stern shall be adjusted on a lateral line for the proper radius diameter and/or flow rate. B. Sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grades and at finish ground level unless otherwise indicated. C. Emitters shall be coordinated with actual field placement of shrubs as directed by the ENGINEER. D. The sprinkler system shall be thoroughly flushed as so to remove all possible foreign matter prior to installation of the sprinkler heads. E. The CONTRACTOR shall protect against re-entry of contaminated water into risers or piping. After flu hing, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately install sprinkler heads or cap risers until sprinkler heads are installed. 3.10 CONTROLLERS A. Controller location on the Drawings is essentially diagrammatic, and the actual installation shall be as specifically located by the ENGINEER. B. Applicable code$ shall be followed in providing a 115-volt electrical service to the controller. C. The controller shall be wall-mounted in buildings at a height above grade so that all normal adjustments can be conveniently reached by the operator while in a standing position. Pedestal mounted controllers shall have concrete pads in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-9 D. The CONTRACTOR shall properly ground the control boxes to copper ground rods driven into the ground. E. The ENGINEER will determine the timing, sequence, and period for the controller. Provide the manufactureras recommended waterproof circuit breaker disconnect switch. 3.11 WIRING A. Electrical equipment and wiring shall comply with applicable codes and shall be installed by those skilled and licensed in the trade. B. 115-volt wire shall be installed in conduit, routed from the power source indicated. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide low voltage, 24-volt direct burial wires of not less than No. 14 AWG. Where sizes are not indicated, they shall be sized per wire manufacturer's sizing charts and specifications. D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all wiring, conduits, sleeves, and connection for the low voltage electrical system between controller and valves where indicated and necessary for a complete and operable irrigation system. E. Wires shall be color coded as follows: 1. Control wires shall be red. 2. Ground (neutral) wire shall be white. F. Splices shall be moisture proof using appropriate electrical connectors. G. Wires shall be bundled together and wrapped with PVC tape at 5-ft intervals. They shall be buried in same trench as the pipe where possible. H. An expansion curl shall be provided within 3 ft of each wire connection and at least every 100 ft of wire length on runs more than 100 ft in length. Expansion curls shall be formed by wrapping at least 5 turns of wire around a 1-inch pipe or more in diameter, then withdrawing pipe. I. Conduits and sleeves necessary for running wires under concrete, walks, and paving shall be provided before concrete, walks, and paving work is constructed. Changes in conduit and sleeve direction under paving shall be made with sweep ells. J. Wire shall be continuous without splices except at control valves, and shall be routed in main line trench whenever possible. 3.12 PIPE TRENCH BACKFILL A. Bottom of trenches shall be smooth and free of sharp rocks and other objects that may damage pipe. B. Backfill material shall be free of rocks and other materials that may damage the piping. C. The initial backfill shall be accomplished by carefully tamping selected material (from material excavated from the trench) under the pipe and between the pipe and the trench walls. MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-10 D. The pipes shall be filled with water and pressurized during backfilling operations if necessary, to prevent drainage into piping. E. The backfill shall be carefully installed around and over the pipe to approximately 10 inches of the ground surface, then water shall be allowed to flow in the trench. After this puddling operation has been completed and allowed to stand for 24 hours, the balance of the ,materials shall be placed in the trench to the sub-grade line, leaving room for topsoil. The backfill shall be compacted carefully and thoroughly. F. Couplings and fittings shall be left exposed until leakage tests have been completed, unless the ENGINEER orders otherwise. G. Topsoil shall be installed prior to planting. 3.13 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS A. The sprinkler heads shall be adjusted and balanced for optimum and uniform coverage without excessive fogging and overthrow on walks, paving, and structures. The height and elevations of risers and sprinkler heads shall be adjusted. B. Following adjusting and balancing of the sprinkler heads, an operating test of the entire system shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR in the presence of the ENGINEER at normal operating pressures. The test will be considered as acceptable if the system operates in a satisfactory manner providing uniform coverage of irrigated areas for a one week period of automatic operation with no leaks. 3.14 INSTRUCTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall, upon completion of the maintenance period of the irrigation system, instruct the OWNER and the OWNER'S personnel as to the proper operation and maintenance of the system. - END OF SECTION - MWH-06132001 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 02810-11 SECTION 02831 -CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install chain link fencing and gates as shown and specified and all appurtenant work, complete, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings of gates and typical fence and fence corner construction shall be submitted prior to fabrication and construction according to the provisions of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Fencing shall be 6 feet high unless otherwise shown. All fencing materials shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Fencing shall be topped with two 450 extension arms, each wiht 3 lines of two-strand barbed wire as indicated. All materials and components shall be new, first quality items specifically manufactured for the intended application. 2.2 MATERIAL A. Fence fabric shall be No. 9 gage galvanized steel wire, 2-inch mesh. The fabric shall have a knuckled finish on the top edge and a twisted and barbed finish on the bottom edge. B. Fabric ties shall be No. 9 galvanized steel wire, spaced 14 inches apart on posts and 24 inches apart on rails. Aluminum ties will not be permitted. A continuous No. 7 gage galvanized steel wire shall be interlaced with the fabric or attached to the fabric with clips along the extreme bottom of the fence. C. All posts shall be one-piece without circumferential welds, and shall be: 1. Line posts shall be 2-inch schedule 40 pipe, 3.65 lb/ft. 2. End and comer posts shall be 2-1/2-inch schedule 40 pipe, 5.79 lb/ft. 3. Gate posts shall be 3-1/2-inch schedule 40 pipe, 9.1 lb/ft. D. Top rail and braces shall be 1-1/4-inch schedule 40 pipe, 2.27 lb/ft. E. Barbed wire shall be 2-strand, No. 12-1/2 gage zinc-coated steel or iron wire with 4-point, 14- gage barbs spaced not more than 5 inches apart. F. Stretcher bars shall be 1/4-inch by 3/4-inch steel bars and steel bands for fastening stretcher bars to the posts shall be 1/8-inch by 3/4-inch. G. Nuts, bolts and screws shall be of steel, hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, minimum size 3/8-inch diameter. MWH -05/18/07 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02831-1 H. Swing gate frames shall be constructed of pipe at least as heavy as the top rails for the fence and shall be fabricated by welding with all welds ground smooth prior to hot-dip galvanizing. Each gate leaf shall be provided with at least one diagonal brace. Frames shall be galvanized after fabrication. Galvanized malleable iron fittings for latching the gate shall be provided. Swing gates shall be hung by at least 2 steel or malleable iron hinges not less than 3 inches in width. Fabric shall match the fabric used in the fence. Each pair of gates shall be provided with a heavy drop rod latch assembly with a locking device for a padlock. I. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi at the age of 28 days. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All earth, brush, or other obstructions which interfere with the proper alignment of construction of fences shall be removed and disposed of at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. B. Line posts shall be spaced at not more than 10-foot intervals, measured from center to center of the posts and generally parallel to the ground slope. Posts shall be set plumb and shall be centered in 12-inch diameter concrete encasement extending 36 inches into the ground. C. Gate post shall be provided with concrete foundation. The foundation shall be designed (for load supporting and resisting)by an engineer. Soil properties shall be as shown in soils report. D. Changes in the fence lines, where the horizontal angle is 15 degrees or more, shall be considered as corners and corner posts shall be installed. E. Bracing shall be provided at all end, gate, and corner posts, the latter in both directions. Horizontal brace rails shall be set midway between top rail and ground running from the corner, end, or gate post to first line post. Diagonal tension members shall connect tautly between posts below horizontal braces. F. Corner posts shall be installed in lieu of line posts at intervals not exceeding 500 feet and shall be braced horizontally in both directions. G. The chain-link fabric shall be fastened on the side of the posts as shown or as designated by the ENGINEER. The fabric shall be stretched and securely fastened to the posts, and, between the posts, the top and bottom edges of the fabric shall be fastened to the top rail and tension wire, respectively. The tension wires shall be stretched tight with turnbuckles at the end and corner posts. The bottom tension wire shall be installed on a straight grade between posts. H. The fabric shall be fastened to the end, corner, and gate posts with stretcher bars and stretcher bar bands spaced at approximately 14 inches on line posts and at approximately 18 inches on tension wires. I. Encasement concrete for footings shall be placed immediately after mixing in a manner such that there will be no concentration of the large aggregates. The concrete shall be consolidated by tamping or vibrating in an approved manner. Concrete for footings may be placed without forms, providing the ground is firm enough to permit excavation to neat line dimensions. Prior to placing the concrete,the earth around the hole shall be thoroughly moistened. The concrete shall completely fill the hole and top surfaces of the concrete encasement shall be sloped outward to shed water and shall have a neat appearance. Not less than 7 days shall elapse MWH -05/18/07 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES w CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02831-2 after placing the concrete footings before the fence fabric or barbed wire is fastened to the posts. J. Any galvanized coating damaged during construction of the fencing shall be repaired by application of molten Galvo-Weld; Galvinox; or equal. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMI STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02831-3 SECTION 02900- LANDSCAPING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide landscaping and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. The terms "plant material" or "plants" refer to all vegetation, whether trees, shrubs, ground cover, or herbaceous vegetation. B. "Quality" refers to structure and form, as evidenced by density and number of canes and branches, compactness, symmetry, and general development without consideration of size or condition. "Standard quality" indicates the least acceptable quality. "Standard quality" plants shall be typical of the species and variety of good average uniform growth, shall be well formed and uniformly branched, and shall have the minimum number of canes indicated, free from irregularities, or shall conform to minimum quality index. Where the number of canes is not specifically stated in describing this grade, the "Horticultural Standards" as adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen shall apply. In such a case, the number of canes and other factors for the appropriate classification under "quality definition" in the Horticultural Standards shall be the Quality Index. Plant material below this standard will be considered "culls" and are not acceptable. Plants shall be nursery grown. C. "Specimen" means an exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly-knit plant, so trained or favored in its development and appearance as to be outstanding, superior in form, number of branches, compactness, and symmetry. D. "Size" is the factor controlled by dimensions representing height or spread, or both, without consideration of quality or conditions. For standard quality, a dimension is given for height or container size, or a dimension is given for height as well as container size. E. "Height" is usually indicated with a tolerance. The smaller dimension is the minimum acceptable. The larger dimension represents the maximum permissible. The average dimension of all plants shall equal the average of the tolerance figures for each item. F. "Condition" is the factor controlled by vitality and ability to survive and thrive and be comparable with normal plants of the same species and variety in the vicinity at the same season of the year. Plants shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions that would prevent thriving. "Condition" also sometimes refers to state of growth, i.e., whether "dormant condition" or "growing condition" and this state shall be comparable to plants of similar species in the vicinity for leaves, formation of buds, and the like. G. "Cane" means a primary stem which starts from the ground, or close to the ground, at a point not higher than 1/4 the height of the plant. H. "Caliper" shall be measured 12 inches above the finish grade or ground, as a guide, or where the trunk appears to form the head of the tree. I. "Foliage line" is maximum dimension in case of specimen plants. It measures from ground to lowest part of body of plant. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-1 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications: FS O-F-241 D Fertilizer, Mixed, Commercial B. Commercial Standards: ASTM D 422 Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils ANSI Z60.1 Nursery Stock American Association of Rules and Grading Provisions Nurserymen, Inc. 1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Product Information 1. Manufacturer's product information on fertilizer, peat moss, mulch, seed mixtures, sod, and tree paint. 2. Topsoil Analysis Report: A report certified by an analytical laboratory which shows results of analyzing representative samples of topsoil proposed for use. Approval of the report does not constitute final acceptance of the topsoil. C. Certificate 1. Certificates shall accompany each delivery stating source, quantity, and type of material. All certificates shall be submitted at the time of delivery. 2. Certificates of inspection of plant material, as may be required by Federal, State, or other authorities having jurisdiction, which accompany the shipment, shall be submitted at delivery. 3. Landscaping Subcontractor guarantee to perform planting maintenance services during the one year correction of defects period. D. Samples 1. Three samples of typical plants from each variety and size indicated shall be submitted. If approved, samples shall be planted and maintained as standards for comparison with plants provided. 2. Samples of grass seed: 1-lb samples of each type of grass seed required with the dealer's guaranteed germination rate. Grass seed shall not be delivered to the Site prior to written approval of the samples. Approval of the samples, however, shall not affect the right of the ENGINEER to reject the seed upon or after delivery. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: All plants shall be true to type or name as indicated in the Contract Documents and shall be tagged in accordance with the standard practice recommended by the Texas Agriculture Code; however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the ENGINEER. B. All plants shall comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations. C. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain clearance from the County agricultural representative, if required by law, fore planting plants delivered from outside the County in which they are to be planted. Evidence that such clearance, if required, has been obtained shall be filed with the ENGINEER. D. Inspections will be made by the ENGINEER or its representative. The CONTRACTOR shall request inspection at least 24 hours in advance of the time inspection is required. Inspection is required on the following stages of the WORK: 1. During preliminary grading, soil preparation, and initial weeding. 2. When trees are spotted for planting, but before planting holes have been excavated. 3. When finish trading has been completed. 4. When all WORK except the maintenance period has been completed. 5. Final inspection at the completion of the maintenance period. E. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval or rejection by the ENGINEER at place of growth and upon delivery to the Site at any time before or during progress of the WORK based on: 1. Quantity, quality, size, and variety; 2. Ball and root condition; and 3. Latent defects and injuries resulting from handling, disease, and insects. F. Plants approved at pre-planting inspection are subject to rejection during planting if found to be defective. G. Rejected plants shall be identified as such in an obvious manner, shall be removed from the Site, and be replaced with acceptable plants. H. Plants shall have been grown in nurseries which have been inspected by the governing authorities. Inspection of plant materials required by City, County, State, or Federal authorities shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, who shall have secured permits or certificates prior to delivery of plants to Site. 1.6 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of all planting operations, the portion of the Site used for a work or storage area by the CONTRACTOR shall be cleaned of all debris, superfluous materials, and MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-3 equipment. All such materials and equipment shall be entirely removed from the Site in accordance with Section 01700- Project Closeout. B. All walks or pavement shall be swept or washed clean upon completion of the WORK of this Section. C. During the entire Contract period, plant containers that have been cut or removed from plant materials shall be removed from the Site daily. 1.7 MAINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPING PLANTING PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for protecting, watering, and maintaining all planting and irrigation systems until final acceptance of all WORK under the Contract. B. At time of acceptance of the complete project, the lawn shall be totally established with no bare spots, have been mowed a minimum of 4 times, and the grass shall be at least 1-1/4 to 2 inches in height. C. Watering: Trees and shrubs shall be thoroughly soaked after planting and provided with additional water at intervals as necessary to provide for good health and growth of the planting. D. Upon completion of lawn seeding, the entire area shall be soaked to saturation by a fine spray. The new planting shall be kept watered by the sprinkling system existing on the Site during dry weather or whenever necessary for proper establishment of the lawn. Care shall be taken to avoid excessive washing or puddling on the surface and any such damage caused thereby shall be repaired. E. Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate protection to all newly seeded areas including the installation of approved temporary fences to prevent trespassing and damage, as well as erosion control, until the end of the correction of defects period. F. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any materials or equipment or which its employees or Subcontractors have damaged. G. Partial utilization of the project shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of any of the requirements contained in the Contract Documents. H. Mowing of Lawn Areas: First mowing of lawn areas shall begin as soon as the grass has reached a height of 3 inches and subsequent mowing shall be at least once a week, or as often as necessary to maintain all lawn areas at a uniform height of 1-1/2 to 2 inches. I. All lawns shall be fertilized every 3 weeks with 6 lb of 16-16-8 commercial fertilizer per 1000 sq ft for the first 7 weeks and be fertilized thereafter once each 5 months prior to acceptance. J. Plants shall be maintained in a vigorous, thriving condition by watering, cultivating, weeding, pruning, spraying, and other operations necessary. No trees or shrubs will be accepted unless they are healthy and show satisfactory foliage conditions. K. All planted areas shall be cultivated at least every 2 weeks and be raked smooth to present a neat appearance, and additional mulch shall be added where necessary. L. Maintenance shall include, in addition to the foregoing, cleaning, edging, repairs to stakes, wire, and wrappings, the repair of erosion, and all other necessary work of maintenance. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-4 Sidewalks and oilher paved areas shall be kept clean while planting and maintenance are in progress. M. Any existing sprinkler lines broken or disrupted shall be replaced to proper working order prior to work under this Contract and shall be acceptable to the OWNER.] 1.8 FINAL INSPECTION AND GUARANTEE A. Inspection of lawns and planting will be part of final inspection under the Contract. B. Written notice requesting inspection shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 10 days prior to the anticioated inspection date. C. Final acceptance prior to start of the guarantee period of the Contract will be on written approval by the ENGINEER, on the satisfactory completion of all WORK, including maintenance, but exclusive of the replacement of plant material. D. Any delay in the completion of any item of work in the planting operation which extends the planting into more than one season shall extend the correction period in accordance with the date of completion given above. E. The CONTRACTOR shall replace, as soon as weather conditions permit, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition which are noted at the end of the one-year correction period. F. Plants used for replacement shall be of the same size and variety on the Plant List. Replacement plants shall be furnished, planted, staked, and mulched as indicated for new plants. G. All WORK under this Section shall be left in good order to the satisfaction of the OWNER �- and the ENGINEER, and the CONTRACTOR shall, without additional expense to the OWNER, replace any trees, shrubs, etc., which develop defects or die during the one-year correction period. 1.9 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE FOLLOWING ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for a period of one year after date of acceptance of the WORK of this Section, for maintaining all plantings, including all necessary plant or tree replacements, weeding, cultivating, fertilizing, pruning, controlling insects and diseases, re-guying, and performing all other operations incident thereto, as well as maintenance of the irrigation system in Section 02810 - Landscape Irrigation System. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain a written guarantee from the landscaping Subcontractor embodying the provisions of this paragraph. B. The WORK covered by the maintenance and guarantee portions of this paragraph includes providing all replacements of plants, labor, materials, equipment, and supplies and in performing all operations in connection with maintenance and guarantees. C. The inspection of lawn areas is independent of the final inspection and maintenance period. After the lawn has been accepted and has been mowed 4 or more times, the responsibility for mowing and irrigation will be turned over to the OWNER. However, the weeding, fertilizing, and controlling of diseases of the lawn areas shall remain the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR for the remainder of the one-year maintenance and correction period. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-5 D. All plant materials shall be in a condition acceptable to the OWNER or its representative at the end of the maintenance guarantee period. E. The OWNER will furnish all water required during the maintenance and correction period. F. Maintenance: Watering and mowing of the lawn during the maintenance and correction period will be performed by the OWNER in accordance with written instructions which shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. G. The CONTRACTOR shall make any changes or adjustments necessary to the automatic sprinkler system during the maintenance and correction period. H. The CONTRACTOR shall replace any dead or diseased plants during the maintenance and correction period. I. All lawn and planting areas shall be fertilized during the maintenance and correction period with 16-6-4 chemical fertilizer. Amount of fertilizer applied shall be per fertilizer's written instructions on bag. Fertilizers applied to planting areas shall be cultivated into the top 2 inches of topsoil. J. The CONTRACTOR shall clean-up and remove unused or waste materials from the Site and leave the area in a neat condition satisfactory to the OWNER whenever it performs work during the maintenance period. K. Final Inspection: The OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall make a final inspection at the end of the one-year correction period. Any plants and materials found defective at time of final inspection shall be replaced within a time agreed upon by both parties. If it is too late in the planting season for replanting, the replacements shall be made during the next planting season even though such planting may run beyond the maintenance and correction period. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All landscaping materials for soil conditioning, weed abatement, or planting shall be first- grade, commercial quality and shall have certificates indicating the source of material, analysis, quantity, or weight attached to each sack or container or furnished with each delivery. Delivery certificates shall be given to the ENGINEER as each shipment of material is delivered. A list of the materials used, together with typical certificates of each material, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance. 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be the existing soil stripped to the depth indicated and stockpiled at a location directed by the ENGINEER in accordance with Section 02200 - Earthwork B. Additional topsoil, if needed, shall comply with the following: 1. Topsoil shall be obtained from naturally drained areas and shall be fertile, friable loam suitable for plant growth. Topsoil shall be subject to inspection and approval at the source of supply and upon delivery. 2. The topsoil shall be of uniform quality, free from subsoil, stiff or lumpy clay, hard clods, hardpan, rocks, disintegrated debris, plants, roots, seeds, and any other MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-6 materials that would be toxic or harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall contain no noxious weeds or noxious weed seeds. 3. The topsoil shall contain at least 6 percent organic matter as determined by loss of weight after ignition of moisture-free samples in accordance with current methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 4. The acidV of the topsoil shall result in soil pH between 5.5 and 7.5. The salinity level sham be less than 3 millimhos/cm. 5. Clay, as determined by the Bouyoucous hydrometer or by the decantation method, shall not exceed 60 percent of the topsoil material. 6. Mechanical analysis shall be performed and shall conform to ASTM D 422. 7. Soil mix for interior plants shall be sphagnum moss or a soil mix furnished in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon. The soil mix shall be a mix designed specifically for interior container or potted planting. 2.3 FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES A. Fertilizer shall be furnished in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon. B. Chemical fertilizers shall be a mixed commercial fertilizer conforming to FS O-F-241 D, Type 1, with percentages of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash at [5-10-5] or [6-10-4]. Fertilizers shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free flowing. C. Animal fertilizer shall be well-rotted cattle manure, free from sawdust, shaving, or refuse of any kind, and shall contain not more than 25 percent straw by volume. D. Tablets shall be 12 grams each [20-10-5] "Agriform," "Lesslie", or equal. E. Lime shall be dolomitic limestone containing not less than 85 percent of total carbonates. Limestone shall be ground to such fineness that 100 percent will pass'a No. 200 sieve. F. Agricultural gypsum shall be standard brand agricultural calcium sulfate intended for soil application and shall contain 19 percent combined sulfur. 2.4 PEAT MOSS A. Peat shall be a domestic product conforming to FS Q-P-166E and may be reed peat, sedge peat, moss peat, reed muck, or sedge muck. Moss shall be of horticultural grade (fine shreds). B. Sphagnum peat moss shall be good quality baled peatmoss free from injurious materials. 2.5 MULCH A. Mulching material shall be well-rotted sawdust minimum 2 years old, pine bark or tan bark, all free of sticks, stones, clay, or other foreign materials. Bark mulch shall be medium chunk size, fortified with 1 percent nitrogen. Mulch shall be free of weed seed and roots, sticks, lumps, and other foreign matter. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUM STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-7 B. "Silva-fiber" mulch material shall be "Silva-fiber" as manufactured by the Weyerhauser Company, Silva Products Department, Tacoma, Washington, or equal. 2.6 PLANT MATERIALS A. Plants shall meet requirements of the Contract Documents and shall be in accordance with the botanical names and applicable standards of quality, size, condition, and type. Plants shall be true to name, genera, species, and variety in accordance with reference publications. B. Plant names are defined in "Standardized Plant Names" and "Bailey's Encyclopedia of Horticulture." When a name is not found in either reference, the accepted name used in the nursery trade shall apply. C. Plants shall be marked for identification. Each bundle of plants and at least 25 percent of each species and variety of separate plants in any one shipment shall have legible labels securely attached before delivery to the Site. D. Trees and shrubs shall be measured while their branches are in their normal position. Height and spread dimensions refer to the main body of the plant and not from branch or root tip to tip. No trees will be accepted with leaders cut or so damaged that cutting is necessary. E. All plants shall be symmetrical and shall conform to the size, age, and condition on the Plant List. Exceptions are as follows: 1. Plants larger than indicated on the plant list may be used if approved by the ENGINEER, but approval of such plants shall not increase the Contract Price. If the use of larger plants is approved, the spread of roots or ball earth shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. Bare root plants furnished in size greater than indicated shall be balled and burlapped when required by the ENGINEER. 2. Where caliper or other dimensions of any plant materials are omitted from the Plant List, it shall be understood that such plant materials shall be normal stock for type listed. F. Plants shall be of sound health, vigorous, and free from plant disease and shall be well- branched, shall have full foliage when in leaf, and shall have a healthy well-developed normal root system. Cold storage plants will not be accepted. Plants that are sensitive to shock from elevation change shall be grown for at least 2 years at elevations close enough to the Site to alleviate any plant damage due to such change. G. Bare rooted (BR) plants shall have well-developed branch systems and vigorous root systems. They shall be dug to sufficient depth to insure full recovery and development of the plants. Roots of these plants shall be covered with a uniformly thick coating of mud puddled immediately after they are dug. H. Balled and burlapped (BB) plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of diameter not less than that indicated and be of sufficient depth to include all the fibrous and feeding roots. No plant moved with a ball will be accepted if the ball is cracked or broken before or during plant operations, except on approval of the ENGINEER. I. Roots or balls of all plants shall be adequately protected at all times from sun and drying winds. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING `OO' CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-8 J. Plants indicated to be in marked cans, pots, or other containers on the Plant List shall have been grown in the containers for a minimum of 6 months and a maximum of 2 years. Roots shall fill the containers but show no evidence of being or having been root bound. K. Trees shall have straight trunks and all old abrasions and cuts shall be completely callused over. In no case shall trees be topped before delivery. L. Plants shall hay.1 been transplanted or root-pruned at least once in the 2 years prior to delivery, but plants shall not be pruned immediately prior to delivery except as authorized by the ENGINEER. 2.7 SEED MIXTURES A. Seed shall conform with applicable City, County, State, and Federal regulations. Seed shall be mixed by dealer. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish dealer's guaranteed germination figure for each variety. Grass seed shall not be delivered until samples have been approved in writing by the ENGINEER or its authorized landscape representative. Approval of samples, however, shall not affect the right of the ENGINEER or the authorized landscape representative to reject seed upon or after delivery. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged prior to use will not be accepted. B. Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, new-crop seed, suitable to the climate in which it is to be placed and able to thrive without artificial, sprinkler-type irrigation. The varieties mixed and the proportions by weight shall be selected by dealer based on the foregoing requirements. The purity and germination percentages for the selected grass type shall be both at least 90 percent. Purity and germination percentage shall be the results of testing. 2.8 STAKING MATERIALS A. Stakes for supporting trees shall be sound No. 2 redwood of uniform size not less than 2-inch by 2-inch or 2-1/2 inch min diameter wood posts of lengths on the staking details. All knots shall be solid. B. Hose for covering wire shall be new or used black or green 2 ply fiber-bearing garden hose, not less than 1/2-inch inside diameter. C. Wire for tree bracing and guying shall be double strand pliable No. 10 gauge galvanized steel wire or vinyf-coated steel wire. D. Tree ties of other materials may be used with prior approval of ENGINEER. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Gravel in the area immediately east of the pump house shall be 1-1/2-inch to 2-inch clean, washed gravel. Setting bed shall be 4 inches below grade with filter fabric under the gravel. B. Mowing strips s I I be made of 3,000 psi fiber reinforced concrete. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-9 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The landscape work shall not be performed at any time when it may be subject to damage by climatic conditions. N%501 B. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully scale or otherwise verify all dimensions in the Contract Documents. Dimensions and plant locations shall be coordinated with ENGINEER and final location shall be Site-oriented by the planter and ENGINEER. Any discrepancies or inconsistencies shall be brought to the attention of the ENGINEER. C. In case of conflict between the Plant List totals and total plant count of the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the higher number of plants. D. Delivery of materials may begin only after samples and tests have been approved by the ENGINEER. Materials provided shall be not less quality than the approved sample. E. Substitutions for the indicated plant materials may be considered pursuant to the Contract Documents. F. The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary fencing, barricades, covering, or other protections to preserve existing landscaping items indicated to remain and to protect the adjacent properties and other structures when they may be damaged by the landscape work. G. The CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of a tree surgeon approved by the ENGINEER to repair damage to existing trees. Existing trees which are to be saved and which cannot be restored to full growth, as determined by tree surgeon, shall be removed and replaced with a new similar tree of 24-inch box size unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. H. The CONTRACTOR shall remove and/or relocate landscape items such as trees, shrubs, N%Wwl grass, other vegetation, improvements, and obstructions as indicated. I. Waste materials shall be removed and disposed of off the Site, unless otherwise indicated. J. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain information regarding utilities in the area of work and to prevent damage to the same. The CONTRACTOR shall protect the utilities as necessary. K. Burning of combustible materials on the Site shall not be permitted. L. The CONTRACTOR shall protect structures, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities which are subject to damage during landscape work. Open excavations shall be provided with barricades and warning lights which conform to the requirements of governing authorities and the State's OSHA safety requirements from dusk to dawn each day and when needed for safety. M. Planting areas include all areas to be landscaped unless indicated otherwise. 3.2 SOIL PREPARATION A. The landscape work shall not begin until all other trades have repaired all areas of settlement, erosion, rutting, etc., and the soils have been re-established, recompacted, and refinished to finish grades. The ENGINEER shall be notified of all areas which prevent the landscape work from being executed. MWH-05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-10 B. Areas requiring grading by the landscaper including adjacent transition areas shall be uniformly level or sloping between finish elevations to within 0.10-ft above or below required finish elevations. C. The landscape work shall not proceed until after walks, curbs, pavings, edging, and irrigation systems are in place. WORK under the Contract shall be completed to a point where the landscape areas will not be disturbed. The subgrade shall be free of waste materials of all kinds. D. During grading, aste materials in the planting areas such as weeds, rocks 2 inches and larger, building rdaterials, rubble, wires, cans, glass, lumber, sticks, etc., shall be removed from the Site. Weeds shall be dug out by the roots. E. Fertilizers, additives, seed, peat, etc. subject to moisture damage shall be kept dry in a weatherproof stoTge place. F. After removal of waste materials, the planting area subgrade shall be scarified and pulverized to a depth of not less than 6 inches, and all surface irregularities below_ the cover of topsoil shall be removed. G. Finish grading shrill consist of: 1. Final contouring of the planting areas. 2. Placing 4 inches of topsoil over all areas to be planted unless indicated otherwise. 3. Placing all soil additives and fertilizers. 4. Tilling of planting areas. 5. After tilling, bringing areas to uniform grades by floating and/or hand raking. 6. Making minor adjustment of finish grades as directed by the ENGINEER. 7. Removing waste materials such as stones, roots, or other undesirable foreign material and raking, disking, dragging, and smoothing soil ready for planting. H. Any unusual subsoil condition that will require special treatment shall be reported to the ENGINEER. I. Topsoil shall be uniformly distributed over all areas where required. Subgrade and topsoil shall be damp and free from frost. J. Surface drainage shall be provided as indicated by shaping the surfaces to facilitate the natural run-off of ater. Low spots and pockets shall be filled with topsoil and graded to drain properly. K. Finish grade of all planting areas shall be 1-1/2 inches below finish grade of adjacent pavement of any Nnd. L. In all shrub planting areas, 1-1/2 inches of peat moss or soil-aid shall be raked into the top 3-inches of soil. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-11 3.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF PLANT MATERIALS A. No plants other than the required samples shall be dug or delivered to the Site until the required inspections have been made and the plant samples are approved. B. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery except upon approval by the ENGINEER. N%fts", C. Plant material shall be planted on the day of delivery if possible. The CONTRACTOR shall protect the stock in a temporary nursery at the Site where it shall be protected from sun and drying winds and shall be shaded, kept moist, and protected with damp soil, moss, or other acceptable material. Plants shall be planted within 2 days after delivery. D. All balled and burlapped plants which cannot be planted immediately after delivery shall be set on the ground and be well protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable material. Bare rooted plants, which cannot be planted immediately, shall be planted in heeled-in trenches immediately upon delivery. No material heeled-in for more than one week may be used. Bundles of plants shall be opened and the plants separated before the roots are covered. Care shall be taken to prevent air pockets among the roots. E. During planting operations, bare roots shall be covered with canvas, wet straw, or other suitable materials. No plants shall be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. F. Plants shall not be picked up or moved by stem or branches, but shall be lifted and handled from the sides of the containers. G. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball or container. Plants with balls cracked or broken before or during planting operations will not be accepted and shall be immediately removed from the Site. 3.4 TREE AND PLANT LOCATIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall locate and stake all tree and shrub locations and have the locations approved by the ENGINEER before starting excavation for same. The plant locations shall be observed, and their locations shall be adjusted as directed by ENGINEER before final approval. B. No trees shall be located closer than 72 inches to structures unless otherwise indicated. Ground covers and shrubs may be planted up to structures or curbs. 3.5 PLANT PITS A. Plant pits, centered on location stakes, shall be excavated circular pits with vertical sides and flat or saucer shape bottom in accordance with the following sizes unless indicated otherwise: 1. Tree pits shall be at least 2 feet greater in diameter than the specific diameter of ball or spread of roots, and at least 6 inches below depth of ball or roots. A 3-inch layer of manure shall be worked thoroughly to a depth of 6 inches below the pit bottom. 2. Shrubs shall be planted in pits or holes of soil 24 inches deep below finished grade, or as much deeper as necessary to properly set the plant at finished grade with a minimum of 6 inches of planting soil under balls of all plants. Shrubs with balls shall be planted in pits that are at least 24 inches greater in diameter than the bottom of MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-12 ball. Bare root shrubs shall be planted in pits at least 12 inches below the roots of the plant. 3.6 PREPARED BACKFILL A. Tree and shrub pit backfilling soil shall consist of 4 parts topsoil, and 1 part peat or soil-aid by volume. Commercial fertilizer shall be sparingly mixed with the prepared topsoil, using 5 Ib/cu yd or as required by manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Planting pit, bin, Ind trench filling and bedding soil shall consist of 4 parts by volume topsoil mixed with 1 part Ii anure and 5 lb of commercial fertilizer per cubic yard. C. Materials shall be thoroughly rotary-mixed on the Site before placement. Mixing of materials in pits, bins,trenc�es or beds will not be permitted. D. Tree and shrub pits shall be provided with fertilizer tablets as follows: 1 per one-gallon can plant 3 per 5-gallon can plant 5 per 15-gallon can plant 3.7 ROCKS OR UNDERGROUND OBSTRUCTIONS A. In the event that rock or underground obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternative locations will be selected by the ENGINEER. Moving of trees to alternative locations shall not entail additional costs to the OWNER. 3.8 SETTING PLANT MATERIALS A. The soil shall t be worked when the moisture content is so great that excessive compaction willcur, nor when it is so dry that a dust will form in the air or that clods will not break readily. WE ter shall be applied if necessary to provide ideal moisture for filling and for planting. B. Plants shall be spt plumb and straight in center of pits, and at such a level that after settlement that the crown of the plant will be 2 inches above the finished grade. C.. Balled and burlapped trees shall have planting soil placed and compacted around base of ball to fill all voids. All burlap ropes or wires shall be removed from the sides and tops of balls. D. Roots of bare root plants shall be properly spread out and planting soil carefully worked in among them. All broken or frayed roots shall be cut off clean. E. Vines shall be removed from stakes, untied, and securely fastened in an approved manner to wall or fence next to which they are planted. F. Ground cover plaints shall be evenly spaced, staggered in rows, and set at intervals indicated, so as to produce a uniform effect. Plants shall be watered immediately after planting operations have been completed. G. Shrubs and vines shall be pruned to remove damaged branches. All bare root shrubs shall be pruned and shaped to compensate for transplant root loss. MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-13 H. Planting soil around roots or balls shall be thoroughly compacted and watered. After planting, the soil in the shrub beds shall be cultivated between shrubs, raked smooth, and neatly outlined. Muddy soil shall not be used for backfilling. All broken or frayed roots shall be properly cut off. I. Trees shall be thoroughly watered immediately after planting. J. Remove all tags and labels when directed by ENGINEER. K. Trees shall have trunks wrapped in acceptable tree wrap material from base up to and above at least the second scaffold branch. 3.9 STAKING A. Staking of trees shall be done immediately after planting. Plants shall stand plumb after staking. Staking shall be as indicated. B. No balled and burlapped specimen "tree-like" shrubs shall be staked. C. Trees of 2-inch caliper and larger shall be guyed at points of branching with 3 wires spaced equally around and outside the perimeter of the ball. Guy wires shall be covered with rubber hose at the bark, protected by approved material at points of contact. Each guy shall be positioned below crotches and fastened to a 4-inch diameter by 18-inch wood deadman, 12 inches below grade. One turnbuckle shall be provided for each guy. D. Trees less than 2-inch caliper shall be supported by 2 stakes placed diametrically opposite at perimeter line of ball and to sufficient depth to hold tree rigid. Stakes shall be driven vertically and not twisted or pulled. Trees shall be wired to each stake as indicated on staking details. Trees shall be protected with rubber hose over wires at points of contact. Evergreen trees shall be guyed. 3.10 PRUNING AND MULCHING A. Each tree and shrub shall be pruned in accordance with standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant in the manner fitting its use in the landscape design, as approved by the ENGINEER. B. All dead wood or suckers and all broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed by thinning out and shortening branches. Deciduous bare-rooted plants shall have not less than 1/3 of their respective leaf surfaces removed. All cuts shall be made just above a healthy bud. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools. C. Cuts over 3/4-inch diameter shall be painted with an approved tree paint. Paint shall cover all exposed cambium as well as other living tissue. Paint shall be waterproof, adhesive, and elastic antiseptic; shall be free from kerosenes, coal tar, creosote, or other materials injurious to the life of the tree; and shall be approved before it is used. D. Plants shall be mulched after planting and cultivating have been completed. A layer of mulch materials shall be spread on finished landscaping grade within all planting areas to a depth of 2 inches. The mulch around isolated plants shall be 6 inches greater in diameter than the planting hole. All shrub and ground cover beds shall be completely covered with the mulch. E. All deciduous tree trunks shall be thoroughly sprayed with a methoxychlor or similar insecticide, and wrapped immediately after planting, with wrapping material overlapping 1- MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING *."M/ CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-14 1/2 inches, wound from ground line to the second branch, and securely taped in at least 5 places, including the top, middle, and bottom. 3.11 HYDRO-SEEDING (or"HYDRO-MULCH") A. One-step hydro-seeding may be utilized between May 1 and September 15. This method consists of prepating the seed bed; combining seed mixture at the rate of 6 lb per 1000 sq ft for LAWN MIX; fertilizer at the rate of 15 lb per 1000 sq ft; "Silva-fiber" or equal at the rate of 1400 lb per acre of area and water in tanks; agitating these compounds into a well-mixed slurry suspension; and spraying the mixture under pressure onto the prepared areas to be seeded. B. Two-step hydro-seeding may be utilized between March 1 and September 15. This method consists of preparing the seed bed; sowing seed mixture at the rate of 6 lb per 1000 sq ft for LAWN MIX in 2 directions with an approved mechanical seeder; incorporating fertilizers; and spraying under pressure a mixture of water and "Silva-fiber" or equal at the rate of 1400 lb per acre onto prepared, seeded, and fertilized areas. Fertilizer can be applied with the water and "Silva-fiber" or equal mixture if desired. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. After all steel edging, plants, and sprinkler emitters are in place, and the existing sod in all wood mulch, cobble, and gravel areas has been removed to a depth of 4 inches, place filter fabric over the entire area to receive wood mulch, cobble, or gravel. B. Wood chip mulch shall be placed in all shrub areas where indicated, spread carefully and evenly to a minimum depth of 4 inches over planted areas. C. Gravel shall be placed in the planting areas as indicated, spread carefully and evenly to a minimum depth of 4 inches over the entire area. END OF SECTION- MWH -05/18/07 LANDSCAPING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 02900-15 SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 — GENERAL _ 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish concrete formwork, bracing, shoring, and supports for cast-in-place concrete and shall design and construct falsework in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance with requirements for the following: 1. Form ties anld related accessories, including taper tie plugs, if taper ties are used. 2. Form gaskets. 3. Form release agent, including NSF certification if not using mineral oil. 4. List of form materials and locations for use. 5. Form Liners C. Shop Drawings: Detailed plans for the fabrication and erection of falsework to be used. Such plans shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the general layout, sizes of members, anticipated stresses, grade of materials to be used in the falsework, means of protecting existing construction which supports falsework, and typical soil conditions. Include a list of form materials and locations for use. D. Falsework Calculations and Drawings: The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the provisions of Section 1717 of the Division of Industrial Safety, Construction Safety Orders, as revised November 1973, which requires that all falsework or vertical shoring installations where the height of the falsework or vertical shoring, as measured from the top of the sills to the soffit of the superstructure, exceeds 14 feet, or where individual horizontal span lengths exceed 16 feet, or provision for vehicular or railroad traffic through falsework or vertical shoring is made, shall be approved and signed by a civil engineer, registered in the State of Texas; provided further, that a copy of the falsework plan or shoring layout shall be available on the job site at all times. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances: The variation from required lines or grade shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative, and there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface. All other tolerances shall be within the tolerances of ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials MWH-09/16/03 CONCRETE FORMWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03100-1 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the ENGINEER, lumber brought on the Site for use as forms, shoring, or bracing shall be new material. Forms shall be smooth %Noe surface forms and shall be of the following materials: Walls - Steel, fiberglass, or plywood panel Columns - Steel, plywood or fiberglass Roof and floor - Plywood All other work - Steel panels, fiberglass, plywood or tongue and groove lumber B. Form materials which may remain or leave residues on or in the concrete shall be certified as compliant with NSF Standard 61 — Drinking Water System Components. 2.2 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS A. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork, shall conform to the requirements of PS 1 —Construction and Industrial Plywood, for Concrete Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed. 2. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other material that will not adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line, and grade indicated. Metal forms shall accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade. B. Unless otherwise indicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with 3/4-inch chamfers or be tooled to 1/2-inch radius. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless otherwise indicated. C. Forms and falsework to support the roof and floor slabs shall be designed for the total dead load, plus a live load of 50 psf minimum. The minimum design load for combined dead and live loads shall be 100 psf. D. Forms for textured finished concrete shall have solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners. 1. Form liners shall be by Greenstreak Inc.; by Dayton/Richmond; by Symons Corp.; or equal. MWH-09/16/03 CONCRETE FORMWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03100-2 2.3 FORM TIES A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to insure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of other removable ...f form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches; and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have integral waterstops that tightly fit the form tie so that they cannot be moved from mid-point of the tie. Form ties shall be Wrench Head Snap Tie by MeadowBurke; Snap-Ties by Dayton/Richmond; or equal. B. Removable taper ties may be used when approved by the ENGINEER. A preformed neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug sized to seat at the center of the wall shall be inserted in the hole left by the removal of the taper tie. Use Taper-Tie by MeadowBurke;Taper-Tie by Dayton/Richmond; or equal. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Forms to confine the concrete and shape it to the required lines shall be used wherever necessary. The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for the adequate design of all forms, and any forms which are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be removed from the WORK and replaced. Provide worker protection from protruding reinforcement bars in accordance with applicable safety codes. A sufficient number of forms of each kind shall be available to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design and inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicable local, state, and Federal regulations. Plumb and string lines shall be installed before concrete placement and shall be maintained during placement. Such lines shall be used by CONTRACTOR's personnel and by the ENGINEER and shall be in sufficient number and properly installed. During concrete placement, the CONTRACTOR shall continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies. B. Concrete forms shall conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions of members required, and shall be substantial, free from surface defects, and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain their position and shape under a load of freshly-placed concrete. If adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, trussed supports shall be provided. 3.2 FORM DESIGN A. Forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the established alignment and grade, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. Suitable and effective means shall be provided on all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Plywood, 5/8-inch and greater in thickness, may be fastened directly to studding if the studs are spaced close enough to prevent visible deflection marks in the concrete. The forms shall be tight so as to prevent the loss of water, cement, and fines during placing and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically, the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to MWH-09/16/03 CONCRETE FORMWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03100-3 prevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1- to 1-1/2-inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form. Adequate clean-out holes shall be provided at the bottom of each lift of forms. The size, number, and location of such clean-outs shall be as acceptable to the ENGINEER. Whenever concrete cannot be placed from the top of a wall form in a manner that meets the requirements of the Contract Documents, form windows shall be provided in the size and spacing needed to allow placement of concrete to the requirements of Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. The size, number, and location of such form windows shall be as acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Vertical Surfaces: All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where placement of the concrete against the ground is indicated. Not less than 1-inch of concrete shall be added to the indicated thickness of a concrete member where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Permission to do this on other concrete members will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has . been placed. B. Construction Joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other than those indicated, except as may be acceptable to the ENGINEER. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. Pipe stubs and anchor bolts shall be set in the forms where required. C. Form Ties 1. Embedded Ties: Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with `••� suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled with mortar. Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. No form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete members. The use.of snap-ties which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through the concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain embedded and shall terminate not less than 1-inch back from the formed face or faces of the concrete. 2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, the larger end of the taper tie shall be on the wet side of walls in water retaining structures. After the taper tie is removed, the hole shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened for bond. A precast neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug shall be located at the wall centerline. The hole shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout for water bearing and below-grade walls. The hole shall be completely filled with non-shrink or regular cement grout for above-grade walls which are dry on both sides. Exposed faces of walls shall have the outer 2 inches of the exposed face filled with a cement grout which shall match the color and texture of the surrounding wall surface. MWH-09/16/03 CONCRETE FORMWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03100-4 3.4 REUSE OF FORMS A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the ENGINEER. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture on all exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are `"'' defined as surfaces which are permanently exposed to view. In the case of forms for the inside wall surfaces of hydraulic/water retaining structures, unused tie rod holes in forms shall be covered with metal caps or shall be filled by other methods acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and this WORK shall be done with care so as to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. In the case of roof slabs and above-ground floor slabs, forms shall remain in place until test cylinders for the roof concrete attain a minimum compressive strength of 75 percent of the 28-day strength in Section 03300. No forms shall be disturbed or removed under an individual panel or unit before the concrete in the adjacent panel or unit has attained 75 percent of the 28-day strength and has been in place for a minimum of 7 days. The time required to establish said strength shall be as determined by the ENGINEER who will make several test cylinders for this purpose from concrete used in the first group of roof panels placed. If the time so determined is more than the 7-day minimum, then that time shall be used as the minimum length of time. Forms for vertical walls of waterholding structures shall remain in place at least 36 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms for parts of the WORK not specifically mentioned herein shall remain in place for periods of time as recommended in ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 3.6 MAINTENANCE OF FORMS ..i A. Forms shall be maintained at all times in good condition, particularly as to size, shape, strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. Before concrete is placed, the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned. The form surfaces shall be treated with a nonstaining mineral oil or other lubricant acceptable to the ENGINEER. Any excess lubricant shall be satisfactorily removed before placing the concrete. Where field oiling of forms is required, the CONTRACTOR shall perform the oiling at least two weeks in advance of their use. Care shall be exercised to keep oil off the surfaces of steel reinforcement and other metal items to be embedded in concrete. 3.7 FALSEWORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the design, engineering, construction, maintenance, and safety of all falsework, including staging, walkways, forms, ladders, and similar appurtenances, which shall equal or exceed the applicable requirements of the provisions of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction, [the requirements of the Construction Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial Safety,] and the requirements herein. B. Falsework shall be designed and constructed to provide the necessary rigidity and to support the loads. Falsework for the support of a superstructure shall be designed to support the loads that would be imposed if the entire superstructure were placed at one time. MWH-09/16/03 CONCRETE FORMWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03100-5 C. Fassework shall be placed upon a solid footing, safe against undermining, and protected from softening. When the falsework is supported on timber piles, the maximum calculated pile loading shall not exceed 20 tons. When falsework is supported on any portion of the structure which is already constructed, the load imposed by the falsework shall be spread, distributed, and braced in such a way as to avoid any possibility of damage to the structure. .� - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 CONCRETE FORMWORK CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03100-6 SECTION 03200 - REINFORCEMENT STEEL PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide reinforcement steel and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop bending diagrams, placing lists, and drawings of all reinforcement steel prior to fabrication. The shop bending diagrams shall show the actual lengths of bars, to the nearest inch measured to the intersection of the extensions (tangents for bars of circular cross section) of the outside surface. Include bar placement diagrams which clearly indicate the dimensions of each bar splice. 2. Details of the concrete reinforcement steel and concrete inserts shall be submitted at the earliest possible date after receipt by the CONTRACTOR of the Notice to Proceed. Said details of reinforcement steel for fabrication and erection shall conform to ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement, and the requirements herein. 3. Where mechanical couplers are required or permitted to be used to splice reinforcement steel, the CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer's literature which contains instructions and recommendations for installation for each type of coupler used; certified test reports which verify the load capacity of each type and size of coupler used; and Shop Drawings which show the location of each coupler with details of hoer they are to be installed in the formwork. 4. If reinforcement steel is spliced by welding at any location, the CONTRACTOR shall submit mill test reports which shall contain the information necessary for the determination of the carbon equivalent per AWS D1.4 - Structural Steel Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a written welding procedure for each type of weld for each size of bar which is to be spliced by welding; merely a statement that AWS procedures will be followed is not acceptable. 5. If reinforcement steel is spliced by welding at any location, the CONTRACTOR shall submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure and certification of welder qualifications, for each welding procedure, and for each welder performing the work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. If requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples from each heat of reinforcement steel in a quantity adequate for testing. Costs of initial tests will be MWH-09/16/03 ',:7REINFORCEMENT STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH LsV�:�+ey uSvs MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03200-1 paid by the OWNER. Costs of additional tests if material fails initial tests shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. B. Welder qualifications and procedure qualifications shall be as specified in AWS D1.4. C. If requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples of each type of welded splice in a quantity and of dimensions adequate for testing. At the discretion of the ENGINEER, radiographic testing of direct butt welded splices will be performed. The CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance necessary to facilitate testing. The CONTRACTOR shall repair any weld which fails to meet the requirements of AWS D1.4. The costs of testing will be paid by the OWNER, but the costs of tests which fail to meet requirements shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Materials which may remain or leave residues on or within the concrete shall be certified as compliant with NSF Standard-61- Drinking Water System Components. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT STEEL A. Reinforcement steel for cast-in-place reinforced concrete construction shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet- Steel Bars, for Grade 60 reinforcement unless otherwise indicated. 2. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement, and the details indicated. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W4 size wire and smaller shall be in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wires larger than W4 size shall be in flat sheets only. 3. Spiral reinforcement shall be cold-drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 82 - Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. B. Accessories 1. Accessories shall include all necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires, dips, supports, spacers, and other devices to position reinforcement during concrete placement. Bar supports shall meet the requirements of the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice including special requirements for supporting epoxy coated reinforcing bars. Wire bar supports shall be CRSI Class 1 for maximum protection with a 1/8-inch minimum thickness of plastic coating which extends at least 1/2-inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color. 2. Concrete blocks (dobies) used to support and position reinforcement steel shall have the same or higher compressive strength as required for the concrete in which they are located. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports. MWH-09/16/03 REINFORCEMENT STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03200-2 C. Epoxy coating for reinforcing and accessories, where indicated, shall conform to ASTM A 775 - Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. 2.3 MECHANICAL COUPLERS T A. Mechanical cou ers shall be provided where indicated and where approved by the ENGINEER. Th couplers shall develop a tensile strength which exceeds 125 percent of the yield stren th of the reinforcement bars being spliced at each splice. B. Where the type of coupler used is composed of more than one component, all components req fired for a complete splice shall be provided. This shall apply to all mechanical splices, including those splices intended for future connections. C. The reinforcement steel and coupler used shall be compatible for obtaining the required strength of the connection. Straight threaded type couplers shall require the use of the next larger size reinforcing bar or shall be used with reinforcing bars with specially forged ends which provide upset threads which do not decrease the basic cross section of the bar. D. Couplers shall be Lenton Form Saver by Erico Products; Dowel Bar Splicer System by Dayton/Richmond; or equal. 2.4 WELDED SPLICES A. Welded splices shall be provided where indicated and where approved by the ENGINEER. All welded splices of reinforcement steel shall develop a tensile strength which exceeds 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcement bars which are connected. B. Materials required to conform the welded splices to the requirements of AWS D1.4 shall be provided. 2.5 EPDXY GROUT A. Epoxy for grouting reinforcing bars shall be specifically formulated for such application, for the moisture condition, application temperature, and orientation of the hole to be filled. Epoxy grout shall meet the requirements in Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Reinforcement steel, welded wire fabric, couplers, and other appurtenances shall be fabricated, and placed in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and the supplementary requirements herein. 3.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes indicated, and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 T MWH-09/16/03 REINFORCEMENT STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03200-3 and ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, except as modified by the Drawings. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars shall be bent per ACI 318. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall fabricate reinforcement bars for structures in accordance with bending diagrams, placing lists, and placing drawings. B. Fabricating Tolerances: Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall satisfy the following fabricating tolerances: 1. Sheared length: plus and minus 1 inch 2. Depth of truss bars: plus 0, minus 1/2 inch 3. Stirrups, ties, and spirals: plus and minus 1/2 inch 4. All other bends: plus and minus 1 inch 3.3 PLACING A. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately positioned as indicated, and shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement, using annealed iron wire ties or suitable clips at intersections. Reinforcement steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic or metal supports, spacers or metal hangers which are strong and rigid enough to prevent any displacement of the reinforcement steel. Where concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used in sufficient numbers to support the bars without settlement, but in no case shall such support be continuous. Concrete blocks used to support reinforcement steel shall be tied to the steel with wire ties which are embedded in the blocks. For concrete over formwork, the CONTRACTOR shall provide concrete, metal, plastic, or other acceptable bar chairs and spacers. B. Limitations on the use of bar support materials shall be as follows. 1. Concrete Dobies: permitted at all locations except where architectural finish is required. 2. Wire Bar Supports: permitted only at slabs over dry areas, interior dry wall surfaces, and exterior wall surfaces. 3. Plastic Bar Supports: permitted at all locations except on grade. C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the required concrete coverage. D. Bars additional to those indicated which may be found necessary or desirable by the CONTRACTOR for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at its own expense. E. Unless otherwise indicated, reinforcement placing tolerances shall be within the limits in Section 7.5 of ACI 318 except where in conflict with the requirements of the Building Code. F. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcement steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, or enough MWH-09/16/03 REINFORCEMENT STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03200-4 to exceed the above tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be as reviewed and accepted by the ENGINEER. G. Welded wire fabric reinforcement placed over horizontal forms shall be supported on slab bolsters. Slab bolsters shall be spaced not more than 30 inches on centers, shall extend continuously across the entire width of the reinforcement mat, and shall support the reinforcement mat in the plane indicated. H. Welded wire fabric placed over the ground shall be supported on wired concrete blocks (dobies) spaced not more than 3 feet on centers in any direction. The construction practice of placing welded wire fabric on the ground and hooking into place in the freshly placed concrete shall not be used. I. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars shall be stored, transported, and placed in such a manner as to avoid chipping of the epoxy coating. Non-abrasive slings made of nylon and similar materials shall be used. Specially coated bar supports shall be used. Chips or cracks in the epoxy coating shall be repaired with a compatible epoxy repair material prior to placing concrete. J. Accessories supporting reinforcing bars shall be spaced such that there is no deflection of the accessory from the weight of the supported bars. When used to space the reinforcing bars from wall forms, the forms and bars shall be located so that there is no deflection of the accessory when the forms are tightened into position. 3.4 SPACING OF BARS A. The clear distance between parallel bars (except in columns and between multiple layers of bars in beams) shall be not less than the nominal diameter of the bars nor less than 1- 1/3 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, nor less than one inch. B. Where reinforcement in beams or girders is placed in 2 or more layers, the clear distance between layers shall be not less than one inch. C. In columns, the clear distance between longitudinal bars shall be not less than 1-1/2 times the bar diameter, nor less than 1-1/2 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, nor less than 1-1/2 inches. D. The clear distance between bars shall also apply to the distance between a contact splice and adjacent splices or bars. 3.5 SPLICING A. General 1. Reinforcement bar splices shall only be used at locations indicated. When it is necessary to splice reinforcement at points other than where indicated, the character of the splice shall be as reviewed and accepted by the ENGINEER. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, dowels shall match the size and spacing of the spliced bar. B. Splices of Reinforcement MWH-09/16/03 REINFORCEMENT STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03200-5 1. The length of lap for reinforcement bars, unless otherwise indicated, shall be in accordance with ACI 318, Section 12.15.1 for a Class B splice. 2. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall be securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running feet. Wires shall be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip. 3. Splices in column spiral reinforcement, when necessary, shall be made by welding or by a lap of 1-1/2 turns. C. Bending or Straightening: Reinforcement shall not be straightened or rebent in a manner which will injure the material. Bars shall be bent or straight as indicated. Do not use bends different from the bends indicated. Bars shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the ENGINEER. No bars partially embedded in concrete shall be field-bent except as indicated or specifically permitted by the ENGINEER. D. Couplers which are located at a joint face shall be a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as indicated. The couplers shall be sealed during concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. Couplers intended for future connections shall be recessed a minimum of 1/2 inch from the concrete surface. After the concrete is placed, the coupler shall be plugged with plastic plugs which have an O-ring seal and the recess filled with sealant to prevent any contact with water or other corrosive materials. Threaded couplers shall be plugged . E. Unless indicated otherwise, mechanical coupler spacing and capacity shall match the spacing and capacity of the reinforcing indicated for the adjacent section. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Reinforcement steel shall at all times be protected from conditions conducive to corrosion until concrete is placed around it. B. The surfaces of reinforcement steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where there is delay in depositing concrete, reinforcement shall be reinspected and, if necessary, recleaned. 3.7 EMBEDMENT OF DRILLED REINFORCING STEEL DOWELS A. Hole Preparation 1. The hole diameter shall be as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer but shall be no larger than 0.25 inch greater than the diameter of the outer surface of the reinforcing bar deformations. 2. The depth of the hole shall be as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer to fully develop the bar but shall not be less than 12 bar diameters, unless indicated otherwise. 3. The hole shall be drilled by methods which do not interfere with the proper bonding of epoxy. MWH-09/16/03 REINFORCEMENT STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03200-6 4. Existing reinforcing steel in the vicinity of proposed holes shall be located prior to drilling. The location of holes shall be adjusted to avoid drilling through or nicking any existing reinforcing bars. 5. The hole sh? be blown clean with clean, dry compressed air to remove all dust and �- loose particles. B. Embedment 1. Epoxy shalle injected into the hole through a tube placed to the bottom of the hole. The tube shall be withdrawn as epoxy is placed but kept immersed to prevent formation of air pockets. The hole shall be filled to a depth that insures that excess material will be expelled from the hole during dowel placement. 2. Dowels shall be twisted during insertion into the partially filled hole so as to guarantee full wetting of the bar surface with epoxy. The bar shall be inserted slowly enough to avoid developing air pockets. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 REINFORCEMENT STEEL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03200-7 SECTION 03250-CONCRETE ACCESSORIES •..i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included in this Section covers furnishing and installing contraction joint filler, isolation joint filler, compression joint seals, anchors, water stops, anchor plates, inserts, and fastening devices for attaching other work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100 Concrete Formwork B. Section 03250 Concrete Accessories C. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. 3 REFERENCES A. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 1. T237 Standard Method for Testing Epoxy Resin Adhesive B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 1. A36 Structural Steel 2. A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength 3. A325 High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints 4. A510 General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel 5. A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 6. A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 7. D412 Standard Test Method for Rubber Properties in Tension 8. D572 Standard Test Method for Rubber - Deterioration by Heat and Oxygen 9. D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics 10. D648 Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load �..i MWH-0916/03 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03250-01 11. D994 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) 12. D1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) 13. D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 14. D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness 15. D2628 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavement C. COE: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers 1. C572 Polyvinyl Chloride 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals and Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Miscellaneous Submittals. B. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all proprietary products including contraction joint filler, isolation joints, anchors, inserts, and water stops shall be submitted. C. Two samples of each joint filler, anchor, insert, concrete chair, and water stop proposed for use on this project shall be submitted. 1. 5 QUALITY CONTROL A. A quality control program shall be established and maintained sufficient to furnish evidence of quality of materials, equipment, and workmanship. B. A compression joint seal warranty covering compression joint seal materials, including stainless steel angles; installation, and water tightness shall be provided jointly by the seal manufacturer and installer for a period of 5 years from the effective date of final acceptance of the work. C. The compression seal assembly, including stainless steel angles, shall be installed under the direct supervision of the seal manufacturer's authorized and qualified representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. 1 ISOLATION JOINT FILLER- PREFORMED TYPE A. Preformed type isolation joint fillers shall conform to ASTM D1751 unless otherwise indicated. MWH-0916/03 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03250-02 1. Self Sealing Filler: ASTM D994. 2. Sponge Rubber Filler: ASTM D1752, Type I, gray. 3. Non Self Expanding Cork Filler: ASTM D1752, Type II. 4. Self Expanding Cork Filler: ASTM D1752, Type III. B. Non-Bituminous Joint Filler: Closed cell plastic foam strips, flexible, resilient, having low water absorption, resistant to solvents and chemicals, non staining, and effective as a back-up for cold-applied sealants. 2.2 CONTRACTION JOINT FILLER A. Contraction joint filler shall be nonflammable. B. Contraction joint filler products shall conform to the following standards and minimum values: Property Test Method Minimum Values Tensile Strength ASTM D638 850 psi Tensile Elongation ASTM D638 85 Percent ""Moe Tensile Bond Strength AASHTO T237 310 psi Heat and Deflection ASTM D648 54 Degrees F Temperature Hardness Shore D ASTM D2240 62 C. Joint filler application shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be applied when the ambient and/or surface temperature is below 40 degrees F or when surface is wet or damp. 2.3 ISOLATION JOINT SEALANT A. Sealant shall be compatible with joint filler. 2.4 BOLTS A. Bolts shall be ASTM A307 or as otherwise indicated. 2.5 CONNECTORS A. Bolt: ASTM A325, unless otherwise noted. MWH-0916/03 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03250-03 B. Dovetail Anchor Slot: 22-gauge electro-galvanized steel having removable felt or foamed neoprene filler. C. Anchor Plate: ASTM A36 having welded headed concrete anchors. D. Angle Clip: ASTM A36 plate or rolled angle. E. Expansion Anchors: 1. Expansion Anchors shall be stud type with wedge. The anchor shall conform to Federal Specification (FS) FF-5-325, Group II, Expansion Bolts, Type 4, Class I. 2. Material: Stud: ASTM A510. Nut: ASTM A563, Grade A. F. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Adhesive Anchors shall consist of all threaded Anchor rod, nut, washer and adhesive. 2. Material: Anchor Rod: ASTM A36. Adhesive: The resin shall be compatible with base metal and produce the minimum strength specified in Contract Drawings. 2.6 INSERTS A. Hanger: As indicated on Contract Drawings. B. Reglet: As indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Ceiling Insert: As indicated on Contract Drawings. D. Deformed Dowels: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2.7 WATERSTOPS A. Water stops shall be serrated type with or without center bulb complying with COE C572. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing water stops. Straight runs shall be extruded. Corner splices, except 90 degree corner and "T" splices, shall be either molded or fabricated from straight runs. 90 degree corner and "T" splices shall be either molded or factory fabricated from straight runs by manufacturer. Water stop width and length shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Natural rubber shall be composed of not less than 72 percent natural rubber and other ingredients such as carbon black reinforcement, zinc oxide filler, accelerators, anti- oxidants, and softeners. Natural rubber physical properties shall be as follows: MWH-0916/03 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03250-04 1. Tensile strength, in accordance with ASTM D412, shall be not less than 3500 psi. 2. Elongation at breaking, in accordance with ASTM D412, shall be not less than 500 percent. 3. Unit stress producing 300 percent elongation shall be not less than 1100 psi. 4. Unit stress producing 500 percent elongation shall be not less than 2800 psi. 5. Shore durometer hardness, in accordance with ASTM D2240, shall be 60, plus or minus 5. 6. Permissible loss of tensile strength and elongation shall be not more than 35 percent of original values, in accordance with ASTM D572, after 7 days in air at 158 degrees F, plus or minus 2 degrees F, or after 48 hours in oxygen at 158 degrees F, plus or minus 2 degrees F, at 300 psi pressure. C. Synthetic rubber shall be composed on not less than 72 percent natural rubber and other ingredients such as carbon black reinforcement, zinc oxide filler, accelerators, anti-oxidants, and softeners. Synthetic rubber physical properties shall be as follows: 1. Tensile strength, in accordance with ASTM D412 shall be not less than 2500 psi. 2. Elongation at breaking, in accordance with ASTM D412 shall be not less than 425 percent. 3. Permissible loss of tensile strength and elongation shall be not more than 35 percent, in accordance with ASTM D572, after 7 days in air at 158 degrees F, plus or minus 2 degrees F, or after 48 hours in oxygen at 158 degrees F, plus or minus 2 degrees F, at 300 psi pressure. D. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall conform to COE C572. 2.8 COMPRESSION JOINT SEAL A. Seal shall be preformed type having internal compartments. Seal shall be designed in a manner that shall ensure that top center cavity shall be depressed when joint is compressed. B. Seal shall be composed of extruded neoprene compounded from a low crystallizing polychloroprene base conforming to ASTM D2628. 2.9 INSERTS AND FASTENING DEVICES FOR ATTACHING OTHER WORK A. Inserts and fastening devices shall be as recommended by manufacturers of products for that other work. MWH-0916/03 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03250-05 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Nftnol A. Isolation Joint Filler: Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and in a manner that shall preclude fillers being displaced during concreting operations. B. Isolation Joint Sealant: Application shall be in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. C. Anchors: Anchors shall be secured in position before placing concrete. Equipment anchor bolts shall be positioned using template or setting diagram furnished by equipment manufacturer. D. Water Stops: Water stops shall be installed in construction, contraction, and expansion joints where indicated and in construction joints below grade. Water stops shall remain in position during concrete placement. 1. Continuous lengths without splices shall be used except at 90 degree corner and "T" splices and except in runs longer than maximum length available from water stop manufacturer. 2. Adjoining water stops, including vertical and horizontal runs, shall be connected in a manner that shall ensure a continuous water barrier. Splices shall conform to the following: a. Strength: Not less than that of parent section and in runs longer than maximum length available from water stop manufacturer. b. Location: Only at changes in direction, and in runs longer than maximum length available from water stop manufacturer. c. Water tightness: Equivalent to that of continuous material. d. PVC: Field splices shall be made by heat sealing square cut ends of water stop using hot metal plate or thermostatically controlled electric heating iron designed for such purpose. Ends shall be joined when material becomes molten, maintaining continuity of ribs and bulbs. Material shall be allowed to cool before stressing. E. Inserts and Fastening Devices for Attaching Other Work: Inserts, conduit, pipe sleeves, drains, hangers, metal ties, anchors, bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, anchor slots, metal reglets, nailing strips, and other fastening devices required for attaching other work shall be installed where indicated on Contract Drawings. Items shall be secured in position before placing concrete. If openings have been left in concrete for passage of ducts, conduits, or other facilities, clearances shall be as indicated on Contract Drawings. F. Compression Joint Seal: MWH-0916/03 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03250-06 1. Concrete surfaces shall be properly prepared to receive stainless steel angles for compression joint seals. Deficiencies shall be corrected before installing angles. 2. Stainless steel angles shall be installed in accordance with the compression joint seal manufacturer's printed instructions. 3. Compression joint components and sealant shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and under the direct supervision of seal manufacturer's representative. 4. Immediately upon completion of installation of compression joint seals, seals shall be tested for water tightness and shall be left in place until such time as other related work is installed adjacent to the compression joint. G. Anchor Plates: Installation shall be flush with concrete surface, unless otherwise noted. PART 4- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 GENERAL A. This item of work shall not be measured separately for payment but shall be considered incidental to the Contract Lump Sum Price. END OF SECTION r MWH-0916/03 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03250-07 SECTION 03290-JOINTS IN CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide joints in concrete, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Joints in concrete structures shall be the types defined below and will be permitted only where indicated,;unless specifically accepted by the ENGINEER. 1.2 TYPES OF JOINTS A. Construction Joints: When fresh concrete is placed against a hardened concrete surface, the joint between the two pours is called a construction joint. Unless otherwise indicated, joints in water bearing members shall be provided with a waterstop and/or sealant groove of the shape indicated. The surface of the first pour may also be required to receive a coating of bond breaker as indicated. B. Contraction Joints: Contraction joints are similar to construction joints except that the fresh concrete shall not bond to the hardened surface of the earlier pour, which shall be coated with a bond breaker. The slab reinforcement shall be stopped 4-1/2 inches from the joint; which is provided with a sleeve-type dowel, to allow shrinkage of the concrete of the later pour. Waterstop and/or sealant groove shall also be provided when indicated. C. Expansion Joints: To allow the concrete to expand freely, a space is provided between the two pours, and the joint shall be formed as indicated. The space is obtained by placing a filler joint material against the earlier pour, to act as a form for the later pour. Unless otherwise indicated, expansion joints in water bearing members shall be provided with a center-bulb type waterstop as indicated. 1. Premolded expansion joint material shall be installed with the'edge at the indicated distance below or back from finished concrete surface, and shall have a slightly tapered, dressed, and oiled wood strip secured to or placed at the edge thereof during concrete placement, which shall later be removed to form space for sealing material. 2. The space so formed shall be filled with a joint sealant material as indicated below. In order to keep the two wall or slab elements in line the joint shall also be provided with a sleeve-type dowel as indicated. D. Control Joints: The function of the control joint is to provide a weaker plane in the concrete, where shrinkage cracks will probably occur. A groove, of the shape and dimensions indicated, is formed or saw-cut in the concrete. This groove is afterward filled with a joint sealant material. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300- Contractor Submittals. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-1 B. Shop Drawings 1. Placement drawings showing the location and type of all joints for each structure. 2. Certified test reports from the sealant manufacturer on the actual batch of material being supplied indicating compliance with requirements shall be furnished before *%..i the sealant is used on the job. 3. Copies of Waterstop Welding Certification to be provided by manufacturer or authorized agent of manufacturer. Every person who is to be involved with waterstop installation is required to have individual Certification on file with ENGINEER, which states said individuals are certified and trained to install waterstop per manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. 4. Manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance of the following with indicated requirements: a. Bearing Pad b. Neoprene Sponge c. Preformed Joint Filler d. Backing Rod e. Bond Breaker f. Waterstop g. Slip Dowels h. PVC Tubing C. Samples 1. Prior to production of the material required under this Section,'qualification samples of waterstops shall be submitted which represent in all respects the material proposed. Such samples shall consist of extruded or molded sections of each size or shape to be used. The balance of the material to be used shall not be produced until after the ENGINEER has reviewed the qualification samples. D. Certificates: Written certification from the manufacturer as an integral part of the shipping form, to show that all of the material shipped to this project meets or exceeds the physical property requirements of the Contract Documents. Supplier certificates are not acceptable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waterstop Inspection: It is required that all waterstop field joints shall be subject to rigid inspection, and no such WORK shall be scheduled or started without having made prior arrangements with the ENGINEER for the required inspections. Not less than 24 hours notice shall be given for scheduling such inspections. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-2 B. Field joints in waterstops shall be subject to rigid inspection for misalignment, bubbles, inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets, and other defects which would reduce the potential resistance of the material to water pressure at any point. Defective joints shall be replaced with material which passes inspection; faulty material shall be removed from the Site and disposed of. C. The following waterstop defects represent a partial list of defects which shall be grounds for rejection: 1. Offsets at joints greater than 1/16-inch or 15 percent of material thickness, at any point, whichever is less. 2. Exterior crack at joint, due to incomplete bond, which is deeper than 1/1 6-inch or 15 percent of material thickness, at any point, whichever is less. 3. Any combination of offset or exterior crack which will result in a net reduction in the cross section of the waterstop in excess of 1/16-inch or 15 percent of material thickness at any point, whichever is less. 4. Misalignment of joint which results in misalignment of the waterstop in excess of 1/2-inch in 10 feet. 5. Porosity in the welded joint as evidenced by visual inspection. 6. Bubbles or inadequate bonding which can be detected with a, penknife test. (If, while prodding the entire joint with the point of a pen knife, the knife breaks through the outer potion of the weld into a bubble, the joint shall be considered defective.) 7. Visible signs of separation when the cooled splice is bent by hand at any sharp angle. 8. Any evidence of burned material. D. PVC Waterstop Samples: Prior to use of the waterstop material in the field, a sample of a prefabricated (shop made fitting) mitered cross and a tee constructed of each size or shape of material to be used shall be submitted. These samples shall be prefabricated (shop made fitting) 'so that the material and workmanship represent in all respects the fittings to be provided. Field samples of prefabricated (shop made fitting) fittings (crosses, tees, etc.) will also be selected at random by the ENGINEER for testing by a laboratory at the OWNER's expense. When tested, tensile strength across the joints shall be at least 1120 psi. E. Construction Joint Sealant: The CONTRACTOR shall prepare adhesion and cohesion test specimens as required herein, at intervals of 5 working days while sealants are being installed. F. The sealant material shall show no signs of adhesive or cohesive failure when tested in accordance with the following procedure in laboratory and field tests: 1. Sealant specimen shall be prepared between 2 concrete blocks (1-inch by 2-inch by 3-inch). Spacing between the blocks shall be 1-inch. Coated spacers (2-inch by 1- 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch) shall be used to insure sealant cross-sections of 1/2-inch by 2 inches with a width of 1-inch. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-3 2. Sealant shall be cast and cured according to manufacturer's recommendations except that curing period shall be not less than 24 hours. 3. Following curing period, the gap between blocks shall be widened to 1-1/2-inch. Spacers shall be used to maintain this gap for 24 hours prior to inspection for failure. 1.5 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a 5-year written warranty of the entire sealant installation against faulty and/or incompatible materials and workmanship, together with a statement that it agrees to repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the OWNER, any such defective areas which become evident within said 5-year guarantee period. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Joint materials shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. 2.2 WATERSTOPS A. PVC Waterstops: Waterstops shall be extruded from an elastomeric polyvinyl chloride compound containing the plasticizers, resins, stabilizers, and other materials necessary to meet the requirements of this Section. No reclaimed or scrap material shall be used. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the waterstop manufacturer and shall furnish to the ENGINEER for review, current test reports and a written certification of the manufacturer that the material to be shipped to the job meets the physical requirements as outlined in the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-0572-PVC Waterstops, and those listed herein. 1. Flatstrip and Center-Bulb Waterstops: Flatstrip and center-bulb waterstops shall be as manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic Products Co., Profiles 646, 679,732, and 735; Tamms Horn/Durajoint Types 9,10,11, and 11A ; or equal; provided, that at no place shall the thickness of flat strip waterstops, including the center bulb type, be less than 3/8-inch. Waterstop shall be provided with factory installed hog rings at 12 inches on centers along the waterstop. 2. Multi-Rib Waterstops: Multi-rib waterstops, where required, shall be as manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic Products Co., Profiles 789 and 790; Tamms Horn/Durajoint Types 25 and 26; or equal. Prefabricated (shop made fitting)joint fittings shall be used at all intersections of the ribbed-type waterstops. 3. Retrofit Waterstops: Retrofit waterstops and batten bars shall be as manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic Products Co., Style #609, or equal. Waterstop shall be supplied as a complete system including waterstop, SS batten bar, SS anchor bolts, and epoxy gel. 4. Waterstop Testing Requirements: When tested in accordance with the test standards, the waterstop material shall meet or exceed the following requirements: Physical Property, Sheet Material Value ASTM Std. Tensile Strength-min (psi) 2000 D 638, Type IV MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-4 Ultimate Elongation-min (percent) 350 D 638, Type IV Low Temp Brittleness-max(degrees F) -35 D 746 Stiffness in Flexure-min (psi) 600 D 747 Accelerated Extraction (CRD-0572) Tensile Strength-min (psi) 1500 D 638, Type IV Ultimate Elongation-min (percent) 300 D 638, Type IV Effect of Alkalies (CRD-0572) Change in Weight (percent) plus 0.25/minus 0.10 ------ Change in Durometer, Shore A plus and minus 5 D 2240 Finish Waterstop Tensile Strength-min (psi) 1400 D 638, Type IV Ultimate Elongation-min (percent) 280 D 638, Type IV B. Pre-formed Hydrophilic Waterstop: Hydrophilic (bentonite-free) waterstops shall be Hydrotite CJ10202k as manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic Products Co., or Adeka Ultraseal MC2010 as manufactured by Asahi Denka. 1. Hydrophilic waterstop shall be the type which expands in the presence of water to form a watertight joint seal without damaging the concrete in which it is cast. 2. Waterstop shall be manufactured from chloroprene rubber and modified chloroprene rubber with hydrophilic properties. Waterstop shall have a delay coating to inhibit initial expansion due to moisture present in fresh concrete. The minimum expansion ratio of modified chloroprene shall be not less than 2 to 1 volumetric change in distilled water at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). Physical Property. Chloroprene Value ASTM Std. Tensile Strength-min (psi) 1275 D 412 Ultimate Elongation-min (percent) 350 D 412 Hardness, Shore A 55 plus and D 2240 minus 5 Physical Property, Modified Chloroprene Value ASTM Std. Tensile Strength-min (psi) 300 D 412 Ultimate Elongation-min (percent) 600 D 412 Hardness, Shore A 55 plus and D 2240 minus 5 3. Bonding agent for hydrophilic waterstop shall be the manufacturer's recommended adhesive for wet, rough concrete. C. Other Types of Waterstops: When types of waterstops not listed above are indicated, they shall be subjected to the same requirements as those listed herein. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-5 2.3 JOINT SEALANT FOR WATER BEARING JOINTS A. Joint sealant shall be polyurethane polymer designed for bonding to concrete which is continuously submerged in water. No material will be acceptable which has an unsatisfactory history as to bond or durability when used in the joints of water retaining structures. **Ample B. Joint sealant material shall meet the following requirements (73 degrees F and 5percent R.H.): Work Life 45 - 180 minutes Time to Reach 20 Shore "A" Hardness (at 77 degrees F, 200 gr quantity) 24 hours, maximum Ultimate Hardness (ASTM D 2240) 20 - 45 Shore "A" Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412) 175 psi, minimum Ultimate Elongation (ASTM D 412) 400 percent, minimum Tear Resistance (Die C, ASTM D 624) 75 pounds per inch of thickness, minimum Color Light Gray C. Polyurethane sealants for waterstop joints in concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Sealant shall be 2-part polyurethane with the physical properties of the cured sealant conforming to or exceeding the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 920 — Elastomeric Joint Sealant, or Federal Specification TT-S-0227 E(3) - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Multicomponent, for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing Buildings and Other Structures, for 2-part material, as applicable. 2. For vertical joints and overhead horizontal joints, only "non-sag" compounds shall be used; all such compounds shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 920 Class 25, Grade NS, or Federal Specification TT-S-0227 E(3), Type II, Class A. 3. For plane horizontal joints, the self-leveling compounds which meet the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 920 Class 25, Grade P, or Federal Specification TT- S-0227 E(3), Type I shall be used. For joints subject to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic, a compound providing non-tracking characteristics, and having a Shore "A" hardness range of 35 to 45, shall be used. 4. Primer materials, if recommended by the sealant manufacturer, shall conform to the printed recommendations of the manufacturer. D. Sealants, indicated, shall be PSI-270 as manufactured by Polymeric Systems Inc., Sikaflex 2C, as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or equal. Sealants for non- waterstop joints in concrete shall conform to Section 07920 - Sealants and Caulking. MWH-09/16/03 JOINTS IN CONCRETE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 03290-6 SECTION 05410- INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall design, furnish, and construct complete, the building interior walls, openings, furring, ceilings where required, and other details, all in accordance with the Contract Documents. Gypsum board and finishes are not included in this Section. B. The scope of work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Calculations, drawings, and specification documents necessary for review by the ENGINEER, and by the local Building Department for obtaining all necessary permits. 2. Coordination of all items to be connected,embedded, or installed into the buildings' foundations, pre-engineered building system, mechanical, piping, HVAC, electrical systems and architectural finish items. 3. Design and detailing of connections and fasteners. 4. Framing design and detailing of interior stud walls, furring, wall openings, ceilings and soffits. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 05120 Structural Steel. C. Section 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing. D. Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metals. E. Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal. F. Section 07920 Sealants and Calking. G. Section 08330 Overhead Doors. H. Section 09250 Gypsum Board. I. Section 09800 Protective Coating. J. Section 15500 HVAC General Provision N. Division 16 Electrical. MWH-09/16/03 INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05410-1 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Codes: All codes as referenced herein, are specified in Section 01900, "Reference Standards". B. Commercial Standards: ANSI/ASTM A 446 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical)Quality. ASTM A 570 Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality. ASTM C 645 Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. C. Trade Standards: AISI American Iron and Steel Institute"Cold Formed Steel Design Manual". 1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete manufacturer's literature,technical data, required tests and calculations, and shop drawings, all in accordance with Section 01300, "Contractor Submittals". B. Shop Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings showing all components, materials, fasteners and methods of attachments. The shop drawings shall include, as a minimum, the following requirements: 1. Drawings showing interior wall framing system indicating stud sizes, gages and spacing, bracing, bridging, and other related information. 2. Drawings showing design and framing of wall openings, jambs, headers, ceilings, and ceiling supports where ceiling is supported from the walls. 3. Detailed drawings showing fasteners, methods of attachments, and joint details of light framing member connections to foundations, main structural framing system, and other light framing members. C. Manufacturer's standard details that pertain to this project may be used in addition to these drawings listed above provided that the portions that apply are clearly marked and those parts that do not apply are clearly marked. Submittal of all standard details regardless of application to the specific project shall be returned for compliance with this Specification. D. Calculations shall be prepared,signed,and sealed by an ENGINEER licensed in the State of Texas. MWH-09/16/03 INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05410-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS v 2.01 INTERIOR METAL FRAMING A. Materials shall be as specified in Section 05400 "Cold Formed Metal Framing". B. The interior framing members shall be of appropriate gages and spacing in accordance with the manufacturer printed literature and recommendations for the specific design conditions and wall heights shown on the Drawings,and shall meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Metal wall studs shall be C-shape type, 3-5/8-inch deep, minimum of 25-gage and shall have a maximum spacing of 24-inches on center. The maximum allowable deflection shall be 1/240 span. 2. Metal wall studs at tiled walls shall be C-shape type, 3-5/8-inches deep, minimum of 20-gage and shall have a maximum spacing of 16 inches on center. The maximum allowable deflection shall be 1/360 span. 3. Metal furring studs shall be C-shape type,2-1/2-inches deep, minimum of 25-gage and shall have a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center. The maximum allowable deflection shall be 1/240 span. 4. Metal runners and tracks shall be channel type, same gage and size as the studs. C. Where interior stud walls are required to be load-bearing,the members shall be individually engineered for the specific applications. 2.02 CEILING SUPPORT SYSTEMS Where described in the "Special Design Conditions" section of this Specification, where indicated on the Drawings,and where otherwise needed,framing from the interior stud wall systems shall be designed to support the ceilings and soffits. 2.03 SPECIAL DESIGN CONDITIONS A. General 1. Where interior walls extend to the underside of the building's main structural framing, top tracks shall be connected to the structural framing members. A 1-inch deflection allowance shall be provided directly between the top track and top of studs. The top track shall be a deep-leg runner fastened to the building's structural framing. The studs shall be fastened to the bottom track and shall be allowed to slide vertically within the top track. Strap bracing and horizontal bridging shall be provided as necessary. 2. Where interior walls extend to and are supported by the roof system, the CONTRACTOR shall provide coordination between the Building Supplier and the interior walls. B. Laboratory/Administration Building MWH-09/16/03 INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05410-3 1. In the building lobby, the tiered ceiling system is to be supported from the interior stud walls. Prefabricated joists, trusses, light gage, or rolled sections may be used as determined necessary by design. Deflection of the ceiling shall be limited to 1/360 span. 2. Stiffeners and/or diagonal bracing shall be provided as needed to support the tops of the walls. Use inverted 20-gage studs attached to top tracks as stiffeners,as shown on the Drawings. 3. Where interior stud walls intersect or are adjacent to interior concrete masonry unit walls, a 1/2-inch gap shall be provided. C. Operations Building 1. Where interior stud walls intersect or are adjacent to interior concrete masonry unit walls, a 1/2-inch gap shall be provided. 2. Stiffeners shall be provided as needed to support the tops of the walls. D. Maintenance Building 1. Where interior stud walls intersect or are adjacent to interior concrete masonry unit walls, a '/2-inch gap shall be provided. 2. Stiffeners shall be provided as needed to support the tops of the walls. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All work shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations, the applicable requirements of the governing code, ANSI, and as specified or shown. N%W/ 3.2 ERECTION A. Installation of interior stud walls shall conform to the following minimum requirements: 1. Floor and ceiling tracks shall be aligned and located to the wall layouts. Tracks shall be secured in place with fasteners or welds at maximum 24-inches on center. Installation of sealant shall be coordinated with floor and ceiling tracks. 2. Studs shall be located not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and at each side of all openings. Studs shall be connected to top and bottom tracks and needed, unless shown otherwise. 3. Corners shall be constructed using minimum of three studs. Double studs shall be provided at wall openings, door and window jambs. 4. Load bearing studs shall be fabricated and installed in one piece. Splicing of studs will not be permitted. 5. Load bearing studs shall be braced and reinforced as needed to develop full strength as required by the design. 6. Refer to drawings for locations of partitions which extend through ceilings. 7. The Building Supplier shall coordinate the placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. MWH-09/16/03 INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05410-4 8. Intermediate studs above and below wall openings shall be located to match wall stud spacing. ..we 9. Cross studs shall be provided where required for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. 10. Framing shall be provided between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and as needed to prevent stud rotation. 11. Complete framing shall be ready to receive gypsum wall board and sheathing. B. Studs shall be erected with a maximum variation from true position,or from any member in the plane, of 1/4-inch. END OF SECTION MWH-09/16/03 INTERIOR METAL STUD WALL SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05410-5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to fabricate and install miscellaneous metals and other ornamental or specialty work. Furnish hangers, support, and brackets necessary to fasten other work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Field welding shall be performed by experienced operators, qualified in conformance with "Standard Qualifications Procedure" of the AWS "Structural Welding Code". 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS and shall include: A. Shop drawings showing fabricated items B. Product data sheets for manufactured components C. List as necessary 1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in ..i their entirety: B. Federal Specfications (Fed Spec): FF-B-561 D Bolt, (Screw) Lag FF-P-575C Bolt, Hexagon and Square FF-B-588C Bolt, Toggle, and Expansion Sleeve, Screw FF-S-85 Screws, Cap, Slotted and Hexagon-Head FF-S-92 Screws, Machine: Slotted, Cross-Recessed or Hexagon Head FF-N-105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes, Wire, cut and Wrought FF-N-836D Nuts, Square, Hexagon, Cap, Slotted, Castle Knurled, Welding and Single Ball Seat FF-P-395 Power Actuated Drive Pins FF-S-111 Screw, Wood FF-S-325 Shield, Expansion: Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry) FF-W-84 Washers, Lock (Spring) RR-G-661 Gratings, Metal TT-P-645 Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type TT-V-51 Varnish; Asphalt C. The Aluminum Association (AA) publications: SAA-46 Standards for Architectural Aluminum MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-1 DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes ABH-21 Aluminum Brazing Handbook ADS-1 Aluminum Standards and Data '%NW0_* D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) publications: ASTM A6 Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling ASTM A27 Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application ASTM A36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A148 Specification for Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes ASTM A153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105ksi minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Parts ASTM A490 Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi minimum Tensile Strength ASTM A653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A668 Specification for Steel forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use ASTM A992 Specification for Structural Steel Shapes ASTM B308 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) publication: ANSI A14.3 Safety Code for Fixed Ladders F. American Welding Society (AWS) standard: AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel G. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) publications: Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2 MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-2 H. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Association (NAAMA) publications: .� AMP 500 Metal Finishes Manual AMP 504 Finishes for Carbon Steel and Iron "Stair Manual" 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Ship expansion joints to site in protective coverings. All aluminum which will be exposed to view shall have strippable protective coverings applied at the factory and removed after erection. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall verify dimensions and take field measurements necessary to establish size and connections prior to fabrication. Provide any anchors, brackets, supports, braces, connections and fasteners necessary to assemble the various components and anchor into position into the structure. B. Each component shall be of adequate size and strength necessary to fulfill its function. Failure of any part of the assembly is cause to reject the entire component. Component shall be assembled in a neat and substantial manner. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed in a manner to exclude water. C. Provide miscellaneous plates, brackets, frames, anchors and other steel fabrications as indicated on the drawings or required to make connections to components furnished under other sections of the specifications. Provide brackets for elevators and rails, precast concrete panels, and frames for mechanical equipment. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. STRUCTURAL SEEL, wide flange shapes: conforming to ASTM A992. B. STRUCTURAL STEEL other than wide flange shapes: ASTM A36 having a minimum yield strength of not less than 36,000 psi. C. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL: Rolled shapes complying with ASTM A36; plates and bars complying with ASTM A36. D. STRUCTURAL CAST STEEL: Conforming to ASTM A148, Grade 80-50. E. GENERAL PURPOSE CAST STEEL: Conforming to ASTM A27, Grade 65-35. F. STEEL FORGING: General purpose, conforming to ASTM A668, Class C or F. G. CAST IRON: Soft, gray iron, conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30, has 30,000 psi tensile strength. MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-3 H. GALVANIZING: Hot dipped, conforming to ASTM A123. I. WELDING ELECTRODES: Appropriate for the intended usage. Electrodes for arc welding shall be series E70. J. ALUMINUM: Appropriate for the intended usage. Alloys shall comply with the following: ALLOY USAGE 6061 Extruded or rolled structural shapes 6063 Extrusions, general (Pipe rails) 3003 Sheet, tube or pipe 5005 General purpose sheet 5056 Nails and Rivets 2024 Screws, bolts and nuts K. STAINLESS STEEL: Appropriate for the intended usage, complies with AISI Type 316. Finish shall be No. 2, Dull I. L. FASTENERS: Appropriate for the intended usage. Fasteners used with galvanized steel shall be zinc coated, fasteners used on non-ferrous metal shall be bronze or brass. Fasteners shall include: 1. Steel Bolts - Low carbon steel complying with ASTM A307 or A325. 2. Nails and Spikes - Fasteners complying with Fed. Spec. IV. FF-P-636. 3. Self-Drilling Fasteners (SDF) - Corrosive resistant, hex-headed drill pointed, size as appropriate. 4. Powder Activated Fasteners (PAF) - Tempered A-151 steel with a minimum tensile strength of 270,000 psi, complying with Fed. Spec. - P3958, Ramset, Hilti, or approved equal. 5. Sleeve Bolts - Molly "Parasleeve" or Ramset "Dynabolt". 6. Concrete Expansion Bolts - Hilti "KwikBolt II". 7. CMU Fastener - Hilti "KwikTog". 8. Metal Deck Fasteners - Corrosive resistant, hexheaded, drill pointed fasteners, Teks or equal. 9. Self-Drilling Anchors - Zinc-plated, case hardened body with expanding plug, Red Head "Self Drill" or Hilti "Kwik-Pro". 10. Adhesive Anchor System — Hilti "Hit Hy 150" or "HITHY20". M. STEEL PIPE: Welded or seamless types, standard weight, Schedule 40 steel tubing conforming to ASTM A53. Steel tube shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B. N. ANCHORS AND BOLTS: Anchors and bolts shall be stainless steel cadmium plated or approved equal. O. STUD ANCHORS: Stainless steel, type 18-8 anchors as manufactured by Nelson Stud Anchors, or equal. P. ALUMINUM SILLS: Extruded of 6063-T52 alloy, J.C. Braum & Company, model AA, complete with SA-100 anchor clips. MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-4 Q. BIRD SCREEN: Conforming to Fed Spec RR-W-360, Type I, Class 1, 2 by 2 mesh, 0.063" diameter aluminum wire. Color to match louver. ...i R. STEEL PLATE: Furnish steel plate for fabrication as indicated on the drawings. Furnish 1/4" or 3/8" thick checkered steel plate where indicated. S. ZINC-RICH COATING: Specially formulated compound conforming to Navy Specification MIL-P-21035 that will produce a coating of approximately 3.0 mils thickness containing not less than 95% zinc when applied in one (1) coat according to the manufacturer's instruction. T. BITUMINOUS PAINT: Heavy bodied asphalt based paint conforming to military specification MIL-P-6883 or Fed Spec TT-V-51. U. SHOP PAINT: Shop paint shall be suitable as a primer for the finish coats as specified in Section 09905, PROTECTIVE COATINGS. Contractor shall coordinate. Generally, shop paint shall be a rust inhibiter metal primer for miscellaneous steel, TNEMEC #99 for structural components. 2.02 FABRICATIONS A. Fabricated components shall be assembled in the shop whenever possible. Steel shapes shall be cut to accurate size with sharp lines and smooth surfaces. Thickness of metal and general construction shall be adequate to withstand the stresses imposed on the component. Provide lugs and brackets necessary for connecting to other components. ..ope B. Connections shall be secure, either welded or fastened with bolts or rivets. Where the component is to be exposed to view, connections shall be by welding with the welds ground smooth. Make up threaded connections tightly so that threads will be entirely concealed by fittings. Rivets, bolts, or machine screws may be used for field connections. Visible rivets, bolts, screws, etc., may have flush or oval heads and shall be countersunk. Seal-weld visible joints and exposed joints their entire length. Other joints may be spot or skip welded unless shown otherwise, or unless they must be continuous. C. Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Mismatched holes shall not be allowed. Fasteners shall be concealed wherever possible. Exposed fasteners shall be of compatible materials and shall match color and finish or surrounding materials. Drill, punch, cut and tap steel as required for anchoring or accommodating the work of other trades as shown or where shown on the shop drawings. D. Structural fabrications shall be made of standard rolled shapes, plates, bars, or strips. E. Fabricated components noted to be galvanized shall be hot-dipped processed after fabrication. Galvanized shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A123 and A653 as applicable. In addition, components that are fabricated of ferrous metal and MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-5 exposed on or outside of the exterior surfaces of the building above or below grade shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. 2.03 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. SAFETY TREADS: Safety treads and nosings shall be a 3"-wide abrasive-surfaced nosing cut to full width of stairs minus 1/8" each side for stairs, and width of concrete steps minus 3" each side for exterior concrete steps. Safety treads shall have integral anchors for embedding into concrete. Treads shall be as manufactured by Wooster, American Abrasive Metal Company, Mason Safety Tread Company, Armstrong products, or equal. B. ALUMINUM LADDERS: Manufacturer's standard design aluminum ladder conforming to OSHA requirements and fabricated of aluminum side rails with non- slip safety rungs. Wall anchors shall be stainless steel, cadmium plated or other non-corrosive metal, as approved by the Engineer. C. SAFETY LADDERS: Ladders may be shop fabricated or may be a standard product as manufactured by Cotterman Company, Croswell, Mississippi, Precision Stair Corp., Morristown, Tenn., O'Keefee Inc., San Francisco, CA, or equal. Ladders and safety cages shall conform to OSHA requirements and shall be complete with wall flanges to anchor to walls as required by the job condition. 2.04 GRATING ALUMINUM GRATING: Aluminum grating shall be Pressure Locked rectangular design, Type B as manufactured by IKG Industries. Main bars shall be 1-1/4" by 3/16" spaced 5/16" center to center. Cross bars shall be of a rectangular cross section, flush top and spaced 2" center to center. Main bars and cross bars shall be slotted at their intersection so as not to remove excessive material from the load sustaining members. Main bars shall be dovetail slotted and have their slots solidly filled by the cross bars. Grating shall be designed for a uniform distributed live load of 200 psf on a 48" span with a deflection of less than 0.25". 2.05 STEEL FRAMES A. Frames shall not have less than two (2) structural members which span across adjacent purlins. Openings shall be framed with steel angles of a size suitable for the opening size. When wood curbs are detailed as part of the frame design, provide angles having outstanding legs turned upward, with holes punched for attaching wood curbs. Holes shall be spaced at 12" centers, with first hole spaced four inches from each end and no side having less than three fasteners. Size of frames and opening dimensions shall be coordinated with equipment manufacturer. Minimum size of supporting angle shall be 3-1/2" x 5" x 3/8". B. Frames used to support roof top air conditioning equipment shall have additional members to frame each side of duct penetrations of the roof surface, as well as structural members corresponding to the mounting curb perimeter dimensions. MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-6 C. Frames for roof drains and any other roof penetration not exceeding 24" square shall be a minimum size of 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 5/16". All other frames shall be as detailed on drawings, otherwise shall be framed with steel angles having a minimum size of 4" x 4" x 5/16". 2.06 CAST IRON CASTINGS Casting shall be uniform in quality, free from blow holes or other defects. Surface shall be smooth and true to pattern. Metal shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 40 for grey cast iron castings. Castings shall receive one coat of rust inhibited primer and shall be field painted as specified in Section 09905, PROTECTIVE COATINGS. Casing shall include the following: A. Wheel Guards - McKinley Type WG7, 24" H x 6" clearance. B. -Manhole Covers and Frames - McKinney or Neenah as specified in other Sections. C. Trench Drains - Cast iron grates with angle frames having concrete anchors. D. Downspout Boots - rectangular shaped boots having wings for attaching boot to building; McKinley Type DS1, or equal. E. Butter Boxes - McKinley Type GBL, light duty, size to match boot. 2.07 BRONZE CASTINGS A. Castings shall be uniform in quality, free from injurious defects with smooth surfaces and true to pattern. Casting metal shall be CDA Alloy 844. Castings shall include the following: B. Downspout nozzle: Josam 25010 Series satin-finish bronze nozzle with loose all flange and inlet threaded connection, size as required. 2.08 ARCHITECTURAL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS A. Components shall be as manufactured by Architectural Arts Mfg. Inc., Balco, Inc., Nystrom, Construction Specialties, or approved equal. Expansion joints shall be fabricated of extruded aluminum 6063-T5 and shall be of the shape and type necessary for the particular application, similar to the following items manufactured by Architectural Arts: Description Architectural Arts model Floor to floor (Resilient flooring) C10-14-54 Floor to wall (Resilient flooring) C10-35-54 Floor to floor (No finish) C10-13-54 Floor to wall (No finish) C10-34-54 Wall to Wall (Gypboard) C10-52-54 Wall to corner (Gypboard) C10-61-54 Wall to wall (CMU) C10-51-54 Wall to corner (CMU) C10-61-54 MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-7 Floor to floor (terrazzo) K10-13-11 Floor to wall (terrazzo) K10-31-11 Alternate wall to wall (Gypboard) J10-51-44 '%Wo Alternate wall to corner J10-71-44 (Gypboard) Ceiling to ceiling J10-71-44 Ceiling to wall J10-71-44 B. All products shall be furnished by a single manufacturer and shall be the same type or series. C. Where expansion joints occur in fire rated assemblies, manufacturer shall provide an expansion joint system that incorporates a fire barrier having the same rating as the assembly. 2.09 ACCESS LADDERS Roof access ladders shall be fabricated to meet OSHA standards. Side rails shall be a minimum of 3inches by 1/2 inch steel bars spaced not less than 18 inches apart. Rungs shall be a minimum of one-inch diameter having an abrasive filled bar and shall be spaced at 12 inch centers. 2.10 EXTENDED LADDERS Extended ladder safety post shall be Bilco LadderUp Safety Post. A. Furnish and install where indicated on plans ladder safety post Model LU-4. The ladder safety post shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer. %Moe B. Performance characteristics: 1. Tubular post shall lock automatically when fully extended. 2. Safety post shall have controlled upward and downward movement. 3. Release lever shall disengage the post to allow it to be returned to its lowered position. 4. Post shall have adjustable mounting brackets to fit ladder rung spacing up to 14" on center and clamp brackets to accommodate ladder rungs up to 1-3/4" in diameter. C. Post: Shall be manufactured of high strength square tubing. A pull up loop shall be provided at the upper end of the post to facilitate raising the post. D. Material of construction: Shall be aluminum. E. Balancing spring: A stainless steel spring balancing mechanism shall be provided to provide smooth, easy, controlled operation when raising and lowering the safety post. F. Hardware: All mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. G. Finishes: Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. 3.00 EXECUTION MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-8 3.01 PREPARATION Inspect surfaces to receive metal components. Ascertain that surfaces are suitable for 'W"'' the attachment of the component. 3.02 FASTENERS A. Furnish the appropriate type of fastener for the application. Fasteners shall be of the type and material proper for intended use and in sufficient quantity for the spacing. Bolts shall be a minimum of 1/2" diameter, spaced not to exceed 3 ft centers for attaching steel, or 2 ft centers for attaching wood. B. Generally fasteners shall comply with Table 05500-A at the end of this section. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. GRATING: Provide grating and frame in required size. Provide a band where edge of grating is open and visible, and at perimeter of cutouts. Fasten grating to frame at the ends of the third bearing bar from each side of the panel and to intermediate supports at the middle of the panel. Weld frame to imbedded plates, as shown on the drawings. Where hinged grating is indicated, provide a steel angle frame around opening. Provide extra heavy duty hinges and weld to grating and frame. Provide toe guards at openings in gratings where conduit or piping extends through grating flooring. Toe guards shall be 3/8" x 4" steel plates bolted or welded to grating. B. ACCESS LADDERS: Install access ladders at locations specified. Provide steel clip angles at each leg and attach to concrete floor with expansion bolts. Provide steel strap supports to ladder legs and attach to construction with expansion bolts or by welding, as appropriate. Ladders shall be positioned to provide a minimum toe clearance of 8 inches. C. ALUMINUM ACCESS LADDERS: Factory fabricated, aluminum access ladders shall be installed and be complete with aluminum non-slip safety rungs. D. SAFETY TREADS: Install safety treads at each concrete step on the interior and exterior of the building. Tread shall be approximately 4" shorter than the stair tread width. E. HATCHWAY: Frames shall be cast in place with the concrete structure. Provide copper or PVC tubing drain. Attach to drain nipple and extend to the outside. Hatchway shall be set plumb and level. F. VENTILATORS: Install vent pipe at concrete vaults which is cast into place as concrete is placed. Vents shall be plumb and accurately placed in the structure. G. JOIST ANCHORS: Furnish a steel anchor plate for each joist seat fabricated of steel plate with stud anchors. Unless noted otherwise, anchors for "K" series joists shall be 4" x 6" x 1/4" plates with two (2) 1/2" x 5" long stud anchors, and anchors for long span joists shall be 5" x 9" x 1/4". Anchor plates shall be cast into concrete masonry tie beam at joist locations. MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-9 H. ANCHOR PLATES: Furnish steel anchor plates to be cast into concrete structure and to be used for attaching precast concrete panels or steel members. Anchor plates shall be unpainted steel, except where plates are installed in exterior surfaces 10aw or within 1" of the exterior surface. Anchor plates shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. I. WINDOW SILL: Furnish and install a window sill at every window opening (and louver location). Sills shall be the size required by the condition. Secure clip anchors to masonry and snap sill into place. Set sill in full bed of mastic. J. ROOF FRAMES: Install a roof frame at each roof opening for air conditioning units, skylights, exhaust fans, flues, roof drains and vent stacks. Frames for roof drains and other penetrations not exceeding 24" square shall be framed with 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 5/16" steel angles frames. All other openings shall be according to details. Otherwise, they shall be fabricated with 4" x 4" x 5/16" support members with frame angles, as required. Set frames level and true and secure to structural purlins by field welding. K. SAFETY LADDERS: Furnish and install fixed steel safety ladders. L. HANGARS AND STRAPS: Provide metal hangars, straps, and bracing required to support and secure other work unless specifically shown or specified to be provided by another trade. Carefully coordinate this work. M. EXTENDED LADDER: Submit product design drawings for review and approval to the architect or specifier before fabrication. The installer shall check as-built conditions and verify the manufacturer's ladder safety post details for accuracy to fit the application prior to fabrication. The installer shall comply with the ladder safety post manufacturer's installation instructions. The manufacturer shall furnish fasteners necessary for installing ladder safety post on ladder. 3.04 ARCHITECTURAL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS A. Furnish and install expansion joints at any exposed location that expansion joints occur, generally flush to surfaces. Expansion joints shall be the manufacturer's standard design similar to those specified. Provide fasteners of the appropriate type for the installation and attach securely. Install expansion joints at floors, walls, and ceilings. Other joints shall be normal service. B. Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete with a coat of zinc chromate. C. Once expansion joints have been installed, protect from damage by covering with walkboards or other appropriate methods. 3.05 CLEANING AND PAINTING A. clean all surfaces, remove rust and prepare for painting. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after fabrication or erection shall be painted prior to installation. MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-10 B. Except for galvanized steel and items specifically noted not to be painted, all miscellaneous metal component shall receive a shop coat of paint. Paint shall be applied by brash or spray, applied uniformly without runs or drips. Field painting shall be in accordance with Section 09905 PROTECTIVE COATINGS. C. Any fasteners or miscellaneous components applied on galvanized fabrications shall be galvanized, chrome-plated, or otherwise shall be painted with zinc-rich coatings. D. Dissimilar materials: Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact with concrete, mortar, masonry, pressure-treated wood or absorptive materials subject to wetting, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat of bituminous paint, unless otherwise specified, to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where stainless steel fasteners come in contact with structural steel, provide galvanic corrosion isolation washers. 3.06 SCHEDULES FASTENERS SCHEDULE TABLE 05500-A DESCRIPTION SUBSTRATE COMMENTS m m Z o o o o a��nnE `u =o � o U U a U m ao Machine Bolts With Lead or Malleable Iron Shield. • Toggle Bolts • Embedded Anchor Bolts • Gypsum Board Anchor • Machine Bolt Nuts Washers • Lag Screws • Nails/Screws • Power Activated Fasteners • Self-drilling Anchors • Schedule Notes: 1.This table is a general guide for fastener use. All fasteners shall be of size, type and length appropriate for the particular condition. Concrete anchors shall be stainless steel. END OF SECTION MWH - 9/16/03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05500-11 SECTION 05501 - ANCHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION ANCHORS AND CONCRETE INSERTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide anchor bolts, expansion anchors and concrete inserts including but not limited to: 1. Grating. B. This Section includes all bolts,anchors and inserts required for the Work but not specified under other Sections. C. Related Work and Specifications: 1. Section 05500: Miscellaneous Metals. 2. Division 03300—Cast in Place Concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM A 307,Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 2. ASTM A 1913,Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Nmoo, A. Samples: Submit for approval the following: 1. Representative samples of bolts, anchors and inserts as may be requested by the ENGINEER. His review will be for type and finish only. Compliance with all other requirements is exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Setting drawings and templates for location and installation of anchorage devices. 2. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams and installation instructions for the devices. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, expansion anchor, or concrete insert is not shown on the drawings, provide the size, length and capacity required to carry the design load times a minimum safety factor of four. MWH-09/16/03 ANCHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION ANCHORS CITY OF FORT WORTH AND CONCRETE INSERTS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05501-1 B. Determine design loads as follows: 1. For equipment anchors, use the design load recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the ENGINEER. 2. For pipe hangers and supports, use one half the total weight of pipe,fittings,valves, accessories and water contained in pipe,between the hanger or support in question and adjacent hangers and supports on both sides. 3. Allowances for vibration are included in the safety factor specified above. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Anchor Bolts: 1. Provide stainless steel bolts complying with ASTM A 193,AISI Type 316. Other AISI types may be used subject to ENGINEER's approval. B. Expansion Anchors: 1. All expansion bolts shall be AISI_Type 316 stainless steel. 2. All expansion bolts shall have a 4:1 safety factor with a minimum working capacity as follows: Bolt size 7/8" 3/4" 1/2" 3/8" Minimum Sheer Strength 5250# 4250# 1650# 625# Minimum Pullout Strength 5250# 4250# 1300# 1030# Minimum Embedment 7" 4" 2-1/4" 2-1/4" 3. Size required for the concrete strength specified. 4. Stud type (male thread) or flush type (female thread), as required. 5. UL or FM approved. 6. Provide manufacturer's technical literature and test reports from an accredited independent testing laboratory showing certified bolt capacities for expansion bolts proposed for use on this project. 7. Product and Manufacturer: Provide anchors by one of the following: a. Molly Division of USM Corporation. b. HILTI, Incorporated. C. Or equivalent. C. Concrete Inserts: 1. For piping and floor plate, provide malleable iron inserts. 2. Provide those recommended by the manufacturer for the required loading. 3. Finish shall be black. 4. UL and FM approved. 5. For inserts required for grating see Specification Section 05530. D. Powder actuated fasteners and other types of bolts and fasteners not specified herein shall not be used unless approved by ENGINEER. MWH-09/16/03 ANCHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION ANCHORS CITY OF FORT WORTH AND CONCRETE INSERTS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05501-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Drilling equipment used and installation of expansion anchors shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete. C. Expansion anchors may be used for hanging or supporting pipe two inches diameter and smaller. Expansion anchors shall not be used for larger pipe unless otherwise shown or approved by the ENGINEER. D. Use concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports for the pipe size and loading recommended by the insert manufacturer. E. Unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER conform to following for expansion anchors: 1. Minimum embedment depth as defined in 2.02 B. 2. Minimum anchor spacing on centers: ten diameters. 3. Minimum distance to edge of concrete: five diameters. 4. Increase dimensions above if required to develop the required anchor load capacity. 3.02 CLEANING After embedding concrete is placed, remove protection and clean bolts and inserts. END OF SECTION MWH-09/16/03 ANCHOR BOLTS, EXPANSION ANCHORS CITY OF FORT WORTH AND CONCRETE INSERTS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 05501-3 SECTION 07535 - BUILT-UP, MODIFIED BITUMINOUS, ROOFING PART 1 -- GENERAL I-awl 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an elastomeric built-up roofing system of modified bituminous products and all appurtenant work, complete, and shall coordinate all of the work hereunder with the related work specified in other Sections, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all appurtenant work, complete, and shall coordinate all related work necessary for demolition and removal of all existing [membrane] roofing systems and roofing systems in areas to be re-roofed. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: demolition of existing roofing systems; removal of material from work area and site; removal of sheet metal work embedded into roofing system; demolition and removal of any existing roofing insulation or cants. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications: SS-A-701 B Asphalt, Petroleum (Primer, Roofing, and Weatherproofing) SS-C-153C Cement, Bituminous, Plastic. B. Commercial Standards: ASTM D 41 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing and Waterproofing ASTM D 312 Asphalt Used in Roofing. ASTM D 2178 Asphalt Glass (Felt) Used in Roofing and Waterproofing C. Trade Standards: National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): The "Building Materials Directory," Fire Listings, and "Construction Fire Hazard Class" of roofing system. Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (FM): "Approval Guide, Equipment Materials, Service, for Conservation of Property," and "Construction of Factory Mutual System Class" as described in Factory Mutual System Loss Prevention Data Sheets. BUILT-UP, MODIFIED MWH-09/16/03 BITUMINOUS ROOFING CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07535-1 D. Manufacturer's Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, the roofing products and their installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Samples: Color samples of mineral cap sheet shall be submitted for selection by the ENGINEER. C. Manufacturer Information: The manufacturer's specifications, literature, and published installation instructions for each major roofing element, product, or system shall be submitted. D. Contractor Approval: Roofing shall be applied by a roofing contractor approved by the roofing manufacturer in writing, with a copy of the approval letter submitted. E. Affidavit: After installation of the roofing, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER a signed affidavit that the roof complies with the requirements of these Specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations for the class and type of roof specified. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored per manufacturer's recommendation in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is protected from the elements. _ 1. All materials shall be provided with protective and breathable wrappers. They shall be stored on pallets and out of standing water. Wet materials shall be removed from job site and not used. 1.5 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a written 2-year guarantee on all roofing and associated work performed under this Section. The CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace, at its own expense, any and all materials or workmanship which are faulty or deficient. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for the repair or replacement of other damage which results from a failure of its work or material. B. Manufacturer shall provide not less than a 10-year limited warranty against manufactured defects and wind damage. BUILT-UP, MODIFIED MWH-09/16/03 BITUMINOUS ROOFING - CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07535-2 PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS A. UL Approval: Materials and roofing systems shall be provided which have been tested, -+ve listed, and labeled by UL for the specified class or rating of roofing. Bitumens and felts shall be the products of the same manufacturer, and all other materials used within the system shall be acceptable to the approved manufacturer. B. The roofing system shall be an elastomeric built-up system made up of modified bituminous products. The system may be SBS (styrene butadiene styrene) or APP (thermoplastic amorphous polypropylene). Equal systems must provide a system equal to the SBS or APP system specified. C. All roof structures shall be provided with the roof insulation system shown. Vapor retarder membrane for roof insulation at built-up roofing shall be as specified in Section 07510 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing. 2.2 ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: This list of roofing materials is a general list. It includes many standard products required to be used by the manufacturers in their roofing system specifications. When materials specified are used in a roofing system, they shall conform to the specified material and product requirements. Other materials may be required for a roofing system and shall be the manufacturer's recommended and specified product for the system, and for the job conditions. B. Asphalts and Primer: Asphaltic materials for built-up roof shall conform to the following requirements: 1. High melt asphalt shall conform to ASTM D 312, Type IV. 2. Medium melt asphalt shall conform to ASTM D 312, Type II. 3. Low melt asphalt shall conform to ASTM D 312, Type 1. 4. Asphalt primer shall conform to ASTM D 41, and Federal Specification SS-A-701 B. C. Felts: Felts for built-up roof construction shall conform to the following: 1. Asphalt impregnated inorganic glass fiber felt shall conform to ASTM D 2178, Type I. 2. Modified bituminous felt shall be the manufacturer's standard product for its roofing system. D. Plastic Cement: Plastic cement shall conform to Federal Specifications SS-C-153C. E. Mechanical Fasteners: Mechanical fasteners shall be approved by roofing and insulation manufacturers for application of the first ply into insulation. F. Edge and Cant Strips: Tapered edge strips and cant strips shall be impregnated fiber strips. BUILT-UP, MODIFIED MWH-09/16/03 BITUMINOUS ROOFING CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07535-3 2.3 ROOFING PRODUCTS A. Roof Systems: Built-up, modified bituminous roofing system for decks with inclines of zero to 3 inches in 12 inches shall be the following products, or equal: 1. APP System shall be a mineral cap sheet system. a. Manufacturers shall be Owens/Corning Corporation; Celotex Corp.; or equal. b. The APP roofing system to be used over nailable plywood or lightweight concrete shall be equal to or one of the following manufacturers' system specifications: Owens/Corning 2D4C or 2D-NC; Celotex Corp. C.P. 101 W. c. The APP roofing system to be used over non-nailable roof insulation or concrete shall be equal to or one of the following manufacturers' system specifications: Owens/Corning 2D-IC or 2D-XC; Celotex Corp. C.P. 101 C. 2. SBS Systems shall be a mineral cap sheet system. a. Manufacturers shall be Manville; Genstar Roofing Product Company; or equal. b. The SBS roofing system to be used over nailable plywood or lightweight concrete shall be equal to or one of the following manufacturers' system *."Ploe specifications: Manville 2 GND; Genstar AM-1-NW-2. B. Base Flashing for Walls: Base flashing system for walls shall be full system design for job conditions and roofing system used, and be an approved system of the roofing manufacturer. C. Vapor Retarder Membrane: Vapor retarder membrane shall be provided under all insulation, over a pressurized ceiling plenum A/C system, and where specified or shown. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation shall conform to applicable codes and the manufacturer's published or written recommendations, specifications, and published installation instructions for the type of work being performed. The construction shall be coordinated with the work of other trades. BUILT-UP, MODIFIED MWH-09/16/03 BITUMINOUS ROOFING CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07535-4 B. The roofing work shall be performed by an installer authorized by the roofing system manufacturer. C. The CONTRACTOR shall investigate the substrate and the conditions under which roofing work is to be performed, and shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. The work shall not proceed until such unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. The CONTRACTOR shall not remove existing roofing system during times of snow or rain and shall install the new roof systems before snow or rain can cause any damage to the existing structures. 3.2 CANT AND EDGE STRIPS A. Cant strips and tapered edge strips shall be provided at all intersections of roof surfaces with vertical walls, parapets, curbs, and accessories which do not have built-in cants, and shall be miter cut at corners. Cant strips and tapered edge strips shall be firmly attached in place prior to roof application. 3.3 PITCH POCKETS A. Pitch pockets shall have all surfaces of sheet metal cleaned and primed with asphalt primer before installation of roofing oakum or styrofoam, plastic cement, low-melt asphalt and flashing compound. Pitch pockets shall be filled with one inch of plastic cement and with low-melt asphalt to within 1/2-inch of top of pocket. Flashing compound shall be provided over cooled low-melt asphalt and shall be sloped from embedded object to the outside of the pan so water will drain off pitch pocket. Pitch pockets may be filled with a product designed for filling pitch pockets when approved by the ENGINEER. ,-New 3.4 WALKWAYS A. Roof walkways shall be installed per roofing and walkway manufacturer's written instructions and with a 6-inch space between walkway pads for drainage. A coat of asphalt shall be applied, at the rate of 25 lb to 30 Ib/100 sq ft, directly to the built-up roofing surface beneath the roof walkway pads. Keeping the joint lines straight and true, the pads shall be embedded firmly into the hot asphalt. 3.5 APPLICATION A. The roofing system shall be applied on an area as rapidly as practicable after completion of sheet metal work. Incomplete roofing shall be protected from dampness by a glaze of bitumen when final coating is delayed. 3.6 VAPOR RETARDER MEMBRANE A. General: Vapor retarder membrane shall be a system approved by the roofing and insulation manufacturer, and shall not be less than the following system: 1. For concrete and non-nailable deck: Asphalt primer at 1/2 gal 4 lb/sq (100 sq ft) Asphalt mopping 25 lb/sq Base sheet 25 lb/sq BUILT-UP, MODIFIED MWH-09/16/03 BITUMINOUS ROOFING CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07535-5 Asphalt mopping 25 Ib/sq 2. For wood and nailable deck: Base sheet 25 Ib/sq Asphalt 25 Ib/sq B. Asphalt Mopping: Spot mopping, nailing, or mechanical attachment shall be not less than the most stringent requirement of the manufacturer, codes, and Factory Mutual's "Wind Uplift Requirements." The most stringent attachment requirement shall govern and be followed in installation of the base sheet. The asphalt mopping installation of the roof insulation shall be as required by the roofing and insulation manufacturers. The most stringent requirement for installation of the roof insulation shall govern. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain written acceptance of the agreed-on insulation system from the product manufacturers. - END OF SECTION - BUILT-UP, MODIFIED MWH-09/16/03 BITUMINOUS ROOFING %%/ CITY OF FORTH WORTH MCCART PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07535-6 SECTION 07600- FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sheet metal and appurtenant WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The principal items of sheet metal WORK shall include sheet metal flashings, collars, pitch pockets (pans), equipment platforms, equipment (sleeper) supports at all roof penetrations which are not provided as part of the roofing system, and all other components necessary to make building weathertight. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, literature, and published installation instructions, and maintenance instructions for all sheet metal products. C. Shop Drawings: Show materials, gauges, finishes, layout, jointing, sizes, profiles, fabrication of special shapes, fasteners, and method of attachment to adjacent construction. D. Samples: Color and other samples, where required for color selections and/or review by the ENGINEER. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Sheet metal shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal WORK in connection with roofing shall be in accordance with roofing manufacturer's published specifications. Sheet metal shall be finished with protective coating per Section 09800 - Protective Coating baked on factory applied enamel system having a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils, unless otherwise indicated. B. Material thickness shall be not less than thickness indicated. Where thicknesses are not indicated, the thickness shall be not less than that required by referenced standards found in Architectural Sheet Metal Manual@ (ASMM). 2.2 ALUMINUM PRODUCTS A. Aluminum shall be 0.032-inch minimum thickness and shall conform to ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate, alloy 3003-H14, with clear anodized finish AA-C12-A41 with "Mill Finish" for painting, unless indicated otherwise. Thickness of aluminum to be welded shall be as necessary for welding method being used. B. Reglets shall be of extruded aluminum with protective coating such as manufactured by Superior Concrete Accessories; Morrison and Company "Cushion-Lock"; Fry Reglet; or equal. MWH-09/16/03 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL CITY OF FORT WORHT MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07600-1 2.3 FERROUS METALS A. Galvanized steel shall be 24-gage minimum thickness conforming to ASTM A 653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. Stainless steel shall be 24-gage minimum thickness conforming to ASTM A 176 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip, Type 304, dull No. 2D finish. Stainless sheet metal wainscots, work bench, top units, sinks, sinks and counters shall not be painted. C. Terne metal for roofing and roofing products shall be not less than 40 lb weight conforming to Federal Specification 00-T-201 E - Terneplate, For Roofing and Roofing Products. 2.4 LEAD AND SOLDERING MATERIALS A. Lead shall be 4 to 6 percent antimony and remainder shall be lead. Lead sheet shall be soft temper, except hard temper for flanges. Weight shall be not less than 4 lb/sq ft unless otherwise indicated. B. Solder shall conform to ASTM B 32 - Solder Metal, Alloy Sn, 50 percent tin, 50 percent lead. C. Soldering flux shall be of a type not injurious to metal surface being treated. 2.5 FASTENERS A. Fastening devices shall be of the same material as the sheet metal being used or corrosion-resistant metal compatible with sheet metal being used. Fasteners exposed to the weather shall have neoprene washers of 0.04-in minimum thickness. A rubber-type washer shall be used beneath the aluminum washer or fastener head where weathertightness is required. 2.6 PLASTIC CEMENT A. Plastic cement shall conform to ASTM D 2822 - Asphalt Roof Cement. 2.7 SEALING MATERIALS A. Sealants shall be in accordance with Section 07920 - Sealants and Caulking or shall be of the silicone type. Colors shall be selected by the ENGINEER from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. B. Sealer tape shall be polyisobutylene sealer tape specifically formulated for setting flanges on bituminous roofing. 2.8 COATING MATERIALS A. Primer coat for galvanized steel shall conform to Federal Specification TT-P-641 G(1) - Primer Coating, Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide (For Galvanized Surfaces), Type Il. B. Asphaltic coating compound shall conform to ASTM D 1187 - Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. MWH-09/16/03 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL CITY OF FORT WORHT MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07600-2 2.9 BUILDING PAPER OR FELT A. Building paper shall conform to UBC Standard 17-1 Class B for Kraft waterproof building paper and UBC Standard 32-1 for asphalt or coal tar-saturated felt. 2.10 METAL SIDING A. Metal siding system for walls shall be "Stucco" embossed 0.032-inch thick aluminum sheets with 8-inch ribbed pattern. The metal paneling and trim shall be provided with a "Fluoropolymer" coating. The color of coating shall be selected by the ENGINEER from manufacturer's fual range of standard colors (minimum 8). 2.11 SHOP FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Gutters and downspouts shall be of sizes indicated with wire basket type strainers of 14- gage stainless steel wire or cast bronze. Gutter configuration shall be similar to that indicated. B. All aluminum shall be welded where indicated. Welding shall conform to Reference Standards. C. Galvanized steel corner joints shall be soldered. Other joints shall be as indicated, or as required by the Reference Standards. Built-in gutters shall have all soldered or welded joints. D. Sheet metal wainscots shall be stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. They shall not be painted. E. Elongated holes shall be provided where necessary for material expansion and where indicated in Reference Standards. F. All WORK and finishes shall be protected from scratches and abrasions. G. Flashing, reglets and counter-flashing and associated flashing shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer and be installed as a complete flashing system. Flashing shall be creased longitudinally or otherwise formed with sufficient spring action to hold bottom edges firmly against base flashing or similar material. H. Intersecting corners of copings shall be accurately fitted and welded. Corners may be shop-assembled, manufactured, or extruded units. Coping shall be per "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" (ASMM; 5th ed. Chantilly, VA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), 1993), Figure 3-1, except modified as indicated, with Figure 3-2, Alternate 5 seams that allow for 1/4-inch expansion per each 1Oft of length. I. Access doors required by code or access to equipment, valves, etc., shall be provided. Size and location shall be as required by governing authorities, codes, and as indicated. Key-locked access doors shall be provided where indicated. Plumbing access doors shall conform to the requirements of Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties. Access doors shall be as manufactured by Milcor Division of Enryco, Inc.; Karp Associates, Inc.; Inland Ryerson Steel Corporation; or equal, and shall be of the types necessary to suit job conditions. MWH-09/16/03 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL CITY OF FORT WORHT MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07600-3 J. Dryer vent hoods at exterior walls shall be fabricated of aluminum clear anodized and be provided with rainhood and self closing flap, and interior and exterior escutcheon plates. K. Flashing required through concrete or clay tile shall be flexible flashing in order to prevent undue separation between tiles on account of rigidity of the flashing material. Flashing around pipes, vents, flues, chimneys, etc., shall be of lead, copper, or other ...� approved flexible flashing material. 2.12 FABRICATED SHEET METAL WORK A. Scuppers in walls shall be constructed of 0.040-inch aluminum similar to design shown on ASMM Figure 1-26 with all joints welded. Scuppers through top course without head shall be similar to ASMM Figure 1-28. B. Stamped sheet metal vents or louver-type vents, where indicated, shall be designed to provide watertight flush corners and shall be of size shown. Each vent shall be equipped with 1/4-inch square galvanized or aluminum mesh hardware cloth insect screen. Stamped metal items shall be made of prefinished white coated aluminum or galvanized sheet metal. Stamp vents shall be field painted after installation to match color of adjacent surface. C. Downspouts with conductor head 1/2-inch below gutter or scupper and hangers shall be designed similar to design shown on ASMM Figures 1-32, 1-25, 1-35B, or 1-35D. Downspout and conductor head shall be constructed of 1/16-inch aluminum and shall have all joints welded except joint between head outlet pipe and downspout. Connectors shall be per Figure 1-33B, details 1 and 2, with funnel, Figure E (if possible), and with joint between gutter and outlet welded. D. Built-in gutter, downspout, and hangers shall be designed similar to design shown on ASMM Figure 1-4 Gutter (similar), Figures 1-8 and 1-9 Gutter Expansion Joint, Figure 1- 32 Downspout, and Figures 1-35B or 1-35D. Hangers shall be per Figure 1-35B or Figure 1-35H. Downspout shall be constructed of 16 gage metal and shall have all joints soldered except joint between gutter outlet pipe and downspout. Gutter and gutter outlet pipe shall be fabricated from 40 lb terne metal. Expansion joints shall be spaced not more than 34-feet on centers, or as indicated. Connectors (outlets) shall be designed similar to Figure 1-33B, details 1 and 2, with funnel per Figure 1-33E if possible. All joints shall be welded or soldered. E. Metal vent screeds shall be plaster channel screeds PCS-V-300 as manufactured by Fry Reglet Corp.; H.K. Porter Co., Inc.; or equal. Screeds shall be extruded aluminum with either clear plastic coating, clear anodized coating, or clear acrylic baked-on coating. Corners shall be mitered. F. Wall louvers shall be extruded aluminum louvers conforming to ASMM Figure 7-5, unless otherwise indicated. Louvers and screens shall have clear anodized finish. Exterior louvers shall be provided with aluminum 1/8-inch by 1/8- inch mesh bird screen and frame. Screen units shall be removable. G. Wall louvers shall be in accordance with Section 15945 - Louvers. H. Overflow scuppers in walls and parapets shall be constructed of 0.040-inch thick aluminum sheet similar to ASMM Figure 1-30. Joints shall be welded, and inlet shall be installed no more than 2 inches above roof drain rim (low point of roof). MWH-09/16/03 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL CITY OF FORT WORHT MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07600-4 I. Pitch pockets and equipment supports conforming to Reference Standards shall be provided where required or necessary. J. Roof penetration's sheet metal WORK items shall be provided and shall be coordinated with the roofing system. The design and details shall conform to the Reference Standards unless otherwise indicated. K. Roof penetrations shall be provided with the following flashing: 1. Vent pipes: (Lead collars vent pipe flashing with top of lead sleeve flashing bent into vent pipe. Reference ASMM Figures 4-14 and 4-19. 2. Single pipes: Sheet metal or lead collars with sheet metal or lead draw band with sealant or cap top. Reference ASMM Figures 4-14 and 4-19. 3. Multi-pipes: Lead collar with cap. Reference Stoneman Engineering and Mfg. Co. 4. Multi-pipes w/curb: Sheet metal with sealant and draw bands. Reference ASMM Figure 4-13B or 4-14A. 5. Equipment support: Sheet metal. Reference ASMM Figure 4-15 and 4-16. 6. Sleeper covers: Sheet metal. Reference ASMM Figure 4-6D. 7. Pitch pockets for supports: Sheet metal with all joints welded or soldered. Reference ASMM Figure 4-16E. 8. Ventilators with curb (Note 1): Sheet metal. Reference ASMM Figure 8-1. 9. Equipment platform for Small Equipment (Note 1): Sheet metal deck similar. Reference ASMM Figure 8-613 with prefabricated roof curbs as specified in Section entitled Roof Accessories. Note 1: Prefabricated products, curbs, supports, and platforms which are part of mechanical equipment and are the WORK of other Sections, shall,be in compliance with those specifications. L. Sheet metal attic vents shall be 48-inch by 48-inch half round dormer louvers complete with flanges, louvers, sheet metal roof, and 1/4 inch galvanized or aluminum hardware cloth. Louver shall be designed for roof pitch and shall be constructed of copper, aluminum, or galvanized body with aluminum base flanges. Attic vents shall be similar to Model 480-CUBE as manufactured by Greenheck Metal Products, Inc. . PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Materials shall be delivered to Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages or bundles with labels intact and clearly identifying products. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, in an area that is protected from deleterious elements, and in a manner that will prevent damage to the products. MWH-09/16/03 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL CITY OF FORT WORHT MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07600-5 3.2 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the flashing necessary with the different trades to make sure all items which penetrate the roof are provided with all necessary sheet metal items and WORK, such as pipes, ducts, support racks, equipment platforms or sleepers, and supports. Sheet metal shop manufactured curbs, equipment supports, and equipment platforms shall be provided where prefabricated curbs, supports, or platforms are not required to be provided under other Sections. B. All WORK shall conform to Reference Standards. Flashing WORK shall be coordinated with roofing WORK. Sheet metal and roofing shall provide a weather-tight and watertight assembly. C. Sheet metal WORK shall be accurately formed to dimensions and shapes indicated. WORK shall be fitted snugly, with straight, true lines with exposed faces aligned in proper plane, free from waves and buckles. Arises and angles shall have true and sharp lines, and surfaces shall be free from waves and buckles. Exposed edges shall be hemmed. Holes for fasteners within sheet metal WORK exposed to temperature changes shall be elongated holes for material expansion and movement. D. Sheet metal WORK shall be furnished complete with supports, hangers, bracing, anchors, and other devices as required for reinforcement and proper attachment to adjacent construction. Fastenings shall be concealed wherever possible. Joints, fastenings, reinforcements, and supports shall be sized and located as required to preclude distortion or displacement due to thermal expansion and contraction. E. Surfaces upon which sheet metal is to be placed shall be dry, smooth, even, and free of any projections and hollows. Sheet metal shall be laid with all joints true and even and firmly attached with all fastener heads flush with the top surface. F. The underlayment shall be overlapped at least 2 inches so as to shed water and shall be '*"' secured along the lapped edges. Aluminum or stainless steel fasteners shall be used with aluminum sheet metal. G. Dissimilar materials shall be isolated with 2 coats of asphaltic paint, asphaltic coating compound, or sealer tape. Only stainless steel fasteners shall be used to connect isolated dissimilar metals. H. Joints shall be sized and spaced to permit sheet movement for thermal expansion and contraction of 1/4-inch per 10-ft length, on 100 degree F temperature difference. Holes for fasteners or anchors shall be elongated to provide for movement. I. Roofing sheet metal items shall be built into the roofing in strict accordance with directions of roofing manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Gutters shall be provided with baffle-type expansion joint with expansion cap over 1-1/2- inch baffle flange at 40-ft centers. A 1-inch gap between the baffles shall be allowed. B. Flashing at vertical surfaces shall be installed at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and at projections through roof. Corner units shall be factory-fabricated and shall have mitered soldered or welded corner joints, and shall be installed with 3-inch (min) lap joint over flashing on each side. MWH-09/16/03 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL *%0001 CITY OF FORT WORHT MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07600-6 C. Gutters shall be provided to indicated cross-section, complete with shop-fabricated corners, nipple (outlet) sections, joining plates, concealed hangers and downspouts with standoff brackets. D. Gravel stops and copings shall have joints at 10-ft (max) spacing and at 2-1/2 feet from corners. Joints shall be butted with 3/16-inch space centered over matching 8-inch long backing plate with sealer tape in laps. Corner units shall be welded or soldered units. Joints shall be provided with cover plates. E. Flanges of sheet metal items shall be set on continuous sealer tape on top edge envelope ply of roofing. Flanges shall be nailed through sealer tape at 3-inch (max) spacing or securely fastened per Reference Standards. F. Stainless steel wainscots shall be set in waterproof adhesive. Bottom of wainscot shall be surface screwed into blocking with stainless steel countersunk flat head screws. Top and sides shall have concealed hemmed edge and be concealed cleat fastened. Stainless steel wainscots shall not be painted. 3.4 PROTECTIVE COATING A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide protective coating, per Section 09800 - Protective Coating, on all installed visible sheet metal products which are not provided with pre- finish coating system. Color shall match the adjacent surface materials color. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain final color approval from the ENGINEER prior to finish coat application. Colors may vary for each adjacent material. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL CITY OF FORT WORHT MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07600-7 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all roof accessories and appurtenant work as needed to construct a built-up roof, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Trade Standards: National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). B. Manufacturer's Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, roof accessories and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for all roof hatches, Bermuda-type ventilators, and openable fire and smoke hatches with skylights, prior to fabrication. C. Product Information: The manufacturer's specifications, literature, and published installation instructions for each accessory, product, or system shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored on wood blocking in an area that is protected from the elements. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage or marring of finish. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF VENTS A. Roof relief vents with bird screens shall be provided, and shall be of the type recommended by the National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) and approved by the roofing manufacturer. 2.2 ROOF HATCHES A. Design: Vault hatches shall be constructed of aluminum, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be provided with stainless steel hardware, including padlocking hardware inside [and outside,] and neoprene gaskets and seals. 1. Roof hatch, single leaf, 3-ft by 3-ft: Bilco E-50, Babcock-Davis 6-704, or equal. MWH-09/16/03 ROOF ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07720-1 B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc. 2. Bilco Company 2.3 OPENABLE FIRE AND SMOKE HATCH WITH SKYLIGHT A. Design: Skylight shall be a factory-assembled, mechanically-activated hatch with curb. Skylights shall consist of a double white translucent cast acrylic dome mounted on an extruded aluminum condensation gutter and curb frame and an extruded aluminum retaining frame. The top shall open automatically when fusible link is broken. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Bohem Manufacturing Co., Conshohocken, PA; Model "Type FH-D" 2. PAM Hillsdale Industries, Knoxville, TN; Series "1600". 2.4 BERMUDA-TYPE ROOF VENTILATOR (ATTIC VENT) A. Roof attic vents shall be fiber glass, bermuda-type roof ventilators complete with one- piece, molded vent hood with integral mounting frame in each corner braced vertically as well as horizontally. The ventilators shall include a one-piece molded curb with integral internal weather baffle, molded-in cant strip, and a plastic coated galvanized bird screen. Sizes of ventilators indicated are minimum throat sizes. 2.5 PREFABRICATED CURBS A. Design: Opening dimensions shall be coordinated with skylight penetrations, duct penetrations, and roof-mounted equipment sizes. Heights shall be as required to place top of curb not less than 8 inches above top of insulation unless otherwise indicated. The top edge of the curb shall be a level surface for installation, connection, and/or mounting of equipment, skylights, etc. Sides of curbs shall have heights adjusted per job and field conditions and roof stoops. Base flange shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches wide. Curbs shall be fabricated of 14 gage or thicker [aluminum] [galvanized steel] with continuously welded corners and shall be provided with pressure preservative treated, kiln dried, fire-treated wood nailer at top. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Pate Company 2. S & L Manufacturing Company 3. Thybar Corporation. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation shall conform to applicable codes and the manufacturer's published or written recommendations, specifications, and published installation instructions for the MWH-09/16/03 ROOF ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07720-2 type of work being performed. The construction shall be coordinated with the work of other trades. B. Unless otherwise indicated, roof openings, roof-mounted equipment, duct openings, and skylights shall be provided with a prefabricated curb unless the equipment above the ..� roof opening is supplied with its own curb which extends to 8 inches or higher beyond the top of the roof insulation. The prefabricated curb may be part of the equipment item. C. Roof hatches with ladders shall be provided with a ladder-up device. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Roof hatches, openable fire and smoke hatches and roof ventilators shall be installed over prepared openings with their own curbs or prefabricated curbs, and shall be fastened to roof deck in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. Lifting mechanisms and accessories shall be adjusted to insure proper operation. Abraded prime and finish coat surfaces shall be touched-up after completion of installation with the same type finish and the same dry-film thickness. 1. Roof Hatches: Dissimilar metals shall be properly isolated. Thermal movement, up to 100 degrees F change, shall be accommodated without distress in assembly of fasteners. 2. Roof Vents: Roof vents shall be provided on lightweight concrete or lightweight insulating concrete and shall be placed in such a manner so that one vent will be used for venting 1,000 square feet of roof fill. No area shall have fewer than 2 vents. Vents shall not be installed in walk pads or other traffic areas. Vent pipes shall have a coat of plastic cement applied at the joint between the vent pipe and the roofing before aggregate is applied. Roof insulation shall be removed from below vent per NRCA instructions. Roof vents shall be painted to match roofing color. B. Protective Coating: All roof accessories shall be coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating, to match the roofing color unless directed otherwise by the ENGINEER. Primer coats shall be compatible with finish coats. - END OF SECTION - N"nw, MWH-09/16/03 ROOF ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07720-3 SECTION 07920- SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide caulking, sealing, and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. General: Portions of the following standards are incorporated into this Section by references below. The standards are listed here for convenience. B. Federal Specifications TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base, (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) SS-S-200D Sealants, Joint, Two Compound, Jet Blast Resistant, Cold Applied for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. TT-S-00227E Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component, (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) TT-S-00230C Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component, (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) C. Commercial Standards ASTM C 557 Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing ASTM C 834 Latex Sealants ASTM C 919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications ASTM C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM D 1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction ASTM E 84 Standard Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 814 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Through Penetrations: Firestops UL 1479 Underwriter's Laboratory Standard for Safety Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. MWH-09/16/03 SEALANTS AND CAULKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07920-1 B. Technical Data: A complete materials list along with the manufacturer's technical data and literature, specifications, joint width and depth tables, and installation instructions. C. Samples: Samples (including color samples) of all the caulking and sealant materials and other materials proposed for use on the WORK. The samples shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name and product identification. D. Certificates: If requested by the ENGINEER, certificates from an independent testing laboratory approved by the ENGINEER, certifying that the submitted materials meet all the requirements of the ASTM and Federal Specifications cited. E. Warranty: A copy of the manufacturer's warranty covering all sealants, caulking materials, and other materials against defects in materials. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS AND CAULKING MATERIALS A. General 1. Manufacturer's Standards: In addition to the standards listed below, the sealants and caulking products and application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 2. Wherever manufacturer's names and products are listed in this Section, "or equal" products will be considered in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Materials shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Significant Movement Sealants (plus or minus 25 percent movement capability) a. For expansion wall joints; masonry and metal curtainwall joints; precast concrete joints and concrete panels; perimeter sealing (windows, doors, and panels); control joints; interior and non-traffic horizontal joints. 1) Two component, non-sag, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-227E, Class A, Type II, and ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS. Products Research & Chemical Corp. "RC-2" Progress Unlimited "Iso-Flex 2000" 2) One component, non-sag, low modulus, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S230C, Class A, Type li, and ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. Products Research & Chemical Corp. "RC-1" Tremco "Dymonic" 3) One component, non-sag, medium modulus, neutral cure, silicone sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-1543A, Class A, and ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. MWH-09/16/03 SEALANTS AND CAULKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07920-2 Products Research &Chemical Corp. "PRC-4000" Dow Corning "795" b. For horizontal joints exposed to fuel spillage. 1) Two component, self-leveling, fuel resistant, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification SS-S-200D, Type H, and ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade P. Products Research & Chemical Corp. "3105-S" c. For horizontal joints not exposed to fuel spillage. 1) Two component, self-leveling, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-227E, Class A, Type I, and ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade P. Products Research &Chemical Corp. "RC-2SL" Bostic "Chem-Calk 550" 2) One component, self-leveling, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-230C, Class A, Type I, and ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25, Grade P. Products Research & Chemical Corp. "6006" Mameco "Vulkem 45" 2. Glazing Sealants a. For non-structural applications 1) One component, non-sag, medium modulus, neutral cure, silicone sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-1543A, Class A, and ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. Products Research & Chemical Corp. "4000" Dow Corning "795" 2) One component, non-sag, high modulus, acetoxy cure, silicone sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-1543A, Class A, and ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS. 3. Interior Sealant and Caulking a. For general applications 1) One component, acrylic latex caulking conforming to ASTM C 834 Pecora Corp. "AC-20" Bostic "Chem-Calk 600" b. For non-exposed acoustical applications MWH-09/16/03 SEALANTS AND CAULKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07920-3 1) One component, non-drying, non-hardening, non-shrinking, acoustical caulking conforming to ASTM C 557 and ASTM C 919. Inmont Company "Prestite 579.64" Tremco, "Acoustical Sealant" United States Gypsum, "Acoustical Sealant" N%Nole W.W. Henry, "Type 313, Acoustical Sealant" 4. Acoustic Sheet Caulking: For use on all outlet boxes including intercoms, telephone or other services that require penetrations in the walls, acoustic sheet caulking shall be resilient synthetic polymer, self-adhesive, 1/8-inch thick, 6-inch x 8-inch sheet acoustic sealer. Pads shall be Lowry's Electrical Box Pads as manufactured by Harry A. Lowry & Associates, Inc., 11176 Penrose Street, Sun Valley, CA 91352; or equal. 5. Firestop Sealant: Where piping, conduit, wire, or other materials pass through fire rated walls, floors, ceilings or roofs, provide a 1 or [3]-hour fire rated sealant in accordance with ASTM E 814 and UL 1479. Fire-resistant penetration sealant shall be a medium density fire-resistant foam that retains form and stability at high temperature. Fire-resistant sealant shall be Dow-Corning Corporation "3-6548 Silicone RTV" foam; 3M Corporation "Fire Barrier Caulk CP25N, No-sag" or "CP25 S/L, Self-Leveling", as appropriate for the use intended. Equivalent products of General Electric and Metalines, Inc. will also be considered. 6. Preformed Sealants: Preformed sealant shall be polybutylene or isoprene-butylene based pressure sensitive weather resistant tape or bead sealant capable of sealing out moisture, air, and dust when installed as recommended by the manufacturer. At temperatures from minus 30 to plus 160 degrees F, the sealant shall be non- bleeding and shall have no loss of adhesion. 7. Tape Sealant: Dimensions shall be as required for application conditions. Tape sealants shall be type recommended by tape manufacturer for connecting and bonding to surfaces. 8. Joint backing (backer rod) material shall be resilient, closed-cell polyethylene foam conforming to ASTM D 1752, Type II or III, and/or bond breakers of proper size for joint widths. Joint backing shall be compatible with sealant manufacturer's product and shall not stain the sealant nor the materials to which applied. 9. Primer: Primers shall be as recommended in the manufacturer's printed instructions for caulking and sealants, and shall not stain the sealant nor the materials to which applied. Manufacturer shall be consulted for all surfaces not specifically covered in submittal application instructions. Primer shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with all primers being applied prior to the installation of any backer rod or bond breaker tape. 10. Cleaning and cleanup solvents, agents, and accessory materials shall be as recommended in the manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning up. 2.2 COLOR OF SEALANTS A. Color of sealants that are visible after installation shall match adjacent building finish. If in doubt of color match, obtain color approval from ENGINEER. MWH-09/16/03 SEALANTS AND CAULKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07920-4 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken 1%M01 packages or containers bearing the manufacturer's label. Packages or containers shall be delivered to the Site with seals unbroken. B. Shelf Life: Ma rials whose shelf life dates have expired shall not be used in the WORK. Such materials shall be promptly removed from the Site. C. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, in an area that is protected from deleterious elements, and in a manner that will prevent damage to the product. Materials shall be stored at temperatures between 40 and 90 degrees unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: All work under this Section and all testing, where applicable, shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions except where more stringent requirements are indicated herein; and, except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to assure performance of the waterproofing system. B. Authorized Installers: Caulking and sealants shall be complete systems and be installed only by installers authorized and approved by the respective manufacturers. C. Surface Preparation 1. General: The surfaces of joints to be sealed shall be dry. Oil, grease, dirt, chalk, particles of mortar, dust, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances shall be removed from surfaces of joints which will be in contact with the sealant. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned of all rust, mill scale, and other coatings by wire brush, grinding, or sandblasting. Oil and grease shall be removed by cleaning in accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed recommendations. Protective coatings shall be removed from all aluminum surfaces against which caulking or sealing compound is to be placed. Bituminous or resinous materials shall be removed from surfaces to receive caulking or sealants. 2. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such materials, the materials shall be removed by sandblasting or wire brushing. Laitance, efflorescence, and loose mortar shall be removed from the joint cavity. 3. Steel Surfaces: Steel surfaces to be in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted or, if sandblasting would not be practical or would damage adjacent finish WORK, the metal shall be scraped and wire brushed to remove loose mill scale. Protective coatings on steel surfaces shall be removed by sandblasting or by a solvent that leaves no residue. 4. Aluminum Surfaces: Aluminum surfaces to be in contact with sealants shall be cleaned of temporary protective coatings. When masking tape is used for a protective cover, the tape and any residual adhesive shall be removed just prior to MWH-09/16/03 SEALANTS AND CAULKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07920-5 applying the sealant. Solvents used to remove protective coating shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the aluminum work and shall be non-staining. 5. Wood Surfaces: Wood surfaces to be in contact with sealants shall be free of splinters and sawdust or other loose particles. `wool D. Joint Types and Sizes: Joint shapes and sizes shall be as indicated or as necessary for job conditions where not indicated. Joints to be caulked or sealed include through- bolt holes, door frames, louver and ventilator frames, joints between openings where items pass through exterior walls, concrete masonry, or combination of these surfaces, and as otherwise indicated or required for watertightness, weatherproofing, or airtightness. Use sealing compound at both exterior and interior surfaces of exterior wall penetrations. 3.3 SEALANT FILLED JOINTS A. Manufacturer's Representative: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the on-site services of the sealant manufacturer's representative prior to sealant work for inspection of the joints to be sealed and for instructing the installer in the proper use of the materials, if requested by the ENGINEER. B. Sealant: Sealant shall be used before expiration of shelf life. Multi-component sealants shall be mixed according to manufacturer's printed instructions. Sealant in guns shall be applied with a nozzle of proper size to fit the width of joint. Sealant shall be installed to the required depth without displacing the backing. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the manufacturer, the installed sealant shall be tooled so that the surface is uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles and to assure full adhesion to the sides of the joint. Sealants shall be installed free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. Sealer shall be applied over the sealant if recommended by the sealant manufacturer. C. Sealant Depth: Sealant depth in joints shall be 1/2 the width of joint, but not less than 1/8-inch deep and 1/4-inch wide nor more than 1/2-inch deep and 1-inch wide. All joints shall have a rigid filler material installed to proper depth prior to application of sealant. D. Masking Tape: Masking tape shall be placed on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears. Masking tape shall be removed within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and tooled. E. Backing: Backing shall be installed to provide the indicated sealant depth. The installation tool shall be shaped to avoid puncturing the backing. F. Bond-Breaker: Bond-breaker shall be applied to fully cover the bottom of the joint without contaminating the sides where sealant adhesion is required. G. Primer: Primer shall be used on concrete masonry units, wood, or other porous surfaces in accordance with instructions furnished with the sealant. Primer shall be applied to the joint surfaces to be sealed. Surfaces adjacent to joints shall not be primed. H. Applications: A full bead of sealant shall be applied into the joint under sufficient pressure, with the nozzle drawn across sealant, to completely fill the void space and to ensure complete wetting of contact area to obtain uniform adhesion. During application, the tip of the nozzle shall be kept at the bottom of the joint thereby forcing the sealant to MWH-09/16/03 SEALANTS AND CAULKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07920-6 fill from the bottom to the top. Sealants shall be tooled immediately after exposure with a caulking tool or soft bristled brush moistened with solvent. The finished sealant-filled joint shall be slightly concave unless otherwise indicated. I. Acoustic Partition Joints: Acoustic partition joints shall be made air and sound-tight with acoustic caulking material. 1. Partitions shall be sealed where indicated on the Drawings. Gypsum panels may have joint treatment applied in the normal manner over sealed joints, or panels may be finished with base or trim as required. 2. A 1/4-inch minimum round bead of sealant shall be applied around all cut-outs, such as at electrical boxes and air conditioning ducts, sufficient to seal the openings. 3.4 ACOUSTIC CAULKING A. Preparation: Joints and surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, and free of loose materials. B. Concealed Joints: Concealed joints in acoustic partitions including perimeters and intersections of walls and penetrations through finish work and at conduit ends with boxes shall be sealed with acoustic caulking compound. Backs of electrical boxes shall be sealed with acoustic sheet caulking, covering all holes and knock-outs. 3.5 CLEANING A. After application of sealant and caulking materials, adjacent materials which have been soiled shall be cleaned and left in a neat, clean, undamaged, or unstained condition. On porous surfaces, excess sealant shall be removed per sealant or caulking manufacturer's printed instructions. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 SEALANTS AND CAULKING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 07920-7 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide steel doors, frames, and related items, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards ' ASTM A 366 Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality ASTM A 653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM B 117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus ASTM D 1735 Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog Apparatus ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements ANSI A115 Series Door and Frame Preparation UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. B. Trade Standards National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). C. Manufacturers' Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, steel doors and frames and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Show details of the products and systems and connections to adjoining materials. Include schedules showing sizes, types, and locations of door louvers and glass and manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Manufacturer's literature and any engineering calculations that may be required elsewhere in this Section. MWH-09/16/03 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08110-1 3. Calculations by a registered civil or structural engineer showing that the doors, frames, and structural connections are designed to meet code requirements and loads. C. Sound Doors and Frames: Shop Drawings, manufacturer's literature, installation recommendations, and certification of Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating shall be 1%M01 submitted for sound door and frame assemblies. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Steel doors and frames shall be shop fabricated and shop assembled, where possible. Temporary stiffeners, spacers, and other accessories necessary to facilitate handling and accurate erection shall be provided. After fabrication, tool marks and other surface imperfections shall be filled and ground smooth. B. Fire Rating and Labelling: Doors and frames indicated as fire-rated shall bear a UL label indicating the type of rating for which certified. Designs and construction of such products shall have specific UL approval according to current procedures for the fire rating, either 3-hour, 1-1/2-hour, 3/4-hour, or 20-minute as indicated. Hollow steel doors and frames for fire-rated openings shall conform to Underwriters' Laboratories listing and shall be UL labeled. C. Materials for Doors and Frames: Exterior doors and frames shall be fabricated entirely of steel galvanized to G60 in ASTM A 653.. Other doors and frames, unless otherwise indicated, shall be fabricated from prime quality, commercial grade, cold-rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 366, Type II or III. D. Priming and Painting: Doors and frames shall be chemically treated to ensure maximum paint adhesion and shall have all exposed surfaces painted with a rust- inhibitive primer after fabrication. Prime coat shall be capable of passing a 120-hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B 117 and a 250-hour humidity test in accordance with ASTM D 1735. E. Hardware: Doors and frames shall be reinforced and drilled or tapped for fully templated mortised hardware; and shall be reinforced with plates for surface-mounted hardware, meeting ANSI A115 Series requirements. Hardware shall be as indicated in Section 08710- Finish Hardware and as indicated. 2.2 METAL FRAMES A. Pressed Metal Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, windows, and other openings shall be combination buckled frame and trim of type and sizes indicated. Metal shall not be lighter than 16-gage steel. Frames shall be of the welded unit type. Special frames, oversized frames, and frames with transom shall be provided where indicated. B. Frame Jamb Depths, Trim Profile, Stops, and Backbends: Frame jamb depths, trim profile, stops, and backbends shall be as indicated. C. Windows: Window frames shall be provided complete with anchors and metal stops for glazing. Stops shall be miter-cut and dipped for countersunk flathead fasteners. MWH-09/16/03 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08110-2 2.3 FRAME ANCHORS A. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors shall be welded inside each frame jamb head, and holes shall be provided for floor anchorage. Minimum thickness of floor anchors shall be 14- gage. B. Anchors for Masonry/Concrete Installations: Frames for installation in masonry and concrete walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb anchors of the T-strap, stirrups and strap, or wire type. The number of anchors provided per frame jamb and head shall be as follows: 1. Frames up to 7 feet 6 inches in height: 3 anchors. 2. Frames over 7 feet 6 inches to 8 feet 0 inches in height: 4 anchors. 3. Frames over 8 feet 0 inches in height: One anchor for each 2 feet 0 inches or fraction in height. 4. Frame head anchors shall be not less than those required by the Reference Standards. C. Anchors for Stud Wall Installation: Frames for installation in stud partitions shall be provided with steel anchors of suitable design for job conditions. They shall be not less than 18-gage thickness; and shall be securely welded inside each jamb and head as follows: 1. Frames up to 7 feet 6 inches in height: 3 anchors. 2. Frames over 7 feet 6 inches to 8 feet 0 inches in height: 5 anchors. 3. Frames over 8 feet 0 inches in height: 5 anchors plus one additional for each 2 feet 0 inches or fraction over 8 feet 0 inches. 4. Frame head anchors shall be not less than those required by the Reference Standards. D. Anchors to Existing Construction: Frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete, masonry, or structural steel shall be provided with anchors of suitable design to meet job requirements or as indicated. 2.4 DUST COVER BOXES AND MORTAR GUARDS A. Dust cover boxes or mortar guards of not less than 24-gage steel shall be provided at all hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry, concrete, or plaster walls. 2.5 SILENCER HOLES A. Appropriate holes for silencers shall be provided in the door frames which are not designated to receive weatherstripping, seals, or sound seals. 2.6 STEEL DOORS A. Design and Construction: Steel doors shall be of hollow metal construction and shall be full flush design with no visible seams. Face sheets shall be not less than cold-rolled, { MWH-09/16/03 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08110-3 stretcher-levelled, 18-gage steel. Doors shall have flush seamless face sheets with continuously and fully welded seam edges. Doors shall be rigid and neat in appearance, and shall be free from warpage or buckle. Corner bends shall be true and straight and shall be of not less than the minimum radius for the gage of metal used. The door top and bottom shall be internally reinforced by steel members welded in place. Tops of exterior doors shall be provided with flush, water- and weather-tight top enclosures. B. Transom Panels: Transom panels shall be provided where indicated and shall be of same construction as doors. C. Door and Transom Cores: Doors and transom cores shall be water-resistant fiber glass or mineral with minimum R of 4 or urethane with minimum R of 11 fiberboard. Fire rated doors shall be solid or fiber mineral core doors as required to meet code and Reference Standards requirements. D. Monorail Doors: Monorail doors shall be constructed similar to the other steel doors except that they shall be notched for the monorail, provided with a T-type astragal, and specially engineered for their size and application. Engineering shall include reinforcement for hardware and anchors and anchor sizing. Neoprene weatherstripping flaps shall be provided at the monorail penetration. Shop Drawings shall include manufacturer's engineering calculations if requested by the ENGINEER. E. Louvers: Louvers for steel doors shall be extruded aluminum of the type which integrally frames the opening and can be securely attached. Louvers shall be of the inverted "Y" blade type for exterior use and "V" blade for interior use. Exterior louvered openings shall be provided with removable type insect screens. Door louvers shall be uniformly located in doors and shall be of sizes indicated. Louvers at labeled doors shall be equipped with concealed fusible links. Extruded aluminum louvers shall be provided and be clear anodized. F. Glazed Openings: Glazed openings in doors shall be of sizes indicated, provided with *%Mow, mitered metal stops. Glazed openings in fire-rated doors shall meet UL requirements. Glass shall be 1/4-inch tempered plate glass. G. Double Doors: Double doors shall be provided with a "T" type,steel astragal unless otherwise indicated in Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. H. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Forderer Cornice Works 2. Krieger Steel Products Co. 3. Overly Manufacturing Co. 4. Trussbuilt, Inc. 2.7 SOUND DOORS AND FRAMES A. Door and Frame Assemblies: Sound doors and frames shall be complete, factory- built, and laboratory-tested assemblies, complete with perimeter compression seals and automatic, door-bottom seals at sill. MWH-09/16/03 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08110-4 B. STC Rating: Sound door assemblies shall have a minimum STC rating of 40 dB. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a written certification by the door manufacturer stating that the STC rating is in accordance with ASTM E 90 as conducted by a qualified acoustical products testing laboratory. C. Door Construction: Doors shall be formed of 16-gage steel face sheets jointed by welding along the vertical edges. Door tops and bottoms shall be reinforced and completely closed with die-formed, 16-gage steel channels welded in place. The core shall be an incombustible, noncoupling filler. An astragal shall be provided at pairs of doors. Exterior doors shall be provided with flush, water- and weather-tight top enclosures. D. Frame Construction: Frames shall be fabricated from 14-gage steel with the corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Strike, hinge, and other hardware reinforcement shall be of not less than 3/16-inch thick steel. The frame shall be provided with welded floor anchors at each jamb, and with a minimum of 3 wall anchors per jamb. E. Perimeter Seals: Perimeter seals shall be made of sturdy vinyl with a magnetic tape insert. The hinge side shall be constructed so as to avoid pinching or other distortion of the seal from opening and closing of the door. F. Automatic Door Bottoms: Automatic door bottoms shall close the entire gap between the door and the floor. The seal shall be 50-60 durometer neoprene, and the actuating mechanism shall compress or retract the seal properly when the outer face of the door is within 2-inches of the strike jamb. G. Half Lite: Sound doors with half lite shall be double-glazed with 2 panes of 1/4-inch tempered float glass unless indicated otherwise. The doors shall be constructed similar to other sound doors but shall not require STC certification. H. Cleaning and Priming: Doors, frames, and seal retainers shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized, and factory primed with rust-inhibitive primer. The primer shall be compatible with the finish coating in Section 09800 - Protective. I. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Krieger Steel Products Co. 2. Overly Manufacturing Co. 3. Sonicbar by Rysdon Products Co. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Doors and frames shall be shipped and stored with temporary stiffeners and spacers in place to prevent distortion. B. Doors and frames shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. MWH-09/16/03 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08110-5 C. Doors and frames shall be carefully stored on wood blocking in an area that is protected from the elements. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage or marring of finish. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION A. General: WORK shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. B. WORK shall be coordinated with appropriate related subcontractors work to assure a proper installation. Field conditions and dimensions shall be verified prior to fabrication. 3.3 FRAME INSTALLATION A. Frames shall be set plumb and square in a true plane, and be securely anchored to the adjoining construction. Steel shims shall be provided, set tight and rigidly attached between frame anchors and structure. Finished metal frames shall be strong and rigid; neat in appearance; and square, true, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. B. Molded members, trims, and stops, shall be clean cut, straight, and shall be of a uniform profile throughout their lengths. C. Corner joints shall have contact edges tightly closed with all trim faces mitered, welded, and finished smooth. The use of gussets will not be permitted. 3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION A. Doors shall be installed plumb, square, and level. Doors shall operate freely, but not loosely. They shall be free from rattling while in a closed position. B. Door clearances shall be plus 3/32-inch or minus 1/32-inch and shall not exceed the limits in the manufacturer's printed recommendations. C. Any door that becomes warped more than 3/16-inch out-of-plane shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR. D. Doors and finish hardware shall be removed and rehung have hardware protected prior to painting. 3.5 FINISH HARDWARE A. Finish hardware shall be installed in accordance with hardware manufacturer's standard templates and printed instructions. Operable parts shall be adjusted for correct function and operation. 3.6 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Frames that are dimpled for fasteners required for installation into previously placed (existing) concrete, masonry, or steel structures shall have the fasteners and fastener frame dimples filled with auto putty or an equal filler material. Fasteners and fillers at dimple holes shall be ground smooth (non-visible) before painting. Fastener locations shall not be visible after the painting work is finished. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08110-6 SECTION 08330 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide overhead door assemblies and frames and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SIPE:CIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications QQ-S-775E, Int. Amd. 1 Steel Sheets, Carbon, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) By The Hot-dip Process B. Commercial Standards NEMA National Electric Manufacturers' Association NEC National Electric Code C. Trade Standards Aluminum Association: Anodizing Systems D. Manufacturers' Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, overhead doors and their installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's literature, wiring diagrams, manufacturer's installation instructions, and any engineering calculations that may be required elsewhere in this Section. Calculations by a registered civil or structural engineer shall be submitted to show that the overhead door systems and structural connections are designed to meet code requirements and loads. C. Shop Drawings: Details of the products and systems and connections to adjoining materials, along with any manufacturer's installation instructions. Schedules showing sizes, types, and locations of louvers and glass shall be submitted. D. O and M Instructions: Upon completion, the CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the ENGINEER complete operation and maintenance instructions for the overheard door assemblies. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original and unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. MWH-09/16/03 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08330-1 B. Storage: Materials shall be carefully stored in an area that is protected from the elements. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage or marring of the door and its finish. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROLL-UP DOORS A. General: Roll-up doors shall be of the galvanized steel metal-curtain slat design and shall be motor-operated, and shall be weather and dust-resistant. Wiring diagrams shall be submitted for motor-operated doors. Doors shall be provided complete with slats, guides, hoods, reduction gears, galvanized hand chain, operating mechanism, motors, controls, wiring, brackets, gears, head, bottom and side weather stripping, hardware, and all other items necessary for installation and operation. B. Wind Loading: The doors shall be designed to withstand a wind load of 20 Ib/sq ft. C. Curtain Slats: Curtain slats shall be roll-formed from galvanized steel sheet conforming to FS QQ-S-775-E Int. Amd. 1, Type I, class D. Curtain slats shall be flat Cookson No. 5; Kinnear No. 17; or equal, and shall be of a gauge size suitable for dimension and loading of the opening, but shall be not lighter than 20 gauge. Slats shall be insulated. D. Endlocks: Endlocks shall be continuous malleable iron castings, designed to provide for curtain alignment and security against lateral movement. E. Bottom Bar: The bottom bar shall consist of 2 angles galvanized and bolted back-to- back on each side of curtain, to suit floor profile. A replaceable flexible vinyl or neoprene gasket shall be provided as a weather seal and cushion bumper. A reversing footpiece shall be provided at motor-operated doors unless otherwise indicated. F. Guides and Stops: Guides shall consist of a galvanized steel angle assembly of proper size to retain the curtain. Guides shall be provided with weatherstripping. Angle thickness shall be minimum 3/16-inch. Jamb angles shall be anchored to the supporting walls with 3/8-inch bolts spaced at 30-inches on centers, and extending above door opening head to support the coil brackets. Removable stops on guides to prevent over- travel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding windlocks, where required, shall be provided. G. Barrel Assembly and Balancing Mechanism: The barrel shall be a steel pipe of sufficient diameter and thickness to support the roll-up curtain without distortion of slats, and to limit deflection of the barrel to not more than 0.03-inch per foot of span under full load. The barrel shall have a minimum diameter of 4-inches. The spring balance shall consist of one or more helical torsion springs of oil-tempered heat-treated steel to transfer full load to a single steel torsion bar in the barrel. Rotating members shall turn on self-lubricating graphite or grease-sealed ball bearings, with adjustment for counterbalance springs accessible from outside barrel. Brackets shall be 5/16-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel plate, or equal strength cast iron, attached to the jamb angle guide with 1/2-inch bolts. Brackets shall have a bell-mouth guide groove for the curtain. H. Hood: The hood shall be manufactured of 24-gauge galvanized steel sheet with bonderized treatment. The hood shall fit over the end brackets. Top and bottom edges of hood shall be rolled and reinforced for stiffness, and intermediate supports shall be provided as necessary. The hood baffle shall be of neoprene and sheet metal. MWH-09/16/03 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08330-2 I. Chain Holder: A chain holder shall be provided on wall with provision for padlocking. J. Manual Operation Features: Manual operation shall be accomplished by endless chain, sprocket, and reduction gearing to the barrel, designed to require not more than a 35-lb pull on the chain to move curtain. Sprockets and gears shall have machine cut teeth, or shall be machine-molded. Bearings shall be lubricated for life and self-aligning, either self-lubricating graphite bearings or grease-sealed precision ball bearings, depending on size of door. Operating chain shall be hot-dip galvanized, located at side of door and shall be continuous loop design that extends to a point approximately 24- inches above the floor. Chain and gear guards shall be provided as necessary for protection against malfunction or personal hazard. K. Motor Operation Features: Motor operation shall be pushbutton control unless otherwise indicated. Electrically-operated doors shall be driven by an integral power unit that has been approved by Underwriters Laboratories. The unit shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following principal components, all enclosed in a weathertight housing: 1. Gear reducer, totally enclosed and operating in an oil bath. 2. Emergency hand chain operator and electrical interlock. 3. High torque, totally enclosed motor with thermal protective device. 4. Disc brake. 5. Power supply shall be 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-Hz. 6. Combination starter, prewired when permitted under the National Electric Code. 7. Motor and brake shall be removable without affecting chain operator or limit switch setting. Power unit shall connect to operating shaft to raise and lower the door at approximately one foot per second without the use of external gears, belts, or chain. Electrical leads between motor, brake, protective device, interlock, and limit switch shall be factpry prewired. The motor-operated doors shall be equipped with an electrical device to stop downward travel of door on contact with an object. 8. Operators shall be equipped with a NEMA motor controller, complete with overcurrent protection and 3-button pushbutton station marked "Open," "Close," and °Stop." At interior locations, NEMA 1 motor controllers shall be used; and at exterior locations, NEMA 4 motor controllers shall be used. 9. The motor-operated doors, motors, controls, safety devices, and wiring shall conform to requirements of governing codes and authorities. L. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Cookson, Type FCM Motor 2. Kinnear, FPO-20. M. Wicket Doors: Wicket doors, where shown, shall be 1-3/4-inch thick, 3-ft wide by 7-ft high unless otherwise shown, conforming to Specification Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. Wicket door frames shall be of all-welded construction of heavy angle steel. Wicket door frames shall be secured in closed position by means of heavy-duty MWH-09/16/03 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08330-3 cane bolt into the floor slab. Doors shall be provided with heavy-duty stainless steel hinges, shop painted, and shall be adapted, reinforced, and cut for finish hardware as specified in Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. N. Primer and Priming: Curtains and wicket doors shall be provided with a baked acrylic which is compatible with the finish paint in Section 09800 - Protective Coating or Section **Moll 09900 - Architectural Paint Finishes, as applicable. All other metal parts, exposed and concealed, and doors, shall be shop-primed with primer which is compatible with finish paint indicated. The inside working area of the guides shall not be painted. 2.2 OVERHEAD SECTIONAL DOORS A. General: Overhead sectional doors shall be of the heavy-duty rolled galvanized steel type, upward-acting, complete with stiles and rails, hardware, locks, panels, tracks, weatherstripping, and glass. Doors shall be standard lift type doors. B. Wind Load and Deflection: Doors shall be engineered to withstand a 20 Ib/sq ft wind load and a maximum 1/120 of door width deflection with door in horizontal position. C. Power Drive: Power-drive doors shall be provided with power unit, operators, controls, conduit and wiring; all meeting applicable codes. Door bottom shall be equipped with safety edge device providing automatic stop and reverse. D. Door Construction: Doors shall be made up of heavy-gage steel stiles, and rails shall be made into a number of equal sections and panels. Doors shall be provided with inside padlocking hardware. Tracks shall be not less than 3-inch galvanized steel tracks. E. Glazing: Glass shall be wire-reinforced glass unless indicated otherwise. F. Power Unit: Power unit shall be heavy-duty, 1'h-hp 480-volt, 3-phase motor. Operators shall be equipped with a NEMA motor controller, complete with overcurrent protection and 3-button pushbutton station marked "Open," "Close," and "Stop." At interior locations, NEMA 1 motor controllers shall be used; and at exterior locations, NEMA 4 motor controllers shall be used. The motor-operated doors, motors, controls, safety devices, and wiring shall conform to requirements of governing codes and authorities. G. Primer and Finish: Aluminum shall have 0.7-mil minimum thickness hard coat anodic finish conforming to Aluminum Association System AA-M10C22A42, dark bronze color. All exposed non-aluminum metal shall be shop painted with manufacturer's standard primer. H. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Clopay Square Corporation, 900 2. Overhead Door Corporation, 520 Insulated Series PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions. MWH-09/16/03 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS %mole CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08330-4 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Doors and frames shall be accurately cut, fitted, and installed level, square, plumb, and in alignment. Fasteners shall be of sufficient length, and shall be sized for loads imposed. Doors'and frames shall be provided with accurately made cutouts, and shall be reinforced for strength where necessary. Doors shall be adjusted to provide smooth, unbinding operation with all hardware fully operable. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08330-5 SECTION 08710- FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all finish hardware and appurtenant work, complete, all in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The work hereunder shall include all fabrication and mounting templates as needed for fabricators and for control of application of metal items. C. In addition thereto, the CONTRACTOR shall provide all trim, attachments, and fastenings specified or required for proper and complete installation. The work of this Section shall include all hardware that is not specified in other sections, whether or not such hardware is herein specifically scheduled. D. The CONTRACTOR shall protect the finish hardware from damage during construction, painting, and clean-up. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. requirements and approvals. Hardware Institute (DHI) "Recommended Procedure for Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates" and "Architectural Hardware Scheduling and Format" BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers'Association B. Manufacturers' Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, the finish hardware and its installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Samples: The samples of all items requested by the ENGINEER shall be furnished by the hardware supplier no later than 10 days after said request is received. C. Manufacturer's Information: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a complete detailed hardware list and a schedule along with manufacturer's literature on each item for approval. No hardware shall be delivered until the hardware schedule has been approved by the ENGINEER. D. The hardware schedule submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall list the actual product series numbers. Manufacturer's catalog requirements for actual size of door closers, brackets, and holders shall be observed. All door sizes shall be noted on the hardware schedule and all hardware shall be in strict accordance with height, width, and thickness requirements. MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-1 E. The schedule shall indicate groups, type, manufacturer's name, catalog number, location, and finish of each item to be provided, all in accordance with the DHI "Architectural Hardware Scheduling Sequence and Format." F. The schedule shall also include a complete template list showing template references and data for each item requiring preparation of metal doors and frames. G. Hardware for aluminum doors may be included in a separate section of the schedule. 1.4 PROPRIETARY DESIGNATIONS A. Manufacturer's product names, numbers, and models are given herein for the purpose of indicating the requirements for the type, general construction, material, and operation of the specific item, not with the intention of limiting the item to the manufacturer's listed product. Substitution of another manufacturer's product that is fully equivalent in all respects may be made subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to supply detailed and complete data to the ENGINEER as required to facilitate appropriate evaluation of all proposed substitute items. 1.5 PACKING, MARKING, AND DELIVERY A. All locks, exit devices, door closers, overhead door holders, hinges, kickplates, pulls and push plates, thresholds, and other similar items shall be individually packed in separate, suitable, original, containers as furnished by the hardware manufacturers. Each container shall be clearly marked with item numbers, article numbers, and names corresponding to those listed in the hardware schedule. B. Small miscellaneous items that would not require specific location identifications, such as door stops, coat and hat hooks, and door silencers may be quantity packed if properly labeled with item numbers and other identification. C. CONTRACTOR shall check the hardware upon delivery with the aid of a representative of the hardware supplier's firm. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the proper storage of all hardware until ready for application. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Finish hardware shall be coordinated with all other work requiring builder's hardware or attaching to it. Copies of schedules, templates, etc., shall be furnished in ample time to avoid fabrication and construction delays. Each item of hardware shall be identified according to the approved list and schedule. All hardware shall be made to template. B. All hardware furnished in connection with doors bearing Underwriters' Labels or where necessary to meet special requirements shall be in strict accordance with conditions established by the authority having jurisdiction and shall be subject to approval of that authority. C. Hand of lock shall be as shown. If door hand is changed during construction, the CONTRACTOR shall make necessary changes at no extra cost to the OWNER. MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-2 D. Exit doors shall be openable at all times from the inside without the use of key or any special knowledge or effort. E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the hardware supplier with approved shop drawings from those trades with which hardware must be coordinated. After checking these shop drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly supply necessary template information to all concerned as may be required to facilitate the progress of the job. All procedures for template information shall be in accordance with the handbook, "Recommended Procedure for Processing Hardware Schedules and Templates." F. Finish of all hardware shall be 630 (brush stainless steel) 613 (oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed) unless otherwise specified in the hardware schedule. G. Manufacturer, or Equal: 1. Adams Rite, Los Angeles, CA 2. Builders Brass, Los Angeles, CA 3. Door Control, Ann Arbor, MI 4. Dor-O-Matic, Chicago, IL 5. Glynn-Johnson, Chicago, IL 6. Grant,West Nyak, NY 7. Hager, St. Louis, MO 8. Knape Vogt, Grand Rapids, MI 9. LCN-Closers, Princeton, IL 10. McKinney, Scranton, PA 11. Norton, Charlotte, NC 12. Pemko Mfg. Co., Emeryville, CA 13. P & F Corbin, Berlin, CT 14. Quality Hardware, Hawthorne, CA 15. Rixson-Firemark, Franklin Park, IL 16. Russwin, Berlin, CT 17. Sargent, New Haven, CT 18. Schlage, San Francisco, CA 19. The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT 20. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-3 21. Von Duprin Inc., Indianapolis, IN 22. Zero Weatherstripping, Burbank, CA 2.2 KEYING A. All locks and cylinders shall be masterkeyed to the OWNER'S requirements as directed by the ENGINEER. B. All lock cylinders shall be construction masterkeyed or provided with construction cylinders and construction keys. Five construction master keys shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR, of which 3 may be retained by the CONTRACTOR for use during construction, and the remaining 2 construction keys shall be provided to the ENGINEER for its use. C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish 5 keys per cylinder keying combination. All keys along with 5 master keys shall be delivered to the ENGINEER at the completion of the job. D. All keying (except when matching existing keying system or when less than 10 locksets are required) shall be done at the factory unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. E. A keying schedule shall be worked out between the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR, and the hardware supplier. The CONTRACTOR shall have the hardware supplier submit a keying schedule for approval prior to placing an order for the locks and keying of cylinders. 2.3 FASTENERS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to secure the hardware into position. The fasteners shall match the hardware in material and finish. B. The hardware provided, such as expansion bolts, sex bolts, toggle bolts and other approved anchorages shall be coordinated with the job and to each setting condition. C. Phillips head screws shall be used at exposed conditions. Machine screws shall be used at metal doors and frames. 2.4 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Two hinges or pivots shall be provided for each door leaf up to and including 5 feet in height, and an additional hinge shall be added for each 2-1/2 feet or fractions thereof of additional door height. Dutch doors shall be provided with not less than 2 pairs of hinges. B. Width of hinges shall be determined by trim conditions. C. Ball-bearing hinges shall be furnished on all doors having door closers and/or exit devices. All ball-bearing hinges shall have flush tips. D. All hinges on exterior doors shall be provided with non-removable pins and security studs. MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-4 E. Hinges shall be 630 (brush finished) stainless steel 613 (oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed) unless otherwise specified in the finish hardware schedule. F. Hinges and sizes shall be as follows: Door Door Hinge Thickness Width Height (inches) (inches) Hinge Width (inches) 1-3/8 36 and under Reg. Wt., interior use only 3-1/2 1-3/8 37 and over Reg. Wt., interior use only 4 1-3/4 30 and under Reg. Wt., interior use/exterior use 4-1/2 1-3/4 30 to 39 Reg. Wt., interior use 4-1/2 Hvy. Wt., exterior use 1-3/4 40 and over Reg. Wt., 4 ball bearing, interior use 4-1/2 Hvy. Wt., 4 ball bearing, exterior use G. Hinges shall be plain bearing type (regular weight) conforming to BHMA No. A 2133; ball bearing hinges (regular weight) conforming to BHMA No. A 2112 or No. A 5112; and/or ball bearing hinges (heavy weight) conforming to BHMA No. A 2111 or No. A 5112. Hinge manufacturers design options such as 3-knuckle hinges and concealed ball bearing hinges are acceptable. Plain hinges shall be provided with self lubricating bushings. 2.5 FLOOR CLOSERS A. Floor closers shall be used on all aluminum doors, and shall be Rixson 27 series; Dor- O-Matic 2500; or equal. 2.6 OVERHEAD CLOSERS A. All overhead closers shall be the product of one manufacturer. Closers shall have high- strength cast-iron cases with rectangular covers, adjustable spring power and adjustable back-check, and full rack and pinion action. Closers shall have back-check regulating screws, with separate screws for closing and latching speeds. B. Surface door closers shall be spray painted to match door hardware. C. Soffit shoes shall be provided where corner brackets or regular arm closers are not used and where they are necessary for proper function of the hardware. D. Where door closers or other items have lever or similar arms, attachment to doors shall be with sex bolts only. E. Closers for outswinging exterior doors shall be top-jamb-mounted and furnished with adapter plates for doors under 7 feet-6 inches in height. If necessary, closers may be mounted on drop brackets on doors above 7 feet-6 inches in height. F. Closers shall be Corbin-Russwin DC-6420 or equal, unless noted otherwise. MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-5 G. The CONTRACTOR and its hardware supplier shall be responsible to provide the right arm with the closers. Arms shall be parallel with the closed door whenever possible. H. Closers shall be provided with sex bolts for fastening through doors, frames and transoms. 2.7 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS A. All locksets and latchsets shall be mortise type with anti-friction 2-piece latchbolts with a minimum 3/4-inch-throw and 1-inch-throw dead bolts with hardened roller inserts. Locksets and latchsets at fire rated doors shall meet code requirements and shall be modified as necessary. All locksets, latchsets, privacy sets, and passage sets shall be provided with lever handles conforming to handicapped person requirements unless specified elsewhere. All locksets and latchsets shall be provided with satin stainless steel finish 630 (US 32D) unless otherwise specified. Exterior knobs, levers, and trim for cold weather locations shall be coated with a clear "Teflon" coating. B. Function of locksets or latchsets shall be appropriate for doors use. Lever Type Hardware (Meeting Handicap Requirements) Knobtvpe Hardware Trim Solid Flat-Round Mfr. Series Design Mfr. Series 1.Corbin L9500 9771_4 1. Corbin 9500-763 2.Russwin L5000 L-4 Newport 2. Russwin 5000-Ronde 3KS x 3952-1/4 Rose 3.Sargent 15-18-8100 LNL 3. Sargent 15-18-7700 KDA 4.Schlage L9000 06A 4. Schlage K 9000x42A (or equal) (or equal) C. Hardware for aluminum entrance doors shall be Adam Rite hardware or equal, as specified in schedule. The hardware face plate design shall be co-ordinated with doors provided. D. Where knob type trim is specified for locksets, latchsets, and privacy sets the trim shall be cast spherical knobs of 2-inch diameter minimum, 2-1/4 inch wrought roses (screwless attached) and thru-bolted trim. The knob and trim mounting (rose, escutcheon) shall be similar and equal to the following shank spindle assembly designs: 1. Corbin, "PK" 2. Russwin, "RONDURE" 3. Sargent, "BC". E. Mortise deadlocks shall be of weight and quality comparable to locksets and latchsets specified. MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-6 F. Lock strikes shall be boxed type of sufficient length and having curved lips to protect the trim and jambs and be so shaped as to avoid the possibility of tearing clothing. All strikes shall be provided with metal strike boxes. G. All locks shall be provided with the same cylinder and keyway for master keying. They shall be the product of the same manufacturer as the locksets unless otherwise specified. The correct cylinders with all necessary modifications and components such as cams, collars, rings, retainers, plates, fasteners, etc., shall be provided for other specialty hardware such as exit devices, store front locksets, and sliding door locks where the hardware manufacture specified is different than cylinder manufacturer. H. Padlocks shall be heavy duty type, keyed as directed and shall be of same manufacturer as locksets. 2.8 EXIT DEVICES A. All exit devices shall be the product of one manufacturer. The design of outside trim, inside trim, and crossbar shall match. Exit device shall be (wherever possible) constructed of stainless steel unless otherwise specified. The finish shall be 630 (US 32D) satin finish stainless steel unless otherwise specified. Exit devices shall be UL labeled and shall be of corrosive-resistant hardware. B. The exit devices shall have side-mounted crossbars unless otherwise specified. They shall be provided with stainless steel lever arms and investment-cast cases. Where bronze or aluminum lever arms are required they shall be drop-forged with pressure-cast cases. C. The exit devices shall be provided with stainless steel latch bolt, tailpiece, latch bolt retractor and axle, compression springs, cylinder cam, and lever arm operating stand. Tail piece shall be cadmium plated steel of not less than 3/8-inch diameter. The cylinder shall be retained in the case by a threaded bronze ring. All other interior working members shall be drop-forged bronze. The back plate shall be constructed of stainless steel or bronze. All screws, pins, socket head retaining screws, and other fasteners shall be stainless steel unless otherwise specified. 2.9 PUSH PLATES AND PULLS A. Push plates shall be 4-inch by 16-inch by 0.050 thick, Quality #40; BBW #47; Rockwood #70; or equal. B. Pulls shall be thru-bolted Quality 402; BBW 5034; or equal. 2.10 KICKPLATES A. Kickplates shall be stainless steel, 0.050-gage, beveled on 3 sides, and 16 inches high, except where necessary to clear a louver in which case they shall be 10 inches high. Width shall be door size less 2 inches for single doors and door width less 1-1/2 inches for pairs of doors. Kickplates shall be Builders Brass Works 37 Series; Quality Manufacturing 48 Series; or equal. 2.11 DOOR STOPS A. Door stops shall be of the type specified in the hardware schedule and shall be provided with the proper fasteners. MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-7 B. Stops shall be provided with machine screws and anchors at concrete and masonry conditions, and toggle bolts at plaster, gypsum board, and wood conditions. Floor Floor Wall Stop Wall Stop Stop Stop w/Holder/ w/Holder/ w/Holder Dome EB FHWS BBW F-823X F-8061 X W-141 X W-140 QUALITY 139 431 ES 136 36 GOV'T# 1329E 7330 E 1321 E 1321 Wall Dome Wall Dome Wall Stop/ Wall Stop Stop Base/ Stop/ w/EB w/TB EB Base BBW W9X W9T W-145X W-145 QUALITY W 307S 307 TB 138 38 GOV'T# 1326 1326E 1320E 1320 C. Aluminum door stops shall be used with aluminum, chrome, and stainless steel finishes. D. Bronze door stops shall be used with brass and bronze finishes. 2.12 HOLDERS A. Overhead type door holders shall be concealed type of correct size for door, 90 degree openable unless 180 degree opening shown, and allowing for checkmating. Interior doors shall be provided with overhead stops if wall type stops can not be used and floor stops make a tripping hazard. Finish shall'be chrome plated bronze with satin finish, US 26D, unless otherwise specified. Door holders shall be one of the following, or equal: Concealed Overhead Surface Overhead Corbin 840 Corbin 1880 FS type 1164 FS type 1161 Glynn-Johnson 320 Series Glynn-Johnson 90M 2.13 SILENCERS OR MUTES A. All interior doors shall be provided with rubber silencers, 3 for each single door and 2 for each pair of doors. Silencers or mutes shall be one of the following, or equal: Metal Frames Wood Frames GJ 64 GJ 65 Sargent 3446 Sargent 3445 2.14 THRESHOLDS A. All doors so detailed shall receive a threshold similar to that specified with a maximum of 1/2-inch rise at entry ways. Return miters shall be furnished at thresholds on floor closers. MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE ! CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-8 2.15 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. Weatherstripping and seals shall be as manufactured by Pemko Manufacturing Co.; National Guard Products Inc. (NGP); Zero Weatherstripping Co.; or equal. B. Exterior doors (except for roll-up doors and entrance doors) shall have head, jambs, and astragals weatherstripped with not less than 5/16-inch by 5/8-inch closed cell, neoprene sponge rubber, unless otherwise specified or shown. C. Interior doors shall have head, jambs, and astragals sealed with self-adhesive bubble configuration door seal designed against smoke, air, sound, and weather infiltration. The seals shall be fire tested and labeled as a gasketing for use on steel frames with wood or steel doors for 20-minutes C-label, 1 hour B-label, and 1-1/2-hour B-label doors. Seals shall be S88D by Pemko; #TM 181 by NGP: or equal. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All required items of hardware, including cylinders for locks, and all fitting, adjusting, and securing of each item neatly and firmly in place, shall be in perfect working order. Any work less than this shall form a basis for corrective measures. B. All finish hardware shall be fitted and dismantled before painting work and shall be reinstalled after finish painting work provided with paint protection prior to painting work. The paint protection shall be removed after completion of the painting work and the finish hardware cleaned and polished. 3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The hardware schedule is arranged for convenience of locating hardware and does not preclude in any way the requirements that all necessary hardware shall be furnished and properly installed. Hardware not specifically called out shall be similar to that required for similar uses. B. Hardware Set #1: Locations: Doors D-101, D-103, and D-104 Hinges: Hvy. Wt., 4 ball bearing, exterior use Closer: Corbin-Russwin DC6420 Exit Device: 630 Satin finish Stainless Steel Kick Plate: Quality Manufacturing 48 Series Lockset: Lever Type, Russwin L5000 Holders: Corbin 840 C. Hardware Set #2: Location: Door D-100 Hinges: Reg. Wt., 4 ball bearing, interior use Closer: Corbin-Russwin DC2420 MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-9 Lockset: Lever Type, Russwin L5000 Holders: Corbin 840 3.3 LATCHES AND BOLTS A. Latches and bolts shall be installed to automatically engage in keepers, whether activated by closers or by manual push. In no case should additional manual pressure be required to engage latch or bolt in keepers. 3.4 CLOSERS AND HINGES A. Closers and hinges shall be carefully adjusted to operate the doors noiselessly and evenly, and hinges shall be installed so as not to bind. Closers, closer arms, and hold- open arms shall be attached with sex bolts. B. Except at exterior doors, closers shall not be mounted on corridor or vestibule side of door. 3.5 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. All doors shall be provided with weatherstripping or seals unless mutes, product weatherstripping or other special seals are specified. Whenever two types of seals are shown on the Finish Hardware Schedule on a given door they both are to be provided. 3.6 PROTECTIVE TAPE AND COATINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a strippable coating or removable tape protection or other approved means to prevent any damage or staining of hardware during construction. Such protective measures shall be removed prior to final cleaning and the hardware polished before OWNER'S acceptance of project. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 FINISH HARDWARE w CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 08710-10 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide gypsum board and appurtenances, complete and in place, in accordalnce with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications QQ-W-461 H Wire, Steel, Carbon (Round, Bare, and Coated) B. Commercial Standards ASTM C 36 Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C 208 Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board ASTM C 475 Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board ASTM C 514 Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board ASTM C 630 Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ASTM C 754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products ASTM C 1177 Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing ASTM D 2626 Asphalt — Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. Trade Standards GA-203-71 (Gypsum Assn.) Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members to Receive Gypsum Board GA-216-85 (Gypsum Assn.) Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board GA-600-78 (Gypsum Assn.) Fire Resistance Manual D. Manufacturers' Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, gypsum board products and their installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. MWH-09/16/03 GYPSUM BOARD CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09250-1 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers' literature, installation instructions, and samples of metal trim and furring devices shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Labelling: Fire-rated materials shall bear testing agency labels and required fire classification numbers. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Gypsum board shall be fire-rated unless otherwise indicated. B. Gypsum Wall Board: Gypsum wall board shall be 5/8-inch thick with tapered edges unless otherwise indicated. 1. Regular gypsum boards shall conform to ASTM C 36, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fire-rated gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 36, type "x", unless otherwise indicated. 3. Water-resistant gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 630, regular, type "x". 4. Tile backing board shall be a Portland cement slurry, reinforced with fiberglass mesh and coated vinyl board. The board shall be not less than 1/2-inch thick and shall be designed for use behind tile. Tile backing board shall be United States Gypsum's "Durock Board", Laticrete International's "Latipanel", or equal. 5. Sound deadening board shall conform to ASTM C 208, (wood fiber) Class A. 6. Foil backed gypsum board shall conform to ASTM C 36, type "x", with laminated foil to back surface. C. Gypsum roof and exterior wall sheathing shall be gypsum board with a water-resistant, silicone-treated core penetrated by glass mats front, back, and edges with an alkali- resistant coating. Gypsum sheathing shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C 1177 and have surface burning characteristics of zero flame spread and zero smoke developed when tested according to E 84. Roof sheathing shall be "Dens-Glass Gold Gypsum Sheathing" for walls and soffits and be "Dens-Deck Roof Board" for roof sheathing as manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corporation, or equal. D. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Flintkote Co. 2. Laticrete International 3. National Gypsum Co. 4. United States Gypsum Co. MWH-09/16/03 GYPSUM BOARD '- CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09250-2 2.3 TAPE AND COMPOUND A. Joint reinforcing tape and joint compound shall conform to ASTM C 475. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Nails shall conform to ASTM C 514 and shall be of the length recommended by the Gypsum Association referenced standards and the Building Code for various gypsum board thicknesses. Nails for nailing tile backing board to wood studs shall be 1-1/4 inch galvanized roofing nails unless otherwise required by code and board manufacturer. B. Screws shall be, self-drilling, self-tapping, bugle head for use with power tools, length as recommended by Gypsum Association referenced standards and the Building Code. 1. Type "S" for board to sheet metal application. 2. Type "W" for board to wood application. 3. Type "G" for board to board application. 4. Type "S" or"S-12", 1-1/4-inch for the backing board to metal studs application. C. Resilient channels shall be metal channels designed for use with sound wall construction. They shall be as recommended and approved by the gypsum board manufacturer and code. 2.5 ADHESIVES A. Adhesives for fastening gypsum board to gypsum board shall be in accordance with the printed recommendations of the gypsum board manufacturer. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Metal trim, corner beads, edge, casing beads, and accessories shall be manufactured from galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated and shall be manufacturer's standard products. Special shapes shall be provided where indicated. 2.7 ACCESS PANELS A. Access panels shall be provided where indicated and/or where required for access to valves and equipment. Access panels shall be MILCOR "Type DW", BOICE "Type C", or equal, for flush installation. Cylinder locks shall be provided where indicated. B. In fire-rated construction, both wall and ceiling access panels shall have a fire rating equivalent to the adjoining WORK. 2.8 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. Waterproof membrane shall be asphaltic saturated 43 lb (vapor-retarder) membrane conforming to ASTM D 2626 Type 1, 25 Ib/100 sq ft minimum or 10-mil polyethylene film membrane. MWH-09/16/03 GYPSUM BOARD CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09250-3 2.9 FRAMING MEMBERS A. Light gauge, non-load-bearing framing shall comply with ASTM C 645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board," and shall be provided wherever another system is not indicated. B. Metal furring channels for ceilings and walls shall be galvanized steel designed for screw %Moe attachment of 5/8-inch gypsum board. The furring channel shall be not less than 7/8- inch deep and 2-3/4-inch wide, unless otherwise required in Section 05400 - Cold Formed (Light) Metal Framing. C. Channels shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel, free of rust; shall be given a coating of protective paint; and shall be of the size set forth in the SSBC or BBC or UBC for the span and load imposed. D. Tie wire or clips used for securing cross-furring to primary members shall be galvanized, soft annealed steel wire. The weight of galvanizing shall be not less than Class 1 as set forth in Federal Specifications QQ-W-461 H. Tie wire gauge shall be as set forth in the SSBC or BBC or UBC. E. Wire hangers supporting main runners in suspended ceilings shall be galvanized steel and the weight of galvanizing shall be not less than Class 1 as set forth in Federal Specifications QQ-W-461 H. The gauge of galvanized steel hanger wire shall be as required under the SSBC or BBC or UBC. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the manufacturer's label with manufacturer's name and product description and rating intact and legible. B. Storage: Materials shall be carefully stored in an area which is protected from the elements in a manner recommended by the material manufacturer. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and its finish. 3.2 GENERAL A. Provide gypsum board over framing and furring members and provide ceiling suspension and furring systems for gypsum board ceilings wherever wood ceiling joists are not indicated. B. Gypsum board installation and fire-rated gypsum wallboard construction shall conform to applicable codes, reference standards, manufacturers' printed recommendations, and Gypsum Association's printed recommendations. 1. Gypsum wallboard shall be applied first to ceiling and then to walls. Wall application shall be horizontal (right angles to framing), or vertical (parallel to framing), conforming to reference standards. MWH-09/16/03 GYPSUM BOARD CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09250-4 2. Gypsum board shall be screw fastened to metal framing and furring and/or nail or screw fastened to wood framing and furring. Fastener spacing shall be per reference standards. 3. Multi-layer application shall be per reference standards and manufacturers' Nftwwe recommendations. 4. Resilient channels and multi-layer gypsum board shall be furnished, installed and constructed where sound walls are indicated. 5. Gypsum wallboard surface finish shall be three coat work. 6. Installation of steel framing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 754 and code. 3.3 CEILING SYSTEM FIRE RATING A. Where a fire rating is indicated, the complete ceiling system shall meet the rating requirements. The system shall conform to governing codes and shall meet UL requirements for the approved system. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL ACCESSORIES A. Metal edge trim shall be applied at all discontinued edges, where abutting with another material, and where indicated. Corner beads shall be applied at all exterior corners. B. Metal accessories shall be set plumb, level, and true and shall be shimmed where necessary. The accessories shall be mitered at corners; exposed joints shall be accurately and tightly fitted. Sections shall be installed in lengths as long as practicable, and splices shall be held to a minimum. C. Accessories, trim, and beads shall be securely fastened to framing members. 3.5 EDGE SEALING A. Cut, broken, or exposed edges of moisture-resistant gypsum board shall be sealed with a sealer recommended in the printed standards of the gypsum board manufacturer. 3.6 SURFACE FINISH A. Gypsum board joints shall be taped, and all joints, end trim, corner beads, fastener, and other depressions shall be treated with joint and finishing compounds applied per manufacturer's printed recommendations for three coat work. B. The gypsum board shall be sanded smooth, dusted, and provided with a textured orange peel roller fog and splatter smooth sealer finish coat. C. Gypsum board behind vinyl wall covering and wood paneling shall be left with a sanded, flush, and smooth finish surface ready for painting. D. Gypsum board at non-visible locations, such as within attics, shall be finished as required for fire protection. MWH-09/16/03 GYPSUM BOARD CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09250-5 3.7 RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES A. Light fixtures, speakers, and other recessed items in rated ceilings shall be provided with gypsum board enclosures as required for rated ceiling system. 3.8 ATTIC SEPARATIONS A. Gypsum board attic separations, with framing if necessary, shall be provided where indicated and shall be installed and taped per SSBC or BBC or UBC. Access doors shall be self-closing, and return air openings shall be equipped with fusible fire links and self-closures. 3.9 TILE BACKING A. General: Tile backing board shall be installed behind all tile walls which are not indicated to have mortar set tiles. Backing board shall be installed per manufacturer's published instructions. B. Backing Surface Treatment:. Gypsum drywall backing surfaces shall have all nails and screws recessed. Joints shall be taped, and all joints, nail, and screw depressions shall be floated. C. Finish: The finish surface shall be a sanded, dusted, and smooth finish ready for application of finish material. Joints or any other irregularities of backing surfaces shall not be visible. D. Shower: Tile backing board at showers shall be installed over a waterproof membrane. 3.10 CEILING SYSTEM A. The ceiling system shall be provided with diagonal bracing wires for seismic protection. Horizontal restraints shall be effected by four No. 12-gage wires secured to the main runner within 2 inches of the cross runner intersection and splayed 90 degrees from each other at an angle not exceeding 45 degrees from the plane of the ceiling. These horizontal restraint points shall be placed 12-feet on center in both directions with the first point within 4-feet from each wall. Attachment of the restraint wires to the structure above shall be adequate for the imposed load. B. Lighting fixtures, air diffusers, speakers, and other embedments shall be coordinated to provide the ceiling design and to prevent interferences with the locations of the embedded items and the ceiling system. - END OF SECTION - MWH-09/16/03 GYPSUM BOARD CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09250-6 SECTION 09800- PROTECTIVE COATING PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide protective coatings, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Definitions 1. The term "paint," "coatings," or "finishes" as used herein, shall include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins, and all other protective coatings, excepting galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. 2. The term "DFT" means minimum dry film thickness, without any negative tolerance. C. The following surfaces shall not be protective coated: 1. Concrete, unless required by items on the concrete coating schedule below or the Drawings. 2. Stainless steel 3. Machined surfaces 4. Grease fittings 5. Glass 6. Equipment nameplates 7. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces, unless specifically indicated to be coated. D. The coating system schedules summarize the surfaces to be coated, the required surface preparation, and the coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on the Drawings are used to show or extend the limits of coating schedules, to show exceptions to the schedules, or to clarify or show details for application of the coating systems. E. Where protective coatings are to be performed by a subcontractor, the subcontractor shall possess a valid state license as required for performance of the painting and coating work called for in this specification and shall provide 5 references which show that the painting subcontractor has previous successful experience with the indicated or comparable coating systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the owner of each installation for which the painting subcontractor provided the protective coating. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals, unless indicated otherwise below. MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-1 B. Submittals shall include the following information and be submitted at least 30 days prior to protective coating work: 1. Coating Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list showing the manufacturer and the coating number, keyed to the coating systems herein. The list shall be submitted prior to or at the time of submittal of samples. 2. Paint Manufacturer's Information: For each coating system to be used, the following data: a. Paint manufacturer's data sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the system performance and material requirements. c. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation and application. d. Colors available for each product (where applicable). e. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings (where applicable). f. Material Safety Data Sheet for each product used. C. Samples 1. Samples of all paint, finishes, and other coating materials shall be submitted on 8- 1/2 inch by 11-inch sheet metal. Each sheet shall be completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material, type, and color. 2. Two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the ENGINEER from the { manufacturer's standard color sheets. If custom mixed colors are indicated, the color samples shall be made using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the ENGINEER. The color formula shall be shown on the back of each color sample. 3. One 15 pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems. 1.3 SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENTS A. Warranty Inspection: A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of all coating and painting work. The CONTRACTOR and a representative of the coating material manufacturer shall attend this inspection. All defective work shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of the OWNER. The OWNER may, by written notice to the CONTRACTOR, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period, or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. If a warranty inspection is not held, the CONTRACTOR is not relieved of its responsibilities under the Contract Documents. B. Steel Reservoir Coating System Inspection: The CONTRACTOR shall conduct an inspection during the eleventh month after the date when the reservoir was filled with water and placed into service. The CONTRACTOR shall require a representative of the MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-2 coating material manufacturer to attend the inspection. All coating defects shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of the OWNER. If a warranty inspection is not held during or before the eleventh month, the CONTRACTOR is not relieved of its warranty responsibilities under the Contract Documents. If the CONTRACTOR fails to conduct an 11 month inspection for reasons not attributed to the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR is not relieved of the warranty responsibilities under the Contract Documents, and the warranty period shall be extended until the 11 month inspection is conducted and defective work is repaired. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Suitability: The CONTRACTOR shall use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Materials shall comply with Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits applicable at the Site. B. Material Sources: Where manufacturers and product numbers are listed, it is to show the type and quality of coatings that are required. If a named product does not comply with VOC limits in effect at the time of bid opening, that product will not be accepted, and the CONTRACTOR shall propose a substitution product of equal quality that does comply. Unless indicated otherwise, proposed substitute materials will be considered as indicated above. Coating materials shall be materials that have a record of satisfactory performance in industrial plants, manufacturing facilities, and water and wastewater treatment plants. C. Compatibility: In any coating system only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, a barrier coat shall be applied between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. D. Containers: Coating materials shall be sealed in containers that plainly show the designated narne, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use. E. Colors: All colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint shall be as indicated or selected by the ENGINEER. Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade, to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. Finish colors shall be as selected from the manufacturer's standard color samples by the ENGINEER. Finish colors shall be custom mixed to match color samples furnished by the ENGINEER. F. Substitute or"Or-Equal" Products 1. To establish equality under Section 01600 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed substitute or "or-equal" product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent or better in the following properties: a. Quality b. Durability MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-3 c. Resistance to abrasion and physical damage d. Life expectancy e. Ability to recoat in future f. Solids content by volume g. Dry film thickness per coat h. Compatibility with other coatings i. Suitability for the intended service j. Resistance to chemical attack k. Temperature limitations in service and during application I. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats m. Ease of application n. Ease of repairing damaged areas o. Stability of colors 2. Protective coating materials shall be standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production. of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. Where requested, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the proposed manufacturer's products that comply with these requirements. 3. If a proposed substitution requires changes in the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all such costs involved as part of the WORK. 2.2 INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. System 1 - Alkyd Enamel: High quality, gloss or semi-gloss, medium long oil alkyd finish shall have a minimum solids content of 49 percent by volume. Primer shall be as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Prime coat DFT= 3 mils Ameron 5105, Tnemec 4-55, or equal. 2. Finish coats (two or more, DFT = 3 mils), Ameron 5401 HSA or 5405, Tnemec 2H, or equal. 3. Total system DFT=6 mils. B. System 2 - Not Used C. System 3 - Aluminum Silicone Resin: Aluminum silicone resin material shall be suitable for a service temperature of up to 1,000 degrees F, and shall comply with Federal Specification TT-P-28 - Paint, Aluminum, Heat Resisting (1200 degrees F). MWH-05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-4 1. Prime coat and finish coat (2 or more, DFT = 3 mils), Tnemec Series 39-1061, Ameron 878, or equal. 2. Total system DFT= 3 mils. D. System 4 - Aliphatic Polyurethane: Two component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane coating material shall provide superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering and with a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. Primer shall be a rust inhibitive two component epoxy coating with a minimum solids content of 68 percent by volume. 1. Prime coat iDFT= 4 mils, Ameron 385, Carboline 893, Tnemec 69, or equal. 2. Finish coat (one or more, DFT = 3 mils), Ameron Amershield, Carboline 134 HS, Tnemec 74, or equal. 3. Total system DFT= 7 mils. 4. More than one finish coat shall be applied as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. E. System 5 - Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy/Polyurethane: The inorganic zinc primer shall be a water or solvent based, self-curing, zinc silicate two-component inorganic coating which contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film, and is recommended by the coating manufacturer as a primer for this system. The intermediate coat shall be a high-build two component epoxy with a solids content of at least 70 percent by volume. Finish coats shall be a 2-component aliphatic acrylic or polyester polyurethane coating material that provides superior color and gloss retention, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and a minimum solids content of 58 percent by volume. 1. Prime coat DFT = 3 mils, Ameron Dimetcote 21-5 or 21-9, Inorganic Coatings 531, or equal. 2. Intermediate coat DFT = 4 mils, Ameron 385, Inorganic Coatings P24, or equal. 3. Finish coats (one or more, DFT = 3 mils), Ameron Amershield, Inorganic Coatings 64, or equal. 4. Total system DFT = 10 mils. 5. Intermediate coat shall be applied in excess of 4 mils DFT or in more than one coat as necessary to completely cover the inorganic zinc primer and prevent application bubbling of the polyurethane finish coat. 6. More than one finish coat shall be applied as necessary to produce a finish with uniform color and texture. If the inorganic zinc primer is used as a pre-construction or shop applied primer, all damaged and uncoated areas shall be spot abrasive blasted and coated after construction using the indicated material. F. System 6 - Inorganic Zinc, Water Based: Water based, self curing, zinc silicate coating material shall be a two component inorganic coating material that contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film. MWH- 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-5 1. Prime coat and finish coat (One, OFT = 3 mils), Ameron Dimetcote 21-5, Inorganic Coatings 531, or equal. 2. Total system OFT=3 mils. G. System 7 - Acrylic Latex: Single component, water based acrylic latex with a fungicide additive shall have a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Prime coat shall be as recommended by manufacturer. The coating material shall be available in the ANSI safety colors. 1. Prime coat OFT =2 mils, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Finish coats (2 or more, OFT = 6 mils), Ameron Amercoat 220, Carboline 3359, Tnemec 6, or equal. 3. Total system OFT = 8 mils. H. System 8 - Epoxy, Equipment: Two component, rust inhibitive polyamide cured epoxy coating material shall provide a recoatable finish that is available in a wide selection of colors. The coating material shall have a minimum solids content of 66 percent by volume and be resistant to service conditions of condensing moisture, splash and spillage of lubricating oils, and frequent washdown and cleaning. 1. Prime coat OFT=3 mils, Ameron 385, Tnemec 69, or equal. 2. Prime coat, where shop applied. (DFT = 3 mils), universal primer, Ameron 185 HS, Tnemec 50-330 or 161, or equal. 3. Finish coats (2 or more, OFT= 6 mils), Ameron 385, Tnemec 69, or equal. 4. Total system OFT = 9 mils. I. System 9 - Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy, Equipment: The inorganic zinc primer shall be a water or solvent based, self curing, zinc silicate, two-component inorganic coating that contains at least 85 percent of metallic zinc by weight in the dried film, and is recommended by the coating manufacturer as a primer for this system. The finish coats shall be a polyamide cured epoxy material with a minimum solids content of at least 80 percent by volume, and available in a large selection of colors. 1. Prime coat OFT = 3 mils Ameron Dimetcote 21-5 or 21-9, Carboline Carbozinc 7 WB, or equal. 2. Finish coats (2 or more, OFT= 9 mils) Ameron 400, Carboline 890, or equal. 3. Total system OFT = 12 mils. J. System 10 - Acrylic, Concrete: The acrylic coating material shall be a single component, industrial grade, high molecular weight, waterborne acrylic material with a solids content of at least 35 percent by volume. The filler-sealer shall be a two component epoxy masonry sealer for wet and exterior exposure, with a solids content of at least 64 percent by volume. A 100 percent solids epoxy surfacer shall be used to fill holes and patch the concrete surface after abrasive blasting. MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-6 1. Prime coat (filler-sealer), applied in two coats to the entire surface and worked into the surface with a squeegee to achieve a smooth, void-free surface, Tnemec 54- 660, Ameron Nu-Klad 105A followed by Nu-Klad 114A(2 coats) or equal. 2. Finish coats (2 or more, DFT = 6 mils), Tnemec 6, Ameron Amercoat 220, or equal. K. System 11 - Aliphatic Polyurethane, Concrete: Two component aliphatic polyurethane coating material shall provide superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, and contain a minimum solids content of 65 percent by volume. Filler-sealer compound shall be a two component epoxy material used to provide a smooth surface for the epoxy intermediate coat. The filler-sealer is applied to the entire concrete surface and worked into the concrete surface with a wide blade putty knife or squeegee. The intermediate coat shall be a high-build epoxy coating with a minimum solids content of 70 percent by volume. 1. Prime coat (Filler-sealer), Ameron Nu-Klad 105A followed by Nu-Klad 114, Tnemec 54-660, or equal. 2. Intermediate coat DFT=4 mils, Ameron Amerlock 400, Tnemec 104 HS, or equal. 3. Finish coats (2 or more, DFT = 3 mils), Ameron Amershield, Tnemec 74, or equal. L. System 12 - Aliphatic Polyurethane, Fiber Glass: Two-component aliphatic polyurethane coating material shall provide superior color and gloss retention, resistance to splash from acid and alkaline chemicals, and resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering. A primer, tie coat, or mist coat shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Prime coat (Tie coat), Ameron 385, Tnemec 66, or equal. 2. Finish coats (2 or more, DFT = 3 mils), Ameron Amershield, Tnemec 74, or equal. 2.3 SUBMERGED AND SEVERE SERVICE COATING SYSTEMS A. Material Sources: The manufacturers' products listed in this paragraph are materials which satisfy the material descriptions of this paragraph and have a documented successful record for long term submerged or severe service conditions. Proposed substitute products will be considered as indicated above. B. System 100 - Amine Cured Epoxy: High build, amine cured, epoxy resin shall have a solids content of at least 80 percent by volume, and shall be suitable for long-term immersion service in potable water and municipal wastewater. For potable water service, the coating material shall be listed by the NSF International as in compliance with NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1. Prime coat and finish coats (3 or more, DFT = 16 mils), Ameron 395, Tnemec 139, or equal. 2. For coating of valves and non-submerged equipment, DFT = 12 mils. C. System 101 - Cold-Applied Tape: Tape coating materials and procedures shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C209. Prefabricated tape shall be Type II. The system shall consist of a primer layer, inner layer tape (35 mils), and an outer layer tape (35 mils). Total system DFT= 70 mils. MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-7 D. System 102 - Polyamide Cured Epoxy: High build, polyamide epoxy resin shall have a solids content of at least 56 percent by volume, and shall be suitable for long-term immersion in potable water and municipal wastewater. For potable water service, the coating material shall be listed by the NSF International as in compliance with NSF Standard 61. 1. Prime coat and finish coats (3 or more, DFT = 12 mils), Tnemec Pota-Pox N140, or equal. E. System 103 - Not Used F. System 104- Not Used G. System 105 - Epoxy, Reservoirs 1. The epoxy coating material shall be 2 component type, either a polyamide-cured epoxy or an amine-cured epoxy suitable for long-term immersion service in potable water. The material shall be listed by NSF International as in compliance with NSF Standard 61 and shall conform to state and local health regulations and policies for service in potable water reservoirs. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a written certification that the proposed materials meet the above regulatory agency standards and policies. The material shall be applied with a primer if recommended by the coating manufacturer. 2. The system shall consist of 3 coats in accordance with AWWA D102 - Coating Steel Water Storage Tanks, System ICS-2. 3. Thicknesses a. First Coat, 3 mils. b. Intermediate, 4 mils. c. Finish, 5 mils. d. Total System DFT, 12 mils. 4. All lap roof plate edges, both sides, shall be pre-coated. If necessary, primer exposed on exterior of roof may be removed prior to welding. Pre-coating shall extend at least 6-inches from plate edges. 5. Touch-up coating shall be done for areas damaged during erection, or areas not pre-coated. The CONTRACTOR shall spot sandblast to SSPC SP-5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning, before application of coating. Material used for touch-up shall be the indicated material or a compatible primer recommended by the manufacturer. 6. All edges, nuts, bolts, lap joints, weld seams, and the roof rim angle shall receive one brush-applied coat prior to the application of the first complete spray coat. 7. Curing Period: Prior to immersion, the completed system shall be subjected to at least 240 hours of curing time with the metal temperature at a minimum of 70 degrees F, or 480 hours at a minimum of 60 degrees F, both conditions at a maximum relative humidity of 50 percent and under the forced ventilation conditions required by the paragraph entitled Curing of Coatings. More curing time or a higher temperature shall be provided if recommended by the epoxy coating manufacturer. MWH- 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-8 If the environmental conditions do not provide the necessary minimum temperature, use heated air to provide the necessary heat for curing. Other combinations of curing time and temperature may be used if the coating manufacturer presents satisfactory documentation and test results to substantiate that the degree of curing is equal or greater than curing for 240 hours at 70 degrees F. 8. Manufacturers, Or Equal a. Ameron Amercoat 395 b. Carboline Super Hi-Gard 891 c. Tnemiec Pota-Pox Series 20 H. System 106 - Fusion Bonded Epoxy: The coating material shall be a 100 percent powder epoxy, certified as compliant with NSF Standard 61, applied in accordance with the ANSI/AWWA C213 - Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines, except that the surface preparation shall be as listed in the coating system schedule of this Section. The coating shall be applied using the fluidized bed or electrostatic spray process. 1. Coating DFT = 16 mils, Scotchkote 134 or 206N, or equal. 2. For coating of valves, DFT= 12 mils. 3. Liquid Epoxy: For field repairs, the use of a liquid epoxy will be permitted, applied in not less than� 3 coats to provide a DFT of 15 mils. The liquid epoxy shall be a 100 percent solids epoxy recommended by the powder epoxy manufacturer. I. System 107- Chemical Resistant Sheet Lining: 1. Materials: The CONTRACTOR shall use natural rubber, chlorobutyl rubber, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) rubber, chloroprene polymer (neoprene) rubber, or chlorosulfonated polyethylene (Hypalon) rubber sheet lining materials as indicated. The Shop Drawing submittal shall contain technical information that confirms the suitability of the lining material system for long-term immersion in each chemical to be stored. The service temperatures are expected to be up to 150 degrees F. 2. Neoprene sheet lining material shall be synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. The minimum lining thickness shall be 3/16 - inch. The lining material shall be Polymeric Protective Linings BFG 2011 (59688), or equal. 3. Chlorobutyl sheet lining material shall be synthetic rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. The minimum lining thickness shall be 3/16-inch. The lining material shall be Polymeric BFG 1051 (60924), or equal. 4. Natural rubber (soft) sheet lining material shall be soft natural rubber formulated for steam curing at atmospheric pressure. The minimum lining thickness shall be 3/16- inch. The lining material shall be Polymeric BFG 2004(83160), or equal. 5. Natural rubber(hard) sheet lining material shall be a hard, natural rubber resistant to oxidizing agents and formulated for autoclave curing. The minimum lining thickness shall be 3/16-inch. The lining material shall be Polymeric BFG 1006 (8631), or equal. MWH-05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-9 6. EPDM sheet lining material shall be synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulfuric acid solution and formulated for autoclave or steam curing under pressure. The lining material shall be Polymeric BFG 1039 (EP156), or equal. 7. Hypalon sheet lining material shall be synthetic rubber suitable for use as a lining for 50 percent sulfuric acid solution. The lining material shall be Polymeric BFG 2045 (8706), or equal. 8. Primers, adhesives, activators, accelerators and other necessary materials shall be as required by the sheet material manufacturer. 9. Metal Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blast cleaning the base metal shall be prepared as required by the sheet lining material manufacturer's installation instructions. If the instructions differ from these specifications, the highest degree of cleaning and surface preparation shall be provided. Abrasive blast cleaning shall be done in accordance with this Section. 10. Installation of lining materials shall be in accordance with the material manufacturer's written installation instructions. All interior surfaces shall be lined, including all piping, vents, fittings, flange faces, manhole covers, and blind flanges. 11. The lining system shall be holiday tested in accordance with this Section before and after curing. 12. The lining system shall be cured by steam using the time and temperature as required by the material manufacturer. J. System 108 - Epoxy, Concrete: The coating material shall be an amino cured epoxy material suitable for long-term immersion in water and wastewater and for service where subjected to occasional splash and spillage of water and wastewater treatment chemicals. The finish coating material shall have a minimum solids content of 80 percent by volume. If used for potable water service the finish coating material shall be listed by the NSF International as in compliance with NSF Standard 61, and shall conform with state and local health regulations and policies for service in potable water. The filler-sealer shall be a 100 percent solids amine-cured epoxy material with silica and inert fillers. A 100 percent solids epoxy surfacer shall be used to fill holes and patch the concrete surface after abrasive blasting. 1. Filler-sealer: Plasite 9029 (applied by squeegee): Tnemec 69-1211 (6-8 mils) followed by Tnemec 63-1500; Ameron Nu-Klad 105A followed by Nu-Klad 114A (two coats)or equal. 2. Finish coats (2 or more, DFT = 12 mils): Plasite 9133; Tnemec 69; Ameron Amercoat 395, or equal. On walking surfaces use a non-skid additive such as Ameron 886 in the final coat. K. System 109- Not Used L. System 110 -Not Used M. System 111 - Vinyl Ester: Vinyl ester resin coating material with an inert flake pigment suitable for immersion service in 30 percent hydrochloric acid and 30 percent sulfuric acid solutions. MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-10 1. Two or more coats (DFT = 40 mils), Plasite 4100, or equal. Use a prime coat as recommended by the material manufacturer. N. System 112 - Vinyl Ester, Concrete: Vinyl ester resin coating material with an inert flake pigment suitable for immersion service in hydrochloric acid and sulfuric acid solutions. The filler-sealer shall be a 100 percent solids amine-cured epoxy or vinyl ester material with silica and inert fillers. The filler-sealer is applied to the entire concrete surface. A 100 percent solids epoxy or vinyl ester surfacer shall be used to fill holes and patch the concrete surface after abrasive blasting. 1. Prime coat, (filler-sealer), applied in two coats using a squeegee to achieve a smooth void-free surface, Plasite 9028 Ml, or equal. 2. Finish coats (two or more, DFT=40 mils), Plasite 4100, or equal. 2.4 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. System 200 - PVC Tape: Prior to wrapping the pipe with PVC tape, the pipe and fittings first shall be primed using a primer recommended by the PVC tape manufacturer. After being primed, the pipe shall be wrapped with a 20-mil adhesive PVC tape, half-lapped, to a total thickness of 40 mils. B. System 201 - Rich Portland Cement Mortar: Rich portland cement mortar coating shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8-inch, followed by enclosure in an 8-mil thick polyethylene sheet with all joints and edges lapped and sealed with tape. C. System 203 - Epoxy Surfacing: Two-component epoxy floor surfacing shall be formulated to resist many acids, alkalies, and solvents. Material shall be resistant to liquid alum, sodium hydroxide, and 50 percent sulfuric acid. Products shall be as follows, or equal: 1. Prime coat Nu-Kiad 105; finish coat Nu-Klad 110 (1/4-inch thick), or equal. D. System 204-Water-Retardant: 1. Two coats (or single coat if manufacturer recommends in writing) of a clear, non- staining, silane-modified-siloxane masonry water-retardant material. The water- retardant system after application shall be provided with not less than a five-year warranty on the performance of the product. 2. Surfaces shall be cleaned with a chemical cleaner approved by the manufacturer and power wash. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before application of the material. Method and rate of application shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. A manufacturer's representative shall be present during applications if necessary for warranty. 3. TAMMS Barricade Series, Rainguard "Blok-Lok"; or equal. E. System 205 - Polyethylene Encasement: Application of polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105 using Method C. F. System 206 - Cement Mortar Coating: A 1-1/2-inch minimum thickness mortar coating reinforced with 3/4-inch galvanized welded wire fabric shall be provided. The cement mortar shall contain no less than one part Type V cement to 3 parts sand. The cement mortar shall be cured by a curing compound meeting the requirements of "Liquid MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-11 Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete," ASTM C 309, Type II, white pigmented, or by enclosure in an 8-mil thick polyethylene sheet with all edges and joints lapped by at least 6-inches. G. System 207 - Not Used H. System 208 - Aluminum Metal Isolation: Two coats of a high build polyamide epoxy paint, such as Tnemec 66, or equal (8 mils). Total thickness of system DFT =8.0 mils. 1. System 209 - Alkyd-Wood: Industrial quality, gloss or semi-gloss, medium long oil alkyd coating material with a minimum solids content of 49 percent by volume. Primer shall be an alkyd primer as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Prime coat DFT= 3 mils. 2. Finish coats (two or more, DFT= 3 mils), Amercoat 5401, Tnemec 2H, or equal. 3. Total system DFT=6 mils. J. System 210 - Acrylic-wood: Single component, water-based acrylic latex coating material with a fungicide additive and a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Primer shall be an alkyd primer as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Prime coat DFT= 2 mils. 2. Finish coats (two or more, DFT = 6 mils), Amerguard 220, Carboline 3300, Tnemec 6, or equal. 3. Total system DFT= 8 mils. K. System 211 - Acrylic-Drywall: Single component, water-based acrylic latex coating material with a fungicide additive and a minimum solids content of 35 percent by volume. Primer shall be a PVA sealer as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Prime coat DFT= 1.5 mils. 2. Finish coats (two or more, DFT = 6 mils), Amerguard 220, Carboline 3300, Tnemec 6, or equal. 3. Total system DFT=7.5 mils. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The CONTRACTOR shall require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the Site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable or associated with the manufacturer's products. B. For submerged and severe service coating systems, the CONTRACTOR shall require the paint manufacturer to furnish the following services: MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING '- CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-12 1. The manufacturer's representative shall provide at least 6 hours of on-site instruction in the proper surface preparation, use, mixing, application, and curing of the coating systems. 2. The manufacturer's representative shall observe the start of surface preparation, - mixing, an application of the coating materials for each coating system. 3.2 WORKMAN& P A. Skilled craftsm n and experienced supervision shall be used on all WORK. B. Coating shall be done in a workmanlike manner so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to insure thorough cleaning and an adequate thickness of coating material. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be so complete that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Special attention shall be given to insure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas, and installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other precautionary measures. C. All damage to surfaces resulting from the WORK shall be cleaned, repaired, and refinished to original condition. 3.3 STORAGE, MIXING, AND THINNING OF MATERIALS A: Manufacturer's Recommendations: Unless otherwise indicated, the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protecting its coating materials, for preparation of surfaces for coating, and for all other procedures relative to coating shall be strictly observed. B. All protective coating materials shall be used within the manufacturer's recommended shelf life. C. Storage and Mixing: Coating materials shall be stored under the conditions recommended by the Material Safety Data Sheets, and shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings of different manufacturers shall not be mixed together. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR COATING A. General: All surfaces to receive protective coatings shall be cleaned as indicated prior to application of coatings. The CONTRACTOR shall examine all surfaces to be coated, and shall correct all surface defects before application of any coating material. All marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and on factory-finished surfaces shall receive touch-up restoration prior to any coating application. Surfaces to be coated shall be dry and free of visible dust. B. Protection of Surfaces Not to be Coated: Surfaces that are not to receive protective coatings shall be protected during surface preparation, cleaning, and coating operations. C. All hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted shall be removed, masked or otherwise protected. Drop cloths shall be provided to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. The working parts of all MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-13 mechanical and electrical equipment shall be protected from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent entry of coating or other materials. D. Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Spray painting shall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating operations. E. Protection of Painted Surfaces: Cleaning and coating shall be coordinated so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council shall form a part of this specification: 1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, salts, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion, or steam. 2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. 3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by power tool chipping, descaling, sanding, wire brushing, and grinding. 4. White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP5): Removal of all visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, paint, oxides, corrosion products and foreign matter by blast cleaning. 5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP6): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area. 6. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP7): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. 7. Near-White Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP10): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area. 3.6 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED) A. The minimum abrasive blasting surface preparation shall be as indicated in the coating system schedules included at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning shall apply. MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-14 B. Workmanship for metal surface preparation shall be in conformance with the current SSPC Standards and this Section. Blast cleaned surfaces shall match the standard samples avail4ble from the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, NACE Standard TM-01-70 - Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Airblast Cleaned with Sand Abrasive and TM-01-75 - Visual Standard for Surfaces of New Steel Centrifugally Blast Cleaned with Steel Grit. C. All oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants shall be removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 - Solvent Cleaning prior to blast cleaning. D. All sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered and all burrs, and surface defects and weld splatter shall be ground smooth prior to blast cleaning. E. The type and size of abrasive shall be selected to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. Abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems shall be clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. Automated blasting systems shall not be used for surfaces that will be in submerged service. Metal shot or grit shall. not be used for surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasive blasting is planned to be one with hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. F. The abrasive shall not be reused unless an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that wiii be in non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, clean oil-free abrasives shall be maintained. The abrasive mix shall include at least 50 percent grit. G. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. H. Compressed air for air blast cleaning shall be supplied at adequate pressure from well maintained compressors equipped with oil and moisture separators that remove at least 95 percent of the contaminants. I. Surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation by dry air blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. J. Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum cleaned and wiped with a tack cloth. K. Damaged or defective coating shall be removed by the blast cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. L. If the required abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be submerged in service, then SSPC SP2 or SSPC SP3 be used. M. Shop applied coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed before the indicated coatings are applied. Valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment shall be examined for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Temporary coatings shall be completely removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 before the abrasive blast cleaning work has been started. N. Shop primed equipment shall be solvent cleaned in the field before finish coats are applied. MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-15 3.7 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR GALVANIZED FERROUS METAL A. Galvanized ferrous metal shall be alkaline cleaned per SSPC SP1 to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of the protective coating system to be used, followed by brush off blast cleaning per SSPC SP7. B. Pretreatment coatings of surfaces shall be in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3.8 SURFACE PREPARATION OF FERROUS SURFACES WITH EXISTING COATINGS, EXCLUDING STEEL RESERVOIR INTERIORS A. General: All grease, oil, heavy chalk, dirt, or other contaminants shall be removed by solvent or detergent cleaning prior to abrasive blast cleaning. The generic type of the existing coatings shall be determined by laboratory testing. B. Abrasive Blast Cleaning: The CONTRACTOR shall provide the degree of cleaning indicated in the coating system schedule for the entire surface to be coated. If the degree of cleaning is not indicated in the schedule, deteriorated coatings shall be removed by abrasive blast cleaning to SSPC SP6. Areas of tightly adhering coatings shall be cleaned to SSPC SP7, with the remaining thickness of existing coating not to exceed 3 mils. C. Incompatible Coatings: If coatings to be applied are not compatible with existing coatings the CONTRACTOR shall apply intermediate coatings per the paint manufacturer's recommendation for the indicated coating system or shall completely remove the existing coating prior to abrasive blast cleaning. A small trial application shall be conducted for compatibility prior to painting large areas. D. Unknown Coatings: Coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed prior to application of new coatings. E. Water Abrasive or Wet Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Where indicated or where Site conditions do not permit dry abrasive blasting for industrial coating systems due to dust or air pollution considerations, water abrasive blasting or wet abrasive blasting may be used. In both methods, paint-compatible corrosion inhibitors shall be used, and coating application shall begin as soon as the surfaces are dry. Water abrasive blasting shall be done using high pressure water with sand injection. In both methods, the equipment used shall be commercially produced equipment with a successful service record. Wet blasting methods shall not be used for submerged and severe service coating systems unless indicated. 3.9 PLASTIC, FIBER GLASS AND NONFERROUS METALS SURFACE PREPARATION A. Plastic and fiber glass surfaces shall be sanded or brush off blast cleaned prior to solvent cleaning with a chemical compatible with the coating system primer. B. Non-ferrous metal surfaces shall be solvent-cleaned SSPC SP1 followed by sanding or brush-off blast cleaning SSPC SP7. C. All surfaces shall be clean and dry prior to coating application. MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-16 3.10 SHOP COATING REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwi a indicated, all items of equipment, or parts of equipment which are not submerged in 3ervice, shall be shop primed and then finish coated in the field after installation witt the indicated or selected color. The methods, materials, application equipment and all other details of shop painting shall comply with this section. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period of time, the equipment shall be finish coated in the shop and then touch-up painted after installation. B. All items of equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves, shall have all surface preparation and coating work performed in the field. C. The interior surfaces of steel water reservoirs, except for Part A surfaces, shall have all surface preparation and coating work performed in the field. D. For certain pieces of equipment it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets, equipment such as electrical control panels, switchgear or main control boards, submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to obtain the indicated quality in the field. Such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in the shop and touched up in the field with the identical material after installation. The CONTRACTOR shall require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its Shop Drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. The coating material data sheet shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings for the equipment. E. For certain small pieces of equipment the manufacturer may have a standard coating system that is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the Shop Drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. F. Shop painted surfaces shall be protected during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and the use of canvas or nylon slings. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to the weather for more than 2 months before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by the coating manufacturer. G. Damage to shop-applied coatings shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. H. The CONTRACTOR shall make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Copies of applicable coating manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted with equipment Shop Drawings. 3.11 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. The application of protective coatings to steel substrates shall be in accordance with SSPC PA1 - Paint Application Specification No. 1. B. Cleaned surfaces and all coats shall be inspected prior to each succeeding coat. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule such inspection with the ENGINEER in advance. MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-17 C. Blast cleaned ferrous metal surfaces shall be painted before any rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Blast cleaning shall be limited to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same working day. D. Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. E. Special attention shall be given to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present. Use stripe painting for these areas. F. Special attention shall be given to materials that will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Such contact surfaces shall be coated prior to assembly or installation. G. Finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats shall be applied in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color matched appearance. H. Coatings shall not be applied under the following conditions: 1. Temperature exceeding the manufacturer's recommended maximum and minimum allowable. 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. Damp or humid weather. 4. When the substrate or air temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dewpoint. 5. When air temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F or less than 5 degrees F above the dewpoint within 8 hours after application of coating. 6. When wind conditions are not calm. I. Dewpoint shall be determined by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables. J. Unburied steel piping shall be abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. K. The finish coat on all work shall be applied after all concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete and the work areas are clean and dust free. 3.12 CURING OF COATINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain curing conditions in accordance with the conditions recommended by the coating material manufacturer or by this Section, whichever is the most stringent, prior to placing the completed coating system into service. B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation, using heated air if necessary, may be required until the coatings have fully cured. C. Forced Air Ventilation of Steel Reservoirs and Enclosed Hydraulic Structures: Forced air ventilation is required for the application and curing of coatings on the interior surfaces of steel reservoirs and enclosed hydraulic structures. During application and curing periods, continuously exhaust air from a manhole in the lowest shell ring, or in the MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING ~� CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-18 case of an enclosed hydraulic structure, from the lowest level of the structure using portable ducting. After all interior coating operations have been completed, provide a final curing period for a minimum of 10 days, during which the forced ventilation system shall operate continuously. For additional requirements, refer to the specific coating system requirements in Part 2 above. 3.13 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING A. Identification of piping shall be in accordance with Section 15005 - Piping Identification Systems. B. Every valve or connection, where it may be possible for a worker to be exposed to a hazardous substance, shall be labeled per OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Standards 29CFR1910.1200. C. All unburied pipes in structures shall be color-code painted. Colors shall be as indicated in TCEQ Rules 290.42. 3.14 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation work or coating application work, and a minimum of 7 days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. All such work shall be performed only in the presence of the ENGINEER, unless the ENGINEER has granted prior approval to perform such work in its absence. C. Inspection by the ENGINEER, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the WORK, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of its responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these Specifications. D. Scaffolding shall be erected and moved to locations where requested by the ENGINEER to facilitate inspection. Additional illumination shall be furnished to cover all areas to be inspected. E. Inspection Devices: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, until final acceptance of such coatings, inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry-film thicknesses of protective coatings. Dry-film thickness gauges shall be made available for the ENGINEER'S use at all times while coating is being done, until final acceptance of such coatings. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of a trained operator of the holiday detection devices until the final acceptance of such coatings. Holiday detection devices shall be operated only in the presence of the ENGINEER.. F. Holiday Testing: The CONTRACTOR shall holiday test all coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir, other surfaces which will be submerged in water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures and surfaces coated with any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Areas that contain holidays shall be marked and repaired or recoated in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions and then retested. 1. Coatings With Thickness Exceeding 20 Mils: For surfaces having a total dry film coating thickness exceeding 20 mils: pulse-type holiday detector such as Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, or equal shall be used. The MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-19 unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the required coating thickness. 2. Coatings With Thickness of 20 Mils or Less: For surfaces having a total dry film coating thickness of 20 mils or less: Tinker & Rasor Model M1 non-destructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, or equal shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75-volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils, a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flo, or equal, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. G. Film Thickness Testing: On ferrous metals, the dry film coating thickness shall be measured in accordance with the SSPC "Paint Application Specification No. 2" using a magnetic-type dry film thickness gauge such as Mikrotest model FM, Elcometer model 111/1 EZ, or equal. Each coat shall be tested for the correct thickness. No measurements shall be made until at least 8 hours after application of the coating. On non-ferrous metals and other substrates, the coating thicknesses shall be measured at the time of application using a wet film gauge. H. Surface Preparation: Evaluation of blast cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison of the blasted surfaces with the standard samples available from the NACE, using NACE standards TM-01-70 and TM-01-75. 3.15 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULES - FERROUS METALS A. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal - Not Galvanized: Item Surface Prep. System No. FM-1 All surfaces indoors and Commercial blast cleaning (1) outdoors, exposed or SSPC SP6 alkyd enamel covered, except those included below. FM-3 Surfaces of equipment White metal blast cleaning (100) and ferrous surfaces SSPC SP5 amine-cured epoxy submerged or intermittently submerged in potable water, utility water, and wastewater including all surfaces lower than 2 feet above high water level in hydraulic structures, and all surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures and vents (excluding shop-coated valves, couplings, pumps). FM-4 Surfaces exposed to high Near white metal blast (6) temperature (between cleaning SSPC SP10 inorganic zinc, water-based 150 and 600 degrees F). FM-7 Where indicated, ferrous White metal blast cleaning (102) surfaces in water MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-20 passages of all valves 2- SSPC SP5 polyamide-cured epoxy inch size and larger, exterior surfaces of submerged valves. FM-8 Where indicated, ferrous White metal blast cleaning (100) surfaces in water SSPC SP5 amine-cured epoxy passage and submerged surfaces of all pumps which have discharge size of 4 inches or larger. FM-9 Ferrous surfaces of Solvent cleaning SSPC (106) sleeve couplings. SP1, followed by white fusion-bonded epoxy metal blast cleaning SSPC- SP10 FM-11 Buried surfaces that are Near white metal blast (100) not indicated to be coated cleaning SSPC SP10 amine-cured epoxy elsewhere. FM-14 Structural steel, Commercial blast cleaning (1) miscellaneous metalwork, SSPC SP6 alkyd enamel and supports for prefabricated metal buildings. FM-15 Structural steel, Commercial blast cleaning (1) miscellaneous metalwork, SSPC SP6 alkyd enamel and supports for roof and face support systems for buildings. FM-16 Surfaces of indoor Commercial blast cleaning (8) equipment, not SSPC SP6 epoxy, equipment submerged FM-18 Buried pipe couplings, Removal of dirt, grease, oil (201) valves, fittings, and rich portland cement mortar flanged joints (where piping is plastic). FM-20 Buried pipe couplings, Removal of dirt, grease, oil (206) valves, and flanged joints cement-mortar coating (where piping is mortar- coated steel or reinforced concrete), including factory-coated surfaces. B. Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal - Galvanized: Pretreatment coatings, barrier coatings, or washes shall be applied as recommended by the coating manufacturer. All galvanized surfaces shall be coated except for the following items which shall be coated only if required by other Sections: (1) Floor gratings and frames, (2) Handrails, (3) Stair treads, (4) Chain link fencing and appurtenances. T MWH - 05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUAAP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-21 Item Surface Prep. System No. FMG-1 All exposed surfaces Solvent cleaning SSPC SP1 (1) indoors and outdoors, alkyd enamel except those included below. FMG-4 Surfaces buried or Solvent cleaning SSPC SP1 (100) submerged in water, followed by brush-off grade amine-cured epoxy including all surfaces blast cleaning SSPC SP7 lower than two feet above high water level and all surfaces inside enclosed hydraulic structures and vents. C. Coating System Schedule, Steel Water Reservoir Interior: The interior surfaces of steel water reservoirs shall have all surface preparation and coating work performed in the field. Item Surface Prep. System No. SR-1 All interior surfaces SSPC SP10 (105) including all plates, lap polyamide-cured epoxy roof plate edges (both or amine-cured epoxy sides), roof structural suitable for long-term members, fittings, and immersion service in vents, underside of potable water and in column bases, floor compliance with NSF under column bases Standard 61. before columns set in place, submerged contact surfaces that are not accessible after erection. The interior and exterior surface of the overflow, drain and other piping out to the first valve or coupling. D. Coating System Schedule, Steel Water Reservoir Exterior: The exterior surfaces of steel water reservoirs shall have all surface preparation and coating work performed in the field. Item Surface Prep. System No. SR-1 All exterior surfaces SSPC SP10 (5) including all plates, lap Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy/ roof plate edges (both Polyurethane sides), roof structural members, fittings, and vents, underside of column bases and floor MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-22 under column bases before columns set in place that are not accessible after erection. The exterior surface of the overflow, drain and other piping out to the first valve or coupling. 3.16 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE, NON-FERROUS METAL, PLASTIC, FIBER GLASS A. Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, the CONTRACTOR shall use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames or hatches. Only primers recommended by the coating manufacturer shall be used. Item Surface Prep. System No. NFM-1 All exposed surfaces, Solvent cleaned SSPC (1) indoors and outdoors, SP1 alkyd enamel except those included below. NFM-3 Aluminum surfaces in Solvent cleaned SSPC (208) contact with concrete, or SP1 aluminum metal with any other metal isolation except galvanized ferrous _ metal. NFM-4 Polyvinyl chloride plastic Solvent cleaned SSPC (7) piping, indoors and SP1 acrylic latex outdoors, or in structures, not submerged. NFM-6 Buried non-ferrous metal Removal of dirt, grease, oil (200) pipe. PVC tape 3.17 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE - MISCELLANEOUS SURFACES Item Surface Prep. System No. MS-1 Wood, indoors and Per manufacturer's printed (209) outdoors. instructions alkyd-wood MS-2 Drywall Per manufacturer's printed (211) instructions acrylic-drywall] - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 PROTECTIVE COATING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 09800-23 SECTION 10400- IDENTIFYING DEVICES PART 1 —GENERAL f 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide signs and other identifying devices and all appurtenant work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. This Section applies to all equipment,unless indicated otherwise in the equipment sections. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Full-size or scaled layouts of signs showing sign size, color, fasteners and mounting, and location. A typical of repetitive sign layouts may be submitted. Most restrictive conditions shall be depicted. C. Samples: Samples of all the materials and colors proposed for the WORK, clearly marked to show the manufacturer's name and product identification along with the manufacturer's technical data ar�d application instructions. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Identification devices shall be installed where directed by the ENGINEER. All wording shall be as indicated and shall be verified before fabrication. 2.2 ARCHITECTURAL NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be Builders Brass Works, Vomar Products, Inc., or equal, with colored 1/8-inch acrylic plastic (matte finish). Lettering shall be white, 1/2-inch high, or 36 points, and be fused by heat and pressure to a depth of approximately 0.005-inch. Plates shall be installed in an extruded aluminum frame, medium bronze or dark anodized finish, and be provided with 2-way adhesive mounting tape. Plastic color and letter style shall be as selected by the ENGINEER. B. Nameplate Schedule Boom or Door Name on Plate Restroom Door Restroom 2.3 EQUIPMENT NAMETAGS A. Small Equipment, as defined in Section 11000 — Equipment General: 1/16 inch thick acrylic plastic with matte finish, color selected by the ENGINEER. Letters shall be white, 1/2- inch tall, embossed and fused by heat and pressure into the material. Lettering shall be the equipment number in the Contract Documents. B. Large Equipment per Section 11000 MWH-05/18/07 IDENTIFYING DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 10400-1 MCCART AVENUE STATION AND STORAGE TANK 1. Stainless steel plate, 1/16-inch thick, at least 4-inches by 6 inches, lettering embossed into the plate, at least 1-inch tall. 2. Lettering stenciled directly onto the equipment, in letter size and color determined by the ENGINEER. Furnish the proposed wording to the ENGINEER for approval. C. The ENGINEER will determine the location for all equipment nametags and the methods of attachment. 2.4 SIGNS A. General: Signs or warnings shall be enamel painted on semi-rigid butyrate. Signs shall conform to OSHA Standards and directions. Lettering sizes shall be 3-inch in height unless indicated otherwise. B. The following sign shall be provided on doors in the perimeter of the pump station building: EXIT C. The following signs shall be provided in all new and existing underground structures and manholes into which employees may enter. CAUTION VENTILATE BEFORE ENTERING DANGER PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DO NOT ENTER! D. Automatic startup: all pumps which can be started either automatically or remotely shall have the following sign attached: WARNING THIS PIECE OF EQUIPMENT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY PART 3--EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All installations of identifying devices shall be vandal-resistant. Fasteners shall be concealed, non-corrosive fasteners appropriate for materials being fastened and as required. - END OF SECTION - MWH-05/18/07 IDENTIFYING DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 10400-2 MCCART AVENUE STATION AND STORAGE TANK SECTION 10520- FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide fire protection equipment and appurtenant WORK,complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. All fire protection equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES,AND STANDARDS A. Codes 1. National Fire Protection Association publications(NFPA), as referenced herein. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300-Contractor Submittals. B. Literature: Manufacturer's literature, installation instructions, and details shall be submitted. PART 2—PRODUCTS ~ 2.1 GENERAL A. All fire prevention equipment and installation shall comply with the Code, NFPA Pamphlet No 10, and the Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fire Extinguisher Designated FE-2: Two (2) FE-2 fire extinguishers shall be 20-pound minimum capacity, A.B.C.dry-chemical type with minimum UL rating of 20A:12013C. B. Fire Extinguisher Designated FE-3: Two (2) FE-3 fire extinguishers shall be 10-pound minimum capacity, Carbon Dioxide type with minimum UL rating of 10B:C. C. Bracket: Mounting brackets shall be specially designed for extinguisher. D. Other Materials: All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of fire fighting devices shall be as selected by the CONTRACTOR, subject to the review of the ENGINEER. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire protection items shall be from the following manufacturers,or equal: MWH -05/18/07 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 10520-1 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 2. Potter-Roemer 3. General Fire Extinguisher Co. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original unbroken packages, or containers, bearing the manufacturer's label with manufacturer's name, product description, and rating. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in an area which is protected from deleterious elements as recommended by the material manufacturer. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and its finish. 3.2 LOCATIONS AND INSTALLATION A. Locations: Fire prevention equipment locations and mounting heights shall be verified with the Fire Marshall before installation and shall be installed where directed. If locations are not directed by the Fire Marshall,the ENGINEER will direct locations. B. installation: Installation shall be per NFPA Pamphlet No. 10 unless directed otherwise by the local Fire Marshall. C. Brackets: All fire extinguishers shall be provided with and installed on brackets or brackets within cabinets. The CONTRACTOR shall block and reinforce walls to support the fire extinguishers. - END OF SECTION - MWH-05/18/07 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 10520-2 SECTION 10800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide toilet and bath accessories and appurtenant WORK, complete and i � place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Manufacturer's Standards: The toilet and bath accessories and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300- Contractor Submittals. B. Samples: When requested by the ENGINEER, submit samples of the materials and colors proposed for use on the WORK. The samples shall be clearly marked to show the manufacturer's name and product identification. C. Literature: Manufacturer's literature, technical data, and installation instructions on each proposed product and item. PART 2-- PRODUCTS T 2.1 ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES A. Mounting locations shall be where indicated, at manufacturers' recommended heights where not indicated, and where determined by the ENGINEER. B. Exposed exterior finish shall be satin finish stainless steel, except where otherwise indicated. C. Towel, toilet tissue, tissue, and sanitary napkin dispensers shall be provided with push button latches. D. Manufacturers, or Equal (All items shall be products of a single manufacturer, wherever possible.) 1. Bobrick Dispensers, Inc. 2. Bradley 3. McKinney Parker Co. 2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE — MWH—09/16/03 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 10800-1 Provide the following at Men's &Women's Restroom FI-102: A. Soap dispenser, liquid, surface: Bobrick B-4112 B. Towel dispenser/waste receptacle, semi-recessed (C-fold): Bobrick B-36903 C. Mirror, w/shelf, 24-in x 36-in: Bobrick B-292-2436 D. Mirror, full length, 24-in x 72-in: Bobrick B-290-2472 E. Toilet seat cover dispenser, surface: Bobrick B-221 F. Toilet tissue dispenser, 2-roll, surface: Bobrick B-686 G. Clothes hook and bumper: Bobrick B-212 H. Grab bars: 1. Side Wall: Bobrick B-6806.99x48 2. Over Toilet: Bobrick B-6806.99x36 I. Lavatory Pipe Protection: Truebro-Nandi Lav-Guard Insulation Kit J. Water Closet: American Standard Yorkville Right Height Pressure Assist Elongated K. Water Closer Seat: American Standard Rise and Shine Open Front Toilet Seat L. Toilet Partition: Bobrick Sierra Series Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC) PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original unbroken packages, containers, or crating bearing the manufacturer's label with manufacturer's name and product description. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in an area which is protected from the elements in a manner recommended by the material manufacturer. Storage shall be in a manner that will prevent damage to the material and its finish. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mounting locations of toilet accessories shall be where indicated, at manufacturer's published recommendations for height where not indicated, and where determined by the ENGINEER. - END OF SECTION- MWH —09/16/03 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES CITY OF FORT WORTH 'F MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 10800-2 SECTION 11000-EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all equipment and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all equipment except where otherwise indicated. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. All equipment shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable and as indicated in each Section of these specifications: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM). 2. American Public Health Association (APHA). 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating,and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. American Welding Society(AWS). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 9. Federal Specifications (FS). 10. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 11. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 12. General Industry Safety Orders(OSHA). B. The following standards are referenced in this Section: ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250,and 800 ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy, and Other Special Alloys ANSI B46.1 Surface Texture ANSI S12.6 Method for the Measurement of the Real-Ear Attenuation of Hearing Protectors MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch) ANSI/ASME 831.1 Power Piping ANSI/AWWA D100 Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish complete Shop Drawings for all equipment, piping, valves, and controls in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Tools: The CONTRACTOR shall supply one complete set of special wrenches and other special tools necessary for the assembly, adjustment, and dismantling of the equipment. All tools shall be of best quality hardened steel forgings with bright, finish wrench heads shall have work faces dressed to fit nuts. All tools shall be suitable for professional work and manufactured by a recognized supplier of professional tools such as Snap On, Crescent, Stanley, or equal. The set of tools shall be neatly mounted in a labeled tool box of suitable design provided with a hinged cover. C. Spare Parts: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit a list of suggested spare parts for each piece of equipment. After approval, CONTRACTOR shall furnish such spare parts suitably packaged, identified with the equipment number, and labeled. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment. All spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER, only, after expiration of the guaranty period. D. Torsional Analysis 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a torsional and lateral vibration analysis of the following equipment, in accordance with Section 01300. The analysis shall be performed by a specialist experienced in this type of work and approved by the ENGINEER. a. All engine drives. b. All other equipment where indicated. 2. The torsional natural frequency of the drive train must be avoided by±25 percent by any exciting frequency of the equipment,throughout the entire operating range. E. Vibration Analysis: In its Bid, the CONTRACTOR shall include at least two Site visits of the above mentioned specialist during construction and testing of the equipment, to analyze and measure the amount of equipment vibration and make a written recommendation for keeping the vibration at a safe limit. Results from the vibration analysis activities shall be submitted to ENGINEER in accordance with Section 01300. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-2 A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that all equipment meets the performance requirements. CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of an experienced, competent, and authorized service representative of the manufacturer of each item of major equipment who shall visit the Site to perform the following tasks: 1. Assist the CONTRACTOR in the installation of the equipment. 2. To inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve the equipment installation. 3. To start-up and field-test the equipment for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. 4. To perform necessary field adjustments during the test period until the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory to the ENGINEER. 5. To instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. Instruction shall include step-by-step trouble shooting procedures with all necessary test equipment. B. Costs: The costs of all inspection, startup, testing, adjustment,and instruction work performed by said factory-trained representatives shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at no increased cost to the OWNER. The OWNER will pay for costs of power and water. When available, the OWNER'S operating personnel will provide assistance in the field testing. C. Public Inspection: It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to inform the local authorities, such as building and plumbing inspectors, fire marshall, OSHA inspectors, and others, to witness all required tests for piping, plumbing, fire protection systems, pressure vessels,safety systems, etc.,to obtain all required permits and certificates, and pay all fees. D. Tolerances: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be closely adhered to. Machine work shall in all cases be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. Members without milled ends and which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation in the detailed length of not greater than 1/16-inch for members 30 feet or less in length, and not greater than 1/8-inch for members over 30 feet in length. E. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application and shall be shown in micro-inches in accordance with ANSI B46.1. The following finishes shall be used: 1. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro-inches shall be required for all surfaces in sliding contact. 2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro-inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required. 3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro-inches shall be required for other machined surfaces. 4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro-inches. F. Manufacturer's Experience: Equipment shall have a record of at least 5 years of successful, troublefree operation in similar applications,from the same manufacturer. MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-3 PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. High Noise Level Location: The CONTRACTOR shall provide one personal hearing M protection station, as indicated herein, at each high noise level location. Locations are defined as follows: 1. Indoor Location: a. Any single equipment item, or any group of equipment items, located within a single room not normally occupied, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2-hour exposure. b. Any single equipment item, or any group of equipment items, located within a single room normally occupied by workers, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for an 8-hour exposure. B. Personal Hearing Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish three pairs of high attenuation hearing protectors in the original unopened packaging. The ear protectors shall be capable of meeting the requirements of ANSI S12.6 and shall produce a noise level reduction of 25 dBA at a frequency of 500 Hz. The hearing protectors shall have fluid filled ear cushions and an adjustable, padded headband. The protectors shall be stored in a weatherproof, labeled, steel cabinet, furnished by the CONTRACTOR and mounted in an approved location near the noise producing equipment. C. Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection or design of mechanical power transmission components. Unless otherwise indicated, the following load classifications shall apply in determining service factors: Type of Equipment Load Classification �— Pump: Centrifugal or Rotary Uniform Crane or Hoist Moderate Shock D. For service factors of electric motors, see Section 16460 - Electric Motors. Where load classifications are not indicated, best modern practice shall be used. E. Welding: Unless otherwise indicated, all welding shall conform to the following: 1. Latest revision of ANSI/AWWA D100. 2. Latest revision of AWWA C206. 3. All composite fabricated steel assemblies which are to be erected or installed inside a hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable structural components of mechanical equipment, shall have continuous seal welds to prevent entrance of air or moisture. 4. All welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's"Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards governing same. MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-4 5. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired -to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. All sharp corners of material which is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat. F. Protective Coating: All equipment shall be painted or coated in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating, unless otherwse indicated. Non-ferrous metal and corrosion- resisting steel surfaces shall be coated with grease or lubricating oil. Coated surfaces shall be protected from abrasion or other damage during handling, testing, storing, assembly, and shipping. G. Protection of Equipment: All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise protected from damage and moisture during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to corrosive fumes and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors,drives, electrical equipment, and other equipment having anti-friction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight storage facilities prior to installation. For extended storage periods, plastic equipment wrappers should be avoided, to prevent accumulation of condensate in gears and bearings. H. Identification of Equipment Items: Each item of equipment shipped shall have a legible identifying mark corresponding to the equipment number for the particular item. I. Vibration Level: All equipment subject to vibration shall be provided with restrained spring- type vibration isolators or pads per manufacturer's written recommendations. J. Shop Fabrication: Shop fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the ENGINEER-approved shop drawings. K. Controls: All equipment and system controls shall be in accordance with Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Equipment Supports: All equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic force shall be the greater of: that noted in the general structural notes or as required by the governing building code, or 10 percent of gravity. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports must bear the signature and seal of an engineer registered in the State wherein the project is to be built, unless otherwise indicated. B. Equipment Foundations: Equipment foundations shall be as per manufacturer's written recommendations. All mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, etc., shall be mounted on minimum 3.5-inch high concrete bases, as shown on standard structural details, unless otherwise indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. Shop Drawings will be considered incomplete unless clear, concise calculations are presented showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements proposed by the CONTRACTOR. MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-5 2.3 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES A. All pipe connections to equipment shall be supported, anchored, and guided to avoid stresses and loads on equipment flanges and equipment. Supports and hangers shall be in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. 2.4 FLANGES AND PIPE THREADS A. All flanges on equipment and appurtenances provided under this Section shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125;or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. All pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME 131.20.1,and with Section 15000 -Piping, General. 2.5 COUPLINGS A. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment to accommodate slight angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to cushion shock loads. Where required for vertical shafts, 3-piece spacer couplings or universal type couplings for extended shafts shall be installed. B. The CONTRACTOR shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application. C. Taper-lock bushings may be used to provide for easy installation and removal on shafts of various diameters. D. Universal type couplings shall be of the needle bearing type construction, equipped with commercial type grease fittings. 2.6 SHAFTING A. General: All shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be sized to transmit the - power required. Keyways shall be accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is less than the diameter of the shaft. All shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and polished, straight, and true. B. Materials: Shafting materials shall be appropriate for the type of service and torque transmitted. Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture, and fluids shall be taken into consideration. Materials shall be as indicated unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly. 1. Low carbon cold-rolled steel shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108,Grade 1018. 2. Medium carbon cold-rolled shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108,Grade 1045. 3. Corrosion-resistant shafting shall be stainless steel or Monel, whichever is most suitable for the intended service. C. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may be expected, a shaft of sufficient length with 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided. MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-6 2.7 BEARINGS A. General: Bearings shall conform to the standards of the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (AFBMA). B. To assure satisfactory bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating, housing strength,and other important factors shall be considered in bearing selection. C. All re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with a hydraulic grease fitting in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing chamber. D. All lubricated-for-life bearings shall be factory-lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best performance. E. Bearing Life: Except where otherwise indicated, all bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life expectancy of 5 years or 20,000 hours, whichever occurs first. Where so specified, bearings shall have a minimum rated L-10 life expectancy corresponding to the type of service, as follows: Type of Service Design Life(years) L-10 Design Life(hours) (whichever comes first) 1. 8-hour shift 10 20,000 2. 16-hour shin 10 40,000 3. Continuous 10 60,000 F. Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting arrangement shall be as indicated or as recommended in the published standards of the manufacturer. Split-type housings may be used to facilitate installation, inspection, and disassembly. G. Sleeve-type bearings shall have a Babbitt or bronze liner. 2.8 GEARS AND GEAR DRIVES A. Unless otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the helical or spiral-bevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA Standards, with a minimum service factor of 1.7, a minimum L-10 bearing life of 60,000 hours, and a minimum efficiency of 94 percent. Worm gears shall not be used, unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. B. All gear speed reducers or increasers shall be of the enclosed type, oil- or grease-lubricated and fully sealed, with a breather to allow air to escape but keep dust and dirt out. The casing shall be of cast iron or heavy duty steel construction with lifting lugs and an inspection cover for each gear train. An oil level sight glass and an oil flow indicator shall be provided,arranged for easy reading. C. Gears and gear drives as part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped fully assembled for field installation. D. Material selections shall be left to the discretion of the manufacturer, provided the above AGMA values are met. Input and output shafts shall be adequately designed for the service and load requirements. Gears shall be computer-matched for minimum tolerance variation. The output shaft shall have 2 positive seals to prevent oil leakage. MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-7 E. Oil level and drain location relative to the mounting arrangement shall be easily accessible. Oil coolers or heat exchangers with all required appurtenances shall be furnished when necessary. F. Where gear drive input or output shafts have to connect to couplings or sprockets supplied by others, the CONTRACTOR shall have the gear drive manufacturer supply matching key taped to the shaft for shipment. 2.9 DRIVE CHAINS A. Power drive chains shall be commercial type roller chains and meet ANSI Standards. B. A chain take-up or tightener shall be provided in every chain drive arrangement to provide easy adjustment. C. A minimum of one connecting or coupler link shall be provided with each length of roller chain. D. Chain and attachments shall be of the manufacturer's best standard material and suitable for the process fluid. 2.10 SPROCKETS A. General: Sprockets shall be used in conjunction with all chain drives and chain-type material handling equipment. B. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall be as follows: 1. Sprockets with 25 teeth or less, normally used as a driver, shall be made of medium carbon steel in the 0.40 to 0.45 percent carbon range. 2. Type A and B sprockets with 26 teeth or more, normally used as driven sprockets, shall be made of minimum 0.20 percent carbon steel. 3. Large diameter sprockets with Type C hub shall be made of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 30. C. All sprockets shall be accurately machined to ANSI Standards. Sprockets shall have deep hardness penetration in tooth sections. D. Finish bored sprockets shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. E. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sprockets shall be of the split type or shall be furnished with taper-lock bushings as required. F. Idler sprockets shall be furnished with brass or Babbitt bushings, complete with oil hole and axial or circumferential grooving. Steel collars with set screws may be provided in both sides of the hub. 2.11 V-BELT DRIVES A. V-belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ANSI, MPTA, and RMA Standards. MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-8 B. Unless otherwise indicated, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron. C. All sheaves shall be statically balanced. In some applications where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at belt speeds exceeding 6,500 fpm may be required to be of special materials and construction. D. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sheaves shall be furnished complete with taper-lock or QD bushings as required. E. Finish bored sheaves shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. F. Sliding motor ba es shall be provided to adjust the tension of V-belts. 2.12 DRIVE GUARDS A. All power transmission, prime movers, machines, shaft extensions, and moving machine parts shall be guarded to conform with the OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29CFR1910). The guards shall be constructed of minimum 10 gage expanded, flattened steel with smooth edges and comers, galvanized after fabrication and securely fastened. Where required for lubrication or maintenance,guards shall have hinged and latched access doors. 2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment and in piping systems in accordance with the requirements of the Section 15000- Piping General. 2.14 INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. General: Insulating bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used in accordance with the requirements of the Section 15000—Piping, General. 2.15 GASKETS AND EIACKINGS A. Gaskets shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15000,Piping, General. B. Packing around valve stems and reciprocating shafts shall be of compressible material, compatible with the fluid being used. Chevron-type "V" packing shall be Garlock No. 432, John Crane"Everseal," or equal. C. Packing around rotating shafts (other than valve stems) shall be "O"-rings, stuffing boxes, or mechanical seals, as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 11100- Pumps, General. 2.16 NAMEPLATES A. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the machine performance ratings. MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-9 2.17 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Where work areas are located within a flammable or toxic gas environment, suitable gas detection, ventilating, and oxygen deficiency equipment shall be provided. Workers shall be equipped with OSHA approved breathing apparatus. 2.18 OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment drives incorporating overload protection shall be provided with an overload protection device. B. Mechanical System: The overload protection shall be a mechanical device to provide for reliable protection in the event of excessive overload. It shall be a ball detent type designed for long term repeatability and life. It shall be infinitely adjustable by a single adjusting nut. Once set it shall be tamperproof and shall incorporate a torque monitoring and control system. It shall activate an alarm set for 85 percent and a motor cutout switch set for 100 percent of maximum continuous running torque. A visual torque indication shall be provided and oriented so that it may be read from the walkway. The dial shall be calibrated from 0 to 100 percent of maximum continuous running torque. The design of the. torque limiter should initiate the mechanical disengagement of the drive upon overload. Each unit shall be suitable for outdoor/corrosive environments with a protective finish, corrosion inhibiting lubricants, and a stainless steel cover. C. Electronic System 1. As an alternative to the mechanical system, the overload protection may be an Electronic Torque Monitoring Control System capable of displaying torque, rpm's, one level of overload, and two levels of overload of the drive system. It shall incorporate a time-delay for start-up and a voltage monitoring and compensation circuit for up to ±15 percent variation. 2. The overload device shall have an enclosure suitable for outdoor installation at temperatures of 0-70 degrees C, and relative humidity up to 95 percent. The overload device shall be housed in an enclosure with NEMA rating in accordance with the area designations of Section 16050 - Electrical Work, General. A visual torque dial shall be oriented so that it can be easily read from the walkway. 3. The torque monitoring system shall be calibrated to: alarm and shut down the system in the event the torque drops to 50 percent of normal running; alarm at 85 percent of maximum continuous running torque; and shut down the motor at maximum continuous running torque of the equipment. The system shall be calibrated at the factory of the equipment manufacturer, and it shall be capable of monitoring twice the maximum continuous running torque of the equipment. D. Manufacturers,or Equal: 1. American Autogard Corporation; 2. Ferguson Machine Company. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 COUPLINGS MWH-05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-10 A. The CONTRACTOR shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application; installation shall be per equipment manufacturer's printed recommendations. 3.2 INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. All insulating connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES A. Hangers, supports, and guides shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI/ASME B.31.1 standard, and with tables in Section 15006—Pipe Supports. 3.4 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT A. When any system is furnished as pre-packaged equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all necessary space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals,and outputs with subcontractors to avoid later change orders. B. If the packaged system has any additional features (as safety interlocks, etc.), other than required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate such features with the ENGINEER and furnish all material and labor necessary for a complete installation as required by the manufacturer, at no additional cost to the OWNER. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11000-11 SECTION 11100- PUMPS, GENERAL PART 1 -- GENERAL _ 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, i� accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions` of this Section shall apply to all pumps and pumping equipment except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. The requirements of Section 11000 — Equipment General Provisions apply to this Section. D. Unit Responsibility: The pump manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the WORK and for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of the WORK of each pump Section; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance with the requirements of each pump Section. E. Single Manufacturer: Where 2 or more pump systems of the same type or size are required, the pumps shall all be produced by the same manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300- Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information: 1. Pump name, identification number, and specification Section number. 2. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH required, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump. The equipment manufacturer anufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design flow conditions and the maximum and minimum flow conditions. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall require the manufacturer to indicate the limits on the performance curves recommended for stable operation without surge, cavitation, or excessive vibration. The stable operating range shall be as wide as possible based on actual hydraulic and mechanical tests. 4. Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings, anchor bolt plan, part nomenclature, material list, outline dimensions, and shipping weights. 5. Data, in accordance with Section 16460 - Electric Motors, for the electric motor proposed for each pump. 6. Elevation of proposed local control panel showing panel-mounted devices, details of enclosure type, single line diagram of power distribution, and current Y MWH - 05/18/07 PUMPS GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11100-1 draw of panel, and list of all terminals required to receive inputs or to transmit outputs from the local control panel. 7. Wiring diagram of field connections with identification of terminations between local control panels, junction terminal boxes, and equipment items. 8. Complete electrical schematic diagram. C. Technical Manual: The Technical Manual shall contain the required information for each pump Section. D. Spare Parts List: A spare parts list shall contain the required information for each pump Section. E. Factory Test Data: Signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each pump system which requires factory testing, submitted before shipment of equipment. F. Certifications 1. Manufacturer's certification of proper installation. 2. CONTRACTOR'S certification of satisfactory field testing. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Compliance with the requirements of the individual pump Sections may necessitate modifications to the manufacturer's standard equipment. B. Performance Curves: All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve or the system operating range shall not cross the pump curve at two different capacities or "dip region." Unless indicated otherwise, the required pump shaft horsepower at any point on the performance curve shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the motor or engine or encroach on the service factor. C. All components of each pump system provided under the pump Sections shall be entirely compatible. Each unit of pumping equipment shall incorporate all basic mechanisms, couplings, electric motors or engine drives, variable speed controls, necessary mountings, and appurtenances. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not indicated shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cast iron pump casings and bowls shall be of close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48- Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or equal. MWH - 05/18/07 PUMPS GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11100-2 2. Bronze pump impellers shall conform to ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, or B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications, where dezincification does not occur. 3. Stainless steel pump shafts shall be Type 416 or 316. Miscellaneous stainless ,%NMWI steel parts shall be Type 316. 4. Anchor bolts, washers, and nuts in Standard Service (Non-Corrosive Application) shall be galvanized steel in accordance with the requirements of Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. Anchor bolts, washers, and nuts in Corrosive Service as defined in Section 05500 shall be stainless steel in accordance with that Section. B. Materials in contact with potable water shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. 2.3 PUMP COMPONENTS - GENERAL A. Flanges and Bolts: Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 or ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings dimensions. Bolts shall be in accordance with Section 05500. B. Handholes: Handholes on pump casings shall be shaped to follow the contours of the casing to avoid any obstructions in the water passage. C. Drains: All air valves shall be piped to the nearest floor sink or drain, with galvanized steel pipe or copper tube, properly supported with brackets. D. Stuffing Boxes: Where stuffing boxes are indicated for the pump seal, they shall be of the best quality, using the manufacturer's suggested materials best suited for the specific application. 1. Mechanical Seals (Conventional Non-Split Type): Mechanical seals shall be product water-flushed. Mechanical seals shall be as manufactured by the following, or equal: Water Pumps (hot and Single seals John Crane Type 88SRS, cold) Flowserve Type ISCPX, Chesterton Type UV, GSS, or 155 E. Mechanical seals for all services shall be equipped with nonclogging, flexible— mounted seats with elastomer secondary seals. Wetted metal parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, Alloy 20, or Hastelloy B or C, whichever has the best corrosion resistance to the pumped fluid. Dual cartridge seals shall be double balanced to allow for seal integrity in case of flush water pressure reversal. All single and double seals shall have springs in the non-wetted end of the seal. MWH - 05/18/07 PUMPS GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11100-3 2.4 PUMP APPURTENANCES A. Nameplates: Each pump shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate indicating serial numbers, rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, and manufacturer's name and model number. B. Gauges 1. All pumps (except sump pumps) shall be equipped with pressure gauges installed at pump discharge lines. Pump suction lines shall be provided with compound gauges. Gauges shall be located in a representative location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings. 2. Pressure and compound gauges shall be provided in accordance with Section 17108 - Pressure Measuring Systems. 2.5 FACTORY TESTING A. The following tests shall be conducted on each indicated pump system: 1. Motors: Electric motors shall be tested in accordance with Section 16460. Test results shall be furnished to the pump manufacturer prior to the pump test. 2. Pump Systems: All centrifugal pump systems shall be tested at the pump factory in accordance with the American National Standard for Centrifugal Pump Tests (ANSI/HI 1.6) acceptance Level "A" or the American National Standard for Vertical Pump Tests (ANSI/HI 2.6) as approved by ANSI and published by the Hydraulic Institute. For sump pumps, acceptance shall be in accordance with Level "B" of ANSI/Hl 1.6 unless indicated otherwise. Tests shall be performed using the complete pump system to be furnished, including the project motor. For pumps with motors smaller than 100 hp, the manufacturer's certified test motor shall be *,wool acceptable. Testing of prototype models will not be acceptable. The following minimum test results shall be submitted: a. Hydrostatic test results b. At maximum speed, a minimum of five hydraulic test readings between shutoff head and 25 percent beyond the maximum indicated capacity, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute. c. Pump curves showing head, flow, bhp, and efficiency requirements. d. NPSH required test curve if required by the pump specification. Otherwise, a calculated NPSH required curve may be submitted. e. Certification that the pump shaft horsepower demand did not exceed the rated motor horsepower of 1.0 service rating at any point on the curve. 3. Factory Witnessed Tests: All pumps and motors, 150 hp and larger shall be factory-tested as complete assembled systems and may be witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER a minimum of 2 weeks notification prior to the test. All costs for OWNER and ENGINEER shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR and shall be included in the MWH - 05/18/07 PUMPS GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11100-4 bid price. Such costs shall include travel and subsistence for two people excluding salaries. Test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. No equipment shall be shipped until the test data have been approved by the ENGINEER. *.%mole 4. Acceptance: In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the pump shall be re-tested until found satisfactory. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by the individual pump Sections, an authorized service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site for the number of days indicated in those sections to witness the following and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation. 1. Installation of the equipment 2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment 3. Startup and field testing for proper operation 4. Performing field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements ,%WWI Inspection, startup and field adjustment of the pumps shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish 3 days advance notice of these activities. B. Instruction of the Owner's Personnel 1. Where required by the individual pump Sections, an authorized training representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site for the number of days indicated in those Sections to instruct the OWNER'S personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting with necessary test equipment. Instruction shall be specific to the models of equipment provided. 2. The representative shall have at least 2 years experience in training. A resume for the representative shall be submitted. 3. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of the first session. 4. Proposed training material and a detailed outline of each lesson shall be submitted for review. Comments shall be incorporated into the material. 5. The training materials shall remain with the trainees. MWH - 05/18/07 PUMPS GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11100-5 6. The OWNER may videotape the training for later use with the OWNER'S personnel. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Alignment: All equipment shall be field tested using laser alignment technology to verify proper alignment and freedom from binding, scraping, shaft runout, or other defects. A report on the results of the laser alignment activities shall be submitted to ENGINEER in accordance with Section 01300. Pump drive shafts shall be measured just prior to assembly to ensure correct alignment without forcing. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance. C. Lubricants: The CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary oil and grease for initial operation. 3.3 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Materials and equipment shall be coated as required in Section 09800 - Protective Coating. 3.4 FIELD TESTS A. Each pump system shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate: 1. Satisfactory operation without excessive noise and vibration. 2. No material loss caused by cavitation. 3. No overheating of bearings. 4. Indicated head, flow, and efficiency at design point. B. The following field testing shall be conducted: 1. Startup, check, and operate the pump system at max RPM. Unless otherwise indicated, vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards at a minimum of four pumping conditions defined by the ENGINEER. 2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head for at least 4 pumping conditions at max RPM. Check each power lead to the motor for proper current balance. 3. Determine bearing temperatures by contact type thermometer. A run time until bearing temperatures have stabilized shall precede this test, unless insufficient liquid volume is available. 4. Electrical and instrumentation tests shall conform to the requirements of the sections under which that equipment is specified. MWH - 05/18/07 PUMPS GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11100-6 C. Field testing will be witnessed by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish 3 days advance notice of field testing. D. In the event any pumping system fails to meet the indicated requirements, the pump shall be modified or replaced and re-tested as above until it satisfies the lwwavl requirements. E. After each pumping system has satisfied the requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that all final adjustments have been made. Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of all persons present during the tests, and the test data. F. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all costs of field tests, including related services of the manufacturer's representative, except for power and water, which the OWNER will bear. If available, the OWNER'S operating personnel will provide assistance in field testing. - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 PUMPS GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11100-7 SECTION 11106- HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide horizontal split-case pumps, including horizontal electric motors, drives, controls, wiring, and associated piping, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 11100 - Pumps, General apply to this Section. C. The Supplier shall examine the Site conditions, intended application, and operation of the pump system and recommend the pump which will best satisfy the indicated requirements. D. The below indicated Pump No. 2 and Pump No. 3 shall be capable of meeting the initial and future Operating Conditions and Performance Requirements (Part 2.1 of this section) without the need for pump replacement. Changing the pump impeller to upgrade pump performance from initial to future conditions is acceptable; however, if this will be required, the CONTRACTOR shall include the cost of both the initial and future impellers in the Lump Sum Bid for Item A indicated in Section 01025 — Measurement and Payment. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Identification Pump Name Pump No. 1 Pump No. 2 Pump No. 3 Equipment Number P-1 P-2 P-3 Quantity 1 1 1 Location Pump Station Bldg. Pump Station Bldg. Pump Station Bldg. B. Operating Conditions: The WORK of this Section shall be suitable for long term operation under the following conditions: Conditions Initial Future Pump P-1 P-2 and P-3 P-2 and P-3 Duty Continuous Continuous Continuous Drive Constant Speed Constant Speed Constant Speed Ambient environment Indoors Indoors Indoors MWH - 05/18/07 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS [CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 11106- 1 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK Ambient temperature, 0 to 110 0 to 110 0 to 110 degrees F Ambient relative humidity, 20 to 100 20 to 100 20 to 100 percent Fluid service Drinking water Drinking water Drinking water Fluid temperature, degrees 40 to 95 40 to 95 40 to 95 F Fluid pH range 6 to 8 6 to 8 6 to 8 Fluid specific gravity 1.0 1.0 1.0 Fluid viscosity absolute, 1.12 1.12 1.12 centipoises at 60 deg F Project site elevation, msl 800.75 800.75 800.75 Minimum available NPSH 33 32 32 at minimum water level in reservoir, ft C. Performance Requirements Conditions Initial Future Pump P-1 P-2 and P-3 P-2 and P3 Maximum shutoff head, ft 210 245 245 Design flow capacity, gpm 3200 7300 5700 Design flow pump head, 162 162 198 TDH, ft Design flow minimum 85 82 83 pump efficiency, percent Design flow maximum 20 25 20 NPSH required, ft Maximum flow capacity of 5100 9000 9000 at least, gpm Maximum flow pump head, 105 100 100 TDH, ft, plus/minus 5 ft. Maximum flow minimum 70 60 60 pump efficiency, percent MWH - 05/18/07 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS [CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 11106-2 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK Maximum flow NPSH 40 40 40 required equal to or less than, ft Minimum flow capacity 1500 5500 3500 equal to or less than, gpm Minimum flow pump head, 190 175 to 200 205 to 225 TDH, ft., plus/minus 5 ft. Minimum flow pump 60 82 65 efficiency of at least, percent Maximum pump speed, 1800 1800 1800 rpm Minimum pump speed, 1800 1200 1200 rpm Maximum motor speed, 1800 1800 1800 rpm Minimum motor size, hp 200 400 400 D. Pump Dimensions Conditions Initial Future Pump P-1 P-2 and P-3 P-2 and P-3 Min impeller diameter, in 13.0 14.7 14.7 Min suction flange size, in 10 14 14 Min discharge flange size, 8 10 10 in Suction flange rating, 150 150 150 ANSI, psi Discharge flange rating, 150 150 150 ANSI, psi 2.2 PUMP REQUIREMENTS A. Construction: Construction of horizontal, split-case pumps shall conform to the following requirements: MWH - 05/18/07 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS [CITY OF FORT WORTH' PAGE 11106 - 3 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK Casing (with drains and vents) Close-grained cast iron, computer machined, tested to 150 percent of maximum head, with integral bearing supports. Provide vent ball valve in top of casing. Support Base Heavy cast-iron or steel base, with integral drip rim or pan and drain Impeller Type and Material Enclosed double suction-type, hand finished, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft, bronze. Impeller and Casing Wear Rings Type 316 stainless steel renewable Shaft A576 Grade 1040 carbon steel, machined and ground, designed for minimum deflection Shaft Sleeves Bronze ASTM B 584 Seals Mechanical seals with lubricating water connected from pump casing. Bearings Heavy-duty, grease or oil- lubricated, ball and double row thrust bearings. Minimum L-10 bearing life: 100,000 hours at any point within the operating range Bearing Housing Cylindrical or cartridge Shaft coupling Heavy-duty flexible coupling and galvanized steel or aluminum OSHA safety guard Seal water tubing Type 316 stainless steel connected from pump discharge casing. B. Drive: Direct drive from horizontal, heavy-duty, high efficiency, ODP electric motor, suitable for 4160-volt, 3-phase, 60-Hz power supply in accordance with Section 16460 - Electric Motors. C. The pumps shall be designed to withstand reverse rotation due to water backflow without damage to the pump components. MWH - 05/18/07 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS [CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 11106- 4 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 2.3 PUMP CONTROLS A. Pump shall be controlled in accordance with Section 17300 - Control Strategies. 2.4 SPARE PARTS 1. Furnish the following spare parts for each pump: a. Two shaft sleeves b. One set of wear rings c. Two mechanical seals d. Two sets of gaskets and O-rings 2.5 MANUFACTURERS OR EQUAL A. PACO/Johnston B. Patterson C. Flow Serve D. Fairbanks Morse PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 3 work days, to furnish the services required by Section 11100. B. Instruction of OWNER'S Personnel: The training representative of the manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 3 work days to furnish the services required by Section 11100. C. For the purposes of this paragraph, a work day is defined as an 8 hour period at the Site, excluding travel time. D. The ENGINEER may require that the inspection, startup, and field adjustment services above be furnished in three separate trips. - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 HORIZONTAL SPLIT-CASE PUMPS [CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 11106- 5 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK SECTION 11149-SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP PART 1 --GENERAL *ft..i 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide submersible sump pump and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions apply to the WORK of this Section. C. The Supplier shall examine the Site conditions, intended application, and operation of the pump system and recommend the pump which will satisfy the indicated requirements. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 SUMP PUMP A. Identification: 1. Equipment Number - P-6A, P-66, P-6C, P6-D, P6-E 2. Quantity - 5 3. Location - Valve vaults #1, #2, #3, and #4 and Meter Vault B. Operating Conditions: The WORK of this Section shall be suitable for long term operation under the following conditions: 1. Duty - Intermittent 2. Drive - - Constant speed 3. Ambient environment - Indoors and Outdoors 4. Ambient temperature, - -10 to 110 (degrees F) 5. Ambient relative - 40 to 100 humidity(percent) 6. Fluid service - Floor Washing, Rain Water 7. Fluid temperature, - Ambient (degrees F) 8. Fluid pH range - 5 to 9 9. Fluid specific gravity - 1.0 10. Fluid viscosity - 1.12 (absolute) (centipoises at 60 deg. F) MWH-05/18/07 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11149-1 11. Project site elevation - 786± 12. Maximum size of spheres - '/z" to pass (in.dia) C. Performance Requirements: 1. Maximum shutoff head (ft) - 40 2. Design flow capacity(gpm) - 20 3. Design flow pump head - 15 (TDH ft) 4. Design flow minimum pump - 45 efficiency(percent) 5. Maximum motor speed(rpm) - 1,800 6. Maximum motor size(hp) - 1/2 D. Pump Dimensions: 1. Sump dimensions (in) - See Drawings 2. Sump depth (in) - See Drawings 3. Sump top - Fiberglass grating with frame 4. Pump discharge size (inches) - 2 �- 5. Discharge flange rating (psi) - 150 2.2 PUMP REQUIREMENTS A. Construction: Construction of submersible sump pump shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Pump casing - Cast iron 2. Impeller - Semi-open, non-clog cast iron 3. Bearings - Permanently lubricated ball and sleeve type 4. Shaft - Stainless steel,series 400 5. Seal - Mechanical seal 6. Mounting Method - Stainless steel chain and hook 7. Pump Connection - Union with neoprene pressure hose MWH-05/18/07 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11149-2 B. Drive: Enclosed, submerged, electric 1,800 rpm motor, suitable for 120 volt, 1- phase, 60-Hz ac power supply, with armored cable, in accordance with Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. ,%%wool C. Control: Pump shall be manually controlled with on/off control station. The pump shall be shut down by a cut-off float. 2.3 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Pumps shall be coated in accordance with Section 09800—Protective Coatings. 2.4 MANUFACTURERS OR EQUAL A. ABS Pumps, Inc. B. Hydromatic Pumps C. Goulds Pumps Inc. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with approved procedures submitted with the Shop Drawings and as indicated. - END OF SECTION - MWH-05/18/07 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 11149-3 SECTION 13656 -STEEL WATER RESERVOIRS AND TANKS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide steel water reservoirs and tanks, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS ANSI/AWWA D 100 Standard for Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage ANSI/AWWA D 104 Automatically Controlled Impressed Current Cathodic Protection for the Interior of Steel Water Tanks ANSI/API 650 Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following information: 1. Detailed design calculations for the tank, excluding the concrete foundations. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Details of welded joints, including sequences and methods for welding 3 plate intersections for floors and roofs. 4. Mill test reports for steel materials. 5. The detailed design calculations, shop drawings and reports shall be sealed and signed by an engineer registered with the Texas Board of Professional Engineers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide quality assurance services as required by ANSI/AWWA D100 and as required by this Section. Where the requirements differ, the provisions of this Section shall govern. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a written report for inspection and testing as specified in ANSI/AWWA D100, Section 11. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 DESIGN A. Design shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA D100 - Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage, subject to the following modifications and additions: 1. Option to use the design, fabrication, and inspection procedures indicated in Appendix C of ANSI/AWWA D100 will be permitted with the following limitation: only steel complying with Category 1 material requirements may be used. MWH - 05/18/07 STEEL WATER RESERVOIRS AND TANKS CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 13656-1 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 2. The lowest one-day mean ambient temperature at the site of the tank shall be considered to be 20 degrees F. 3. No corrosion allowance will be required. 4. The tank details shall be designed to eliminate unwelded joints that will promote corrosion, pockets that will accumulate rain water, and attachments to the shell which result in excessive localized stresses due to welding or imposed loads. The exceptions to this requirement are the roof rafters and internal roof plate lap joints. The contact surfaces between the roof rafters and roof plates and the interior roof plate lap joints shall be primed before erection in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating. 5. Design Loads: Roof Live Load, minimum, psf = 20 Wind Velocity, mph = 70, Exposure C Net Allowable Soil Bearing = 3,500 PSF 2.2 FABRICATION A. Tank Shell Welding: All welds joining shell plates and wetted roof plates shall have complete joint penetration and fusion and shall be double-welded from both sides. The use of low- hydrogen electrodes is mandatory for manual welding of shell plates, for permanent attachments to the shell plates, for fittings, and for welds joining the shell plates to the bottom plates. All shell plates shall be rolled, regardless of material thickness. B. Roof and Columns 1. Roof: The roof shall be conical or knuckle type as indicated. The roof shall be designed for the minimum indicated live load and shall slope 3/4-inch in 12 inches unless indicated otherwise. Lateral bracing of rafter compression flanges shall not be assumed 1%40001 to be provided by friction between roof sheets and rafters. Rafters and bridging between rafters shall be designed of standard structural steel shapes. The minimum roof plate thickness shall be 3/16-inch. 2. Columns: Columns shall be fabricated from steel pipe sealed at both ends. Column bases shall be fabricated from steel plate and be provided with the necessary gusset plates to distribute the load uniformly. The base plates shall be designed for a maximum foundation loading of 2,000 pounds per square foot, exclusive of the weight of water. The column bases shall not be welded to the bottom plates but shall be prevented from lateral movement by angle clips welded to the bottom plates. Where column base plates are placed over lap joints, filler plates shall be used to provide full bearing under the base. Structural steel shapes shall not be used for column bases. 3. Fasteners: All nuts and bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Bolts inside the reservoir that support permanent loads, ladders, or appurtenances shall be Type 304 stainless steel. C. Tank Bottom: The tank bottom, including sketch and annular plates, shall be fabricated from steel plate not less than 5/16-inch in thickness. Annular bottom plates shall be provided per Appendix C of ANSI/AWWA D100, except that the butt-welded joints shall be double welded from both sides. MWH -05/18/07 STEEL WATER RESERVOIRS AND TANKS CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 13656-2 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. All inside and outside ladders, inlet-outlet, drain pipe, manhole through the shell, manhole through the roof, vent, and liquid level indicator shall be provided as indicated. B. Piping fittings, flanges, couplings, and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements of Sections 15000 - Piping, General, and 02572 - Steel Pipe Fabricated Specials. The outside ladders shall extend to within 6 inches of the ring footing. Except as otherwise indicated, exterior ladders, bolts, and other exterior miscellaneous metal appurtenances shall be galvanized. Interior ladders, nuts and bolts, clips, and support angles shall be Type 304 stainless steel. C. The access manhole in the lowest ring of the shell shall conform to ANSI/API 650 - Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage and shall be hinged. D. All submerged bolts inside the tank shall be of Type 304 stainless steel. E. The fall prevention system shall be as indicated under Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. Metal components exposed to the atmosphere shall be galvanized steel. Metal components inside the reservoir shall be Type 304 stainless steel. F. Cathodic Protection System: The cathodic protection system shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA D104. 2.4 FACTORY TESTING A. Furnish shop inspection services according to ANSI/AWWA D100 and furnish mill test reports. 2.5 MANUFACTURERS, OR EQUAL A. The items under this Section shall be furnished by constructors having experience and regular practice in the design, fabrication, and construction of steel water reservoirs or tanks with a record of at least five successful installations within the last two years. Submit at least five separate project references which demonstrate the successful experience, including the name, address, and telephone number of the owner of each project. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Tank construction shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA D100. B. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified in ANSI/AWWA D100. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION A. Automatic Welding: If the CONTRACTOR uses an automatic welding machine for the horizontal welds in the tank shell, the following start-up procedure shall be used. After the first 10 feet of the first pass is welded, the CONTRACTOR shall air carbon arc gouge into the root of the weld to allow the ENGINEER to visually confirm that full penetration and fusion is attained. If full penetration and fusion have not been attained, the machine shall be MWH - 05/18/07 STEEL WATER RESERVOIRS AND TANKS CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 13656-3 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK immediately corrected. The procedure shall be repeated until satisfactory welding is achieved. Defective welding in the start-up area shall be repaired. B. Bottom Distortion: Use a written procedure for fitting and welding the bottom plates. Out- of-plane distortion shall not exceed 0.75 percent of the tank radius. C. Shell Distortion: Local deviations, such as flat spots, peaked joints, and welding distortion shall be limited as follows: 1. Using a horizontal sweep board 36 inches long, the distance from the sweep board to the shell shall not be greater than 1/2 inch. Flat spots shall be measured with an external sweep board. Peaked spots shall be measured with an internal sweep board. 2. Using a vertical sweep board 36 inches long, banding of horizontal joints shall not exceed 1/2 inch. 3. Measurements shall be taken beginning with the first joints that are welded. Corrections to the fitting and welding procedure shall immediately be made if the joints are not within the above criteria for distortion. Submit corrective procedures for joints that have been welded but are not within the criteria for distortion. D. Upon completion of welding, all weld spatter, flux, slag, burrs left by attachments, and excessive weld reinforcement shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance with uniform weld contours and dimensions. All tank external corners and edges shall be ground to a minimum 1/1 6-inch radius. All tank internal corners and edges shall be ground to a minimum 1/8-inch radius, except that the internal roof plate edges shall be ground to a minimum 1/1 6-inch radius before application of coatings. 3.3 FIELD TESTING A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish field inspection services according to ANSI/AWWA D100 as modified by this Section and shall submit a written report. B. Inspection and Testing of Welds: Performing and paying for inspection and testing of welds shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility and shall be completed before application of protective coatings. Welding of each successive shell course shall not begin until the previous shell course welds have been completely welded, inspected, and repaired. On joints where radiography is required, the welding of each worker shall be radiographed on the worker's first joint, before Work begins on subsequent joints. The ENGINEER shall be furnished certified copies of all radiography reports. 1. Shell Welds: All vertical welds shall be radiographed for 100 percent of their length. Welds not meeting the acceptance criteria in ANSI/AWWA D100 shall be repaired and radiographed until the requirements are met. Horizontal welds shall be radiographed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA D100. 2. Roof Welds: Welds in contact with the reservoir contents shall be spot radiographed per ANSI/AWWA D100. 3. Bottom Welds: All welds joining the bottom plates shall be vacuum tested using solution film. Any detectable leaks shall be marked and repaired by welding. Sealing shall not be accomplished by peening. One spot radiograph shall be taken on 10 percent of the butt-welded annular plates. The inside shell-to-bottom fillet weld shall be vacuum tested using solution film before the outside weld is made. MWH -05/18/07 STEEL WATER RESERVOIRS AND TANKS N%Wool CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 13656-4 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 4. Shell Reinforcing Plates: After the reinforcing plate is fitted to the shell, but before the pipe or neck fitting is inserted, the reinforcing plate shall be seal welded to the shell at the inner and outer edges. Air pressure shall then be applied to the space between the reinforcing plate and the shell, and the seal welds tested with solution film. �f C. Hydrostatic Testing: Hydrostatic testing and disinfection shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01650 - Testing And Disinfection Of Concrete And Steel Hydraulic Structures. The OWNER will furnish water for testing and disinfection at the project site, but the CONTRACTOR will be required to pump the water with a free air gap to fill the reservoir. Continuously monitor the filling operation to control the rate and level to avoid overflow. - END OF SECTION - Iftwi ,*mo/ MWH -05/18/07 STEEL WATER RESERVOIRS AND TANKS CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 13656-5 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK SECTION 14600—HOISTS AND CRANES, GENERAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the hoisting equipment, ancillary steel, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of this Section apply to all hoists and cranes unless indicated otherwise. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Building AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association ANSI B30.10 Hooks ANSI B30.2-1983 Overhead and Gantry Cranes ANSI MH 27.1 Underhung Crane and Monorail Systems ASTM A-275-80 Structural Steel ,*Mow, CMAA Crane Manufacturer's Association of America NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association OSHA 1910.179 Occupation Safety and Health Act 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings shall include all electrical requirements, weights, wheel loads, dimensions, and clearances required. C. Technical Manuals: Include complete operating and maintenance instructions of the hoist and crane systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection and Testing Requirements: After erection, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and test all hoists and crane systems in the presence of the manufacturer's service representative, for proper operation and conformance to the Specifications. B. Acceptance Criteria and Tolerances: The ENGINEER reserves the right to reject any equipment not conforming to the tolerances, deflections, and lateral stiffness indicated. MWH -05/18/07 HOISTS AND CRANES, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 14600-1 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The CONTRACTOR shall have the hoist or crane manufacturer furnish the services of a trained, qualified representative for at least one day after the units are installed, for the purpose of inspecting the installation and instructing the OWNER's operating personnel. ,%W/ PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Equipment of similar design shall be from the same manufacturer. B. The capacity of each hoist and trolley shall be permanently marked in a conspicuous manner on the equipment. The wire rope reeving shall be of the two-part double, cross mounted or similar appropriate type, to provide a true, vertical lift without drift, unless otherwise indicated. C. All hooks shall be safety type with latch. D. Motors: Motors shall comply with the requirements of Section 16460 - Electric Motors. E. The CONTRACTOR shall verify all dimensions and clearances in the field prior to erection and shall be responsible for the proper fitting and operation of the equipment. F. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Thern, Inc., 2. Gaffey, Inc., 3. American Monorail. `oo, 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Materials used must be new and of the best commercial grade. Where materials are not indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall have the manufacturer use the most suitable selection for the given application and environment. 2.3 PLANT FABRICATED ITEMS A. Fabrication, assembly, and welding shall be carried out by factory-trained specialists and certified welders. 2.4 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools: The CONTRACTOR shall supply one complete set of special wrenches or other special tools necessary for the assembly, adjustment, and dismantling of the equipment. All tools shall be of best quality and furnished in labeled tool boxes of suitable design. B. Spare Parts: Furnish spare parts as required by the hoist or crane section. Parts shall be properly labeled and identified with the name and number of the equipment to which they belong. N%ftvol MWH -05/18/07 HOISTS AND CRANES, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 14600-2 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hoist and crane equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. B. The workmanship shall be in accordance with the referenced standards and codes. C. Care shall be taken, that the structural integrity of beams, columns, walls, floors, and roofs will be maintained at all times. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. After completion of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall test all hoist and crane equipment in the presence of the manufacturer's field representative, who shall certify in writing that the equipment meets applicable standards and specifications. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 HOISTS AND CRANES, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 14600-3 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK SECTION 14630— BRIDGE CRANES PART 1 -- GENERAL *."woe 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an electrically operated bridge crane system complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions apply to the WORK of this Section. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Requirement: The bridge crane system shall be of low headroom type, equipped for electronic lift and travel in both directions and shall be mounted on standard I-beam or specially fabricated sections. It shall be controlled from a pendant pushbutton station and be furnished complete with all required safety devices and overload protection. The power supply shall be from enclosed, UL-approved conductor bar systems. The rails shall be standard 1-beams, or specially fabricated steel sections, firmly anchored to the structure in accordance with AISC design manual recommendations. The track deflection shall not exceed 1/800 of the span, or 1-1/4 inches, whichever is less. The completed crane system, except the tracks, shall be the product of one crane manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such equipment. B. Site Conditions: Equipment No. - BC-1 Location - Pump Station Atmosphere - indoors C. Design Criteria: The bridge crane system shall have the following capacities and dimensions: Equipment No. - BC-1 Type of Crane - top running Type of Bridge - single girder Capacity(tons) - 5 Maximum lift(feet) - 15 Length of track(feet) - 98 Length of bridge - 28.92 Span between tracks (feet) - 28.25 MWH -05/18/07 BRIDGE CRANES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 14630-1 Speed Control - Dual Speed Lifting Speed (fpm) - 13, 7 Trolley Speed (fpm) - 50 ,%Mwl Bridge Speed (fpm) - 80 Hoist Motor(hp) - 5 to 7-1/2 Trolley Motor(hp) - 3/4 to 1 Bridge Motor(hp) - 3/4 to 1 HP x 2 Power Supply(V-ph-Hz) - 480-3-60 2.2 FABRICATION A. Hook and Wire Rope: The lifting hook shall be of drop-forged, heat-treated steel with a- 360-degree swivel on a shielded roller thrust bearing with safety spring latch. The wire ropes shall be improved plow steel with steel center complete with swaged fittings. B. Hoist and Drive: The hoisting drum shall be a large diameter, deep grooved and flanged drum with at least 2 full turns of rope to remain on the drum at the lowest hook position, with heavy-duty, pre-lubricated sealed bearings. The drum shall be driven by a helical gear reducer with external spur drum gear enclosed in an oil-tight housing. The housing motor shall be a standard, 30-minute duty-motor, 1750 rpm, with suitable NEMA type shaft extension. The hoisting mechanism shall be provided with do magnet-actuated disc motor brake with hook drift. The motor shall be rated with minimum of 150 percent of full load torque, with gravity type upper and lower hook limit switch, and an overload cut off switch to interrupt the raising circuit. C. Trolley Assembly: The trolley assembly shall be a top-running type, framed by a structural shape welded into a stable assembly for proper wheel and bearing alignment. The trolley assembly shall be supported by trolley wheels of tread surfaces hardened to 375 to 425 Brinell. The tread shall be tapered to provide suitable running alignment for trolley. Each wheel shall be supported on tapered roller bearings suitable to take radial and thrust loads. The wheel mounting shall be designed so that axles and wheels can be removed without disturbing other truck elements of their alignment. The wheel tread shall be smooth, true, and uniform within 0.010-inch tread diameter on all wheels. D. The trolley shall be driven by a 30-minute-duty-cycle rated motor, through an oil-tight gear reducer conforming with NEMA Specifications. The motor shall be provided with cushion start and controller for smooth travel and load control. The driver shall provide synchronous drive from gear reducer to both drive wheels. The trolley drive shall be provided with integrally mounted spring set and an electrically- released drag brake. E. Crane Bridge Assembly: The crane bridge assembly shall be top-running, single beam, electrically driven, center-drive type. The bridge beam shall be designed in accordance with the latest specifications of the Crane Manufacturers Association of America. It shall be fabricated of standard structural shape per AISC Specifications. At full load, the beam shall be designed to limit the deflection to 1/600 of the span, but not to exceed 1-1/4-inch maximum deflection. An ASCE rail shall be provided on top of the beam securely fastened in place to maintain center distance. ASCE rails shall be attached to the bridge girders by rail clips. Provision shall be made to prevent creeping of bridge rails by means of positive MWH -05/18/07 BRIDGE CRANES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 14630-2 stops at the ends of the rails. Crane shall be reinforced with outrigger to provide squareness with end truck, adequate lateral stiffness with a minimum lateral moment of inertia of 1/20 that of the vertical beam moment of inertia. Outrigger shall furnish support for squaring shaft and the crane drive motor and gear reducer assembly. F. End Trucks: The end trucks shall be traversed by stable assembly of structural shapes welded together to provide proper wheel and bearing alignment. The end truck wheel base shall be minimum of 1/7 of the crane span. One wheel of each end truck shall be geared and meshed with the pinion mounted on the crane squaring shaft. The crane and trucks shall contain diaphragm members welded to truck frames to maintain alignment and distribute truck loads on inner and outer truck members. The truck shall be designed so that, in case of a wheel axle or wheel failure, the drop of the load will be limited to one inch. The end trucks shall be fastened to the bridge beams with bolts to ensure alignment in assembly. G. Crane Wheels: Crane wheels shall have tread surfaces hardened to 375 to 425 Brinell. Treads shall be tapered to provide suitable running alignment for crane. Each wheel shall be supported on tapered roller bearings mounted on stationary axles, suitable to take radial and thrust loads. The wheels shall be lubricated at the factory with a sodium base grease, and provided with a suitable reservoir of lubricant to eliminate the need for field lubrication. Wheel axles must have mounting nuts for bearing adjustment. Wheel mounting shall be designed so that axles and wheels can be removed without disturbing other truck elements of their alignment. Wheel treads shall be smooth, true, and uniform within 0.01-inch tread diameter on all wheels. The bridge wheels shall be a minimum of 12" tread diameter and the trolley wheels shall be a minimum of 8"diameter. H. Crane Drive: The crane drive motor shall be totally enclosed, 30-minute cycle rated. The motor shall be integral with a fully enclosed oil splash lubricated gear reduction. The motor, the drive shaft, and the gear reduction shafts shall be supported by permanently lubricated precision ball or roller bearings. The drive shaft shall provide synchronous drive from the gear reduction to both end trucks. The crane drive shall include integrally-mounted spring set electrically released do rectified disc brake. Motors will be equipped with thermal overload devices that reset automatically. I. Drive Shaft: The drive shaft of the crane shall be supported on lubricated, precision, ball- bearing pillow blocks based on 10-ft maximum centers. These pillow blocks shall be lubricated through pressure grease fittings. The crane drive shaft shall be steel and designed to limit torsional shaft stress to 6,000 psi. Maximum torsional twist angle in the drive shaft shall not exceed one degree of the wheel rotation under maximum rated load, regardless of load location. J. Bearing Life: All bearings in the crane wheels, those supporting the drive shafts, and the gear reduction shafts, shall be designed for 5,000 hrs L-10 bearing life minimum. K. Gearing: All gears shall be cut from solid blanks with 20-degree pressure angle involute shape for high strength and shall comply with AGMA specifications for load ratings. All gears operating at higher than 20 fpm pitch line speed shall be fully enclosed in oil-tight housings and lubricated by splash principle. All gear teeth shall have ductile cores and be surface hardened to RC40 minimum. The gear shall provide for a minimum service of 4,000 hr, compounded for intermittent operations corresponding to 5 years minimum industrial use. L. Bridge Stops: The bridge shall be provided with bumpers capable of stopping the crane (not including the lifted load) at a rate of deceleration not to exceed 3 fps when traveling in either direction at 20 percent of rated speed. The bumpers shall have sufficient energy absorbing capacity to stop the crane when traveling at a speed of at least 40 percent of the MWH -05/18/07 BRIDGE CRANES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 14630-3 rated load speed. Bridge trucks shall be equipped with sweeps which extend b,Elow the top of the rail and project in front of the crane wheel. M. Runway Beams and Rails: The runway beams and rails shall be provided as indicated. The rails shall be an ASCE type securely fastened into the runway beams. The runway beams shall be designed from an ASTM A36 structural steel shape and shall have a maximum deflection not to exceed 1/800 of the span. The beams shall be equipped with stops on both ends capable of withstanding the impact of the fully loaded crane at 50 percent of rated speed, and shall be field-adjustable. All necessary column supports or clamps, hanger rods, bolts, and fittings shall be provided. N. Electrical Controls: Electrical controls shall be single-speed or multiple-speed as required in each equipment specification. Bridge control shall include a mainline magnetic contactor, manually-operated fused mainline disconnect with lock-out provisions, branch circuit fuses, reversing bridge control, and transformer with fused secondary. The bridge trolley and hoist will be controlled from a pendant station suspended from a track and flat cable system running the full length of the bridge, 3 ft above operating floor. Motors shall be provided with cushion start. O. Conductor and Wirings: The runway shall be provided with enclosed conductor base electrification adequately supported. The cross bridge electrification shall be ribbon type flat cable system equal to Duct-o-wire. The cable shall be carried by trolleys with ball bearing wheels and saddle assemblies. All other wiring of the crane shall be in rigid or flexible conduit and in accordance with National Electrical Code and complying with Fire Underwriters specifications. When a crane is shipped knocked down, the wiring shall terminate in approved terminal boxes and the wire end shall be provided with permanent marking tags. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All bridge crane equipment shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's published or written instructions. Cranes shall be factory assembled and given a no-load test. All major components of the system shall be marked at the factory to assure prompt and correct field identification. The crane manufacturer will provide start up assistance to assure that the crane is properly installed. The start up shall be on the permanent power supply only. Any use of the equipment prior to start up will relieve the manufacturer of all warranty commitments. B. After completion of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall test all hoist and crane equipment in the presence of the manufacturer's field representative, who shall certify, in writing, that the equipment meets all applicable standards and specifications. Load tests of the bridge crane shall be performed, prior to acceptance, at 125% of capacity through the full range of motions. C. Field training services including a two-hour classroom instruction covering all items contained in the O&M manuals, shall be included with the equipment. The field services shall be for one eight-hour period. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 BRIDGE CRANES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 14630-4 SECTION 15000-PIPING, GENERAL PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all piping sections in Divisions 2 and 15. C. The mechanical drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size, and pipe type. The mechanical drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to develop the details necessary to construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide and install all spools, spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information: 1. Drawings: Layout drawings including all necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and material lists. Fabrication drawings shall indicate all spool pieces, spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings, and supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system. C. Samples: All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR at no increase in cost to the OWNER. D. Certifications 1. All necessary certificates, test reports, and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. 2. Fabricator Statement: A statement from the pipe fabricator certifying that all pipes will be fabricated subject to a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the program shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the fabrication of any pipe. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Extent of Work: All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 2 and 15 and as indicated. B. Pipe Supports: All pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained, and anchored in accordance with the requirements of Section 15006- Pipe Supports, and as indicated. MWH -05/18/07 PIPING, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15000-1 C. Lining: Application, thickness, and curing of pipe lining shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated. D. Coating: Application, thickness, and curing of pipe coating shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 2, unless otherwise indicated. Pipes above ground or in structures shall be field-coated in accordance with Section 09900 - Protective Coating. E. Pressure Rating: All piping systems shall be designed for the maximum expected pressure as defined in Section 02643 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection, or as indicated on the Piping Schedule. F. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the manufacture of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements. G. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. Welds shall be tested as indicated. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all tests at no additional cost to the OWNER. H. Welding Requirements: All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. Welding procedures shall be required for longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections. I. Welder Qualifications: All welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing work on the pipeline. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders at no increased cost to the OWNER. 2.2 PIPE FLANGES A. Flanges: Where the design pressure is 150 psi or less, flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service--Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In., Class D, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 150-lb class. Where the design pressure is greater than 150 psi up to a maximum of 275 psi, flanges shall conform to either ANSI/AWWA C207 Class E or Class F, or ANSI/ASME B16.5 150-lb class. However, AWWA flanges shall not be exposed to test pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI-rated flange shall be selected. Where the design pressure is greater than 275 psi up to a maximum of 700 psi, flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.5, 300-lb class. Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207. Flanges for miscellaneous small pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes. B. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207, or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes. All blind flanges for pipe sizes 12 inches and over shall be provided with lifting eyes in form of welded or screwed eye bolts. MWH -05/18/07 PIPING, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15000-2 C. Flange Coating: All machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed. D. Flange Bolts: All bolts and nuts shall conform to Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. Studs and bolts shall extend through the nuts a minimum of 1/4-inch. All-thread studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts. E. Insulating Flanges: Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes 1/4-inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter. F. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided where indicated. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when flange bolt diameter is 1-1/2-inch or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters larger than 1-1/2- inch, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2-piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic. Steel washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325 - Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face. G. Insulating Flange Manufacturers, or equal 1. JM Red Devil,Type E; 2. Maloney Pipeline Products Co., Houston; 3. PSI Products, Inc.,(Frost Engineering Service Co., Costa Mesa, California.). H. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-faced, 1/16-inch thick compressed ,*amo, sheets of aramid fiber base, with nitrite binder and non-stick coating, suitable for temperatures to 700 degrees F, a pH of one to eleven, and pressures to 1000 psig. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets shall not be permitted, unless otherwise indicated. I. Flange Gasket Manufacturers, or equal 1. John Crane, Style 2160; 2. Garlock, Style 3000. 2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved. B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions. ,*Moo, MWH -05/18/07 PIPING, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15000-3 2.4 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE) A. General: Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where indicated. The couplings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. N%W111 All gaskets for mechanical-type couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with the coupling Manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of all grooved piping shall conform with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. To avoid stress on equipment, all equipment connections with mechanical-type couplings shall have rigid-grooved couplings, or harness sets in sizes where rigid couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. All mechanical-type couplings on buried piping shall be bonded. The CONTRACTOR shall have the coupling Manufacturer's service representative verify the correct choice and application of all couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, all grooved fittings, couplings, and valves shall be from the same manufacturer. B. Manufacturers of Couplings for Steel Pipe,or equal 1. Gustin-Bacon (Aeroquip Corp.)(banded or grooved); 2. Victaulic Style 41 or 44 (banded, flexible); 3. Victaulic Style 77 (grooved, flexible); 4. Victaulic Style 07 or HP-70(grooved, rigid). C. Manufacturers of Ductile Iron Pipe Couplings,or equal 1. Gustin-Bacon, (Aeroquip Corp.); S%W011 2. Victaulic Style 31 (flexible or rigid grooving). Note: Ductile iron pipe couplings shall be furnished with flush seal gaskets. D. Manufacturers of Couplings for PVC Pipe,or equal 1. Gustin-Bacon,(Aeroquip Corp); 2. Victaulic Style 775. Note:Couplings for PVC pipe shall be furnished with radius cut or standard roll grooved pipe ends. 2.5 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS A. Construction: Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C219 - Standard for Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe, and shall be of steel with steel bolts, without pipe stop, and be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings indicated. The middle ring shall be not less than 1/4-inch in thickness and shall be either 5 or 7 inches long for sizes up to and including 30 inches and 10 inches long for sizes greater than 30 inches, for standard steel couplings, and 16 inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The followers shall be single-piece contoured mill sections welded and cold-expanded as required MWH -05/18/07 PIPING,GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15000-4 for the middle rings, and of sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket pressures without excessive rolling. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy-coated at the factory as indicated in Section 09800 — Protective '*Mwoe Coatings. B. Pipe Preparation: The ends of the pipe where indicated, shall be prepared for flexible steel couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12 inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64-inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity. C. Gaskets: Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," Grade 60, or equivalent suitable elastomer. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications: 1. Color-Jet Black 2. Surface- Non-blooming 3. Durometer Hardness-74± 5 4. Tensile Strength - 1000 psi Minimum 5. Elongation- 175 percent Minimum The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or wastewater. All gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, AA709Z, meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. All gaskets shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized. D. Insulating Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a rubber sleeve of an insulating compound in order to obtain insulation of all coupling metal parts from the pipe. E. Restrained Joints: All sleeve-type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be in accordance with the appropriate reference standard, or as indicated. F. Manufacturers,or equal 1. Dresser, Style 38; 2. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc.,Style FC1 or FC3; 3. Smith-Blair, Style 411. 4. Viking Johnson-GPS,Wall Couplings. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers, v compressors, and other vibrating equipment, and where indicated. Flexible connectors for MWH -05/18/07 PIPING, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15000-5 service temperatures up to 180 degrees F shall be flanged, reinforced Neoprene or Butyl spools, rated for a working pressure of 40 to 150 psi, or reinforced, flanged duck and rubber, as best suited for the application. Flexible connectors for service temperatures above 180 degrees F shall be flanged, braided stainless steel spools with inner, annular, corrugated stainless steel hose, rated for minimum 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. The connectors shall be a minimum of 9 inches long, face-to-face flanges, unless otherwise indicated. The final material selection shall be approved by the Manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall submit manufacturer's shop drawings and calculations. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. All piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. All defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials. 3.2 GENERAL A. All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 2 and 15. B. Lined Piping Systems: The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. All pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated to assure continuous protection. C. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to embedded raceways and rebars. `*.Vl D. Cleanup: After completion of the work, all remaining pipe cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris, shall be removed from the site. The entire piping system shall be handed over in a clean and functional condition. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 PIPING, GENERAL **Moo' CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15000-6 SECTION 15005 - PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, mark, and install identification devices for all exposed piping and valves using color bands, lettering, flow direction arrows, and related permanent identification devices, and all appurtenant works, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of all types of identification devices to be used in the work. B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, for approval, a list of suggested wording for all valve tags prior to fabrication. C. All submittals shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING A. Identification of all exposed pipe shall be accomplished by color-coding with bands and by lettering as specified in Part 3, herein. Color bands shall either be painted directly upon the pipe or shall be pressure-sensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape. B. Each pipe identification shall consist of 2 color-coded bands, a printed label identifying the name of the pipe, and a flow arrow to indicate direction of flow in the pipe. All labels shall be preprinted on pressure-sensitive adhesive-backed vinyl cloth or plastic tape. Arrows shall be die-cut of the same type of material as the labels. C. Letter sizes and colors for lettering, arrows, and background shall conform to ANSI A13.1. D. Preprinted identification devices shall be as manufactured by W.H. Brady Co.; Seton Nameplate Corp.; or equal. 2.2 EXISTING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS A. In installations where existing piping identification systems have been established, the CONTRACTOR shall continue to use the existing system. Where existing identification systems are incomplete, utilize the existing system as far as practical and supplement with the specified system. The objective is to fully identify all new piping, valves, and appurtenances to the level specified herein. MWH -05/18/07 PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION ANS STORAGE TANK PAGE 15005-1 2.3 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES AND SHORT PIPE LENGTHS A. Identifying devices for valves and the sections of pipe that are too short to be identified with color bands, lettered labels, and arrows shall be identified with metal or plastic tags as specified herein. B. Metal tags shall be of stainless steel with embossed lettering. Plastic tags shall be of solid black plastic laminate with white embossed letters. All tags shall be designed to be firmly attached to the valves or short pipes or to the structure immediately adjacent to such valves or short pipes. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All labels and identification tags shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and shall be neat and uniform in appearance. All such tags or labels shall be readily visible from all normal working locations. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. Valve tags shall be permanently attached to the valve or structure by means of 2 stainless steel bolts or screws. B. The wording on the valve tags shall describe the exact function of each valve, e.g., "HWR- BALANCING," NCLS THROTTLING", "RAS-PUMP SHUT-OFF," etc. 3.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Each pipe shall be identified at intervals of 20 feet, and at least one time in each room. Piping shall also be identified at a point approximately within 2 feet of all turns, ells, valves, and on the upstream side of all distribution fittings or branches. Sections of pipe that are too short to be identified with color bands, lettered labels, and directional arrows shall be tagged and identified similar to valves. B. Pipe identification shall consist of 4 elements, i.e., 2 color bands, a lettered label, and a directional label. The bands shall be arranged so that the lettered label and the directional arrow is placed between the 2 bands. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Application of identifying devices shall conform to the following color codes. Fluid Identification Abbreviation Function and Identification Color BD Bottom drain dark grey OF Overflow dark gray PW Potable water light blue SA Sample lines dark gray SPD Sump pump discharge dark gray MWH -05/18/07 PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION ANS STORAGE TANK PAGE 15005-2 SS Sanitary sewer dark gray UW Utility water(non-potable water) dark gray - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION ANS STORAGE TANK PAGE 15005-3 SECTION 15006- PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 --GENERAL I*ftwi 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 -Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following information: 1. Drawings of pipe supports, hangers,anchors, and guides 2. Calculations for special supports and anchors. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Code Compliance: All piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, dislocation due to seismic events and line pressures, and stresses on piping, equipment, and structures. All supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, except as supplemented or modified below. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements. B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER. All supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building code and the American Institute of Steel Construction and shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping, and preventing excessive stress on equipment. All hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves, shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. All hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. D. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. MWH -05/18/07 PIPE SUPPORTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15006-1 E. Spring-Type Hangers: Spring-type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. All spring-type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and the loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least 4 times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion. F. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and contract freely in directions away from the anchored points. All components shall be structurally suitable to withstand all loads imposed. G. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be so designed and insulated,that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment. H._ Riser Supports: Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. I. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or I-beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps securing the pipes. J. Materials of Construction: 1. General: All pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Submerged Supports: All submerged piping, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the water level, shall be supported with support, assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Corrosive: All piping in chemical and corrosive areas shall be supported with support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316 stainless steel or FRP, unless otherwise indicated. K. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, and other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, all supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields. L. Noise Reduction: To reduce transmission of noise in piping systems, all copper tubes in buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2-inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar, suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger. 2.2 SUPPORT SPACING A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be MWH -05/18/07 PIPE SUPPORTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15006-2 spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose concentrated loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the tables below. For temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacings shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects. 1. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Steel Pipe: Nominal Pipe Diameter Maximum Span (inches) feet 1/2 6 3/4 and 1 8 1-1/4to2 10 3 12 4 14 6 17 8 and 10 19 12 and 14 23 16 and 18 25 20 and Greater 30 2. Support Spacing for Ductile-Iron Pipe: Nominal Pipe Diameter Maximum Span (inches) feet All Diameters Two supports per pipe length or 10 feet (one of the 2 supports located at joint) 3. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 PVC Pipe: Maximum Span Nominal Pipe Diameter (at 100 degrees F) (inches) feet 112 4 3/4 4.5 1 5 1-1/4 5.5 1-1/2 5.75 2 6.25 3 7.5 4 8.25 6 10 8 11 10 12.25 12 13.25 MWH -05/18/07 PIPE SUPPORTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15006-3 4. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 Polypropylene Pipe: Maximum Span Nominal Pipe Diameter (at 100 degrees F) (inches) feet 1/2 3 3/4 3.5 1 3.75 1-1/4 4 1-1/2 4.25 2 4.5 3 5.5 4 6 6 7.25 8 8 10 8.75 12 9.5 2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS A. Stock Parts: Where not specifically indicated, designs which are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and use stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality, designed and rated for the intended purpose. B. Manufacturers,or Equal: 1. Basic Engineers Inc., Pittsburgh, PA; 2. Bergen-Paterson Pipesupport Corp.,Woburn, MA; 3. Grinnell Corp.(Supply Sales Company),Cranston, RI; 4. NPS Products, Inc.,Westborough, MA; 5. Power Piping Company, Pittsburgh, PA. 2.4 COATING A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123- Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09800—Protective Coatings. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION MWH -05/18/07 PIPE SUPPORTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15006-4 A. General: All pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. All concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork. The pipe supports generally shown on the drawings are for concrete ceiling, the CONTRACTOR shall modify and provide appropriate hardware for metal roof deck. B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat piping system. All hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible,without interference with other work. 3.2 FABRICATION A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers and supports shall be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. Fabricated supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges. - END OF SECTION - �moo, Li MWH -05/18/07 PIPE SUPPORTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15006-5 SECTION 15037- COPPER WATER TUBE (ASTM B 88, MODIFIED) PART 1 -- GENERAL ltftwoll 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide copper tube for water service, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents B. The requirements of Section 15000 - Piping, General apply to the WORK of this Section. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIAL A. Copper water tube shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube, and shall be soft temper tube in rolls for buried locations, or hard drawn lengths for all other applications. Unless otherwise indicated, all copper water tube shall be of Type K wall thickness. 2.2 JOINTS A. Copper water tube shall have either soldered joints, flared ends and fittings, or compression type joints. Soldered joints shall be made with 95 - 5 percent tin-antimony solder or with silver solder. Buried piping shall have flared or compression type joints. No soft-soldered joints will be allowed on buried piping. No solders containing more than 0.2 percent of lead shall be used. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Soldered Fittings: Soldered fittings shall conform to ANSI B 16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings, or to ANSI/ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. The soldering flux shall be the Manufacturer's approved type for the fitting and solder used. B. Flared Fittings: Flared fittings shall conform to ANSI/ASME B 16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. C. Compression Fittings: Compression type fittings shall be brass fittings as manufactured by Crawford Company- SWAG ELOK, Parker-Hannifin - CPI, or equal. D. Flanged Fittings: Cast copper alloy flanges and flanged fittings shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B 16.24 - Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, and ASTM B 62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, with 150 lb. ratings, or as indicated. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: All copper tubes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the site, to avoid interferences with MWH-03062002 COPPER WATER TUBE [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15037-1 structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed tubing shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary all tubing shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. All installations shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. Supports and Anchors: All tubing shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers, brackets, or supports in accordance with Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the tubes shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for expansion due to temperature differences. C. Valves and Unions: Unless otherwise indicated, tubing to fixtures, groups of fixtures, and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Low points in water systems and driplegs in steam, gas, and air systems shall have drainage valves. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. D. Branch Connections: Branch connections in horizontal runs of air and gas tubing shall be made from the top of the main to avoid drainage of condensate into the equipment. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, each tube length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of tubes shall be reamed and filed smooth. All fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly. 3.3 JOINTS A. Brazed and Soldered Joints: Brazed and soldered joints shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and to the specifications and recommendations of ANSI/ASME B 31.1 - Power Piping. All brazing shall be done by skilled and qualified welders per Section 15000 - Piping, General. Prior to the application of flux, the end of all tubes shall be thoroughly dried and cleaned. 3.4 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. Inspection: All finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to tubing, fittings, and coating. Damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. B. Field Testing: Prior to enclosure or burying, all tubing systems shall be pressure tested as required in the Piping Schedule, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the tolerances listed in the Piping Schedule. Where no pressures are indicated, the tubes shall be subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all test equipment, labor, materials, and devices at no extra cost to the OWNER. For additional testing requirements refer to Section 01656 - Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection. 1. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. All fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines be plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. MWH-03062002 COPPER WATER TUBE [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15037-2 2. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, and the system shall be re-tested until no leaks are found. - END OF SECTION - MWH-03062002 COPPER WATER TUBE [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15037-3 SECTION 15060 - PVC PRESSURE PIPE (ASTM D 1785, MODIFIED) PART 1 -- GENERAL '*ftM101 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15000 - Piping, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. C. This Section includes PVC pressure pipe with solvent-welded joints. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MATERIAL A. PVC pipe shall be made from all new rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride and shall be normal impact Type 1, Grade 1, class 12454, Schedule 80, listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61, unless otherwise indicated, in accordance with ASTM D 1785-Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 2.2 PIPE JOINTS A. Pipe joints shall be solvent-welded type with solvent cement and primer as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the chemical in the pipe. ,%WWI B. Screwed joints that are necessary to match up to threaded valves or fittings shall be made up with appropriate thread sealant, either paste or tape. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Solvent Welded and Threaded Fittings: Solvent-welded and threaded fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC fittings in accordance with ASTM D 2467 - Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: PVC pipe shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned, and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Where necessary, piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. 3.2 PIPE PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened, if not true. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. Pipe fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly. -..i MWH-10262001 PVC PRESSURE PIPE [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15060-1 3.3 PIPE JOINTS A. Threaded Joints: Pipe threads shall conform to ASTM F 1498 - Taper Pipe Threads 60 Degrees for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings, and shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies or molded. Joints shall be made with Teflon tape or thread sealant. B. Solvent-Welded Joints: Solvent-welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and solvent cement on clean, dry pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept closed at all times and the joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe or cement manufacturer's written recommendations. Pipe ends shall be inserted to the full depth of the socket. 3.4 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. Inspection: Finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and sufficient supports, anchoring, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Damage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. B. Field Testing: The CONTRACTOR shall allow adequate time for the solvent cement joints to cure. Curing time shall be per the solvent cement manufacturer's recommendation. Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required in the Piping Schedule, for a period of not less than one hour, without exceeding the tolerances listed in the Piping Schedule. Caution - Do not use air or gas for testing PVC pipe. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be subject to 1- 112 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all test equipment, labor, materials, and devices. C. Leakage shall be determined by loss of pressure. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories that would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines shall be plugged or capped as appropriate during the testing procedures. D. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, and the system shall be re- tested until no leaks are found. - END OF SECTION- MWH-10262001 PVC PRESSURE PIPE [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15060-2 SECTION 15075 - METERS, GENERAL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide meters and flow measurement devices with associated instrumentation and controls as shown as specified herein, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards ISA-S 5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification ANSI - B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 ANSI/AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In Through 144 In. ANSI/AWWA C701 Cold-Water Meters-Turbine Type for Customer Service ANSI/AWWA C702 Cold-Water Meters- Compound Type AWWA C704 Cold-Water Meters - Propeller Type for Main Line Applications ASME REPORT Fluid Meters, Sixth Edition, 1971 �� 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300- Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Each meter shall be identified with its equipment number, as indicated. C. Manufacturer's Data: With the Shop Drawings, furnish certified curves indicating flow versus differential pressure and any other information called for in the individual meter specifications. D. OWNER'S Manual: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER 5 identical copies of complete operation and maintenance instructions of all the metering systems including instrumentation and controls, in accordance with the paragraph "Operational Procedures" in Section 01300. E. Spare Parts List. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a list of manufacturer's recommended spare parts. After approval, the CONTRACTOR shall supply these spare parts suitably wrapped and identified for application. F. Special Tools: A list of special tools shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. After approval, the CONTRACTOR shall supply these tools suitably wrapped and identified for application. Special tools shall include substitute steel spools for each meter for maintenance purposes. Each spool shall be labeled to identify the meter for which temporary � x MWH -05/18/07 ERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK replacement is required. The label shall include meter identification number, size, and service. G. Documentation: After completion the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER the manufacturer's written guarantees, that the metering systems will operate within the published accuracies and flow ranges and meet these Specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the manufacturer's warranties as published in its literature and as specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accuracy Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, flow meters shall be guaranteed to register flow to an accuracy of plus and minus 2 percent of actual flow throughout the range indicated. Density measuring equipment shall have a degree of accuracy within plus and minus 2 percent of actual solids content over the range indicated. PART 2-- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. After installation, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of an experienced factory service representative to inspect the installation and test all meters for proper performance. B. Instruction of OWNER's Personnel: After completion of the installation and during startup of the plant, the CONTRACTOR shall instruct the OWNER's personnel in the proper operation, maintenance and repair of all metering equipment. For this purpose, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of an experienced factory service representative, who shall spend sufficient time on the Site to fully instruct the OWNER's operating personnel on all phases of the metering equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall assemble and install equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions, under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Installation shall be accomplished by competent craftsmen in a workmanlike manner. B. Meters shall be installed in easily accessible locations for ease of reading and maintenance, and, where shown, for balancing of flow in several lines, in conjunction with throttling and shut-off valves. Wherever possible, all meters shall be installed in such a way to provide the manufacturer's recommended straight approach and straight piping downstream. Meters and shut-off and balancing valves shall be firmly supported from the structure or from the floor with approved supports. In-line meters shall be installed to provide full-line flow and not less than the manufacturer's recommended head at all times. 3.3 TESTING A. Equipment shall be prepared for operational use in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including bench test and calibration, where required. B. Each item shall be subjected to an operating test over the total range of capability of the equipment. Where applicable, tests shall be conducted in accordance with the Test Code of the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain copies of factory MWH -05/18/07 METERS, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 15075-2 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK test certifications and shall notify the ENGINEER one week in advance of all tests to be conducted on Site. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 METERS, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 15075-3 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK SECTION 15089 - ULTRASONIC FLOW METERS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide field-mounted ultrasonic flow meters and appurtenant work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each meter shall consist of 2 acoustic sensors, a local flow indicator, an electronic transmitter, associated mounting hardware, cables, junction box, and accessories. The meter shall be bi-directional in measurement, utilizing an ultrasonic velocity measurement to characterize flow volume in the pipe. 1.2 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the services of a factory-trained specialist to install, check, and calibrate all field-mounted ultrasonic flow meters. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Basic Design: Field-mounted ultrasonic flow meters shall consist of transducers mounted to gasketed saddles strapped to concrete pipe. The meters shall be suitable for measuring drinking water with an accuracy of plus and minus 2 percent at flows above one foot per second, and a range of 10 to 1, or 25 to 1 at higher velocities. Iftwev, B. Schedule of Field-Mounted Transit-Time Ultrasonic Meters: The following field- mounted ultrasonic flow meters shall be provided: I.D. No. Service Pipe Flow Line Pipe Material Size, Range, Pressure, inches gpm psi M-1 Drinking 36 1,500— 110 C-303RCCP Water 25,000 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Metering Elements: Two sensors shall be permanently mounted to a straight pipe provided by the CONTRACTOR, on opposite sides of the pipe, such that the acoustic pulses pass diagonally upstream and downstream across the centerline of the pipe. Each sensor shall be mounted using a standard concrete saddle tap for penetration through the pipe wall. The probes shall be wetted and shall have an integral valve to allow probe removal under pressure and flow conditions. The meter shall be designed to operate on 117-volt ac supply with a power consumption of not more than 30 watts indoor and 250 watts outdoor with heater. The probes shall be fabricated of non- corrosive material and shall be equipped with an armored triaxial cable for electric transmission. The equipment manufacturer shall select the signal and frequency to be utilized for the measurement to assure proper ultrasonic transmission. MWH-02212003 ULTRASONIC FLOW METERS (FIELD MOUNTED) [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15089-1 B. Instrumentation: The electronic unit to measure the flow of water in the pipe shall be provided in a for wall-mounting with NEMA rating in accordance with the area designations of Section 16050 - Electrical General Provisions. The electronic unit shall utilize information from the velocity sensing probes to accurately measure fluid velocity in each pipe. All wiring within the electronic unit shall be factory pre-wired. The transmitter unit shall produce a 4 to 20 mA do signal, and a scaled pulse output signal, if totalization is required, proportional to the flow rate. A local flow indicator, scaled in the indicated flow range, shall be provided in an accessible location for easy reading. For instrumentation see Division 17 - Instrumentation. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Badger Meter, Inc. 2. Mapco Products, Inc. 3. Sparling Instrument Co., Inc. 4. Polysonics PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: The sensors shall be positioned in accordance with the manufacturer's published specifications, using mounting templates provided by the manufacturer. The sensors shall be installed with a minimum of 10 pipe diameters of unobstructed straight upstream approach, and a minimum of 3 pipe diameters of unobstructed straight downstream pipe. B. Installation shall be in strict accordance.with the manufacturer's printed instructions. - END OF SECTION- MWH-02212003 ULTRASONIC FLOW METERS (FIELD MOUNTED) [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15089-2 SECTION 15183—PRESSURE GAUGES AND SWITCHES PART 1 --GENERAL Ift"'." 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install pressure and vacuum gages as specified, complete, including all fittings, snubbers, connections, gaskets, supports, and accessories in the locations shown or specified, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAGES A. General: Pressure gages shall be provided on suction and discharge connections to pumps, as specified under pumps; on discharge connections from blowers and compressors; each side of pressure reducing valves; and where shown. Vacuum gages shall be provided for vacuum pumps and where shown. In all locations (such as certain pump suction connections) where pressures may vary from below to above atmospheric head, compound gages shall be installed. B. Gage Construction: Gages shall be industrial quality type with Type 316 stainless steel movement and stainless steel or alloy case. Unless otherwise shown or specified, gages shall have a 3-1/2-inch dial, 1/4-inch threaded connection, a Type 316 stainless steal snubber adapter, and a shut-off valve. Gages shall be calibrated to read in applicable units, with an accuracy of ± 1 percent, to 150 percent of the working pressure or vacuum of the pipe or ,*Moe vessel to which they are connected. All gages shall be vibration and shock resistant. C. Diaphragm Seal: Gages attached to systems involving chemical solutions, corrosive fluids, sludge, sewage, or other liquids containing solids, shall be equipped with diaphragm seals, or equal protective pressure or vacuum sensing devices, as follows: 1. For: chemical solutions, sewage, Seals with PVC body for removable mounting sludge, etc., where breakage rated at 200 psi, with Type 316 stainless steel does not create a major bolts and nuts, 1/2-inch inlet, 1/4-inch outlet, shutdown liquid-filled with Teflon diaphragm for pressure, and suitable elastomer diaphragm for vacuum service. Manufacturer,or Equal: Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.; Harrington Ind. Plastics, Inc.; Utilities Supply. D. Gage Manufacturers,or Equal: 1. Marsh Instrument Company; MWH -05/18/07 PRESSURE GAUGES AND SWITCHES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15183-1 2. Ashcroft Industrial Instruments(Dresser); 3. Foxboro/Jordan, Inc.; 4. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.; 5. U.S. Gauge Div.of Ametek. E. Snubber Manufacturers,or Equal: 1. Cajon Company; 2. Weksler Instruments,Corp. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All gages shall be installed with the face in the vertical position, at the locations shown in the Contract Documents, and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Care shall be taken to minimize the effect of water hammer or vibrations on the gages. In extreme cases,the gages may have to be mounted independently, with flexible connectors. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 PRESSURE GAUGES AND SWITCHES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15183-2 SECTION 15200-VALVES, GENERAL PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where otherwise indicated. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination of units,sensors, limit switches, and controls indicated in other Sections of the Specifications. C. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance with the requirements of each valve section. Unless indicated otherwise, the responsible manufacturer shall be the Manufacturer of the valve. D. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valves of the same type or size are required, the valves shall be furnished by the same Manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall contain the following information: 1. Valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating, identification number (if any), and specification section number. 2. Complete information on valve actuator, including size, Manufacturer, model number, limit switches, and mounting. 3. Cavitation limits for all control valves. 4. Assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and relationships of valve handles, handwheels, position indicators, limit switches, integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems. 5. Complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics. 6. Valve Labeling: A schedule of valves to be labeled, indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label. C. Owner's Manual: The Owner's Manual shall contain the required information for each valve. D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each valve assembly, where indicated. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest disrtributor for the spare parts of each valve. E. Factory Test Data: Where indicated, signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each MWH -05/18/07 VALVES, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15200-1 valve requiring certification shall be submitted before shipment of the valve. The data shall also include certification of quality and test results for factory-applied coatings. PART 2— PRODUCTS *4.m/ 2.1 PRODUCTS A. General: All valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. All shut-off valves 6- inches and larger shall have actuators with position indicators. Buried valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing position indicators and valve extensions. Manual shut- off valves mounted higher than 7-feet above working level shall be provided with chain actuators. B. Valve Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, valve actuators shall be in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Protective Coating: The exterior surfaces of all valves and the wet interior surfaces of all ferrous valves of sizes 4 inches and larger shall be coated in accordance with Section 09800— Protective Coatings. The valve Manufacturer shall certify in writing that the required coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with these Specifications. Flange faces of valves shall not be epoxy coated. D. Valve Labeling: Except when such requirement is waived by the ENGINEER in writing, a label shall be provided on all shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibbs and chlorine cylinder valves. The label shall be of 1/16-inch plastic or stainless steel, minimum 2 inches by 4 inches in size, as indicated in Section 15005 - Piping Identification Systems, and shall by permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the ENGINEER. E. Valve Testing: As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated, each valve body 4 inches and larger shall be tested hydrostatically to 1.5 times its rated 100 degrees F design water-working pressure, for a period of 5 minutes, without showing any leaks or loss of pressure. In addition, each valve 4 inches and larger shall undergo a functional test to demonstrate satisfactory operation throughout its operating cycle, and a closure test at rated 100 degrees F water- working pressure for a period of 5 minutes to demonstrate tight shut-off. Stem seal leakage shall not be a cause for rejection. All valves 3 inches and smaller shall undergo the Manufacturer's standard test. F. Certification: Prior to shipment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for all valves over 12 inches in size, certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing compliance with the applicable standards of AWWA, ANSI,and ASTM. G. Valve Marking: All valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS SP25 -Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions. MWH -05/18/07 VALVES,GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15200-2 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: All materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials not specified shall be high-grade standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfections that ,%moll might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. Unless otherwise specified, valve and actuator bodies shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cast Iron: Close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 3. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service, or to ASTM A 515 - Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate-and Higher-Temperature Service. 4. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 5. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to ASTM A 351 - Specification for Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature Service, Grade CFBM, or shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.3 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, forged, or welded of the materials indicated, with smooth interior passages. Wall thicknesses shall be uniform in agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. All welds on welded bodies shall be done by certified welders and shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall be as indicated, and be rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected. B. Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall have provision for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes. C. Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best commercial material for the specific service, with adjustable stem packing, O-rings, Chevron V- type packing, or other suitable seal. Where subject to dezincification, bronze valve stems shall conform to ASTM B 62, containing not more than 5 percent of zinc or more than 2 percent of aluminum, with a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi, and an elongation of at least 10 percent in 2 inches. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 may be used. D. Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual valve. Where not indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best suited material. E. Nuts and Bolts: All nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance with Section 05500-Miscellaneous Metalwork. MWH-05/18/07 VALVES, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15200-3 2.4 VALVE ACCESSORIES A. All valves shall be furnished complete with the accessories required to provide a functional system. 2.5 SPARE PARTS .� A. Where indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the required spare parts suitably packaged and labeled with the valve name, location, and identification number. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the spare parts of each valve. All spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER, only, after expiration of the guarantee period. 2.6 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: All valve manufacturers shall have a successful record of not less than 5 years in the manufacture of the valves indicated. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General: All valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. All gates shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use. Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe. B. Access: All valves shall be installed with easy access for actuation, removal, and maintenance and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members, handrails, or other equipment. C. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall properly assemble and install such items so that all systems are compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated items shall be clearly noted on shop drawing submittals. D. Contractor shall test that valves open and close properly utilizing normal line pressure differential. E. Contractor shall verify and record pressure settings for all relief and regulating valves. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 VALVES,GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15200-4 SECTION 15201 -VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide valve and gate actuators and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and gates, except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Unit Responsibility: The valve or gate manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of actuators on the valves and gates; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance of the valves, gates, and actuators with the Contract Documents. D. Single Manufacturer: Where 2 or more valve or gate actuators of the same types or sizes are required, the actuators shall be produced by the same manufacturer. E. The requirements of Section 16485 - Local Control Stations and Miscellaneous Electrical Devices apply to the WORK of this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals and Section 15200 - Valves, General. B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawing information for all actuators shall be submitted together ,•.i with the valve and gate submittals as a complete package. C. Calculations: Selection calculations showing dynamic seating and unseating torques versus output torque of actuator. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, shut-off and throttling valves shall be provided with manual or power actuators. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish actuators complete and operable with mounting hardware, motors, gears, controls, wiring, solenoids, handwheels, levers, chains, and extensions, as applicable. Actuators shall have the torque ratings equal to or greater than required for valve seating and dynamic torques, whichever is greater, and shall be capable of holding the valve in any intermediate position between fully-open and fully-closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuator torque ratings for butterfly valves shall be determined in accordance with AWWA C504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. All wires of motor-driven actuators shall be identified by unique numbers. B. Manufacturers: Where indicated, certain valves and gates may be provided with actuators manufactured by the valve or gate manufacturer. Where actuators are furnished by different manufacturers, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate selection to have the fewest number of manufacturers possible. MWH -05/18/07 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15201-1 C. Materials: Actuators shall be current models of the best commercial quality materials and be liberally-sized for the required torque. Materials shall be suitable for the environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed. D. Actuator Mounting and Position Indicators: Actuators shall be securely mounted by means of brackets or hardware specially designed and sized for this purpose and be of ample strength. The word "open" shall be cast on each valve or actuator with an arrow indicating the direction to open in the clockwise direction. Gear and power actuators shall be equipped with position indicators. Where possible, manual actuators shall be located between 48- and 60-inches above the floor or the permanent working platform. E. Standard: Unless otherwise indicated and where applicable, actuators shall be in accordance with AWWA C 540 - Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Sluice Gates. F. Functionality: Electric, and hydraulic actuators shall be coordinated with the power requirements of Division 16 and instrumentation equipment indicated in Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. G. Fasteners shall be in accordance with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. H. Protective coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09800- Protective Coatings. 2.2 MANUAL ACTUATORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, valves and gates shall be furnished with manual actuators. Valves in sizes up to and including 4-inches shall have direct acting lever or handwheel actuators of the manufacturer's best standard design. Larger valves and gates shall have gear-assisted manual actuators, with an operating pull of maximum 60 pounds on the rim of the handwheel. Buried and submerged gear-assisted valves, gates, gear-assisted valves for pressures higher than 250 psi, valves 24 inches in diameter and larger, and where so indicated, shall have worm gear actuators, hermetically-sealed water-tight and grease-packed. All other valves 6-inches to 24- inches in diameter may have traveling-nut actuators, worm gear actuators, spur or bevel gear actuators, as appropriate for each valve. B. Buried Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, buried valves shall have extension stems to grade, with square nuts or floor stands, position indicators, and cast-iron or steel pipe extensions with valve boxes, covers, and operating keys. Where so indicated, buried valves shall be in cast-iron, concrete, or similar valve boxes with covers of ample size to allow operation of the valve actuators. Covers of valve boxes shall be permanently labeled as required by the OWNER or the ENGINEER. Wrench-nuts shall comply with AWWA C 500 - Metal - Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. C. Chain Actuator: Manually-activated valves with the stem located more than 7-feet above the floor or operating level shall be provided with chain drives consisting of sprocket-rim chain wheels, chain guides, and operating chains provided by the valve manufacturer. The wheel and guide shall be of ductile iron, cast iron, or steel, and the chain shall be hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel, extending to 5-feet 6-inches above the operating floor level. The valve stem of chain-actuated valves shall be extra strong to allow for the extra weight and chain pull. Hooks shall be provided for chain storage where chains interfere with pedestrian traffic. MWH -05/18/07 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15201-2 D. Floor Boxes: Hot-dip galvanized cast iron or steel floor boxes and covers to fit the slab thickness shall be provided for operating nuts in or below concrete slabs. For operating nuts in the concrete slab, the cover shall be bronze-bushed. E. Tee Wrenches: Buried valves with floor boxes shall be furnished with 2 operating keys or 1 key per 10 valves, whichever is greater. Tee wrenches, sized so that the tee handle will be 2 to 4 feet above ground, shall fit the operating nuts. F. Manual Worm Gear Actuator: The actuator shall consist of a single or double reduction gear unit contained in a weather-proof cast iron or steel body with cover and minimum 12-inch diameter handwheel. The actuator shall be capable of 90-degree rotation and shall be equipped with travel stops capable of limiting the valve opening and closing. The actuator shall consist of spur or helical gears or worm gearing. The gear ratio shall be self-locking to prevent "back-driving." The spur or helical gears shall be of hardened alloy steel and the worm gear shall be alloy bronze. The worm gear shaft and the handwheel shaft shall be of 17-4 PH or similar stainless steel. All gearing shall be accurately cut with hobbing machines. Ball or roller bearings shall be used throughout. Output shaft end shall be provided with spline to allow adjustable alignment. Actuator output gear changes shall be mechanically possible by simply changing the exposed or helical gearset ratio without further disassembly of the actuator. All gearing shall be designed for a 100 percent overload. The entire gear assembly shall be sealed weatherproof. G. Traveling-Nut Actuator: The actuator shall consist of a traveling-nut with screw (Scotch yoke) contained in a weatherproof cast iron or steel housing with spur gear and minimum 12-inch diameter handwheel. The screw shall run in 2 end bearings, and the actuator shall be self-locking to maintain the valve position under any flow condition. The screw and gear shall be of hardened alloy steel or stainless steel, and the nut and bushings shall be of alloy bronze. The bearings and gear shall be grease-lubricated by means of nipples. Gearing shall be designed for a 100 percent overload. 2.3 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS A. General 1. Equipment Requirements: Where electric motor actuators are indicated, an electric motor-actuated valve control unit shall be attached to the actuating mechanism housing by means of a flanged motor adapter piece. 2. Gearing: The motor actuator shall include the motor, reduction gearing, reversing starter, torque switches, and limit switches in a weather-proof NEMA 4 assembly. The actuator shall be a single or double reduction unit consisting of spur or helical gears and worm gearing. The spur or helical gears shall be of hardened alloy steel and the worm gear shall be alloy bronze. All gearing shall be accurately cut with hobbing machines. All power gearing shall be grease- or oil-lubricated in a sealed housing. Ball or roller bearings shall be used throughout. Actuator output speed changes shall be mechanically possible by simply removing the motor and changing the exposed or helical gearset ratio without further disassembly of the actuator. 3. Starting Device: Except for modulating valves, the unit shall be so designed that a hammer blow is imparted to the stem nut when opening a closed valve or closing an open valve. The device should allow free movement at the stem nut before MWH -05/18/07 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15201-3 imparting the hammer blow. The actuator motor must attain full speed before stem load is encountered. 4. Switches N%W/ a. Mechanical Type Switches: The limit switches shall be gear open type actuated by a cam with four contacts to each cam or gear train. The torque switch shall be activated by a mechanical torque, developed in the seating of valve, or by an obstruction met in the opening and closing of the valve. Torque setting shall be adjustable and shall function without the use of auxiliary devices or relays. Position limit switches and associated gearing shall be an integral part of the valve actuator. To provide the best possible accuracy and repeatability, limit switch gearing shall be of the "counting" intermittent type, made of stainless steel, grease-lubricated, and enclosed in its own gear case to prevent dirt and foreign matter from entering the gear train. Valve actuators with mechanical type switches shall be as manufactured by Limitorque, Rotork or EIM. b. The actuator shall be wired in accordance with the schematic diagram. All wiring for external connections shall be connected to marked terminals. One f- inch and one 1-1/4-inch conduit connection shall be provided in the enclosing case. A calibration tag shall be mounted near each switch correlating the dial setting to the unit output torque. Switches shall not be subject to breakage or slippages due to over-travel. Traveling-nuts, cams, or micro switch tripping mechanisms shall not be used. Limit switches shall be of the heavy-duty open contact type with rotary wiping action. 5. Handwheel Operation: A permanently attached handwheel shall be provided for emergency manual operation. The handwheel shall not rotate during electrical operation. The maximum torque required on the handwheel under the most adverse conditions shall not exceed 60-lb.ft, and the maximum force required on the u rim of the handwheel shall not exceed 60-lb. An arrow and either the word 'open" or "close" shall be cast or permanently affixed on the handwheel to indicate the appropriate direction to turn the handwheel. A clutch lever shall be provided to put actuator into handwheel operation. All valves with electric motor activators with stems located more than 7-feet above the floor shall be provided with chain activator handwheels. The clutch lever shall be provided with a cable secured to the chain to allow disengagement for manual operation. 6. Motor: Where indicated, the motor shall be of the totally enclosed, non-ventilated, high-starting torque, low-starting current type for full voltage starting. It shall be suitable for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-Hz current, and have Class F insulation and a motor frame with all dimensions in accordance with the latest revised NEMA MG Standards. The observed temperature rise by thermometer shall not exceed 55 degrees C above an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C when operating continuously for 15 minutes under full rated load. With a line voltage ranging between 10 percent above to 10 percent below the rated voltage, the motor shall develop full rated torque continuously for 15 minutes without causing the thermal contact protective devices imbedded in the motor windings to trip or the starter overloads to drop-out. Bearings shall be of the ball type and thrust bearings shall be provided where necessary. All bearings shall be provided with suitable seals to confine the lubricant and prevent the entrance of dirt and dust. Motor conduit connections shall be watertight. Motor construction shall incorporate the MWH -05/18/07 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15201-4 use of stator and rotor as independent components from the valve operation such that the failure of either item shall not require actuator disassembly or gearing replacement. . Two Class B thermal contacts or solid state thermistors imbedded within the motor windings shall be provided to protect against over-temperature damage. The motor shall be provided with a space heater suitable for operation on 120-volt, single-phase, 60-Hz circuit unless the entire actuator is a hermetically sealed, non-breathing design with a separately sealed terminal compartment which prevents moisture intrusion. Each electric motor actuator shall be provided with a local disconnect switch or circuit breaker to isolate power from the motor and controller during maintenance activities. 7. Open/Close Operating Speed: Unless otherwise indicated, electric actuators shall provide a full close to full open or full open to full close operating time range from 30 to 60 seconds. Open/close speed of motor/power-actuated valves shall be indicated in the table below. Valve Location Service Type of Motor (AC or Open/Close Tag No. Valve DC) or Speed Hydraulic (seconds) BV-1 A Vault #1 Pump Butterfly, AC reversing 60/60 Station Isolation Bypass BV-2A Vault #2 Tank Inlet Butterfly, AC 60/60 Isolation modulating BV-3A Vault #3 Tank Outlet Butterfly, AC reversing 60/60 Isolation B. Electric Motor Actuators (AC Reversing Control Type) 1. General: Where indicated, electric motor actuators shall be the AC reversing type complete with local control station with open/close and local/remote selector switches. 2. Actuator Appurtenances: The actuator for each valve shall be supplied with open and close status lights; open, close and lockout/stop push buttons; and other devices indicated. 3. Starter: The starter shall be a suitably sized amperage rated reversing starter with its coils rated for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-Hz current. The starter shall be equipped with 3 overload relays of the automatic reset type. Its control circuit shall be wired as indicated. The integral weatherproof compartment shall contain a suitably sized 120-volt ac, single-phase, 60-Hz space heater to prevent moisture condensation on electrical components. A local power disconnect switch shall be provided with each actuator. A close-coupled, padlockable switch shall be provided with each actuator. 4. Local Control Station: Each actuator shall be provided with a local control station with the valve actuator assembly. The station shall include open, close, and stop push MWH -05/18/07 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15201-5 buttons and a local/remote selector switch. The local control station and local power disconnect may be provided as an integral part of the actuator or as otherwise indicated or required to permit operation by a person at floor elevation and within sight of the valve actuator. 5. Manufacturers, or equal a. EIM b. Limitorque Corp c. Rotork C. Electric Motor Actuators (AC Modulating Control Type) 1. General: Where indicated, modulating electric motor actuators shall be the ac modulating type complete with a local control station with power disconnect switch or circuit breaker, Local/Remote switch, non-latching open/close pushbuttons, and open/close status lights 2. Actuator Appurtenances: The actuator for each valve shall be provided with a padlockable disconnect switch; open and closed status lights; open, close and lockout stop pushbuttons; local/remote selector switch; and other devices indicated. 3. Control Module: The control module shall be of the electronic solid-state ac type with control outputs for positioning the valve via 4 - 20 ma input signals. 4. Starter: The actuator shall control a solid-state reversing starter designed for minimum susceptibility to power line surges and spikes. The solid-state starter and control module shall be rated for continuous modulating applications. Power supply shall be 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-Hz. A disconnect switch shall be included with each actuator. 5. Manufacturers, or equal a. EIM b. Limitorque c. Rotork 2.4 HYDRAULIC ACTUATORS A. The pump control valves shall be hydraulically operated as indicated in Section 15214— Pump Control Valves. The hydraulic actuators shall be furnished along with the valves by a single manufacturer as part of a complete, externally mounted control system, including adjustable speed controls, strainers, solenoid valves, isolation valves, limit switches, and all necessary brass and copper or stainless steel connecting tubing and fittings. MWH -05/18/07 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15201-6 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Field Adjustments: Field representatives of manufacturers of valves with, hydraulic or electric actuators shall adjust actuator controls and limit-switches in the field for the required function. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Valve actuators and accessories shall be installed in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. Actuators shall be located to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance, without obstructing walkways. Actuators shall not be mounted where shock or vibrations will impair their operation, nor shall the support systems be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment. - END OF SECTION - v MWH -05/18/07 VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15201-7 SECTION 15202 - BUTTERFLY VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL I*Amoll 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide butterfly valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 11000— Equipment General Provisions apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. D. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve Actuators apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200. B. Shop Drawings 1. Complete Shop Drawings of butterfly valves and actuators. 2. Drawings showing valve port diameter complete with dimensions, part numbers, weight, and materials of construction. 3. Certification of proof-of-design test from the valve manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer's Certification that the valve complies with all applicable provisions of ,*mow, AWWA C504— Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 5. Field installation procedures for erection, adjustments, and inspection. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves shall be subjected to performance, leakage, and hydrostatic tests in accordance with procedures and acceptance criteria established by AWWA C504. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES 25 TO 150 PSI (AWWA) A. General: Butterfly valves for steady-state water working pressures and steady-state differential pressure up to 150 psi and for fresh water service having a pH range from 6 to 10 and temperature range from 33 to 125 degrees F shall conform to AWWA C504 and be as indicated. B. Valves shall be of the body type, pressure class, end joint, and actuator indicated. C. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, all materials of construction shall be in accordance with AWWA C504, suitable for the service. The seats shall be positively clamped or bonded into the disc or body of the valve, but cartridge-type seats which rely on a high coefficient of friction for retention shall not be acceptable. MWH -05/18/07 BUTTERFLY VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 15202-1 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK Description Material Standards Valve Bodies Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B End flanges Flat faced flange for above-grade service in accordance �mole with ANSI 816.1 class 125 Valve shafts Stainless steel ASTM A 276, Type 316, with diameters equal to or larger than Class 150E requirements Valve discs The same material as for the valve bodies, ductile iron ASTM A536 or cast iron ASTM A48. Rubber sets New natural orsynthetic rubber Seat mating Stainless steel,ASTM A 276, Type 316 surfaces Clamps and Type 316 retaining rings and cap screws. retaining rings Valve bearings Self lubricating, corrosion resistant materials per AWWA C504 contained in integral hubs of the valve body Shaft seals Resilient non-metallic materials suitable for service Painting and Refer to Section 09800— Protective Coating coating D. Valve Schedule VALVE SIZE MAXIMUM OPERATOR NUMBER LOCATION PRESSURE (inches) (Psi) MANUAL ELECTRIC BV-1 A 48 Vault#1 125 X BV-1 B 36 Vault#1 125 X BV-2A 36 Vault#2 125 X (modulating) BV-3A 48 Vault#3 125 X BV-4A,B,C,D,E 24 Pump House 125 X BV-5A,B,C 20 Pump House 150 X BV-6A,B,C 36 Vault#4 150 X E. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. De Zurik Corporation 2. K-FLO 3. M & H Valve Company 4. Mueller Company 5. Henry Pratt Company MWH -05/18/07 BUTTERFLY VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 15202-2 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All exposed butterfly valves shall be installed with a means of removing the complete valve assembly without dismantling the valve or operator. The installation shall be in accordance with Section 15200. - END OF SECTION - ,%wi MWH - 05/18/07 BUTTERFLY VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH PAGE 15202-3 MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK SECTION 15203 - CHECK VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide check valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 SWING CHECK VALVES (3-INCH AND LARGER) A. General: Swing check valves for water service shall be of the outside lever and spring or weight type, in accordance with AWWA C 508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in. through 24-in. NPS, unless otherwise indicated, with full-opening passages, designed for a water-working pressure of 150 psi. They shall have a flanged cover piece to provide access to the disc. Swing check valves shall be furnished with dashpots or hydraulic snubbers. B. Body: The valve body and cover shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with flanged ends conforming to ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, or mechanical joint ends, as indicated. C. Disc: The valve disc shall be of cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. D. Seat and Rings: The valve seat and rings shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 or B 148 - Aluminum-Bronze Castings, or of Buna-N. E. Hinge Pin: The hinge pin shall be of bronze or stainless steel. F. Dashpot: A top-mounted hydraulic dashpot shall be provided to prevent surge and water hammer during the opening and closing cycles of the valve. The dashpot shall have 2 control flow rates: (1) 90 percent rapid rate and (2) 10 percent slow rate during shut down and start up. Each rate shall be infinitely and independently adjustable. The dashpot shall be a self-contained oil system separate and independent from the water line media. The oil reservoir for the closing cycle shall be stainless steel and be open to the atmosphere with an air breather cap to prevent oil spillage. The oil reservoir for the opening cycle shall be stainless steel, be hermetically sealed to contain pressure (air over oil), and be equipped with a 3-inch diameter pressure gauge and pneumatic fill valve. There shall be a provision for disconnecting the dashpot from the valve for servicing, without removal of the valve. G. Manufacturers, or Equal MWH - 05/18/07 CHECK VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15203-1 1. American Flow Control (Darling) 2. APCO (Valve and Primer Corp.) 3. Kennedy Valve `/ 4. Mueller Company 5. Stockham Valves and Fittings 6. Golden Anderson 2.2 SWING CHECK VALVES (2-1/2 INCH AND SMALLER) A. General: Swing check valves for steam, water, oil, or gas in sizes 2-1/2 inch and smaller shall be suitable for a steam pressure of 150 psi and a cold water pressure of 300 psi. They shall have screwed ends unless otherwise indicated, and screwed caps. B. Body: The valve body and cap shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 763 -- Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve Application, or ASTM B 584 with threaded ends conforming to ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch). C. Disc: Valves for steam service shall have bronze or brass discs conforming to ASTM B 16 - Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines, and for cold water, oil, and gas service replaceable composition discs. D. Hinge Pin: The hinge pins shall be of bronze or stainless steel. E. Manufacturers, or Equal: 1. Crane Company 2. Milwaukee Valve Company 3. Stockham Valves and Fittings 4. Wm. Powell Company PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. - END OF SECTION— MWH - 05/18/07 CHECK VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15203-2 SECTION 15204- BALL VALVES PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT Iftemoe A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15200 -Valves, General apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 15201 -Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 BALL VALVES (6-INCH AND LARGER) A. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, ball valves shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 507 - Standard for Ball Valves 6in. through 48in., API 6D - American Petroleum Institute, Specification for Pipeline Valves, or API 607 - American Petroleum Institute, Fire Test for Soft-Seated Valves (Div. of Refining), with cast iron, ductile iron, or cast steel bodies, flanged ends, suitable for velocities up to 35 fps, temperatures up to 125 degrees F, and design pressures to 150 psi. The balls shall be of cast iron, ductile iron, or cast steel, shaft- or trunnion-mounted, with tight shut-off, double seat, *ANs and full bore. The valves shall be rubber-, soft- (Nylon, Teflon, Polymer, or similar), with stainless steel, forged steel, or monel shafts or trunnions, and not less than one thrust bearing. B. Actuators: Actuators for pump control valves shall be water cylinder type. Operators for power-actuated valves shall be in accordance with provisions of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Henry Pratt Company 2. Hartmann Valves 3. APCO 4. GA Industries PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. MWH -05/18/07 BALL VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15204-1 Care shall be taken that all valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 BALL VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15204-2 SECTION 15206-GATE VALVES PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide gate valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15200-Valves, General apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 15201 -Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200 - Valves, General. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The valve actuators shall be as indicated, with clockwise opening stems, in accordance with Section 15201 -Valve and Gate Actuators. 2.2 METAL-SEATED GATE VALVES (3-INCH AND LARGER) A. Construction: Metal-seated gate valves for water and sewage service shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. The valve bodies shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Specifications for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, or ductile iron conforming either to ASTM A 395 - Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures, or to ASTM A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical joint-ends as indicated. Body and bonnett wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the minimum wall thickness as listed in Table 2 of ANSI/AWWA C500. The design working water pressure shall be 200 psig for valves 12 inches and smaller. The valves may be of the double-disc type for tighter shut-off, or of the solid-wedge type, with non- rising stem. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, all gate valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with Section 15201 -Valve and Gate Actuators. C. Manufacturers„or Equal 1. American Flow Control 2. Clow Valve Co. 3. Crane Valves 4. Kennedy Valve 5. M &H Valve Company 6. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. 7. Mueller Company(Grinnell Corp.) 8. Stockham Valves and Fittings MWH -05/18/07 GATE VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15206-1 2.3 RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES (3-to 36-inch) A. General: Resilient-seated gate valves may be provided in lieu of metal-seated double-disc or solid-disc gate valves, at the discretion of the ENGINEER. B. Construction: Resilient-seated gate valves shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 509 - Resilient- Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. The valves shall be suitable for a design working water pressure of 200 psig, with flanged, bell and spigot, or mechanical joint ends. The valve body, bonnet, and disc shall be of cast iron or ductile iron and the disc or body shall be rubber-coated. Body and bonnet wall thickness shall be equal to or greater than the minimum wall thickness as listed in Table 2 of ANSI/AWWA C509. The stem, stem nuts, glands, and bushings shall be of bronze,with the stem seal per ANSI/AWWA C 509. C. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, resilient-seated gate valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators. D. Manufacturers,or Equal 1. American Flow Control 2. Clow Valve Co. 3. Mueller Company(Grinnell Corp.) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All gate valves shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. Care shall be taken that all valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 GATE VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15206-2 SECTION 15207 - PLUG VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide plug valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES (1/2-inch to 72-inch) A. Construction: Eccentric plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated, eccentric plug design with cast iron bodies conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with ANSI 125 lb. flanged ends for valves 3-inch and larger, and screwed or flanged ends for smaller sizes. The plugs and shafts shall be of cast iron or ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, and the plugs shall be lined with a resilient coating, best suited for the specific service. The body shall be lined with a suitable elastomer, where required for a special service, or it shall be epoxy- lined in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating. The seats shall be of nickel or stainless steel welded to the body. All top and bottom shaft bearings shall be of permanently lubricated stainless steel or Teflon coated stainless steel. Grit seals of Teflon, Nylatron, or similar suitable material shall be at the top and bottom plug journals. Valves up to and including 20-inch in size shall have an unobstructed port area of not less than 80 percent of full pipe area, and not less than 70 percent for larger valves. All eccentric plug valves shall have a pressure rating of not less than 150 psi WOG, for bubble-tight shut-off in the standard flow direction, and 25 psi WOG in the reverse flow direction. When equipped with worm gear actuator, the pressure rating shall be 150 psi WOG in both directions. The stem seal shall consist of field adjustable packing, replaceable without removal of the actuator, or of self-adjusting U-cup packing. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, eccentric plug valves 3-inch and smaller shall have operating levers; larger valves shall have worm-gear actuators. Valve actuators shall be in accordance with Section 15201. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. DeZurik Corporation 2. Clow Valve Company 3. Pratt Valve 4. Victaulic MWH-03192002 PLUG VALVES [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15207-1 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Plug valves shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and the applicable provisions of Section 15200. - END OF SECTION- MWH-03192002 PLUG VALVES [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15207-2 SECTION 15214 - PUMP CONTROL VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pump control valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in'accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall provide pump control valves and valve actuators in accordance with Section 15201 — Valve and Gate Actuators and Section 15204— Ball Valves. B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200— Valves, General. B. The Contractor shall provide a computerized cavitation chart which shows flow rate, differential pressure, percentage of valve opening, C factor, system velocity, and any potential cavitation damage. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVE CHARACTERISTICS A. Function: The pump control valve shall alleviate pipeline surges caused by the starting and stopping of the pump. The pump shall start against a closed valve and energize a solenoid control, causing the valve to slowly open, until full line pressure is obtained. On pump shut-off, the solenoid control is first de-energized and the valve begins to close slowly, while the pump continues to run. When the valve is closed, a limit switch shall release the pump starter through an interlock and stop the pump. In case of a power failure, a check or solenoid valve shall close as soon as the flow stops, preventing reverse flow. B. Operation: The valve shall be a hydraulically operated, adjustable pilot controlled, ball valve as indicated. The pilot controlled cylinder actuator shall open or close the valve when called for by the starting or stopping of the pump. 2.2 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Valve construction shall be in accordance with Section 15204. B. Valve Controls: The valve shall be furnished with a complete, externally mounted control system, including adjustable speed controls, strainers, solenoid valves, isolation valves, limit switches, and all necessary brass and copper or stainless steel connecting tubing and fittings. The controls shall be capable of achieving all the flow and speed adjustment indicated and of preventing any backflow through the valve. The pilot control system shall have a 300-psi pressure rating. The control system for the pump control valve shall provide the following functions: MHW —05/18/07 PUMP CONTROL VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15214-1 1. Independent adjustable rates of valve opening and closing operations. The required speed of opening and closing operations shall be 60 seconds minimum and 300 seconds maximum. The valves shall be set up to open and close under normal conditions at a speed of 120 seconds. 2. Independent adjustable emergency closure rate resulting from an electric power failure or other operational signal eliminating power to the system. The required speeds of operation for emergency closure shall be 10 seconds minimum and 60 seconds maximum. The valve shall be set up to close under emergency conditions at a speed of 60 seconds. 2.3 FACTORY TESTS AND WARRANTY A. All valves shall be factory tested with a hydrostatic test and a functional test and a test certificate shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to delivery of the valve. The valve shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from the date of shipment to be free of defects in materials and workmanship 2.4 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. The valve shall be designed to operate under the following conditions: 1. Valve Designation - BAL-1 A BAL-1 B,C 2. Valve Location - Pump P-1 Pumps P-2,3 3. System pressure (psi) - 90 110 4. Pump shut-off head (psi) - 115 140 5. Maximum flow (gpm) - 4,400 8,400 6. Allowable headloss at - 0.25 0.25 maximum flow (psi) 7. Minimum flow (gpm) - 1,200 6,200 8. Valve size (inches) - 10 14 9. Size of pipeline (inches diameter) - 20 20 2.5 MANUFACTURERS OR EQUAL A. Henry Pratt B. Hartmann Valves PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200. MHW —05/18/07 PUMP CONTROL VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15214-2 3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the valve Manufacturer shall be present at the site for one work day, to assist the CONTRACTOR in the installation and adjustment of the valve(s). B. Instruction of OWNER's Personnel: The training representative of the valve Manufacturer shall be present at the site for one work days to instruct the personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the valve(s). C. For the purpose of this paragraph, a work day is defined as an eight hour period, excluding travel time. - END OF SECTION - MHW —05/18/07 PUMP CONTROL VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15214-3 SECTION 15215 - PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure reducing valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15200 - Valves, General, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200, including a cavitation study from the valve manufacturer. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Function: Pressure reducing valves shall reduce a higher upstream pressure to a pre- set, lower, constant pressure, regardless of fluctuations in the upstream pressure. B. Operation: The valves shall be hydraulically operated, with diaphragm direct action, pilot-controlled, per paragraph 2.2, and shall be of the globe pattern as indicated. All necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valves from the pipeline. The smaller direct-acting valves with threaded ends per paragraph 2.3, shall be suitable for **Moe water or air service and shall be of the globe patterns. 2.2 THREADED VALVES, SIZES 1/2 TO 2-1/2 INCHES A. Valve Body: The valve body shall be bronze to ASTM B 62 or cast steel, with a minimum pressure rating of 300 psi, and with threaded ends. , The valve shall be provided with a flanged or threaded valve cover. The valve shall be actuated by a diaphragm. B. Valve Trim: The valve stems, springs, body seats, and washers shall be of Series 300 stainless steel. The strainers shall be of stainless steel or monel and the diaphragms shall be of reinforced neoprene. The valve pistons and piston liners shall be bronze to ASTM B 62. C. Operating Conditions: The valve shall be designed to operate under the following conditions: 1. Maximum inlet pressure (psi) - 150 2. Minimum inlet pressure (psi) - 80 3. Minimum outlet pressure (psi) - 60 4. Maximum flow (gpm) - 150 5. Valve size (inches dia.) - 1 1/2 MWH-06192001 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15215-1 D. Spare Parts: The following spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 15200: 1. One set of all resilient seals and discs 2. One diaphragm (for diaphragm valves, only) E. Manufacturers, or equal 1. Cla-Val Company 2. Fisher Controls 3. GA Industries PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15200. 3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the valve manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 1/2 work day, to assist the CONTRACTOR in the installation and adjustment of the valve(s). B. Instruction of OWNERS Personnel: The training representative of the valve manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 1/4 work day to instruct the personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the valve(s). C. For the purpose of this paragraph, a workday is defined as an eight hour period, excluding travel time. - END OF SECTION- MWH-06192001 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES [JOB NO]-[PROJECT TITLE] PAGE 15215-2 SECTION 15230- MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT *..w' A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all miscellaneous valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15200- Valves, General, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 15200 — Valves, General. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR-RELEASE VALVES A. Air-release valves shall vent accumulating air while system is in service under pressure and be of the size indicated, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping. Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron. The float, seat, and all moving parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Valves shall be designed for a minimum water-working pressure of 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 14"001 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation) 2. Crispin - Multiplex Manufacturing Company 3. GA Industries 4. Val-Matic (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation) 2.2 CORPORATION STOPS A. Unless otherwise indicated, corporation stops shall be made of solid brass for key operation, with screwed ends with corporation thread or ironpipe thread, as required. B. Manufacturer,or Equal: 1. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. 2. James Jones Company(Watts, ACV) 3. Mueller Company(Grinnell Corporation) PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION �001 MWH -05/18/07 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15230-1 A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed recommendations, and with provisions of Section 15200—Valves, General. B. All air release valves shall have piped outlets to the nearest acceptable drain or discharge point, firmly supported, and installed in such a way as to avoid splashing and wetting of floors and obstruction of traffic. C. If applicable, set,verify and record set pressures for all relief and regulating valves. - END OF SECTION - MWH-05/18/07 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15230-2 SECTION 15235 - FIRE HYDRANTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide fire hydrants, complete and operable, including all appurtenances and accessories, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise indicated, dry barrel-type hydrants shall be provided. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 DRY-BARREL FIRE HYDRANTS A. Construction: Unless otherwise shown, all hydrants shall be of the dry-barrel type according to ANSI/AWWA C 502, with a minimum of one 4-inch steamer connection, one 2-1/2-inch hose connection, and a 6-inch diameter inlet, except where otherwise required by the local fire department. The hose and steamer connections shall be provided with cast iron caps and metal chains. The barrel shall have a cast iron breakaway section above ground and a lower barrel of ductile iron, with an elbow or tee- section at the base. The stem shall have a breakaway coupling, or there shall be some other safety device in case of a fracture. Each hydrant shall be isolated by an individual, buried gate valve of clockwise opening and with cast iron box and cover. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of Type 316 stainless steel, except where otherwise required for structural reasons.- The hydrants shall be tested to 300 psig and they shall be suitable for a working pressure of 150 psig. All interior and exterior surfaces shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C 550 and Section 09800 - Protective Coating. Hydrants shall meet all approved Fort Worth standards. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. American Flow Control (Darling) 2. American Valve and Hydrant 3. Dresser(M & H Valve Co.) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All fire hydrants shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations, AWWA Standards, and all applicable codes, and the applicable provisions of Section 15200 - Valves, General. All installations shall be to the satisfaction of the local fire and building department. B. All hydrant isolating valves with slip joints, friction type, or caulked joint connections shall be harnessed to the main pipe by means of welded steel harness sets, or clamps and steel rods, designed for this purpose. All hydrants with other than flanged inlets shall be installed with a concrete thrust block, calculated for the maximum expected water pressure. Dry-Barrel fire hydrants shall be set on a bed of pea gravel not less MWH - 05/18/07 FIRE HYDRANTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15235-1 than 18-inches deep and 3-feet square, for drainage, or as required by local regulations and conditions. - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 FIRE HYDRANTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15235-2 SECTION 15250 - HYDRAULIC GATES, GENERAL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide hydraulic gates with appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions -1 this Section shall apply to all flap gates, slide gates, stop gates, sluice gates, and shea; gates, except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. The requirements of Section 11000 - Equipment, General apply to this Section. D. The requirements of Section 15201 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. E. The CONTRACTOR shall assign to a single manufacturer responsibility for furnishing and functional operation of the hydraulic gates including operators and accessories. The designated single manufacturer, however, need not manufacture more than one part of the units but shall coordinate the design, assembly, testing, and installation of the units. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: AWWA C501 Cast Iron Sluice Gates AWWA C 513 Open Channel Fabricated Metal Slide Gates ASTM A 276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes ASTM B 21 Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes ASTM B 584 Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings of all hydraulic gates. C. Technical Manuals: Complete technical manuals, including printed instructions for proper maintenance, lubrication, and complete parts list indicating the various parts by name, number, and exploded view where necessary. A list of recommended spare parts for the OWNER to store at the facility shall be included D. Field Procedures: Instructions for field procedures for installation, adjustments, inspection, and testing shall be provided prior to installation of the gates. MWH - 05/18/07 HYDRAULIC GATES, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15250-1 1.4 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the manufacturer's written guarantee that the hydraulic gates comply with these specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the manufacturer's warranties as published in its literature. '`./ PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products and which have had previous experience in such manufacture. The CONTRACTOR shall, upon request, furnish the names of not less than 5 successful installations of the manufacturer's equipment of comparable nature to that offered under this contract. B. All combinations of manufactured equipment which are provided under these Specifications shall be entirely compatible, and the CONTRACTOR and the manufacturer shall be responsible for the compatible and successful operation of the various components of the units. All necessary mountings and appurtenances shall be included. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials employed in the manufacture and installation of the hydraulic gates and operators shall be suitable for the intended application. Material not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfection that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. N%0001 2.3 HARDWARE A. Bolts and nuts shall comply with Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. 2.4 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Coat ferrous metal in accordance with Section 09800 - Protective Coating 2.5 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools: Furnish special tools necessary for maintenance and repair of the gates. Such tools shall be suitably stored in metal tool boxes and identified with the equipment number by means of stainless steel or solid plastic name tags attached to the box. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Damage to surface coatings incurred during shipment and/or installation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER prior to installation. - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 HYDRAULIC GATES, GENERAL `ool CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15250-2 SECTION 15252 - FLAP GATES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide flap gates, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 15250- Hydraulic Gates, General apply to this Section. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 FLAP GATES A. Design: Flap gates and frames shall be of cast iron construction, with fully-adjustable top pivot points and bronze sealing surfaces. Gate frames shall have flat backs for attachment to a pipe flange. B. Manufacturers or Equal: 1. Hydro Gate Corp., Model 20C or 10C for round openings; 2. Rodney Hunt Company, Series FV-SPR. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Flap gates shall be installed in strict accordance with Section 15250. - END OF SECTION - MWH - 05/18/07 FLAP GATES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15252-1 SECTION 15430-PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide plumbing and specialties, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS A. All work shall be in strict accordance with the Uniform State Plumbing Code, and codes of the State'of Texas, City of Fort Worth, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The CONTRACTOR shall have required certifications and be thoroughly familiar with the local codes. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits. B. Care shall be taken at all times to protect floors, stairways, and walls during the make-up, erection of piping, and placing of equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all stains and repair all damage before final acceptance of the work. C. If, during the construction of this project, the ENGINEER finds materials that have identifying marks removed or lack such marks completely, he may reject such items until the CONTRACTOR has furnished proof that said items conform to the Specifications. Adequacy and extent of such proof shall be determined by the ENGINEER. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL ,*Now, A. Plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties, and equipment shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended usage. B. Floor drains or floor sinks shall be provided for all equipment drains. No equipment drains shall discharge to floor slabs. 2.2 PIPING AND FIITINGS A. All cast iron sanitary, storm, and vent pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with and shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Dimensions of cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be as given in Table 2 of ASTM A 74. B. Hub-Less cast iron soil pipe and fittings with Clamp-All Type pipe couplings, or equal, shall be used for above ground sanitary, storm, and vent piping where approved for use by local authorities. Hub-Less cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall meet CISPI Standard 301. Pipe couplings shall have Hi-Torque capacity and meet FM standard 1680. C. All copper pipe and fittings for potable and service water 3 inches and smaller shall be Type L medium wall hard temper copper pipe with soldered fittings. D. Vent piping passing through the roof shall be flashed. Flashing shall extend a minimum 12 inches from the outer surface of the pipe in all directions. Flashing shall be fabricated from 4- pound lead sheet. 2.3 HANGERS, SUPPORTS,AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK MWH -05/18/07 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15430-1 A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary hangers and supports. No perforated strap hangers and no wire supports will be permitted. Pipe supports shall be as indicated in Section 15006- Pipe Supports. B. Spacing 1. Pipe support spacing for steel and cast iron pipe is given in Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. 2. Copper pipe support spacing shall be not more than 6 feet between supports. C. Rod sizes for pipe hangers shall be as recommended by the hanger manufacturer. D. Pipe hangers used to support uninsulated copper piping shall be copper or copper plated. E. All vertical piping shall be supported at the base with fittings made for this purpose or supported from the nearest horizontal member or floor with a riser extension pipe clamp. F. Anchors that are installed into existing concrete shall be Grinnel Figure 117, Modern Figure 740, or equal expansion case inserts. Drill clean holes for insertion of case and patch concrete around hole as required. G. Continuous slotted concrete inserts, if used, shall be Crawford Figure 148, Fee & Mason Figure 9000, or equal. The CONTRACTOR shall provide secondary angle supports between main inserts to handle the loads which can be properly supported by such arrangement. H. Concrete inserts shall be as indicated in Section 15006 - Pipe Supports. All inserts shall be galvanized. 2.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Where pipes pass through floors, sleeves shall extend 3 inches above the finished floor. Where pipes pass through walls, sleeves shall be flush with the wall surface. B. All sleeves shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, one size larger than the pipe passing through, or where pipe is insulated, one size larger than the pipe plus insulation. C. At exposed wall or ceiling surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall install a suitable chromium plated brass wall plate approved by the ENGINEER. 2.5 VALVES A. General: All water shut off valves shall be the gate type, except on fixture supply piping where globe valves shall be used. B. All interior hose valves shall be provided as indicated. The globe valve shown shall be as given herein before for valves. The hose nipple shown on the detail shall be a female iron pipe thread inlet with hose thread outlet. All hose bibbs shall be 3/4-inch one-inch in size. C. Gate and check valves shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Section 15206-Gate Valves 2. Section 15203- Check Valves MWH -05/18/07 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15430-2 D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide shutoff valves on cold water piping at entrances to pipe chases and other inaccessible areas and wherever indicated or required to obtain the maximum efficiency for shut-off control on the water system. Shut off valves shall be placed on all water connections to equipment and fixtures. Lavatory and sink stops with wheel handle shall be brass with chrome plating. Extra long barrel stops shall be used where supply piping is concealed behind partitions. E. All valves shall open by turning counterclockwise and shall have suitable handwheels or nuts as required. 2.6 FLOOR DRAINS IN CONCRETE FLOORS A. General: Floor drains in concrete floors shall be of cast iron, in the sizes indicated, with sediment buckelts. Each floor drain located on an upper floor shall have a clamping collar, with 4-lb sheet lead flashing, 12 inches minimum all around. B. Manufacturers,or Equal 1. Josam Mfg.Co.,Series 31120 2. Jay R. Smith Mfg.Co., Fig.2350 3. Zurn Industries, Inc.,Series Z-520-Y 2.7 TRAP SEALS AND PRIMERS A. Where required by code, floor drains connected to the sanitary sewer shall be protected by trap primers connected to the water supply to the nearest plumbing fixture. One half-inch copper tubes shall run from the primers to the traps. Trap primers shall be mounted in accessible locations. Trap primers shall be Josam Mfg. Co., Model 88250; Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Model 2699; Zurn Industries, Inc., Model Z-1022, or equal. 2.8 CLEANOUTS A. General: All cleanouts shall be heavy plugs with tapered shoulders against caulked lead or heavy brass plugs. Where underground or concealed, cleanouts shall be brought to floor level and to accessible locations with access covers and frames. B. Manufacturers,or Equal: The following cleanouts, or equal, shall be provided: Josam Series J.R.Smith No. Zurn No. Exposed Locations 58500-20 4405 Z-1440-A Underground (finished floors) 56010/30 4143 ZN-1400-2 Walls, Concealed 58790-20 4535 ZN-1445-1-A Traffic Areas 56070 4240 Z-1420-27 C. All clean outs shall have a minimum diameter of 3 inches. D. Stack cleanouts shall be installed at the base of each stack. Cleanouts shall be galvanized cast iron with ABS plastic cleanout plugs. 2.9 HOSE BIBBS AND HYDRANTS MWH -05/18/07 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15430-3 A. General: All hose bibbs and hydrants in exposed locations subject to freezing shall be the non-freeze type. Where indicated, hose bibbs shall be provided with vacuum breakers as furnished by Crane Co., American Standard, or equal. B. Manufacturers, or Equal: Dwg. Callout Fixture Type Description HB-1 Non-freeze Post-type Exposed bronze hydrant, post-type, depth of bury to suit local conditions; minimum 4 feet. 1.1owa Woodward, Model Y1 HB-2 Non-freeze wall-type Heavy duty bronze hydrant with nickel-bronze face, hinged cover, recessed box, and key. Length to suit wall. 1.Josam Mfg. Co.,Series 71000 2.Jay 5.Smith Mfg.Co., Fig.5510/5511 32urn Industries,Inc., Fig.Z-1300. HB-3 Hose valves Heavy duty bronze hydrant, with composition disc, handwheel, cap and chain. Size 1-inch, without cap and chain: 1.Apollo(Conbraco Industries, Inc.), Model 70-805 2.Fire-End and Croker Corp, Model 180] Size 3/4-inch, without cap and chain: 1.Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.) Model 70-804, or 78-104 2.Chicago Faucet No.7T 3.Ford Meter Box Co., Model 68H-233HB2 4.Woodford Manufacturing Co., Model Y24 or 24P HB-4 Wall box type Recessed, with nickel-bronze box, hinged cover, and key. 1.Josam Mfg. Co.,Series 71020 2.Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.,Series 5710 32urn Industries, Inc., Fig.Z-1345 2.10 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. All water piping in buildings connecting to self-closing faucets, quick-action valves, water closets, emergency showers, washers, and dishwashers shall be protected by shock absorbers located at each fixture or battery of fixtures. Shock absorbers shall be corrosion- resistant, permanently sealed, and shall be sized and installed to the manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Manufacturers,or Equal 1. Josam "SHOKTROLS" 2. Jay R.Smith "HYDROTROL" MWH -05/18/07 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15430-4 3. Zurn, Model Z-1022 2.11 PAINTING A. All ferrous metal, except finished, galvanized and machine surfaces, shall have surfaces ,*Moe' prepared and primed in the shop in accordance with the requirements of Section 09800 — Special Coatings; Prime colors shall be compatible with finish coats to be applied in the field. B. Self contained units such as wall-mounted hose racks shall be supplied with factory applied finish coats of ba ed enamel. C. All field painting shall comply with Section 09800—Protective Coatings. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate roughing-in with provisions for wall-and floor sleeves, pipe inserts, cutting of roof and floor penetrations so that drain lines will have the required invert elevations and slopes. 3.2 OPENINGS A. New Construction: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary openings in walls, floors, and roofs for the passage of piping and plumbing equipment within and into the buildings. All openings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required to provide passage for the plumbing work. 3.3 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all plumbing specialties in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. All pipe shall be arranged in a neat and orderly manner to occupy the minimum amount of space and so that the pipe will not obstruct passageways and movement of building occupants or interfere with normal operation and maintenance of any equipment. C. All pipe shall be carefully placed and properly sloped and shall be neatly and firmly supported by hangers or supports. D. All piping in buildings shall be as close to the ceilings or walls as possible unless indicated otherwise. E. Screwed joints shall be made with joint compound and be tight and leakproof. A sufficient number of brass to ferrous metal seat unions shall be placed in lines so that any pipe, valve or piece of equipment may be easily disconnected. F. All drainage and sanitary lines shall be properly run, trapped, and be vented to conform with Code requirements. All changes in direction shall be made with "Y" branch fittings and shall be of the same size as the pipe. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet. G. Horizontal soil, drain and waste pipes shall be given a slope of at least 1/4-inch per foot unless v indicated otherwise. MWH -05/18/07 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15430-5 H. Floor drains and cleanouts shall be installed so the tops of the drains are flush with the finished floor. 3.4 EQUIPMENT- DAMAGE AND REMOVAL A. The CONTRACTOR'S operations shall be carried out in such a manner as to guard against damage to those portions of the structure and equipment which are to remain in the finished work. Any damage caused by the CONTRACTOR or SUBCONTRACTOR through their operations, shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.5 TESTING A. CONTRACTOR shall make such tests as are required by the local ordinances and codes in the presence of a local governing authority inspector to show that all piping is tight, leak free and satisfactory, and shall also perform such tests as the ENGINEER may direct to insure that all fixtures and equipment operate properly. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs in making such tests and the costs of making all changes or repairs until the WORK is acceptable to the governing authorities. 3.6 DISINFECTION A. After potable water supply lines are tested, they shall be disinfected by introducing into the line HTH solution, liquid chlorine, or chlorine solution of sufficient strength. Then the line shall be filled with water and maintained under not less than 10 pounds per square inch pressure, for not less than 48 hours, during which period all valves on the lines shall be opened and closed several times, after which it shall be flushed clean, and theca tested by the OWNER. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the line is pronounced safe for use, by the OWNER. No cross connection between the water mains and any pipe not yet disinfected will be permitted. - END OF SECTION - MWH -05/18/07 PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15430-6 SECTION 15440-PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The work of this Section covers furnishing, installing and testing plumbing fixtures as indicated and supporting devices as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 150111 General Mechanical Requirements B. Section 15260 Insulation C. Section 15410 Domestic Water Piping System D. Section 15415 Sanitary and Vent Piping Systems 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute 1. A117.1 Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People 2. Z124.2PIastic Shower Receptors and Shower Stalls B. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers 1. A112.6.1 Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use 2. Al 12.13.1 Plumbing Fixture Fittings 3. Al 12.19.2Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures 4. Al 12.19.3Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures C. FS: Federal Specification 1. WW-P-541 Plumbing Fixtures 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals; Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Miscellaneous Submittals; and Section 15011, General Mechanical Requirements. B. Certified copies of field test reports shall be submitted. MWH-9/16/03 PLUMBING FIXTURE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15440-1 a.� C. Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data. D. Brochures shall be submitted that contain only information relative to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. Catalogs shall not be submitted that describe several different items other than those items to be used unless all irrelevant information is marked out and relevant material is clearly marked. E. A detailed plan of the proposed methods and scheduling of the required field testing shall be submitted at least 30 calendar days before initiating the test. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inlet and discharge openings of all fixtures shall be kept covered until local plastering is completed. B. During erection, all fixtures and appurtenances shall be protected from dirt. Open ends of all piping shall be capped. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER CLOSET A. Wall-hung,vitreous china,elongated bowl type conforming to ASME Al 12.19.2 with back outlet,top spud with siphon jet flushing action,and white plastic bolt caps. Mounting height shall be as shown on Contract Drawings. B. Flush valve shall be exposed chrome plated diaphragm type conforming to ASME Al 12.18.1 with oscillating handle,escutcheon,seat bumper,integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker. C. Seat shall be solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts and no cover. D. Wall mounted carrier shall be adjustable cast iron frame conforming to ASME Al 12.6.1 with integral drain hole and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment and threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. 2.2 HANDICAPPED WATER CLOSET A. Same as Article 2.01 except mounting height shall be 18 inches. 2.3 URINAL (AND HANDICAPPED URINAL) A. Urinal shall be wall-hung vitreous china conforming to ANSI Al 12.19.2,washout type,with shields, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud and steel supporting hanger. MWH-9/16/03 PLUMBING FIXTURE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15440-2 'mod B. Flush valve shall be exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type conforming to ASME 112.18.1 with oscillating handle, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum ,%Mow, breaker. C. Wall mounted carrier shall have cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs conforming to ASME A112.6.1 with lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger and bearing studs. 2.4 LAVATORY A. 20 x 18 inch vitreous china wall-hung lavatory conforming to ASME A112.19.2 with 4 inch high backsplash, drillings at 4 inches on center, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, soap depression and mounting clip. B. Trim shall include chrome plated faucet conforming to ASME Al 12.18.1 with single lever handle, and spout with aerator. Drain shall have chrome plated open grid strainer with chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon. Chrome plated angle stops shall be included with escutcheons and chrome plated supplies. C. Carrier shall be wall mounted, steel hanger plate type. 2.5 HANDICAP LAVATORY A. 20 x 27 inch vitreous china wall-hung lavatory conforming to ASME A112.19.2 with drillings at 6 inches on center, splash lip and front overflow. B. Trim shall include 5-3/4 inch high rigid, chrome plated spout with aerator and 4 inch wrist blade handles at 6 inches on center conforming to ASME Al 12.18.1 with drain shall have chrome plated open grid strainer with chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon. Include chrome plated angle stops with escutcheons and chrome plated supplies. C. Carrier shall be cast iron and steel frame with floor mounted tubular legs conforming to ASME Al 12.6.1 with extended concealed arms suitable for handicap lavatories, leveling and securing screws and block bases for legs. 2.6 SINK A. Sink shall be single compartment type 302 stainless steel conforming to ASME A112.19.3, 25 x 22 x 6-1/2 inches, 20 gage, self-rimming with undercoating, 3-1/2 inch bread crumb and stainless steel drain and three hole ledge back drilled for trim. B. Trim shall include chrome plated brass supply with swing spout conforming to ASME Al 12.18.1,with aerator,single lever handle,chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with arm and escutcheon. MWH-9/16/03 PLUMBING FIXTURE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15440-3 2.8 SERVICE SINK A. Service Sink: One-piece, rectangular wall-hung type of enameled cast iron,stainless steel `ol rim guard, 3 inch diameter drain. Shall conform to FS WW-P-541, Paragraph 11.10, Figure No. 11.21, Outfit No. ES24G. Faucet shall be combination type conforming to the requirements of FS WW-P-541, Type 49, Paragraph 17.19. 2.9 PORTABLE EYE-WASH A. Gravity flow with eye/face wash spray. Factory assembled complete with Food and Drug Administration rated 6 gallon capacity polyethylene tank with carrying handle, removable fill cap, mounting bracket, anti-bacteria additive and retainer strap across nozzle. 2.10 COMBINATION EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYE WASH A. Drench shower and eye wash fountain. Emergency shower pull chain that, when pulled down, shall activate the water supply. Eye-wash shall be hand lever-operated. Emergency shower shall be provided with a 3 inch diameter drain below shower head. 2.11 MOP RECEPTOR A. Cast stone,and conforming to the requirements of and FS WW-P-541. Receptor shall be 36 x 24 inches with a stainless steel rim guard, not be lower than 10 inches and narrower than 2 inches, with drain 3 inches in diameter. Faucet shall be combination type conforming to the requirements of FS WW-P-541 with pail hook, 3/4 inch hose coupling threads, vacuum breaker, and furnished with brace. 2.12 ANGLE, STRAIGHT, AND INTEGRAL STOPS A. Lock-shield, loose-key pattern type with supplies. Exposed fixture fittings and trim shall be chromium-plated or nickel-plated brass with polished, bright surfaces. 2.13 HOSE BIBB A. Chromium-plated brass with wheel handles conforming to the requirements of FS WW-P- 541, 1/2 inch external pipe thread inlet and 3/4 inch hose thread spout. Washroom hose bibbs shall be satin-finished stainless steel. Hose bibbs shall be provided with vacuum breakers conforming to the local plumbing code. 2.14 GROUND HYDRANT A. Hydrant shall be 3/4 inch loose key type in conformance with FS WW-P-541 having an extra deep bronze box for vacuum breaker. Box top shall be rough bronze, hinged with internal lock and the word "WATER" cast into the cover. 2.15 CONNECTOR A. Anchoring bolts shall not be smaller than 1/4 inch carbon steel,with chromium-plated nuts and washers. MWH-9/16/03 PLUMBING FIXTURE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15440-4 B. Connectors for connecting earthenware fixtures to flanges of soil pipe shall be either a closet-setting non-rubber compound or a neoprene gasket and seal. � pp 2.16 VACUUM BRIEAKERS A. Sized to enSLJte air area equivalent to the piping served and conforming to the local plumbing code PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 PREPARATION A. Products shall be inspected for defects before being installed. Products found to be defective shall be removed and replaced with new products. B. Sleeves shall be provided in the structure to accommodate fixture installation. Roughing-in dimensions shall be in accordance with American Standard Plumbing and Heating Division PR-11. 3. 2 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures shall be installed where shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Protection of Fixtures: 1. Plumbing fixtures shall be protected from dirt, foreign objects, and damage during the construction period. 2. Warped or otherwise imperfect fixtures shall not be used. 3. Fixtures shall not be used for any reason except for testing prior to final acceptance by PB/MK. 4. Damaged or defective fixtures shall be replaced. 5. Vacuum breakers shall be installed on water supply piping connections to fixtures and equipment in accordance with local codes. C. Chair carriers shall be adjusted so that heights of fixtures above finished floor are as follows: 1. Water closet: 18 inches maximum, 11 inches minimum to top of earthenware. 2. Urinal: 24 inches maximum, 17 inches minimum to top surface of lower part of lip. 3. Lavatory: 34 inches maximum, 31 inches minimum to top of rim. 4. Handicapped lavatory: 29-1/2 inches under apron. D. Electric Water Cooler: 1. Installation shall be in locations shown and with top of spout 36 inches above floor. 2. Fixtures shall be secured to supporting surfaces with either metal screws or metal bolts. Fixtures having outlet flanges shall be set to supporting surfaces. Connections shall be made between earthenware fixtures and flanges of soil pipe, gas-tight and water-tight. MWH-9/16/03 PLUMBING FIXTURE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15440-5 3. Water supply pipes shall be installed at right angles to the wall and floor. Exposed traps and supply lines shall be connected to the roughed-in piping system at the wall, unless otherwise indicated. 3. 3 TESTING A. Installed products shall be tested for operability in accordance with the respective manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Installed products shall be adjusted in accordance with the respective manufacturer's labels intact until the work has been accepted by PB/MK, then removed. PART 4- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.0 GENERAL A. This item of work shall not be measured separately for payment but shall be considered incidental to the Contract Lump Sum price. END OF SECTION MWH-9/16/03 PLUMBING FIXTURE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15440-6 SECTION 15500- HVAC - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section of the Specification covers the general requirements of the HVAC Work to be performed under Sections as listed below, and shall not void any of the requirements specified under the General Conditions or General Requirements of the Specification. Section 15831: Electric Wall Heaters Section 15871: Fans Section 15945: Louvers B. The requirements specified herein shall be modified only if specified otherwise for particular application in other Divisions. C. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, codes, permits, rules, regulations and ordinances. D. Work to be included under the "Scope of Work" of each HVAC Section listed above shall include labor; material, equipment, tools and services necessary to furnish, deliver, unload, install, test and place in satisfactory operation the equipment, services and systems as called for under each HVAC Section including any incidental work not shown, or not specified but which can reasonably be inferred as belonging to the various systems and necessary in good practice to provide a complete and fully operational systems. Work shall include: 1. Providing motors specified in this Division and be responsible for proper operation of electrical power equipment furnished by this Division. 2. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and completed information on motor controls to Division 16. 3. Putting heating, ventilating, cooling and exhaust systems into full operation during each working day of testing and balancing. 4. Making changes in pulleys, belts and dampers or adding dampers as required for correct balance. E. This HVAC specification is incomplete without the information contained in the HVAC equipment schedules. Provide equipment of the type, size, capacity and arrangement as shown on the Drawings and as scheduled. Equipment shall consist of the particular components listed in the schedules in addition to those components normally required for the type of unit. Particular attention must be paid to the remarks and notes in the schedules and on the Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Structural steel and miscellaneous metal is included in Division 5 except for supplementary steel required hangers, equipment supports, anchors and guides which shall be furnished for HVAC under this Section. ..i MWH-0916/03 HVAC — GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-1 B. Concrete work is included in Division 3 except for required HVAC anchor bolts, sleeves and templates, which shall be furnished under this Section. C. Painting is included in Division 9 except for factory finished HVAC equipment, HVAC *%Moo, shop painting and HVAC identification labeling. D. Cutting and patching is included in Division 1 except for items specified herein. E. Trenching, excavation and backfill is included in Division 2 except for items specified herein. F. Electrical field wiring is included in Division 16, except for field wiring for automatic temperature controls as specified herein or as shown on the HVAC Drawings. G. Line voltage thermostats for unit heaters are installed and wired under Division 16. Electric resistance radiation is furnished and installed under Division 16. 1.03 SITE INSPECTION A. Before submitting proposals for this Work, the Contractor shall visit the site of the building and understand the existing conditions and operations, which may affect performance of the Work of this Division. B. No subsequent allowance for time or money shall be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions. C. The Contractor shall remove and/or relocate existing wiring, small conduit, cable, pipe, ductwork, hangers, etc., as necessary to achieve a complete installed Mechanical System as shown on the Drawings. This work shall be performed at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.04 DRAWINGS A. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping ductwork, equipment, etc. Follow closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. B. Consider architectural and structural drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings. C. Because of the small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves and accessories required to meet the conditions. D. Record difference between mechanical work as installed and as shown in Contract Documents on a set of prints of mechanical drawings to be furnished by Engineer. Return these prints to Engineer at completion of project. These will be labeled "Contractor Revised Drawings". MWH-0916/03 HVAC—GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-2 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The naming of specified items on the drawings or in the specifications is intended to establish a level of quality and performance. Substitution requests may be submitted at the time of shop drawing submittal. Review of substituted equipment or material prior to the Bid Date will not be considered. The engineer will make final determination of acceptable substitutions. If a submitted substitution is not accepted, the contractor shall provide the specified equipment. B. Substitution shall be submitted as specified in Section 01300. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. Bind two (2) Operations & Maintenance Manuals for Mechanical Systems in 3-ring, hardback binders. Spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done in silk- screen: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL For MECHANICAL SYSTEMS OF (PROJECT) 1. Provide a master index at beginning of Manual showing items included. Include name and phone number of nearest supplier and Manufacturer's representative. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of Manual. 2. Provide a step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into operation. *"moo, 3. Provide schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, refrigeration system, heating system, control panel, etc. Each diagram shall show locations of start-stop switches, insertion thermostats, room thermostats, thermometers, fire stats, pressure gages, automatic valves and refrigeration accessories. Mark correct operating settings for each control instrument on these diagrams. 4. Provide diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items such as fire stats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches and relays. 5. Provide drawings of each temperature control panel identifying components on the panels and their function. B. Maintenance instructions shall include: 1. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of mechanical equipment installed in project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operations instructions of equipment and maintenance and lubrication instructions. 2. Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment, location, and type and frequency of lubrication. 3. List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number and nameplate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item. C. Air Balance and Test Run Reports. 1. Include a copy of air balance reports and certifications. D. Provide a complete set of approved shop drawing submittals as an Appendix item. MWH-0916/03 HVAC—GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-3 1.07 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Instruct Owner/Owner's Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems utilizing Operations and Maintenance Manual when so doing. B. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows: 1. Mechanical - Eight (8) hours. 2. Temperature Controls - Eight (8) hours. 3. Refrigeration - Eight (8) hours. C. Instruction periods shall occur after pre-final inspection when systems are properly working and before final payment is made. D. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another. 1.08 CONTRACTOR REVISED DRAWINGS A. The contractor shall, during the progress of the work, keep an accurate record of all changes and corrections from the layouts shown on the drawings. Record of changes may be kept by accurately making all changes on a set of prints during the progress of the job. B. Exact location of all underground utility service entrances and their connections to utility mains, terminal boxes, piping and all valves, etc., which will be concealed in the finished work shall be accurately indicated on the drawings by measured distances. C. Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, the contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, one set of "contractor revised" prints, legibly and accurately marked to indicate all changes, additions, deletions, etc., from the contract drawings. D. Contractor shall include all addendum items and field change order information on the revised drawings. Revise all schedules shown on the drawings to reflect the actual model numbers, capacities and electrical characteristics of substituted equipment. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Consulting Engineer, as provided in Section 01300, the following drawings and data. 1. Catalogue cuts and data sheets for equipment. 2. Automatic control drawings including electrical wiring diagrams, bills of material and description of operation for all systems. Scaled layout drawings and nameplate lists for control panels. Data sheets for all control system components. Electrical schematics shall include wire and terminal numbers, and shall be coordinated with the motor control center and fire alarm system shop drawings submitted under Division 16. MWH-0916/03 HVAC—GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-4 3. Detailed equipment, ductwork and piping layout drawings; minimum scale 1/8" -in = 1 ft for interior systems and equipment, minimum '/a - in = 1 ft for mechanical *ftwroe rooms, dimension clear service spaces for motors and drives, filter, coils and spacer section access doors, and ductwork access panels and doors. (Site layout drawings and roof plans showing HVAC equipment and systems may be prepared and submitted at scales smaller than 1/8" - in = 1 ft, subject to Consulting Engineer's prior approval.) 4. Air handling unit and fan data sheets, to include fan size, type, arrangement, materials of construction, dimensional data, and motor data. For belt drive equipment, provide drive data indicating sheave sizes, belt size, number and length. Each submittal shall include fan performance operating data and a performance curve showing the fan operating point of range. 5. Standard shop and field installation details for transitions, elbows, takeoffs, discharge nozzles, turning vanes, access panels and doors, volume control and splitter dampers and extractors. 6. Piping and appurtenances, materials and joining methods. Pipe hanger materials and methods. 7. Ductwork materials, joining methods, reinforcing and material gauges. Where options are allowed by SMACNA, the proposed option shall be clearly defined. Indicate proposed material and methods for ductwork and equipment hangers. 8. Prepare dimensional comparisons between proposed equipment and scheduled equipment when the proposed equipment is dimensionally larger than that scheduled. Do not propose dimensionally larger equipment from an alternate manufacturer for installation in confined areas, or when the installation of alternate equipment will result in reduction of service access below that recommended by the manufacturer. 1*0000, 9. Prepare layouts showing size; arrangement, and routing of field fabricated refrigerant piping for split-systems and air handling units with remote condensers. Include a letter from the AC system manufacturer indicating their approval of the proposed sizing and routing. 10. Submit air system testing, adjusting and balancing reports for review and acceptance. 1.10 DESIGN CRITERIA A. The primary HVAC requirements are to provide adequate ventilation air rates to maintain indoor ambient air conditions in the areas with the following data conditions: 1. Outdoor Design Conditions Summer: 1009F Dry-bulb; 74°F Wet-bulb Winter: 172F Dry-bulb 2. Direct Expansion Condensing Units Summer: 1052F Dry-bulb MWH-0916/03 HVAC — GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-5 1.11 STANDARDS A. These standards shall be considered as minimum requirements. This is a general list ,*MOO, and not all standards listed are necessarily referenced elsewhere in this Section. Specific requirements of this Specification and/or Drawings shall have precedence. In case of conflict between published requirements, the Engineer shall determine which is to be followed. B. Abbreviation and the title of Federal, State and industry standards, technical societies, associations and institutes and other organizations used are as follows: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) 2. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) 3. Air Diffusion Council (ADC) 4. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 5. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 8. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) 9. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Factory Mutual (FM) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 13. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) 14. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) 15. National Electrical Code (NEC) 16. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 17. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 18. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 19. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National (SMACNA) Association, I nc. 20. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 21. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.12 DEFINITIONS A. Particular terminology used under this Section is defined as follows: 1. Exposed Ductwork - Ductwork visible from the floor level and includes all ductwork in work area and MCC room. 2. Heated Spaces - Areas where heat is supplied to maintain a minimum temperature during the heating season. 1.13 FINALLY A. It is the intention that this specification shall provide a complete installation except as hereinbefore specifically excepted. All accessory construction and apparatus necessary or advantageous in the operation and testing of the work shall be included. MWH-0916/03 HVAC— GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-6 B. The omission of specific reference to any part of the work necessary for such complete installation shall not be interpreted as relieving this Contractor from furnishing and installing such parts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Electric Motors 1. Electric motors in NEMA frame sizes shall conform to the requirements in Section 01650, unless otherwise specified herein. B. Electrical Equipment 1. Electrical equipment which is furnished under this Section of the specifications shall meet the requirements specified in Division 16: a. Disconnect switches, motor starters and combination motor starters (starters with disconnecting means and short circuit protection) shall be as specified in Section 16191. b. Raceways, boxes, fittings and supports shall be as specified in Section 16110. c. Wires and cables shall be as specified in Section 16120. C. Unless otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings, provide HVAC electrical equipment enclosures, including automatic temperature control panels, with the following ratings: 1. NEMA 1 for indoor locations. 2. NEMA 12 for "DAMP" locations. **"Noe 3. NEMA 4X for outdoor and/or corrosive locations, rooms below grade (including basements and buried vaults) and "WET" locations. 4. NEMA 7 (and listed for use in the area classification shown) for "Class I Div. 1 Group D" and "Class I Div. 2 Group D" locations. D. Where NEMA area classifications are not identified on the HVAC drawings refer to the electrical drawings. E. Where noted in the HVAC equipment schedules, or when shown on the Drawings, provide factory furnished local electrical disconnects, fan speed control switches and integral unit thermostats. Cord and plug assemblies are not an acceptable disconnecting means. 2.02 EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION A. General 1. Unless otherwise specified, all HVAC machinery and vibrating HVAC system components shall be isolated from the building structure by vibration isolators with a minimum absorption efficiency of 90 percent for the lowest disturbing frequency of the particular vibration source. Provide special types of vibration isolators such as piping and ductwork flexible connectors and flexible wiring conduits, where connections are made to system components that vibrate or generate noise. 2. The vibration isolator manufacturer is responsible for the selection of suitable vibration isolators for the particular application. MWH-0916/03 HVAC— GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-7 3. Furnish vibration isolators with the equipment. 4. Bolt all floor mounted vibration isolators except isolator pads to the floor or framing Nftwol on which they rest. 5. Select all isolation devices for a single piece of equipment for a uniform static deflection according to distribution of weight in the equipment. 6. Provide isolators with corrosion protection when exposed to the weather or where called for on the Drawings. Steel parts other than springs shall be galvanized. Springs and hardware shall be cadmium plated or otherwise provided with an approved corrosion resistant coating. 7. Adjust isolators for proper loading and distribution of weight after installation of equipment. B. Types - The following types of vibration isolators may be used. 1. Isolation for Floor Mounting a. Single elastomer-in-shear isolators, molded mound shaped element designed for 1/4-in deflection under the imposed static load. Double elastomer-in-shear isolators shall be two such elements assembled in series or a molded element designed to provide 1/2-in deflection under the imposed static load. Elastomer-in-shear isolators shall be properly housed to prevent bulging and shall be provided with adequate facilities for bolting to equipment and floor slab. b. Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable and shall be equipped with acoustical-friction pads, leveling bolts and bolt holes for anchoring to floor slab. Springs shall have a minimum ratio of outside diameter to operating spring height of 0.8 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the specified deflection. Where housed springs are specified or required, provide units with telescoping cast iron or steel housing, containing one or more springs, complete with resilient alignment insert and a minimum of 1/4-in thick rubber or neoprene sound deadening pad bonded to the base of housing. 2. Isolation for Suspension a. Isolation hangers for suspension of equipment and piping shall have a single element of elastomer for deflections up to 1/4-in; a double or a single molded element for 1/4-in to 1/2-in deflections; a single spring element with an elastomer grommet for 1/2-in to 3/4-in deflections; and a combination of an elastomer element and spring element in series for deflections larger than 3/4-in. Provide suspension isolators contained within a structural rigid one- piece steel hanger box. 3. Isolation for Ductwork a. Install flexible connectors at all duct connections to fans, fan units or blowers, air handling units and air conditioning units. Connections shall be a minimum of 6-in width, UL approved, type "Ventfab" by Ventfabrics, Inc. Connections in PVC ductwork shall be 3/16-in thick Neoprene with Type 304 worm drive band clamp for round ducts and bar stock type battens with stainless steel fasteners for rectangular PVC ductwork. 2.03 FLAME AND SMOKE RATINGS A. All materials, including adhesives, surface coatings, sealers, assemblies of several materials, insulations, jacketing, finish, etc., shall have flame spread ratings not over MWH-0916/03 HVAC— GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-8 25 (fire resistive), and smoke development ratings not over 50 and fuel contributed rating not over 50, as established by tests conducted in accordance with the Federal Standard 00136B, National Bureau of Standards Radiant Energy Fire Test and the National Fire Code of the NFPA. B. These requirements apply to all circumstances whether the materials are field applied or applied by a manufacturer in his/her shop, or elsewhere, prior to delivery to the project. 2.04 V-BELT DRIVES A. V-belt drives shall consist of the driver and driven sheaves and one or multiple matched V-belts. Select V-belt drives with belt horsepower ratings equal to or greater than 1.5 times the driving motor nameplate horsepower. Provide sheaves with steel, cast iron, or malleable iron split taper bushings and keyways on driven shafts of 3/4-in and larger diameter. 2.05 SOUND CONTROL A. The selection of fans, air handling units, air conditioners, heating, ventilating and air conditioning machinery and mechanical equipment and the installation of system components such as ductwork and piping shall be such as not to create noise that will exceed the levels of permissible noise exposures for occupational areas as established by the Occupational Safety and Health Act and other Federal, State and local safety and health standards, codes and ordinances. 2.06 BEARINGS A. General - Furnish equipment bearings suitable for the intended equipment service. Furnish bearings designed to carry both thrust and radial loads for equipment designed for all angle operation. B. Provide extended lube lines with pressure relief equipped grease fittings for all bearings, which are not readily accessible from outside the equipment. 2.07 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. General 1. Furnish supports, hangers and other devices necessary to support firmly and substantially the piping, equipment and ductwork described in this Specification. 2. Furnish and install all metalwork in accordance with Division 5 requirements. 3. Provide galvanized steel hanger rods, hangers, supplementary steel, anchors and guides in areas classified as corrosive, wet, and in outdoor exposed applications. 4. Where C-clamp type hangers are used, furnish with a retainer strap. 2.08 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. Furnish equipment with finishes described in the particular equipment Sections following. Where finishes are not specified for a particular type of equipment, furnish equipment finished in accordance with Paragraph B. B. Primer and finish coats shall be manufacturer's standard. ,*Mope MWH-0916/03 HVAC—GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-9 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION Piping and equipment shall be left in a thoroughly cleaned condition. Piping shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all foreign materials prior to any cleaning procedure. All strainer baskets shall be removed, cleaned and reinstalled at the completion of the cleaning operation and also at the completion of all system and equipment final tests. Flushing and cleaning shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Furnish, install and remove temporary piping and equipment used in the cleaning and flushing operations. Cleaning and flushing shall be performed as specified in other Sections of this Division of the Specification. 3.02 TESTS AND BALANCING A. General - Balance and test systems. Tests of this work as required by the Engineer, shall be made during the progress of the work to demonstrate the strength durability and fitness of the installation. Furnish instruments, ladders, lubricants, test equipment and personnel required for the tests; including manufacturer's representatives for testing and start-up of Contractor Balancing and testing shall be performed as specified in Section 15990. Before testing and balancing, systems shall be cleaned and disinfected as specified. B. Testing and balancing of all heating, ventilating air and water systems shall be performed by an AABC or NEBB certified agency, which is independent of all suppliers and installers on the particular job. Testing, adjusting and balancing shall be done under the supervision of a qualified heating, ventilating, and air conditioning Engineer employed by the air balance and testing agency. Reporting forms for testing and %%wool balancing shall be as recommended in specific sections. 3.03 START-UP AND TEMPORARY OPERATION A. Properly maintain and service equipment and systems until the,Owner has accepted the particular equipment or the system. B. This maintenance shall include compliance with the manufacturers operating and maintenance instructions as well as periodic checking and cleaning of the strainers and filters and the lubrication of moving parts and all required adjustments. C. Records of all maintenance and lubrication work performed by the Contractor on Owner or Contractor furnished equipment shall be maintained at the construction or installation site and be available at all times for a review by the Owner or Engineer. At the request of the Owner or Engineer copies of these records shall be submitted to the Owner for information and/or review. 3.04 PAINTING A. Unless otherwise specified herein machinery and factory-finished equipment such as pumps, fans, air handling units, air conditioners and other items of manufacture shall have a factory applied finish, color as standard with the manufacturer or a hot-dipped galvanized finish. Tanks, supporting steel, hangers, rods and other uncrated or non- galvanized steel other than standard piping and fittings shall have a shop coat MWH-0916/03 HVAC— GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-10 consisting of a suitable primer and finish coat. If not factory applied the prime coat shall be one of the zinc chromate or red lead-iron oxide oil vehicle primers listed in Division 9 of the Specification. Items not factory or shop primed prior to installation shall be suitably cleaned of rust and mill scale by wire brushing, sanding, or other means and prime painted, immediately after installation. B. Repair defects, blemishes, holidays and the like apparent in manufacturer's coatings and shall ensure that materials used for such repair shall match or be compatible with the manufacturer's standard color, coatings and practices. Care shall be taken not to paint over nameplates. 3.05 BALANCE OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT A. Machines shall be balanced both statically and dynamically by the manufacturer within the limits of best commercial practices. The term machine, as used above, is to be considered as any piece of equipment that contains rotating components. All machines furnished shall have operating speed not exceeding 80 percent of the first critical speed. END OF SECTION MWH-0916/03 HVAC— GENERAL PROVISION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15500-11 SECTION 15831 - ELECTRIC WALL HEATER �- PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Unit heaters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEMI-RECESSED HEATERS A. Electric Unit Heaters shall be provided, with built-in controls, UL Listed for corrosive areas and NEMA 4X hose down requirements. Heater to be forced fan type of the KW rating, voltage and phase specified in the schedule. B. The heating elements shall be type 304 stainless steel of finned tubular construction with stainless steel fittings. C. The motor shall be UL Listed, totally enclosed with permanently lubricated ball bearings, designed to resist moisture and corrosion, fitted with an epoxy coated fan blade and factory wired to NEMA 4X enclosure. D. Heating elements and motor to be enclosed in round, heavy 16 gauge stainless steel shroud, with stainless steel louvered outlet grille and plated rear grille. E. Single point, line voltage connection for incoming power. F. NEMA 4X enclosure to house element terminals and following standard built-in controls: 1. Automatic reset over temperature cutout 2. 24V control transformer. 3. Fan delay relay. 4. Required contactors. 5. Terminal block for field wiring. 6. For heaters above 12 KW, provide a separate motor contactor. G. The following optional controls are to be built-in and factory—prewired in the NEMA 4X enclosure: 1. Thermostat with external adjustable knob. 2. Pilot light to indicate when heating elements are energized. 3. Secondary manual reset thermal cutout. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. INDEECO PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate location and electrical requirements with General Contractor and electrical contractor. MWH-0916/03 ELECTRIC WALL HEATER CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PLIMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15831-1 B. Install unit level and plumb. C. Provide trim ring flange and seal around unit as required. D. Insure all forced-air models have minimum free area around heater as recommended by manufacturer. E. Touch-up all damaged finishes. F. Set all thermostats for 60 degrees F. END OF SECTION MWH-0916/03 ELECTRIC WALL HEATER CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15831-2 SECTION 15871 - FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Upblast fans. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections - Division 16. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes C. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. D. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fans shall be AMC certified. B. All fans of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer to minimize spare parts inventory. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section Division 1. B. Submit sound data, fan curves and operating characteristics for all fans as scheduled and specified. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15000. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. MWH-0916/03 FANS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15871-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. E. Capacities and electrical characteristics shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. F. UPBLAST FANS 1. Fans shall be of the size, capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Fan Housing: a. Heavy gage aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Curb cap and integral venturi shall be constructed of aluminum. Wind bands shall have a rolled bead. b. Windbands, curb caps and drain troughs shall be joined with a continuously welded, leakproof seam. c. Motor compartment cover shall be constructed of aluminum and easily removed for access to motor compartment and drive assembly. d. The drive assembly and wheel shall be mounted on vibration isolators. e. Fasteners shall be stainless steel. 3. Fan Wheel: a. Aluminum construction. b. Backward inclined, non-overloading centrifugal type. c. Statically and dynamically balanced. d. Bearings and drive components shall be isolated from the airstream. e. Fan shafts shall be ground and polished stainless steel sized so that the first critical speed is at least 25 percent over the maximum operating speed. f. Drives shall be sized for a minimum 150 percent of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be cast iron and adjustable. 4. Bearings shall be permanently sealed, lubricated, heavy duty pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speeds. 5. Motor: a. Motor shall be open drip proof. b. Motor and drive shall be mounted out of the air stream. c. Motor bearings shall be permanently sealed, ball bearing type. 6. Backdraft dampers shall be provided as scheduled. 7. Roof curbs shall be constructed of aluminum with 2" fiberglass insulation. The curb shall be sloped to match the roof. 8. A wire aluminum birdscreen shall be mounted on the housing discharge perimeter. 9. The fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL705). MWH-0916/03 FANS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15871-2 10. Provide NEMA 3R disconnect wired through the breather tube. 11. Provide a hinged curb with cables to allow access to the fan wheel and ductwork 12. Motors larger than the 5 hp shall be Energy Efficient and comply with EPACT and NEMA 1210 standards. G. INLINE AXIAL FAN 1. Inline axial fans shall be supplied as shown on the plans and in the fan schedule. 2. Medium Pressure inline axial fan shall be belt driven tube axial type with fabricated airfoil propellers. 3. Fan housing shall be constructed of continuously welded steel, aluminum, or stainless steel to assure no air leakage. Fan incorporates a universal mounting system to allow for field transitions from horizontal base mount, horizontal ceiling hung, vertical base mount, or vertical ceiling hung configurations. 4. The housing, bearing support, and motor base shall be constructed of structural steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings. All structural steel parts shall be coated with Permatector, an electrostatically applied thermosetting polyester urethane. Minimum dry film thickness to be 1.5 mils. 5. Turned, precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating speed. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the bearing. 6. Bearings shall be cast iron pillow block, grease lubricated, and self-aligning. Bearings shall be Air Handling quality tested for reduced swivel torque, bore size, noise, and vibration. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum life (L-10) of 80,000 hours in horizontal applications or (L-10) of 40,000 hours in vertical applications at maximum operating speed and horsepower for each construction `,. level. 7. Propeller construction shall be fabricated airfoil design and made out of painted steel, aluminum, or stainless steel. Blade gussets shall be die formed and welded to blade stem. Propellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 8. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. 9. High temperature specifications are shown below. a. HT Option I - 200 OF- 400 OF: Fan shall be capable of operating continuously at a temperature between 200 OF and 400 OF. 10. Motors larger than the 5 hp shall be Energy Efficient and comply with EPACT and NEMA 1210 standards. 11. Provide to following options: a. TEFC motor. b. Bolt-on straightening vanes. c. Motor cover. d. Belt guard. e. Inlet guard f. Companion flange (inlet& outlet) g. Inspection section (propeller access) h. Inspection door. i. Mounting rails. j. Spring base isolators. MWH-0916/03 FANS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15871-3 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Upblast Fans: 1. Greenheck. 2. Cook. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. C. Coordinate exact locations and power requirements with the electrical contractor. Do not route electrical conduits through backdraft or control dampers. D. Install flexible connections specified in Section 15910 between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum 1 inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FANS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install fans in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that fans serve their intended function. B. Coordinate exact dimension requirements and locations with the General Contractor. C. Coordinate fan work with work of roofing, walls, and ceilings, as necessary for proper interfacing. D. Provide sealant and flashing for fans as required. E. Ensure that fans are wired properly, with correct motor rotation, and positive electrical motor grounding. F. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within utility and exhaust fans. Adjust dampers for free operation. 3.03 TESTING A. General: After installation of utility exhaust fans has been completed, test each to demonstrate proper operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 3.04 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 1 spare set of belts for each belt drive utility exhaust fans. MWH-0916/03 FANS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15871-4 END OF SECTION �..i MWH-0916/03 FANS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15871-5 SECTION 15936 - AIR DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Louvered face ceiling supply diffusers. B. Louvered face return grilles. C. Door grilles. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Special Conditions For Mechanical Work - Section 15000. B. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing - Section 15990. C. Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets -Section 09900. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. C. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. E. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Air distribution devices have been specifically selected based on the specified manufacturer's performance data. If the Contractor submits on devices other than those specified, the submittal must include an item by item selection of substitutions listed by space Where compliance with performance requires different dimensions, such as neck or face size, than the specified item, the submittal must note where these dimension changes occur listing both the original and the new dimensions. B. Any additional costs by any trade resultant from air device substitution shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A. MWH-0916/03 AIR DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15936-1 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300 and Section 15500. B. Submit schedule of air devices indicating type, size, location, and application. C. Schedule must include model number, size, air pattern, CFM, pressure drop, throw, Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERED FACE SUPPLY GRILLE A. Aluminum supply grilles shall be TITUS Model 30OF (double deflection) or 301 F (single deflection) of the sizes and mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. B. The deflection blades shall be available parallel to the long or short dimension of the grille or register. C. Construction shall be of aluminum with a 1 '/4 "wide border on all sides. D. Sizes 24" x 24" and below shall have roll-formed borders with a minimum thickness of 0.032". Larger sizes shall be constructed using continuous aluminum extrusions with a nominal thickness of 0.040 — 0.050" and shall be interlocked at the four corners and mechanically staked to form a rigid frame. E. Screw holes shall be counter-sunk for a neat appearance. F. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested cross- section to meet published test performance data. Blades shall be spaced on 3/4 " centers. 1. Blades shall have friction pivots on both sides to allow individual blade adjustment without loosening or rattling or be inserted through the frame and held tight with steel friction wire interlocked to the frame on both ends of each side. 2. Plastic blade pivots are not acceptable. G. Opposed blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel or aluminum. Damper must be operable from the face of the register. H. The grille finish shall be factory standard white. 2.02 LOUVERED FACE RETURN GRILLE A. Aluminum return grilles shall be TITUS Model 350F (3/4 " blade spacing) or 355F (1/2 " blade spacing)` of the sizes and mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. B. The fixed deflection blades shall be available parallel to the long or short dimension of the grille or register. MWH-0916/03 AIR DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15936-2 C. Construction shall be of extruded aluminum with a 1 ''/a" wide border on all sides. Minimum border thickness shall be 0.04-0.050". D. Sizes 24" x 24" and below shall be constructed using a roll-formed frame. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds. Sizes larger than 24" x 24" shall be constructed by using heavy aluminum extrusions and shall be interlocked at the four corners and mechanically staked to form a rigid frame. E. Screw holes shall be counter-sunk for a neat appearance. F. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested cross- section to meet published test performance data. Blades shall be spaced on 3/ " centers. 1. Blades shall have friction pivots on both sides to allow individual blade adjustment without loosening or rattling or be inserted through the frame and held tight with steel friction wire interlocked to the frame on both ends of each side. 2. Plastic blade pivots are not acceptable. G. Opposed blade column damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel or aluminum. Damper must be operable from the face of the register. H. The grille finish shall be factory standard white. 2.03 DOOR GRILLES A. Door return grilles shall be TITUS Model CT-700 for the sizes and mounting types as shown on the plans and outlets schedule. B. Outer borders shall be constructed of heavy extruded aluminum with a thickness of 0.040"-0.050" and shall have counter-sunk screw holes for a neat appearance. C. Border width shall be 1 '/a " on all sides and shall be interlocked at the four corners and mechanically staked to form a rigid frame. D. Extruded aluminum inverted V-blades with a deflection angle of 770 shall be used to create a slight proof design and provide additional stiffness to the grille. E. The grille finish shall be factory standard white. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install air devices in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of air devices and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural reflected ceiling plan, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. ..i MWH-0916/03 AIR DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15936-3 E. Provide mounting frame or additional ceiling grid tees as required to mount air devices. Support devices independent of ceiling as required to prevent ceiling sag. F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09900. END OF SECTION MWH-0916/03 AIR DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15936-4 SECTION 15945 - LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Extruded aluminum louvers. B. Sealants including installation are specified in Division 7. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements: Air pressure drop and moisture carryover ratings shall be tested in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) Standard 500. B. Field Measurements: Verify size, location, and placement of louver units prior to fabrication. C. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurement and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of units. Preassemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handing limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications; certified test data, where applicable; and installation instructions for required products, including finishes. 1.04 PRODUCTS A. LOUVER (ESD-603) 1. Frame shall be 6 inch deep channel of .125 inch thick 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy. 2. Blades shall be constructed of .125 inch thick aluminum. Blades shall be fixed type and drainable. 3. Provide bird or insect screen as scheduled. Screen shall be aluminum mesh, removable type. Screen shall be mounted on interior of louver. 4. Finish shall be Kynar, color as selected by Architect. 5. Provide extended sill, welded construction and filter rack. 1.05 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Greenheck. B. Ruskin. MWH-0916/03 LOUVERS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15945-1 PART 2 EXECUTION 2.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorages. Coordinate the delivery of such items to the project site. 2.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to stainless steel screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joints fillers, as indicated. D. Repair finishes damaged by installation operations. Restore finishes so that there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make the required alterations and refinish the entire unit, or provide new unit, at contractor's option. E. Protection non-ferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry or dissimilar metals. F. Provide concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulations, and install as work progresses to make the installations weathertight. G. Refer to Division 7, for sealants in connection with installation of louvers. H. Field verify exact opening dimensions and coordinate mounting requirements with General Contractor. END OF SECTION MWH-0916/03 LOUVERS '*ft.ol CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 15945-2 SECTION 16050 — ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL PART 1 -- GENERAL ,*AMP-, 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide electrical WORK, complete and operable, in accordance with Ithe Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section apply to all sections in Division 16, except as indicated otherwise. C. The WORK of this Section is required for operation of electrically-driven equipment provided under specifications in other Divisions. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the requirement for proper coordination of the WORK of this Section with the WORK of equipment specifications, the WORK of instrumentation sections, and the WORK of Section 16460 - Electric Motors. D. Concrete, excavation, backfill, and steel reinforcement required for encasement, installation, or construction of the WORK of the various sections of Division 16 is included as a part of the WORK under the respective sections, including duct banks, manholes, handholes, equipment housekeeping pads, and light pole bases. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The WORK of this Section and all sections in Division 16 shall comply with the following as applicable: NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code NETA International Electrical Testing Association NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) B. Electrical equipment and materials shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local code enforcement agency having jurisdiction. Labels shall be affixed prior to the equipment being brought on site. C. Installation of electrical equipment and materials shall comply with OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, as applicable), state building standards, and applicable local codes and regulations. D. Where the requirements of the specifications conflict with UL, NEMA, NFPA, or other applicable standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1.3 SIGNAGE AND MARKINGS A. Identification: Provide danger, caution, and warning signs and equipment identification markings in accordance with applicable federal and state OSHA and NEC requirements. B. Local Disconnect Switches MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-1 1. Each local disconnect switch for motors and equipment shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose unless the purpose is indicated by the location and arrangement. C. Warning Signs 1. 600 volts nominal, or less: Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations that %Mole contain live parts shall be marked with conspicuous signs prohibiting unqualified persons to enter. 2. Over 600 volts: Buildings, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at greater than 600 volts nominal shall be lockable. Permanent and conspicuous warning signs shall be provided reading as follows: DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE— KEEP OUT. 3. Indoor electrical installations that are open to unqualified persons and containing metal —enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, and other similar associated equipment over 600 volts nominal shall be marked with appropriate caution signs. 4. Outside branch circuits and feeders over 600 volts —Warning signs shall be posted in plain view where unauthorized persons might come in contact with live parts — "WARNING — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT" D. Isolating Switches: Isolating switches not interlocked with an approved circuit interrupting device shall be provided with a sign warning against opening them under load. 1.4 PUBLIC UTILITIES REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall contact the serving utility and verify compliance with requirements before construction. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate schedules and payments for work by all utilities. B. Electrical service shall be as indicated and be as required by the serving utility. C. The CONTRACTOR shall verify and provide service conduits, fittings, transformer pad, grounding devices, and service wires not provided by the serving utility. D. The CONTRACTOR shall verify with the utility the exact location of each service point and type of service, and shall pay charges levied by the serving utilities as part of the WORK. 1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTION A. Permits shall be obtained and inspection fees shall be paid according to the General Conditions. B. The CONTRACTOR shall pay connection and turn-on service charges required by the utility company. 1.6 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-2 B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Complete material lists stating manufacturer and brand name of each item or class of material. ,%Moe 2. Shop Drawings for all grounding WORK not specifically indicated. 3. Front, side, rear elevations, and top views with dimensional data. 4. Location of conduit entrances and access plates. 5. Component data. 6. Connection diagrams, terminal numbers, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, and cable numbers. 7. Method of anchoring, seismic requirements, weight. 8. Types of materials and finish. 9. Nameplates. 10. Temperature limitations, as applicable. 11. Voltage requirement, phase, and current, as applicable. 12. Front and rear access requirements. 13. Test reports. lftmol 14. Grounding requirements. 15. Catalog cuts or photocopies of applicable pages of bulletins or brochures for mass produced, non-custom manufactured material. Catalog data sheets shall be stamped to indicate the project name, applicable Section and paragraph, model number, and options. This information shall be marked in spaces designated for such data in the ENGINEER's stamp. C. Shop Drawings shall be custom prepared. Drawings or data indicating "optional" or "as required" equipment are not acceptable. Options not proposed shall be crossed out or deleted from Shop Drawings. D. Materials and Equipment Schedules: The CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the ENGINEER within 30 days of the commencement date in the Notice to Proceed, a complete list of materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures proposed for use. The list shall include type, sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items. E. Owner's Manuals: Complete information in accordance with Section 01300. F. Record Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall show invert and top elevations and routing of all duct banks and concealed below-grade electrical installations. Record drawings shall be prepared, be available to the ENGINEER, and be submitted according to Section 01300. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-3 1.7 AREA DESIGNATIONS A. General 1. Raceway system enclosures shall comply with Section 16110 - Electrical Raceway Systems. *Moo, 2. Electric WORK specifically indicated in sections within any of the Specifications shall comply with those requirements. 3. Other electrical WORK not included in 1.7A1 and 1.7A2 shall comply with this Paragraph 1.7A3. NEMA ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION AREA 1 3R 4X 9 12 PUMP ROOM X Except for MCC RESTROOM X VAULTS X EXTERIOR X 4. Electrical WORK not included in 1.7A1, 1.7A2, or 1.7A3 shall be NEMA 4X. B. Material Requirements 1. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be 304 stainless steel. 2. NEMA 1, 3R, and 12 enclosures shall be steel coated with ANSI 61 grey paint. NEMA 4X, 7, and 9 shall not be coated. 1.8 TESTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for factory and field tests required by specifications in Division 16 and by the ENGINEER or other authorities having jurisdiction. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish necessary testing equipment and pay costs of tests, including replacement parts and labor, due to damage resulting from damaged equipment or from testing and correction of faulty installation. B. Where test reports are indicated, proof of design test reports for mass-produced equipment shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings, and factory performance test reports for custom-manufactured equipment shall be submitted and be approved prior to shipment. Field test reports shall be submitted for review prior to Substantial Completion. C. Equipment or material that fails a test shall be removed and replaced. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL \wool CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-4 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Equipment and materials shall be new, shall be listed by UL, and shall bear the UL label. Equipment and materials shall be the products of experienced and reputable manufacturers in the industry. Similar items in the WORK shall be products of the same manufacturer. Equipment and materials shall be of industrial grade standard of construction. B. Where a NEMA enclosure type is indicated in a non-hazardous location, the CONTRACTOR shall utilize that type of enclosure, despite the fact that certain modifications such as cutouts for control devices may negate the NEMA rating. C. On devices indicated to display dates, the year shall be displayed as 4 digits. 2.2 MOUNTING HARDWARE A. Miscellaneous Hardware 1. Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2. Threaded rods for trapeze supports shall be continuous threaded, galvanized steel, 3/8-inch diameter minimum. 3. Strut for mounting of conduits and equipment shall be galvanized steel. Where contact with concrete or dissimilar metals may cause galvanic corrosion, suitable non-metallic insulators shall be utilized to prevent such corrosion. Strut shall be as manufactured by Unistrut, B-Line, or equal. 4. Anchors for attaching equipment to concrete walls, floors and ceilings shall be stainless steel expansion anchors, such as "Rawl-Bolt," "Rawl-Stud" or "Lok-Bolt" as manufactured by Rawl; similar by Star, or equal. Wood plugs shall not be permitted. 2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Nameplates shall be fabricated from white-letter, black-face laminated plastic engraving stock, Formica type ES-1, or equal. Each shall be fastened securely, using fasteners of brass, cadmium plated steel, or stainless steel, screwed into inserts or tapped holes as required. Engraved characters shall be block style with no characters smaller than 1/8-inch top to bottom. B. Conductor and Equipment Identification: Conductor and equipment identification devices shall be either imprinted plastic-coated cloth marking devices such as manufactured by Brady, Thomas & Betts, or equal, or shall be heat-shrink plastic tubing, imprinted split-sleeve markers cemented in place, or equal. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-5 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Incidentals: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all materials and incidentals required for a complete and operable system,-even if not required explicitly by the Specifications or the Drawings. Typical incidentals are terminal lugs not furnished with vendor supplied equipment, compression connectors for cables, splices, junction and terminal boxes, and control wiring required by vendor furnished equipment to connect with other equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Field Control of Location and Arrangement: The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the desired location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items. Exact locations shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR in the field based on the physical size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, and other obstructions. Locations on the Drawings, however, shall be followed as closely as possible. 1. Where conduit development drawings or "home runs" are shown, the CONTRACTOR shall route the conduits in accordance with the indicated installation requirements. Routings shall be exposed or encased as indicated, except that conduit in finished areas shall be concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conduits encased in a slab shall be sized for conduit OD to not exceed one-third of the slab thickness and be laid out and spaced to not impede concrete flow. 2. Conduit and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve head room and keep openings and passageways clear. Lighting fixtures, switches, convenience outlets, and similar items shall be located within finished rooms as indicated. Where the Drawings do not indicate exact locations, such locations shall be determined by the ENGINEER. If equipment is installed without instruction and must be moved, it shall be moved without additional cost to the OWNER. Lighting fixture locations shall be adjusted slightly to avoid obstructions and to minimize shadows. 3. Wherever conduits and wiring for lighting and receptacles are not indicated, it shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to provide lighting and receptacle-related conduits and wiring as required, based on the actual installed fixture layout and the circuit designations as indicated. Wiring shall be #12 AWG minimum, and conduits shall be 3/4-inch minimum (exposed) and 1-inch minimum (encased). Where circuits are combined in the same raceway, the CONTRACTOR shall derate conductor ampacities in accordance with NEC requirements. C. Workmanship: Materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with printed recommendations of the manufacturer. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in the work. Installation shall be coordinated in the field with other trades to avoid interferences. D. Protection of Equipment and Materials: The CONTRACTOR shall fully protect materials and equipment against damage from any cause. Materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, shall be covered in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or splattered with water, foam, plaster, or paint. Moving parts shall be kept clean and dry. The CONTRACTOR shall replace or refinish damaged materials or equipment, including faceplates of panels and switchboard sections as part of the WORK. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK,GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-6 E. Incoming utility power equipment shall be provided in conformance with the utility's requirements. F. The CONTRACTOR shall provide power wiring in conduit for the HVAC equipment in accordance with Section 15500 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. Starters shall be in accordance with Section 16480 - Low Voltage Motor Control Center for starters in MCC's and Section 16485 - Local Control Stations and Miscellaneous Electrical Devices, for starters not in MCC's, except for starters in HVAC equipment which are indicated in Section 15500. Control wiring operating at 120 volts and less shall be as indicated in Section 15500. 3.2 CORE DRILLING A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform core drilling required for installation of raceways through concrete walls and floors. Locations of floor penetrations, as may be required, shall be based on field conditions. Verify all exact core drilling locations based on equipment actually furnished as well as exact field placement. To the extent possible, identify the existence and locations of encased raceways and other piping in existing walls and floors with the OWNER prior to any core drilling activities. Damage to any encased conduits, wiring, and piping shall be repaired as part of the WORK. 3.3 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. Concrete housekeeping pads shall be provided for indoor floor standing electrical equipment. Housekeeping pads for equipment, including future units, shall be 4-inches above surrounding finished floor or grade and 2-inches larger in both dimensions than the equipment, unless otherwise indicated. B. Concrete housekeeping curbs shall be provided for conduit stub-ups in indoor locations ,%wool that are not concealed by equipment enclosures. Such curbing shall be 3-inches above finished floor or grade. 3.4 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING A. Floor supported, wall, or ceiling hung equipment and conductors shall be anchored in place by methods that will meet seismic requirements in the area where the project is located. Wall-mounted panels that weigh more than 500 pounds or that are within 18- inches of the floor shall be provided with fabricated steel support pedestals. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet enclosed within removable side plates, it shall match supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions. Transformers hung from 4-inch stud walls and weighing more than 300 pounds shall have auxiliary floor supports. B. Leveling channels anchored to the concrete pad shall be provided for switchgear and pad-mounted transformer installations. C. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria in the printed recommendations of the equipment manufacturers are a part of the WORK of this Contract. Such recommendations shall be submitted as Shop Drawings under Section 01300. 3.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. General: Equipment and devices shall be identified as follows: MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-7 1. Nameplates shall be provided for panelboards, control and instrumentation panels, starters, switches, and pushbutton stations. In addition to nameplates, control devices shall be equipped with standard collar-type legend plates. 2. Control devices within enclosures shall be identified as indicated. Identification shall be similar to the subparagraph above. 3. Toggle switches which control loads out of sight of switch and multi-switch locations of more than 2 switches shall have suitable inscribed finish plates. 4. Equipment names and tag numbers, where indicated on the Drawings, shall be utilized on nameplates. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish typewritten circuit directories for panelboards; circuit directory shall accurately reflect the outlets connected to each circuit. 3.6 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, the electrical WORK shall be thoroughly cleaned. Exposed parts shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other materials. Oil and grease spots shall be removed with a non-flammable cleaning solvent. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and cracks and corners scraped out. Touch-up paint shall be applied to scratches on panels and cabinets. Electrical cabinets or enclosures shall be vacuum-cleaned. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16050-8 SECTION 16110 - ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide electrical raceway systems, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 - Contractor Submittals, and 16050 - Electrical Work, General. B. Shop Drawings 1. Complete catalog cuts of raceways, fittings, boxes, supports, and mounting hardware, marked where applicable to show proposed materials and finishes. 2. Dimensioned layout drawings of cable tray routings, including elevations. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pull and junction boxes, fittings, and other indicated enclosures that are dedicated to the raceway system shall comply with this Section. B. All material and equipment shall bear a UL label. Label shall be affixed prior to material and equipment being brought onsite. 2.2 CONDUIT A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit 1. Rigid steel conduit shall be mild steel, hot-dip galvanized inside and out. 2. Rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated, and UL-6. 3. Manufacturers, or Equal a. LTV Steel b. Triangle c. Wheatland Tube B. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit 1. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC, sunlight resistant. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16110-1 2. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA TC-2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit, and UL-651 - Standard for Rigid Non-metallic Conduit. 3. Manufacturers, or Equal a. Carlon b. Condux C. Rigid PVC Coated Galvanized Steel (RPGS) Conduit 1. The conduit, prior to PVC coating, shall meet the requirements for RGS conduit above. 2. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the outer surface of the galvanized conduit. The bond between the coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the coating. The inside surfaces and threads of the conduit shall have a 2-mil urethane coating. 3. PVC coating thickness shall be not less than 40 mils. 4. PVC coated RGS shall be manufactured in accordance with the following standards: a. UL-6 b. ANSI C80.1 c. Federal Specification WW-C-581 E. d. NEMA RN1 - PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 5. Manufacturers, or Equal a. Robroy b. Thomas & Betts D. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit 1. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be constructed of a flexible galvanized metal core with a sunlight resistant thermoplastic outer jacket. 2. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with UL-360 - Steel Conduits, Liquid-Tight Flexible. 3. Manufacturers, or Equal a. Anaconda, Sealtite MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16110-2 b. Electriflex, Liquatite E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) or Intermediate conduit (IMC) will not be accepted. 2.3 FITTINGS AND BOXES A. General 1. Cast and malleable iron fittings for use with metallic conduit shall be the threaded type with 5 full threads. 2. Fittings and boxes shall have neoprene gaskets and non-magnetic stainless steel screws. Covers shall be attached by means of holes tapped into the body of the fitting. Covers for fittings attached by means of clips or clamps will not be acceptable. 3. Boxes larger than standard cast or malleable types shall be 304 stainless steel, NEMA 4X. 4. In outdoor areas, conduit shall be terminated in raintight hubs as manufactured by Myers, O.Z. Gedney, Appleton, or equal. In other than outdoor areas, sealed locknuts and bushings shall be used. 5. Conduit, fittings, and boxes in hazardous locations shall be suitable for the Class and Division indicated. B. Malleable Iron Fittings and Boxes 1. Fittings and boxes for use with galvanized steel conduit shall be of malleable iron or ,%..i gray-iron alloy with zinc plating. 2. Manufacturers, or Equal a. O.Z. Gedney b. Crouse-Hinds c. Appleton C. PVC Fittings and Boxes 1. Fittings for use with rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC, solvent welded type. 2. Boxes shall be PVC or fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP). 3. Manufacturers, or Equal a. Carlon b. Crouse-Hinds c. Hoffman MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16110-3 4. Provide welding solvent as required for installation of non-metallic conduit and fittings. D. PVC Coated Fittings 1. Fittings for use with PVC coated RGS shall be PVC coated and shall be products of %Mole the same manufacturer as the conduit. 2. Male and female threads and internal surfaces shall have a 2-mil urethane coating. E. Stainless Steel Boxes 1. Stainless steel boxes shall be used with PVC coated RGS conduit and where indicated. 2. Stainless steel boxes shall be NEMA 4X, Type 304. 3. Stainless steel shall be minimum 14-gauge thickness, with a brushed finish. 4. Doors shall have full length stainless steel piano hinges. Non-hinged boxes are not acceptable. 5. Manufacturers, or Equal a. Hoffman b. Rohn c. Hammond F. Sheet Steel Boxes 1. Sheet steel boxes shall be galvanized steel outlet and switch boxes. 2. Manufacturers, or Equal a. Raco b. Steel City c. Appleton Electric PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Wiring shall be run in raceway unless indicated otherwise. B. Raceways shall be installed between equipment as indicated. Raceway systems shall be electrically and mechanically complete before conductors are installed. Bends and MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16110-4 offsets shall be smooth and symmetrical, and shall be accomplished with tools designed for this purpose. Factory elbows shall be utilized wherever possible. C. Where raceway routings are indicated on plan views, follow those routings to the extent ..� possible. D. Where raceways are indicated but routing is not indicated, such as home runs or on conduit developments and schedules, raceway routings shall be the CONTRACTOR's choice and in strict accordance with the NEC and customary installation practice. Raceway shall be encased, exposed, concealed, or under floor as indicated, except that conduit in finished areas shall be concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Routings shall be adjusted to avoid obstructions. Coordinate between trades prior to installation of raceways. Lack of such coordination shall not be justification for extra compensation, and removal and re-installation to resolve conflicts shall be by the CONTRACTOR as part of the WORK. F. Exposed raceways shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to structural beams. G. Install expansion fittings with bonding jumpers wherever raceways cross building expansion joints. H. Exposed raceways shall be installed,at least 1/2-inch from walls or ceilings except that at locations above finished grade where damp conditions do not prevail, exposed raceways shall be installed 1/4-inch minimum from the face of walls or ceilings by the use of clamp backs or struts. I. Wherever contact with concrete or dissimilar metals can produce galvanic corrosion of equipment, suitable insulating means shall be provided to prevent such corrosion. 3.2 CONDUIT A. Exposed conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel except as follows, unless indicated otherwise: B. Conduit concealed, buried, or encased in concrete, except for analog control conduit which shall be PVC-coated RGS, shall be rigid galvanized steel. Where conduit emerges from concrete encasement, a PVC coated RGS elbow shall be utilized for transition from the concrete. Conduit shall emerge from the concrete perpendicular to the surface whenever possible. C. Exposed conduit shall be 3/4-inch minimum trade size. Encased conduit shall be one- inch minimum trade size. Supports shall be installed at distances required by the NEC. D. Concrete cover for conduit and fittings shall not be less than 1-112 inches for concrete exposed to earth or weather, or less than 3/4-inch for concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with the ground. E. Conduits passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16110-5 F. Conduits embedded within a slab, wall, or beam (other than those merely passing through) shall satisfy the following: 1. Conduits with their fittings embedded within a column shall not displace more than 4 percent of the gross area of cross section. 2. Conduits shall not be larger in outside dimension than one third the overall thickness of slab, wall, or beam in which embedded. 3. Conduits shall not be spaced closer than 3 outside diameters on centers. G. Conduit shall be placed so that cutting, bending, or displacing reinforcement from its proper location will not be required. H. Threads shall be coated with a conductive lubricant before assembly. I. Joints shall be tight, thoroughly grounded, secure, and free of obstructions in the pipe. Conduit shall be adequately reamed to prevent damage to the wires and cables inside. Strap wrenches and vises shall be used to install conduit to prevent wrench marks on conduit. Conduit with wrench marks shall be replaced. J. Wherever possible, conduit runs shall slope to drain at one or both ends of run. Wherever conduit enters substructures below grade, the conduit shall be sloped to drain water away from the structure. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid pockets or depressions in conduit. K. Installation of rigid steel conduit though a core-drilled hole in an exterior wall below grade shall utilize a sealing device as manufactured by Link Seal or equal. L. Connections to lay-in type grid lighting fixtures shall be made using flexible metal conduit not exceeding 4-feet in length. Connections to motors and other equipment subject to vibration shall be made with liquid-tight flexible conduit not exceeding 3-feet in length. Equipment subject to vibration that is normally provided with wiring leads shall be provided with a cast junction box for the make-up of connections. M. Conduit passing through walls or floors shall have plastic sleeves. Core drilling shall be performed in accordance with Section 16050. N. Empty conduits shall be tagged at both ends to indicate the final destination. Where it is not possible to tag the conduit, destination shall be identified by a durable marking on an adjacent surface. A pull-cord shall also be installed in each empty conduit. This shall apply to conduits in floors, panels, manholes, equipment, etc. -- END OF SECTION -- MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS **MOO' CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16110-6 SECTION 16111 - UNDERGROUND RACEWAY SYSTEMS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide underground raceway systems, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 - Contractor Submittals, and 16050 - Electrical Work, General. B. Shop Drawings 1. Complete catalog cuts of all raceways, fittings, pullboxes, and manholes, marked where applicable to show proposed materials and finishes. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Manholes, pullboxes and fittings that are dedicated to the underground raceway system shall comply with the requirements of this Section. 2.2 MANHOLES AND PULLBOXES A. Manholes and pullboxes shall be precast with construction and load rating as indicated. 1. Covers shall be traffic type, H-20 loading, except as indicated otherwise. Manhole and pullbox covers shall be identified as "Electric" by raised letters cast into the covers. Manhole frames and covers shall be Neenah Foundry No. R-1755-G or equal. 2. Manholes and pullboxes shall have frost-proof and water-tight grey iron frames and covers with solid lids and inner lids with 28-inch clear openings. Covers and lids shall be bolted to cast-in-place steel frames with corrosion resistant hardware. Frames shall be factory-primed; covers shall be cast-iron and shall have pick-holes. B. Manholes and pullboxes shall be equipped with pulling-in irons opposite and below each ductway entrance. C. PVC ductbank conduits shall be provided with end bells. Brackets, Unistrut Cat. No. P2515 or equal and 60-inch concrete inserts, Unistrut Cat. NO. P3261 or equal, shall be provided in manholes as required for racking wiring through manholes. D. Precast manholes and pullboxes shall be Brooks Mack, Quikset, U.S. Precast, or equal. Cast-iron covers shall be by U.S. Foundry, or equal. 2.3 DUCTBANKS A. Underground ducts shall be Schedule 40 PVC. MWH—06/24/03 UNDERGROUND RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCC ART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGF 1R111-1 B. Ducts shall be encased in red-dyed concrete with steel reinforcing bars. Concrete shall have 3,000 psi compressive strength conforming to Section 03300. Colorant shall be an integral red-oxide coloring pigment in the proportion of 8 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. Concrete shall be dyed red throughout the ducts. Surface treatment will not be accepted. The costs, if any, of cleaning coloring pigment from the concrete delivery equipment and other related cleanings shall be included in the Bid. C. Ductbanks shall contain a No. 4/0 bare stranded copper ground wire. The ground wire shall be continuous through the ductbank and terminate at power distribution equipment and grounding grid. D. Identification Tape: Continuous lengths of underground warning tapes shall be installed 12-inches above and parallel to all ductbanks. Tape shall be 6-inches wide polyethylene film imprinted "CAUTION - ELECTRIC UTILITIES BELOW." Tape shall be as manufactured by Brady, or equal. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Underground raceways shall be installed between manholes and pullboxes as indicated. Raceway systems shall be electrically and mechanically complete before conductors are installed. Bends and offsets shall be smooth and symmetrical, and shall be fabricated with tools designed for this purpose. Factory elbows shall be utilized wherever possible. B. Raceway routings on plan views shall be followed to the extent possible. C. Routings shall be adjusted to avoid obstructions. Coordinate the trades prior to installation of raceways. Lack of coordination shall not be justification for extra compensation, and removal and re-installation to resolve conflicts shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as part of the WORK. 3.2 DUCTBANKS A. Ductbanks shall be installed in accordance with the criteria below. 1. Duct shall be assembled using high impact non-metallic spacers and saddles to provide conduits with vertical and horizontal separation. Plastic spacers shall be set every 5-feet. The duct array shall be anchored every 5-feet to prevent movement during placement of concrete. 2. The duct shall be laid on a grade line of at least 3-inches per 100-feet, sloping towards pullboxes or manholes. Duct shall be installed and pullbox and manhole depths adjusted so that the top of the concrete envelope is a minimum of 18-inches below grade and a minimum of 24-inches below roadways. 3. Changes in direction of the duct envelope by more than 10 degrees horizontally or vertically shall be accomplished using bends with a minimum radius 24 times the duct diameter. 4. Duct couplings shall be staggered a minimum of 6-inches. 5. The bottom of trench shall be of select backf ill or sand. 6. Each bore of the completed ductbank shall be cleaned by drawing through it a MWH—06/24/03 UNDERGROUND RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16111-2 standard flexible mandrel one foot long and 1/4-inch smaller than the nominal size of the duct. After passing of the mandrel, a wire brush and swab shall be drawn through. 7. Spare raceways that are not indicated to contain conductors shall have a 1/8-inch polypropylene pull cord installed throughout the entire length of the raceway. B. Duct entrances shall be grouted smooth; ducts shall be terminated with flush end bells. Sections of pre-fabricated manholes and pullboxes shall be assembled with waterproof mastic and shall be set on a 12-inch bed of gravel as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by field conditions. C. Ductbank penetration through walls of manholes, pullboxes, and building walls below grade shall be watertight. D. Concrete encased ductbank shall terminate at building foundations. When duct enters the building on a concrete slab on grade, duct shall not be encased, but shall transition to rigid steel PVC-coated conduits on all stub-ups. E. Where an underground conduit enters a structure through a concrete roof or a membrane waterproofed wall or floor, provide a Link-Seal, or equal sealing device. The sealing device shall be utilized with rigid steel conduit. Transition from PVC to rigid steel conduit prior to building entry. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 UNDERGROUND RACEWAY SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PA(-,F 1R111-3 SECTION 16120-WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 -- GENERAL **Mow, 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide wires and cable, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Sections 01300 - Contractor Submittals and 16050 - Electrical Work, General. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Conductors, include grounding conductors, shall be copper. Aluminum conductor wire and cable will not be permitted. Insulation shall bear UL label, the manufacturer's trademark, and identify the type, voltage, and conductor size. All conductors except flexible cords and cables, fixture wires, and conductors that form an integral part of equipment such as motors and controllers shall conform to the requirements of Article 310 of the National Electric Code, latest edition, for current carrying capacity. Flexible cords and cables shall conform to Article 400, and fixture wires shall conform to Article 402. Wiring shall have wire markers at each end. 2.2 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE A. Power and Lighting Wire 1. Wire for lighting, receptacles and other circuits not exceeding 150 Volts to ground shall be NEC;type THHN/THWN as manufactured by the Okonite Co.; Carol Cable Co. Inc.; Pirelli Cable Corp. or equal. 2. Wire for circuits over 15 Volts to ground shall be NEC type THHN/THWN for sizes #6 AWG and smaller shall be NEC type XHHW for sizes #4 AWG and larger as manufactured by the Okonite Co.; Carol Cable Co. Inc.; Pirelli Cable Corp. or equal. 3. Wire* for direct burial outdoor lighting circuits shall be NEC type USE as manufactured by the Okonite Co.; Carol Cable Co. Inc.; Pirelli Cable Corp. or equal. B. Control Status and Alarm Wire 1. Wire shall be No. 14 AWG NEC type THHN/THWN, stranded as manufactured by the Okonite Co.; Carol Cable Co. Inc.; Pirelli Cable Corp. or equal. 2. Multi-conductor control cable, where shown on the Drawings, shall be stranded, No. 14 AWG, 600 Volt, polyvinyl chloride insulated, nylon jacket over insulation, polyvinyl chloride jacket overall, Type TC as manufactured by the Okonite Co.; Pirelli Cable Corp. or equal. MWH—06/24/03 WIRES AND CABLES CITY OF FORT WORTH WrAPT AN/Fell IF PI IAAP CTATIr)KI Akin CTr)PAr,G TAKIV DAr-'C ial On-I C. Instrumentation Wire 1. Wire for 4-20 mA, R.T.D., potentiometer and similar signals shall be: a. Single pair cable: 1) Conductors: 2 No. 16 stranded and twisted on 2-in lay 2) Insulation: PVC with 300 Volt, 105 degree C rating 3) Shield: 100 percent mylar tape with drain wire 4) Jacket: PVC with UL and manufacturers identification 5) Max overall diameter: 0.262-in 6) Misc: UL Subject 13, Type PLTC 7) Manufacturers: Belden No. 9316; Manhattan No. M39119 b. Three conductor (triad) cable: 1) Conductors: 3 No. 16 stranded and twisted on 2-in lay 2) Insulation: PVC with 300 Volt, 105 degree C rating 3) Shield: 100 percent mylar tape with drain wire 4) Jacket: PVC with UL and manufacturers identification 5) Max overall diameter: 0.262-in 6) Misc: UL Subject 13, Type PLTC 7) Manufacturers: Belden No. 9316; Manhattan No. M39119 c. Multiple pair cables (where shown on the Drawings): 1) Conductors: Multiple 2 No. 22 stranded and twisted on a 2-in lay 2) Insulation: PVC with 300 Volt, 105 degree C rating 3) Shield: Individual pairs shielded with 100 percent mylar tape and drain wire 4) Jacket: PVC with UL and manufacturers identification 5) Misc: UL Subject 13, Type PLTC 6) Manufacturers: Belden No. 9330, 9331, 9332, 9333, 9335, 9337; Manhattan No. M39149, M39150, M39151, M39152, M39154, M39156 2.3 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE A. General 1. Individual conductors shall be copper, Class B, stranded. MWH—06/24/03 WIRES AND CABLES CITY OF FORT WORTH MC;C;ART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16120-2 B. 5 KV Cable 1. Cable used in conduit or duct shall be composed of a single conductor, ethylene- propylene rubber (EPR) insulation rated at 90 degrees C, shield, and black polyvinyl ..� chloride (PVC) jacket. Insulation level shall be 133 percent, 115 mil. Shield shall be copper tape type, or corrugated drain wire type Unishield as manufactured by General Cable. Cable shall be UL Type MV-90 in accordance with UL 1072 and ICEA-S-93-639/NEMA-WC74 - Medium Voltage Power Cables, as manufactured by General Cable, Okonite, or Rome Cable. 2. Tray cable shall be composed of one or three conductors, a copper grounding conductor, ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) insulation rated at 90 degrees C, interlocked aluminum armor, and yellow PVC outer jacket. Insulation level shall be 133 percent, 115 mil. Tray cable shall be UL Type MV-90 in accordance with UL 1072 and ICEA-S-96-639/NEMA-WC74 as manufactured by General Cable, Okonite, or Rome Cable. 2.4 CABLE TERMINATIONS A. Compression type connectors shall be insulated with a heat shrink boot or outer covering and epoxy filling. Splice kits shall be as manufactured by Rachem; Idea Industries; 3M Co. or equal. B. Solderless pressure connectors shall be self-contained, waterproof and corrosion-proof units incorporating prefilled silicone grease to block out moisture in air. Connectors shall be sized according to manufacturer's recommendations. The connectors shall be UL listed and CSA approved, a manufactured by King Technology, St Louis, MO; Ideal Industries, Inc., Sycamore, IL or equal. 2.5 MOTOR CONNECTIONS A. Motor connections shall be ring type mechanical compression terminations installed on the branch circuit wires and the motor leads and secured with bolt, nut and springwasher. Connections shall be insulated with a Rachem Type RVC, roll-on stub insulator or equal. 2.6 TERMINATION AND SPLICES (CONTROL, STATUS AND ALARM CONDUCTORS) A. Termination connectors shall be of the locking fork-end (upturned leg ends) type as manufactured by Ideal Industries; 3M Co.; Panduit Corp. or equal. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and terminate all power, control, and instrumentation conductors except where indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conductors shall not be pulled into raceway until raceway has been cleared of moisture and debris. B. Pulling tensions on raceway cables shall be within the limits recommended by the cable manufacturer. Wire pulling lubricant, where needed, shall be UL approved. MWH—06/24/03 WIRES AND CABLES CITY OF FORT WORTH MMART AVFNI IF PUMP STATION ANC STORArF TANK PArF ir%i7n-R C. Instrumentation wire shall not be run in the same raceway with power and control wiring except where specifically indicated. D. Wire in panels, cabinets, and wireways shall be neatly grouped using nylon tie straps, and shall be fanned out to terminals. �MOI E. Single conductor cable in cable trays shall be No. 1/0 or larger and shall be of a type listed and marked for use in cable trays. Tray cable smaller than 1/0 shall be multi- conductor, with outer jacket. 3.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. General 1. Wire taps and splices shall be properly taped and insulated according to their respective classes. 2. There shall be no cable splices in underground manholes or pullboxes. 3. Stranded conductors shall be terminated directly on equipment box lugs making sure that all conductor strands are confined within lug. Use forked-tongue lugs where equipment box lugs have not been provided. 4. Excess control and instrumentation wire shall be properly taped and terminated as spares. B. Control Wire and Cable 1. Control conductors shall be spliced or terminated only at the locations indicated and only on terminal strips or terminal lugs of vendor furnished equipment. 2. In junction boxes, motor control centers, and control panels, control wire and spare wire shall be terminated to terminal strips. C. Instrumentation Wire and Cable 1. Shielded instrumentation cables shall be grounded at one end only, preferably the receiving end on a 4-20 mA system. 2. Two- and three-conductor shielded cables installed in conduit runs which exceed available standard cable lengths may be spliced in pullboxes. Such cable runs shall have only one splice per conductor. D. Power Wire and Cable 1. All 120/208-volt, 120/240-volt, and 480/277-volt branch circuit conductors may be spliced in suitable fittings at locations determined by the CONTRACTOR. Cables rated above 2,000 volt shall be spliced or terminated only at equipment terminals indicated. 2. Splices to motor leads in motor terminal boxes shall be wrapped with mastic material to form a mold and then shall be taped with a minimum of two layers of varnished cambric tape overtaped with a minimum of two layers of high temperature tape. MWH—06/24/03 WIRES AND CABLES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16120-4 3. Shielded power cable shall be terminated with pre-assembled stress cones in a manner approved by the cable and terminal manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed termination procedure as a Shop Drawing. 3.4 CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. General: Wires and cables shall be identified for proper control of circuits and equipment and to reduce maintenance effort. B. Identification Numbers: The CONTRACTOR shall assign to each control and instrumentation wire and cable a unique identification number. Numbers shall be assigned to all conductors having common terminals and shall be shown on "as built" drawings. Identification numbers shall appear within 3-inches of conductor terminals. "Control Conductor" shall be defined as any conductor used for alarm, annunciator, or signal purposes. 1. Multiconductor cable shall be assigned a number which shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and at stub-up locations beneath free-standing equipment. It is expected that the cable number shall form a part of the individual wire number. Individual control conductors and instrumentation cable shall be identified at pull points as described above. The instrumentation cable numbers shall incorporate the loop numbers assigned in the Contract Documents. 2. All 120/208-volt system feeder cables and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows: Phase A - black, Phase B - red, Phase C - blue, and Neutral - white. The 120/240-volt system conductors shall be color coded as follows: Line 1 - Black, Line 2 - Red, and Neutral - White. The 480/277-volt system conductors shall be color coded as follows: Phase A - Brown, Phase B - Orange, Phase C - Yellow, and Neutral - Gray. Color coding tape shall be used where colored insulation is not available. Branch circuit switch shall be yellow. Insulated ground wire shall be green, and neutral shall be gray. Color coding and phasing shall be consistent throughout the Site, but bars at panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers shall be connected Phase A-B-C, top to bottom, or left to right, facing connecting lugs. 3. General purpose AC control cables shall be red. General purpose DC control cables shall be blue. 4. Spare cable shall be terminated on terminal screws and shall be identified with a unique number as well as with destination. 5. Terminal strips shall be identified by computer printable, cloth, self-sticking marker strips attached under the terminal strip. 3.5 TESTING A. Cable Assembly and Testing: Cable assembly and testing shall comply with applicable requirements of ICEA Publication No. S-68-516 - Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. Factory test results shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 prior to shipment of cable. The following field tests shall be the minimum requirements: 1. Insulation resistance testing, using a DC megohmeter, shall be performed on all cables operating at more than 2,000 volts to ground. Time-resistance readings shall MWH—06/24/03 WIRES AND CABLES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PArF 1n19n-. be taken and recorded at intervals of 30 seconds and one minute. Time-resistance voltage levels shall be per the cable manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Power cable rated at 600 volts shall be tested for insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to a ground using a megohmeter. 3. Field testing shall be done after cables are installed in the raceways. 4. Field tests shall be performed by a certified test organization acceptable to the cable manufacturer. Test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and acceptance. 5. Cables failing the tests shall be replaced with a new cable or be repaired. Repair methods shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer and shall be performed by persons certified by the industry. B. Continuity Test: Control and instrumentation cables shall be tested for continuity, polarity, undesirable ground, and origination. Such tests shall be performed after installation and prior to placing cables in service. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 WIRES AND CABLES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16120-6 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide wiring devices, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 16050 — Electrical Work, General apply to this Section. C. Single Manufacturer: Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Complete catalog cuts of switches, receptacles, enclosures, covers, and appurtenances, marked to clearly identify proposed materials. 2. Documentation showing that proposed materials comply with the requirements of NEC and U.L. 3. Documentation of the manufacturer's qualifications. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All devices shall carry the U.L. label. B. General purpose duplex receptacles and toggle switch handles shall be brown everywhere except in finished rooms where they shall be ivory. Special purpose receptacles shall have a body color as indicated. Receptacles and switches shall be specification grade and conform to NEMA WD-1, Federal Specifications W-C-596E and W-S-896E, respectively. 2.2 LIGHTING SWITCHES A. Local branch switches shall be toggle type, rated at 20 amperes, 120-277 vAC, and shall be General Electric Cat. No. GE-5951-1 for single pole, GE-5953-1 for three-way and GE-5954-1 for four-way, or similar types as manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton, or equal. 2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLES A. Duplex receptacles rated 125 V, 20 amperes shall be polarized 3 wire type for use with 3 wire cord with grounded lead and 1 designated stud shall be permanently grounded to MWH—06/24/03 WIRING DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16140-1 the conduit system (NEMA 5-20R). Duplex 120 V receptacles shall be G.E. 5362, Hubbell 5362, or equal. Single receptacles shall be G.E. 4102, Hubbell 4102, or equal. B. Ground-fault circuit interrupting receptacles (GFCI's) shall be installed at the locations indicated and as required by the NEC. GFCI's shall be duplex, specification grade, tripping at 5 mA. Ratings shall be 125 V, 20 amperes, NEMA WD-1, Configuration 5-20R, capable of interrupting 5,000 amperes without damage. Feed-through type GFCI's serving standard receptacles will not be permitted. GFCI's shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, Bryant, Leviton, or equal. 2.4 ENCLOSURES AND COVERS A. Surface mounted switches and receptacles shall be in FS or FD type weatherproof conduit fittings. B. Switch and receptacle covers on surface mounted boxes shall be die cast copper-free aluminum. C. In finished areas, switch and receptacle boxes shall be provided with SUPER STAINLESS STEEL COVERS as manufactured by Harvey Hubbell, Arrow Hart, Bryant, or equal. D. In areas where cast boxes are used, switch and receptacle covers shall be Crouse- Hinds Catalog No. DS185 and WLRD-1, or Adalet No. WSL and WRD, or equal. E. Receptacles in wet locations shall be with a hinged cover/enclosure marked "Suitable for Wet Locations when in use" and "UL Listed." There shall be a gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface and between the hinged cover and mounting plate/base. The cover shall be TayMac Specification Grade, or equal. 2.5 WELDING RECEPTACLES A. Welding receptacles shall be rated 60 amperes, 600 vAC, three wire, four pole, heavy duty circuit breaking type, complete with outlet box and be connected for 480 volt service. A matching plug shall also be furnished for each three receptacles. The outlets shall be Crouse Hinds "Arktite" ARE-6424, with plug APJ-6485. 2.6 RECEPTACLE—TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (TVSS) A. Transient voltage surge suppressors shall be duplex style, rated for 80 joules (minimum) of energy absorption in each of three modes. Units shall be rated 125 volts AC, sized for installation in 2-inch by 4-inch outlet boxes, and as manufactured by Arrow Hart, Pass & Seymour, or Hubbell. 2.7 RECEPTACLE— SPECIAL PURPOSE A. Special purpose receptacles shall have ratings and number of poles as indicated or required for anticipated purpose. B. Matching plug with cord-grip features shall be provided with each special-purpose receptacle. MWH—06/24/03 WIRING DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16140-2 2.8 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates or equivalent markings on switch enclosures to indicate ON and OFF positions of each switch. ON and OFF for 3-way or 4-way switches is not ,%NOOW acceptable. Provide receptacles for special purposes with nameplates indicating their use. Conform to requirements of Section 16050. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 3.2 CONNECTION A. Rigidly attach wiring devices in accordance with National Electrical Code, and as indicated, avoiding interference with other equipment. B. Securely fasten nameplates using screws, bolts, or rivets centered under or on the device, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground all devices, including switches and receptacles, in accordance with NEC, ART 250, and Section 16450 - Grounding. B. Ground switches and associated metal plates through switch mounting yoke, outlet box, and raceway system. Nftoplll C. Ground flush receptacles and their metal plates through positive ground connections to outlet box and grounding system. Maintain ground to each receptacle by spring-loaded grounding contact to mounting screw or by grounding jumper, each making positive connection to outlet box and grounding system at all times. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Provide checkout, field, and functional testing of wiring devices in accordance with Section 16050. B. Test each receptacle for polarity and ground integrity with a standard receptacle tester. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 WIRING DEVICES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16140-3 SECTION 16151 - ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 -- GENERAL �.s 1.0 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: This section specifies the requirements for custom-built premium electric motors for the pumps as specified. The motors shall be single speed,single winding, in strict compliance with the requirements specified herein. The motors shall be designed to fit the space shown on the drawings. The driven equipment manufacturer shall select exact motor speed. 1.1 RELATED WORK A. Division 1, General Requirements 1. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/NEMA 1. MG-1: Motors and Generators. 2. MG-2: Installation and Operation of Electric Motors. 3. MG-3: Sound Level Prediction for Installed Rotating electrical Machines B. UL 1004. Standard for Safety for Electric Motors. C. ANSI/IEEE 1. STD 1: General Principles for Temperature Limits in the Rating of Electric Equipment. 2. STD 43: Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery. 3. STD 85. Standard Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric Machinery. 4. STD 112. Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 5. STD 275: Recommended Practice for Thermal Evaluation of Insulation Systems for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-wound Pre-insulated Stator Coils, Machines Rated 6,900 volts and Below. 6. STD 429: Standard Test Procedure for the Evaluation of Sealed Insulation Systems for AC Electric Machinery Employing Form-would Stator Coils. D. IEEE-85. A-weighted sound level. E. Other Standards. Motors shall be built to all other applicable NEMA,ANSI and IEEE standards not included above. 1.3 SUBMITTALS MW H—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 1615 1-1 A. Requirements. Comply with the requirements of Section 01340-Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples; and the following paragraphs. B. Design Information. For each motor specified under this Section, provide the following design information on the Electric Motor Questionnaire included at the end of this Specification. 1. Manufacturer. 2. Rated full load horsepower. 3. Rated volts. 4. Number of phases. 5. Frequency in hertz. 6. Full load amperes (FLA). 7. No load amperes. 8. Locked rotor amperes (LRA)at rated voltage or NEMA code letter. 9. Synchronous speed (srpm). 10. Guaranteed maximum slip at full load in percent. 11. NEMA insulation system classification and description of manufacturer's method of application. 12.Temperature rise at rated full load, by resistance temperature detector. 13. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is designed. 14. Maximum air flow through motor in cfm at maximum temperature rise. 15. Service factor. 16. Frame size, outline dimensions, net weight and weight of rotating element. For all motors include surge protection dimensions and weight. 17. The limiting temperature rise shall be by resistive temperature detector method. 18. NEMA machine type (ODP, WP-1, TEFC, etc.). 19. Bearing size and calculation. 20. Lubrication (compatible with pump manufacture). 21. Safe stall time. 22. Maximum acceleration time with NEMA standard Wk2 value,at rated voltage and at 90%of rated voltage. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-2 23. Number of safe starts in succession when starting from a 50 degree Celsius ambient, intermediate waiting periods and other conditions for driving equipment with a NEMA standard wk2 value. 24. Efficiency at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, full load, and service factor. 25. Power factor at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, full load, and service factor. 26. Space heater'voltage and wattage. 27. Surge protection information including mounting details. 28. Platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) literature with wiring diagram. 29. Motor Damage Curve, safe stall time curve,and acceleration curve at 100%,90%and 80% of motor rated terminal voltages applied. C. Shop Drawings and Product Data. Provide the following information. 1. Data to be included on nameplate. 2. Dimensioned outline drawings. 3. Net weight of assembled motor and net weight of heaviest part to be handled during field assembly or disassembly. 4. Dimensions and internal arrangements of terminal boxes. 5. Stator and rotor thermal damage curves for motor located in a 50 C ambient. 6. Actual information on manufactured unit when in variance with information previously submitted under paragraph 1.04, Submittals. 1.4 FACTORY TESTS A. General 1. The motors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. 2. Efficiencies may be determined by Method-F (equivalent circuit calculations) using calculated values for friction, windage, and stray load losses. B. Factory Test. The following tests shall be performed on one motor of each rating at the factory. 1. Rotor static balance. 2. Winding resistance. 3. Rotor dynamic balance. Balance to 2.0 mils or 0.25 mil per pole peak to peak,whichever is less, measured on all bearings. 4. No load current, power factor and speed. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-3 5. Locked rotor current and torque at rated voltage and frequency. 6. Readout of all RTDs under stabilized heat-run. 7. High potential test. N%,� 8. Motor performance test including: current, power factor, speed and efficiency at 114, 112, 3/4, full load, and service factor at rated voltage and frequency. 9. Heat run at rated full load for motor. 10. Certified noise level test according to IEEE Standard 85, with motor running uncoupled, under no load, on an open factory floor. The method of physical measurement of sound in ANSI 51.2. C. Test Reports. Provide certified copies of each factory test report in accordance with Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Organization. Provide to the pump manufacturers for installation in the pump operation and maintenance manual; refer to Section 11371, Paragraph 1.03. Include the following information: 1. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including as-built shop drawings, outline drawings, and schematic and wiring diagrams. 2. Instructions for erection, alignment (including tolerances), and preparation for use. 3. Complete description of safety equipment, safety procedures, and safety precautions. 4. Normal starting, running and shutdown procedures, as well as emergency shutdown procedures. 5. Recommended number of starts in any 24-hour period. 6. Normal maintenance, inspection and lubrication procedures. 7. Recommended spare parts list. 1.6 JOB REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS A. Unit Responsibility. The electric motor shall be furnished guaranteed by the pump manufacturer as specified in Section 11371, to assure single unit responsibility. B. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall make structural, mechanical and electrical changes that are necessitated because the Contractor selects equipment with dimensional, power or mechanical differences from that shown on the Drawings. All engineering costs associated with revisions shall also be borne by the Contractor. N%0/ MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-4 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.0 RATING A. Temperature Rise. The motor shall have Class F insulation and shall be rated at the following temperature rises. 1. Motor windings shall operate continually at rated load, voltage, and frequency. The temperature rise by embedded detector shall not exceed 70 C over 50 C ambient temperature with motor loaded to its nameplate horsepower. 2. The motor windings shall be capable of operating continually, at 115% of nameplate horsepower, with rated voltage and frequency applied and with a temperature rise by embedded detector not exceeding 80 C over a 50 C ambient temperature. 3. The motor manufacturer, in the questionnaire,shall state the limiting temperature rise. The motor shall be rated at the limiting temperature rise, and stated on nameplate. 4. The ambient air temperature shall be defined as air immediately surrounding the motor. B. Description. The motors shall be horizontal induction motors, single speed. The pump manufacturer shall determine the speeds. 1. Motor shall be selected so that pump horsepower shall not exceed the motor nameplate(at unity service factor) rating over the entire pump curve. 2. Air inlets and outlets shall be protected by vermin-proof,corrosion resistant louvers. Motor shall have adequate lifting eyes. The air inlets shall be located on end or side and shall `oe include one platinum 100 ohm RTD. 3. The motors shall provide adequate air ventilation for cooling of the core of the motor. An exhaust air temperature rise in excess of 40 degrees C with ambient temperature of 40 degrees C at rated horsepower shall be unacceptable. 4. Magnetic center shall be determine in the factory and provide a magnetic center indicator located on the bearing housing. Provide a nameplate describing the end play limits and magnetic center. 5. Each motor shall have couplings keyed to shafts. The coupling shall be limited-end-play gear type. Coordinate with pump manufacturer with regard to finished product. C. Voltage: 4160 volts, 3 phase. D. Frequency: 60 Hertz. E. Service Factor 1.15 times rated load. F. Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: 12 pole, at least 0.8; 10 pole or less, greater than 0.85. G. Efficiency: Motor efficiency shall be evaluated and determined by the pump manufacturer to achieve and guarantee the overall wire-to-water efficiency of the pumping unit. All motors shall have the efficiency evaluated with pump. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-5 H. Slip: Not more than 3.0%of synchronous speed but nevertheless the full load RPM shall match or exceed the pump design RPM. I. Starting-Full Voltage: Each motor shall be capable of producing the required starting torque as required by the pump manufacturer. All motor driven pump units shall be readily capable of starting with the pump primed and against a check valve having a static or operating head on the discharge side. J. Locked Rotor Current. The locked rotor current of the motor shall be limited in accordance with the National Electrical Code, Maximum of Code Letter F, which permits 5.0 - 5.59 kVA per horsepower and concurs with the NEMA Code F ratings. The code letter shall be clearly shown on the nameplate. K. Acceleration Time. Provide calculated acceleration time of the combined motor and driven load and rated voltage and at 90% of rated voltage for review by the Engineer. L. Safe Stall Time. Safe stall time shall not be less than 4 seconds more than the acceleration time when hot, unless approved by the engineer. The motor manufacturer shall coordinate with the supplier of the driven equipment to obtain inertia data,and shall calculate the acceleration times when starting across the line. Include calculations with 100 % of the rated name plate motor voltage, (I.E.4000 volts for a motor on a 4160 volt system), 90%and 80%present at the motor terminals. The Contractor shall submit acceleration curves plotting time vs speed, and calculations to the Engineer for approval. M. Noise Measurement. The noise level as measured by IEEE Standard 85, shall be submitted and coordinated with pump manufacturer. 2.1 TYPE A. Provide air-cooled, self-ventilated, squirrel-cage induction motors. 2.2 STATOR A. The stator core shall be built up with high grade, non-aging laminated silicon steel. C5 or better. Each lamination core shall be plated to minimize eddy current losses.The laminations shall be adequately keyed or dovetailed to the stator frame and securely held in place at each end. There shall be no perceptible buzzing of laminations during operation. The coil slot wedges shall be magnetic slot wedges. B. The motor stator winding shall be provided with premium grade full Class F insulation or better. Silicone rubber insulation is not acceptable 1. A split-component epoxy insulation system shall be used in order to provide high resistance to moisture and other contaminates. 2. All windings shall be copper, assembled using form wound coils of the same size and shape. Random wound coils are not acceptable. 3. The form wound coils shall be constructed with copper wire. The stator construction method shall accommodate VIP treatment. The coils shall be covered with strand insulation consisting of Dacron polyester glass fiber film or other high temperature insulating film. MW H—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-6 4. Provide full length Nomex slot wrapper rated 5000 volts minimum which extends well beyond the stator core iron to reduce the possibility of tracking to ground. 5. The tum-to-tum insulation shall be provided to ensure machine-winding protection against surges at the machine terminals (L-N) of 2X peak rated line-to-line voltage with a rise time of 1.3 microseconds. 6. Coil insulation shall be tightly applied to eliminate all air voids. 7. Insulation shall be applied to the end turns, as well as the slot portion of the coil, to ensure all parts of all coils are fully insulated to ground for the voltage class of the machine. 8. Coils shall be tightly inserted into the stator slots without damage. Coils shall be secured to surge ring or treated rope and securely laced to one another as necessary to prevent distortion and expansion. 9. The end turns shall be blocked top, sides and bottom with felt. The surge ring shall be _ designed and installed to prevent movement during starting and short circuit conditions. 10. After insertion of the coils in stator slots, all end connections shall be crimped and then silver soldered. Clean all solvent and flux before applying insulation. 11. After the coils are properly installed, magnet slot sedges shall be installed and welded. End turns shall be braced,and all moisture removed,the entire stator assembly shall be vacuum pressure impregnated with thermal setting epoxy resin and then be heat cured. 12. An epoxy coat shall be applied after curing to prevent chemical,caustic or fungus corrosion. 13. The entire stator shall then again be oven cured to provide a completely sealed insulation system. C. The motor shall be rewindable in a rewind shop. 2.3 ROTOR CONSTRUCTION A. The shaft shall be forged or rolled steel,accurately machined,smoothly finished,with sufficient strength to withstand all stresses resulting from normal operation at any speed up to and including a 25% over-speed condition. Provide shaft end details coordinated with pump and shafting as specified. B. The core shall be built up with high grade non-aging silicon steel,each single piece lamination core plated to minimize eddy current losses. Core mechanical integrity shall not rely on any electrically active component C. Rotor bars and end ring shall be copper or copper alloy with uniform resistance characteristics so as to equalize thermal stresses. The bars shall be rectangular or shaped to meet motor starting and running torque requirements. Each copper rotor bar shall be mechanically locked or swaged in the rotor pole slots to minimize movement and vibration. Rotor end rings shall be free of circumferential joints and shall be swaged to the rotor bars by an induction or torch brazing process. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-7 D. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced prior to assembly. Balancing shall be checked after assembly with the motor running at rated speed. Run out on the shaft shall be checked and in no case shall they exceed 0.001 inch measured with a precision indicator with the reading taken at the end of the shaft. ,%Mae E. The cage bars shall be copper or a copper alloy with uniform resistance characteristics so as to equalize thermal stresses. ALUMINUM ROTOR BARS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. Rotor bar shall be in tension at all times and shall be brazed at the end ring connections. Low pressure die cast aluminum rotors are acceptable, fabricated aluminum rotors are unacceptable. 2.4 BEARINGS A. Motors shall have anti-friction open or single-shield, vacuum-degassed steel ball or roller bearings,electric motor quality,with extended pipe zerk fitting and 1/2-lb relief fitting for external lubrication while machine is in operation.The bearing shield shall be on the motor winding side of the bearing unless the design is a flow through system. If so, the bearings shall not be shielded. B. Heavy brackets mounted from the motor frame shall support the bearing housings. C. The bearings shall have a rated fatigue life of L10 100,000 hours for direct coupled applications, minimum. D. When a continuous axial thrust condition exists,the motor shall be provided with a supplement thrust bearing or two anti-friction bearings of adequate size to handle the momentary and continuous thrust conditions specified. E. A high quality bearing seal or shaft stinger shall be provided to prevent moisture and contaminants from entering the shaft end into the bearing. This shall be supplied in addition to tight mechanical bearing housing fits. F. The rotor end play limits and the shaft position,when magnetically centered shall be scribed on the shaft and a suitable reference point shall be indicated on the bearing housing. The pump supplier shall provide a limited end float coupling. A minimum of 1/2-inch total shaft end float is required. G. Metric size bearings are not acceptable. 2.5 LEADS A. Motor Leads. Use ASTM B 173, Class G, stranded copper. B. Provide permanent identification numbers on leads according to NEMA MG 1-2.02. Provide each lead with additional identification within six inches of the stator frame. Use crimp-on, solderless copper terminals on leads and place heat-shrink insulation sleeves or covers between leads and terminals. C. The motor leads shall have the same class of insulation as the motor stator windings. Leads shall be numbered for clockwise rotation when facing the opposite the shaft end. 2.6 ENCLOSURE A. Description. Provide a removable fabricated steel enclosure of guarded, open-drip proof, suitable for indoor installation. ,%*MOO` MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-5 2.7 HARDWARE A. Use structural bolts,washers, nuts, pins, and similar items manufactured of high-strength steel. ..� Use only hexagon-head bolts and hexagon nuts. Use corrosion-resistant materials or protect hardware from corrosion by either hot-dip galvanizing or chrome plating. 2.8 NAMEPLATES A. Main Nameplate. Provide each motor with an embossed stainless steel nameplate meeting the requirements of NEMA MG 1-20.60 for squirrel-cage induction motors and the National Electrical Code, Section 430-7. Include the following additional information on the main or a additional nameplate:insulation system classification,connection diagram,direction of rotation for driven equipment, electric phase rotation for NEMA standard direction of rotation. B. Heater Nameplate. Voltage and wattage. C. Bearings Nameplate. Bearing manufacturer's name and identifications and recommended lubricant. D. Attachment. Attach nameplates to the motor with stainless steel fastening pins or screws. E. Dynamic Balance Nameplate. Furnish and mounted on motor. 2.9 TERMINAL BOXES A. Description. Provide custom built, gasketed, oversized conduit boxes and terminal housing cabinets for all wiring connections to motor. The cable entrance to the box shall be from the bottom side. Verify exact location of cable entry before design from the Contract Drawings. B. Main Terminal Housing. The main terminal box shall be custom designed to accommodate lightning arrestors, and surge capacitors. The cable feeding the motor shall be 5 kV, 133% insulated, tape shielded EPR insulated cable. Provide NEMA 1-hole pads to terminate the incoming motor leads. The motor terminal box shall be sized to accommodate prefabricated shrink-on cable terminators as manufactured by 3-M or Ray Chem. Motor leads shall be marked for permanent identification. Provide grounding lug in box for incoming equipment grounding conductor. The main terminal box shall be installed integral with the motor. C. Control Cable Conduit Boxes. Provide separate terminal boxes for the motor space heater leads, for the RTD leads. Do not combine the power lead, space heater or RTD terminal boxes. For RTD and space heater terminal boxes, provide 600 volt rated molded insulation terminal blocks with ring-tongue terminals under screws. Use only corrosion-resistant materials and brass screws. Permanently identify all leads and terminals. 2.10 SPACE HEATERS A. Type. Electric resistance, 120 volts, silicon rubber clad or rubber epoxy or equivalent non- oxidizing exterior, with maximum surface temperature of 130 degrees C (266 degrees F). Alternatively,provide two stainless-steel-sheathed conventional space heaters,each with rated watts at the specified voltage equal to twice the required value, and connect in series. 2.11 RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS (RTD's) I-Moo, A. Type: Platinum, 100 OHM at 0 degrees C MW H-06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-9 B. Quantity. 1. Six: Two per phase. 2. Two: One for each Motor Bearing if oil bath lubricated bearings is provided. Grease lubricated bearing RTDs are not required unless deemed to be effective or required by the motor manufacturer. 3. One : Ambient RTD C. Electrical Contractor shall supply#16 shielded triad wire in conduit from Pump Bearing RTDs to the control conduit box on the motor. The contractor shall extend all RTD connections to the High Voltage starters via triads as shown on the Drawings. 2.12 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are General Electric,Siemens,Toshiba,TECO-Westinghouse,and Reliance. The acceptable manufacturer shall be required to have prior experience(minimum 10 years) in design and manufacturing of such motors. B. Manufacturer's standard shop paints for prime and finish coats are acceptable. Include one pint of finish paint for each motor. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.0 INSTALLATION A. These motors and pumps will be installed under the same Contract. Refer to Division 1 of these Specifications. B. The motor manufacturer shall provide the services of an experienced applications engineer for a period of two days minimum per each motor furnished, during the.installation and startup of the motors and pumping units. Pump supplier and the Contractor shall coordinate this activity. 3.1 TESTING A. Perform Routine Factory Tests for Polyphase Medium Induction Motors and the tests specified herein: The method of testing shall be in accordance with IEEE Std 112, and shall be in accordance with MG1-12.55. The following routine tests shall be done at the factory on the motors provided, and certified test reports shall be submitted. 1. Measurement of winding resistance. 2. No-load readings of current and speed at normal voltage and frequency. 3. Current input at rated frequency with rotor at standstill for squirrel-cage motors. 4. High-potential test per MG 1-12. 3 B. Field-Testing:The following tests shall be performed on the motors after installation in the field. MW H—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-10 1. Insulation Test: Apply 1000 vlots DC between the winding and ground using a direct- indicating,power-driven megohm-meter. Record the values every 1-minuet for a 10 minute test. Minimum acceptable resistance values shall be in accordance to the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ,%..,i 2. Polarization Index Test: Measure and record the motor's insulation resistance polarization index(10 minute\1 minute)per IEEE Standard 43. Minimum acceptable polarization index ration is 2.0. 3. Motors shall have a 1-hour run-in while uncoupled from the driven load. The motor temperatures shall be monitored and recorded,every 5 minuets from just before start to the end of the hour test. Record operating amps, voltage, and vibration levels. 4. Monitor motors during startup and commissioning to record operating amps, voltage and operating vibrating levels. 5. Adjust vibration alarm and trip settings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Submit test report and all recorded field data. Submit copies of the raw data recorded in the field, signed by the person recording the data, and typewritten reports certified by the Contractor. The motors will not be accepted until the reports are submitted and approved. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16151-11 City of Fort Worth Northside Pump Station and Ground Storage Reservior ELECTRICAL QUESTIONNAIRE MOTOR DATA Manufacturer: Motor H.P. Frame: Enclosure: Type: RPM: Voltage: Phases: Hertz: Insulation Class: Duty: Full Load AMPS: No Load AMPS: Locked Rotor AMPS: Locked Rotor Time: Locked Rotor Torque: % Breakdown Torque: Locked Rotor KVA/HP: Rotor WK2 (lb-ft2): NEMA Design: Service Factor: Inrush Current(% of Full Load): Max Safe Stalled Time (Seconds): Number of Safe Starts Per Day: Number of Consecutive Starts: Full Load Temp Rise, degrees C over 40 degrees C Ambient(at 1.0 S.F.): * Service Factor Temp Rise, degrees C over 40 degrees C (at 1.15 S.F.): Limiting Temperature Rise Resistance (at 25 degrees C): Bearings: Type/Size Life Lubrication Starting Method: Exhaust Air: CFM Shaft: Size Exhaust Air Temp Rise degrees F 1615 Ldoc 16151-12 05/19/07 City of Fort Worth Northside Pump Station and Ground Storage Reservior ELECTRIC MOTOR QUESTIONNAIRE (CONTINUED) Efficiency: Power Factor: 1.15 S.F. Load: 1.15 S.F. Load: 4/4 Load: 4/4 Load: 3/4 Load: 3/4 Load: 1/2 Load: 1/2 Load: 1/4 Load: 1/4 Load: x Temperature rise measured by embedded detectors and not by resistance. END OF SECTION 16151.doc 16151-13 05/19/07 SECTION 16300— MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide main service switchgear, consisting of main breaker and transition section as an integral part of the Medium Voltage Motor Control Center specified in Section 16482 of these specifications. B. The requirements of Section 16050 - Electrical Work, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these specifications, all work herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC); provided that where a local code or ordinance is in conflict with the NEC, the provisions of said local code or ordinance shall take precedence. B. Codes NEC National Electrical Code C. Commercial Standards ANSI/IEEE C37.20 Switchgear Assemblies, including Metal-Enclosed Bus ANSI/NEMA ICS-2 Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies for Industrial Control IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers NEMA SG6 Metal Enclosed Switchgear NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings as an integral part of the submittal for Section 16482 Medium Voltage Motor Control, and in accordance with Section 01300 — Contractor Submittals. B. After review of Shop Drawings of the Service Section by the ENGINEER, they shall also be submitted to the utility company for approval prior to fabrication. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Materials shall be inspected for compliance with Section 16050 and tested per Section 16950 - Electrical Tests. MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16300-1 B. Factory Tests: Reports from design tests conducted in the factory on similar assemblies as indicated herein shall be submitted. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The system warranty shall be not less than one year after initial startup and shall include %mope all costs for repair, parts, travel and living expenses, and labor. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit operation and maintenance procedures for the ENGINEER's review. The data sheets shall be supplemented by written texts and shall include the following: 1. Operating procedure 2. Maintenance procedures 3. Manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assemblies, and diagrams PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials: Equipment and materials provided under this specification shall be new; shall be in accordance with the specifications of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, National Fire Protection Association, and the National Electrical Code; and shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label. B. Equipment: All equipment for the same purpose shall be of the same make. C. Enclosure Requirements: Outdoor equipment, fixtures, and wiring devices shall be of approved, weatherproof construction. D. Standard Products: Materials and equipment submitted for approval shall be the cataloged products of companies regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, shall be the latest standard design that conforms to the specification requirements, and shall essentially duplicate material and equipment that has been in satisfactory use for several years. 2.2 SWITCHGEAR (MEDIUM VOLTAGE) A. Main circuit breaker shall be metal-clad vacuum circuit breaker and shall be rated 5 kV, 1200 amp continuous current and 350 mVA interrupting capacity at nominal system voltage, and shall be complete with all necessary devices and hardware to result in a complete operable unit. Incoming and outgoing sections shall have ample spaces for 5 kV, 133 percent shielded, jacketed single conductor stress-cone terminations, lightning arresters. All terminals and lugs shall be of the solderless type suitable for copper cables of size indicated. The following devices and provisions shall be included: MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16300-2 1. A wheel-mounted, draw-out type vacuum circuit breaker with operating, test, and isolation positions. Switchgear cubicle or compartment shall be provided with a mechanical means for moving the circuit breaker to and from its operating position. Suitable guide rails and positive stops shall be provided for centering the circuit 1*ftwoll breaker in the proper position when inserting or removing the circuit breaker. All necessary accessories required for removing and transferring the circuit breaker shall be furnished. Cubicle shall be provided with a positive stop to prevent overtravel of the circuit breaker when moving it into the OPERATING and TEST position. An indicator or equivalent indicating means shall be provided to clearly show when the circuit breaker is in the TEST or OPERATING position. 2. A complete mechanical interlock system to prevent moving the vacuum breaker from and into operating position when the vacuum breaker is closed. Removal of the circuit (breaker shall be possible only by operating a mechanical device. B. Termination 1. A power terminal disconnecting system with automatic shutter, covering all high- voltage parts when the vacuum breaker is moved out of operating position. Disconnecting devices shall be accurately jig-aligned and securely mounted to maintain alignment. 2. The main contacts and their supports shall be guaranteed not to distort or fail under any or all of the following conditions, individually or concurrently: a. Mechanical stresses resulting from the momentary current indicated. b. Misalignment of disconnects of plus or minus 1/8-inch. 3. All contact surfaces shall be silver-to-silver pressure contacts. In general, these contacts, whether stationary or moveable, shall be of rugged silverplated copper one-piece construction, with springs on fingers to provide uniform contact with the male part of all operating and environmental conditions. 4. The circuit breaker control voltage shall be 120 Vac. A capacitor trip device shall be provided with circuit breaker shunt trip and WL-2 lockout relay to ensure that energy will be available for tripping during fault conditions. A control power transformer complete with fuse protection shall be provided and connected to source wide of circuit breaker. 5. The vacuum circuit breaker shall be operated by an electrically charged, mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored energy operating mechanism. Provision shall be included for manual charging of the mechanism and for slow closing of the main contacts for inspection or adjustments. A manual charging lever shall be furnished with main circuit breaker. The stored energy mechanism shall discharge when the breaker is withdrawn from the cubicle. 6. Facilities shall be provided for padlocking the trip mechanism to block the closing of the circuit breaker. 7. The withdrawable vacuum circuit breaker assembly shall be equipped with self- coupling primary, secondary and grounding contacts. ,%awe MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16300-3 8. In addition to the "Operating" and "Isolated" positions, an intermediate "Test" position shall be provided to facilitate the operation of the vacuum circuit breaker with the primary circuit disconnected. Transfer of the vacuum circuit breaker between the service, test, and isolated positions shall be mechanically prohibited with the circuit breaker closed. 9. Auxiliary switches shall be directly coupled to the circuit breaker mechanism to indicate the open and closed positions of the circuit breaker positively. 10. Mechanical indication of the circuit breaker position - open, closed, operating, test, isolated, shall be positively indicated at the operating face of the equipment. Electrical indication of the circuit breaker status: Open-closed-spring charged, shall also be provided at the operating face of the equipment. 11. A circuit-breaker lifting device, which is capable of lifting the rollout circuit breakers from the switchgear assembly, shall be provided. The lifting device shall have fl- inch diameter locking wheels, a steel platform base, and a hoist mechanism to lift the circuit breaker from the assembly and lower it to the platform base. The entire assembly shall be suitably designed to prevent capsizing during movement which the circuit breaker in place of the platform. 12. Close and trip circuits for breaker shall be separately fused with cascaded connection for the closing circuit. Fuse blocks shall be dead front, pullout type to provide the control disconnecting means. C. Protective Relays 1. The protective relay shall be a Feeder Protection Relay. Multilin 750/760, no equal. 2.3 MAIN SERVICE SWITCHGEAR A. General: The main service switchgear shall consist of a free-standing assembly which complies with the Contract Documents. Assembly shall consist of pull section, main breaker, metering section and transition section. B. Main Circuit Breaker Section: The main circuit breaker shall be as described above and shall have the rating indicated. Service neutral shall be brought to a terminal in the main circuit breaker compartment. A disconnecting link shall be provided in a buss bar connection between the neutral terminal and the switchgear ground bus. Protective relay shall be provided and shall be coordinated and set per utility requirement. C. Metering Section: The metering section shall comply with all utility requirements. 2.4 SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS A. Instrument transformer shall comply with ANSI/IEEE C37.20 and shall have standard accuracy for relaying with the burdens imposed. Mechanical and thermal ratings of current transformers shall be coordinated with short circuit ratings of related circuit breakers. Potential transformers shall be mounted on a disconnecting rack and shall have primary fuse protection. MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16300-4 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be black and white 1/8-inch thick lamicoid, with lettering engraved through the black surface exposing the white lamination beneath. Letter height shall be `,, 1/8-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. Nameplate shall be fastened using two matching screws; adhesive tape is not acceptable. B. Warning nameplate shall be provided on each compartment with external circuit. Warning nameplate shall be red background with white letters and shall read: "CAUTION -THIS UNIT CONTAINS AN EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SOURCE" C. Inside the compartment permanently attached tags shall be provided to indicate location of remote disconnecting means. 2.6 SURFACE PREPARATION, PAINTING AND CLEANLINESS A. Cleanliness of the equipment furnished shall be such that it is smooth and free of all foreign matter such as scales, sand, blisters, weld splatters, metal chips and shavings, oil, grease, organic matter, and rust. B. Metal enclosures shall be chemically cleaned and treated in a process which provides a phosphate coating, then be primed and finished with a corrosion rresistant enamel paint. 1. Exterior surfaces shall be finish painted with dark gray ANSI 24 finish coat, in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice for the environmental conditions. In addition, the undersurfaces shall be covered with a corrosion resistant protective coating. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish two one-pint aerosol spray cans of paint, matching each color used, for field "touch-up" after installation of the equipment. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Electrical equipment materials shall be installed securely in place. Equipment shall be mounted parallel and perpendicular to the walls, floors, and ceilings. B. Anchors and fasteners shall be types designed for the intended purpose and shall be capable of adequately, safely, and permanently securing the material in place. Generally, screws shall be used on wood surfaces, masonry anchors in concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow walls, machine screws, bolts, or welded studs on steel. Nails shall be used only for temporary attachment or support. C. Omissions or conflicts on Drawings or between Drawings and Specifications shall be brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification before proceeding with the WORK. D. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary provisions throughout the Site to receive the WORK as construction progresses and shall provide adequate backing, supports, inserts, and anchor bolts for the hanging and support of electrical fixtures, conduit, MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16300-5 panelboard, and switches, and shall provide and install sleeves through walls, floors, or foundations where electrical lines are required to penetrate. E. Floor standing equipment shall be leveled with shims as required to maintain horizontal surfaces within 1/32-inch per horizontal foot. After leveling, equipment shall be anchored, then grouted so that no space is existing between concrete and equipment support beams. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16300-6 SECTION 16431 — PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform short circuit and protective device studies for the electrical power system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The study shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system for normal and standby power sources down to and including the 480 V distribution system. C. The WORK of this Section shall include protection studies for motors with solid state overload and overcurrent protection devices. D. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain the information required from the electric utility and appropriate vendors. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. Short circuit studies, protective device evaluation studies, and protective device coordination studies shall be performed by a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in shod circuit and protective device coordination services for a period of at least 15 years. B. Studies shall utilize proven computer programs for making 3 - phase fault duty calculations. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The Report shall be submitted and approved prior to final approval of the distribution equipment Shop Drawings and release of equipment for manufacture. Approval from the ENGINEER shall be obtained to ensure that equipment withstand and interruption ratings will be adequate. B. The Report shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to releasing distribution equipment for manufacture. 1.4 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS A. The medium voltage switchgear manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified field engineer and necessary tools and equipment to test, calibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the power system coordination study. B. The motor control center manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified field engineer to calibrate all MCPs as recommended in the power system study. MWH—06/24/03 PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16431-1 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The study shall include development of single-line and impedance diagrams of the power system. Diagrams shall identify all components considered in the study and the ratings of all power devices, including transformers, circuit breakers, relays, fuses, busses, and cables. The resistances, and reactances of cables shall be identified in the impedance diagram. The study shall contain written data from the electric utility company regarding maximum available short circuit current, voltage, and X/R ratio of the utility power system. B. The study shall include every protective device and feeders included in the WORK. The first upstream overcurrent device outside the WORK shall be used as a fixed reference. 3.2 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. The short circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program, and shall be in accordance with: ANSI/IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial Plants ANSI/IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection, and Coordination of Industrial, and Commercial Power Systems ANSI/IEEE C 37.010 Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis ANSI/IEEE C 37.13 Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures 3.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. A protective device evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, molded case switches, and fuses. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment due to prospective short-circuit currents shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention. B. Do not utilize series rated circuit breakers to meet short circuit requirements for this project. Devices shall be fully rated to withstand available fault currents. 3.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to develop the necessary calculations to select power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated current transformers, and low-voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings. MWH—06/24/03 PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16431-2 3.5 TIME/CURRENT COORDINATION CURVES A. As a minimum, the time/current coordination curves for the power distribution system shall include the following on 5-cycle log-log graph paper: 1. Time/current curves for each protective relay, circuit breaker, or fuse showing graphically that the settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards. Each curve shall be identified, and tap and time dial settings shall be specified. Provide individual curves for each feeder unless identical to others. 2. Time/current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide the maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. Recommendations shall be included for alternate methods that would improve selectivity. 3. Time/current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 4. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times. 5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement. 7. Magnetizing inrush points of transformers. 8. Thermal limits of dry type and liquid insulated transformers. (ANSI damage curve). 9. All restrictions of the ANSI and National Electrical Code shall be followed, and proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristics curves shall be maintained. 3.6 REPORT A. The results of the power system studies shall be summarized in ,a final Report. Eight bound copies of the Report shall be submitted. The Report shall include the following: 1. Single-line diagram 2. Impedance diagram 3. Tabulation of all protective devices identified on the single line diagram 4. Time/current coordination curves 5. Specific recommendations, if any 6. Test instrumentation, condition, and connections, as applicable, for each study. B. The Report shall include information concerning the computer program used for the study and also shall include a general discussion of the procedure, items, and data considered in preparing the study. MWH—06/24/03 PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16431-3 C. The Report shall bear the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. D. The CONTRACTOR shall indicate in the Report suggested changes to the protection scheme or equipment selection that will result in improved system reliability and safety. 3.7 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND ADJUSTMENT A. Test, calibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the power system coordination study. B. Calibrate all MCPs as recommended in the power system study. C. Adjustments shall be made prior to energization of any electrical equipment. - END OF SECTION— MWH—06/24/03 PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16431-4 SECTION 16450—GROUNDING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the electrical grounding system, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 16050 - Electrical Work, General apply to this Section. C. Single Manufacturer: Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's services. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals and Section 16050. B. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's product information for connections, clamps, and grounding system components, showing compliance with the requirements of this Section. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Components of the grounding electrode system shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/UL 467 - Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment, and shall conform to the applicable requirements of National Electrical Code Article 250 and local codes. 2.2 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Grounding loop conductors shall be bare annealed copper conductors suitable for direct burial. Conductors shall be No. 4/0 unless indicated otherwise. B. Ground Rods 1. Unless indicated otherwise, the ground rod shall be a minimum of 3/4-inch in diameter, 10-feet long, and have a uniform covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid steel core. The copper to steel bond shall be corrosion resistant. 2. Conform to ANSI/UL 467. 3. Sectional type joined by threaded copper alloy couplings. C. Buried cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod connections shall be made using exothermic welds by Cadweld, Enrico Products, or equal. MWH—06/24/03 GROUNDING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16450-1 D. Exposed grounding connectors shall be of the compression type (connector to cable), made of high copper alloy, and be manufactured specifically for the particular grounding application. The connectors shall be Burndy, O.Z. Gedney, or equal. E. Grounding clamps shall be used to bond each separately derived system to the grounding electrode conductors. F. Equipment Grounding Circuit Conductors 1. These conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the load circuit conductors. The minimum size shall be as outlined in Table 250.122 of the National Electrical Code, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Metallic conduit systems shall have equipment grounding wires as well as being equipment grounding conductors themselves. G. Manufacturers of grounding materials shall be Copperweld, Blackburn, Burndy, or equal. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GROUNDING A. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded in each raceway independent of raceway material. B. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor box. Do not use bolts securing motor box to frame or cover for grounding connectors. C. Size as given on the conduit schedule and in accordance with the NEC-Article 250. D. Route conductors inside raceway. E. Provide a grounding type bushing for secondary feeder conduits which originate from the secondary section of each MCC section, switchboard, or panelboard. F. Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus in the secondary section. G. Provide a green insulated wire as grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw and, for grounding type devices, to equipment grounding conductor. H. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel feeders. I. Interconnect the secondary switchgear neutral bus to the ground bus in the secondary switchgear compartment only at service entrance point or after a transformer. J. Bond cold water pipe system and building structure to separate grounding electrode per NEC. K. Provide the duct bank ground system indicated, including, trenching, splices, ground rods, and connections to equipment and structures. MWH—06/24/03 GROUNDING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16450-2 L. Measure ground impedance in accordance with IEEE STD 81 after installation but before connecting the electrode to the remaining grounding system. M. Low Voltage Grounded System (600V or less): A low voltage grounded system is a � system where the local power supply is a transformer with the transformer secondary grounded. 1. Grounding system connections for a premises wired system supplied by a grounded AC service shall have a grounding electrode connector connected to the grounded service conductor at each service, in accordance with the NEC. 2. The grounded circuit conductor shall not be used for grounding non-current carrying parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures except where specifically listed and permitted by the NEC. N. Embedded Ground Connections 1. Underground and grounding connections embedded in concrete shall be UL listed compression type ground grid connectors. 2. The connection shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall not conceal or cover any ground connections until the ENGINEER or authorized representative has established that every grounding connection conforms to the Contract Documents and has given the CONTRACTOR written confirmation. O. Ground Ring ,%woe 1. Furnish trenching and materials necessary to install the ground ring as indicated. 2. Bonding conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth and be of the size indicated. 3. Minimum burial depth 36-inches or as indicated on the Drawings, whichever is greater. 4. Re-compact disturbed soils to original density in 6-inch layers. P. Duct Bank Ground: A grounding conductor shall be embedded in every duct bank as indicated. Q. Ground Rods 1. Locations shall be as indicated. 2. Rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length. R. Shield Grounding 1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only unless Shop Drawings indicate the shield will be grounded at both ends. MWH—06/24/03 GROUNDING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16450-3 2. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or otherwise at the receiving end of the signal carried by the cable. 3. Termination of shield drain wire shall be on its own terminal screw. 4. Terminal screws shall be jumpered together using manufactured terminal block jumpers. 5. Connection to the ground bus shall be via a green No. 12 conductor to the main ground bus for the panel. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 GROUNDING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16450-4 SECTION 16460- ELECTRIC MOTORS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide electric motors, accessories, and appurtenances complete and operable, in conformance with the individual driven equipment specifications and the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section apply to all low voltage AC squirrel cage induction motors except as indicated otherwise. C. The CONTRACTOR shall assign to the equipment supplier the responsibility to select suitable electric motors for the equipment. The choice of motor manufacturer shall be subject to review by the ENGINEER. Such review will consider future availability of replacement parts and compatibility with driven equipment. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300-Contractor Submittals. B. Complete motor data shall be submitted with the driven machinery Shop Drawings. Motor data shall include: 1. Machine name and specification number of driven machine 2. Motor manufacturer 3. Motor type or model and dimension drawing. Include motor weight. 4. Nominal horsepower 5. NEMA Design 6. Enclosure 7. Frame Size 8. Winding insulation class and temperature rise class 9. Voltage, phase and frequency ratings 10. Service factor 11. Full load current at rated horsepower for application voltage 12. Full load speed 13. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency. Also nominal efficiencies at 1/2 and 3/4 load. 14. Type of thermal protection or overtemperature protection, if included MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16460-1 15. Wiring diagram for devices such as motor leak detection, temperature, or zero speed switches, as applicable 16. Bearing data. Include recommendation for lubricants of relubricatable type bearings. 17. If utilized with a variable frequency controller, verify motor is inverter duty type. Include minimum speed at which motor may be operated for the driven machinery. 18. Power factor at 1/2, 3/4 and full load 19. Recommended size for power factor correction capacitors to improve power factor to 0.95 (lagging) when operated at full load. C. If water cooling is required for motor thrust bearings, the Shop Drawing submittals shall indicate this requirement. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Electric motors driving identical machines shall be identical. B. Maximum motor loading shall in all cases be equal to nameplate horsepower rating or less, exclusive of service factor and be verifiable from the submittal data of the driven machinery. C. Motor Capacity 1. The CONTRACTOR shall size motors for the larger of the following criteria: 1%00" a. Size motors to continuously carry the maximum load that develops across the full range of driven equipment operation. b. Size motors for minimum size indicated 2. In all cases, motor sizes shall be derated from nameplate values as follows: a. Ambient Temperature 1) For ambient temperatures up to but not exceeding 40 degrees C, no derating is required. 2) For ambient temperatures exceeding 40 degrees but less than 50 degrees C, derate nameplate HP ratings to 85 percent. b. Site Altitude: No derating is required for altitudes less than 3300 feet (1000 meters). Higher altitudes require the following derating factors: Altitude 1.0 Service Factor 1.15 Service Factor 3300 to 9000 ft 93 percent 100 percent MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16460-2 9000 to 13,200 ft 91 percent 98 percent 3. Increased circuit breaker, magnetic starter, and conductor and conduit capacities ,.,oe required for motors larger than the indicated sizes shall be provided as part of the WORK. D. Exempt Motors: Motors for valve operators, submersible pumps, or motors which are an integral part of standard manufactured equipment, i.e., non-NEMA mounting, common shaft with driven element, or part of domestic or commercial use apparatus may be excepted from these specifications to the extent that such variation reflects a necessary condition of motor service or a requirement of the driven equipment. 2.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: Electric motors shall comply with ANSUNEMA MG-1 - Motor and Generator. Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall comply with ANSUNEMA MG-1, Part 31. B. NEMA Design: Electric motors shall be NEMA Design B, unless otherwise indicated. In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the value in ANSI/NEMA MG 1. Motors shall be suitable for the indicated starting method. C. Motor Voltage Ratings: Motors shall have voltage ratings in accordance with the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Motors below 1/2-HP shall be rated 115 volts, single-phase, 60-Hz. Dual voltage motors rated 115/230-volts, 115/208-volts, or 120-240 volts are acceptable, provided all leads are brought out to the conduit box. 2. Motors 1/2-HP and larger shall be rated 230 volts, 460 volts, or 4160 volts, 3-phase, 60-Hz. Dual voltage motors rated 230/460 volts or 208/230/460 volts are acceptable, provided all loads are brought out to the conduit box. D. Insulation: All 3-phase motors shall be provided with Class F insulation, rated to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C and at the altitudes where the motors will be installed and operated, without exceeding Class B temperature rise limits stated in ANSI/NEMA MG 1-12.44. Single phase motors shall have Class F insulation with temperature rise not to exceed the insulation class. Motors to be operated from adjustable frequency drives shall be provided with insulation systems to withstand 1600 volt spikes, with dV/dt as defined in NEMA MG 1-31. E. Motors 50 HP or smaller located in non-hazardous areas shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) with a Service Factor of 1.15 unless otherwise indicated. F. Motors 50 HP and greater located in non-hazardous areas shall be Weather-Protected Type I, with a service factor of 1.15. G. Motors larger than 50 HP installed outdoors or in unheated areas shall be provided with 120-volt AC space heaters, wired to a terminal strip in a low voltage motor junction box. H. Energy Efficiency Motors MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16460-3 1. Motors with a nameplate rating of 1 HP and larger shall be "energy efficient" units. Motors shall be stamped with the efficiency on the nameplate with the caption "NEMA Nominal Efficiency" or "NEMA Nom. Eff." Such motors shall have efficiencies determined by the test as set forth in ANSI/IEEE 112 -Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators, Method B. 2. Efficiency: Nominal efficiency and minimum efficiency shall be defined in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1-12.60 - Efficiency Levels of Energy Efficient Polyphase Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors: these 2 values shall be stated in the Shop Drawing submittal. 3. Energy Efficient motors shall conform to the following guaranteed minimum efficiency requirements which are full load values: TOTALLY ENCLOSED- FAN COOLED (TEFC) ENCLOSED MOTORS 2 POLE 4 POLE 6 POLE 8 POLE Nom. Min. Nom. Min. Nom. Min. Nom. Min. HP Effic. Effic. Effic. Effic. Effic. Effic. Effic. Effic. 1.0 75.5 72.0 82.5 80.0 80.0 77.0 74.0 70.0 1.5 82.5 80.0 84.0 81.5 85.5 82.5 77.0 74.0 2.0 84.0 81.5 84.0 81.5 86.5 84.0 82.5 80.0 3.0 85.5 82.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 84.0 81.5 5.0 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 85.5 85.5 82.5 `oe 7.5 88.5 86.5 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 85.5 82.5 10.0 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 88.5 86.5 15.0 90.2 88.5 91.0 89.5 90.2 88.5 88.5 86.5 20.0 90.2 88.5 91.0 89.5 90.2 88.5 89.5 87.5 25.0 91.0 89.5 92.4 91.0 91.7 90.2 89.5 87.5 30.0 91.0 89.5 92.4 91.0 91.7 90.2 91.0 89.5 40.0 91.7 90.2 93.0 91.7 93.0 91.7 91.0 89.5 50.0 92.4 91.0 93.0 91.7 93.0 91.7 91.7 90.2 60.0 93.0 91.7 93.6 92.4 93.6 92.4 91.7 90.2 75.0 93.0 91.7 94.1 93.0 93.6 92.4 93.0 91.7 100.0 93.6 92.4 94.5 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.0 91.7 125.0 94.5 93.6 94.5 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 92.4 150.0 94.5 93.6 95.0 94.1 95.0 94.1 93.6 92.4 MWH-06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16460-4 200.0 95.0 94.1 95.0 94.1 95.0 94.1 94.1 93.0 250.0 95.4 94.5 95.0 94.1 95.0 94.1 94.5 93.6 300.0 95.4 94.5 95.4 94.5 95.0 94.1 -- -- 350.0 95.4 94.5 95.4 94.5 95.0 94.1 -- -- 400.0 95.4 94.5 95.4 94.5 -- -- -- -- 450.0 95.4 94.5 95.4 94.5 -- -- -- -- 500.0 95.4 94.5 95.8 95.0 -- -- -- -- I. All two-speed motors shall be the two-winding types. 2.3 ACCESSORY REQUIREMENTS A. General: Horizontal motors 3 HP and larger, and all vertical motors, shall have split- type cast metal conduit boxes. Motors less than 3 HP shall have the manufacturer's standard conduit boxes. Motors other than open drip-proof shall be gasketed. B. Lifting Devices:!Motors weighing 265 lb (120 Kg) or more shall have suitable lifting eyes for installatiion and removal. C. Special Requirements: The CONTRACTOR shall refer to individual equipment specifications for special requirements such as motor winding thermal protection or multi-speed windings. D. Grounding Lugs: Provide motor grounding lug suitable to terminate ground wire, sized as indicated. E. Nameplate: Motors shall be fitted with permanent stainless steel nameplates indelibly stamped or engraved with NEMA Standard motor data, in conformance with NEMA MG- 1-10.40. F. Where motors are indicated by elementary schematics or specifications to have zero speed switches, the switches shall be factory mounted integral to the motors. Switches shall close contact when the motor is at zero speed. 2.4 MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION A. Single Phase Motors: Single phase 120, 208, or 230 volt motors shall have integral thermal overload protection or shall be inherently current limited. B. Thermostats: Winding thermostats shall be snap action, bi-metallic, temperature- actuated switch. Thermostats shall be provided with one normally closed contact. The thermostat switch point shall be precalibrated by the manufacturer. C. RTDs: Bearing RTDs and/or winding RTDs (two per phase) shall be provided where indicated. RTDs shall be 100 ohm platinum. *44=01 MWH-06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16460-5 2.5 MOTOR BEARINGS A. General: Bearings shall conform to Section 11000 - Equipment General Provisions, except as indicated herein. B. Motors greater than 2 HP shall have bearings designed for 17,500 hours (belted) or **%pool 100,000 hours (coupled) L-10 life. C. Fractional Horsepower: Motors with fractional horsepower through 2 HP shall be provided with Lubricated-for-Life ball bearings. D. Horizontal Motors Over 2 HP: Motors larger than 2 HP shall be provided with relubricatable ball bearings. Lubrication shall be per manufacturer's recommendation for smooth operation and long life of the bearings. E. Vertical Motors Over 2 HP: Vertical motors larger than 2 HP shall be provided with relubricatable ball, spherical, roller, or plate type thrust bearings. Lubrication shall be per manufacturer's recommendation for smooth operation and long life of the bearings. F. Water Cooled Motors: If water cooling is required for the thrust bearings, cooling water lines shall be provided complete with shut-off valve, strainer, solenoid valve, flow indicator, thermometer, throttling valve, and, (where subject to freezing), insulation with heat tracing. 2.6 MANUFACTURERS, OR EQUAL A. U.S. Motors B. Reliance Electric PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Motor installation shall be performed in accordance with the motor manufacturer's written recommendations and the written requirements of the manufacturer of the driven equipment. B. Related electrical work involving connections, controls, switches, and disconnects shall be performed in accordance with the applicable sections of Division 16. C. For motors utilizing power factor correction capacitors connected to the starter output terminals, the motor overload elements or trip settings shall be adjusted downwards to reflect the reduction in line current resulting from power factor correction. 3.2 FACTORY TESTING A. Motors rated 100 HP and larger shall be factory tested in conformance with ANSI/IEEE 112, IEEE 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Resistance of Rotating Machinery, and NEMA MG-2. Except where specific testing or witnessed shop tests are required by the specifications for driven equipment, factory test reports may be copies of routine test reports of electrically duplicate motors. Test report shall indicate test procedure and MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16460-6 instrumentation used to measure and record data. Test report shall be certified by the motor manufacturer's test personnel and be submitted to the ENGINEER. 3.3 FIELD TESTING A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the following field tests: 1. Inspect each motor installation for any deviation from rated voltage, phase, or frequency and improper installation. 2. Visually check for proper phase and ground connections. Verify that multi-voltage motors are connected for proper voltage. 3. Check winding and bearing temperature detectors and space heaters for functional operation. 4. Test for proper rotation prior to connection to the driven equipment. 5. Test insulation (megger test) of all new and re-used motors in accordance with NEMA MG-1. Test voltage shall be 1000 VAC plus twice the rated voltage of the motor. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC MOTORS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16460-7 SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide panelboards and general purpose dry-type transformers, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Single Manufacturer: Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals and Section 16050 - Electrical Work, General. B. Shop Drawings 1. Transformers a. Dimension drawings b. Technical certification sheets c. Drawing of conduit entry/exit locations d. Transformer ratings, including: ,%moo, 1) Voltage 2) Continuous current 3) Basic impulse level for equipment over 600 volts 4) Kva e. Descriptive bulletins f. Product sheets 2. Panelboards a. Breaker layout drawings with dimensions and nameplate designations b. Component list c. Drawings of conduit entry/exit locations d. Assembly ratings including: 1) Short circuit rating 2) Voltage 3) Continuous current e. Cable terminal sizes f. Descriptive bulletins g. Product sheets h. Installation information i. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details MWH—06/24/03 PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TRANSFORMERS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16470-1 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Transformers 1. The transformers shall be dry-type, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of ANSI and NEMA. 2. Transformers shall be UL-listed and bear the UL label. B. Panelboards 1. Panelboards shall be dead front factory assembled. Panelboards shall comply with NEMA PB-1-Panelboards, as well as the provisions of UL 50 - Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment and UL 67 - Safety Panelboards. Panelboards used for service equipment shall be UL labeled for such use. Lighting panelboards shall be rated for 120/208-volt, 3-phase operation or 120/240-volt for single phase operation as- indicated. Power panelboards shall be rated for 480 volts, 3-phase, 3-wire operation. 2. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers. 2.2 TRANSFORMERS A. Ratings 1. KVA and voltage ratings shall be as indicated. 2. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformers 3. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self-cooled ratings: Up to 9 kVA 40 db 10to50 kVA 45 db 51to150 kVA 50 db B. Construction 1. Insulation Systems a. Transformers shall be insulated as follows: 1) 2 kVA and below: 150 degrees C insulation system based upon 80 degree C rise. MWH—06/24/03 PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TRANSFORMERS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16470-2 2) 3, to 15 kVA: 185 degrees C insulation system based upon 115 degree C rise.15 kVA and above: 220 degrees C insulation system based upon 150 degree C rise. *ftwoll b. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 degrees C maximum ambient. c. All insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM D 635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 2. Transformer windings shall be copper. 3. Transformers shall have four 2-1/2 percent taps, two above and two below 480 volts. C. Manufacturers: Transformers shall be floor or wall-mounted type by General Electric, Cutler-Hammer, Square D, or equal. 2.3 PANELBOARDS A. Ratings 1. Panelboards rated 240 VAC or less shall have short circuit ratings not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or as indicated by the Short Circuit Study, whichever is greater. 2. Panelboards rated 480 VAC shall have short circuit ratings not less than 25,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or as indicated by the Short Circuit Study, whichever is �..� greater. 3. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. Series ratings are not acceptable. B. Construction 1. All lighting and power distribution panels shall have copper busbars. 2. Breakers shall be one, two, or three pole as indicated, with ampere trip ratings as required by the equipment. Breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break, inverse time trip characteristics, to trip free on overload or short circuit, and to indicate trip condition by the handle position. 3. The panels shall have hinged doors with combination catch and latch. The front panels shall be so arranged that when the plates are removed, the gutters, terminals and wiring will be exposed and accessible. The doors shall have inner doors within the plates to have only the breaker operating mechanism exposed when they are opened. Live conductors and terminals shall be concealed behind the plates. 4. All panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage. 5. All circuit breakers shall be interchangeable and capable of being operated in any position as well as being removable from the front of the panelboard without disturbing adjacent units. No plug-in circuit breakers will be acceptable. ...� MWH—06/24/03 PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TRANSFORMERS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16470-3 6. Lighting and power distribution panels which are not part of a motor control center shall be constructed in accordance with Section 16050. Panels shall have the necessary barriers, supports, and liberal wiring gutters. Trim screws shall be stainless steel. All panelboard parts of metal other than copper, aluminum, or stainless steel shall be cadmium plated. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric or Cutler-Hammer. 7. Panelboards shall be UL listed except for special enclosures which are not available with UL listing. 8. Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service entrance as indicated or as otherwise required by the N.E.C. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All WORK of this Section shall be installed as indicated in Section 16050. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE CITY OF FORT WORTH TRANSFORMERS MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16470-4 SECTION 16482 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide medium voltage motor control centers, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 16050 - Electrical Work, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards ANSI C37.20 Switchgear Assemblies Including Metal Enclosed Bus ANSI C37.90 Relays Associated with Electrical Power Apparatus ANSI C57.13 Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers ANSI Z55.1 Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment NEMA ICS Industrial Controls and Systems NEMA ICS-109 Tests and Test Procedures NEMA ICS2 Manual and Magnetic Controller NEMA ICS2-324 Class E Controllers NEMA FU-1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses NEMA SG2 High Voltage Fuses UL-347 Control Equipment 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 16050 and the additional requirements herein. Submittals shall include the following items: 1. Characteristics and settings of relays, fuses, and overcurrent trip devices. 2. Relay coordination curves. 3. Ratings and characteristics of each type of current transformers, including ratio, magnetization phase angle, and core loss curves; burden designation, and accuracy class; thermal ratings and alike. MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16482-1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: All materials shall be tested and inspected in accordance with Section 16050 and the following requirements. B. Type and/or Design Tests: Type and/or design test reports from tests conducted on identical units to those provided hereunder shall be submitted. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certification to qualify and verify that the equipment meets the requirements of the type and/or design test reports, and that these reports are fully applicable to equipment hereunder. C. Factory Tests 1. The motor control centers and components shall be given manufacturer's standard electrical and mechanical production tests and inspections with complete test reports submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. These tests shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements of IEEE, NEMA, UL, and ANSI Standards. The results of tests shall verify that the complete motor control centers with their components comply with all performance requirements indicated. 2. As a minimum, motor control centers and components shall be subjected to the following tests: a. All motor control centers shall be tested in accordance with NEMA ICS-2. b. Production dielectric tests on motor control center assemblies shall be made at the power frequency in accordance with NEMA ICSI-109. c. Motor control center performance tests shall meet the requirements of NEMA ICS 2-324. d. Mechanical operation tests shall demonstrate proper functioning of components and the interchangeability of all identical components and plug-in modules within and between motor control centers. e. Each motor control center shall be given factory standard inspection and tests which shall include electrical continuity check, dielectric tests for each circuit, and inspection for proper functioning of all components, including control protective, monitoring, metering, and alarm devices. f. All system components shall be tested in accordance with the procedures and requirements of the following standards; NEMA SG-2, NEMA FU-1, NEMA ICS- 2, and ANSI-C37.20. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for a technical representative of the equipment manufacturer to be present during installation, testing, and startup of the equipment, and to instruct personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16482-2 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS ... A. The medium voltage motor control centers shall be energized from a 3-phase, 4-wire, 4160/2400-volt nominal, 60-Hz, solidly grounded system and shall be used for control of induction motors. B. The main circuit breaker and transition sections shall be designed and supplied in accordance with Section 16301 Medium Voltage Switchgear. C. The complete lineup, including motor control center and switchgear, shall be furnished as a single unit by the motor control center manufacturer, with one set of drawings as a single submittal. Individual submittals will not be acceptable. 2.2 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: The motor control center assemblies shall be guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at system voltages of 4.16 kV nominal. 1. The medium voltage motor control center shall be factory assembled and tested. The components of assembled units shall be UL listed and have a UL label. 2. MCC and individual components thereof shall be designed to perform at full nameplate rating at the environmental conditions in this project. 3. Medium voltage motor controllers shall be designed, manufactured, and assembled in accordance with NEMA ICS2-7-324 and UL Standard No. 347 requirements with 60 kV BIL rating and having an interrupting fault capacity of 400,000 kVA at the ,%..i rated system voltage. 4. Motor starters shall be full-voltage or reduced voltage, as indicated on the Drawings, non-reversing type motor starters for 3-phase, 60-Hz, induction motors. 5. MCC shall be of the free-standing, metal enclosed type with NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure. Each side of the line-up shall have provisions for future additions of vertical sections. Each compartment shall have complete front accessibility to all parts for easy installation and maintenance. 6. All vertical sections shall form a continuous line-up and contain a set of insulated tin plated copper power buses and a full-length tin-plated copper ground bus. Bus connections shall be tin-plated and fully insulated. 7. The line-up shall have a full-length tin-plated copper ground bus. The ground bus shall be provided with 1 bolt-type cable clamp (adjustable between No. 4/0 AWG and 500 MCM) at each end of the bus. 8. The line-up shall have a set of horizontal bus, and all buses shall be isolated from any power and control cables by means of suitable barriers. Buses shall be braced to withstand damage from the forces generated by the maximum available instantaneous short circuit currents. 9. All contactors shall be equipped with spare normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts, suitable for 115 volts ac, 10 amperes. In addition to the auxiliary MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16482-3 contacts, each contactor shall be equipped with a normally open seal-in and a normally closed auxiliary contact for motor space heaters. 10. All low voltage control equipment shall be mounted in a separate compartment, isolated from any high-voltage parts. All relays and meters shall be switchboard type, semiflush-mounted on the door. Control wiring shall be stranded-copper 1%=011 conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. 11. MCC shall be equipped with 120-volt space heaters in each vertical section. The heaters shall be completely wired and interconnected between cubicles for connections to a single feeder. The space heaters shall be thermostatically controlled in the motor control center. 12. Where indicated, a flanged throat connection or a transition section shall be provided and matched with the switchgear, etc., as shown, for bus-duct connection. Interfacing and coordination of this connection shall be the responsibility of the motor control center manufacturer. 13. MCC shall be furnished with standard tools, accessories, and a portable contactor lift. 14. Identification of wiring shall be provided using manufacturer's standard identification system. The identification shall be protected by the application of clear heat shrink protective sleeves. Use of the wire identification system shall be included in the data submitted. Individual wire identification shall be included on wiring diagrams and schematics submitted as data. 15. Motor Starter Assembly: The contactor and power fuses shall form a single drawout assembly. Each cubicle shall include a NEMA Class E2 fused contactor and shall be provided with all devices shown in addition to including the following: a. A 3-pole gang-operated line isolating switch with position indicators or a drawout isolating means. b. A mechanical interlock system to prevent opening the high voltage compartment until the cubicle is deenergized and to prevent energizing the contactor until the high voltage compartment and disconnect device are closed. c. A 3-pole, drawout-type, magnetic, vacuum contactor, rated 400A, 60 kV BIL with DC operating coil. Contactors shall meet the requirements of UL 347 Standards. d. Three high-voltage current limiting fast-acting power fuses mounted on the drawout carriage suitable for the load indicated. Power fuses shall conform to NEMA SG2 and be equipped with blown-fuse indicator. e. A control power transformer with a set of primary and one secondary fuses and disconnecting devices; one side of secondary winding shall be grounded. f. Automatic shutters to cover high-voltage parts when contactor is disengaged. g. Run-Test circuit. MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL `WI CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16482-4 16. All power cable terminations, lugs, stress-cones, etc., necessary for the cables as specified on the data sheets. 17. Add-on-type terminal blocks for all outgoing control wires. 18. Controls and Protection: Necessary instrument transformers, controls, and relays for motor protection and metering systems as indicated. The characteristics of protective devices, (fuses, relays, etc.) shall be fully coordinated with the characteristics of the motors to provide motor protection from overloads to maximum faults. 19. Motor protection shall be solid state. 20. Solid state motor protection module shall be G.E. Multilin 469, no equal. 21. Fuse failure protection device to give protection against single phasing, operator or a motor feeder circuit malfunction. Protection device design shall be similar to striker pins (included in the fuses) functioning in conjunction with a 3-phase trip device. When a fuse is blown, the striker pin is ejected, opening the contactor via the 3-phase;trip bar switch and indicator. 22. A flag type position indicator for the current limiting fuses and contactor to indicate that they are tripped or opened. 23. Control power transformer, single phase, 3 kVA minimum, 25 KV BIL with terminals for external test control power connections. 24. Medium voltage starters shall be similar to Cutler-Hammer Ampgard, GE Limitamp, Square D Iso-Flex, or equal. 2.3 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS A. CONTRACTOR shall provide instrument transformers that meet the following: 1. Current transformers shall be dry type, insulated for equipment voltage in accordance with ANSI Standards for Apparatus having "Normal Standard Insulation." Current transformers ratio shall be as shown or as required. Current transformers shall have the mechanical and electrical ratings to withstand short circuit current, stresses, and heating effect equal to equipment in which they are installed. Transformers shall have the polarity identified, shall be capable of carrying rated current continuously and have ample capacity for connected burden. 2. Potential Transformer; Potential transformer shall be dry type, single-phase, 60-Hz, having an accuracy classification as determined under the latest ANSI Standard of this type of equipment. Transformer shall have an adequate capacity for the burden imposed and shall provide protection with current limiting fuses. B. Maintenance: If trouble develops in the protection module, malfunction shall be displayed on operator panel. Maintenance requirement shall be replacing the processor module or associated printed circuit board. C. Spare Part: CONTRACTOR shall furnish minimum one each plug-in module as spare replacement part. MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16482-5 2.4 CONTROL DEVICES A. It is the intention of this Specification that products of the same type shall be from a single manufacturer. This requirement applies to all control devices and, insofar as practical, to equipment manufactured on a production basis. It also applies without exception to equipment custom fabricated for this project. **MOO, 1. Selector Switches: Selector switches shall be rated 10-amperes at 600 volts, shall be heavy-duty, oil-tight, 30 mm, and shall have the number of positions and poles indicated. Switches shall be General Electric Type CR2940U, Square D Class 9001 Type T, or equal. Each shall have a factory-engraved legend plate indicated. 2. Indicating Lights: Indicating lights shall be full voltage, push-to-test type, and shall be heavy-duty, oil-tight, 30 mm specified above for selector switches. Each shall be nickel-plated with a screwed-on glass prismatic lens approximately 1-inch in diameter. Lamps shall be 145 volt clear, General Electric, Sylvania No. 656, or equal. 3. Control relays: 300 volt, industrial rated, plug-in socket type, housed in a transparent polycarbonate dust cover, designed in accordance with UL Standard 508 for motor controller duty. Continuous contact rating shall be 10 amperes resistive, '/a HP, at 120 VAC, operating temperature minus 10 to plus 55 degrees C. Provide spare N.O. & N.C. contacts. Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield KRP Series or equal with neon coil indicator light. 4. Timing Relays: Timing relays shall be 300 volt, solid state type, with rotary switch toselect the timing range. Timers shall be Square D type JCK70, or approved equal. 5. Elapsed Time Meter: Elapsed time meter (ET) shall be non-reset type; shall register hours and tenths of an hour; shall have flush panel-mount case not less than 3 inches square; shall be suitable for operation at 120-volts, 60-Hertz, ac; and shall be General Electric Type KT, Eagle Bulletin 705 Type HK, or equal. 6. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be molded type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts. Crimped eyelets or approved equal shall be used on all stranded control wire wherever wires are terminated on screw terminals. White or other light-colored marking strips, fastened by screws to the molded sections at each block, shall be provided for circuit designation. Each connected terminal of each block shall have the circuit designation or wire number imprinted on the marking strip with permanent marking fluid. Terminal blocks for "foreign" circuits shall be pull-apart type. 2.5 ENCLOSURE A. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type 1 gasketed, for indoor type. 2.6 SURFACE PREPARATION, PAINTING AND CLEANLINESS A. In addition to the requirements of Section 16050, the following shall apply. B. Cleanliness of the equipment furnished shall be such that it is smooth and free of all foreign matter such as scales, sand, blisters, weld splatters, metal chips and shavings, oil, grease, organic matter, and rust. MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL �. CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16482-6 C. All metal enclosures shall be chemically cleaned and treated in a process which provides a phosphate coating, then primed and finished with a corrosion resistant enamel paint. 1. Interior surfaces shall be finish painted matte white. 2. Exterior surfaces shall be finish painted with light gray ANSI 61 finish coat, in accordance with the manufacturers standard practice for the environmental conditions indicated. 3. The manufacturer shall supply paint, matching each color used, for field "touch-up" after installation of the equipment. Two one-pint aerosol spray cans of each color shall be supplied per assembly. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The motor control centers shall be installed as indicated and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Detailed Requirements 1. The CONTRACTOR shall receive, store, and assemble all separately-shipped sections of MCC's to form complete units. The CONTRACTOR shall make all internal wiring interconnections and all horizontal bus connections at shipping joints as required for complete assembly of each MCC. All bolted connections between sections of current-carrying bus shall be tightened down to torque values recommended by the manufacturer, using a torque wrench. Where wiring connectors are not supplied by the manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the connectors required to complete internal wiring terminations. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions to eliminate moisture and foreign material from the equipment at all times during storage and installation. Special care shall be taken to prevent corrosion of silver-plated or tin-plated contact surfaces and damages to relays and control devices. 3. Each MCC shall be set level and plumb on its floor channels and be grouted in as indicated. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all shims necessary to accomplish these requirements. After MCC's have' been installed, the CONTRACTOR shall touch up any painted surfaces that were scratched or otherwise marred during shipping, storage, or installation. C. Field Tests: Field tests shall be performed in accordance with Section 16950 - Electrical Tests. - END OF SECTION - Iftwoe MWH—06/24/03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16482-7 SECTION 16485— LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide complete local control stations as indicated herein or in other Sections of the Specifications. The stations shall be designed to provide the sequence of operation in Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems and the P&ID Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Local control panels shall comply with the requirements of NEC, NEMA, and UL. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Shop Drawings in accordance with Sections 01300 - Contractor Submittals and 16050 - Electrical Work, General. 1. Ladder diagrams and written descriptions explaining ladder diagram operation and system operation. 2. Include catalog cuts of all control equipment including enclosures, overcurrent .devices, relays, pilot devices, terminations, and wire troughs. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS *#..o" 2.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the stations to satisfy the functional requirements in the relevant mechanical equipment and Instrumentation & Control specifications and the Electrical Elementary Schematics. Each station shall be fabricated,with UL labelled components. Stations not specifically indicated as being WORK of other Sections shall be provided under this Section. All stations shall be wired under this Section. B. The controls shall be 120 V maximum. Where the electrical power supply is 240 V, single phase or 480 V, 3-phase, the station shall be provided with a fused control power transformer. Control conductors shall be provided in accordance with Section 16050. C. Each station shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the connection of external conductors. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient terminal blocks to connect 25 percent additional conductors for future use. Termination points shall be identified in accordance with Shop Drawings. The stations shall be the source of power for all 120 vAC solenoid valves interconnected with the stations. All equipment associated with the stations shall be ready for service after connection of conductors to equipment, controls, and stations. D. Wiring to door-mounted devices shall be extra flexible and anchored to doors using wire anchors cemented in place. Exposed terminals of door-mounted devices shall be guarded to prevent accidental personnel contact with energized terminals. MWH—06/24/03 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS AND CITY OF FORT WORTH MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16485-1 E. Enclosures 1. In finished rooms, enclosures shall be NEMA 12 steel enclosures painted with ANSI 61 exterior and white interior. 2. In all other non-hazardous areas, enclosures shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel (prior to modifications) with brushed finish. Where possible, penetrations shall be made in such a manner to maintain the NEMA 4X rating. If this is not possible, the penetrations shall be made in such a manner to minimize entry of foreign materials into the enclosure. 3. Enclosures shall be freestanding, pedestal-mounted, or equipment skid-mounted, as indicated. Internal control components shall be mounted on a removable mounting pan. Mounting pan shall be finished white. 4. Outdoor mounted enclosures shall be provided with thermostatically-controlled heaters. 5. Provide screened weep holes for draining condensation. F. Disconnect Switches 1. Heavy duty, non-fusible, single throw 2. Horsepower rated 3. UL listed 4. Padlockable in "Off" position and door interlock 5. Enclosure per area classification in Section 16050. 6. 408 V, 3 phase, 3-pole (6-pole when used with 2-speed motor). 7. Auxiliary control contact as applicable and as indicated. 8. As manufactured by G.E., Cutler-Hammer, or Square D. G. Identification of panel-mounted devices, conductors, and electrical components shall be in accordance with Section 16050. H. Panel-mounted devices shall be mounted a minimum of 3 feet above finished floor elevation. 2.2 STATION COMPONENTS A. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be the heavy-duty, oil-tight type, sized to 30 mm. Miniature style devices are not acceptable. Devices shall be as manufactured by G.E., Cutler-Hammer, or equal. 1. Lens colors shall be red for "run," "open," or"on"; green for "stopped," "closed," or "off"; and amber for alarm. MWH—06/24/03 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS AND CITY OF FORT WORTH MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16485-2 2. Pilot lights shall be low voltage, transformer, push-to-test type. B. Relays shall be 3 PDT with 10 amp contacts, plug-in type utilizing rectangular blades and provided with sockets for screw-type termination and hold-down clips. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square D, Potter Brumfield, or equal. C. Elapsed time meters shall be non-resettable type, read to a maximum of 99999.9 hours and shall be as manufactured by G.E., Cutler-Hammer, or equal. D. Magnetic starters shall be: 1. NEMA rated. I IEC or dual NEMA/IEC rated type are not acceptable. 2. FVNR type unless indicated otherwise. 3. Combination starters with magnetic only instantaneous trip circuit breakers such as Cutler-Hammer "MCP," G.E., "Mag-Break," or equal. 4. Control transformers shall be provided with primary and secondary fuses, 120 V maximum control voltage. E. Terminal strips shall be provided for all panels and shall be the flanged fork or ring lug type suitable for No. 12 AWG stranded wire minimum. Provide 25 percent spare terminals in each panel. F. Current-to-current converter/isolators shall be 4 - 20 mA input, 4 - 20 mA output for operation from 120 V power, and shall be by Moore, A.G.M., or equal. G. Process alarm relays shall have a 4 - 20 mA input and 2 independent SPST contact s.i outputs as manufactured by A.G.M., or equal. Power input shall be 120 V. H. Digital indicators shall have 4 - 20 mA input and shall display the signal in process units. Zero to 100 percent as a displayed signal shall only be acceptable to indicate speed. Indicators shall be as manufactured by Newport, Red Lion, or equal, for operation from 120 V. Provide splash-proof covers in NEMA 4X panels, and viewing windows in NEMA 7 panels. I. Time delay relays shall be combination on delay and off delay (selectable) with adjustable timing ranges. Provide socket with screw terminal connections and retaining strap. Time delay relays shall be Square D JCK70 or similar by ATC. 2.3 FACTORY TESTING A. Each LCS shall be factory assembled and tested for sequence of operation prior to delivery. 2.4 SPARE PARTS A. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare lamps (minimum 2) and one spare lens for each color pilot lamp in each panel. ~ MWH—06/24/03 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS AND CITY OF FORT WORTH MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16485-3 PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Stations shall be installed in accordance with in Section 16050 and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Stations shall be protected at the Site from loss, damage, and the effects of weather. Stations shall be stored in an indoor, dry location. Heating shall be provided in areas subject to corrosion and humidity. C. Station interiors and exteriors shall be cleaned, and coatings shall be touched up to match original finish upon completion of the WORK. D. Conduit, conductors, and terminations shall be installed in accordance with Section 16050. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Each station shall be tested again for functional operation in the field after the connection of external conductors and prior to equipment startup. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS AND CITY OF FORT WORTH MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16485-4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide lighting fixtures, and accessories, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes NFPA 70 National Electric Code NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL—924 Standard for Safety Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment ANSI C82.1 Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts ANSI C84.4 Specifications for High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple SupplyType) �..i Standards of the Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following product information in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. 1. Interior luminaires a. Catalog data sheets and pictures. b. Luminaire finish and metal gauge. c. Lens material, pattern, and thickness. d. Candle power distribution curves in two or more planes. e. Candle power chart 0 to 90 degrees. f. Lumen output chart. g. Average maximum brightness data in foot lamberts. h. Coefficients of utilization for zonal cavity calculations. ,%Mop, MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-1 i. Mounting or suspension details. j. Heat exchange and air handling data. 2. Exterior luminaires a. Catalog data sheets and pictures. b. Luminaire finish and metal gauge. c. Lens material, pattern, and thickness. d. IES lighting classification and isolux diagram. e. Fastening details to wall or pole. f. Ballast type, location, and method of fastening. g. For light poles, submit wind loading, complete dimensions, and finish. 3. Lamps a. Voltages. b. Colors. c. Approximate life (in hours). d. Approximate initial lumens. e. Lumen maintenance curve. --- f. Lamp type and base. 4. Ballasts a. Type. b. Wiring diagram c. Nominal watts and input watts. d. Input voltage and power factor. e. Starting current, line current, and restrike current values. f. Sound rating. g. Temperature rating. h. Efficiency ratings. i. Low temperature characteristics. MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-2 j. Emergency ballasts rating and capacity data. 5. Photocells a. Voltage and power consumption. b. Capacity. c. Contacts and time delay. d. Operating levels. e. Enclosure type and dimensions. f. Temperature range. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Specific requirements relative to execution of WORK of this section are located in the Luminaire Schedule on Drawings. B. Feed-through type or separate junction box. C. Ballasts: Two-lamp when possible. D. Tandem wired for three-lamp fluorescent fixtures. E. Wire Leads: Minimum 18 AWG. F. Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire from ceiling. G. Soffit Installations 1. UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR DAMP LOCATIONS. 2. Ballast: Removable, prewired. H. Exterior Installations 1. UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS. 2. Ballast: Removable, prewired. 3. When factory-installed photocells are provided, entire assembly shall have UL label. I. Marine Environments 1. UL Labeled: MARINE, OUTSIDE TYPE. 2. Housing: Copper-free, aluminum in accordance with UL - 595. -amp-, MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-3 J. Emergency Lighting 1. As shown on the Drawings. K. Exit Signs 1. As shown on the Drawings. 2.2 LAMPS A. Fluorescent 1. As shown on the Drawings. B. High Intensity Discharge 1. As shown on the Drawings. C. Incandescent 1. As shown on the Drawings. D. Tungsten Halogen 1. As shown on the Drawings. 2.3 BALLASTS A. General 1. UL Listed, ETL certified. 2. High power factor, energy efficient type. 3. Meeting requirements for fixture light output, reliable starting, radio interference, total harmonic distortion, electromagnetic interference, and dielectric rating. B. Fluorescent 1. As shown on the Drawings. C. Metal Halide 1. As shown on the Drawings. D. High Pressure Sodium 1. As shown on the Drawings. 2.4 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Time Switch MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-4 1. As shown on the Drawings. B. Photo Cell 1. Automatic ON/OFF switch photo control. 2. Housing: Self contained, die cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture, vibration, or temperature changes. 3. Setting: ON at dusk at OFF at dawn. 4. Time delay feature to prevent false switching 5. Field adjustable to control operating levels. 6. Manufacturers, or equal a. Tork. b. Paragon. 2.5 POLES A. Rating (with Luminaire): 100 mph steady winds, without incurred damage. B. Material: As shown on the Drawings. PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRES A. General 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide necessary hangers, pendants, and canopies. 3. Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural reinforcements to building, and to concrete pole bases, required to safely mount. 4. Install plumb and level. 5. Mounting heights indicated for wall mounted or pendant mounted luminaires are measured from bottom of luminaire to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable. 6. Install each luminaire outlet box with galvanized stud. B. Pendant Mounted MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-5 1. Provide swivel type hangers and canopies to match luminaires, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space single stem hangers on continuous row florescent luminaires normally 48 inches apart. 3. Provide twin stem hangers on single luminaires. C. Pole Mounted 1. Provide cast-in-place concrete base. 2. Provide branch circuit in line fuses in pole base handhole. 3. Pole base to be installed flush with finished grade where located in grassy areas not subject to vehicular traffic and 30-inches above finished grade when the pole is located in areas subject to damage from vehicular traffic. 4. Fixture poles shall be set on anchor bolts and secured with double nuts on each bolt. After fixture has been leveled and plumbed, the fixture base shall be dry- packed with grout. D. Finished Areas 1. Install symmetrically with the pattern. 2. Locate with centerlines whether on centerline of tile or on joint between adjacent tile runs. 3. Install recessed luminaires tight to finished surface such that no spill light will show between ceilings and sealing rings. 4. Combustible low density cellulose fiberboard: Provide spacers and mount luminaires 1-1/2 inches from ceiling surface, or use fixtures suitable for mounting on low density ceilings. 5. Junction Boxes a. Flush and recessed luminaires: Locate minimum 1 foot from luminaire. b. In concealed locations, install junction boxes to be accessible by removing luminaire. 6. Wiring and Conduit a. Provide wiring of temperature rating required by luminaire. b. Provide flexible steel conduit. 7. Provide plaster frames when required by ceiling construction. 8. Independent Supports MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-6 a. Provide each recessed fluorescent luminaire with 2 safety chains or 2 No. 12 soft annealed galvanized steel wires of length needed to secure luminaire to building structure independent of ceiling structure. ,%Noo, b. Tensile strength of chain or wire, and method of fastening to structure shall be adequate to support weight of luminaire. c. Fasten chain or wire to each end of luminaire. E. Unfinished Areas: Locate luminaires to avoid both conflict with other building systems and blockage of luminaire light output. 1. Fixture Suspension: Provide 3/8-inch threaded steel hanger rods. Scissor type hangers not permitted. 2. Attachment to Steel Beams: Provide flanged beam clips and straight or angled hangers. 3.2 LAMPS A. Provide in each fixture, the number and type for which the fixture is designed, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 BALLASTS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Utilize all ballast mounting holes to fasten securely within luminaire. C. Replace noisy or defective ballasts. 3.4 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Outdoor Luminaires: As shown on the Drawings. B. Dimming Systenns 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Do not connect ballasts or equipment to dimming system unless acceptable to dimming system manufacturer. 3.5 CLEANING FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION A. Remove all labels and other markings, except UL listing mark. B. Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust. C. Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only. D. Touch up all painted surfaces of luminaires and poles with matching paint ordered from manufacturer. MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-7 E. Replace all defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16500-8 SECTION 16670— LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 --GENERAL 1%... 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR, through a qualified Subcontractor, shall design and provide a lightning protection system, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The lightning protection Subcontractor shall be certified by the Lightning Protection Institute (LPI), for both design and installation of the lightning protection system. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems NFPA 70 National Electric Code UL 96A Lightning Protection Components LPI-175 Lightning Protection Institute Installation Code 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Shop Drawings in accordance with Sections 01300 - Contractor Submittals and 16050— Electrical Work, General. 1. Products: Manufacturer's catalog data, for all materials. 2. Drawings: Scaled drawing of the facility showing the lightning protection system. The drawing shall show at a minimum, the location of air terminals, the routing of conductors and connections to the electrical grounding system and ground rods. Details of air terminal mounting and bonding to vents, chimneys, antennas, or other metallic structures shall be included. 3. Cross reference materials used with manufacturer's catalog numbers and cuts. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All products shall be UL listed for use in lightning protection systems. All products shall be Class I for structures not greater than 75 feet high and Class II for structures higher than 75 feet. Air terminals for aluminum roofs or structures shall be aluminum. B. Air Terminals 1. Air terminals shall project a minimum of 10-inches above the objects protected and shall be located at intervals not exceeding 20-feet along ridges and around the MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16670-1 perimeter of flat roof or gently sloping roofs. Flat or gently sloping roofs exceeding 50-feet in width shall be provided with additional air terminals at intervals not exceeding 50-feet on the flat or gently sloping area. Air terminals shall be located within 24-inches of the roof edge and outside corners of the protected area. 2. Air terminals shall be provided for metal stacks, flues, and mechanical equipment having a metal thickness of less than 3/16-inch and not within a zone of protection of an air terminal. Equipment with metal thickness 3/16-inch or greater shall be bonded per code requirement. 3. Air terminals shall be No. A71, 1/2-inch by 12-inches (or longer as required) solid aluminum using air terminal bases of cast aluminum construction for aluminum roofs. 4. Air terminals shall be No. 71, 1/2-inch by 12-inches (or longer as required) solid copper using air terminal bases of cast bronze construction for non-aluminum roofs. C. Conductors 1. Structures less than 75-feet a. With aluminum roofs 1) Main size conductors on the roof shall be No. A28, Class I aluminum lightning conductor consisting of 28 strands of 14 AWG aluminum wire weighing 115 lbs. per 1000 feet. 2) All secondary bonding conductors shall be No. A10, secondary bonding conductor consisting of 10 strands of 14 AWG aluminum wire. 3) All down conductors shall be No. 19, Class I copper lightning conductor. Down conductors shall be concealed in exterior wall construction. Bimetallic connectors shall be used for the transition from aluminum roof conductors to copper down conductors. 4) Buildings over 60-feet require a conductor counterpoise cable of 29/17 copper to meet NFPA code requirements. b. With non-aluminum roofs 1) Main size conductors on the roof shall be No. 29, Class I copper lightning conductor consisting of 29 strands of 17 AWG copper wire weighing 190 lbs. per 1000 feet. 2) All secondary bonding conductors shall be No. 14, secondary bonding conductor consisting of 14 strands of 17 AWG copper wire. 3) All down conductors shall be No. 29, Class I copper lightning conductor. Down conductors shall be concealed in exterior wall construction. 4) Buildings over 60-feet require a conductor counterpoise cable of 29/17 copper to meet NFPA code requirements. MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16670-2 D. Miscellaneous Hardware: All miscellaneous hardware required for the installation of the lightning protection system shall be provided. The hardware shall be compatible with the air terminal and conductor materials provided. Nuts, bolts, and other fasteners shall be stainless steel. E. Corrosion Protection: Corrosion protection shall be provided at the junctions of dissimilar metals and at all other locations where the components of the lighting protection system may be subjected to corrosion. Bimetallic connectors and fittings shall be used for splicing and bonding dissimilar metals. Bimetallic connectors shall be not less than 18 inches above grade. Copper components within 24 inches of a chimney or vent emitting corrosive gases shall be protected by a hot dipped lead coating or by other approved method. F. Grounding Materials: Ground rods and ground conductors shall conform to the requirements of Section 16450 — Grounding. Down conductors shall be connected to the ground rods using exothermic weld connections. G. Structural Steel System: Structural steel may be substituted for down conductors. Ground main steel columns and average of 60-feet using Class II material. Roof penetrations from steel to perimeter cables shall be at intervals not exceeding 100 feet per UL 96A, LPI 175, and NFPA 780. Use exothermic weld to all steel connections. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The lightning protection system shall be installed in accordance with all applicable code requirements by a Subcontractor certified in the following organizations: 1. NFPA 2. LPI 3. UL B. Roof Penetration: All roof penetrations shall be made using a conduit sleeve passing through a pitch pocket. The CONTRACTOR shall construct the pitch pockets in such a way to maintain the roofing warranty. C. Bends in conductors shall be gradual with a radius of 8-inches or greater, forming an angle of at least 90 degrees. D. Interconnection of Metals 1. All metal bodies within 6-feet of the conductor shall be bonded to the system with approved fittings and conductor. a. Bonding of all metallic objects and systems at roof levels and elsewhere on the structure shall be complete. Primary bonds for metal bodies of conductance shall be bonded with appropriate fittings and full-size conductor; and shall consist of at least the following; roof exhaust fans, HVAC units with related piping ductwork, exhaust vents and any other roof piping systems, cooling MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16670-3 towers, and rails system, window washing tracks, antenna mast for TV, radio or microwave, flag poles, roof handrails and/or decorative screens, roof ladders, skylights, metal plumbing stacks, etc. Exterior architectural metal fascia and/or curtain walls or mullions which extend the full height of the structure shall also be bonded, if not inherently bonded through the building frame. b. Metal bodies of inductance located within 6-feet of a conductor or object with secondary bonds shall be bonded with secondary cable and fittings. Typical of these are: roof flashings, parapet coping cops, gravel guards, isolated metal building panels or siding, roof drains, down spouts, roof insulation vents, and any other sizeable miscellaneous metals, etc. E. Inspection and Acceptance 1. The lightning protection system shall be inspected, tested, and certified. The CONTRACTOR shall retain the services of an independent inspector. An LPI/UL certificate of inspection shall be furnished to the ENGINEER. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16670-4 SECTION 16850— ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide electric heat tracing systems for pipes, valves, fittings, and appurtenances subject to freezing, as shown and required for trouble-free operation, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all WORK herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the referenced documents to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section; provided, that for Building Codes, the latest edition of the codes, as adopted as of the date of award by the agency having jurisdiction, shall apply to the WORK. 1. Commercial Standards ISA-S 5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete Shop Drawings of all heat tracing systems, showing the location of thermostats and interphasing with electric power supply, in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Manufacturer's Data: With the Shop Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall also furnish complete manufacturer's data of the electric heating cables and the thermostats. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All pipes, valves, equipment and appurtenances shall be provided with heat tracing where shown; or, where not shown, heat tracing shall be provided in all cases where such items could be endangered by freezing. Such heat tracing shall consist of spiral wrapping with electrical heating cables as recommended by manufacturer and subsequent insulation with fiber glass sections, sealed and weatherproofed as specified in Section 15145 - Pipe and Equipment Insulation. The heating cables shall be controlled from thermostats installed in representative locations and accessible for adjustment. The heat tracing systems shall be installed complete, including heating elements, power connections, end seals, and controlling thermostats in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Heating Cable: The electrical heat tracing system shall consist of a flat, flexible, low heat density, electrical heating strip of parallel construction, consisting of a continuous inner core of conductive material between two parallel copper bus strips. The electrical MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16850-1 insulation of the heater strip shall be polyester and rated for 140 degrees F temperature, and its width shall be a minimum of 1/2-inch. It shall be suitable for operation on 120 volts. B. Thermostats: A thermostat with a range of 40 degrees to 120 degrees F shall be provided for each heated pipe. It shall be double-pole, single-throw and mounted in a weatherproof NEMA Type 4 enclosure. The capillary bulb shall be mounted on the pipe under the insulation. Heating strips for pipes over 2-inches in size shall be rated at 8 watts per foot; for pipes 2-inches and smaller they shall be rated at 4 watts per foot. C. Manufacturers: Electric heat tracing systems and components shall be as manufactured by the following, or equal: 1. Briscoe Manufacturing Co. 2. Chromalox (Emerson Electric Co.) 3. Nelson Electric (A Unit of General Signal) 4. Raychem Corporation 5. Thermon Manufacturing Company 6. For thermostats: Honeywell, Chromalox PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall assemble and install equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions, under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative, under the general review of the ENGINEER. All installations shall be accomplished by competent craftsmen in a workmanlike manner. All heating strips shall be cut in the field and wrapped on the pipelines as required. B. Contractor Coordination: The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the installation with the electrical work, to ascertain the correct location of all electrical outlets. 3.2 TESTING A. After completion of its work, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare the equipment for operational use in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Each system shall be tested for proper operation and the thermostats shall be set. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER A. Final acceptance of the equipment is contingent on satisfactory appearance and operation after installation. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16850-2 SECTION 16950— ELECTRICAL TESTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. This Section specifies the WORK necessary to test, commission, and demonstrate that the electrical work satisfies the criteria of these Specifications and functions as required by the Contract Documents. B. The WORK of this Section includes furnishing the labor, equipment, and power required to support the testing indicated in other'Divisions of these Specifications. Electrical testing indicated herein and functional testing of power and controls not tested under Division 17 - Instrumentation, shall be completed before commencement of the 7-day test of Section 01660 - Equipment Testing and Plant Startup. This scope may require the CONTRACTOR to activate circuits, shutdown circuits, run equipment, make electrical measurements, replace blown fuses, and install temporary jumpers, etc. C. The requirements of Section 16050 - Electrical Work, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. 1.2 TESTING A. General: Carry out tests indicated herein for individual items of materials and equipment in other Sections. B. The following test requirements supplement test and acceptance criteria that may be stated elsewhere. 1. Lighting: Switching, include remote control, if present in sysem. Circuitry is in accordance with panel schedules. 2. Power Instrumentation: Demonstrate that voltmeter and ammeter switches are functional. Demonstrate that kilowatt meters are within catalog accuracy as installed. 3. Demonstrate mechanical and/or electrical interlocking by attempting to subvert the intended sequence. 4. Activate ground fault tripping by operating test features provided with ground current protective systems and by injecting a known and reasonable current in the ground current sensor circuit. In general, ground fault tripping should occur at a ground current equivalent to 20 percent of phase current. Current injection is not required of circuit 400 amperes or less. 5. Cable Testing: 480-volt circuits shall be tested for insulation resistance with a 1000- volt mega ohm meter. Testing shall be done after the 480-volt equipment is terminated. Phase-to-phase A-B, B-C, A-C and phase-to-ground insulation resistance tests shall be performed on each cable prior to 5-kV and 25-kV cable termination at equipment but subsequent to stress cone makeup. Test results shall be submitted for review 30 days prior to plant operation and any system testing. Equipment which may be damaged during this test shall be disconnected. Perform MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL TESTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16950-1 tests with all other equipment connected to the circuit. In order to be acceptable, the cable must withstand the test high voltage without breakdown, have steady or decreasing leakage current during the high potential test, and have satisfactory comparable megger readings in each megger test. Test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER, stating equipment used and time of test. Cable operating at more than 2,000 volts shall be tested in accordance with ICEA publications S-68-611 S-61-402, S-19-81, and S-68-516. Cable testing and report submittal shall be performed by an organization sanctioned by the manufacturer of the cable to be tested. Testing shall verify the quality of cable terminations. Test results for medium and high voltage cable shall be submitted to the ENGINEER 30 days prior to the time schedule for equipment energization. 6. Test ground interrupter (GFI) receptacles and circuit breakers for proper operation by methods sanctioned by the receptacle manufacturer. 7. A functional test and check of electrical components is required prior to performing subsystem testing and commissioning. Compartments and equipment shall be cleaned as required by other provisions of these Specifications before commencement of functional testing. Functional testing shall comprise: a. Visual and physical check of cables, circuit breakers, transformers, and connections associated with each item of new and modified equipment. b. Setting of protective relays in conformance with results of the Short Circuit Study required by Section 16431 - Protective Device Studies and testing of relays to assure that relays will trip at the current value and time required by the Study. c. Circuit breakers that have adjustable time or pick-up settings for ground current, instantaneous overcurrent, short-time overcurrent, or long-time overcurrent, shall be field-adjusted by a representative of the circuit breaker manufacturer. Time and pickup setting shall correspond to the recommendations of the Short Circuit Study. Setting shall be tabulated and proven for each circuit breaker in its installed position. Test results shall be certified by the person performing the tests and be transmitted to the ENGINEER in 7 copies. 8. Complete ground testing of grounding electrodes per requirements below prior to operating the equipment. C. Subsystem testing shall occur after the proper operation of alarm and status contacts has been demonstrated or otherwise accepted by the ENGINEER and after process control devices have been adjusted as accurately as possible. It is intended that the CONTRACTOR will adjust limit switches and level switches to their operating points prior to testing and will set pressure switches, flow switches, and timing relays as dictated by operating results. D. After initial settings have been completed, each subsystem shall be operated in the manual mode and it shall be demonstrated that operation is in compliance with the Contract Documents. Once the manual mode of operation has been proven, automatic operation shall be demonstrated to verify such items as proper start and stop sequence of pumps, proper operation of valves, proper speed control, etc. MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL TESTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16950-2 E. Motor operated valves shall be tested after having been phased and tested for correct motor rotation and after travel and torque limit switches have been adjusted by a representative of the valve manufacturer. Tests shall verify status indication, proper valve travel, and correct command control from local and remote devices. F. Provide ground resistance tests on the main grounding electrode or system in the presence of the ENGINEER and submit results. Utilize the fall-of-potential method or alternative, in accordance with IEEE Standard 81. G. Subsystems shall be defined as individual and groups of pumps, conveyor systems, chemical feeders, air conditioning units, ventilation fans, air compressors, etc. 1.3 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning during the 7-day test in Section 01660 shall not be attempted until all subsystems have been found to operate satisfactorily. Commissioning shall only be attempted as a function of normal plant operation in which plant process flows and levels are routine and equipment operates automatically in response to flow and level parameters or computer command, as applicable. Simulation of process parameters shall be considered only upon receipt of a written request by the CONTRACTOR. B. The motor current tabulation required by Section 16431 shall reflect the values occurring during commissioning. The indications of all switchboard ammeters and kilowattmeters shall be recorded every half-hour during commissioning. PART 2-- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-- EXECUTION (NOT USED) - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 ELECTRICAL TESTS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 16950-3 SECTION 17100- PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all Process Control and Instrumentation Systems (PCIS) complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of this Section apply to all components of the PCIS unless indicated otherwise. C. Responsibilities 1. The CONTRACTOR, through the use of a Instrumentation Supplier and qualified electrical and mechanical installers, shall be responsible to the OWNER for the implementation of the PCIS and the integration of the PCIS with other required instrumentation and control devices. 2. Due to the complexities associated with the interfacing of numerous control system devices, it is the intent of these specifications that the Innstrumentation Supplier be responsible to the CONTRACTOR for the integration of the PCIS with existing devices and devices provided under other sections with the objective of providing a completely integrated control system free of signal incompatibilities. 3. As a minimum, the Instrumentation Supplier shall perform the following WORK: a. Implementation of the PCIS 1) prepare analog hardware submittals 2) design, develop, and electronically draft loop drawings and control panel designs 3) integrate HSQ RTU with instrumentation and existing PCIS system 4) coordinate HSQ hardware and software requirements and work to provide a complete and properly functioning system 5) prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals 6) procure hardware 7) fabricate panels MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-1 8) perform factory tests on panels 9) perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation 10) oversee and certify installation 11) oversee, document, and certify loop testing 12) oversee, document, and certify system commissioning 13) conduct the performance test 14) prepare Technical Manuals 15) conduct training classes 16) prepare record drawings b. Integration of the PCIS with instrumentation and control devices being provided under other sections; 1) Develop all requisite loop drawings and record loop drawings associated with equipment provided under other Divisions of these Specifications and OWNER-furnished and existing equipment. 2) Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS and interfacing devices. 4. Any Instrumentation Supplier responsibilities in addition to the list above are at the discretion of the CONTRACTOR and the Instrumentation Supplier. Additional requirements in this Section and throughout Division 17 that are stated to be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility may be performed by the Instrumentation Supplier if the CONTRACTOR and Instrumentation Supplier so agree. D. Certification of Intent i. Each bidder shall include with the bid the following Certification from the selected Instrumentation Supplier: a. The Certification shall be typed on the Instrumentation Supplier firm letterhead. b. It shall be signed by an authorized representative of the Instrumentation Supplier's firm. C. It shall include the following statements: MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-2 1) (Corporate name of Instrumentation Supplier) "hereby certifies intent to assume and execute full responsibility to the CONTRACTOR to perform all tasks defined under Section 17100 - Paragraph 1.1 C3 in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents." 2) It is certified that the quotation to the CONTRACTOR includes full and complete compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents without exception." 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals and the following: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the instrumentation work so that the complete instrumentation and control system will be provided and will be supported by accurate Shop Drawings and record drawings. 2. Exchange of Technical Information: During the period of preparation of these submittals, the CONTRACTOR shall authorize a direct, informal liaison with the ENGINEER for exchange of technical information. As a result of this liaison, certain minor refinements and revisions in the systems as indicated may be authorized informally by the ENGINEER, but will not alter the scope of work or cause increase or decrease in the Contract Price. During this informal exchange, no oral statement by the ENGINEER shall be construed to give approval of any component or **Amp*, method, nor shall any statement be construed to grant exception to or variation from these Contract Documents. 3. Symbology and Nomenclature: In these Contract Documents, all systems, all meters, all instruments, and all other elements are represented schematically, and are designated by symbology as derived from Instrument Society of America Standard ANSI/ISA S5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. The nomenclature and numbers designated herein and on the Drawings shall be employed exclusively throughout Shop Drawings, and similar materials. No other symbols, designations, or nomenclature unique to the manufacturer's standard methods shall replace those prescribed above, used herein, or on the Drawings. B. Pre-submittal Conference 1. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange and conduct a Presubmittal Conference within 30 days after award of the Contract. The purpose of the Presubmittal Conference is to review and approve the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to carry out its responsibilities for Shop Drawing submittal on the WORK to be provided under this Section. The CONTRACTOR, the Instrumentation Supplier, and the ENGINEER shall MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-3 attend. Both the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER may invite additional parties at their discretion. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall allot one, 8-hour days for the Conference. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall present the following for discussion at the Conference: a. A list of equipment and materials required for the PCIS and the manufacturer's name and model number for each proposed item. b. A list of proposed clarifications to the Contract Documents along with a brief explanation of each. Resolution shall be subject to a separate formal submittal and review by the ENGINEER. C. An exact one-to-one sample of each type of submittal herein. d. A flow chart showing the steps to be taken in preparing and coordinating each submittal to the ENGINEER. e. A bar-chart type schedule for all system related activities from the Presubmittal Conference through start-up and training. Dates of submittals, design, fabrication, programming, factory testing, deliveries, installation, field testing, and training shall be shown. The schedule shall be subdivided to show activities relative to each major item or group of items when everything in a given group is on the same schedule. f. An overview of the proposed training plan. The OWNER's staff and ENGINEER will review the overview and may request changes. All changes to the proposed training shall be resolved at the pre-submittal conference. The overview shall include the following for each proposed course. 1) Course title and objectives. 2) Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 3) Course content - a topical outline. 4) Course duration. 5) Course format- lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall 5 copies of all the items above to the ENGINEER. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall take minutes of the Conference, including all events, questions, and resolutions. Prior to adjournment, all parties must concur with the accuracy of the minutes and sign accordingly. MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-4 C. Shop Drawings 1. General a. Preparation of Shop Drawings shall not commence until adjournment of the Presubmittal Conference. b. Shop Drawings shall include the letter head or title block of the Instrumentation Supplier. The title block shall include, as a minimum, the Instrumentation Supplier's registered business name and address, project name, drawing name, revision level, and personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. The quantity of submittal sets shall be as indicated in Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. C. Organization of the Shop Drawing submittals shall be compatible with eventual submittals for later inclusion in the Technical Manual. Submittals not so organized and incomplete submittals for a given loop will not be accepted. d. Shop Drawing information shall be bound in standard size, 3 ring, looseleaf, vinyl plastic, hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 3 inches. e. Interfaces between instruments, motor starters, control valves, variable speed drives, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PCIS shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal. 2. Analog Hardware Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall submit an analog hardware submittal as a complete bound package at one time within 60 calendar days after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed, including: a. A complete index which lists each device by tag number, type, and manufacturer. A separate technical brochure or bulletin shall be included with each instrument data sheet. The data sheets shall be indexed in the submittal by systems or loops, as a separate group for each system or loop. If, within a single system or loop, a single instrument is employed more than once, one data sheet with one brochure or bulletin may cover all identical uses of that instrument in that system. Each brochure or bulletin shall include a list of tag numbers for which it applies. System groups shall be separated by labeled tags. b. Fully executed data sheets according to ISA S20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves, for each component, together with a technical product brochure or bulletin. The technical product brochures shall be complete enough to verify MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-5 conformance to Contract Document requirements. The data sheets, as a minimum, shall show: 1) Component functional description used in the Contract Documents 2) Manufacturer's model number or other product designation 3) Project tag number used in the Contract Documents 4) Project system or loop of which the component is a part 5) Project location or assembly at which the component is to be installed 6) Input and output characteristics 7) Scale, range, units, and multiplier (if any) 8) Requirements for electric supply (if any) 9) Requirements for air supply(if any) 10) Materials of component parts to be in contact with or otherwise exposed to process media and corrosive ambient air 11) Special requirements or features C. Flow meter sizing calculations. Calculations shall be submitted on the instrument manufacturer letterhead and shall include the following: 1) Proposed meter size based on indicated minimum, maximum and average flow rates 2) Guaranteed meter accuracy based on the upstream and downstream straight runs associated with the location of each meter 3) Permanent head loss associated with each meter 4) Flow vs. differential pressure curves for all head-type devices. For compressible fluids, curves shall be pressure and temperature compensated. 5) References to ISA standard equations used 6) Values used for all parameters used in calculations d. Priced list of spare parts for all devices MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-6 e. Instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details shall be submitted in an electronic AutoCAD (latest version) and hard copy format. Each instrument shall have a dedicated 8-1/2 inch by 11- inch detail that only pertains to the specific instrument by tag number. Each detail shall be certified by the instrument manufacturer that the proposed installation is in accordance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations and is fully warrantable. These certifications shall be embedded in the CAD files and also appear as a stamp on the hard copies. As a minimum, each detail shall have the following contents; 1) show necessary sections and elevation views required to define instrument location by referencing tank, building or equipment names and numbers, and geographical qualities such as north, south, east, west, basement, first floor. 2) ambient temperature and humidity of the environment that the instrument is to be installed in. 3) corrosive qualities of the environment that the instrument is to be installed in. 4) hazardous rating of the environment that the instrument is to be installed in. 5) process line pipe or tank size, service and material. 6) process tap elevation and location. 7) upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument installation and pipe fittings and valves. 8) routing of tubing and identification of supports. 9) mounting brackets, stands, and anchoring devices. 10) conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power and signal. 11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and all components. 12) clearances required for instrument servicing. 13) list itemizing all manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities, lengths required, and materials of each item required to support the implementation of the detail. 3. Project-Wide Loop Drawing Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a Project-wide Loop Drawing Submittal (PLDS) which completely defines and documents the contents of each monitoring, alarming, interlock, and ,%MOO*, MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-7 control loop associated with equipment provided under Division 17 sections, equipment provided under sections in other Divisions, existing, and OWNER furnished equipment which is to be incorporated into the PCIS. The PLDS shall be a singular complete bound package electronically drafted in AutoCAD (latest version) submitted within 120 days after Contract Award, and shall include the following: a. A complete index in the front of each bound volume. The loop drawings shall be indexed by systems or process areas. Loops shall be tagged in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. Loop drawings shall be submitted for every analog and discrete monitoring and control loop. b. Drawings showing definitive diagrams for every analog and discrete instrumentation loop system. These diagrams shall show and identify each component of each loop or system using legend and symbols from ANSI/ISA S5.4 - Instrument Loop Drawings, as defined by the most recent revision in ISA. Panel drawings showing PLC 1/0 card wiring and field terminations are not acceptable as loop drawings. Each system or loop diagram shall be drawn on a separate drawing sheet with no more than ten loops per drawing. Loop drawings shall be developed for loops in equipment vendor supplied packages, equipment provided under Division 17, and OWNER furnished equipment. In addition to the expanded ISA S5.4 requirements, the loop diagrams shall also show the following details: 1) Functional name of each loop 2) Reference name, drawing, and loop diagram numbers for any signal continuing off the loop diagram sheet. 3) MCC panel, circuit, and breaker numbers for power feeds to the loops and instrumentation. 4) Designation, and if appropriate, terminal assignments associated with every manhole, pullbox, junction box, conduit, and panel through which the loop circuits pass. 5) Vendor panel, instrument panel, conduit, junction boxes, equipment and SCADA terminations, termination identification wire numbers and colors, power circuits, and ground identifications. C. Itemized instrument summary. The summary shall be prepared with Microsoft Access or Excel software and shall be submitted on CD-Rom disk and hard copy. The instrument summary shall list all of the key attributes of each instrument provided under this Contract. As a minimum, attributes shall include: 1) Tag number MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-8 2) Manufacturer 3) Model number 4) Service 5) Area location 6) Calibrated range 7) Loop drawing number 8) Associated LCP, PLC, PCM, or RTU 4. Test Procedure Submittals a. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed procedures to be followed during tests of the PCIS and its components. b. Preliminary Submittal: Outlines of the specific proposed tests and examples of proposed forms and checklists. G. Detailed Submittal: After approval of the Preliminary Submittal, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms, and checklists. This submittal shall include a statement of test objectives with the test procedures. 5. Training Submittals: Subsequent to the receipt of the OWNER's and ENGINEER's inputs made at the Presubmittal Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a training plan which includes: a. A resubmittal of the training plan overview from the Presubmittal Conference with incorporation of all modifications agreed upon at that meeting. b. Schedule of training courses including dates, durations, and locations of each class. C. Resumes of the instructors who will actually implement the plan. D. Technical Manual 1. General: Information in the Technical Manual shall be based upon the approved Shop Drawing submittals as modified for conditions encountered in the field during the WORK. 2. The Technical Manual shall have the following organization for each process: a. Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams ,%Moo, MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-9 b. Section B - Loop Descriptions C. Section C - Loop Drawings d. Section D - Instrument Summary -- e. Section E - Instrument Data Sheets f. Section F- Sizing Calculations g. Section G - Instrument Installation Details h. Section H - Test Results 3. Signed results from Loop Testing, Precommissioning, and Performance Testing shall be included in Section H. 4. Initially, 2 sets of draft Technical Manuals shall be submitted for review after return of favorably reviewed Shop Drawings and data required herein. Following the ENGINEER's review, one set will be returned to the CONTRACTOR with comments. The Manuals shall be revised and amended as required and the final Manuals shall be submitted 15 days prior to startup of systems. E. Record Drawings 1. The CONTRACTOR shall keep current a set of complete loop and schematic diagrams which shall include all field and panel wiring, piping and tubing runs, routing, mounting details, point-to-point diagrams with cable, wire, tube and termination numbers. These drawings shall include all instruments and instrument elements. One set of drawings electronically formatted in AutoCAD (latest version) and 2 hard copies shall be submitted after completion of all Precommissioning tasks but prior to Performance Testing. All such drawings shall be submitted for review prior to acceptance of the completed WORK by the OWNER. 1.3 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Extended Period for Correction of Defects: The CONTRACTOR shall correct all defects in the PCIS upon notification from the OWNER within 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion. Corrections shall be completed within 5 days after notification. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Code and Regulatory Compliance: PCIS WORK shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. Conflicts between the requirements of the Contract Documents and any codes or referenced MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-10 standards or specifications shall be resolved according to Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Current Technology: Meters, instruments, and other components shall be the most recent field-proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the Shop Drawings unless otherwise required to match existing equipment. C. Hardware Commonality: Instruments which utilize a common measurement principle (for example, d/p cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters that monitor hydrostatic head) shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. Panel mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be from a single manufacturer. D. Loop Accuracy: The accuracy of each instrumentation system or loop shall be determined as a probable maximum error; this shall be the square root of the sum of the squares of certified "accuracies" of the designated components in each system, expressed as a percentage of the actual span or value of the measured variable. Each individual instrument shall have a minimum accuracy of plus and minus 0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of plus and minus 0.25 percent of full scale unless otherwise indicated. Instruments that do not conform to or improve upon these criteria are not acceptable. E. Instrument and Loop Power: Power requirements and input/output connections for all components shall be verified. Power for transmitted signals shall, in general, originate in and be supplied by the control panel devices. The use of "2-wire" transmitters is preferred, and use of "4-wire" transmitters shall be minimized. Individual loop or redundant power supplies shall be provided as required by the manufacturer's instrument load characteristics to ensure sufficient power to each loop component. Power supplies shall be mounted within control panels or in the field at the point of application. F. Instrument Air: Dry, filtered control air at 30 psig nominal pressure shall be piped to field instruments and instrument panels requiring air. Each field instrument shall be provided with an integral, non-adjustable filter/regulator assembly to provide regulated air. Each instrument panel requiring air shall be provided with an adjustable filter/regulator assembly with gauge and an air manifold to provide air to pneumatic instruments. Air shall be filtered to 5 micron maximum particle size. Pressure reducers and regulators shall be furnished with additional instrumentation as required. G. Loop Isolators and Converters: Signal isolators shall be provided as required to ensure adjacent component impedance match where feedback paths may be generated, or to maintain loop integrity during the removal of a loop component. Dropping precision wirewound resistors shall be installed at all field side terminations in the control panels to ensure loop integrity. Signal conditioners and converters shall be provided where required to resolve any signal level incompatibilities or provide required functions. MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-11 H. Environmental Suitability: Indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the locations designated in the Contract Documents. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices shall be provided in order to maintain all instrumentation devices 20 percent within the minimums and maximums of their rated %NOW, environmental operating ranges. The CONTRACTOR shall provide power wiring for these devices. Enclosures suitable for the environment shall be furnished. All instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the particular hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed. I. Signal Levels: Analog measurements and control signals shall be as indicated herein, and unless otherwise indicated, shall vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable. Electrical signals outside control panels shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes do except as indicated. Signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 volts dc. Electric signals shall be electrically or optically isolated from other signals. Pneumatic signals shall be 3 to 15 psig with 3 psig equal to 0 percent and 15 psig equal to 100 percent. J. Control Panel Power Supplies: Control panels shall be provided with redundant power supplies which are configured in a fault-tolerant manner to prevent interruption of service upon failure and interruption of service necessitated by the replacement of a power supply. Power supplies shall have an excess rated capacity of 40 percent. The failure of a power supply shall be annunciated at the control panel and repeated to SCADA System. K. Alternative Equipment and Methods: Equipment or methods .requiring redesign of any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the ENGINEER through the "or equal" process of Section 01600 - Products, Materials, Equipment, and Substitutions. Any proposal for approval of alternative %wool equipment or methods shall include evidence of improved performance, operational advantage, and maintenance enhancement over the equipment or method indicated, or shall include evidence that an indicated component is not available. 2.2 OPERATING CONDITIONS A. The PCIS shall be designed and constructed for satisfactory operation and long, low maintenance service under the following conditions: Environment water treatment facility Temperature Range 32 through 104 degrees F Thermal Shock 1 degree F per minute, max Relative Humidity 20 through 90 percent, non-condensing MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-12 2.3 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. The ENGINEER will select the required spare parts from the priced list of spare parts in the Analog Hardware Submittals, and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish them. The CONTRACTOR will be paid from the corresponding allowance item in the Bid, and the total price will not exceed the amount of the allowance item. B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a priced list of all special tools required to calibrate and maintain the instrumentation provided under the Contract Documents. After approval the CONTRACTOR shall furnish tools on that list. C. In addition to the CONTRACTOR proposed special tools, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following: 1. One portable instrument calibrator current simulator with charger and carrying case RIS 4500, Fluke, or equal. D. Special tools and spare parts shall be submitted before startup commences, suitably wrapped and identified. 2.4 FACTORY TESTING A. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and cabinets supplied under this Section to allow the ENGINEER and OWNER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication. Equipment shall include the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring devices, and other pertinent systems and devices. A minimum of 10 working days notification shall be furnished to the ENGINEER prior to testing. No shipments shall be made without the ENGINEER'S approval. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Shipping Precautions: After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and approval, equipment, cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weight shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the Site. B. Special! Instructions: Special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation required by the manufacturer shall be securely attached to each piece of equipment prior to packaging and shipment. C. Tagging: Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, instrument tag number, and function in the system. A permanent stainless steel or other non- MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-13 corrosive material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as given in the tabulation, shall be provided on each piece of equipment in the PCIS. Identification shall be prominently displayed on the outside of the package. D. Storage: Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through tests as directed by the ENGINEER. If such tests reveal defects, the equipment shall be replaced. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following manufacturer's services for the instrumentation listed below: 1. Perform bench calibration 2. Oversee installation 3. Verify installation of installed instruments 4. Certify installation and reconfirm manufacturer's accuracy statement 5. Oversee loop testing, prepare loop validation sheets, and certify loop testing 6. Oversee precommissioning, prepare precommissioning validation sheets, and certify precommissioning 7. Train the OWNER's personnel B. Manufacturer's services shall be furnished for the following equipment: 1. Flowmeters in process streams which relate to process control, mass balance calculations, and billing of customers. 2. Process analyzers 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Instrumentation, including instrumentation furnished under other Divisions, shall be installed under Division 17 and the manufacturers' instructions. 2. Equipment Locations: The monitoring and control system configurations indicated are diagrammatic. The locations of equipment are approximate. MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-14 The exact locations and routing of wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions and physical interferences and by the location of electrical terminations on equipment. Equipment shall be located and ..� installed so that it will be readily accessible for operation and maintenance. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in approximated locations and arrangements, or when the OWNER exercises the right to require changes in location of equipment which do not impact material quantities or cause material rework, the CONTRACTOR shall make such changes without additional cost to the OWNER. B. Conduit, Cables, and Field Wiring 1. Conduit shall be provided under Division 16 without delay to the WORK of Division 17. 2. Process equipment control wiring, 4-20 mA signal circuits, signal wiring to field instruments, SCADA and PLC input and output wiring and other field wiring and cables shall be provided under Division 16. 3. SCADA equipment cables, data highway, communication networks shall be provided under Division 17. 4. Terminations and wire identification at PCIS equipment furnished under this or any other Division shall be provided under Division 17. C. Instrumentation Tie-Downs: Instruments, control panels, and equipment shall be anchored by methods that comply with seismic requirements applicable to the Site. D. Existing Instrumentation: Each existing instrument to be removed and reinstalled shall be cleaned, reconditioned, and recalibrated by an authorized service facility of the instrument manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall provide certification of this work prior to reinstallation of each instrument. E. Ancillary Devices: The Contract Documents show all necessary conduit and instruments required to make a complete instrumentation system. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any additional or different type connections as required by the instruments and specific installation requirements. Such additions and such changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing the work. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra work or delay. F. Installation Criteria and Validation: Field-mounted components and assemblies shall be installed and connected according to the requirements below: 1. Installation personnel have been instructed on installation requirements of the Contract Documents. v MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-15 2. Technical assistance is available to installation personnel at least by telephone. 3. Installation personnel have at least one copy of the approved Shop Drawings and data. 4. Instrument process sensing lines shall be installed in conduit under Section 16050 - Electrical General Provisions. Individual tubes shall run parallel and near the surfaces from which they are supported. Supports shall be used at intervals of not more than 3 feet of rigid tubing. 5. Bends shall be formed to uniform radii with the proper tool without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing. Plastic clips shall be used to hold individual plastic tubes parallel. Ends of tubing shall be square cut and cleaned before being inserted in the fittings. Bulkhead fittings shall be provided at panels requiring pipe or tubing entries. 6. Differential pressure elements shall have 3 valve manifolds. 7. Pressure transmitters and devices shall be provided with isolation valves and bleed and block manifolds. 8. Flexible cables and capillary tubing shall be installed in flexible conduits. The lengths shall be sufficient to withdraw the element for periodic maintenance. 9. Power and signal wires shall be terminated with crimped type lugs. 10. Connectors shall be, as a minimum, water tight. 11. Wires shall be mounted clearly with an identification tag that is of a permanent and reusable nature. 12. Wire and cable shall be arranged in a neat manner and securely supported in cable groups and connected from terminal to terminal without splices unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. Wiring shall be protected from sharp edges and corners. 13. Mounting stands and bracket materials and workmanship shall comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. 14. Verify the correctness of each installation, including polarity of electric power and signal connections, and make sure process connections are free of leaks. The CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that discrepancies have been corrected for each loop or system checked out. 15. The OWNER will not be responsible for any additional cost of rework attributable to actions of the CONTRACTOR or the Instrumentation Supplier. MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-16 3.4 CALIBRATION A. General: Devices provided under Division 17 shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures to verify operational readiness and ability to meet the indicated functional and tolerance requirements. B. Calibration Points: Each instrument shall be calibrated at 20,40,60, 80 and 100 percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs. The test instruments shall have accuracies traceable to National Institute of Standards and Testing. C. Bench Calibration: Instruments that have been bench-calibrated shall be examined in the field to determine whether any of the calibrations are in need of adjustment. Such adjustments, if required, shall be made only after consultation with the ENGINEER. D. Field Calibration: Instruments which were not bench-calibrated shall be calibrated in the field to insure proper operation in accordance with the instrument loop diagrams or specification data sheets. E. Analyzer Calibration: Each analyzer system shall be calibrated and tested as a workable system after installation. Testing procedures shall be directed by the manufacturers' technical representatives. Samples and sample gases shall be furnished by the manufacturers. F. Calibration Sheets: Each instrument calibration sheet shall provide the following information and a space for sign-off on individual items and on the completed unit: 1. Project name 2. Loop number 3. Tag number 4. Manufacturer 5. Model number 6. Serial number 7. Calibration range 8. Calibration data: Input, output, and error at 10 percent, 50 percent, and 90 percent of span 9. Switch setting, contact action, and deadband for discrete elements 10. Space for comments 11. Space for sign-off by Instrumentation Supplier and date �..i MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-17 12. Test equipment used and associated serial numbers G. Calibration Tags: A calibration and testing tag shall be attached to each piece of equipment or system at a location determined by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall have the Instrumentation Supplier sign the tag when Nftwoe calibration is complete. The ENGINEER will sign the tag when the calibration and testing has been accepted. 3.5 LOOP TESTING A. General: Individual instrument loop diagrams per ISA Standard S5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams, expanded format, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the loop tests. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of scheduled tests a minimum of 30 days prior to the estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the PCIS. After the ENGINEER'S review of the submitted loop diagrams for correctness and compliance with the specifications, loop testing shall proceed. The loop check shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER. B. Control Valve Tests: Control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages shall be stroked from the operator interface units as well as local control devices and adjusted to verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position. Control valve actions and positioner settings shall be checked with the valves in place to insure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration. C. Interlocks: All hardware and software interlocks between the instrumentation and the motor control circuits, control circuits of variable-speed controllers and packaged equipment controls shall be checked to the maximum extent possible. D. Instrument and Instrument Component Validation: Each instrument shall be field tested, inspected, and adjusted to its indicated performance requirement in accordance its manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Any instrument which fails to meet any Contract requirement, or, in the absence of a Contract requirement, any published manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the ENGINEER. E. Loop Validation: Controllers and electronic function modules shall be field tested and exercised to demonstrate correct operation. Control loops shall be checked under simulated operating conditions by impressing input signals at the primary control elements and observing appropriate responses of the respective control and monitoring elements, final control elements, and the graphic displays associated with the SCADA system. Actual signals shall be used wherever available. Following any necessary corrections, the loops shall be retested. Accuracy tolerances for each analog network are defined as the root-mean- square (RMS) summation of individual component accuracy requirements. Individual component accuracy requirements shall be as indicated by Contract requirements or by published manufacturer accuracy specifications, whenever Contract accuracy requirements are not indicated. Each analog network shall be MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-18 tested by applying simulated analog or discrete inputs to the first element of an analog network. For networks which incorporate analog elements, simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100 percent of span shall be applied, and the resulting element outputs monitored to verify compliance to calculated RMS summation accuracy tolerance requirements. Continuously variable analog inputs shall be applied to verify the proper operation and setting of discrete devices. Provisional settings shall be made on controllers and alarms during analog loop tests. Analog loop test data shall be recorded on test forms attached at the end of this section which include calculated RMS summation system accuracy tolerance requirements for each output. F. Loop Validation Sheets: The CONTRACTOR shall prepare loop confirmation sheets for each loop covering each active instrumentation and control device except simple hand switches and lights. Loop confirmation sheets shall form the basis for operational tests and documentation. Each loop confirmation sheet shall cite the following information and shall provide spaces for sign-off on individual items and on the complete loop by the Instrumentation Supplier: 1. Project name 2. Loop number 3. Tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number for each element 4. Installation bulletin number 5. Specification sheet number 6. Loop description number 7. Adjustment check 8. Space for comments 9. Space for loop sign-off by Instrumentation Supplier and date 10. Space for ENGINEER witness signature and date G. Loop Certifications: When installation tests have been successfully completed for all individual instruments and all separate analog control networks, a certified copy of each test form signed by the ENGINEER or the ENGINEER's representative as a witness, with test data entered, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER together with a clear and unequivocal statement that the instrumentation has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested. 3.6 PRECOMMISSIONING A. General: Precommissioning shall commence after acceptance of all wire test, calibration tests and loop tests, and inspections have demonstrated that the instrumentation and control system complies with Contract requirements. MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-19 Precommissioning shall demonstrate proper operation of all systems with process equipment operating over full operating ranges under conditions as closely resembling actual operating conditions as possible. B. Precommissioning Procedures and Documentation: Precommissioning and v test activities shall follow detailed test procedures and check lists accepted by the ENGINEER. Test data shall be acquired using equipment as required and shall be recorded on test forms accepted by the ENGINEER, which include calculated tolerance limits for each step. Completion of system precommissioning and test activities shall be documented by a certified report, including test forms with test data entered, delivered to the ENGINEER with a clear and unequivocal statement that all system precommissioning and test requirements have been satisfied. C. Operational Validation: Where feasible, system precommissioning activities shall include the use of water to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal final control element operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges, and environmental conditions. Final control elements, control panels, and ancillary equipment shall be tested under startup and steady state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using motor control center and local field mounted control circuits. Hardwired and software control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. The control of final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where provided) control circuits. The stable steady state operation of final control elements running under the control of field mounted automatic analog controllers or software based controllers shall be assured by adjusting the controllers as required to eliminate oscillatory final control element operation. The transient stability of final control elements operating under the control of field mounted, %MOO, and software based automatic analog controllers shall be verified by applying control signal disturbances, monitoring the amplitude and decay rate of control parameter oscillations (if any), and making necessary controller adjustments as required to eliminate excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates. D. Loop Tuning: Electronic control stations incorporating proportional, integral or differential control circuits shall be optimally tuned, experimentally, by applying control signal disturbances and adjusting the gain, reset, or rate settings as required to achieve a proper response. Measured final control element variable position/speed setpoint settings shall be compared to measured final control element position/speed values at 20, 40, 60, 80 and 100 percent of span and the results checked against indicated accuracy tolerances. E. Precommissioning Validation Sheets: Precommissioning shall be documented on one of two types of test forms as follows: 1. For functions which can be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the form shall include: a. Project name b. Loop number MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS %,00l, CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-20 C. Loop description d. Tag number, description, manufacturer, and data sheet number for each component. e. Space for sign-off and date by both the Instrumentation Supplier and ENGINEER. 2. For functions that cannot be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the test form shall be a listing of the specific tests to be conducted. With each test description the following information shall be included: a. Specification page and paragraph of function demonstrated b. Description of function C. Space for sign-off and date by both the Instrumentation Supplier and ENGINEER F. Precomimissioning Certification: The CONTRACTOR shall submit an instrumentation and control system precommissioning completion report which shall state that all Contract requirements have been met and shall include a listing of instrumentation and control system maintenance and repair activities conducted during the precommissioning testing. Acceptance of the instrumentation and control system precommissioning testing must be provided in writing by the ENGINEER before the performance testing may begin. Final acceptance of the control system shall be based upon plant completion as stated in the General Conditions. 3.7 ON-SITE SUPERVISION A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of an on-site resident engineer to supervise and coordinate installation, adjustment, testing, and start-up of the PCIS. The resident engineer shall be present during the total period required to effect a complete operating system. A team of engineering personnel shall be on site for 40 hours to check all equipment, perform the tests indicated in this Section, and furnish startup services. 3.8 PERFORMANCE TEST A. The entire SCADA system shall operate for 15 days without failure. B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish support staff as required to operate the system and to satisfy the repair or replacement requirements. C. If any component fails during the performance test, it shall be repaired or replaced and the PCIS shall be restarted on another 15 day period. `%Mw, MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-21 3.9 TRAINING A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall train the OWNER'S personnel on the maintenance, calibration, and repair of instruments provided under this Contract. B. Instructions: The training shall be performed by qualified representatives of the equipment manufacturers and shall be specific to each piece of equipment. C. Duration: Each training class shall be a minimum of 8 hours in duration and shall cover, as a minimum, operational theory, maintenance, trouble shooting/repair, and calibration of the instrument. D. Schedule: Training shall be performed during the precommissioning phase of the project. The training sessions shall be scheduled a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of when the courses are to be initiated. The ENGINEER will review the course outline for suitability and provide comments that shall be incorporated. E. Agenda: The training shall include operation and maintenance procedures, trouble shooting with necessary test equipment, and changing set points, and calibration for that specific piece of equipment. F. Documentation: Within 10 days after the completion of each session the CONTRACTOR shall submit the following: 1. A list of all OWNER personnel who attended the session. 2. An evaluation of OWNER personnel via written testing or equivalent evaluation. 3. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with notes, diagrams, and comments. 3.10 ACCEPTANCE A. For the purpose of this Section, the following conditions shall be fulfilled before the WORK is considered substantially complete: 1. Submittals have been completed and approved. 2. The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested, and precommissioned. 3. The OWNER training has been performed. 4. Spare parts and expendable supplies and test equipment have been delivered to the ENGINEER. 5. The performance test has been successfully completed. 6. Punch-list items have been corrected. MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-22 7. Record drawings in both hard copy and electronic format have been submitted. 8. Revisions to the Technical Manuals that may have resulted from the field tests have been made and reviewed. 9. Debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed. 10. Probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like-new condition. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17100-23 SECTIO14 17102— IN-LINE LIQUID FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS PART 1 -- GENERAL `„ov, 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide in-line liquid flow measuring systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems apply to this Section. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. General: Shop Drawings shall be submitted in conformance with the requirements of Section 17100 and Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. PART 2-- PRODUCTS; 2.1 ULTRASONIC FIELD MOUNTED LIQUID FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS (TRANSIT TIME) A. Type: A transit-time ultrasonic flowmeter shall be installed on the piping system as shown in the plans and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The meter shall consist of a set of wetted hotshot transducers, interconnecting cable, remote microprocessor-based electronic transmitter and accessories as required for the installation. B. Features' a. Components: Ultrasonic flow transducers shall be mounted on the pipe for measuring the velocity. The transducers' mounting hardware shall be suitable for a concrete pipe. The equipment manufacturer shall select the signal and frequency for proper ultrasonic transmission. All wiring within the electronic unit shall be factory pre-wired. The mounting assembly shall be furnished by the manufacturer. b. Transducers (Wetted): Two acoustic sensors of the "hot shot" style shall be mounted on the piping at the positions determined by the manufacturer. Valve assemblies supplied by the manufacturer shall allow the insertion or withdrawal of the sensors without dewatering the pipe. The transducers shall be fabricated of a corrosion resistant material suitable for immersion in wastewater and shall be supplied with sensor cable of adequate length, as splicing will not be allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the flowmeter manufacturer to determine the exact locations of the transducers. MWH—06/24/03 IN-LINE LIQUID FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17102-1 C. Transmitter: The transmitter shall contain all the circuitry necessary to produce a 4-20mA DC signal linear with the flow rate. Circuit boards shall be conformal coated. The transmitter shall be capable of measuring and totalizing forward flow. It shall be microprocessor controlled. The transmitter shall utilize menu-driven sequencing of the internal functions from the front panel switches without the need of external equipment. d. Local Display: The display on the enclosure shall be a 128x64 graphic display with the ability to control backlighting (On or Off) from the front panel keypad and also adjust the contrast. All programming functions, data entry and collection shall be initiated by the display and the 16 button keypad. Standard pipe tables shall be stored in the firmware. The unit shall compute all flow calculation using IEEE 754 single floating point precision. The electronics shall be able to accept up to three pairs of velocity sensors for multi-path operations. e. Remote Display: The flow reading shall be displayed remotely at the gate structure and at the LPU panel front. A Moore Industries PSD display shall be mounted at the control gates, as shown on the drawings. All necessary signal isolators and boosters shall be provided to properly send and display signals. f. Accuracy: The meters shall have an accuracy of plus and minus 1 percent of actual liquid flow at velocities greater than one foot per second. g. Linearity: The linearity of the units shall be +/- 0.5% h. Repeatability: To within +/- 0.25% i. Sensitivity: +/- 0.005 ft/sec j. Power Consumption: The meter shall be designed to operate on 120 VAC supply with a power consumption of not more than 30 watts indoor locations and 250 watts outdoor locations with heater activated. k. Enclosure: The transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA-4x foam-molded polycarbonate enclosure suitable for wall mounting or stand mounting. I. The installation of both meters shall be inspected by a factory authorized representative. The meters shall be configured, calibrated. A copy of the report complete with all settings needed for configuring the instrument shall be in the O&M manual and a copy, laminated in plastic, shall be provided in the instrument. M. Contact closures shall be provided and configured in the instrument to provide an integrated closure representing flow. The contacts shall be wired to the LPU. n. Manufacturers: 1) Badger 2) Panametrics MWH—06/24/03 IN-LINE LIQUID FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17102-2 The following field mounted ultrasonic flow measuring systems shall be provided: Tag No. Service Pipe Flow Range Line Pipe NEMA Size gpm Pressure psi Material Rating Inches FIT 130 PUMP 1000 to 35,000 0 TO 150 PSI NEMA STATION gpm 4X FLOW PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. In-line flow measuring systems shall be executed according to Section 17100. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 IN-LINE LIQUID FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17102-3 SECTION 17106- LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEMS PART 1 --GENERAL ,%%Noo' 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide level measuring systems, complete and operable in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. "Smart"transmitters shall be furnished when or where ever possible. C. The requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 17100. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TYPE LEVEL MEASUREMENT A. The level transducer shall be a differential pressure sensing unit. The transmitter shall be a 2 wire device with continuously adjustable span, zero and damping adjustments, integral indicator scaled in engineering units with 4 digit LCD display, solid state circuitry, and 4- 20 mA output. Accuracy shall be 0.50 percent of span. Process wetted parts, bolts, flanges, adapters, drains and vents, shall be stainless steel Body and mounting brackets shall be corrosion resistant and suitable for the environment. The pressure connections shall be 1/2-inch NPT. Where required by the Drawings or where the measured fluid could damage the transmitter, the transducer shall be provided with diaphragm seals. B. The level transducer/transmitter shall be Endress+Hauser•PMD, Rosemount Model 3056. C. The following differential pressure type level transmitters shall be provided: Tag No. Span Calibration Range Process Connection LIT 112 0—50' 8.35 Ft H2O to '/2 inch NPT 58.46 Ft H2O 2.2 LEVEL SWITCH — FLOAT TYPE Type: Direct acting, pear shaped, eccentric weighted displacement type, liquid level sensor. Construction Features: MWH—06/24/03 LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUiv1P STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17106-1 1. Float Body: Hollow hermetically sealed, rigidly molded of polypropylene containing switch. 2. Switch: Hermetically sealed SPDT switch rated 8 amps a-c/5 amps d-c, cushioned and mounted along main axis at about 65 degree inclination. 3. Electrical Cable: a. Heavy duty, three conductor, flexible and submersible cable, sheathed in PVC and connected to float and switch with watertight seal. b. Length furnished to be sufficient to extend to junction box. Installation: See mounting detail on Contract Drawings. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Model ENH-10, as manufactured by Flygt. 2. Or equal. The following float actuated level transmitters shall be provided: Tag No. Location LSH 102 Valve Vault#1 LSH 106 Valve Vault#2 LSH 111 Valve Vault#3 LSH 127 Valve Vault#4 LSH 131 Valve Vault#5 PART 3 -- EXECUTION GENERAL: Level measuring systems shall be executed according to Section 17100. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17106-2 SECTION 17108 - PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure measuring systems, complete ;and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The regtirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systemslapply to the WORK of this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Shop Drawings, Owner's Manual, shall be submitted in conformance with the requirements of Section 17100 and Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Pressure gauges shall be 4-1/2 inches in diameter, Liquid-filled, bottom connected, with white laminated dials and black graduations. Windows shall have shatterproof glass acrylic window. Gauges shall have a blowout disc and be encased in phenolic, steel, or cast iron. Measuring element shall be a stainless steel bourdon tube with welded, stress-relieved joints. Socket shall have wrench flats. Movement shall be rotary geared, all stainless steel material. Pressure gauges shall be provided with a pulsation snubber constructed of 316 stainless steel and an isolation valve. Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable units. Accuracy shall be plus and minus 1/2 percent range to 150 percent of the working pressure or vacuum of the pipe or vessel to which they are connected. The pressure gauge shall be Ashcroft 1279, Ametek Solfrunt Series 1900, or equal. B. The pressure gauges shall be as shown in the mechanical drawings. 2.2 ELECTRONIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS A. Components: Electronic differential transmitters shall consist of a capsule assembly, bottom works, vent plug, drain plug, cover flange, process connector and connection, amplifier unit, integral indicator, terminal box with cover, block and bleed valves, and conduit connections. B. Operating Principles: Pressure applied to the unit shall be transmitted by a sealed fill fluid to both sides of a sensing diaphragm. The sensing diaphragm and the sensor body shall function as the moving and fixed electrodes, respectively, of a differential capacitor. As the applied pressure causes the diaphragm to move, the capacitance of the cell shall change. MWH—06/24/03 PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17108-1 C. Performance Requirements: The amplifier unit shall convert the change in capacitance to a 4 - 20 mA DC signal, 2 wire type, with an allowable loop load of no less than 600 ohms. Static pressure rating shall be a minimum of 500 psig. The maximum overrange pressure limit shall be a minimum of 150 percent of the range. Span shall be adjustable over a minimum of 5:1 range. External adjustments shall include zero and span. Output signal damping shall be provided as an internal adjustment. All equipment shall be suitable for an ambient operating range of minus 40 degree F to plus 212 degrees F. The integral indicator shall be calibrated in process units. Power supply shall be 24 VDC. Accuracy, including linearity and repeatability, shall be a plus or minus 0.2 percent of span. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow service shall include square root extraction to produce an output signal linearly proportional to flow. Wetted parts, including block and bleed valve parts, shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Manufacturers shall be Endress and Hauser PMC 41, Rosemount 3056. D. The following electronic differential pressure transmitter shall be provided: Tag No. Range Body/Bolt Fill Fluid Process NEMA Material Connection Rating PIT 101 0 TO 100 316 SS Silicone 112 in. NPT 4 PSI PIT 128 0 TO 150 316 SS Silicone 1/2 in. NPT 4 PSI PART 3-- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Pressure measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop-tested, pre-commissioned, and performance tested according to Section 17100. The manufacturer shall furnish the manufacturer's service, supervision, and training indicated by Section 17100. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS _ CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17108-2 SECTION 17109 - PRESSURE DETECTION SWITCHES PART 1 -- GENERAL `.•� 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure detection switches, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 17100. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 ADJUSTABLE PRESSURE SWITCH A. Adjustable pressure switches shall be diaphragm actuated, dual adjustment pressure switches with SPDT contacts rated for a minimum of 5 Amps at 120 VAC. The dead band shall be adjustable up to 60 percent of full scale. Set points shall fall between 20 and 80 percent of the adjustable range. The diaphragm shall be Buna-N, and the lower housing shall be brass with a 1/4-inch bottom sensing connection, unless otherwise indicated B. Manufacturer shall be United Electric Series 400, Ashcroft Series L/Series B, or equal. C. The following adjustable pressure switches shall be provided: Tag No. Service Trip Set Point NEMA Rating PSH 115 Pump Discharge Pressure 115 psi 4 PSH 117 Pump Discharge Pressure 130 psi 4 PSH 119 Pump Discharge Pressure 130 psi 4 PSL 115 Pump Suction Pressure 1.5 psi 4 PSL 117 Pump Suction Pressure 1.5 psi 4 PSL 119 Pump Suction Pressure 1.5 psi 4 MWH—06/24/03 PRESSURE DETECTION SWTCHES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17109-1 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Pressure measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop-tested, pre-commissioned, and performance tested according to Section 17100. The manufacturer shall furnish the manufacturer's service, supervision, and training indicated by Section 17100. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 PRESSURE DETECTION SWTCHES CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17109-2 SECTION 17110—TEMPERATURE MEASURING SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL. 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide temperature measuring systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems apply to this Section. PART 2-- PRODUCT'S 2.1 TEMPERATURE MEASURING SYSTEMS A. Insertion! type RTDs shall be 100 ohms nominal at 0 degree C, tip-sensitive, three-wire platinum in 0.25-inch Type 316 stainless steel sheath with watertight potting. Time constant in agitated water shall not exceed 6.0 seconds. RTD shall comply with International Practical Temperature Scale (IPTS)-68 standards. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 0.1 degree C. Temperature transmitters shall be 2-wire devices with continuously adjustable span and zero adjustments, integral direct reading indicator, solid state circuitry, and a 4-20 mA DC output linearly proportional to the indicated temperature span. Where indicated with thermowells, RTDs shall be provided with 316 stainless steel thermowell, spring- loading device," extensions, union coupler, and explosion-proof aluminum connection head. Union shall extend out beyond the pipe lagging. Surface type RTDs shall be a 100 ohm nominal at 0 degree C, three-wire platinum element in a flexible watertight case for strapping to a pipe surface. B. Resistance temperature detector assemblies shall be Rosemount Series 78/79, Foxboro PR14U, or equal. C. Sensor shall be Leeds & Northrup Series RTS-60L, Minco S32PB11Y36B, or equal. Output shall be 4-20 mA DC linear to within 0.2 percent with temperature for 100 ohm platinum sensors. Lead resistance compensation shall be provided for three-wire RTDs. Common mode noise rejection shall be greater than 120 db at 60 hertz. Time constant shall be 100 milliseconds or less. Input/output isolation shall be provided. Transmitter shall be Rosemount Model 444, or equal. D. The following RTD temperature measuring systems shall be provided: Tag No. Service Range Type Well NEMA Rating Required TFJTIT 125 Water 40-95 Deg RTD SS 316 4 F - MWH—06/24/03 TEMPERATURE MEASURING SYSTEMS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17110-1 PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Temperature measuring systems shall be executed according to Section 17100. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 TEMPERATURE MEASURING SYSTEMS . CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17110-2 SECTION 17200— CONTROL PANELS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide control panels, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems apply to this Section. C. The provisions of this Section apply to Section 17201 - Control Panel Instrumentation except where indicated otherwise. D. The provisions of this Section apply to local panels provided in equipment systems specified in other sections unless indicated otherwise in those sections. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals. B. Control Panel Engineering Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a control panel engineering submittal (CPES) for each control panel and enclosure provided under Division 17. The CPES shall completely define and document the construction, finish, layout, power circuits, signal and safety grounding circuits, fuses, circuit breakers, signal circuits, internally mounted instrumentation and SCADA system components, face plate mounted instrumentation components, internal panel arrangements, and external panel arrangements. All panel drawings shall, as a minimum, be "B" size with all data sheets and manufacturer specification sheets being "A" size. The submittal shall be in conformance with ISA-S20 - Standard Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves, shall be submitted as a singular complete bound volume or multi-volume package within 120 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, and shall have the following contents: 1. A complete index shall appear in the front of each bound volume. Drawings and data sheets associated with a panel shall be grouped together with the panels being indexed by systems or process areas. Panel tagging and nameplate nomenclature shall be consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Scale construction drawings which define and quantify the type and gauge of steel to be used for panel fabrication, the ASTM grade to be used for structural shapes and straps, panel door locks and hinge mechanisms, type of bolts and bolt locations for section joining and anchoring, details and proposed locations for "UNISTRUT" members, stiffener materials and locations, electrical terminal box and outlet locations, electrical access locations, print pocket locations, writing board locations, and lifting lug material and locations. MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-1 3. Scaled physical arrangement drawings drawn to scale which define and quantify the physical groupings comprising control panel sections, auxiliary panels, subpanels, and racks. Cutout locations with nameplate identifications shall be shown. 4. Front of panel layouts for all control panels. 5. Schematic/elementary diagrams shall depict all control devices and circuits and their functions. 6. Wiring/connection diagrams shall locate and identify electrical devices, terminals, and interconnecting wiring. These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines, designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of all electrical and control devices. 7. Interconnection diagrams shall locate and identify all external connections between the control panel/control panel devices and associated equipment. These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines, designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of all panel ingress and egress points. 8. Control sequence diagrams to portray the contact positions or connections required to be made for each successive step of the control action. Written descriptions explaining the control sequence diagrams and system operation shall be furnished. 9. Completed ISA S20 data sheets for all instrumentation devices associated with each control panel supplemented with manufacturer specification sheets which verify conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents 10. A bill of material which enumerates all devices associated with the control panel. 11. A priced listing of analog spare parts in conformance with Section 17100. 1.3 EXTENDED PERIOD FOR CORRECTION OF DEFECTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall correct all defects in accordance with Section 17100. PART 2-- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Environmental Suitability: Indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the locations designated in the Contract Documents. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices shall be provided in order to maintain all instrumentation devices 20 percent within the minimums and maximums of their rated environmental operating ranges. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all power wiring for these devices. Enclosures suitable for the environment shall be MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-2 provided. Instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the particular hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed. B. The control panel controls shall be 120 VAC. Where the electrical power supply to the control panel is 240 VAC single phase or 480 VAC 3-phase, the control panel shall be provided with a control panel transformer. Control conductors shall be provided in accordance with the indicated requirements. C. The control panel shall be the source of power for any 120 VAC solenoid valves interconnected with the control panel. Equipment associated with the control panel shall be ready for service after connection of conductors to equipment, controls, and control panel. D. The main feeder disconnect shall have a door-mounted handle unless otherwise indicated. E. Unless indicated otherwise, control panels shall be housed in NEMA rated enclosures in accordance with Section 16050 — Electrical Work, General. Control panels shall be either freestanding, pedestal-mounted or equipment skid- mounted, as indicated. Internal control components shall be mounted on an internal Uack-panel or side-panel as required. F. Each source of foreign voltage shall be isolated by providing disconnecting or pull-apart terminal blocks or a disconnect operable from the control panel front. Each control panel shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the connection of all external conductors. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient terminal blocks to connect 25 percent additional conductors for future use. G. Motor starters, where required, shall be in accordance with Section 16480 - Low Voltage Motor Control Center. Each motor starter shall be provided with contact closures for motor overload, local indication, and remote alarm. Electrical components shall be of standard American manufacture. H. Discrete outputs from the control panel shall be provided by electrically isolated contacts rated for 5 amps at 120 VAC. Analog inputs and outputs shall be isolated +-20 mA, 2-wire signals with power supply. I. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) may be supplied in lieu of relays, provided the programmable logic controllers match the PLCs provided under Section 17520- PLC-Based Control Systems Hardware. J. Control panel mounted devices shall be mounted a minimum of 3 feet above finished floor elevation. Provide all combination motor starters not furnished in a MCC but specified in Section 11000- Equipment General Provisions. K. Painting: Steel control panels shall be thoroughly cleaned and sand blasted per Society for Protective Coatings SP 6 (Commercial Blast) after which surfaces shall receive a prime coat of Amercoat 185 or equal, 3-mils DFT, for a total thickness of the prime plus finish system of 6 mils. The finished color of the outside surfaces shall be selected by the ENGINEER, unless otherwise indicated. Interior of the control panel, back-panel, and side panels shall have a MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-3 white finish coat. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish 2 one-pint containers of the finish coat for future maintenance purposes. 2.2 CONTROL PANELS A. Materials 1. Steel panel section faces shall be No. 12 gauge minimum thickness for free standing panels and No. 14 gauge minimum thickness for wall mounted or pedestal mounted panels. Materials shall be selected for levelness and smoothness. Panels shall conform to NEMA Type 4 standards. 2. Structural shapes and strap steel shall comply with ASTM A 283 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Grade C. a. Bolting Material: Commercial quality carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers shall be 1/2-inch diameter with UNC threads. Carriage bolts shall be used for attaching end plates. All other bolts shall be hex end machine bolts. Nuts shall be hot pressed hex, American Standard, heavy. Standard wrought washers shall be used for foundation bolts and attachments to building structures. Other bolted joints shall have SAE standard lock washers. 3. Construction: Dimensions shall be in accordance with vendor's requirements. Elevations and horizontal spacing shall be subject to ENGINEER'S approval. B. Fabrication 1. End plates, top plates, and top closure panels (to hung ceiling) shall be provided when required by the material requisition. End plates, top plates, and top closure panels shall be removable with countersunk bolts to match panels. Top closure panels shall be furnished in lengths which match the widths of standard panels, except that one top closure panel may extend across two 4-foot 6-inch wide or five 2-foot wide standard panels. The vertical joints of these panels shall align with the vertical joints of the standard panels. 2. End closure or rear closure doors shall be provided where required. Such doors shall be flush fitting, gasketed, and be of the hinged lift-off type with lockable door handles. A common key shall be provided for all doors on one panel assembly. Removable access panels shall be provided with dished handle fasteners. Screw driver 1/4 turn or Dzus type fasteners are not acceptable. a. The flanged edges of all panels shall be straight and smooth. Corners shall be welded and ground smooth. b. The face of the panel shall be true and level after flanging. MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-4 C. All panel cutouts and holes may be cut or drilled by any standard method that does not cause deformation. Burrs shall be ground smooth. d. Adjacent panels shall assemble with faces flush. Gaps or cracks shall not be visible from the front of the assembled instrument board. e. Stiffeners shall be welded to the back of panels, as required to prevent panel deformation due to the weight of face mounted instruments. t. Panels shall be self-supporting as defined below. C. Framework and Supports 1. The rear of each panel section shall have a steel framework assembled to it for supporting conduit, wireways, switches, piping, and instrument accessory items such as relay or terminal enclosures, transducers, pressure switches, valves, and air relays. The main frame work shall be constructed of standard structural shapes. Special shapes such as "Unistrut" may be used for secondary supports. Framework must neither interfere with instrument connections nor interfere with access needed for maintenance or adjustments. 2. Steel framework shall extend 2-feet 4-inches back from the panel face or as indicated in the material requisition. Where indicated, individual ,adjustable leg supports shall be provided at the back of the framework so that the entire panel is self-supporting. D. Preparation of Panel Surface 1. The following requirements apply to the front and rear face of the panel, both sides and the edges of all flanges, and the periphery of all holes or cutouts. a. High spots, burrs, and rough spots shall be ground smooth. b. The surfaces shall be sanded or sandblasted to a smooth, clean, bright finish. C. All traces of oil shall be removed with a solvent. d. The first coat of primer shall be applied immediately. E. Instrument Finishing: The final coats applied to painted surface of instrument cases, doors, or bezels which are visible from the front of panels shall be manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. Black japan or "crinkle" finishes on instrument cases are not acceptable. F. Mounting of Instruments MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-5 1. The panel vendor shall provide cutouts, and shall mount all instrument items indicated to be panel mounted, including any instruments indicated to be furnished by other vendors but installed in the panel. 2. The panel vendor shall also mount behind the panels other instrument ) accessory items as required for functionality as indicated. +. 3. Equipment mounted at the rear of panel shall be installed to allow for commissioning adjustments, servicing requirements, and cover removal. 4. Spare space shall be kept clear of wiring, etc., to give maximum space for future additions. G. Electrical Requirements 1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide conduit, wireways, switches, wire, and electrical fittings for 120 volt circuits to instruments and other electrical devices as required for a complete and operable installation. 2. Conduit, wireways, junction boxes and fittings shall be provided for signal wire, thermocouple, or resistance thermometer lead wire. Conduit or wireway runs shall include those required between temperature sensors and temperature transmitters and between the thermocouple wireway or junction box and instruments. 3. Each terminal connection shall have a plastic plate with a terminal and instrument tag number. Wiring shall be identified with stamped tubular wire end markers. 4. Freestanding panels shall be provided with a manual switched back-of- panel lights by Hoffman Model A-LF15M18. One light shall be provided for every 4-feet of panel width and shall be mounted inside and in the top of the back-of-panel area. 5. Panels shall be provided with a 15 amp, 120 volt; service outlet circuit within the back-of-panel area. The circuit shall be provided with 3 wire, 120 volt, 15 ampere, duplex receptacles, one for every 4-feet of panel width (one minimum per panel), spaced evenly along the back-of-panel area. 6. Wall mounted or pedestal mounted panels shall be so sized as to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted in or on the panel. 7. Wall mounted or pedestal mounted panels mounted outside or in unshaded areas shall be provided with thermostatically controlled heaters that maintain inside temperature above 40 degrees F. 8. Provide a hand switch controlled 100 watt incandescent light and a breaker protected 120 volt, 15 amp duplex receptacle within each wall mounted or pedestal mounted panel larger than 4 cubic feet volume. MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-6 9. Wiring Methods: Wiring methods and materials for all panels shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise indicated. 10. Signal and Control Circuit Wiring a. Wire type and sizes: Conductor shall be flexible stranded copper machine tool wire, UL listed Type MTW, and shall be rated 600 volts. Wires for instrument signal circuits and alarm input circuits shall be No. 14 AWG. All other wires, including shielded cables, shall be No. 16 AWG minimum. b. Wire Insulation Colors: Conductors supplying 120 VAC power on the line side of a disconnecting switch shall have a black insulation for the ungrounded conductor. Grounded circuit conductors shall have white insulation. Insulation for ungrounded 120V AC control circuit conductors shall be red. Wires energized by a voltage source external to the control panel shall have yellow insulation. Insulation for DC conductors shall be blue. C. Wire Marking: Wire numbers shall be marked using white numbered wire markers made from plastic-coated cloth, Brady Type B 500 or equal, or shall be heat shrink plastic. d. Flexible conduit is not acceptable except when specifically approved by the ENGINEER in writing. e. Conduit fittings shall be Crouse Hinds cast fittings or equal. f. Splicing of wires will only be allowed in junction boxes. Splices shall be either soldered or pressure crimped type. g. For case grounding, panels shall be provided with a 1/4-inch by f- inch copper ground bus complete with solder-less connector for one No. 4 AWG bare stranded copper cable. The copper cable shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR and be connected to a system ground loop. 11. Electrical Locations a. When the Contract Documents call for thermocouple actuated instruments, the thermocouple lead wire shall be installed without junction by the CONTRACTOR. The panel vendor shall provide dedicated empty conduits or wireways running from the instrument(s) to the top or bottom of the panel as called for in the material specifications or as otherwise required. Sizing of the conduit or wireway shall be in accordance with the capacity of the instrument(s). b. Single case (no remote logic) annunciator units shall be installed at the top of panel and may be considered as a terminal box.when top of panel wire entry is indicated. If bottom of panel entry is MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-7 indicated, a terminal box shall be provided at the bottom of the panel and be wired to the annunciator unit. Terminals shall be identified with plastic marker strips. C. Terminal boxes for incoming and outgoing signal leads shall be located at the top or bottom of the panel as indicated in the '* material specification, or as otherwise required. 12. Power Supply Wiring a. Unless otherwise indicated, instruments, alarm systems, and motor controls shall operate on 120 volt, 60 Hz circuits. b. At a location near the top of the panel (or bottom), the panel fabricator shall provide terminal box connections for the main power supply entry. C. Power supply switches for alarm units shall be 3 pole type, arranged to open both power circuits and alarm circuits. Each annunciator unit shall be equipped with a separate switch. d. Instruments located on the same panel section and serving the same process unit may be connected to a common branch circuit from the power supply. The number of circuits depends on the circuit load as noted herein. A 15 amp, 2 pole circuit breaker shall be provided in each branch circuit. The circuit load shall not exceed 10 amp. Different panel sections or different process units must not use common branch circuits. When instruments do not come equipped with integral fuses, provide fuses as required for the protection of individual instruments against fault currents. Fuses shall be mounted on the back of the panel in a fuse holder, and each fuse shall be identified by a service name tag. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussmann Manufacturing Division, Type KAW TRON or equal. e. Each potentiometer type instrument, electronic transducer, controller, or analyzer shall have an individual disconnect switch. Disconnect switches shall have metal or plastic tags indicating instrument tag numbers. Individual plug and cord set power supply connections may be used without switches when indicated in the material specification. f. Where alarm units are single unit types, one switch may be used to disconnect not more than 6 alarm units located on the same or adjacent panels. 13. Alarm Wiring: The panel vendor shall install and wire alarms including light cabinets, audible signal units, test and acknowledge switches, and remote logic units as indicated. Interconnecting wiring to panel mounted initiating devices shall also be wired by the panel vendor. The wiring from external initiating devices shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. Where plug and cord sets are provided for component interconnection, MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-8 the panel vendor shall harness and support the cables in neat and orderly fashion. Where separate wire is required, panel vendor shall install No. 16 AWG with THWN or THHN insulation between all components. 14. Signal Wiring a. Signal Wire - Non Computer Use 1) Signal wire shall be twisted pair or triads in conduit or troughs. Cable shall be constructed of No. 16 AWG copper signal wires with THWN or THHN insulation. 2) Color code for instrument signal wiring shall be as follows: I. Positive (+)— Black II. Negative (-) -White 3) Multiconductor cables where indicated shall consist of No. 16 AWG copper signal wires twisted in pairs, with 90-C, 600 V fault insulation. A copper drain wire shall be provided for the bundle with a wrap of aluminum polyester shield. The overall bundle jacket shall be PVC. b. Signal Wire - Computer Use 1) Signal wires shall be similar to those for non-computer use but each pair shall be triplexed with a copper drain wire and aluminum polyester tape shall be applied over the triplexed group. Cable shields, including thermocouple extension leads shall be terminated in the central control room at the computer system grounding bus. Continuity of the shield shall be maintained throughout the cable runs. C. Multi-conductor cables, wireways and conduit shall be sized to allow for 10 percent spare signal wire. H. Labor and Workmanship: Panels shall be fabricated, piped, and wired by fully qualified workmen who are properly trained, experienced, and supervised. 2.3 SCADA SYSTEM ENCLOSURES A. Each SC ADA system PLC and remote 1/0 system and corresponding housing, 1/0 modules, power supply modules, communication interface devices, and peripheral equipment shall be mounted inside a NEMA 4 enclosure in accordance with Section 16050. 1/0 wiring from the field to the remote 1/0 system shall be terminated on terminal blocks in the lower portion of the enclosure. A nameplate shall be mounted on the outside of the door of the enclosure and be engraved with "PLC-X" or "RIO-X" where "X" is the number as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated, PLCs mounted in free standing enclosures shall be 84-inches tall by 26-inches wide by 24-inches deep, minimum. Where indicated, PLCs mounted in wall or pedestal mounted N%=001 MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-9 enclosures shall be 36-inches tall by 24-inches wide by 24-inches deep, minimum. Enclosures shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, or equal. 2.4 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Control panel spare parts selected by the ENGINEER and special tools shall be %Roe furnished in accordance with Section 17100. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Preparation for Shipment and Shipping 1. Panels shall be crated for shipment using a heavy framework and skids. Panel sections shall be cushioned to protect the finish of the instruments and panel during shipment. Instruments which are shipped with the panel shall further have suitable shipping stops and cushioning material installed to protect parts which could be damaged due to mechanical shock. Each separate panel unit shall be provided with removable lifting lugs to facilitate handling. 2. Shipments shall be by air ride van unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control panel testing and inspection shall be performed prior to shipping. 4. Control panels shall be installed in accordance with Section 17100. 3.2 CONTROL PANEL SIGNAL AND CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING A. Wiring Installation: Wires shall be run in plastic wireways except (1) field 1%1 wiring, (2) wiring between mating blocks in adjacent sections, (3) wiring from components on a swing out panel to components on a part of the fixed structure, and (4) wiring to panel mounted components. Wiring run from components on a swing out panel to other components on a fixed panel shall be made up in tied bundles. These bundles shall be tied with nylon wire ties and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the "hinge loop" so that conductors are not strained at the terminals. B. Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short intervals with nylon wire ties and be secured to the inside face of the panel using adhesive mounts. C. Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be in plastic wireways secured to horizontal brackets above or below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear of the instruments. D. Shop Drawings shall show conformance to the above wiring installation requirements. MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-10 E. Wire Marking: Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to a given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on Shop Drawings. These numbers shall be marked on conductors at every terminal. 3.3 CALIBRATION, TESTING, AND INSTRUCTION A. General: Calibration, testing, and instruction shall be performed in accordance with Section 17100. B. Inspection and Approval 1. Panel fabricator shall conduct the following tests prior to arrival of the ENGINEER or before shipment, if the ENGINEER chooses not to witness factory testing. a. Alarm circuits rung out to determine their operability. b. Electrical circuits checked for continuity and where applicable, operability. C. Any other test required to place the panel in an operating condition. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to furnish all necessary testing devices and sufficient manpower to perform the tests required by the ENGINEER. 3. Field Testing: Each control panel shall be tested again for functional ,% „� operation in the field after the connection of external conductors and prior to equipment startup. - END OF SECTION - MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANELS CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17200-11 SECTION 17201 - CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 -- GENERAL `+' 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide control panel instrumentation, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 17100 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems apply to the WORK of this Section. C. The requirements of Section 17200 - Control Panels apply to the WORK of this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be included within the submittals of Section 17200 - Control Panels. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Power Supplies: Power supplies shall conform with the requirements of Section 17100. 2.2 INDICATORS A. Indicators, Digital Process: Digital process indicators shall be self-contained instruments that display process signals directly in engineering units. The unit shall be suitable for panel mounting and shall utilize a 3-1/2 digit LED display of no less than 0.5-inch height. The input signal to the digital process indicator shall be 4-20 mA DC or 1-5 VDC as indicated. The input sample rate of the unit shall be a minimum of 2 per second. The unit shall have an auto-zeroing feature and shall have provisions for field adjustable scaling and offset. Accuracy shall be plus and minus 1 least significant digit. Input power to the digital indicator shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. Digital process indicators shall be as manufactured by Moore Industries, Model 330, Digitec Corp., Action Instruments Co., or equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Control panel instrumentation shall be executed in accordance with Section 17100. - END OF SECTION - ,%"'' MWH—06/24/03 CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTATION CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17201-1 SECTION 17510S-PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.0 DESCRIPTION A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, and components, and shall provide all design, assembly, programming/configuration, testing, and start-up services required to provide a complete and operational programmable controller and radio telemetry system as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. This system shall hereby be referred to as Remote Terminal Unit, or RTU. The system includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Processors. 2. 1/0 modules, chassis, and power supplies. 3. Telephone modem interface modules. 4. Radio equipment, antenna, cables, power supplies, etc. 5. RTU system and radio system detailed design, assembly, programming/ configuration, installation, testing, and start-up services. 6. Securing of license on behalf of the OWNER for placing the radio system into operation. B. HSQ shall furnish the RTU and shall make programming changes to the main ,.-Moo, computer at the Holly Water Treatment Plant SCADA building. The HMI configuration methodology shall match existing system configuration. The software work shall include: 1. Define and modify the data base as required. 2. Build one or more graphic screens to show the pump station and its instrumentation. 3. Provide storage and display of historical data to match similar displays for other pump stations in the system. 4. Verify and test the proper operation of the SCADA HMI system. 5. Modify daily and monthly reports to include new data. C. The RTU system shall be configured for the Input/Output signals as shown on the Contract Drawings. Some variations in the configuration will be considered provided the physical and functional constraints as intended for the various system components are met.Complete RTU system design, 1/O configuration,module/rack arrangement, construction, and additional coordination shall be required. The CONTRACTOR shall secure the services of HSQ Inc., to provide the RTU, fully ,%WWII MWH—06/24/03 PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17510S-1 constructed, programmed, configured, tested, and ready for field installation in the control panel by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all additional equipment, labor, materials, appurtenances and services required to accommodate and fully integrate the RTU into CONTRACTOR furnished control panel and the Instrumentation and Control System. L1 D. The RTU shall meet all the requirements as established by the City of Ft. Worth SCADA system. E. The CONTRACTOR shall retain ultimate responsibility under this Contract for equipment coordination, installation, operation and guarantee, and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and F. install all labor, equipment, materials, appurtenances, specialty items and services not provided by the supplier but required for a complete and operable system. The equipment covered by this specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven ability as manufactured by reputable concerns having extensive experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment furnished shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods,and shall operate satisfactorily when installed to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Related work specified elsewhere that shall apply to all equipment, materials, labor and services furnished under this Section shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Division 1, General Requirements: 2. Division 17, Instrumentation. 3. Division 16, Electrical. H. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to review and satisfy all relevant requirements of other Sections of the Contract Documents and the requirements of the Contract Drawings. The CONTRACTOR, manufacturer, supplier, fabricator and/or subcontractors furnishing and/or installing equipment, services and specialties associated with this Section shall fully coordinate their efforts to avoid potential claims and delays that are based on failure to review all relevant Contract Documents, including the Contract Drawings. 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 13600, Instrumentation and Control System General Requirements. 1.2 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Comply with the requirements of Section 13600, Instrumentation and Control System General Requirements. MWH—06/24/03 PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH %Woo, MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17510S-2 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.0 RTU SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide a complete remote terminal unit system with processor(s), input/output modules, power supplies, radio communication equipment and components as required to meet the operational requirements of the Contract Documents. RTU-2 equipment shall be housed in a free standing, front access, NEMA 12, 304 SS enclosure as substantially indicated on the Drawings. B. RTU shall be the manufactured by HSQ. Furnish model 25000/86 unit with 24vDC power supply and nicad battery pack as standardized by the City of Fort Worth, Texas. The 24vDc power supply shall have a 12 vDC output for the radio. C. Input/Output(1/0)shall be as indicated on the RTU 1/0 schedule plus 20%spare. All points are to be wired to terminals. D. RTU shall be designed for operation on 120VAC supply power. All required stepdovun transformers and power supplies shall be provided as part of the system. Internal battery back-up systems shall be provided to supply power in the event of an external power failure. E. RTU enclosure shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of Specification 13650, Control Panels and Enclosures. RTU shall receive 120VAC power from a lighting panel for accessories such as lighting,convenience receptacle, exhaust fan, heater, etc. RTU shall receive 120VAC UPS power for the actual remote terminal equipment, power supplies, etc. �..� F. The RTU panel shall include a convenience outlet and interior panel light. The outlet shall be labeled "COMPUTER POWER ONLY". G. The radio shall be mounted in the RTU enclosure. The radio shall be on the RTU battery backup at 12 VDC. The radio shall be a MDS Model 9710b. H. Radio configuration. Configure radio per the manufacturer's instructions and to match existing system configuration. Record and submit all final programmed settings and operating parameters. 1. Radio testing. Run poll test, link test and sync test with manufacturer's diagnostic software and submit results to Engineer for review. Test and record radio rf power level.This test shall also be used to align Yagi antenna for maximum signal strength. All tests shall be witnessed by Engineer or Owners representative. Provide 10 days notice of testing. J. Furnish and install a CushCraft Model 9010N 12db gain 10 element Yagi antenna. Antenna cable shall be '/z" Andrew Heliax#LDF4-50A coaxial cable. Yagi antenna shall be configured for vertical polarization. Antenna cable shall be grounded at the floor level with Andrew's ground kit#204989-1. The ground strap shall be connected to the ground mat system. Antenna cable shall have a Polyphaser model IS-50NX- C2 grounded surge arrestor at the bottom of the RTU. Connectors shall be N type, MWH—06/24/03 PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17510S-3 Andrew L4PNM and L4PNF. Furnish 1/4"foam superflex, Andrew# FSJ2-50A for final connection to radio. K. Superflex shall have factory installed connectors. Weatherproof all outdoor connectors with Andrew kits, 241475-13, 2415498-9 or approved equal. Carefully inspect installed cable for nicks and kinks. Check VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio)after installation and submit test results to engineer for review. Record values at RTU cabinet. L. Provide a grounded Polyphaser surge arrestor Model IS-PSP-120 on the incoming power leads to the RTU power supply. M. Surge Suppression. Provide a Current Technology Load Guard MSU-45-120 surge suppressor installed in the 120VAC power circuit ahead of the RTU and radio power supplies and all 120 VAC powered instruments. Provide fused terminal strips for feed to RTU and each 120 VAC power instrument. 2.1 INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES A. Digital inputs shall be discrete input points which monitor dry contact closures (or openings)externally located from RTU's enclosure,with`wetting"power provided by BTU's power supplies. B. Digital outputs shall be isolated discrete output points which provide dry contact closures to complete circuits with "wetting" power located elsewhere, such as the control power transformer of a motor controller. The digital output contacts shall be rated for 5A at 120VAC. If interposing relays are required, they shall be furnished in accordance with Specification 13650, Control Panels and Enclosures, and supplied as part of the completed assembly of RTU. Contact closures to start and stop equipment shall be "momentary'. Refer to the Instrumentation Drawings and the Electrical Drawings for interface connections. C. Analog inputs shall be of the isolated type that accept 24VDC, 4-20mA signals. D. Analog outputs shall be of the isolated type that produce 24VDC, 4-20mA signals. E. Provide a minimum of 20 percent spare 1/0 points of each type in addition to those points dedicated to future equipment. F. All 1/0 points shall be wired from the module to field terminal blocks inside of G. RTU. No external field wiring shall be landed directly to 1/0 modules. 2.2 SPARE PARTS AND EXPENDABLE MATERIALS A. The ENGINEER will select the required spare parts from the priced list of spare parts in the Hardware Submittal, and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish them. The MWH—06/24/03 PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH `moo, MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17510S-4 CONTRACTOR will be paid from the corresponding allowance item in the Bid,and the total price will not exceed the amount of the allowance item. B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a priced list of all special tools required to calibrate ,*mop" and maintain the instrumentation provided under the Contract Documents. After approval the CONTRACTOR shall furnish tools on that list. C. All spareparts shall be individually packaged for protection against impact,moisture, and dirt. Each package shall be clearly labeled as to its contents with a description and part number. 2.3 ANTENNA TOWER, CABLE, MISC PARTS A. Provide one antenna tower with all appurtenances 1. The tower shall be a 22"inch face triangular design tower using 1 7/16"solid rod steel legs tapering to 1' 6" spread using 5/16" solid rod legs, with a continuous 5/8 inch steel bracing in cross pattern. 2. Each section will be joined to the next with a swaged steel double bolted connection for extra strength. 3. The tower will be completely hot dip galvanized after fabrication and available in 10 foot sections. 4. Tower shall be designed and certified to withstand winds of 90 miles per hour, no ice. All manufacturer recommended parts shall be included. 5. Tower shall be Rohn Self-Supporting Tower Kit Part number SS050D90. 6. Tower height shall be minimum 50 feet. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the foundation design for the tower installation. The design shall be sealed and signed by a registered professional engineer. 8. The antenna tower and foundation shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. The location of the antenna on the tower shall be coordinated with HSQ. MWH—06/24/03 PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17510S-5 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.0 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Install all equipment and components in accordance with the Contract Documents,approved Shop Drawings,and installation instructions furnished by the manufacturer. 2. Do not begin installation of field instruments, system hardware, and panel until building construction is completed and major equipment has been installed. 3. Maintain areas where instruments,control panels and enclosures are being or have been installed, dust free and within the environmental conditions specified for the equipment. 4. Inspect each instrument, panel and other items for damage and defects before installation. Replace deficient items. 5. RTU components, modules, etc., shall be installed such that all LED indicators and switches are readily visible with the panel door open and such that repair and/or replacement of any component can be accomplished without disconnecting any wiring or removing any other components. 6. Comply with the other specific installation,start-up,and testing requirements as specified in Section 13600, Instrumentation and Control System General Requirements. 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS A. Certification: 1. Provide a written certification letter, authored and signed by the RTU system factory representative, stating that the RTU system has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and that the RTU system is functioning properly. B. Training: 1. Provide training in accordance with Section 13603, Instrumentation and Control System Training. --END OF SECTION-- MWH—06/24/03 PLC-BASED CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE CITY OF FORT WORTH MCCART AVENUE PUMP STATION AND STORAGE TANK PAGE 17510S-6 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S ..� COMPENSATION CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW Pursuant to Article 8308-3.23 of Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes, Contractor certifies that it provides worker's compensation insurance coverage for all of it's employees employed on City of Fort Worth Project Number P160-060160160010 Archer Western. Contractorso Ltd. CONTRACT R i By: President Title August 3, 2007 Date STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF TARRANT § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared Matthew Walsh ,known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same as the act and deed of Archer Western Contractors for the purposes and consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated. GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this 3rd day of August , 2007. �� -\tN kRI AH�����ii �� AFC ii,� ��LL4A !< • ;•NpTARVpG�<��' � Notary Public in and for the State of Texas �F TE1lP5 •'•:-NES CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Contractor must attach Standard ACORD Form 7 DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) A CORD. __jm 'IF'ltCA']C'E O]F`"IA��XT�: RA- ,' 08/09/2007 PRODUCER Risk Services, inc. of .Illinois A THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY on 200 East Randolph AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS Chicago IL 60601 USA CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. PHONE• 866 283-7122 FAX- $47 953-5390 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED INSURER A: Arch Insurance Company 11150 .. Archer western Contractors, Ltd. INSURERB: Westchester Fire Insurance Co 21121 y 2121 Avenue J Suite 103 INSURERC: Arlington TX 76006 USA V INSURER D: � INSURER E: ►��i covERA E 4 THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ADD'L POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LTR INSRD TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE(MWDD\YY) DATE(MM\DD\YY) LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY 41PKG2130201 06/01/07 06/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE S1,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED S300,000 PREMISES CLAIMS MADE M OCCUR M D E (Any o a y onnee person) —firm PERSONAL&ADV INJURY S1,000,000 GGo W GENERAL AGGREGATE S2,000,000 0 GENT AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: rn PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG S2,000,000 N ❑ POLICY El PRO- ❑ LOC O JECTLn O Ih A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 41CAB2130301 06/01/07 06/01/08 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT A X ANY AUTO MA (Ea accident) S2,000,000 z 41PKG2130201 06/01/07 06/01/08 ALL OWNED AUTOS AOS BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per Person) 4. X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY v X NON OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) V PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY-EA ACCIDENT ANY AUTO H OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY AGG B EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY G22023007002 06/01/07 06/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,00 FRI OCCUR ❑ CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S101000,000 HDEDUCTIBLE RETENTION A 41WCI2130101 1 X WC STATU- OTH - WORKERSCOMPENSATIONAND TOR LIMITS TI EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE S1,000,0 Ifyes,describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT S1,000,000 below OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS McCart Pump Station and Ground storage Tank - Job 207054. See attached. CERTIFICATE HOLDER _: I, =',.T`[U r City Of Fort worth water Department SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION 1000 Throckmorton DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL Ft, worth TX 76102 USA 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY d'•' OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Aon lW-sk Abrvlcrs, he 0j-"P70L4 A 20ACORD CORPO . _. INSURED Archer western Contractors, Ltd. 2121 Avenue Suite 103 Arlington TX 76006 USA Attachment 1. City of Fort worth water Department 2. Montgomery Watson Harza are an Additional insured pertaining to General Liability with respects to liability arising out of the Named insured's operations on the referenced project. Professional services for Architects, Engineers, Consultants, etc. are excluded. The General Liability policy includes the perils of (XCU) Explosion, Collapse and underground. Certificate No: 570024380683 PART F BONDS AND INSURANCE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND MAINTENANCE BOND ' Bond No.8 SB 104926156 BCA PERFORMANCE BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF TARRANT § That we, (1) Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. as Principal herein, and (2) Travelers Casualty and Surety Co=a.nv a corporation organized under the laws of the State of(3) Connecticut , and who is authorized to issue surety bonds in the State of Texas, Surety herein, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation located in Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the sum of Five Million Three Hundred Ninety-One Thousand & no cents Dollars ($ 5.391 .000,00 ) for the payment of which sum we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee dated the 9 day of _A_,,ies E , 20ol, a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof for all purposes, for the construction of McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank Site installation and preparation. Storage Tank: P160-060160160010 & Pump Station: P160-060160180010 Associated facilities will include a 33 million gallon/day (MGD) potable water pump station, fully enclosed in an above ground concrete building, and 5-million gallon (MG) welded steel ground storage tank. Installation will include appurtenances such as associated piping, electrical, controls and instrumentation, valves and valve boxes, paving, security measures, and other equipment and improvements as noted in the contract documents. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents and shall fully indemnify and hold harmless the Obligee from all costs and damages which Obligee may suffer by reason of Principal's default, and reimburse and repay Obligee for all outlay and expense that Obligee may incur in making good such default, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of such statute, to the same extent as if it were copied at length ,%mole herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal and the Surety have executed this instrument. SIGNED and SEALED this 9 day of A(,)o F . 2007. Archer Western Contr ctor. , Ltd. PRINCIPAL) ATTEST: By: l Name: Matthew Walsh (6 cipal) Secretary Title: President (S E A L) Address: 2121 Avenue 'J' Suite 103 Arlington, TX 76006 Witness as to Principal Travelers Casualty and Surety Company SURETY ATTEST: By: Name: Eileen Luci tt Secretary Attorney in Fact - i - 1 (S E A L) Address: One Tower Square ,y Hartford, CT 'Qb $3 Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: (847) 384-8619 NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor). (2) Correct name of Surety. (3) State of incorporation of Surety Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attorney-in-Fact. The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract. WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER 0 TRAVELERS POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity And Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Attorney-In Fact No. 218690 Certificate No. O O 16 5 J 5 O 2 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York,that St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota,that Farmington Casualty Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws pf the State of Connecticut,that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland,that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa,and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin(herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint Kevin P.Nagel,Eileen Lucitt,and David C.Banks of the City of Park Ridge/CrestwoodlWheaton ,State of Illinois their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute,seal and acknowledge any and all bonds,recognizances,conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitt9 d`in any aata'ons or pffteedings allowed by law. WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies ie have caused this instrume,#t":to'be signed and incorporate seals to be hereto affixed,this 23rd y of y Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty insurance Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company G�SU,��' ��,v•p � 1}• J FIFE a°�.. O\'M INSL9 Jpa�'�N�`ti,. aJ*iY ANo• FO2 0��'4Pr L VV-Y "4e * 4r �'�94 r4'�QRPORq>'�i P�:'aPOFg9.11�,•i � L•P� �t Z` O 1977 �AORai 1927 < cn: "' zE �._ ;ol w tIARiFOR�, < wuttrorm,5 < • t ��, 'n �S •o Cpgq, o OONM. 1896 JD � 1951 m' , �;SE ALio/ o;SBJLL,'a � �y� �r � �� �OF NEW 9�'n'�^„:cE co `�15.'A�+ar� `<i •. '�n 61 '„a r � S' W v.•..... .•a � a° ""' �AtJA1H State of Connecticut By: City of Hartford ss.^ Georg Thompson,t®r ice President .-3rd V� May 2007 On thisthe — 3;a3 of , before me personally appeared George W. Thompson, who acknowledged himseff3oN the SeilioGPice rt3 of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., beard SurebL-Compffity,$rPaul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casuatiy and SuretXS)�inpany,Traael_ers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,and that he,as such,being authori edAo tp do,executed the faregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. QL In Witness Whereof,I hereunto set my hand Sind official seal. z� y Commission expires the 30th day of June,2011. f � # Mane C.Tetreault,Notary Public 58440-8-06 Printed in U.S.A. V AF1NING:THIS P IER OF AT-roRNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNINCA:THIl KN1ER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUTTHE�RED BORDER ` This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vi President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behal of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attomeys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I,Kori M.Johanson,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance, Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surinpan "Q eric , d United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power,4f't�ctome led,by,s ompanies,which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. i r i Q IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand an i s the seals of said, ,liipanies this 1 day of 9yIUA 200 Kori M.Johans Assistant Secretary O GRSu.�j � rr Jy PRE64 O`RN!My`G q,�.1NSUg4 Jpltr aM°e gqyy,R/ia'3':'W(Er� S1�Y't'� �'O�O`lIr L * it 7p ��OR P°Ra�'D7i �J•' .qC'ti m �I E'(m W(pOaPORAf 1F 7 34 �i� iltt f' E „; � NNIIFORD, �RrFaaa 9 «;SS]CL;�p r M1fa 'iy� HCE� `'18 -"N:jL lr of ..........:. r•;;+ r �M AIN To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.stpaultravelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BOHOER Bond No. 8 SB 104926156 BCA PAYMENT BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: COUNTY OF TARRANT § That we, (1), Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. as Principal herein, and (2) Travelers Casualty and Surety Company , a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of(3) Connecticut , as surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Worth, a municipal corporation located in Tarrant and Denton Counties, Texas, Obligee herein, in the amount of Five Million Three Hundred Ninety-One Thousand & no cents Dollars ($ 5,391,000.00) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally,firmly by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee dated the q day of Av w) 20AJ, which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as if fully and to the same extent as if copied at length, for the following project: McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank Site installation and preparation. Storage Tank: P1 60-0601 601 6001 0 & Pump Station: P1 60-0601 601 8001 0 Associated facilities will include a 33 million gallon/day (MGM potable water pump station, fully enclosed in an above ground concrete building, and 5-million gallon (MG) welded steel ground storage tank. Installation will include appurtenances such as associated piping, electrical, controls and instrumentation, valves and valve boxes, Paving, security measures, and other equipment and improvements as noted in the contract documents. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully make payment to each and every claimant (as defined in Chapter 2253, Texas Government Code, as amended) supplying labor or materials in the prosecution of the work under.the contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said statute, to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the duly authorized representatives of the Principal and the Surety have executed this instrument. SIGNED and SEALED this�_day of X%koA , 200-4 . Archer Western Contractorsh Ltd. PRINCIPAL ATTEST: By: 142 /lid Name: Matthew Walsh (P ipal) Secretary Title: President (S E A L) Address: 2121 Avenue 'J' Suite 103 Arlington, TX 76006 itness as to Principal�/ Travelers Casualty and Surety Company SURETY ATTEST: By: A) %!A' Name: Eileen Lucitt Secretary Attorney in Fact (S E A L) Address: One Tower Square Hartford, CT 06183 N 4L - - Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: (847) 384-8619 NOTE: (1) Correct name of Principal (Contractor). (2) Correct name of Surety. (3) State of incorporation of Surety Telephone number of surety must be stated. In addition, an original copy of Power of Attorney shall be attached to Bond by the Attorney-in-Fact. The date of bond shall not be prior to date of Contract. 9 WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER TRAVELERS POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Attorney-In Fact No. 218690 Certificate No. 001659503 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESEN�S:That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York,that St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota,that Farmington Casualty Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut,that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland,that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa,and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin(herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint Kevin P.Nagel,Eileen Lucitt,and David C.Banks of the City of Park Ridge/Crestwood/Wheaton ,State of Illinois their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute,seal and acknowledge any and all bonds,recognizances,conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any' ions of ptttceedings allowed by law. 23rd N WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and theit,eorporate seals to be hereto affixed,this y of May , 2007 Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company GR6Uq �� tr FIRE 4 N �N :•'� IMSU P Ily Afte �,Patwny� ���Yako L �°4oq * 4� �'P ftOR PORA 1.�y Q4•:: .:'{f,s 4' G9 `0 z �/ f t'� W iGOPPOR4Tf� �a ° t9e2�o '� 197T "1C0^Pgratm 1927 K �t — '}^ :: __ .�i wuaro, wsmaea 5 <O 7�`��t 1951 m `•SEAL o �' �' '" cONrr, n caw. c ;n t896 t aa � � ,� �� om ��.• i Jt �`,S81LL:`a �, ry� RM �y � �OF � A�;,;Fnr+cFc af......-•sari v.•... :•'aD � ash � •N �l�A1Na' State of Connecticut By: City of Hartford ss. Ly Georg Thompson, enior ice President 2Vd 2007 On this ttt` - (iay".of ,before me personally appeared George W.Thompson,who acknowledged himselfm-ie Jlte STio4ice Pr&ii4ntof Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.,S4boar13SuretgoUipany,'Si.Pat4Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers CasualtF tatd-,Surety l ordWhy,TraveleEs Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,and that he,as such,being authorized so io do,execuled the 1644:4 tg instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. ' 4 V W In Witness Whereof,I hereunto set my hand and official seal. ' �VVw�Commission expires the 30th day of June,2011. * Mane C.Tetreault,Notary Public 58440-8-06 Printed in U.S.A. WARNING-THI POWEP OF AT%)FiNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RF,D 43ORDER WARNING:THIS POWER GF ATTORNEY IS 9NVALM WITHOUT TEiEr RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vi' President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on beha of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I,Kori M.Johanson,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurancg Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surgm pan Atneric d United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Powez..0fiAttornPX gx uted b}t s ompanies,which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and amxed the st%ls of said-_0D&panies this day of AV)")f 20 Kori M.Johans Assistant Secretary G�SU,F�f pl��•uq� $U�fly JYF\0.E 6 4 o�*M_-�Mg`9 Jp�1N3Ugq OJT fY ayoo ot E A L AIN� To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.stpaultravelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. YVARNING-_THIS PLOWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVA&Q WITHOUT THE RED 50FICIER Bond No. 8 SB 104926156 BCA MAINTENANCE BOND THE STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF TARRANT § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: That Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. ("Contractor"), as Travelers Casualty and principal, and, surety y Company a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut , ("Surety"), do hereby acknowledge themselves to be held and bound to pay unto the City of Fort Worth, a Municipal Corporation chartered by virtue of Constitution and laws of the State of Texas, ("City") in Tarrant County, Texas, the sum of Five Million Three Hundred Ninety-One Thousand & 00/100 Dollars ($ 5,391,000.00 ), lawful money of the United States, for payment of which sum well and truly be made unto said City and its successors, said Contractor and Surety do hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, assigns and successors,jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned, however, that: WHEREAS, said Contractor has this day entered into a written Contract with the City of Fort Worth, dated the °L of Ame-us}- , 20 0-4, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for the performance of the following described public improvements: McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank Site installation and preparation. Storage Tank: P160-060160160010 & Pump Station: P160-060160180010 Associated facilities will include a 33 million -gallon/day (MGD) potable water pump station, fully enclosed in an above Around concrete building, and 5-million gallon (MG) welded steel ground storage tank. Installation will include appurtenances such as associated piping, electrical, controls and instrumentation, valves and valve boxes, paving, security measures, and other equipment and improvements as noted in the contract documents. the same being referred to herein and in said contract as the Work and being designated as project number(s) P160-060160180010 and said contract, including all of the specifications, conditions, addenda, change orders and written instruments referred to therein as Contract Documents being incorporated herein and being made a part hereof; and, WHEREAS, in said Contract, Contractor binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the work that it will remain in good repair and condition for and during a period of after the date of the final acceptance of the work by the City; and WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself to maintain said work in good repair and condition for said term of Two (2) years; and WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself to repair or reconstruct the Work in whole or in part at any time within said period, if in the opinion of the Director of the City of Fort Worth Department of Engineering, it be necessary; and, WHEREAS, said Contractor binds itself, upon receiving notice of the need therefore to repair or reconstruct said Work as herein provided. NOW THEREFORE, if said Contractor shall keep and perform its said agreement to maintain, repair or reconstruct said Work in accordance with all the terms and conditions of said Contract, these presents shall be null and void, and have no force or effect. Otherwise, this Bond shall be and remain in full force and effect, and the City shall have and recover from Contractor and Surety damages in the premises as prescribed.by said Contract. This obligation shall be a continuing one and successive recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches until the full amount hereof is exhausted. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in_ counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, this �] day of Av5%,jiF , A.D. 2001 ATTEST: Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. (S E A L) Contractor "in, P, A By: Mh� Se tary Name: Matthew Walsh Title: President Travelers Casualty and Surety Company (S E A L) Surety 71UANL. Luc; By. Shy. Name: Eileen -Lucitt _ Title: Attorney-in-Fact One Tower Square Hartford, CT 06183 Address WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER TRAVELERS POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Attorney-In Fact No. 218690 Certificate No. O 0 1 6 5 J 5 O 4 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENtS:That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York,that St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota,that Farmington Casualty Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut,that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland,that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa,and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin(herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint Kevin P.Nagel,Eileen Lucitt,and David C. Banks of the City of Park Ridge/Crestwood/Wheaton State of Illinois their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute,seal and acknowledge any and all bonds,recognizances,conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of.guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of 4. contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or pgpuitt�d"in any"adUons of p(bceedings allowed by law. 23rd IF WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instftununt Itr bt signed and thot_,,eorporate seals to be hereto affixed,this y of y 007 Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance CompaiW St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Seaboard Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company G�SU,��� $uNrly Jy F1PE 6 4 Y OE0.� I MSG9 JP+.1NSUgq aJ�ITY qry°a 1'JO-"ry �r� ..;' 6 n { `�9� �927 " ar F� '�O0.PORq F, E .}•f \ HARTFORD, a 3��NRiFOH4t r3 < 0 •n CONN. n CONN.}/i! N 896 s'g�q, � y.9Jr1 NO �SEAL o1 0•' •.SSAL,'e J' �y. tir d � OF '9x�µwNGE� �'1S�••N�J� s1:. :•pJ 'r� �s t �7` ��r1 ANto" State of Connecticut By: City of Hartford ss. Georg Thompson, enior ice President 23rd May 2007 Oa thi*s the_ -_� day of before me personally appeared George W.Thompson,who acknowledged lan;&C&to be th�enior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, rncCSaaboafexSj` ly-Ornbaty,SE Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Easuatt}r and l6r4 Comgat travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,and that he,as such,being 3fperiZed so todo; cutihoregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof,I hereunto set my hand Ind official seal. ° TM Q C . k'Commission expires the 30th day of June,2011. 'OUBUO t} Marie C.Tetreault,Notary Public F 8440-8-06 Printed in U.S.A. WA FINING:THt$POWER OF ATT(�fINEY rS INVALID Yj1ITHQt1T rHE RED BORDER WARNING:TKS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED EGRUSPt This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vi President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behal of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I,Kori M.Johanson,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurancg Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surciy Compan A aeric d United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Powei of Attorney,¢x read s cmpanies,which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and 4,M266d the sbals trf saidoXllanies this day of AL,IW 20 ©' Kori M.Johans Assistant Secretary G�SU•�< .ACTT F\0.E S Q�'M..�N6G9 JpY 1M4U9q 9J,,IV AN, YAy- p 5 (\ ITEp Jy 4 z tEo ATF.m W ii pORPORAT p �, . y° �i 19Jr1 sr� •,SEAL%o CONK. c Caw. 8 N 886 To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.stpaultravelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. *ARNING:THIS POWEFl Op ATTORNEY IS tNVAI,tD WITHOUT THE RED BOPIDER PART G Y CONTRACT (CITY OF FORT WORTH) PART G-CONTRACT THE STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF TARRANT § THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into the 5 day of A.jyJ,200 by and between the City of Fort Worth, a home-rule municipal corporation located in Tarrant County, Texas, acting through its City Manager thereunto duly authorized so to do, Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed "OWNER",and *AWCL of the City of Arlington County of Tarrant and State of TEXAS, Party of the Second Part, hereinafter termed"CONTRACTOR". WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of the First Part (Owner), said Party of the Second Part (Contractor) hereby agrees with the said party of the First Part (Owner) to commence and complete certain improvements described as follows: McCart Avenue Pump Station and Storage Tank Site installation and preparation.' Storage Tank: P160-060160160010 & Pump Station: P1 60-0601 601 8001 0 Associated facilities will include a 33 million gallon/day (MGD) potable water pump station, fully enclosed in an above ground concrete building, and 5-million gallon (MG) welded steel ground storage tank. Installation will include appurtenances such as associated piping, electrical, controls and instrumentation, valves and valve boxes, paving, security measures, and other equipment and improvements as noted in the contract documents. and all extra work connected therewith, under the terms as stated in the Contract Documents, and at his (their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendent, labor,bonds, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents, which include all maps, plats, blueprints and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter thereof, and the specifications thereof, as prepared by the Engineers employed by the Owner, each of which has been identified by the endorsement of the Contractor and the Engineers thereon, together with the Contractor's Written Proposal and the other parts of the Contract Documents hereto attached, including the Fort Worth Water Department General Contractor Documents and General Specifications, all of which are made a part hereof and collectively and constitute the entire contract. *Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. GI The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work within ten (10) days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him, and to substantially complete same within the time stated in the proposal. The Owner agrees to pay the contractor in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the Proposal submitted therefor, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the Contract Documents and all approved modifications thereof, and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties to these presents have executed this Contract in s counterparts in the year and say first above written. City of Fort Worth,Texas(Owner) ATTEST: Party of the First part BY: ASST. City Manager Marc A. Ott CW City Secretary (Seal) WITNESSES: Archer Western Contractors, Ltd, Contractor By: Vill� Title: President APPROVED: A o ed as to For ga City ttorney S. Frank Crumb,P.F. L rl� Water Director t!�� — Contrac- Authorization P Date u �� `IN'TH, TEN. APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT By TERRA-MAR, INC. (REFERENCE ONLY) jaw TERRA-MAR, INC. _ Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing 1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION McCART STREET PUMP STATION AND GROUND WATER STOREAGE TANK FORT WORTH, TEXAS TMI REPORT NO. FE00-084 TO MONTGOMERY WATSON, INC. DALLAS, TEXAS BY TERRA-MAR, INC. DALLAS / FORT WORTH / HOUSTON / AUSTIN ! LONGVIEW MARCH 22, 2001 TERRA-MAR 1 Consulting Engineers•Geotechnical•Environmental•Construction Materials Testing DALLAS•FORT WORTH•HOUSTON•AUSTIN•LONGVIEW March 22, 2001 TMI Report No. FE00-084 Mr. Darryl Corbin, P.E. Montgomery Watson, Inc. 7577 Rambler Road, Suite 1050 Dallas, Texas 75231 Re: Geotechnical Investigation McCart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank Fort Worth, Texas Dear Mr. Corbin, Submitted here is our geotechnical report for the referenced project. The study was performed in accordance with our proposal P00-2057FE dated April 4, 2000, with authorization for project commencement provided on November 1, 2000. This report describes the results of our field and laboratory investigations, together with recommendations for the design and construction of the �..i referenced project. Two bound copies of the report have been provided, along with one unbound copy. We appreciate the opportunity to assist on this project and trust that our field and laboratory data and engineering recommendations will be of assistance in your design efforts. Do nottl"tate to call if there are questions, or when we may be of further service. eF T`%%III i Respectfully, TERRA-MAR, INC. GARr tTl -.'. iLL!AMS.s Leonel Ruiz, E.I.T. Garrett E. Williams, P.E. Graduate Engineer Vice President 2400 Gravel Drive,Bldg. 25,Fort Worth,Texas 76118 Phone: 817-284-9363 Fax: 817-284-9430 McCart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 = � Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental - Construction Materials Testing TABLE OF CONTENTS Pape 1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION, PURPOSE AND SCOPE-------------------------------------------------------- 1 2.0 FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS--------------------------------------------------------------- 1 3.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 3.1 Site Geology---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 3.2 Subsurface Conditions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 3.3 Groundwater----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 4.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 4.1 General Foundation Considerations---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 5.0 GROUND WATER STORAGE TANK----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3 6.0 PUMP STATION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 6.1 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 6.2 Grade Beams--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6 6.3 Floor Slabs------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6 6.4 Structurally Suspended Floor Design and Construction Considerations------------------------------- 7 6.5 Interior, Slab-on-Grade--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 6.5.1 Installation of Select Fill Cap----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9 6.5.2 Construction Considerations to Maximize Performance of Soil-Supported Elements------ 9 6.6 Below Grade Areas-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10 7.0 PIPING CONNECTIONS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10 8.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS-------------------------------------------------------------------------10 8.1 Dewatering Considerations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11 9.0 SITE GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS------------------------------------------------------------------------11 9.1 Stripping and Existing Grade Preparation----------------------------------=---------------------------------11 9.2 Utilities-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12 10.0 PAVEMENT STRUCTURES---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12 10.1 Pavement Subgrade Preparation---------------------------------------------------------------------------12 10.2 Pavement Sections---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------14 10.3 Pavement Material Requirements--------------------------------------------------------------------------14 10.4 Crack and Joint Sealing---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15 10.5 Drainage and Grading------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------15 11.0 FIELD INSPECTION AND DENSITY TESTING --------------------------------------------------------------15 12.0 LIMITATIONS---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 ------------------ ,%"woe McCart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank, TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing ILLUSTRATIONS Fiautre No. Planof Borings-------------------------- —-------------------------------------------- 1 Log of Borings ---------------------------- ----2-7 Legend for Log of Borings--------- --- ------- --- --------------------------r--»-8, 9 Swell Test Results--------------------------------- ________ _r_____ --.---.- 10 Consolidation Test Results-----------------_ GrainSize Analysis----- --------------------------------------------------—--------------------____--_-------.-- 12 Field and Laboratory Procedures------------______-----____---------------_----___-_----------------Appendix A Recommended Quality Assurance Schedule--__ Appendix B mcL;art Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 4*�N March 22,2001 Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental ss Construction Materials Testing 1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION, PURPOSE AND SCOPE This report presents the results of a geotechnical engineering study for a pump station and a five million-gallon ground storage tank near the intersection of McCart Street and Risinger Road in Fort Worth, Texas. The storage tank is 130 feet in diameter and about 50 feet in height. The pump station has a footprint of approximately 5,400 SF. The pump station will have 30 and 36 inch diameter pipes beneath the structure. Surface parking could be located on either the north or south side of the pump station. This investigation was designed to explore subsurface conditions at the project site, and, from the results of the exploration, develop engineering parameters and recommendations to be used in the design and construction of the proposed pump station and the five million gallon storage tank. Our services included: • A detailed description of subsurface and groundwater conditions at the project site, and their effect on design and construction, including a description of the soil stratigraphy, and any noteworthy geological conditions. • Recommended foundation system, including the appropriate design parameters, such as °.� allowable bearing loads, bearing depths, and anticipated differential movements, including recommendations and considerations for construction of the foundation. • Recommendations and material requirements for site grading and earthwork. • Considerations for the design of the structure with respect to expansive subgrade soils and potential post-construction movements. 2.0 FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATIONS Subsurface conditions were evaluated by a total of six (6) borings drilled to depths of five (5) to twenty-eight (28) feet below existing grades. These boring locations are shown approximately on the Plan of Borings, Figure 1. The results of the field and laboratory testing procedures, along with the soil classification, by the Unified Soil Classification System, can be found at the appropriate depths on the Logs of Borings, Figures 2 through 7. A key to the descriptive terms and symbols used on the boring logs is presented on Figures 8 and 9. The results of the swell testing program are reported on Figure 10, while the results of the consolidation testing program are presented on Figure 11. A detailed description of the various field and laboratory procedures used in the drilling and testing of the soil samples can be found in the Appendix. Page 1 of 16 mcuan street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 = Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing 3.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ;. 3.1 Site Geology The Dallas Sheet of the Geologic Atlas of Texas indicates the site is located in an area underlain by the Grayson Marl Formation. The Grayson Marl Formation typically consists predominantly of active clays overlying shale and limestone. 3.2 Subsurface Conditions Subsurface conditions encountered in the borings are presented on the Logs of Boring in Figures 2 through 7. Descriptions of the various strata and their depths and thickness are given. A brief summary of the stratigraphy indicated by the borings is given below. Note that the depth on all borings refers to the depth from the existing grade of the ground surface present at the time of the investigation, and that boundaries between the various soil types are approximate. The surficial soils consisted of 2 to 5 feet of dark reddish brown and brown clays. Light brown and tan silty clays were then encountered in Borings B-2, B-3,-and B-5, to depths of 4 to 5 feet. The clays encountered at this site had Liquid Limits (LL) ranging from 54 to 70 percent with Plasticity Indices (PI) ranging from 31 to 48; were firm to very stiff in consistency; and classified as CH by the USCS. The silty clays had a LL of 34 percent and a PI of 18; were very stiff to hard in consistency; and classified as CL by the USCS. Borings B-5 and 8-6 were terminated in the clays and silty clays at a depth of 5 feet below the surface. Hard tan limestone was encountered at depths of 4 to 5 feet extending to depths of 21 to 23 feet in Borings B-1 through 8-4. Very hard gray limestone was then encountered and extended to the termination depths of 26 to 28 feet below the surface. The Atterberg Limits indicate the CH clays encountered at this site are highly active while the underlying the silty clays are moderately active. Active clays can experience significant volume changes (expansion or contraction) with minor fluctuations in their moisture content. 3.3 Groundwater The borings were advanced with continuous flight auger drilling equipment. This method allows relatively accurate groundwater observations to be made while drilling. At the time of this investigation, groundwater seepage was not observed in the borings. It is not possible to accurately predict the magnitude of subsurface water fluctuation that might occur based upon Page 2 of 16 me;art Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, IMC, Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 �.i Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing these short-term observations. During wet periods of the year seepage can occur in or above the tan limestones. 4.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1 Genera!Foundation Considerations Two independent design criteria must be satisfied in the selection of the type of foundation to support the proposed structures. First, the ultimate bearing capacity, reduced by a sufficient factor of safety, must not be exceeded by the bearing pressure transferred to the foundation soils. Second, due to consolidation or expansion of the underlying soils during the operating life of the structures, total and differential vertical movements must be within tolerable limits. The clay soils encountered at this site are highly plastic and would be expected to experience volume changes (expansion or contraction) with fluctuations in their moisture content. The potential magnitude of the moisture-induced movements is influenced by the soil properties, overburden pressures, thickness of the clays and to a great extent by soil moisture levels at the time of construction. The greatest potential for post-construction movement occurs when the *..i soils are in a dry condition at the time of construction. Based on the conditions encountered in the borings we estimate the potential vertical rise to be on the order of up to 2 inches. This movement typically occurs as post-construction heave. 5.0 GROUND WATER STORAGE TANK The proposed storage tank foundation is to be placed on grade. We recommend the tank wall be supported on a ring wall foundation (perimeter beam reinforced with hoop steel) with the tank floor supported on grade within the beam. The tank will apply an average bearing pressure of about 3,150 PSF on the supporting soil. The main purpose of the ring wall is to confine the soil and prevent lateral movement. It also prevents raveling of the base material and infiltration of surface runoff. Satisfactory performance of the tank foundation is dependent on providing uniform support for the proposed tank. To provide this uniform support, we recommend that the upper three (3) feet of the existing soils in the proposed tank area be excavated and replaced with a flexible base material similar to the TxDOT Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and �..i Bridges (1993 Edition), Item 247, Grade 1, Type A. Page 3 of 16 vv Gc„ .411F/JLdlwII Of lu Viuuno vv arer aiorage i ank; TERRA MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22.2001 Via= Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental ' Construction Materials Testing Prior to replacement of the excavated soils, the exposed subgrade should be scarified to a depth of six (6) inches and uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95% of ASTM D 698 aVor slightly above the optimum moisture content. The fill materials should be spread in loose lifts less than nine (9) inches thick and uniformly compacted in a similar manner. The minimum in place dry density of the fill materials should be 110 pounds per cubic foot or 95% of Standard Proctor density, whichever is greater. The ring wall should extend a minimum of one foot below the bottom of the base material. The interior walls of the ring will be subject to lateral pressures due to the surcharge loading exerted by the tank. This lateral pressure is approximately equal to the surcharge loading. An allowable bearing pressure of 3,500 PSF is recommended at the base of the foundation ring. This value contains a safety factor of 3 against a general shear failure. Any fill directly against the outside face of the beam should be uniformly compacted on site clay soils. For the anticipated loading of 3,500 PSF, we estimate long term settlements on the order of one inch beneath the center of the tank based on the results of the consolidation test. Differential settlements on the order of one-half an inch are estimated between the center and edge of the tank. Positive surface drainage should be provided around the perimeter of the tank. Water must be allowed to pond near the tank during or after construction. 6.0 PUMP STATION The moisture induced volume changes associated with the active clays encountered at this site indicate that shallow or near surface foundation systems would be subject to differential movements of a potentially detrimental magnitude. Straight drilled reinforced concrete shafts extending into the tan limestone offer a positive system for supporting the proposed pump station. The limestone was encountered at a depth of 4 feet below existing grades in Boring B-1 drilled in the proposed footprint of the pump station. The shafts should penetrate the tan limestone a minimum of 5 feet or extend a minimum of 7 feet below existing grade, whichever is deeper. They may utilize an allowable end bearing of 15,000 pounds per square foot (PSF). Additional load carrying capacity can be achieved by skin friction in the tan limestone. An allowable skin friction of 1,800 PSF is applicable for that portion of the Page 4 of 16 «,1 W .V.,,auu„di u vruuna vvaier blorage I ank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 409s� March 22,2001 zo, Consulting—Geotechnica3-Environmental Construction Materials Testing shaft situated below the minimum shaft penetration of five (5) feet and below any temporary casing. Penetrations ,greater than the minimum penetration may be required to develop additional skin friction and/or uplift resistance. In order to develop full load carrying capacity in skin friction, adjacent shafts should have a minimum center to center spacing of 2.5 times the diameter of the larger shaft. Closer spacing may require some reductions in skin friction and/or changes in installation sequences. Closely spaced shafts should be examined on a case by case basis. As a general guide, the design skin friction will vary linearly from the full value at a spacing of 2.5 diameters to 50 percent of the design value at 1.0 diameter. Settlements for properly installed and constructed straight shafts in competent tan limestone will be relatively minor and primarily elastic. The drilled shafts will be subject to uplift as a result of heave in the overlying clays. The magnitude of these loads varies with the shaft diameter, soil parameters, and particularly the in- situ moisture levels at the time of construction. For the conditions encountered at this site minimum reinforcing equal to 0.5 percent of the shaft area is recommended to resist soil induced uplift loads. These piers should be reinforced for their full depth. 6.1 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations Excavations for the shafts should be maintained in the dry. Groundwater seepage was not encountered in the borings during drilling operations. However seepage could be encountered during installation of the shafts, particularly if construction proceeds during a wet period of the year. Rapid placement of steel and concrete may permit shaft installation to proceed; however, seepage rates could be sufficient to require the use of temporary casing for installation of the shafts. The casing should be seated in the limestone with all water and most loose material removed prior to beginning the design penetration. Care must then be taken that a sufficient head of plastic concrete is maintained within the casing during extraction. The concrete should have a slump of 6 inches, plus or minus 1 inch, and be placed in a manner to avoid striking the reinforcing steel during placement. Complete installation of individual shafts �..i should be accomplished within an 8 hour period after the design penetration into the bearing Page 5 of 16 —..r U111N oiaaun anu urouno water brorage i anK; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 AMIN March 22,2001 �� ' Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental ' Construction Materials Testing stratum is begun. The limestones are relatively hard, and shaft excavations should be performed with equipment suitable to perform this work by a contractor experienced in the area. The drilled shaft design recommendations provided in this report are based on proper construction procedures, including maintaining a dry shaft excavation and proper cleaning of bearing surfaces prior to placing reinforcing steel and concrete. All drilled shaft installations should be inspected by qualified geotechnical personnel to help verify the bearing stratum, the design penetration, and perform related duties. 6.2 Grade Beams In conjunction with a drilled shaft foundation system all grade beams should be supported by the drilled shafts. A minimum 4-inch void space should be provided beneath all grade beams to prevent contact with the swelling clay soils. This void will serve to minimize distress resulting from swell pressures generated by the clays. A void space is not necessary beneath grade beams situated on competent limestone. Grade beams may be cast on cardboard carton forms or formed above grade. If cardboard carton forms are used, care should be taken to not crush the carton forms, or allow the carton forms to become wet prior to or during concrete placement operations. A soil retainer should be provided to help prevent in-filling of this void. Backfill against the exterior face of grade beams or panels should be properly compacted onsite clays. Compaction should be a minimum of 93 percent of ASTM D698, at a minimum of +2 percent above the optimum moisture content determined by that test. This clay fill is intended to reduce surface water infiltration beneath the structure. 6.3 Floor Slabs Lightly loaded floor slabs placed on-grade will be subject to movement as a result of moisture induced volume changes in the active clays. The clays expand (heave) with increases in moisture and contract (shrink) with decreases in moisture. The movement typically occurs as post construction heave. Page 6 of 16 mcuart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 A&#k\ March 22,2001 _3i Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing The potential magnitude of the moisture induced movements is rather indeterminate, it is influenced by the soil properties, overburden pressures, thickness of clays above the limestone and to a great extent by soil moisture levels at the time of construction. The greatest potential for post-construction movement occurs when the soils are in a dry condition at the time of construction. Site grading can affect the potential movements. For example, the use of clays as fill material will increase the potential movements by increasing the total clay thickness. Cuts should decrease the potential movements by removing a portion of the active clays. Based on the conditions encountered in the borings the potential movements are estimated to be on the order of up to 2 inches for slabs placed on-grade near the existing ground surface. This office should be contacted for additional recommendations when the grading plan for the structure is finalized. 6.4 Structurally Suspended Floor Design and Construction Considerations The most positive method of preventing slab distress due to swelling soils is to structurally suspend the interior slab. Such a system is the only method of assuring the absence-of distress due to subgrade ,%Now, movement. A minimum vertical void or crawl space of 6 inches is recommended below a structurally suspended floor slab system. Care should be taken to assure that the void boxes are not allowed to become wet or crushed prior to or during concrete placement and finishing operations. Corrugated steel, placed on the top of the carton forms, could be used to reduce the risk of crushing of the carton forms during concrete placement and finishing operations. As a quality control measure during construction, "actual' concrete quantities placed should be checked against "anticipated' quantities. Significant concrete 'overage" would be an early indication of a collapsed void. As an alternative to concrete floor slabs over carton forms, a bar-joist floor system may be used over a crawl space. This system allows sub-floor access to plumbing after construction. Consideration must be given to the potential for differential upward movements between structurally supported floors and adjacent ground supported structures such as entrances, sidewalks, pavements and ramps. Consequently it may be desirable to structurally support (with a void space) entrances sensitive to movements. Other ground-supported structures should be placed with a construction joint to allow for future differential movements, due to soil swelling, on the order of up to 2 inches. Page 7 of 16 ouaet rump acauon ano urouno water storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 _ _ March 22,2001 Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing Provisions should be made to provide drainage from under the building. Ventilation of the void below the floors should be provided if high humidity can cause problems with floor tile adhesives. Vehicle or pedestrian ramps leading up to the building should be structurally connected to the building grade beams to avoid abrupt differential movement between the building slab and the ramps. Transitioning details will be required at the points where ramps connect with paving and slab on-grade elements. In addition, ramp slabs should be constructed so that slopes sufficient for effective drainage of surface water are still provided after potential differential movements. The magnitude of the differential ground movements between structurally supported floors and adjacent ground supported structures could be significantly reduced through the construction of a paved area around the entire building perimeter. This paved area would serve as an impermeable horizontal moisture barrier and thereby either reduce the potential for water infiltration into, or the desiccation of, the foundation subgrade soils. When constructing structurally supported floor structures, it is essential that positive drainage be provided to prevent the collection and ponding of stormwater in the void space beneath the floors. Surface drains should be installed around and beneath the buildings, and the -ground surface and crawl spaces should be shaped to provide drainage- to the inlets for rapid removal of water from the building area. 6.5 Interior, Slab-on-Grade Slab-on-grade construction should only be considered if slab movement can be tolerated. The level of acceptable movement varies with the user, but methods are normally selected with the goal of limiting slab movements to about one inch or less. Subgrade preparation measures are typically performed to reduce estimated movements. The more commonly used methods consist of placing non-expansive select fill beneath the slab and moisture conditioning the soils. Based on the conditions encountered at the site the installation of a minimum of 18 inches of non- expansive select fill beneath the slab should reduce potential movements to on the order of one inch or less. These recommendations should be reviewed when a grading plan is available. Page 8 of 16 Mct:art street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; AM TERRA-MAR, INC. Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 wag s Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental ' Construction Materials Testing 6.5.1 Installation of Select Fill Cap In general, the procedure is performed as follows: 1. Remove all surface vegetation, associated root mats, organic topsoil and any other deleterious material. 2. Excavate to a minimum of 18 inches below the bottom of the building pad. It is not necessary to excavate limestone to install non-expansive select fill. 3. Scarify the exposed soil subgrade at the base of the excavation to a depth of 8 inches, adjust the moisture, and compact at a minimum of three percentage points above optimum moisture to between 93% and 98% Standard Proctor density (ASTM D 698). Over-compaction should not be allowed. 4. Fill pad using a minimum of 18 inches of sandy clay/clayey sand non-expansive select fill with a Liquid Limit less than 35 percent and a Plasticity Index (PI) between 4 and 15. The select fill should be compacted in maximum 6 inch lifts at minus 2 percent to plus 3 percent of the soil's optimum moisture content as determined in the Standard Proctor Test. The select fill should be placed within 48 hours of completing the installation of the moisture conditioned soils. 6.5.2 Construction Considerations to Maximize Performance of Soil-Supported Elements ,-moo, In order to maximize the post-construction performance of soil supported elements, and reduce the potential and/or magnitude of post-construction movements that may occur, the following items should be considered and implemented in the design and construction of the proposed additions: • Trees and deep rooted shrubs should not be used as landscaping around the building perimeter as the root systems can lead to desiccation, and subsequent shrinkage, of the clayey subgrade soils. Any trees should be planted at a distance from the buildings or paved patio areas such that the buildings and pavement will not fall within the drip line of the mature plants (usually at least one to two times the mature height of the tree). • Positive drainage must be provided around the perimeters of all buildings so that surface water does not pond near or against the building perimeters. Surface gradients within 10 feet of the structures should be constructed with the maximum slopes allowed under the appropriate code(s). • Landscaped beds should be elevated and placed over impervious liners in lieu of recessed beds to prevent the ponding of water beneath the foundations. • A moist soil condition (not a soaked condition) should be maintained around the perimeter of the foundation and paved areas during dry weather or hot periods, which may minimize differential settlement associated with seasonal ground shrinkage due to dry weather. • The selection of superior utility subcontractors and materials during utility line construction, accompanied by Quality Control inspection and testing of all utility line installations, including Page 9 of 16 I.,.,. 04L auooi rwnP aiauon ano urouna water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 AftNow March 22,2001 �= Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental wor Construction Materials Testing automatic sprinkler systems in order to reduce the potential for leakage due to construction procedures. • Implementation of a conscientious maintenance program related to periodic leak detection inspections during operation of the completed facilities, rapid repair of any leaking utility line discovered, routine sealing of all joints and cracks within the surrounding pavement. • Gutters and downspouts should be installed to direct roof runoff away from the structures. Downspouts should not be located such that they discharge into landscaped areas, or where the water may pond or collect for any significant period of time. If required, downspout extensions should be used to facilitate the removal of the collected water. • Sprinkler lines should not be located near the structures. Instead, the system should be designed so that the lines are as far away from the building as possible (10 feet minimum) with enough capacity to direct the water toward the buildings. 6.6 Below Grade Areas No below grade structure elements are anticipated in conjunction with the pump station. This office should be contacted for additional recommendations if below grade elements are present which would require recommendations for lateral earth pressures and other comments. 7.0 PIPING CONNECTIONS Differential movements of piping systems entering the pump station could occur since the pump station will remain rigid while the piping subgrade will be subject to shrink and swell from seasonal moisture variations. The piping should be designed to accommodate the potential movement. For example, the piping could be sleeved to provide a suitable clear space beneath the piping to prevent abrupt differential pipe movements at the connections. 8.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS As previously noted, groundwater seepage was not encountered during and shortly after drilling operations in all of the borings. Groundwater seepage into the excavation is not expected; however, seepage can occur in and above the tan limestones during wet seasons. If construction occurs during or following a long rainy season, the potential for groundwater seepage will increase. Generalized recommendations are provided in the following subsections. Page 10 of 16 nnct;ari street rump station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 Adk&_ March 22,2001 Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing 8.1 Dewatering Considerations If encountered, the groundwater should be controlled by means and methods selected by the contractor. It is likely hat the seepage may be controlled by means of perimeter collection ditches, sumps, and purhping. Groundwater levels should be maintained at least three feet below the base of the excavation or utility trench for the full term of construction. Any dewatering system should have sufficient capacity to handle flood events. Dewatering should precede the excavation to insure water levels are below the excavation level. Grading adjacent to the open excavations should slope away from the sides to minimize surface flow into the excavation. There is also the potential for sidewall sloughing while the excavations are open. This will be of particular concern in any areas were groundwater is encountered, as the groundwater will accelerate the sloughing rate. It will be necessary to provide adequate side slopes or shoring in the excavations in order to provide for safety in some areas. It should also be recognized that clay cut surfaces will become slippery when wet. 9.0 SITE GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS .moo, Specific grading and subgrade preparation procedures in areas of structure have been provided in the appropriate section. It is expected that some minor site grading in non-structural areas will also be required. The following site grading recommendations are provided for these areas. 9.1 Stripping and Existing Grade Preparation All areas to receive fill should be stripped to remove all vegetation, roots or other deleterious materials. This should include any soft or saturated materials that might be noted during the field operations. The depth of stripping is expected to be on the order of 12 inches; however, the actual depths are expected to vary based on on-site observations during stripping operations. Additionally, any previous construction debris or oversized particles (any dimension greater than 4 inches) should be removed. All fill materials in non-structural areas should be of a consistency and plasticity similar to the existing on-site materials. Prior to the placement of any fill, the stripped area should be scarified and recompacted to a minimum of 92 percent of the maximum dry density at a moisture content of minus 2 to plus 4 percent of the optimum moisture content, as determined in the Standard Proctor test (ASTM D-698). Page 11 of 16 nu t,a,t aueet rump station ana around Water Storage Tank, TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 a= Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental ' Construction Materials Testing All fill should be placed in horizontal lifts with a maximum compacted thickness of 8 inches. Special care should be taken to achieve satisfactory compaction of the fill soils in confined areas, such as areas near existing piping structures. Large pieces of broken rock are considered unsuitable for use as fill. Excavated limestones used as. fill should be pulverized to a maximum size of 4 inches, and thoroughly mixed with sufficient clay fines to allow proper compaction without nested voids. Seasonal water seeps can occur where the tan limestones are approached or exposed by cuts. Subsoil drains may be required in some areas to intercept this seepage. 9.2 Utilities Limestone could be encountered during utility excavations. These limestones require additional effort to excavate, particularly in narrow utility trenches. Rock teeth on heavy duty trenching equipment are typically required to excavate these limestones. Care should be taken that utility cuts are not left open for extended periods, and that the cuts are properly backfilled. Backfilling should be accomplished with properly compacted on-site soils, rather than granular materials. A positive cut-off at the building line is recommended to help prevent water from migrating in the utility trench backfill. 10.0 PAVEMENT STRUCTURES 10.1 Pavement Subgrade Preparation The surficial clay soils encountered at this site are highly plastic. These soils are subject to loss in support value with the moisture increases which occur beneath pavement sections. They react with hydrated lime, which serves to improve and maintain their support value. Treatment of these soils with hydrated lime will improve their subgrade characteristics to support area paving. Lime treatment is recommended for all subgrade areas to support asphaltic concrete paving and beneath Portland cement concrete subject to heavy truck traffic. Treatment of the subgrade will also improve performance of Portland cement concrete paving, although concrete paving subject to Page 12 of 16 mcLart street rump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; �'' TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 ¢s Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing automobile and light truck traffic generally will perform satisfactorily if placed on a prepared (untreated) subgrade. We recommend a minimum of 7 percent hydrated lime be used to modify the subgrade soils. The hydrated lime should be thoroughly mixed and blended with the upper 6 inches of the clay subgrade (TxDOT Item 260). This mixture should be uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95% of its maximum Standard Proctor dry density (ASTM D-698) near its optimum moisture content as determined by that test. Lime treatment should extend beyond exposed pavement edges to reduce the effects of shrinkage and associated loss of subgrade support. The hydrated lime should meet the requirements of Item 264 (Type A) in the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 1993 Edition. This lime should be thoroughly mixed and blended with the top 6 inches of subgrade and compacted to at least 95% of its maximum standard Proctor dry density. The moisture content of the lime modified material at the time of compaction should be within a range of -2% to +4% of its optimum value. Mixing, curing and compaction of the lime modified layer is described in Item 260 of the previously mentioned Standard Specifications. We recommend that subgrade stabilization extend to at least one foot beyond pavement edges to aid in reducing pavement movements and cracking along the curb line due to seasonal moisture variations after construction. Each construction area should be shaped to allow drainage of surface water during earthwork operations, and surface water should be pumped immediately from each construction area after each rain and a firm subgrade condition maintained. Water should not be allowed to pond in order to prevent percolation and subgrade softening, and lime should be added to the subgrade after removal of all surface vegetation and debris. Sand should be specifically prohibited beneath pavement areas, since these more porous soils can allow water inflow, resulting in heave and strength loss of subgrade soils (lime stabilized soil will be allowed for fine grading). After fine grading each area in preparation for paving, the subgrade surface should be lightly moistened, as needed, and recompacted to obtain a tight non-yielding subgrade. Surface drainage is critical to the performance of this pavement. Water should be allowed to exit the pavement surface quickly. This can be accomplished by maintaining at least 1% slope of the finished grades and discharging the water into drainage structures. All pavement construction should be performed in accordance with the following procedures: Page 13 of 16 r 1,,,,+I JIaUW I ano urouna water Storage I ank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 s Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing 1 10.2 Pavement Sections The project may include the construction of parking lots and/or drives. At the time of this investigation, site paving plans or vehicle traffic studies were not available. Therefore, several rigid and flexible pavement sections are presented based on our experience with similar facilities for Light Duty Parking Areas, Medium Duty Parking Areas, and Medium to Heavy Duty Drives. In general, these areas are defined as follows: Light-Duty Parking Areas are those lots and drives subjected almost exclusively to passenger cars, with an occasional light- to medium-duty trucks (2 to 3 per week). Medium-Duty Parking Areas are those lots subjected to a variety of light-duty vehicles to medium-duty vehicles and an occasional heavy-duty vehicle (1 to 2 per week). Medium to Heavy-Duty Drives are those drives subjected to a variety of light to heavy-duty vehicles. These pavements include areas significant truck traffic and trash vehicles. We recommend that rigid pavements be utilized at this project whenever possible, since they tend to provide better long-term performance when subjected to significant slow moving and turning traffic. If asphaltic concrete pavement is used, we recommend a full depth asphaltic concrete section having a minimum total thickness of 5 inches for light-duty parking areas and 6 inches for medium-duty parking areas. A minimum surface course thickness of 2 inches is recommended for asphaltic concrete pavements. If Portland cement concrete pavement is used, a minimum thickness of 5 inches of concrete is recommended for light-duty parking areas, 6 inches for medium-duty parking areas, and 7 inches for medium to heavy-duty areas. The above sections should be considered minimum pavement thicknesses and higher traffic volumes and heavy trucks may require thicker pavement sections. Additional recommendations can be provided after traffic volumes and loads are known. Periodic maintenance should be anticipated for minimum pavement thicknesses. This maintenance should consist of sealing cracks and timely repair of isolated distressed areas. 10.3 Pavement Material Requirements Reinforced Portland Cement Concrete: Reinforced Portland cement concrete pavement should consist of Portland cement concrete having a 28-day compressive strength of at least 3,500 psi. Page 14 of 16 Mcuart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing The mix should be designed in accordance with the ACI Code 318 using 3 to 6 percent air entrainment. The pavement should be adequately reinforced with temperature steel and all construction joints or expansion/contraction joints should be provided with load transfer dowels. The spacing of the joints will depend primarily on the type of steel used in the pavement. We recommend using No. 8 steel rebar spaced at 18 inches on center in both the longitudinal and transverse direction. Control joints formed by sawing are recommended every 12 to 15 feet in both the longitudinal and transverse direction. The cutting of the joints should be performed as soon as the concrete has "set-up" enough to allow for sawing operations. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course: HMAC Fine Graded Surface Course - Item 340, Type D, Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, 1993 Edition. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Base Course: HMAC Fine Graded Surface Course - Item 340, Type A or B, Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, 1993 Edition. 10.4 Crack and Joint Sealing In order to minimize rainwater infiltration through the pavement surface, and thereby minimizing subgrade softening of the pavement subgrades all cracks and joints in the pavement should be sealed on a routine basis after construction. 10.5 Drainage and Grading The design of the pavement drainage and grading should consider the potential for differential ground movement due to future soil swelling in the range of up to 1.5 inches. In order to minimize rainwater infiltration through the pavement surface, and thereby minimizing future upward movement of the pavement slabs all cracks and joints in the pavement should be sealed on a routine basis after construction. 11.0 FIELD INSPECTION AND DENSITY TESTING Many problems can be avoided or solved in the field if proper inspection and testing services are provided. It is recommended that a qualified engineering technician monitor all foundation excavations, all concrete placement, and site/subgrade preparation. Density tests should be Page 15 of 16 ,.,%,at oueet rump acaaon ana urountl Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001Q F Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing performed to verify compaction and moisture content of any earthwork. Inspection should be performed prior to and during concrete placement operations; including slump, air entrainment and strength testing. A table of recommended testing and sampling frequencies is presented in Appendix B. 12.0 LIMITATIONS i The recommendations presented in this report are based on a discrete number of soil test borings. Although our field personnel visually survey the site for surface features indicative of variable soil conditions, subsurface conditions may be encountered that differ from these data. In this case, our office should be notified immediately so that the effects of these conditions on design and construction can be addressed. This study was conducted for the exclusive use of Montgomery Watson. The reproduction of this report or any part thereof, in plans or other documents supplied to persons other than the owner, should bear language indicating that the information contained therein is for general design purposes. All contractors referring to this geotechnical report should draw his or her own conclusions for bidding purposes. Page 16 of 16 .UcCL rwIIN Qiauon ano urouna water storage I anK; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 ay Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing ILLUSTRATIONS .......... .... v = Columbus Trail N_ QRrH_ I I' C r Scale: 1 "=100' m 1 W. Ris7n er Road I C, 3 5 Site / oN. Cro.le —Cleburn U Site Vicinity Map , f/ I / N5 c / & B-2 Pro , r Pam P sed B-3 r P station / Proposed Reservoir r BA McCart Street Pump Station and Groundwater Storage Tank TERRA-MAR Boring Location Fort Worth,Texas �� Plan of Borings TMI No. FEOO-084 Figure 1 LOG OF BORING BORING B-1 Project: McCart Street Pump Station, Fort Worth, Texas Project No.: FE00-084 Date: 02-03-01 Elev.: Location: See Figure 1 Depth to water at completion of boring: Dry Depth to water when checked: N/A was: N/A Depth to caving when checked: N/A was: N/A ELEVATH SOIL SYMBOLS MC LL PL -200 D.D. P.PEN UNCON. DEPTH SAMPLER SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION % I % % PI % Pcf tsf tsf (feet) &FIELD TEST DATA r° I Stiff to hard dark reddish brown 2.0 ` CLAY w/traces of iron nodules and 22 61 19 42 104.9 2.75 gravel 23 100.5 2.25 2.35 (CH) 4.5+ s 10011.25 . Hard tan LIMESTONE w/clay seams 10 10013" 15 100/1- �R 20 100/1.25 Very hard gray LIMESTONE 25 100/0.25 " 100/0.25 " 30 i5 Notes: Completion Depth: 27.0' No Seepage Encountered FIGURE NO.: 2 TERRA-MAR, INC. LOG OF BORING BORING B-2 Project: McCart Street Pump Station, Fort Worth, Texas Project No.: FE00-084 Date: 02-03-01 Elev.: Location: See Figure 1 Depth to water at completion of boring: Dry Depth to water when checked: N/A was: N/A Depth to caving when checked: N/A was: N/A ELEVATION/ SOIL SYMBOLS I MC LL PL -200 D.D. P.PEN UNCON. DEPTH SAMPLER SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION Pf Meet) &FIELD TEST DATA % % °h % pcf tsf tsf r° Stiff to very stiff dark reddish brown 3.0 - - CLAY w/calcareous nodules 2.0 (CH) 18 108.5 3.25 2.14 — — — — — — — -- -- -- -- --- --- -- - ----- Very stiff to hard brown and tan 17 34 16 18 115.6 4.5+ 5 100/1.25 " 1SILTY CLAY � -- -- -- -- --- --- --- --- -- L - - — (CL)- - J Hard tan LIMESTONE w/clay seams 10 100/1,25 ' 15 100/2.25 ' 20 100I1.5- — — — — — — — -- -- -- -- --- --- --- ----- Very hard gray LIMESTONE 25 1o0/0.5- 30 35 Notes: Completion Depth: 26.0' No Seepage Encountered FIGURE NO.: 3 TERRA-MAR, INC. LOG OF BORING BORING B-3 Project: McCart Street Pump Station, Fort Worth, Texas Project No.: FE00-084 Date: 02-03-01 Elev.: Location: See Figure 1 Depth to water at completion of boring: Dry Depth to water when checked: N/A was: N/A Depth to caving when checked: N/A was: N/A ELEVATION/ SOIL SYMBOLS MC LL PL 200 D.D. P.PEN UNCON. - DEPTH SAMPLER SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION % % % PI % Pcf tsf tsf (feet) &FIELD TEST DATA — — — — — — — -- -- -- -- --- --- --- ---- - Stiff to very stiff dark reddish brown 2.0 and brown CLAY w/calcareous 3.5 nodules 18 58 22 36 3.5 _ (CH) - - -- -- -- --- 107.2 --- 1.91 - Very stiff tan and light brown SILTY s 3 CLAY -- - Hard tan LIMESTONE lU yly din 100/1.75 15 100/1- 20 100/1.25 - Very hard gray LIMESTONE 25 100/0.5 " 100/0.2 5" so as Notes: Completion Depth: 28.0' No Seepage Encountered FIGURE NO.: 4 TERRA-MAR, INC. i LOG OF BORING BORING B-4 i Project: McCart Street Pump Station, Fort Worth, Texas Project No.: FE00-084 Date: 02-03-01 Elev.: Location: See Figure 1 Depth to water at completion of boring: Dry Depth to water when checked: N/A was: N/A Depth to caving when checked: NIA was: N/A ELEVATION/ SOIL SYMBOLS MC LL PL PI -200 D.D. P.PEN UNCON. DEPTH SAMPLER SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION % % % % pcf tsf tsf (feet) & FIELD TEST DATA 0 OF Firm to very stiff dark reddish brown 1.0 CLAY 30 90.5 1.75 1.12 26 70 22 48 1.5 1 -w/limestone fragments below 3' 2.5 5 100/1.5 Hard tan LIMESTONE w/clay layers 10 100l1.5" 15 100/2.5" I 20 100/1.25 " — — — — — — — -- -- -- -- --- --- --- ----- Very hard gray LIMESTONE 25 100/0.25 " 100/0.25 " 30 35 tes: Completion Depth: 27.0' No Seepage Encountered ro d FIGURE NO.: 5 ,��� TERRA-MAR, INC. LOG OF BORING BORING B-5 Project: McCart Street Pump Station, Fort Worth, Texas Project No.: FE00-084 Date: 02-03-01 Elev.: Location: See Figure 1 Depth to water at completion of boring: Dry Depth to water when checked: N/A was: N/A Depth to caving when checked: N/A was: N/A ELEVATION/ SOIL SYMBOLS MC LL Pt -200 D.D. P.PEN UNCON. DEPTH SAMPLER SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION PI (feet) &FIELD TEST DATA % % % % pcf tsf tsf ° VA Stiff to very stiff dark reddish brown 2.0 and brown CLAY w/calcareous 25 54 21 33 3.25 nodules 20 108.1 3.25 2.5 _ _ _ (CH)_ _ - --- --- -------------------------- Very stiff to hard light brown, tan 3.25 and brown SILTY CLAY 4.5+ --- ------------------------- -20 15 20 25 30 35 Notes: Completion Depth: 5.0' No Seepage Encountered FIGURE NO.: 6 TERRA-MAR, INC. LOG OF BORING BORING B-6 Project: McCart Street Pump Station, Fort Worth, Texas Project No.: FE00-084 Date: 02-03-01 Elev.: Location: See Figure 1 Depth to water at completion of boring: Dry Depth to water when checked: N/A was: N/A Depth to caving when checked: N/A was: N/A ELEVATION/ SOIL SYMBOLS Mc LL PL -200 D.D. P.PEN LINCON. DEPTH SAMPLER SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION % PI {feetl &FIELD TEST DAl' % % % pct tsf tsf - -- -- -- -- --- --- --- ----- Very stiff to hard reddish brown, 3,0 dark brown and tan CLAY 25 59 21 38 2.5 i 21 105.8 2.75 2.73 3.25 (CH) --- 4.5+ i I� l 10 i r r i 1- I 20 L 25 30 35 otes: Completion Depth: 5.0' No Seepage Encountered FIGURE NO.: 7 TERRA-MAR, INC. BORING LOG SYMBOLS AND TERMS FOR SOIL SOIL AND MATERIAL TYPES* SAMPLER AND INDICATOR TYPES Clay = Shaley Clay Thin Walled Rock (CH, CL) Ze (CH, CL)- Shelby Tube Core Sift Silty Clay Standard THD Cone (MH, ML) (CL,CH)- Penetration Penetrometer Sand Sandy Clay Bulk/Grab Solid or Hollow (SP, SW) (CL,CH)- Sample Stem Auger Gravel Clayey Water level Water Level on the (GP,GW) Sand(SC)* at Completion Date Indicated Asphalt Concrete Depth to Caving Boring Paving Paving at Completion —N—Continues *Note: Dual symbols are used to indicate borderline and mixed soil classifications STRENGTH OF COHESIVE SOILS DENSITY OF GRANULAR SOILS Soil Pocket Penetrometer SPT Slows Relative Consistencv Reading, tsf per foot, N Density Very Soft < 0,25 0 to 4 Very Loose Soft 0.25 to 0.50 4 to 10 Loose Firm 0.50 to 1.00 10 to 30 Medium Dense Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 30 to 50 Dense Very Stiff 2.00 to 4.00 > 50 Very Dense Hard > 4.00 DESCRIPTIVE TERMS FOR SOIL Description Criteria Inclusions Stratified Alternating layers of material or color Parting Inclusion< 1/8'thick with layers at least 1/4"thick Seam Inclusion 1/8"to 3'thick Laminated Alternating layers of material or color Layer Inclusion>3"thick with layers at least 1/4'thick Trace < 5%of sample Fissured Breaks along definite planes of fracture Few 5%to 10%of sample with little resistance Some 10%to 25%of sample Slickensided Fracture planes appear polished or Numerous 25%to 50%of sample glossy, sometimes striated Blocky Cohesive soil that can be broken down Soil Moisture into small hard angular lumps Dry No obvious water in sample Calcareous Containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate. (Reactive with HCI) Moist Sample is damp without excess water Ferrous Containing appreciable quantities of Very Moist Sample is damp and water is visible ferrous oxidefiron nodules and/or stains Wet Sample bears free water SOIL GRAIN SIZE Soil Grain Size in Millimeters 152 76.2 19.1 4.76 2.00 0.420 0.074 0.002 Boulders 1 Gravel Sand I Cobbles Sift Clay I I Coarse I Fine Coarse I Medium I Fine I I 6- 3- 3/4" 4 10 40 200 270 U.S.Standard Sieve Size TERRA-MAR FIGURE 8 BORING LOG SYMBOLS AND TERMS FOR ROCK ROCK TYPES Limestone Shale :1 Sandstone Mudstone Weathered Weathered Siltstone Dolomite Limestone Shale Severely Severely ---------- Weathered Weathered Claystone Granite ------------ Limestone Shale ROCK HARDNESS ROCK HARDNESS BY THD CONE Friable Crumbles under hard pressure Penetration Very Soft Dented w/ moderate finger pressure Description per 100 Blows Soft Scratched easily with fingernail Very Soft > 6" Moderately hard Can be scratched easily with knife Soft 5"to 6" but not fingernail Soft to Hard 4"to 5" Hard Can be scratched with knife with Hard 2"to 4" some difficulty and broken with light to moderate hammer blow Hard to Very Hard 1"to 2" Very Hard Cannot be scratched with knife and Very Hard 0"to 1" can be broken by one to several hard hammer blows ,"wool WEATHERING GRADES OF ROCK MASS Slightly Weathered Some discoloration indicates weathering of rock, may be some small decomposed rock pockets, layers and/or seams Weathered Discoloration of majority to all of the rock mass, with trace to some of decomposed rock pockets, layers and/or seams Severely Weathered All of the rock material is discolored and most of the rock mass has decomposed into a soil with the original mass structure still largely intact JOINT DESCRIPTION Spacing Inclination (degrees) Surfaces Very Close <2" Horizontal 0-5 Slickensided Polished Close 2"-12" Shallow 5-35 Smooth Planar Close to Wide 12"-3' Moderate 35-65 Irregular Granular Wide >3' Steep 65-85 Rough Jagged Vertical 85-90 BEDDING THICKNESS Very Thick >4' Thick 2'to 4' Thin 2"to 2' Very Thin 0,5"to 2" Laminated 0.08"to 0.5" Thinly Laminated <0.08" TERRA-MAR FIGURE 9 FREE SWELL TEST RESULTS Project Name: McCart Street Pump Station and GWS Tank Project No.: FE00-084 Location: Fort Worth, Texas Test No. 1 Boring Number B-1 Depth,,ft V-2' Initial Dry Density, pcf 92.7 Initial Moisture Content, % 22.2 Final Moisture Content, % 24.0 Liquid Limit 61 Plasticity Index 42 Initial Penetrometer Reading, tsf 3.0 Final Penetrometer Reading, tsf 3.0 Overburden Swell Pressure, ksf 0.243 Vertical Swell, % J 1.4 TERRA-MAR, INC. FIGURE NO.: 10 I j 0.90 0.86 0.82 — 0.78 i ='- 0.74 ----— —-- --- — - - 0 M - 0.70 v -- - — -- -- 0.62 -- 0.58 0.54 — 0.50 - - - - 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 Load (tso Sample Information Boring No.: B-1 Depth, ft.: 2-3' Material: Dark reddish brown clay Test Results Liquid Limit, %: 61 Intial Moisture Content,.%: 27.0 Plastic Limit, %: 19 Pre-Consolidation Pressure, tsf: 1.74 Dry Unit Weight, pcf: 92.3 Compression Index Cc: 0.293 Initial Void Ratio: 0.8617 Re-Compression Index Cr: .042 TERRA-MAR McCart Pump Station. CONSOLIDATION TEST FIGURE Fort Worth,TX RESULTS 11 Project No.: FE0O-084 ASTM 02435-90 GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION TEST REPORT ASTM D422-63 Project: McCart Street Pump Station and Ground WST Project No.: FE00-084 Fort Worth, Texas U.S.Standard Sieve Opening In U.S Standard Sieve Numbers Hydrometer Inches V N c O O O O nI I N 90 so +I,I 70 i ( N 60 c 50 i CUD 40 , l i l l a 3 1 20 i II 10 0 I 1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 Grain Size-mm Legend Boring No Depth % Gravel % Sand % 4200 LL PI �— B-3 2'-3' 2.7 27.3 70.0 58 36 —�-- B-5 1'-2' 0.0 24.2 75.8 54 33 —O— Legend Boring No Depth Material Description USCS �— B-3 2'-3' Dark Reddish Brown and Brown CLAY CH --o-- B-5 V-2' Dark Reddish Brown and Brown CLAY CH —O— TERRA-MAR, INC. FIGURE NO.: 12 ` McCart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, /A/C. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 Aftts�' March 22,2001 F Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental - Construction Materials Testing APPENDIX A STANDARD FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES y McCart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, /NC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 Aft �� _ March 22,2001 — - Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental ' Construction Materials Testing FIELD INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES The borings for this investigation were staked in the field by a Terra-Mar staff engineer using simple taping procedures from reference points noted on the site plan provided by the client. Ground surface elevations were estimated from topographical maps, when possible. A field log of each boring was recorded during field drilling operations. These field logs and soil classifications were reviewed/verified by a geotechnical engineer in the laboratory through visual classification. Samples were visually classified according to color, texture, predominant material type, consistency and density. Results from the laboratory-testing program along with the visual classification of each soil stratum were used in the determination of the USCS classification for each soil stratum (ASTM D-2487). Finalized boring logs are provided in the report, as noted in the table of contents. Please note that the lines of soil demarcation represent the approximate soil boundary between differing material types, and that the actual transition between the soil strata in the field may be gradual. Truck mounted drilling equipment was used to advance the borings to the completion depths using rotary wash or air drilling, or continuous hollow or solid stem auger procedures, unless otherwise noted. Soil samples were foil wrapped and sealed in plastic bags, for moisture control, and were marked to identify the boring number, sample depth, and job number. Unless notified to the contrary, soil/rock samples/cores will be stored for 90 days, and then discarded. Field soil/rock sampling procedures were performed in accordance with the following standards: Thin Walled "Shelby" Tube Sampling (ASTM D-1587) This sampling method consists of pushing thin walled steel tubes, with an approximate 3 inch outside diameter, into the soil to be sampled using pressure provided hydraulically by the drilling rig, or manually by the field technicians. This sampling method is typically used on cohesive soil samples, and produces samples that are relatively undisturbed and suitable for shear strength testing, consolidation testing, permeability testing, and in-situ density approximation. Sampling by Auger Boring Method "Grab Sample" (ASTM D-1452) This sampling method consists of sampling the soil samples by removing representative soil samples from the continuous flight augers used to drill the boring, or by removing soil samples from the cuttings brought to the surface by the augers. This method provides highly disturbed samples that are appropriate for classification purposes only. TxDOT Cone Penetrometer Test "THD" (EX-132E) The THD Cone Penetrometer Test is a field test established by the Texas Department of Transportation to determine the relative density and load carrying capacity of deep foundation materials (typically rock formations). In this test, a 3 inch diameter penetrometer cone is seated into the strata to be sampled. The cone is then driven into the strata using a 170 pound weight freely falling over a distance of 24 inches. The cone is driven until either the blow count reaches 50, or the penetrometer has been driven 6 inches. The number of blows and the distance driven is then recorded on the field logs. The results of the field test are then used in a table that correlates the load carrying capacity and skin friction of the bearing strata to the results of the field test. v1wen aireec rump arauon ana around Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22.2001 __ Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing Groundwater Observations ' Groundwater observations were made during drilling operations, and when appropriate, after a period of at least 24 hours. i LABORATORY INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES The laboratory testing program was directed primarily toward the evaluation of the physical and engineering characteristics of the underlying site soils. Identification tests were performed to classify the soil samples according to the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D-2487) by a Geotechnical Engineer, unless otherwise noted. The results of this laboratory testing program are shown at the appropriate sample depths on the boring logs, or on the appropriate figures. Unless otherwise noted, laboratory procedures were performed according to the following standard procedures: Moisture Content(ASTM D-22161 Natural moisture contents of the soil samples (based on the dry weight of the soil) were determined for selected samples at selected depths. The results of the test(s) are reported at the appropriate depth(s) on the boring log(s). Atterbera Limits "Liquid and Plastic Limits" (.ASTM D-43181 The Atterberg Limits are given as the particular moisture contents of fine grained soil materials when they meet the requirements of a predefined test. In particular, the Plastic Limit (PL) is given as the approximate moisture content at which the soil material begins to behave more like a plastic material than a semi-solid material. Similarly, the Liquid Limit (LL) is given as the moisture content at which the soil material begins to behave more like a liquid material than a plastic material. The difference of these two test values can then be calculated, and is known as the Plasticity Index (PI). Larger PI values indicate an increased ability of the soil material to remain in a plastic state with changes in the moisture content. The results of the test(s) are reported at the appropriate depth(s) on the boring log(s). Unconfined Compressive Strength of Soil Samples (ASTM D-2166) The unconfined compressive strength testing of the soil sample(s) was performed in order to evaluate the undrained shear strength of the soil material(s). For this test, a sample with a minimum length to diameter ratio of 2:1 was used whenever possible in order to reduce end effects during testing. If the ratio was less than 2, a correction was applied according to standards listed in the ASTM manual. The results of the test(s) are reported at the appropriate depth(s) on the boring log(s). Pocket Penetrometer Shear Strength Evaluation A small hand held penetrometer device was used in the laboratory to evaluate the shear strength of relatively undisturbed cohesive soil samples. In this test, the flat tip of the device is placed on a flat portion of the undisturbed sample. A constant pressure is then applied until the device penetrates the sample a predetermined amount. The approximate shear strength developed is then read on the side of the device in tons per square foot, and is reported at the appropriate depth on the boring log(s). Mccart Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FIE00-084 March 22,2001 ash Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Y Construction Materials Testing Consolidation Test (ASTM D-2435) Consolidation tests were performed on selected samples to determine the tendency of the clayey overburden soils to swell or consolidate over time under an increase or decrease in overburden or surcharge loading conditions. These tests were performed on trimmed samples under specific load increments as noted on the Consolidation Test Results Figure as noted in the Table of Contents. ,%..00l, ma;art Street Pump Station and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 March 22,2001 _ _ = Consulting-Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing i APPENDIX B RECOMMENDED QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEDULE mct,an;wreer rump btation and Ground Water Storage Tank; TERRA-MAR, INC. Fort Worth,Texas FE 00-084 Aftth March 22,2001 —_=_' Consulting—Geotechnical-Environmental Construction Materials Testing i RECOMMENDED QUALITY ASSURANCE SCHEDULE World Minimum Minimum Item Type Testing Frequency On-Site Soil General • Atterberg Limits (ASTM D4318) • 1 per Soil Type • Moisture/Density Relationship • 1 per Soil Type (ASTM D698) Compaction . Field Density Test (ASTM D2922) . 1 per 5,000 sq. ft. per lift (min. 3 per lift), for utility backfill, 1 per 150 linear feet/lift Select Fill General • Atterberg Limits (ASTM D4318) • 1 per 1,000 cu. yd. . Moisture/Density Relationship • 1 per 5,000 cu. yd., per soil type (ASTM D698) Compaction • Field Density Test (ASTM D2922) • 1 per 5,000 sq.ft. per lift(min. 3/lift) Portland Mix Design • Review&Approval w/confirmation • 1 per Mix Design Cement cylinders (ASTM C31, C39) Concrete . Plant& Materials Approval w/ • 1 per Mix Design testing if questionable Fine &Coarse • Sieve Analysis (ASTM C136) • 1 per month Aggregates . Organic Impurities (ASTM C40) • 1 per month • Specific Gravity (ASTM • 1 per month *-,d C 127,C 128) General • Slump Test(ASTM C143) • 5 cylinders per 100 cu.yd. per day Concrete . Compressive Strength (ASTM C39) (2 at 7 days, 2 at 28 days, 1 hold) Placement Crushed General • Atterberg Limits(ASTM D4318) • 1 per 1,000 cu. yd. Limestone Flexible Base • Sieve Analysis (ASTM C136) • 1 per 1,000 cu. yd. . Wet Ball Mill (TEX-116E) • 1 per 1,000 cu. yd. • Moisture/Density Relationship • 1 per 5,000 cu. yd., per soil type (ASTM D698) Compaction • Field Density Test(ASTM D2922) . 1 per 5,000 sq. ft. per lift (min. 3 /lift) Asphaltic Mix Design • Stability(TEX-208F) . 1 per Mix Design Concrete . Plant& Materials Approval w/ • 1 per Mix Design testing if questionable Fine & Coarse • Sieve Analysis (ASTM C136) • 1 per month Aggregates . Organic Impurities (ASTM C40) • 1 per month • Specific Gravity (ASTM • 1 per month C127,C128) General • Field Density Test(ASTM D2922) • 1 per 5,000 sq. ft. per material Asphalt Placement APPENDIX B HSQ TECHNOLOGY McCart Pump Station RTU Price Quotation Letter c3E] � 26227 Research Road sales@hsq.com Hayward, California 94545-3725 http://www.hsq.com TECHNOLOGY Telephone: (510)259-1334 ♦ Facsimile: (510)2594392 -.r Via E-mail Tim.Allcn@fortworthgov.org March 21, 2007 City of Fort Worth Attention: Tim Allen Reference: McCart Pump Station RTU City of Fort Worth, Texas HSQ Quotation 0703-0012-AN-B Gentlemen: HSQ Technology is pleased to offer you a quotation per Specification Section 17510S- PLC- Based Control Systems-Hardware and Contract Drawings that were e-mailed to us by Tim Allen. Included • Supply one (1) new HSQ Model 25X86 RTU with a required UO, radio, backup dial-up modem, power supply, and battery backup all installed in a NEMA 12 stainless steel enclosure • Supply three (3) Local Indicators as shown on the drawings • Displays, reports, and database at Central • Required software for the RTU • Engineering, submittals, testing, and spares as required • On-site testing and startup of RTU • All materials are priced FOB jobsite Excluded • Installation • Antenna mast • Antenna, cable, and cable connectors • Sales tax • Bonds Promote Safety . . . Every Day 1 An Equal Opportunity Employer California Contractor's License 378393 ©©8 TECHNOLOGY Page 2 - March 21, 2007 Re: McCart Pump Station RTU City of Fort Worth,Texas HSQ Quotation 0703-0012-AN-B Our total lump sum price for the above is $49,951.00 and is valid for a period of ninety (90) days. Please note that HSQ will assume that the contractor has completed all installation, and checked out all wiring and equipment before scheduling the startup trip. Additional trips will be invoiced at$1,500.00 per day plus expenses in accordance with our normal Service Pricing Sheet. HSQ needs a minimum of three (3) weeks notice to schedule the startup trip. Please call the undersigned at 800/486-6684 if you have any questions. Sincerely yours, HSQ TECHNOLOGY Alan T. Nelson Estimating Manager ATN:rvm cc: Christopher Harder Christopher.Harder 9FortWorthGov.org City of Fort Worth, Texas Mayor and Council Communication COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 8/28/2007 DATE: Tuesday, August 213, 2007 LOG NAME: 60MCCARTCORRECT REFERENCE NO.: C-22352 SUBJECT: Approve the Correction of M&C C-22303 to Authorize the Execution of a Contract with Archer Western Contractors, Ltd., for the McCart Pump Station and Ground Storage Tank Improvements RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council approve the correction of M&C C-22303 to correct the contractor's name, Archer Western Contractors, Ltd., and therefore to authorize the execution of a contract with Archer Western Contractors, Ltd., in the amount of $5,391,000.00 for the McCart Pump Station and Ground Storage Tank Improvements. DISCUSSION: On August 9 007, (M&C C-22303) the City Council authorized the execution of a contract with Archer es ern Constructors, Ltd., for the installation of a five million gallon storage tank and water booster pump station. After approval of M&C C-22303, staff became aware that Archer Western Constructors, Ltd., legal name for doing business in the State of Texas is Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. As a result, the previous authorization to execute a contract with Archer Western Constructors must be corrected. All other items discussed in M&C C-22303 are correct. FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Finance Director certifies that funds are available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, of the Water Capital Projects Fund. TO Fund/Account/Centers FROM Fund/Account/Centers P264 541200 606160050183 $3,742,950.00 P264 541200 606180050180 $1,648,050.00 Submitted for City Manager's Office by: Marc A. Ott (8476) Originating Department Head: S. Frank Crumb (8207) Additional Information Contact: S. Frank Crumb (8207) Ramsey, Amy From: Ramsey, Amy Sent: Tuesday, August 21, 2007 2:08 PM To: Harder, Christopher; Brown, Maebell Subject: M&C awarded to incorrect entity M&C C-22303 awarded the contact to Archer Western Constructors, Ltd. However,there is no such entity. The correct entity is Archer Western Contractors, Ltd. The bid and all documents reflect the correct name. You need a correcting M&C so council authorizes award to the proper entity. You may have someone retrieve the contracts until the M&C is approved. QJ �wa,. UCC Business Organizations Trademarks Account Help/Fees Briefcase Logout BUSINESS ORGANIZATIONS INQUIRY - VIEW ENTITY Filing Number: 9478606 Entity Type: Foreign For-Profit Corporation Original Date of Filing: March 11, 1993 Entity Status: In existence Formation Date: N/A Tax ID: 13632863182 FEIN: Name: ARCHER-WESTERN CONTRACTORS, LTD. Address: 929 `V ADAMS ST CHICAGO, IL 60607-3021 USA Fictitious Name: N/A Jurisdiction: IL, USA Foreign Formation NIA Date: REGISTERED FILING ASSUMED A_SSOCIATE_D_ AGENT HISTORY NAMES MANAGEMENT NAMES ENTITIES Last Update Name Title Address January 26, 2005 SVEN NYLEN VICE PRESIDENT 1500 NW 62ND ST STE 417 Fort Lauderdale, FL 33309 USA January 26, 2005 DONALD GILLIS VICE PRESIDENT 1765 THE EXCHANGE STE 370 Atlanta, GA 30339 USA January 26, 2005 JOHN SLATTERY SECRETARY 1500 NW 62ND ST STE 417 Fort Lauderdale, FL 33309 USA January 26, 2005 JOHN SLATTERY TREASURER 1500 NW 62ND ST STE 417 Fort Lauderdale, FL 33309 USA January 26, 2005 MATT WALSH PRESIDENT 929 WEST ADAMS STREET Chicago, IL 60607 USA Order Return to Search 8/21/2007 Instructions: To place an order for additional information about a filing press the'Order'button. 8/21/2007 # UCC Business Organizations Trademarks Account Help/Fees Briefcase Logout FIND ENTITY NAME SEARCH This search was performed on with the following search parameter: ENTITY NAME : archer western constructors Filing E Afti Name Name Mark Number Name Entity Type Status Type Status 9478606 ARCHER-WESTERN Foreign For-Profit In existence Legal In use CONTRACTORS, LTD. Corporation * 708255322 WESTERN ARCHES, L.L.C. Domestic Limited Forfeited Legal Inactive Liability Company existence (LLC) * 160868000 ARCHER CHRYSLER-JEEP Domestic For- In existence Legal In use (WEST), INC. Profit Corporation * 47628400 ARCH]-SYSTEMS Domestic For- Forfeited Legal Inactive SOUTHWEST, INC. Profit Corporation existence * 123399000 SOUTHWEST ARCHIVES, Domestic For- Forfeited Legal Inactive CORP. Profit Corporation existence * 138247600 WESTMORELAND Domestic For- Voluntarily Legal Inactive ARCHIVES, INC. Profit Corporation dissolved 13584306 SOUTHWEST AARCHER, Foreign For-Profit In existence Fictitious In use INC. Corporation r 13051358.10 1-- THE FRIENDS OF THE Domestic Voluntarily Legal Inactive NATIONAL ARCHIVES- Nonprofit dissolved SOUTHWEST REGION Corporation 63062900 GOLDEN WEST AIR SHOWS Domestic For- Forfeited Legal Inactive INC. Profit Corporation existence Return to Order New Search Instructions: 0 To view additional information pertaining to a particular filing select the number associated with the name. 0 To place an order for additional information about a filing select the radial button listed under'Mark' that is associated with the entity and press the'Order' button. M&C Request Review Page 1 of 2 City of Fort Worth Employee Intranet www.efwnet.org F ORTWO Ernployee Directory I ACToday « . Departments « Print M&C COUNCIL ACTION: Approved on 8/9/2007 DATE: 8/9/2007 REFERENCE NO.: C-22303 LOG NAME: 60MCCART PS CODE: C TYPE: NON-CONSENT PUBLIC HEARING: NO SUBJECT: Authorize Execution of Contract with Archer Western Constructors, Ltd., for the McCart Pump Station and Ground Storage Tank Improvements RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council authorize the City Manager to execute a contract with Archer Western Constructors, Ltd., in the amount of$5,391,000 for the McCart Pump Station and Ground Storage Tank Improvements. DISCUSSION: In 1989, Camp Dresser and McKee prepared a water master plan which recommended the construction of a ground storage tank and pump station in far south Fort Worth to meet increasing water demands from the rapidly growing south Fort Worth and wholesale customers. On October 10, 2000, (M&C C-18284) City Council authorized an engineering agreement with Montgomery Watson Americas for the design of the McCart Avenue Pump Station and Ground Storage Tank. On March 19, 2002, (M&C C-19013) City Council authorized an engineering agreement with Freese and Nichols for the update to the Fort Worth Water System Master Plan. The Water Master Plan recommended that the McCart Pump Station and Ground Storage Tank be constructed prior to the summer of 2008 in order to meet the Southside pressure plane demands. The scope of work within this project consists of the installation of a 5 million gallon welded steel ground storage tank and a booster pump station with an initial capacity of 15 million gallons per day, expandable to 30 million gallons per day. The project was advertised for Bid in the Commercial Recorder on May 24 and May 31, 2007. On June 21, 2007, the following three bids were received: BIDDER TOTAL BID CONTRACT TIME ARCHER WESTERN CONSTRUCTORS $5,391,000.00 345 CALENDAR DAYS CAJUN CONSTRUCTORS $6,083,000.00 HOLLOMAN CONSTRUCTION $6,614,951.00 In addition to the contract cost, $161,730 is provided for project contingencies and $55,000 is provided for staff support and inspection. This project is located in COUNCIL DISTRICT 6. Archer Western Constructors, Ltd., is in compliance with the City's M/WBE Ordinance by committing to 14 percent M/WBE participation. The City's goal on this project is 13 percent. http://www.cfwnet.org/council_packet/mc_review.asp?ID=8043&councildate=8/9/2007 8/10/2007 - ---y��J ncview Page 2 of 2 FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Finance Director certifies that funds are available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, of the Sewer Capital Projects Fund. TO Fund/Account/Centers FROM Fund/Account/Centers P264 541200 606160050183 $3,742,950.00 P264 541200 606180050180 $1,648,050.00 Submitted for City Manager's Office by: Marc A. Ott (8476) Originating Department Head: S. Frank Crumb (8207) Additional Information Contact: S. Frank Crumb (8207) ATTACHMENTS http://www.cfwnet.org/council_packet/mc_review.asp?ID=8043&councildate=8/9/2007 8/10/2007